iff ^ 




O-, * 0 




- : ./ % 







^^^^^^^^^^ 



3 A, % 



.J % 




* «5 <2o ° 







v - ^ * 0 * ^ 



if 







V *JPfe' °^ Jill - Jl 

V 



r ,*o ^ ^ 











5> ^ 




A 

REPORT 



SECRETARY OF WAR 

OF THE UNITED STATES, 

ON INDIAN AFFAIRS, 
COMPRISING A NARRATIVE OF A TOUR 

PERFORMED 



HV THE SUMMER OF 1820, UNDER A COMMISSION FROM THE PRESIDENT OF 
THE UNITED STATES, FOR THE PURPOSE OF ASCERTAINING, FOR 
THE USE OF THE GOVERNMENT, THE ACTUAL STATE OF 
THE INDIAN TRIBES IN OUR COUNTRY: 

ILLUSTRATED BY A MAP OF THE UNITED STATES; ORNAMENTED BY A 
CORRECT PORTRAIT OF A PAWNEE INDIAN. 



BY THE REV. JEDID1AH MORSE, D. D. 

Late Ministerof the First Congregational Church in Charleston n, near Boston, now resident 

in New-Haven 



NEW-HAVEN: 

Published by Davis & Force, Washington, D. C. ; Cushing & Jewett, Balti- 
more ; W. W. Woodward, and E. Littell, Philadelphia ; Spalding fc Howe, 
and R. N, Henry, New- York ; El & E. Hostord, Albany; Howe & 
Spalding, New-Haven ; G. Goodwfn & Sons, Hudson & Co. O. D Cooke 
& Sons, Hartford ; Richardson & Lord, S. T. Armstrong, Lincoln & Ed- 
munds, Cummings & Hilliard, and G. Clark, Boston. 

PRINTED BY S. CONVERSE. 

1822. ^* 



Ay 



DISTRICT OF CONNECTICUT, ss. 
BE IT REMEMBERED, That on the twenty-third day of 
September, in the forty -seventh year of the Independence of 
the United States of America, Howe & Spalding, of the said 
District, have deposited in this office the title of a Book, the 
right whereof they claim as Proprietors, in the words follow- 
ing, to wit : 

" A Report to the Secretary of War ot the United States on Indian Affairs, 
comprising a narrative of a tour performed in the summer of 1820, under a 
commission from the President of the United States, for the purpose of ascer- 
taining, for the use of the Government, the actual state of the Indian tribes in 
our country. Illustrated by a Map of the United States ; ornamented by a 
correct portrait of a Pawnee Indian. By the Rev. Jedidiah Morse, D. D. late 
minister of the First Congregational church in Charlestown, near Boston, now 
resident in New-Haven," 

In conformity to the Act of the Congress of the United States, entitled, "An 
Act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of Maps, Charts 
and Books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies, during the times 
therein mentioned." 

CHA'S. A. INGERSOLL, 

Clerk of the District of Connecticut. 
A true copy of Record, examined and sealed by me, 
CHA'S. A. INGERSOLL, 

Clerk of the District of Connecticut 




/ 



INDEX. 



4i 



A. 

Absorokas, or Crow Indians, App. 252 
Adams, J. Q. Opinion of on Indian Ti- 
tles, App. 281 

Plea before Supreme Court 

U. S. App. 283 
Adultery, punishment for, App. 99, 135 
Agriculture &c. of Sauk and Foxes, 

App. 126 
Alabama, Indians in, Rep. S3 
Alleghany Reservation, App. 83 
American S W. Fur Company Rep. 

55, App. 7, 30, 39, 40, 43 
Anecdote, Rep. 72, note. 
Annuities, Indian, App. 23, 139 
Arkansaw Territory, description of. 

App. 212 
Arricaras, or Riccaras, App. 252 
Arrapahays, App. 253 
Ard, James, App. 49 
Armstrong, Fort, murder at, Rep. 15 
Astoria, Rep. 38 
Astor, John Jacob, Esq. Rep. 38 
Assiniboin River, Rep. 51 
Aus-kin-naw-wau-wish, Speech of, 

App. 53, 56 
Au-to-ko-ko-ne-be, Chippewa chief, 

interview with, App. 140 

B. 

Barclay, Hon. Anthony, Rep. 16 
Baigne, or Pancake Point, App. 28 
Bad River, App. 29 
Baylies, Mr. extract of a letter from, 

App. 72 
Badger, Rev. Joseph, App. 91 
Beaumont, Dr. Rep. 17 
Bell, Capt. extract from Journal of, 

Rep. 74 note, App. 240, 254 
Bell, Capt. John R. App. 151 
Belle Point, Fort at, App. 254, 355 
Blackburn, Rev. Gideon, App. 158 
Blackfoot Indians, App. 252 
Black Hoof, App. 92 
Boyd, Col. George, Rep. 14 
Bosen, Sock, App. 65 
Boyer, a Wyandot, conversation with, 

App. 16 

Bowyer, Col. Rep. 40, 42, App. 57 
Brainerd, Missionary Establishment at, 

App. 159 to 182 
Brotherton Indians, App. 85, 112 
Brown, Fort, App. 58 
Burial of the dead, App. 137 
Burnt River, App. 30 



C. 

Caddos, A pp. 257 
Catholic Missionaries, App. 144 
Cass, Governor, Rep. 16, App. 42, 43, 
324 

Canal, Erie, App. 62 
Catawbas, Rep. 32 

Cato, an Indian of great wealth, App. 24 
Campagne, Baron de, App. 266 
Calhoun, J. C. circular letter of, App. 

290, 291 
Cherokees, Rep. 33, App. 152 
Population, 152 
Missionary Establishment 

at Spring Place, 153 
Establishments of the Amer- 
ican Board, 159 
School regulations, 160 
Encouraging fruits, 161 
Report to the Secretary of 

War, 162 
Address from Dr. Worces- 
ter to the Education Fam- 
ilies, 164 
Baptist establishment, 166 
Progress of civilization, 

167, 199, 200 
Letter from Charles Hicks 
to the Secretary of War, 
167 

State of the school January, 

1822, 170 
Advances in christianiza- 
tion at Spring Place, 171 
Extracts from laws of the 

Cherokee Nation, 172 
Mr. Hoyt's Rep. 177 
Boundaries and extent of 

Cherokee country, 178 
Encouraging prospects, 179 
Progress of the children, 
304 

Cherokees of the Arkan- 
saw, App. 214 
Education establishment at 

Dwight, 214 
Report of Superintendants, 
215 

Plan of education, 215 
War between Cherokees 

and Osages, 216 
Visit of John Jolly, 231 
Exemplary devo(evvuess,231 
Darkness of Paganism, 231 
Visit of Waterminnee, 232 



4 



INDEX. 



Cherokees, Extract from Capt. Bell's 

Journal, 255 
Chayene Indians, App. 251 
Chiens, or Chayennes, App. 254 
Choctaws, Rep. 33 

Boundaries of their country 

App. 182 
Missionary Establishment 

at Eliot, 183 
Mr. Kingsbury's Reports to 
the Secretary of War, 183 
Property belonging to the 

Establishment, 185 
Capt. Coles' Petition, 186 
Mr. Kingsbury's Report, 
30th January, 1822, 187 
Establishment at Mayhew, 
191 

School at Newell, 194 
Advances of Choctaws ii 

civilization, 197 
Description of Mayhew, 19' 
Sentiments of a Choctaw 
chief on education, 355 
Charge, delivered to Missionaries, App 
357 

Chickasaws, Rep. 33, App. 200 
Chippawas and Ottawas, App. 19, 46, 
131 

Chinpawa Indians, App. 27, 29, 30, 47, 
49, 140 

Chiopawa chiefs, interview with, App. 
44 

Chab-aquiddick Indians, App. 72 
Chicago, App. 108 

Children, ceremony in naming, App. 
135 

Clark, Governor, letter from, App. 107 
Claims of Indians on the United States; 
Rep. 79 

Clark, Rev. Daniel, extract from his 

discourse, Rep. 66, note 
Claus, Hon. William, Rep. 20 
Clinton, Governor, Rep. 16, App. 62 
Comauch Indians, App. 259 
Colony Indian, site for, App. 312 
Cornwall School, Rep. 78, App. 163 

Origin, progress and present 

state of, App. 264 
Object of the school, 264 
English and native names of 

members, 265 
Liberality of Baron de Cam- 

pagne, 266 
Letter from Elias Boudinot to 
do. 267 

" " David Brown to do, 
268 

" " David Brown to J. 

Evarts Esq. 269 
" " Catharine Brown to 

her brother, 270 



Cornwall School, letter from Susannah, 
mother of E. Boudinot, 272 
" « Rev. Mr. Daggett 

to J. Morse, 272 
" " David Brown to the 

President of the U. S. 273 
*» " John Ridge to do. 
275 

" " Israel Fulsom to do. 

276 

Commission of the Author, Rep. 11 
Council BlufTs, Rep. 29, 34, 36,App.3l7 
—323 

Columbia river, Rep. 37 
College, Indian, Rep. 76 
Colonization of the Indians, Rep. 82 
Conclusion, Rep. 93 
Copper rock, App. 29 
Copper, App. 41 , 42 
Connecticut, Indians in, App. 74 
Communication from Gentlemen at 

Green Bay App. 51 
Criminal laws, App. 99 
Crees, Rep. 35, App. 329, 330, 332 
Creeks, Rep. 32, App. 146 
Crooks, Capt. Rep. 17, 37, 38, App. 26 
Creation of man, Indian ideas of, App. 
138 

Cummings, Maj.informationfrom, App. 
140 

Customs, Indian, App. 144 
Cusic, Speech of, App. 5 



D. 

Dalhousie, Governor, Rep. 20 
Dare, Fort, Rep. 51 
Daggett,Rev. Mr. Letter from, App.272 
Detroit, Rep. 14 

Descriptive eloquence, (note,) Rep. 29 
Delawares, App. 90, 110, 111, 112, 113, 

115, 116, 236 
Distrust ot the Indians, Rep. 89 
Dickson, Col. Robert, App. 49 
Distances of places, App. 49 
Diocess of New- York, extract from 

Journal of, App. 79, note. 
Divisions of Indian tribes, App. 97 
Divorce, App. 105 

Doxtator, Mary, Indian woman, App. 

86, 324 

Dogs used for drawing, App. 40 
Doty, Mr. Rep. 55, App. 31 
Drummond's Island, Rep. 44, 53, 54, 

App. 7, 327 
Dwight, Rep. 36, App. 214 



Education Family, station for, Rep. 14, 

15, 26, 29, 39, App. 20, 26, 356 
Education of Indian Females, Rep. 73 
Education Families, improvements in, 
Rep. 87 



INDEX. 



5 



Education Families, New stations for, 
Rep. 90 

Education among Sauks and Foxes, 
App. 133 

Education Establishments among Osa- 
ges and Cherokees, App. 209 

Education Families, description of, Rep. 
78 

" " Openings for, App. 

311 

Eliot, Missionary Establishment at, 
App. 183 

Evarts, J. Esq. extract from communi- 
cation of, App. 178 

F. 

Feasts, App. 136 
Finley, Rev. James B. App. 92 
Fish, Rev. Mr. extract of letter from 

App. 69 
Florida, Indians in, Rep. 33 

Description of, App. 147 
Actual state of Indians in, App 
306 

Number, character, dress, &c. of 
Seminoles, 309 

White population, 310 
Fort Smith, App. 254, 355 
Fort Dare, Rep. 51 
Fond du Lac Indians, App. 37 
Fox Indians, App. 49, 51, 61 , 120, 128 
Future state, Indian Ideas of, App. 138 

G. 

Gambold, Rev. John, App. 155 
Gay Head Indians, App. 71 
General remarks and suggestions, Rep. 
65 

Georgia, Indians in, Rep. 32 
Goodell, Rev. Mr. letter from App. 197 
301 

Government of Sauks, Foxes, &c. App 
132 

Grand River Indians, App. 327 
Great Crossings, echool at, App. 166 
Grace, work of, among Cherokees, 
App. 156 

Great pirit, Indian ideas of, App. 106 
Green Bay Fly, App. 56 note 
Grand Islands, App. 27 
Grand Mariaix Pond, App. 27 
Great Rocks, (Portaile,) App. 27, 42 
Green Bay, Rep. 14, 45, App. 50 

H. 

Harmony, Education Establishment at 

Rep. 36, App. 222 
Halkett, L. Esq. Rep. 50, note. 
Hawkins, Col. App. 146 
Harmon, Daniel W. Rep. 34 

Extract from Journal of, App. 
328 



Harmon, Credulity of Indians, 328 

Character and conduct of Tra- 
ders, 328 
Indian drunken scene, 329 
Indian mode of taking a sweat, 
330 

Crees and Assiniboins ; their 

customs, &c. 330 
Indian hospitality, 331 
Indian crime, 331 
Indian worship, 332 
Grasshoppers, 333 
Indian inhumanity, 333 
Indian customs, 333 
Rainy Lake, 334 
Sicaunies, 334—336 
Bear's Lake, 335 
McLeod's Lake Fort, 335 
Stuart's Lake, 336 
Frazer's Lake, 337 
Nate-ote-tains, 337 
New Caledonia, 341 
Indians E. Rocky Mountains 

and N. Missouries, 347 
Mode of cooking, 348 
Religion, 351 
General remarks, 353 
Hellwits Indians, Rep. 38 
Herring Pond Indians at, App. 71 
Henry's Mr. account of medicine men, 
App. 100 

Hendrick, Capt. App. 108, 111, 115, 
116 

Historical facts relating to Northern 

tribes, App. 60 
Hicks, Charles, letter from, App. 167 

Character of, App. 180 
Hicks, Elijah, App. 199 
Hoge Rev. Mr. Rep. 27 
Holliday, interview with, App. 26 
Hoge, Rev. James, letter from, App. 94 
Hodgson, Adam Esq. visit to Brainerd 
and Eliot, App. 294 
Reflections, 294 
Do. on the state and prospects 
of Indians, 295 
Hudson Bay Company, Rep. 52 
Huron River, App. 28 
Hunting of Sauks and Foxes, and its 

fruits, App. 125 
Hyde, Jabez B. letter from, App. 3, 82 



I. 

Intermarriages between Indians and 

white people, Rep. 73 
Increase of Indians within the U. S. 

Rep. 65 

Indiana and Illinois, Indians in, Rep. 
29, App. 108 

Indian Trade, Rep.39, plan for conduct- 
ing, Rep. 92 

Indian civilization, App. 118 



INDEX. 



Ioways, App. 204 

Iroquois, App. 60 

Iron River, App. 29, 38 

Irwin, Maj. Rep. 43, App. 46, 57 

J. 

Jacobs, John, Rep. 50, 52, 53 
Jenny and her son Tom, story of App 
260 

Johnson, Judge, Rep. 56 
Johnston's, John Esq. account of Indians 
in Ohio, App. 90 

K. 

Kaninavisch Indians, App. 253 
Kansas Indians, App. 203, 237 
Kaskayas, or Bad Hearts, App. 253 
Keesh-kah-ko-ne, Bears Den, interview 

with App. 21 
Kentucky, Rep. 30 

Kiawas, or W etapahato Indians, App. 
253 

Kickapoos, App. 120, 127, 128 
Kingsbury's, Rev. Mr. Reports to Sec- 
retary of War, App. 183 



L'Abre Croche, Rep. 14, Indians of, 

App. 23, 25 
Lake Superior, description of the S, 

shore of, App. 26 
Lake du Flambeau, App. 39 
Language of Sauks, App. 128 
Languages, Indian, App. 356 
La Train River, App. 28 
Leech Lake Indians App. 32, 33 
Letter, Introductory, Rep. 9 

M. 

Mackinaw, Rep. 14, App. 6 
Macomb, Maj. Gen. Rep. 16 
Maitland, Sir Peregrine, Rep. 19 
Marston, Maj. Rep. 56, App. 120 
Martin Islands, App. 8 
Mau-cau-tau-bee, speech of, 55 
Maine, Indians in, App. 64 

Probable number in 1616, App. 
67 

Massachusetts, Indians in, App. 68 
Marshpee Indians, App. 70 
Martha's Vineyard, Indians on App. 72 
Marriage, App. 104, 134 
Manners and customs of Sauks, Foxes 

fee. App. 130, 131 
Mandan Indians, App. 145, 252 
Mayhew, Education Establishment at 

App. 191 

McCoy, Rev. Isaac, information from, 

App. 119 
Medicine men, App. 100 
Meurain, Rev. Father, App. 144 



Menominees, Rep. 15, 44, App. 47, 51. 
57, 61 

Interview with chiefs of, 
App. 53 
Menomine River, Rep. 45 
Meuron, Fort, Rep. 52 
Medicine influence, App. 24 
Messasaugua, Indians, App. 60, 327 
Miscellaneous articles and omissions, 
App. 323 

Michigan and N. W. Territories, In- 
dians in, Rep. 28 
Description of, App. 14 
Mississippi, Indians in, Rep. 33 
Military Post, purchase of Chippawas 

for, App. 8 
Mississippi River, Sources of, App. 43 
Miami Reservations, App. 96 
Miamies, App. 109, 31 1 
Mitchell, David B. Esq. App. 146 
Milledoler, Rev. Dr. extract of a letter 

from, App. 209 
Miller's, Governor, description of Ar- 

kansaw Territory, App. 211 
Missouri delegation, talk with Chiefs of, 

App. 249 
Minetaries, App. 252 
Moheakunnuks, App. 110, 111 
Morse, Rev. A. letter from, App. 316 
Moor's Indian School, App. 399 
Morrison and Holliday, interview with 

App. 26 
Montreal river, App. 29, 38 
Mohegans, App. 74 
Murder, App. 99 
Munsees, App. Ill, 112 

N. 

Names, numbers, and places of resi- 
dence of Indian Tribes in the U. S. 
Rep. 22 

Narrative, Rep. 13 

Narragansetts, App. 73 

New-England, Indians in, Rep. 23 

New-York, Indians in, Rep. 24 

Newell, School at, App. 194 

New-Caledonia, App. 341 

Nottoways, Rep. 31 

O. 

Objections to civilizing the Indians, 

stated and answered, Rep. 81 
Obligations of the Government, Rep. 84 
Ohio, Indians in, Rep. 27, App. 90 
O'Maha Chief, speech of, App.246 
O'Maha partizan, do. App. 247 
O'Mahas, App. 251 
Onondagoes, visit to, App. 323 
Ontonagan river, App. 29 
Oneidas, App. 86 
Onondagas and Senecas, App. 87 



INDEX. 



7 



Osages, Rep. 36, App. 203 

Education establishments, App.209 
Description of Arkansaw Territo 

ry, App. 211 
Arkansaw river, 212 
Osage village and town, 213 
War between Cherokees and Osa 

ges,216 

Missionary station at Union, 217 
Tally, second Osage chief, 21 8 
Visit to the Indian village, 218 
Report to Secretary ofWar,219 
Mr. Chapman's Journal, 220 
Visit of the principal chief, 221 
Letter from Dr. Palmer, 226 
" " Rev. Mr. Vaill, 228 
" " Mr. Redfield, 228 
" " Superintendant, 230 
Supply of mineral coal, 230 
Letter from W. C. Requa, 233 
Moral darkness of the Osages, 233 
Education Establishment at Har- 
mony, 222 
Letter from Mr. Newton, 222 
" " Mr. Sprague, 223 
«* " Mr. Dodge, 223 
" " Rev. Mr. Pixley, 224 
" " Miss Comstock, 226 
" " Mr. Sprague, 228 
" " Mrs. Jones, 229 
" " Mr. Jones, 229 
" " Dr. Belcher, 230 
" " Superintendant, 234 
Journal of the Mission, 235 
Ottoes and Missouries, App. 251 
Ottawas, App. 93, 128, 140, 311, 324 
Ottoe Partizan, speech of, App. 246 
Ouisconsin river, App. 50 

P. 

Parrish, J. Esq. Rep. 13, App. 76 
Pacific Ocean, Rep. 37 
PassamaquoddieG, App. 65 
Paganism sinking among the Six Na- 
tions, App. 84 
Pawnees, App. 237 
Pawnees, Grand, App. 237 
Pawnee Republics, App. 238 
Pawnee Loups, App. 238 
Pawnee chief, speech of, App. 242 
Pawnee Brave, anecdote of, App. 247 
Pancas, App. 251 

Pennsylvania, Indians in, Rep. 30 
Pembanon, Rep. 51 
Persons and character of Indians, Rep. 
69 

Peron, M. French naturalist, Rep. 69, 
note. 

Penobscots, App. 65 
Pequots, App. 75 
Peace, App. 98 

Peniere, J. A. Esq. App. 147, 310 



Phrases, Indian, App. 256 
Picolata, App. 151 

Plan for civilizing the Indians, Rep. 82 
Piatt, Judge, Rep. 16 
Porter, Maj. Gen. P. B. Rep. 16 
Pontiac, Rep. 44 
Pollard, Capt. speech of, App. 4 
Porcupine Mountains, App. 29 
Pottawattamies, App. 120, 128, 131, 

135, 140,311 
Polygamy, Rep. 73 
Prairie du Chien,Rep. 14, App. 316 
Presque Isle River, App. 29 

Q. 

Quapaws, App. 236 
Quewionone, or Keweena river, App. 
28,41 

R. 

Rabun, Governor, App. 166 
Rapid Indians, App. 332 
Reaume, Judge, App. 57 
Red River, Rep. 51. 
Regulations of schools at Brainerd,App. 
160 

Red Jacket, speech of, App. 5 
Religion, App. 97, 135 
Reichard, Father, App. 25, 145 
Remarks and Suggestions, Rep. 60 
Remarks, Preliminary, Rep. 21 
Requa, W. C. letter from, App. 233 
Revolution, in operation among the In- 
dians, R,ep. 84 
Rhode-Island, Indians in, App. 73 
Richardville, Jean Baptiste, Rep. 27 v 
App. 96 

Ridge, Maj. a Cherokee, App. 156, 161 
Rice country, App. 30 
Rocky Mountains, Rep. 37 
Rock River country, App. 59 
Ross, John, Letter from, App. 399 

S. 

Saut of St. Mary's, Rep. 14, 52, App. 8. 
Sandy Point, App. 29 
Sandy Lake, App. 30 

" Indians, App. 33, 35 
Sauks, App. 49, 51, 120, 128 
Sa-que-tock, conversation with, App. 
56 

Sacrifices and Thanksgiving, App. 105 
Sauk and Fox Chiefs, interview of 

Major Marston with, App. 121 
do. do. Nation, history of, App. 123 
Saganau Bay, App. 325 
St. Louis River, App. 30 
St. Helena Island, App. 60 
St. Johns Indians, App. 64 
St. Johns River, App. 147 
St. Peters, military station, App. 317 
St. Clair, Lake, App. 325 
Schoolcraft, Mr. extract from communi- 



8 



INDEX. 



cation of, App. 41 
Schmidt, Rev. John Renatus, App. 158 
Schools, amount of Fund allowed to 

each, App. 293 
Serjeant, Rev. Mr. Rep. 27, App. 80, 86, 

108, 109, 114, 116, 118 
Seminole Indians, Rep. 33, App. 309 
Selkirk, Lord, Rep. 50 
Senecas, App. 84, 93, 94 
Shoshonee, or Snake Indians, Rep. 34, 

note 

Shawaneese, App, 92, 97, 109, 235 
Six Nations, Rep. 13, 24, App. 76, 327 
" " interview with council of, App. 
3, 79 

Sibley, G. Esq. extract of a letter from, 

Rep. 49, App. 203 
Silver and Copper mines, App. 29 
Sioux, App. 49 

Sioux of the Missouri, App. 251 
Smith, Col. J. Rep. 14 
Small-pox, Rep. 39, 9 1 , App. 24, 25, 257, 
259 

Smith, Jacob, App. 1 9 
Snake, blowing, of Lake Erie, App. 354 
SouthiCarolina, Indians in, Rep. 31 
Society, for promoting welfare of In- 
dians, expediency of forming, Rep.75 
" " Constitution of, App. 284. 
« Officers of, 288 
Speech to the Chiefs of the Six Nations, 
App. 1 

Speech to the OttawasatL'AbreCroche, 

App. 9 
Spring-Place, App. 153 
Stuart, Charles, Esq. Rep. 16 
Stuart, Mr. Rep. 17, 37, App. 26 
Strachan, Hon. and Rev. Dr. Rep. 20 
State and Territories west of the Missis- 
sippi, Rep, 34 
Stockbridge Indians, App. 85, 110, 112, 

113,117,312 
Staughton, Rev. Dr. letter to the Secre- 
v tary of War, App. 166 
£taitans, or Kite Indians, App. 253 
Statistical Tables, App. 361 to 397 
Stewart, Rev. Chas. letter fr. App. 326 
Supreme Court, U. S. opinion on In- 
dian Titles, Rep. 68 
T. 

Tennessee, Indians in, Rep. 33 

Tecumseh, App. 18, note. 

Thaxter, Rev. Mr. extract of a letter 

from, App. 71 
Title, Indian, extinction of, to state of 

Missouri, &c. App. 208 
Titles, Indian, nature of, Rep. 67 

Opinion of an eminent lawyer on, 

App. 279 
Vattel's opinion on, 281 
J. Q.Adams, do. 281 
J. Q. Adams', plea before S. Court 
U. S. 283 



Decision S. Court on the subject. 
283 

Tour into Canada, Rep. 19 

Tonnawanta, Seneca village, App. 82 

Tribes N. of the Missouri, and W. of the 
Mississippi rivers, Rep. 34 

Tribes between the Missouri and Red 
rivers, W. Mississippi and E. Rocky 
Mountains, Rep. 35 

Tribes in Louisiana and others be- 
tween Red river and Rio del Norte, 
Rep. 36, App. 256 

Tribes in N. Carolina in 1708, App. 
145 

Tribes beyond the Rocky Mountains, 
Rep. 37 

Trimble, Col. Rep. 36, App. 256 

Troy Indians, App. 72 

Translation 19th Psalm into Muh-he- 

con-nuk, App. 359 
Turner, Edie, Rep. 31 
Ty-ee-ma, second chief of Fox nation, 

App. 129 

U. 

Union, Education Establishment at, 
Rep. 36, App. 217 

Union of New- York and United For- 
eign Missionary Society, App. 89 

Upper Red Cedar Lake, App. 43 
V. 

Van Rensselaer, Gen. S. Rep. 16 
Varnum, Mr. Rep. 46 
Vattel's opinion on Indian Titles, App. 
281 

Villages of Sauks and Foxes, App. 124 
Virginia, Indians in, Rep. 31 
Visger, Col. App. 16, 17 
W. 

Wallaumut River, Rep. 39 
Watson, Elkanah, Esq. App. 62 
War, App. 98 
War Physic, App. 100 
Ward, Rev. Mr. speech of, App.[297 
Welsh Indians, App. 145 
Winnebagoes, Rep. 15, 44, App. 48, 58 
Williams, Eleazer, Rep. 25, App. 79* 
note. 

Winnipec Lake, Rep. 51, 52, 53 

William, Fort, Rep. 52 

Wild rice, App. 15, 35, 52 

Mode of curing it, App. 36 

Do. of preparing it for use, App.47 

Witchcraft, faith of Wyandots in, App. 
18 

Williams, John, Esq. App. 21 
Williamson, Hon. Wm. D. App. 66 
Woodbridge, Lieut. Gov. Rep. 16 
Wool, Col. Rep. 17 

Worcester's, Rev. Dr. address to Edu- 
cation Families, App. 164 
Wyandots, App. 16,91, 94 
Y. 

Young, James, Letter from, App. 87 



INTRODUCTORY LETTER, 



New-Haven, June 6, 1322. 

Sir, 

In the last and preceding winters, I had the honor of pre- 
senting to the President of the United States, through your 
hands, a Report, in part, of the results of my several visits 
among the Indian Tribes of our country, and of my inquiries 
concerning their past history and present actual state. This 
Report, in compliance with a Resolution of Congress, has 
been submitted to that honorable body, and, at my request, 
returned for the purpose of completing, and publishing it, 
under my own inspection. After some unexpected, but un- 
avoidable delays, I now, with much diffidence, and under a 
deep sense of responsibility, present it to the public, as com- 
plete in matter and form, as my means, my time, and my 
health, and the nature of the work itself will admit. If it 
shall, in any measure, meet the feelings and expectations of 
those who are interested and engaged in promoting the wel- 
fare of Indians, prove instrumental in awakening the atten- 
tion of other to the state of this neglected and oppressed 
people, and of laying foundations for their future civil, so- 
cial, and religious improvement and happiness, I shall not 
regret my arduous and long continued labors, nor the con- 
siderable sacrifices, I have made at my advanced age, of 
time, of property, and of domestic comforts, in obtaining 
and preparing for use, the facts and information comprised in 
this Report. These facts, with the remarks, and plans of 
improvement, which, on much reflection, they have sug- 
gested to my own mind, I now respectfully submit to the 
candor and consideration of the President and Congress ; 
to the various benevolent Institutions, engaged in imparting 

2 



10 



INTRODUCTORY LETTER, 



the blessings of civilization and Christianity, to these un- 
tutored heathen tribes, and to the people generally, in 
this favored country. 

With high consideration and respect, 

I am, sir, your obedient servant, 

JEDIDIAH MORSE, 

Hon. John C. Calhoun, 
Secretary of War* 



REPORT 

TO THE 

HONOURABLE SECRETARY OF WAR, 



COMMISSION. 

Sir, 

On the 7th February last, I had the honour of receiving from 
your hand a commission, of which the following is a copy.* 

Department of War, 1th February, 1820. 

Sir, 

I have laid before the President your proposition, to make a 
visit of observation and inspection to the various Indian Tribes in 
our immediate neighbourhood, in order to acquire a more accurate 
knowledge of their actual condition, and to devise the most suita- 
ble plan to advance their civilization and happiness. The Presi- 
dent approves of the proposed arrangement, and has directed me 
to allow you the sum of five hundred dollars towards the expense 
of your contemplated journey ; and he further authorizes me to 
state to you, that should your actual expense exceed that sum, 
that the excess will be allowed you, provided the state of the ap- 
propriation for the Indian Department will, at the end of the year, 
justify the allowance. 

It is desirable that you should make your visit to the Northern 
Tribes the next spring and summer, and to the Southern, the next 
autumn and winter, as it is the wish of the Department to have 
your report as early as practicable, in order to avail itself of it in 
the future application of the fund for the civilization of the Indians. 

* It is proper here to note, that the author was, at this time, acting under 
commissions from the Hon. and Rev. Society in Scotland for propagating 
Christian Knowledge, and the Northern Missionary Society in the State of 
New- York, for the same purposes, as those expressed in this commission from 
the President. The prosecution of the objects of these two commissions, led 
to the reception of that under which he is now acting, in behalf of the Gov- 
ernment, 



12 REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



I enclose a general letter of introduction to the superintendents 
and agents for Indian affairs, with a list of their names and residences, 
who will afford you all the information and facilities in their power. 

Your attention will be directed to ascertain the actual condition 
of the various tribes, which you may visit, in a religious, moral, 
and political point of view, and your report to the Department, 
which you will make, at such times as will be convenient, will 
comprehend all such facts, with your reflections on them, as will 
go to illustrate this interesting subject. You will particularly as- 
certain, as far as practicable, the number of the various tribes 
which you may visit, and those adjacent ; the extent of territory, 
with the nature of the soil, and climate of the country occupied 
by them; their mode of life, customs, laws and political institu- 
tions; and the character and disposition of their most influential 
men. You will also particularly report on the number of schools, 
their position, the number and character of the teachers, the num- 
ber of scholars of each sex, the plan of education, with the degree 
of success which appears to attend the respective schools, and the 
disposition which appears to exist in the tribes, and with their chief 
men, to promote among them education and civilization. You 
will also report your opinion as to the improvements which may 
be made, and the new establishments, to promote the object of the 
government in civilizing the Indians, which can be advantageously 
formed. 

The moral condition of the Indians will necessarily be very de- 
pendent on the character of the trade with them, and a subject so 
important will, of course, claim your attention. You will report 
such facts, as may come within your knowledge, as will go to show 
the state of the trade with them, and the character of the traders, 
and will suggest such improvements in the present system of In- 
dian trade, as in your opinion will render it better calculated to 
secure peace between them and us, and will contribute more effi- 
ciently to advance their moral condition. 

You are so fully apprized of the views of the President in your 
intended visit to the Indian Tribes, that a farther enumeration of 
the objects, which are thought interesting, is deemed unnecessa- 
ry ; satisfied, as I am, that your zeal and intelligence will permit 
nothing to escape your observation, which may be useful to be 
known to the government. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



13 



After you have collected your materials, you will digest the 
whole into one body, and present it in such form, and accompany 
it with such reflections and suggestions, as you may deem necessa- 
ry to accomplish the interesting objects, which it is intended to 
promote by your tour. 

I have the honour to be, 

Your obedient Servant, 
Signed, J. C. CALHOUN. 

Rev. J. Morse, D. D. now in Washington. 

— 

NARRATIVE. 

In fulfilment of the foregoing commission, I left New-Haven on 
the 10th of May 1820, with my youngest son, Mr. Richard C, Morse, 
for my companion, and travelled to the north-west, as fir as Green 
Bay, in the N. W. Territory ; a distance, the way we travelled, 
of 1500 miles. We passed in Steam-Boats to New- York and Alba- 
ny ; thence to Utica in the stage ; to Montezuma, ninety-six miles, 
on the new Canal ; thence to Buffalo by stage ; thence across Lake 
Erie to Detroit, and thence to Mackinaw, in the Steam-Boat Walk-in- 
the-water ; thence to L'Arbre Croche, thirty-six miles, in birch ca- 
noes; thence to Green Bay, in the U. S. Cutter Dallas, Capt. Knapp ; 
and returned home to New-Haven on nearly the same route, where 
we arrived on the 30th of August, after an absence of nearly four 
months. To the Great Preserver of men, we would devoutly ren- 
der the tribute of praise due to Kim, for his goodness manifested 
in our preservation and prosperity. 

In New-York, we remained four days, making preparations for 
the journey ; in Albany two days, for the same purpose ; in Ca- 
nandaigua one day, where I had an interview with J. Parrish, Esq. 
Indian agent. A council of the Six Nations had been appointed the 
1st of June, which I was expected to attend. As, however, the 
Steam-Boat for Detroit was to depart the 3 1st May, and the omis- 
sion to take that opportunity, would delay us a fortnight, deran- 
ging all my plans for the west, I left a hasty speech with the Agent, 
and Rev. Mr. Hyde, to be communicated to the Council,* and em- 
barked in the Steam-Boat. 

* Appendix A. 



14 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



At Detroit we spent twelve days. Here is concentered a variety 
and abundance of valuable information concerning the Indians, out 
of which I endeavoured to collect whatever related to the various 
topics specified in my commission. 

At Mackinaw, at the military establishment of that Island, we 
spent sixteen days : from the 17th of June, to the 3d of July, in 
the family of the Commandant of this post, Capt. Pierce, where 
we received the kindest attention. Probably there is no situation 
of more importance to the government of the United States, in pro- 
moting the civilization of the Indians, than Mackinaw.* 

The contemplated removal of this Military Post, or the princi- 
pal part of the establishment, to the Saut of St. Mary's, near Lake 
Superior, to prepare the way for which a purchase has been made 
of a proper site for such an establishment,! will furnish another 
very advantageous station for planting an Education Family, whose 
influence, in connexion with that of Mackinaw, through the medi- 
um of the thousands of Indians, and that of the Traders, who annu- 
ally resort to these stations, may be extended over the whole of 
the wide territories, bordering on the largest of our Lakes. 

At L'Arbre Croche, to which place we were accompanied by 
Col. George Boyd, the Indian agent at Mackinaw, with his inter- 
preter, Mr. Graverod, we spent a day and a night, in which time 
Col. Boyd held a Treaty in behalf of the Government of the United 
States, with the Chiefs of that part of the Ottawa Indians, who re- 
side here, for the purchase of the Martin Islands, J which are in 
the vicinity of Mackinaw. Afterwards I held a conference with 
them on the subjects of my mission. § 

At Green Bay we remained fifteen days, from the 7th, to the 
23d of July, in the hospitable family of Col. J. Smith, Commandant 
at the military post in this place. Green Bay may vie with Mack- 
inaw in its importance, as a place adapted to carry into effect the 
benevolent plans of the Government in reference to the Indians. 
This place, and Prairie du Chien, will probably be the future cap- 
itals of the N. W. Territory, which is now without any white pop- 
ulation, except the garrisons of the U. States, and a few fami- 
lies of mingled French and Indian blood, settled around them. 
This, therefore, is a country well adapted for the developement 



* Appendix B. 



t Appendix C. £ Appendix D. 



$ Appendix E, 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 1 5 



of a project to be submitted in its place in this Report. An Edu- 
cation Family, in connexion with the military posts, at each of these 
two stations, would have a commanding influence on many popu- 
lous and powerful Indian Tribes, whose influence again would be 
great, if not controlling, over other large tribes inhabiting along 
the northern border of the United States, westward, even to the 
Pacific Ocean. The information which was collected at Green 
Bay, and the other places above mentioned, will be detailed in the 
Appendix to this Report.* 

We found the Winebagoes and Menominees, who live on Win- 
ebago Lake, Fox River, and near Green Bay, in a state of consid- 
erable agitation ; the former in consequence of the recent murder 
of two of our men, at Fort Armstrong, by two of their young war- 
riors ; the latter, on account of an unauthorized treaty, professed- 
ly in behalf of the Government of the United States, which the In- 
dian agent had just concluded with the Menominees, for the pur- 
chase of a large tract of their most valued land, on both sides of 
Fox River.f Nearly all the real, acknowledged, chiefs of the 
nation were strongly opposed to the sale of this land, which they 
very justly considered, as the most valuable part of their territory. 
Divisions and contentions immediately succeeded this sale, be- 
tween those who signed, and those who were opposed to the trea- 
ty, one immediate consequence of which was, the murder, while 
we were at Green Bay, of one of the signers of the treaty. Hap- 
pily, and for the honor of the Government, and for the union and 
peace of this tribe, this treaty, after a statement of the facts in the 
case to the President, was not submitted by him to the Senate, 
and has not been ratified. The joy expressed by these poor In- 
dians, on receiving intelligence that this treaty was not to go into 
effect, was correspondent to the extreme grief and depression, 
which they had previously felt.f 

From all the officers at the several military posts, Superinten- 
dants of Indian affairs, Indian agents, Factors, and their interpret- 
ers, and the Missionaries and teachers among the tribes we visit- 
ed ; from the Clergy and respectable officers of Government and 
citizens, in the places in which lay our rout and principal business. 



* Appendix F. t Appendix G. X Appendix H, 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



we received every desirable civility, kindness and prompt assist- 
ance in accomplishing the objects of the Government. The In- 
dians, also, treated us, without a single exception, with much re- 
spect and attention, and listened, with their usual politeness, to my 
communications, as the representative of their great father, the 
President. Were it not that they are too numerous to be recited, 
and that it would be invidious to omit any, it would be gratifying to 
our feelings, to give the names of those who, for the government's 
sake, from regard to the cause in which we were embarked, as 
well as for our own sakes, shewed us this respect and kindness. 

It is a circumstance of regret, that Governor Cass, Superintend 
dant of Indians in the Michigan Territory, from whom I had expec- 
ted to receive much assistance and information, had, just before 
our arrival at Detroit, departed on his N. W. Expedition. The 
disappointment, however, was rendered as little inconvenient to us 
as possible, by the politeness and ready assistance of Lieut. Gov. 
Woodbridge, Major General Macomb, and many other respecta- 
ble gentlemen of this city. 

We were favored on our way with the company of gentlemen 
of high consideration and intelligence, from whom was derived, not 
only the usual social gratifications, but much information relative 
to the object of my mission. We were so fortunate as to be on 
our way, when Governor Clinton, General S. Van Rensselaer, 
and other gentlemen, Commissioners, were going to visit the 
Grand Erie Canal * and enjoyed their company for three or four 
days, during our ride from Albany to Utica, and on the Canal, from 
Utica to Montezuma — Judge Platt, also, was our fellow passen- 
ger to Utica, — gentlemen, than whom none could do more, or could 
be more ready to do what they were able, to promote the views 
of the Government ; particularly in regard to the remnants of the 
Six Nations residing in the State of New-York. 

In crossing Lake Erie, among other respectable passengers, we 
were gratified in finding the commissioners for settling the North- 
ern boundary of the U. States ; Maj. Gen. Peter B. Porter, and 
the Hon. Anthony Barclay, and the gentlemen associated with 
them; also Charles Stuart, Esq. of Maiden, Upper Canada, 
who took a deep interest in the objects of my mission, and mani- 



* Appendix L 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



17 



fested an ardent desire that the British Government would co-op- 
erate with our own, in some general plan, that might be formed 
for the benefit of the Indians within the jurisdiction of both Gov- 
ernments. On this subject, of much importance, as will be shown 
hereafter, I conversed, at Detroit and Mackinaw, with several 
intelligent gentlemen, British subjects, who coincided with Mr. 
Stuart in their feelings and opinions. These conversations sug- 
gested the idea of the visit to Canada, which was made in the sum- 
mer of 1821. 

In the feeble state of my health, I felt it to be a peculiar smile 
of Providence, to be favoured, as we were, from Canandaigua to 
Mackinaw, and during our stay at the latter place with the com- 
pany of Dr. Beaumont, Post Surgeon of the 3d Regiment of the 
U. S. Army, a gentleman of much skill in his profession, and of 
most amiable and kind dispositions. To him, by means of his med- 
ical prescriptions and attentions, I feel indebted, under Provi- 
dence, for the degree of health, which enabled me to fulfil my du- 
ties to the Government, probably even for my life. 

On our passage from Detroit to Mackinaw, we had the pleasure 
of the company of Gen. Macomb, Col. Wool, (who, in his office 
of Inspector General, for which he seemed peculiarly well fitted, 
was on his rout to visit and inspect the northern military posts) 
Capt. Crooks, and Mr. Stewart, and many other gentlemen of 
respectability. The two gentlemen last named, are intelligent 
members of the American S. W. Fur Company, conversant with 
Indians, and had both of them visited Columbia river, and travel- 
led overland, one of them twice, through the wide region inhab- 
ited by the Aborigines on both sides of the Rocky Mountains, and 
on the head waters of the rivers, which pass into the Missouri, 
and of those which pass directly into the Mississippi. Probably 
no men have had opportunity to acquire so extensive and accurate 
a knowledge of this terra incognita of our country, as these two 
gentlemen ; and what they had acquired, that was valuable to my 
object, they have communicated with great readiness and polite- 
ness, and also made me acquainted with several of their most intel- 
ligent agents, who had resided a number of winters among the in- 
terior tribes. From these sources, beside much information of 
other kinds, I received for my statistical table, the names, num~ 



18 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



bers, and places of residence, of many tribes, and of not a few, 
who had never before been visited by white people, and whose 
names, even, were not before known to us. 

We endeavoured to be useful on our way, when there was op- 
portunity, without injury to the main object of my mission, by 
preaching to the troops of the U. States, at the several military 
posts which we visited, and at other destitute places, administering 
the ordinances of religion, and dispensing moral and religious in- 
struction by the distribution of bibles and tracts, establishing Sab- 
bath and other schools, Bible and Tract Societies, and la}dng foun- 
dations for a stated ministry of the Gospel, and the permanent sup- 
port of schools for the education of the rising generation. Our 
efforts of this kind, I have reason to hope, have been crowned 
with the blessing of God, and will issue, at no distant period, in 
measures beneficial to many of the destitute, who otherwise would 
have been left to grow up in ignorance and vice. 

I considered improvements of this kind, in these destitute pla- 
ces, as having an important bearing and influence on the benevo- 
lent project of the Government, in regard to the Indians ; whose 
intercourse with these military posts, and with the inhabitants of 
these villages, is frequent and extensive. In these circumstances, 
good examples in the soldiers and citizens will be of much advan- 
tage to their Indian visitants. To make these soldiers and citizens 
good, of course, is doing good to the Indians. These observations 
apply with peculiar force to the inhabitants of Mackinaw and Green 
Bay, which places are regularly frequented by large numbers of 
the Indians, and in these places the establishments mentioned above 
were made. 

I add, that the season was remarkably fine. We suffered 
no hindrance in our journey from unfavorable weather or any 
disaster. By the aid which I received, under a kind Providence, 
though my health was extremely feeble for a tour so extensive 
and of so much fatigue and responsibility, I was enabled to collect 
much information on the several topics specified in my commis- 
sion. This will be found in as much order, as the nature of the 
several topics will admit, in the Appendix to this Report. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



11? 



TOUR INTO CANADA. 

Conceiving that it was within the spirit and meaning of my com- 
mission, and that it might, in various ways, aid essentially the accom- 
plishment of the grand object of the Government in respect to the 
Indians, I left home on the 4th of July 1821, with a view to visit 
both the Canadas, and to ascertain the feelings and views of the 
Governors and principal men in those provinces, on the subject of 
the civilization and moral and religious improvement of the In- 
dians, within their respective jurisdictions, and whether their co- 
operation, in such manner as they should deem proper, might 
be expected.* I proceeded byway of Buffalo, Niagara Falls and 
Town, to York, the seat of the government of Upper Canada, 
where I arrived the 3d of August ; and the same day had a very 
full and satisfactory conversation with His Excellency, Sir Pere- 
grine Maitland, on the subject of my visit, the result of which 
will be found in the following letter, which I had the honor to ad- 
dress to you from Niagara. 

Niagara, August 5th, 1821. 

Dear Sir, 

I have just returned to this place from a visit to His Excellen- 
cy Peregrine Maitland, Governor of Upper Canada, at York. 
He received me with much civility, in a manner respectful to the 
Government under whose commission I had been acting; heard my 
communications with an attention, which indicated deep interest in 
them; communicated, in turn, what had been done, and was now 
doing, for the Indians in this Province ; expressed in strong terms 
his approbation of what was doing in the U. States., for the benefit of 
our Indians; rejoiced very sincerely in our success, and manifested 
his readiness to co-operate with us in all suitable ways and meas- 
ures practicable for the accomplishment of the great and common 
object in view, the complete civilization of the Indians. A plan of 

* A summary Journal of this Tour is given in the Appendix K. 



20 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



future proceeding in this business was proposed by him, to which 
I gave my ready assent* He will confer with Governor Dal- 
housie, now on a tour in the western part of this province, on this 
subject, and of whose approbation of the benevolent design, of do 
ing good to the Indians, he entertains no doubt. 

I have conversed also with the Hon. and Rev. Dr. Strachan. 
and other gentlemen of York ; and with the Hon. William Claus, 
Deputy Inspector General of Indian Affairs, in Upper Canada, and 
a considerable number of other respectable gentlemen in Niagara, 
on this business, and by all am assured of their warm approbation 
of it, and have their promises of cordial support. 

A foundation, I trust, is thus laid for future intercourse and co- 
operation between the Governments, and respectable and influen- 
tial individuals in these Provinces, and our own Government and 
individuals connected with it, which will tend to harmonize and 
strengthen the efforts which shall in future be made, each within 
their respective jurisdictions, to raise the long neglected native 
tribes, whom the Providence of God has placed under our care, as 
christian nations, from their present state of ignorance and wretch- 
edness, to the enjoyment, with us, of all the blessings of civiliza- 
tion, and of our holy religion. In all events, I shall never regret 
that I have made this visit and effort to accomplish an object obvi- 
ously good, and of deep importance. The gratifications I have 
enjoyed in the polite and favourable manner in which my commu- 
nications were received, as well as in other respects, are an abun- 

* The plan suggested was, that a correspondence should be opened and con- 
tinued between the Honourable and Reverend Dr. Stuart of Lower Canada 
and mvself on the subject at large, under his, the Governor's sanction, and 
that in this form he would most cheerfully give the business his influence, 
A letter, accordingly, introducing and opening the subject, has been forward- 
ed to Dr. Stuart. 

The absence of Governor Dalhotjsie, prevented my going, as I had inten- 
ded, to Montreal and Quebec, and of course my ascertaining from personal 
conversation, the feelings and opinions of a number of respectable gentlemen in 
those places, particularly Chief Justice Sew all, and Sir William Johnson", 
Bart. Inspector General of Indian Affairs, to whom I had letters of introduc- 
tion. These letters have been since forwarded, with letters explaining fully 
the design of my intended visit to them. Their answers have not yet been re- 
ceived. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



21 



dant reward for all the fatigues and privations I have endured m 
so long a tour, in so hot a season, and far away from my family. 
I am, dear Sir, with high consideration and esteem, 

Your obedient Servant, 
JEDIDIAH MORSE. 
Hon. John C. Calhoun, Secretary of War. 



PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 

1. On the difficulties peculiar to this subject, of which the read- 
er of this report should be apprized in the outset. Accuracy in 
regard to the names, numbers, and situations of the numerous In- 
dian Tribes, which are spread over our widely extended territory; 
and in the spelling of their names, seeing that these tribes, in not 
a single instance, have a written language, is not pretended, nor 
must absolute correctness be expected. 

The nature of these subjects precludes accuracy. No individual 
can visit the whole territory inhabited by the Indians and person- 
ally make the necessary inquiries. Even this, could it be done, 
would not prevent mistakes. Information is derived from many 
sources, on which different degrees of reliance are to be placed, 
No standard of spelling and pronouncing Indian names, has yet 
been agreed on, though we have several learned and able disser- 
tations on this subject.* The same tribes are called by different 
names, by the French, English, and Spaniards, and even by the 
Indians themselves. The Winebago Tribe, for example, is call- 
ed by the French, Puant ; by the Sioux, Ho-tonka — among them- 
selves their name is Oshun-gu-lap. The Fox Tribe is called by 
the Chip-pa-was, Ot-tah-gah-mie; by the Sauks, or Sacs, Mus- 
quah-kie-, by the Sioux, Mich- en- dick -er; by the Winebagoes, 
O-sher-a-ca; and by the French, Renard: and so of others. Our 
acquaintance with many tribes is but commencing, and with many 

* By P. S. Duponceau, Esq. Rev. John Heckewelder, Hon. John Pipkerin^ 
Esq. Rev. Dr. Jarvis, and others. 



( 



22 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



more, contained in our Table, we have only the uncertain in- 
formation of travellers, who have barely passed through, or only 
near, their villages. I can only say, 1 have been fully aware of 
these difficulties, and have met them with diligence and fidelity, 
and have employed my best and most assiduous endeavors to lay 
before the Government, as full and correct a view of the numbers 
and actual situation of the whole Indian population within their 
jurisdiction, as my information and materials would admit. It is a 
subject, indeed, in which accuracy is not now required. Enough 
is given for present use; — enough to show us our object with suffi- 
cient distinctness, and to commence our operations for the attain- 
ment of it. Our advances in knowledge of the names, numbers 
and situation of the western tribes, will keep pace with the ad- 
vance of our operations. We shall always know enough on this 
subject, to enable us to do present duty. 

2. My second remark relates to the nature of the composition of 
this report. The body of it is not intended to be original, but to 
consist of existing facts and materials, now scattered in many books 
and manuscripts, which it is important should be collected and ar- 
ranged, for convenient use, under proper heads. To accomplish 
this, so far as it has been accomplished in this volume, has cost no 
small labor. 

The length of the report will excite no surprize in the mind of 
any one, who will reflect a moment on the extent of my commis- 
sions, the magnitude of the subject, the number and variety of 
facts and materials relating to it, and the deep interest happily ex- 
cited concerning it, both in the civil and religious community. 



Names, Numbers and places of Residence, oj Indian Tribes in the 
United States. 

The following article in my instructions, is the first in order: 
I. " You will particularly ascertain, as far as practicable, the 

number of the various tribes which you may visit, and those ad 

jacent." 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



23 



I have taken the liberty to give a liberal construction to this ar- 
ticle; and as the object of the government is to attempt the civiliza- 
tion of the Indians generally, I have prepared, with no small la- 
bor, from the most authentic materials which I could command, 
a Statistical Table, embracing the names and numbers of all the 
tribes within the jurisdiction of the United States, and have ac- 
companied this Table with a map, shewing, as far as is known, 
where each tribe resides. [The reader is referred to the Table 
and Map, preceding the Title page.] 

II. After the foregoing general tabular and map views, of a 
preliminary nature, I proceed to give, in order, such particular 
accounts of the several tribes enumerated in the table, as shall ex- 
hibit, what my commission requires, " the actual condition" of 
the Indian Tribes — particularly " the extent of their respective 
territories, with the nature of their soil and climate, their modes 
of life, customs, laws and political institutions, — the character and 
dispositions of their principal and most influential men; the num- 
ber of schools, their position, the number of teachers — of schol- 
ars of each sex, the plan of education, with the degree of success 
which appears to attend the respective schools, and the disposi- 
tion, which appears to exist in the tribes, and with their chief 
men, to promote among them civilization." 

The body of the information collected in compliance with the 
part of my commission above recited, I have, for obvious reasons, 
thrown into an Appendix, to which reference may be had for facts 
and information in detail, to establish and illustrate the different 
branches of this Report. 

In this part of my Report, I shall make general, summary re- 
marks only, on the various nations of Indians, in the order they are 
mentioned in the Table, beginning with the Remnants of the Tribes 
remaining in 

NEW-ENGLAND. 

A particular account of these several tribes is given in the Ap- 
pendix.* These Inaians are all provided for, both as to instruc- 



Appendix L. 



24 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



tion and comfort, by the governments and religious associations, of 
the several states in which they reside, as far as they will, in their 
present situation, receive these blessings. Should the Govern- 
ment of the United States, provide an Asylum for the remnants of 
these depressed and wretched people, who have been long insu- 
lated, corrupting and wasting away in the midst of us, a portion of 
them might be persuaded to take shelter in it from the ruin which 
otherwise seems inevitably to await them. The body of them, 
however, would doubtless prefer to remain where they are, for 
this prominent reason, among others, that very few of them are of 
unmixed blood. The others, having intermarried with the lowest 
classes of white people and negroes, and feeling no sympathy with 
Indians of pure blood, would not be comfortable, or happy, or of 
wholesome influence, if removed and planted among them. In 
the view given of the history, and present state, of these tribes, 
we may See the results of past experiments; and continue those 
means which have been successful, and correct, or abandon those, 
which have proved abortive. On these tribes, formerly, and on 
others now extinct, were bestowed the Missionary labors almost 
single handed, of Eliot, the Mayhews, Edwards, the Sergeants, 
Kirkland, Wheelock, Badger, Occum and others, whose zeal, 
trials, and faithful services, are remembered and recorded on 
earth, and, we doubt not, in heaven. 



NEW-YORK. 

In this State, are what remain in the United States, of the cele- 
brated confederacy of the Six Nations, with the Stockb ridge. 
Brotherton, and some of a few other tribes, who are planted on 
lands given them principally by the Oneidas and Senecas. Of the 
present state of these Indians, in all the particulars desired by the 
Government, a full account will be found in the Appendix.* 
There is a division among them on the subject of removal. The 
greater part, probably, at present, choose to remain on their seve- 
ral Reservations; and they are supported in this choice by some 
religious associations and individuals, who believe that they can, 



* Appendix M. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



25 



to more advantage, be civilized where they are, than in any place 
to which they could be removed. My own opinion, however, and 
that of many others, and of a large part of the Indians themselves, 
is different. A removal of these, and of all other reduced tribes, 
in the settled parts of our country, and their colonization on some 
sequestered spot, selected and prepared with judgment, and libe- 
rality, under the direction and patronage of the Government, 
would place them in circumstances for improvement, far more 
eligible than those in which they are now placed. The spot which 
has been lately selected, and purchased of the Winebago and Me- 
nomine Indians, on Fox river, in the N. W. Territory, by a dele- 
gation from the Stockbridge, Oneida, St. Regis, and some other 
tribes, at the head of which was Mr. Eleazer Williams, I consid- 
er as judiciously chosen for this purpose. After those who are 
now willing to go, shall have settled in this chosen and pleasant 
country, under the auspices of the Government, and some reli- 
gious Association, who will plant Education Families among them, 
there is little doubt, in my own mind, but more of these, and 
other reduced and feeble tribes, and ultimately the whole, or 
nearly all of this class, will voluntarily, or with a little persua- 
sion and assistance follow them. But more will be found on this 
prominent subject in the Appendix, F. G. H. 

All these tribes remaining in New-York, have been supplied 
for many years with more or less of religious and moral instruc- 
tion; several houses for public worship have been erected for 
their use; schools established, various kinds of mills have been 
built, tools for husbandry and for carrying on several of the me- 
chanical arts, furnished, and other means employed for the gene- 
ral improvement of these Indians. Besides what has been done 
for them in these ways by the Legislature and religious Associa- 
tions of the State in which they reside, the Society in Scotland for 
propagating Christian Knowledge, the Society for propagating the 
Gospel among the Indians and others in North- America, establish- 
edin Boston and vicinity, and the Corporation of Harvard Col- 
lege, have supported for many years, one or more Missionaries 
and school-masters among the Oneida and Stockbridge Indians 



i 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR; 



These means have not heen used without very apparent good ef- 
fects. Whole tribes have been converted from Paganism to Chris- 
tianity; many hopeful converts have been made to the faith of the 
Gospel; churches, respectable for their numbers, have been 
formed; the ordinances of religion have been regularly adminis- 
tered; church music has been successfully cultivated; valuable 
improvements have been made in agriculture, manufactures and 
some of the most useful and necessary mechanic arts, and in their 
dwellings, and style of living. Some of them are wealthy, in cat- 
tle, and other stock, and in the produce of their farms; numbers 
have made such advances in the common branches of knowledge, 
reading, writing, and arithmetic, as to become teachers of schools— 
and some have risen to be respectable religious teachers. Among 
these last is Mr. Williams, who has just been named, who is of 
Indian descent, and who for several years has officiated successful- 
ly in the Episcopal forms of worship, as the religious Teacher of 
the Oneidas. All these improvements, however, have fallen 
short of the public expectations, and seem not to have produced 
generally that encouragement to continued and increased exertion, 
which the friends to the happiness of the Indians had hoped. The 
success of these efforts has doubtless been much obstructed by the 
influence of low and depraved white people, who have insinuated 
themselves among these Indians, and whose interest it is to keep 
them ignorant; and whose exertions, of course, would be against 
all improvements. The imperfect plans upon which these be- 
nevolent efforts have been made, have lessened their good effects. 
As the new plans to be submitted, provide against these evils and 
defects of both kinds, past experience should in no degree discour- 
age new attempts on new plans, the wisdom and efficacy of which 
have been tested by a variety and succession of experiments. 

The aid given by the Government to religious Associations, 
who have made establishments for the improvement of several por- 
tions of these Indians, appears to have been judiciously bestowed, 
and probably is the full proportion of the fund, placed at the dis- 
posal of the President for the civilization of the Indians, which 
should be appropriated to the tribes in this section of our country. 
An Education Family, formed and organized on the plan hereafter 
recommended, would be able to impart all necessary instruction 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



£7 



to a much larger number than now dwell together in any part of 
the state of New- York; and hence may be drawn a weighty argu- 
ment in favor of their colinization. It would economise, to a great 
extent, our means and labor for the benefit of these Indians. A 
large family, embracing instructors in all branches of useful knowl- 
edge, might superintend and conduct the education of a large body 
of Indians, 

OHIO, 

I have given in the Appendix,* so full an account of the Indians, 
who remain in this State, in answer to the enquiries of the Gov- 
ernment, that very few observations remain to be made in this 
place. It seems not easy te reconcile the accounts given of the 
feelings and opinions of the Delawares, by the Indian Agent, and 
the Rev. Mr. Sergeant.f These differences render it difficult to 
determine the real state of facts. Very considerable attention 
has been paid to the instruction of these Indians by several de- 
nominations of Christians, more especially by the Societj' of 
Friends, and the favorable results are stated. Several remarks of 
Rev. Mr. Hoge in his letter, j are worthy of special notice, par- 
ticularly the following, " They (the Indians) begin to be con- 
vinced, that their migratory life is unfriendly to their welfare; 
that it will soon be impossible to gain subsistence by hunting; that 
they must have recourse to agriculture and the mechanic arts." 
These convictions are undoubtedly fast becoming general among 
the sensible part of the tribes within the circle of our settlements. 

On the subject of Colonization, the reply of Richardville,§ ex- 
presses the sentiments of some of the Indians, who have a con- 
trolling influence over their respective tribes, " I think," says 
this sensible Chief, in answer to my question to him-^" I think 
the plan of collecting the Indians now scattered, into large bodies? 
for the purpose of educating them with more convenience, mid at 
less expense, both practicable and advantageous," 



* Appendix O. + Appendix P. i Appendix > Appendix R, 



23 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



MICHIGAN AND NORTH WEST TERRITORIES. 

I put these together, because, though distinct territories, they 
are at present under one Government, administered by one Gov- 
ernor. Some parts of these Territories, as Detroit, Mackinaw, 
Green Bay, and Prairie du Chien, have been places of renown 
in ancient and modern wars; but the countries around them, till 
very lately, remained unexplored, known only to the native 
tribes, who occupied them as their hunting grounds. W T ithin a 
few years, these territories have risen into such importance, as 
that the Govornment of the United States, by their appointed 
Agents, have explored them to their remotest corners. Border- 
ing, to a great extent, on the line which divides the United States 
from the British colony of Upper Canada, embracing points of 
much importance in conducting our Indian Trade, it has been 
thought necessary to be acquainted with them, that we might be 
the better able to avail ourselves of the advantages which belong 
to us, and to defend ourselves against encroachments. The sur- 
vey of this wide spread wilderness has brought to our knowledge 
large bodies of Indians, hitherto known only to a few, who have 
been in the practice of trading with them. 

At different, distant, and commanding points within these Ter- 
ritories, five military posts have been established, and a sixth is 
in contemplation.* These posts are intended to protect our rights 
in carrying on the Indian trade, and to exert an influence to pre- 
serve peace on these borders between us and the Indians, and 
between their different tribes, and to protect and aid any Educa- 
tion establishments which may be made in their vicinity. These 
circumstances, with that which has often been brought up to view, 
the selection of some part of these Territories, as the seat of a 
colonv of Indians; and another, that this is the part of our coun- 
try which I have personally visited, have led me to give a full and 
particular account of them. The view of them, which will be 
found in the Appendix,! renders it unnecessary here to add any 

* Detroit, Mackinaw, Green Bay, Prairie du Chien, St. Peters, near St. An- 
thony's Falls— and one is contemplated at the Saut of St. Mary's, 
f Appendix S, 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



29 



further information on the several topics enumerated in my Com- 
mission. The whole of these Territories constitute one great 
field for moral cultivation; and when Education Families shall have 
been planted at the different military posts, a plan seriously con- 
templated, of immense importance; and which it is hoped will 
shortly be carried into effect, a channel, through them, will be 
opened to many large tribes W. of the Mississippi, to the Council 
Bluffs. Here again a military post is established, and a large 
Education Family are ready to occupy this commanding station.* 
All the tribes within the United States, N. of the Missouri, as far 
W. as the Council Bluffs, and beyond them, placed between 
these posts and these families, may be made to feel, in a greater 
or less degree, their combined, controlling, civilizing, and re- 
forming influence. 



INDIANA AND ILLINOIS. 

Our table shews what tribes inhabit, or rather did once in- 
habit, these states. The most of them have sold their lands and 
are either still lingering on them, unwilling to take a last look 
over the fertile fields, which they once called their own, and at the 
mounds which contain the bones of many generations of their ances- 
tors ; or they are scattered, and roaming without a home in the 
territories of strangers. Not many years since, we could point to 
the populous villages of these Indians, and knew where to direct 
our efforts for their benefit. Now we may ask the question 
" Where are they ?" and there is no one among us who is able to 
give an answer. The most of them, however, are already gone, or 
are going, beyond the Mississippi, to some spot selected, or to be 
selected,! for their future "permanent," residence. + 

* Appendix T. t Appendix U. 

\ I cannot deny myself the melancholy gratification of inserting here the 
following pertinent and touching specimen of 

Descriptive Eloquence. 

"This charming country," speaking of a part of Virginia, "belonged to 
the Indians ; over these fields, and through these forests, their beloved fore- 
fathers once, in careless gaiety, pursued their sports and hunted their game ; 



i 



30 REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 

This important change in the situation of these tribes is now in 
operation, and till it shall be completed, nothing definite can be 
either said or done as to their civilization or religious instruction. 
Very valuable information relating to some of the tribes who have 
inhabited, and are still within the limits of these states, I have re- 
corded in the appendix,* in hojtethat while it answers the enquiries 
of the Government, it may come into use, when these Indians shall 
have found, if they ever do find, an unmolested home, 

KENTUCKY. 

I have no knowledge that any Indians are remaining in this State. 
The Board of managers of the Baptist General Convention, under 
the conviction that the better way to do effectual good to the Indians 
is to " bring them from the recesses of the forest, and inure them 
to the usages of civilized life, and in the hope, that they might then> 
selves become the instructors of their brethren," have established 
a School for the above purpose, at the Great Crossings in this State, 
which has lately been removed by the Board, to Rogersville in 
Missouri. They have the assurance of the Secretary of War, of 
receiving $250, for promoting this object. 

PENNSYLVANIA. 

Few of the Indians mentioned in the Table, as having resided in 
this State, thirty years ago, are now to be found. They have 

every returning day found thein the 9ole, the peaceful, the happy proprietors 
of this extensive domain. But the white man came, and lo ! the animated 
chase, the feast, the dance, the song, of fearless thoughtless joy, \» ere over. 
Ever since, they have been made to drink of the bitter cup of humiliation ; 
treated like dogs, their lives, their liberties, the sport of the white men — their 
country, and the graves of their fathers, torn from them in cruel succession ; 
until, driven from river to river, from forest to forest, and through a period of 
two hundred years rolled back, nation upon nation, they find themselves fugi^ 
tives, vagrants, and strangers in their own country !" British Spy. 



* Appendix V, 



REPORT OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



m 



been scattered and diminished in the manner that hundreds of oth 
er tribes have been before them. 

VIRGINIA. 

ffottaways, Pamunkies, and Maltaponies. 

Of these tribes, twenty-seven of the former, and a still less 
number of the two latter, it seems are all that remain of those nu- 
merous tribes, who once constituted the formidable Powhatan 
confederacy. 

The Nottaways possess 27,000 acres of excellent land, on the 
W. bank of the river which bears their name, a small portion of 
which only, is under cultivation. A woman of this tribe, about 
sixty years old, named Edie Turner, is its present reigning Queen, 
Though uneducated, she has good sense, easy and fluent in conver- 
sation, has a well furnished and comfortable cottage — has horses, 
cows, and other domestic animals, and manages her farming and 
other business with discretion and profit. This Queen, and two 
others, of the most aged of the tribe, are all who now speak the 
ancient, or Nottaway, or Powhatan language. This language is 
said to be evidently of Celtic origin, and in expression and harmo- 
ny, is equal to either the Erse, Irish or Welsh. It has two gen- 
ders, masculine and feminine, three degrees of comparison, and 
two articles. Its verbs are very irregular.* 

It would be easy, and of some importance, to preserve a speci- 
men of this language. We do not know that they have ever been 
visited by missionaries, or favored with schools, or teachers in 
agriculture, or the mechanic arts. 

SOUTH CAROLINA. 

When this State was first settled by the English, it was inhabit- 
ed by twenty-eight tribes of Indians. The principal of these, 

* I am indebted for the foregoing information to an anonymous article un 
3er the head of Petersburg, (Va.) March 17 ? 1820. 



32 REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



were the Cherokees, Catawbas, Creeks, Chickasaws and Choc- 
taws. The Cherokees inhabited the Western part of the State 
which they sold in 1777, and retired over the mountains, W. 
where they now reside. The Catawbas dwell on the river which 
bears this name, in the Northern border of the State, partly in 
North Carolina, lat. 34°. 49.' N. on a Reservation of 144,000 
acres, granted by the Proprietory Government, where there is 
still a remnant of about four hundred and fifty souls, all that re- 
main of the bravest, the most formidable, and generous enemies 
of the Six Nations. All the twenty-eight original tribes, excepting 
those above named have disappeared.* 



GEORGIA. 



The Creeks and a part of the Cherokees reside in the Western 
parts of this State. An account of these tribes is given in the Ap- 
pendix.! Overtures have heretofore been made to the Creeks to 
introduce among them Education Families, upon the plan of those 
established among the Cherokees and Choctaws. But their minds, 
irritated by the recent wars with them, on the part of the United 
States, were not at the time, in a proper frame to listen to these 
overtures. Lately, however, they have manifested more favora 
ble dispositions in regard to this subject, and the General Conven- 
tion of Baptists are directing their attention to them. Their num- 
bers are such as will require more Education Families, to give in- 
struction to all, than this Convention will be able to supply. This 
tribe, respectable in numbers and character, dwelling in the midst 
of us, and connected with several of the tribes West of the Missis- 
sippi, among whom, emigrants from this tribe are mingled, demand 
the special attention of the Government and of the Christian com- 
munity. This tribe, with the three adjoining, the Cherokees, 
Choctaws, and Chickasaws, are in situations and circumstances very 
favorable to be educated where they are, raised to the rank and 
privileges of citizens, and merged in the mass of the nation. On 
these tribes we hope the Government will make the experiment 



* Appendix W. 



t Appendix X, 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



33 



of the practicability of a complete civilization of Indians. The 
success of the institutions of the American Board of Commission- 
ers for Foreign Missions, now in operation among two of these 
tribes, the Cherokees and Choctaws, is in a high degree favorable 
to such an experiment. 

FLORIDA. 

There are, in East Florida, about twelve hundred pure blooded 
Seminole Indians, and a number of Creeks and of other tribes, 
a mixed body, not numerous, scattered along the Northern border 
of this Territory, and on the coast of the Gulf of Mexico, near 
Tampa Bay. Of these Indians, and of their country, &c. a partic- 
ular account is given in the Appendix.* Before the wars of 1812 
and since, these Indians with their negro slaves, lived in comfort, 
and many of them were wealthy in cattle and horses. But these 
wars have broken them up, destroyed great numbers of their bra- 
vest warriors and chiefs ; also their villages and cattle, and thrown 
them into a state, most distressing and pitiable. Efforts are ma- 
king, with prospects of success, to collect all these Indians into one 
body, to make them comfortable, to educate and civilize them. 
They are willing and desirous to receive these blessings. 

ALABAMA, MISSISSIPPI, TENNESSEE. 

In these states reside the Cherokees (principally) the Choctaws 
and Chicasaws, of whom some remarks have been made under 
the head of Georgia, to which the reader is referred. These 
tribes, the two former particularly, have lately attracted an unusu- 
al share of the public attention, in consequence of the operations 
going forward among them for their civil and religious improve- 
ment. Of the state of these tribes, and of the measures devised 
and put in operation for their benefit, by the American Board of 
Commissioners, under the patronage of the Government, an ac- 
count is given in the Appendix.f 

* Appendix Y . t Appendix A . a. 

5 



34 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR- 



State and Territories zvest of the Mississippi. 



Having taken a brief survey of the Indians east of the Mississippi 
I pass over that river, and in the order of the Table, give such in- 
formation of the numerous tribes west of it, to the Pacific Ocean, as 
I have been able to collect. No measures have been taken to con- 
vey the blessings of civilization and of the Gospel, to any of these 
tribes, (if we except what a few Catholic Priests have done among 
some of the northern nations) till within the last two years. Dur- 
ing this period, Education Families have been established among 
the Osages, and a portion of the Cherokee tribe, who have lately 
migrated and settled on Arkansaw river ; and another large family 
are prepared to plant themselves at the Council Bluffs.* These 
will be noticed in their place. I begin with 

The Tribes north of t)ie Missouri, and west of the Mississippi rivers. 

Of these tribes I have received, in a letter from Mr. Daniel 
Harmon, an Indian Trader, the following summary information. 
" From 1800 to 1806, I resided in that extensive plain country, 
which lies between the Mississippi, Missouri, Red and Se-se-satch- 
ewine rivers, bounded west by the Rocky Mountains. This coun- 
try lies between 44°, and 52° N. Lat. The climate is about the 
same as in Canada. The soil, generally, is good. There is on it 
but little timber, or wood of any kind. There are plains of more 
than one hundred miles in extent, on which there is not a shrub to 
be seen. The natives, when travelling over these plains, use Buf- 
falo dung, which burns like peat, for fuel. 

Scattered over this wide tract of country, there may be 12 or 
15,000 Indians, some say more, of the following tribes, viz. Crees 
or Kristineaux, Assiniboins, Mandans, Rapids, Blackfeet, Blood In- 
dians, Sursees, and a few of the Coutouns. The body of the latter 
tribe are spread over the Rocky Mountains, and westofthem.j 

* See Rev. Mr. Badger's letter, Appendix B b. 

t These are probably the same nation, described to me by Capt. Ramsay 
Crooks, under the name of Shoshonee, or Snake Indians. They>are, he states. 



/ 





REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



35 



ki I know of no Indians," says Mr. H. " who I think would more 
readily receive Education Families among them, than those above 
mentioned. The Crees, indeed, are more than half civilized al- 
ready. When Canada fell into the hands of Great Britain, there 
were, at that period, two Catholic Priests among these Indians ; 
and in 1817 or 18, there went another, who still resides on the 
Red River, where Lord Selkirk has attempted to establish a colo- 
ny, of which an account is given in the Appendix.* 

Since the above letter was received, Mr. Harmon has publish- 
ed his Journal. From this and other sources, some further account 
of these Indians is given in the Appendix.! 

From the information Mr. Harmon has given of the dispositions 
of these Indians, we may hope, that the way is already prepared 
for introducing among them the blessings of civilization, and the 
Gospel. 

Of the Tribes between the Missouri and Red rivers, west of the Mis- 
sissippi, and east of the Rocky Mountains. 

By a reference to the Table, it will be seen, that within the 
limits above specified, there are more than 100,000 Indians. In 
different and very advantageous positions, in the midst of this pop- 
ulation, are planted already three Education Families, one at 

very numerous, about 30, 000 souls, and formerly occupied the fine Buffalo coun- 
try north of the Missouri,along the Rocky Mountains. But the Blackfeet Indians, 
about 10,000 souls, living east of the Shoshonees, on the waters of Assiniboin 
river, meeting with the British fur traders, obtained of them lire arms. With 
these they attacked the Shoshonees, who having no other weapons of defence 
than bows and arrows, were driven into, and even across, the Rocky Moun- 
tains.y They now dwell miserably in these mountains, and five hundred miles 
beyond them, in a country, with few exceptions, barren and rugged in the 
extreme, and without game. They barely subsist on fish, and a great variety 
of roots, found in different places, have no huts, are attached to no place, have 
no home. The climate is very fine, the cold moderate, the heat not oppres- 
sive, and rain very uncommon. 



* Appendix C c. t Appendix D d. 



36 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



Dwight,* among the Cherokees, on Arkansaw river, established 
by the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, 
two by the United Foreign Missionary Society, among the Great 
and Little Osages, at Harmony and Union. More are in contem- 
plation, one particularly at the Council Bluffs. These establish- 
ments are on the plan of those planted among the Cherokees and 
Choctaws. The one contemplated at Council Bluffs is planned on 
a larger scale, and is to consist, if carried into effect, of a little 
colony of christians. Its intended size is well suited to the inte- 
rior and important station, which it is to occupy, and the large 
connexion it will have by branch establishments, with surrounding 
tribes. For more particular information concerning these Educa- 
tion stations, and of the tribes with which they are connected, and 
over whom they may obtain ultimate influence, and the country 
they inhabit, see Appendix.! From the facts which will here be 
found, it will appear, that the great work of educating this large 
portion of Indians, and preparing them to exercise and enjoy with 
\is the rights and blessings of citizens, has already commenced with 
very promising prospects. Perseverance can hardly fail to secure 
success. 



Of the Indians in Louisiana, and others between Red River , and the 
Rio del JVorte. 

In our Table are given the names, numbers and locations of these 
tribes, furnished by Col. Trimble, with an account of their pres- 
ent state, peculiarly appropriate to the views of the Government, 
which may be found in the Appendix. J Though a large part of 
these tribes are without the limits of the United States, their con- 
nexion with our Indians is such, as renders it important that we 
know their situation, in order the better to make arrangements for 
the education of those who are under the jurisdiction and care of 
our own Government. 

Among these Indians, it will appear from the Table, are scat- 
tered in considerable numbers, emigrants from the Cherokee, 

* Named after the late President Dwight. 

t Appendix E e. £ Appendix F f. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



37 



Choctaw, Delaware and other tribes, residing on this side of the 
Mississippi. These, in time, may constitute a valuable medium of 
communication with the tribes among whom they are now min- 
gled; being acquainted with the languages of these tribes. Indian 
youth, of the tribes above named, now receiving education at 
Cornwall,* and in the Cherokee and Choctaw schools, would 
have access to, and influence with those of their own tribes and 
language, and through them, with those among whom these emi- 
grants reside, and may become in due time, very important mem- 
bers of Education Families, which will probably be planted among 
these Indians. 



Indians beyond the Rocky Mountains. 

In the Table is given, from the most authentic sources to which 
i have had access, which I believe to be the best existing in our 
country, a list of the Indian Tribes West of the Rocky Mountains. 
With the names, numbers, and places of residence, of these tribes, 
Messrs. Crooks & Stuart, (to whom I am indebted for the body of 
information contained in the Table, as well as for that which fol- 
lows it,) gave me a concise description of these Indians, and of 
their country, which 1 here insert. This description embraces 
several tribes, and their country, immediately on this side the 
Rocky Mountains, a region hitherto unexplored, through which 
the gentlemen above named passed, and where they spent a win- 
ter. 

" The sources of Big Horn river, a branch of the Yellow Stone, 
of Rio del Norte, a water of the Gulf of Mexico, and of the East 
Fork of Lewis' river, a water of the Pacific Ocean, are within 
half a mile of each other, in about lat. 43°." 

" From the Pacific Ocean, ascending Columbia river, 160 
miles, to the Rapids, is a broken, heavy timbered country, mostly 
of the pine species. From this point the woods gradually dimin- 
ish for sixty miles farther up the river, where timber wholly dis- 
appears, and no growth is found, but stinted pines, and shrub 
oaks. Except on the spurs of the Rocky Mountains, which ex~ 

* See an account of this School, Appendix G g. 



38 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR, 



tend west to within four hundred miles of the Pacific Ocean, the 
face of the country, generally, presents a continuation of rocks 
and sand, with very little vegetation of any kind, except a few 
tracts scattered along the banks of the rivers. It is in fact a bar- 
ren desert. The spurs of the mountain, and the main chain, in- 
deed, are covered with pines. From these east, to the Missouri, 
the same barrenness, as to the growth of timber, prevails, but 
the soil is better, producing grass sufficient to feed large herds of 
buffalo. On the west side of the mountains, no wood of any kind 
is found, not even on the low bottom lands." " 1 have travel- 
led," says Mr. Crooks, " several hundreds of miles along the 
Ky-eye-nam river, without meeting with any thing larger than the 
common willow. The Indians in this desert waste subsist on fish 
and roots. There is here very little game." 

" A town, called Astoria, named after John Jacob Astor, Esq. 
of New-York, was established on Columbia river, fifteen miles 
from its mouth, in the spring of 1811. At this period, there were 
here about one hundred and twenty men. In 1813, this place 
was captured by the British, but afterwards given up, by trea- 
ty, in which it was stipulated, that the British, should have lib- 
erty, for ten years, to trade with the Indians in the vicinity of 
this coast, in common with the Americans. 

" At the falls of the Columbia river, are collected Indians of 
different tribes, in large numbers, particularly the Hellwits. 
Here is an immense salmon fishery. Some of this species of fish, 
caught here, weigh sixty pounds, and the average is fifteen pounds, 
of fine flavor. These fish, dried by the sun, are the principal 
food of the Indians. From the Falls, to the junction of Lewis' 
river with the Columbia, on the south side, are no Indians. On 
the north side, the first one hundred miles above the Falls, is in- 
habited by the Hellwitts tribe. 

" East of the Rocky Mountains, scattering timber grows on the 
bottom lands, but not a twig on the upland. 

" The eye meets with no other obstruction than it would in the 
midst of the ocean. There is abundance of salt in this region. 
Stone is not uncommon; but not a solitary indication of coal, after 
leaving the main stream of the Missouri. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



39 



'' About the year 1802, a war party of the Pawnee Indians 
brought the small pox from New-Mexico, to the borders of the 
Missouri. It spread its ravages over a great part of this region, 
and destroyed more than half its population. Since this period, 
their numbers have slowly increased." 

An Education Family might be planted on some part of Colum- 
bia, on Wallaumut, (erroneously called Multnomah') river, with 
safety, and advantage to this populous region of Indians, and some 
of our religious Associations are directing their attention to this 
place, and intending to sieze the first opening, for establishing 
here such a family of a large and respectable size. Several prom- 
ising young men have offered themselves already for this service. 
Should the Government establish a military post here,* - it will be 
very important for reasons stated in another part of this Report, 
that an Education Family, and an Indian Agency should be plant- 
ed, at the same time, near it. These Indians, who have hither- 
to had but little intercourse with white people, should see them, 
in the outset of this intercourse, and also in continuance, in an at- 
titude adapted to make, and to cherish, impressions favorable to 
civilization and Christianity. This establishment, should it be 
made, will be an important link in the chain of intercourse be 
tween the United States and the islands of the Pacific Ocean. 



INDIAN TRADE. 

HI. The third article in my commission relates to Indian trade 
"The moral condition of the Indians," my commission states, 
ec will necessarily be very dependent on the character of the trade 
with them; and a subject so important will, of course, claim your 
attention. You will report such facts as may come within your 
knowledge, as will go to shew the state of the trade with them, and 
the character of the traders, and will suggest such improvements 
in the present system of Indian trade, as in your opinion will ren- 

* Appendix H n. 



40 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



der it better calculated to secure peace between them and us, and 
will contribute more efficiently to advance their moral condition.'' 

On this topic, of primary importance, I shall simply state the 
information received in answer to my enquiries, and at the close 
make such suggestions as have occurred to my own mind, in reflec- 
ting on this information.* 

Three alternatives, only, appear to present themselves to the 
the choice of the Government. 

1 . Whether the present mixed plan of conducting trade with the 
Indians shall be continued, partly by the government, on the 
capital deposited in the hands of the Superintendant of Indian 
Trade, and partly by licensed traders; or, 

2. Whether the Government will increase their capital to a 
suitable sum for the purpose of furnishing a full supply of good- 
for the Indians, and take the whole trade into their own hands; or, 

3. Whether the Government will withdraw their capital, and 
give up the trade wholly to licensed traders, under suitable regu- 
lations and restrictions; leaving this species of commerce, thus 
regulated by law, like all other branches of trade, to be carried 
on by those who shall engage in it, in their own way. 

Among the evils resulting from the present mixed mode of con- 
ducting the Indian Trade, Col. Bowyer, late Indian Agent at Green 
Bay, stated to me verbally, the following: 

1. The Traders, generally, and their Engages, particularly, 
are without good moral character, which, in the way of example, 
is injurious to the morals of the Indians. 

2. Nearly all the Interpreters, and Engages, (boatmen) em- 
ployed by the Traders, are British subjects, under ^British influ- 
ence, which, as they are our rivals in this trade, must operate un- 
favorably to the interests of the United States, so far as relates to 
the Indian Trade. 

* It is considered proper to publish this part of the Report, as it was pre- 
sented to the President and Congress, previously to the abolition of the Fac- 
tor system, as it exhibits some important facts on this subject, which, what- 
ever influence they may have had in producing the above anticipated mea- 
sure, go to justify it, and to shew the necessity of a radical change in the sys- 
tem of Indian Trade. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



41 



3. Discharged soldiers from Mackinaw have been employed to 
cover British property, to a considerable amount, by deceptive 
sales. Two or three instances of this kind, of soldiers dismissed 
from Mackinaw, were known to Col. Bowyer. 

4. The impossibility, on the present system, of preventing the 
introduction of spiritous liquors into the Indian country. The 
Traders obtain their license at Mackinaw ; make their entries at 
the custom house, and get their clearance. Their whiskey, of the 
highest proof, so as to take up but little room in their boats, is pri- 
vately conveyed to some spot on the shore of the island, which 
they are to pass, where, under cover of night, it is taken on board 
their boats and carried into the country. 

5. The custom, universal among the Traders, of giving a credit 
to the Indians, in its operation, is injurious both to their interests 
and morals. A considerable number of those who are credited 
never pay. This loss, the Traders take care to make up, by an 
increased charge on the goods sold to those who do pay. The 
consequence is, injustice to the honest Indian, and temptation to 
him to become dishonest in return. Finding that his neighbor 
is benefitted by not paying his debts, he refuses to pay. The evil 
proceeds farther. One trader, who knows that an Indian has al- 
ready obtained credit to the full amount of his means of paying, will 
yet trust him still farther, on his promising, that he will not pay his 
first creditor but will pay him. When this debtor, the next season, 
comes to pay his debts, his second creditor invites him to his house, 
makes him drunk, and takes possession of his furs, in payment of 
his debt The first creditor, in such a case, has no remedy.* 

* A person, I was informed, who occasionally traded with the Indians, in the 
fall, sold one of them, whiskey and goods to the amount of $100, to be paid in 
furs the next Spring. In the Spring a number of Indians came with furs for sale, 
and camped near the house of the man, who had given the credit. Finding 
that they had furs, the creditor alleged, that one of these Indians was brother 
of the one he had trusted, and on this ground, of mere suspicion, arbitrarily 
seized a pack of his furs, and kept them in payment of his debt ! ! Complaint 
was made of this fraud and robbery to the Indian Agent, who promised to 
prosecute the opprossor, but did not do it ; and the poor Indian, thus robbed 



6 



42 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



Col. B. was in favor of the plan of Government's taking the 
whole Indian trade into their own hands, and stated what he con- 
sidered would be the benefits resulting from such a course. 

1. The destruction of British influence among the Indians, 
which is now diffused through the traders. 

2. The Indians might get their goods 200 per cent, cheaper, 
than they now give the traders. 

3. It would destroy the system of credit, so pernicious to the 
Indians. 

4. It would entirely do away the still more destructive prac- 
tice of introducing spirituous liquors among them, a practice 
which is the source of most of their calamities. " No quar- 
rels, disturbances, or murders, (said Col. Bowyer,) have been 
known among the Menominees, (Indians,) during the four years 
of my residence among them, except such as have had their ori- 
gin in whiskey."* As an improvement in the Government Fac- 
tories, Col. B. recommends, that they should not be confined to 
one spot, as they now are but that sub-factors, or agents, should 
be planted in suitable stations to accommodate the Indians, and 
to sell them, in their own villages, goods at prices fixed by the 
government Factor. In this way, the Indians, would not only 
have their goods cheaper, and with more convenience to them- 
selves ; but these stations would be adapted to the establishment 
of schools for the instruction of the the Indian youth. Some of 
these situations might be centres, around which the Indians might 
be induced to settle, and cultivate the earth, under the instruction 
of these sub-agents, who must always be good men, fitted for their 
business, a part of which should be to instruct them in agriculture 
Thus far Col. Bowyer. 

of all his furs, his gains of a year, and unable to obtain redress, was constrained 
to put up with the loss of them. This happened in the Spring of 1819. 

The name of the man who was guilty of this black deed, and of him who 
informed me of it, who was personally knowing to the fact, and a credible wit- 
ness, have been communicated to the President of the U. States. 

* Maj. Irwin, and many others, long resident among, and near, the Indians, 
testify to the same fact, as applicable to other Indians. If it be so, should not 
laws be made to punish those, who introduce this poison among the Indians, 
with the severity, which a crime of so deep a dye, deserves ? 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR 



43 



It will be perceived that all the advantages here stated by Col. 
B. are embraced, though in a different, yet 1 conceive in a better, 
3hape, in the plan I have proposed at the close of this report. 

The following important facts and information, were very obli- 
gingly furnished, by Maj. Irwin, Indian Factor at Green Bay, in a 
written communication. 

"In compliance with your request, I proceed to give you such 
information in relation to the Indian Trade, at this place, as a peri- 
od of nearly four years, has enabled me to become acquainted with. 
It must be observed, however, that my occupations are such, from 
being almost constantly engaged in the duties appertaining to the 
United States factory, that this information may not be so explicit, 
nor possess so much detail, as you, sir, could wish; such as it is, 
however, I convey it with cheerfulness, knowing well that 3^our 
assiduous researches here, will enable you to confirm its correct- 
ness, or to detect incorrectness. 

1st. With respect to any defects in the present system of Indian 
Trade. 

The slightest observer could discover defects in the present 
manner of conducting the trade. 

The Indian agents are not vested with authority to keep dis- 
honest and unprincipled traders from entering the country, for 
the purpose of carrying on trade with the Indians. Hence the 
many impositions that are practiced upon the poor Indians, prin- 
cipally in selling whiskey to them. In many instances, from 
the thirst for that article, and the want of knowledge, as to 
its value, skins, worth from five to six dollars each, have been 
sold for a quart of whiskey. Nor does the evil stop here ; as it 
is known that the Indians sell their kettles, guns, clothing, horses 
&c. for that article, the excessive use of which sometimes leading 
to the destruction of property, and the loss of lives. 

2d. As to the "improvements" which might be made " in the 
present system of Indian Trade," which would render the com 
meroial intercourse " with the Indians more conducive to the pro- 
motion of peace between them and us ; and contribute more effi- 
ciently to improve their moral condition." 



44 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



I have always believed that authority should be given, for the 
purpose of allowing none but persons of good character, to carry 
on trade or intercourse with the Indians; and that no trader should 
be allowed to introduce whiskey into the Indian country. To 
prevent which, rigorous inspection to be made necessary; and all 
violations of the established regulations, to be noticed and punish- 
ed. A question would here present itself, in the attempt to pre- 
vent those violations, as to the propriety of allowing the testimony 
of Indians. At present it is believed, that it would not be lawful to 
receive it in any legal proceeding. Few Indian traders complain 
against each other; hence the difficulty of procuring sufficient tes- 
timony to detect their mal-practices. Nevertheless, intelligent, 
active and determined agents, temperate in their habits, and friend- 
ly to the Indians, could do much in their favor; and probably 
prevent the existing abuses. 

The British traders have held the most intercourse with the 
Winebagoes. This circumstance, with that of their receiving an- 
nually presents from Drummond's Island, will account for the pre- 
ference given by the latter to the former. 

Three years since, about two hundred and fifty of the Sacs and 
Foxes passed through Green Bay for Drummond's Island, whence 
they returned, abundantly supplied with goods.* 

A short time before the execution of Pontiac's plan for taking all 
the British forts in the Indian country, the Menominees being 
friendly to the British garrison, then at this place, acquainted the 
officer in command of Pontiac's plan, and advised him to put him- 
self and those in his command under their protection, with an 
assurance of being conducted to Montreal. This war- acceded to 
and faithfully performed, notwithstanding Mackinaw had fallen in- 
to the hands of the Indians, and the attempt by the captors of that 
place, to molest and stop the Menominees and the officer and his 
men. The garrison did not consist of more than from thirty to 
forty men. I have been well informed that this generous! act is 

* The Sacs and Foxes live on both sides of the Mississippi, west of Green 
Bay, more than six hundred miles from Drummond's island. 

t An instance of a like act occurred during the last war, in leading an 
American from this place to Mackinaw, whose life was in danger. The In* 

dian chief who performed this act is called The Rubber. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



45 



the ground of a particular partiality, on the part of the British 
authorities in Canada, for the Menomine tribe. 

This induces me to notice the practice of the Indian tribes in this 
quarter, of visiting Drummond's Island. The object, on their part, 
is to obtain presents; and these they always receive, in sufficient 
quantity to induce them to visit that place every summer. The 
British government, it is supposed, have their political views in 
making these presents; and when their generosity is combined with 
the refusal on the part of the American government, to give like 
presents, the effect on the minds of the Indians cannot be doubtful. 

I do not wish to be understood, that it would be a proper meas- 
ure, on the part of our government, to be equally liberal as the 
British are in making presents to the Indians. On the contrary, I 
know that it does great injury to them, making them idle, and caus- 
ing them to neglect the cultivation of the soil, the chase, &c. and 
leading them to intemperance, by frequent intercourse with im- 
moral white people. 

The trade with the Indians in this quarter, is usually conducted 
at places on Fox, Ouisconsin, and Menomine rivers. 

The custom has been, and still exists, for traders to winter at 
those places. The amount of business done, varies according to 
the favorableness or unfavorableness of the seasons for hunting. 
Property to the amount of five thousand dollars, has been brought 
here, in one season, from Menomine river. A company of British 
traders, usually do all, or nearly all, the business at those other 
places. Sometimes they have collected furs and skins to the 
amount of from eight to ten thousand dollars, during the winter 
and spring. The amount of business done in the settlement of 
Green Bay, may probably be about three thousand dollars annual- 
ly. Whisky* forms a principal article in the traffic at those places. 

The United States Factory at this place, (Green Bay,) does very 
little business with the Indians, notwithstanding the goods it con- 
tains can be sold on better terms, than the private traders sell 
theirs. I am well acquainted with the cause of this, and will ex~ 

* It is a practice with some traders, in order to deceive the Indians, to 
promise thema keg of whiskey, as a present after closing the bargain ; whereas 
the practice is, to make the Indians pay for this very whisky, in the goods 
they purchase, 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR, 



plain it. The British traders have used every effort to prevent 
the Indians from trading at the Factory; by representing the goods 
as being of American manufacture, of bad quality, and high in 
price; beside the Indians know that no whiskey can be obtained at 
the Factory. In 1817,1 sent an American citizen, (Mr. Rouse,) with 
goods from the factory to trade with the Indians at the Ouisconsin 
river, and two others to Menomine river. On their return, the 
spring following, they represented that they might have done a 
good deal of business, had not the British traders and their agents 
at these settlements, used exertions to prevent the Indians from 
doing business with them; and advised those that had done busi- 
ness with them, not to pay for the goods they purchased 
on credit. Those gentlemen, in consequence, lost a good deal of 
money; and would not be willing to trade with the Indians again. 

The annual average of goods sold to the Indians, since the es- 
tablishment of the Factory, does not amount to more than about 
sixteen hundred dollars. Those sold to white people, and to the 
people of mixed blood, to about three thousand five hundred dol- 
lars annually; and to the Indian agent five hundred dollars annu- 
ally. For cash, and to Fort Howard, two thousand four hundred 
and fifty dollars annually. 

Under date of Dec. 5th, 1813, Mr. Varnum writes from Chicago 
to Maj. Irwin. " The indiscriminate admission of British subjects 
to trade with the Indians, is a matter of pretty general complaint, 
throughout this section of the country. There are five establish- 
ments now within the limits of this agency, headed by British sub- 
jects. These, with the large number of American traders, in ev- 
ery part of the country, will effectually check the progress of this 
Factory. I have hardly done a sufficiency of business this season 
to clear the wages of my interpreter." 

Green Bay, July 1.8th, 1820. 

Rev"'d Sir, 

In conformity with your verbal request yesterday evening, i 
will here state to you some of the facts in relation to the extraordi- 
nary diminution of the Indian trade, at the United States Factory 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



47 



at Chicago, which, by the factor there, is said to be owing to the 
introduction and sale of whisky, by private adventurers. 

In one of his letters to me, about two years since, he stated that 
he had not done business enough with the Indians to pay the ex- 
pense of his interpreter. In another, dated Chicago, 23d May 
last, he says, " The Indians have been induced to come here this 
season by the facility with which they are enabled to procure 
whiskey." " In fact," he continues, " the commerce with them 
(the Indians) this season has been almost exclusively confined to 
that article." He adds, " I will venture to say, that out of two 
hundred barks* of sugar taken, not five have been purchased with 
any other commodity than whiskey. I have not been able to pro- 
cure a pound (of sugar) from the Indians, but can get a supply 
from the traders at ten cents a pound." 

Independent of the known veracity of Mr. Varnum, the fact that 
private traders could afford to sell sugar at ten cents a pound, is 
pretty conclusive evidence of the manner in which they obtain it. 

The copy of an account current, a sketch of it which follows, 
will show the amount of busines done, while I was factor there, 
from 1810 to 1812. 

Amount of furs and peltries forwarded to the Superintendant of 
Indian trade, June 30th, 1810, and invoiced at $2,972,56 

Amount of drafts on the Secretary of War, in favor 
of the Superintendant of Indian trade in that year, 1 ,740,01 

Total amount of business done in 1810, - $4, 712, 57 

Amount of furs and peltries forwarded to the Superintendant of 
Indian trade, 25th, Sept. 1811, - - - 5,280,50 

Amount of drafts on the Secretary of W^ar, trans- 
mitted in favor of the Superintendant of Indian trade, 775,39 

Total amount of business done in 1811. - $6 ,055,89 



* Indian boxes to contain sugar, averaging about forty pounds each. 



48 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR, 



Amount of furs and peltries forwarded to the Superintendant of 
Indian trade, 11th July, 1812, - - - 5,781,91 

Amount of drafts transmitted in favour of the Super- 
intendant of Indian Trade, - 500,67 

Amount of articles sold for cash, - - 515,48 



Amount of business done in 1812. - - $6, 798,07 

I am induced to believe that the business done in the factory at 
Chicago, for the last two years, does not average two hundred dol- 
lars a year, in consequence of the whiskey traders at that place. 

The result must be, (unless it is checked in time,) that the In- 
dians will be made a miserable set of beings; and the most of the 
rising generation will be cut off in the early part of their lives. 
I am, with respect and regard, 

Sir, your ob't serv't, 

M. IRVIN, U. S. Factor. 

To Doctor J. Morse, at Green Bay. 

The foregoing, it will be perceived, is a view as far as it goes, of 
the affirmative side of the question, as to the policy of the Factory 
system of trade with Indians. I now present the other side. 

An intelligent gentleman, who had just visited Chicago, informed 
me, (July, 1820,) that " there were goods belonging to govern- 
ment, at that place, to the value of $20,000, which cost more at 
Georgetown, than the traders ask for their goods at the post of de- 
livery; and that the goods are inferior in quality, and selected 
with less judgment, than those of the traders ; th A only twenty 
five dollars worth of furs were sold by the factor at Chicago; that 
the Government make no profit on their capital; and pay the super- 
intendants, factors, sub-factors, and their clerks, out of other funds.* 
" The fact," he added, " that the Government sell their goods at 

*It will be understood, that I am stating what was communicated to me 
by respectable gentlemen, as facts, and which fidelity to my government obli- 
ges me to state. I hold not myself responsible for the authenticity of these facts, 
or for the justness of the opinions which 1 quote ; but only for the correctness 
with which they were stated, and the respectability of the sources whence they 
have been derived. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



49 



cost and carriage, and pay their own agents; and that yet the In- 
dians prefer dealing with the traders, is pretty conclusive evidence 
that the traders have not been exorbitant in the prices of their 
goods, nor have mal-treated the Indians, who have had liberty to 
trade with one or the other, as they pleased." " It is evident," he 
said, " that by some means, the Indians had not confidence in the 
Government, as fair and upright in their trade." 

Nothing was said or intimated on this subject, by the gentleman 
above alluded to, which, in the remotest degree, impeached the 
character or conduct of any of the factors. They appear, as far 
as I have had acquaintance with, or knowledge of, them, to be up- 
right men, and faithfully and intelligently to have discharged the 
duties of their office. This want of confidence in the Government 
on the part of the Indians, I have witnessed with solicitude in ma- 
ny other instances; and it has often been expressed by the Indians 
in my interviews with them. Whether this prejudice has arisen 
from foreign influence, exerted to answer particular purposes, or 
from that of the traders, as is alleged in the preceding communica- 
tions; or has been occasioned by the manner in which their lands 
have been obtained from them by the Government; or by the in- 
feriority in quality, and high prices of the goods, which have been 
offered them in barter, at the Government factories, or delivered 
to them in payment of their annuities, as others confidently as- 
sert, is not for me to decide. It is my opinion, however, from all 
I could learn, that each of these causes has had more or less influ- 
ence in creating and fixing this unhappy prejudice in their minds. 
And in devising the means for eradicating it, which, while 
it exists, will prove a formidable bar in the way of accom- 
plishing the benevolent object of the government, regard should 
be had to the removal of all these causes. 

G. Sibley, Esq. the Factor at Fort Osage, under date of Oct. 
1820, w r rites to the Superintendant of Indian Trade, as follows: 
" I can form no idea, at present, what will be the probable re- 
sult of trade this season. My expectations are not very great. 
Private trade is more extensive this year, than I have ever known 
it before, and is under fewer restraints than heretofore." 

The following articles, though of a mixed nature, have yet an 
important bearing on the subject of which we are now treating. I 



50 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



insert the information in the order in which it was verbally receiv- 
ed and penned. 

At Green Bay, I was visited by Mr. John Jacobs, an intelligent 
Indian Trader, who had just arrived from the Forks of Assini- 
boin and Red rivers, the seat of Lord Selkirk's, or Red River set- 
tlement.* Lord Selkirk made this establishment about the year 

* The following " Memorandum relative to Lord Selkirk's settlement on the 
Red River of Lake Winipic," was received from L. Halkett, Esq. a respecta- 
ble English gentleman, a relation of Lord Selkirk's, who has personal knowl- 
edge of the history and facts which he relates. 

" The Hudson's Bay Company, in the year 1811, granted to the late Earl 
of Selkirk a large tract of land, belonging to them in North America, for the 
purpose of commencing an agricultural settlement. As soon as the proper 
spot was fixed* upon, he sent out a body of Emigrants with their families from 
Great-Britain, who built houses, and began their establishment. The situa- 
tion chosen for the settlement, was upon the Red River, fof Lake Winnipic) 
about fifty miles from its entrance into that Lake, and in lat. 50° N. and long. 
97° W. of London. 

In the years 1315, and 1816, the settlers were successively driven away by 
persons in the employment of certain Canadian fur traders, and many of them 
were killed, their cattle, and implements of husbandry destroyed, and their 
houses burnt. Those who were driven off, however, successively returned, 
and received repeated accessions to their numbers. At present, (1822) they 
amout probably to about six hundred souls. 

There is a Catholic, and also a Protestant Clergyman, established in this 
settlement. There has recently commenced a school for the education of the 
children, not only of the settlers, but of the servants, and traders employed 
in the service of the Hudson's Bay Company in the interior. The leading 
men among these settlers are also doing every thing in their power to per- 
suade the Chippewa Indians to send their children to the school. 

The lands upon the Red River are very fertile, being composed of a deep 
alluvial soil. There are no trees, or stumps to interrupt the agricultural 
operations. The prairies are very extensive, and covered with fine grass. 
Along the immediate banks of the rivers, there is plenty of fine timber of va- 
rious sorts. The rivers, and Lakes abound with fish ; and the settlers obtain 
abundance of Buffalo from the plains. The neighboring Indians (the Chippe- 
was) have always been on the most friendly footing with the colonists. The 
settlers are not allowed to carry on any trade for furs and peltries with the 
natives, and are prohibited from giving spirituous liquors to them, under the 
penalty of forfeiting their allotments of land. 

The crops of wheat, barley, potatoes, &c. have been generally very abun- 
dant ; but the grasshoppers, for the last two seasons, have proved extremely 
destructive. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



51 



1812. It is situated, on the point of land formed by the junction 
of the Assiniboin river, (here a quarter of a mile wide) from the 
west, with Red river, (half a mile wide) from the south. The&e 
rivers, thus united, run north about fifty-four miles into the south 
section of Lake Winnipic. The banks of both these rivers, are 
high, of clay, clothed with white and red oak, white wood, elm, of 
large size; no pine, or other kinds of wood. The soil is very 
good on the banks of both these rivers, and easily cultivated. Good 
crops of wheat, rye, barleys potatoes, garden vegetables, some 
corn, are raised here, liable however, to be cut off by swarms of 
grasshoppers. For half a mile back, the banks of the rivers are 
lined with a fine growth of wood; back of which, as far as the eye 
can extend, is Prairie, capable of easy and profitable culture. 
Here the members of this establishment pass their summers; and 
about November, they take their families in boats and canoes, and 
ascend Red river to the south, one hundred and eighty miles, to 
Pembanon, at the mouth of the river of this name. Here they 
spend the winter in hunting the buffalo, with which the neighbor- 
ing Prairies abound. This place is defended by Fort Dare. There 

The settlers have constructed a small fort, or rather a stockaded set of build- 
ings, in which they keep their fire arms and the public stores of the colony. 
They have two small pieces of brass cannon, to guard them against any at- 
tacks from the distant bands of roaming Indians, who might be tempted to mo- 
lest them. 

The settlers receive their annual supply of British Goods, by the ships of 
the Hudson's Bay Company, which go annually to Hudson's Bay. The com- 
munication is by the Red River, across Lake Winnipic, and down the River 
that flows from the Lake into the sea at York Fort, where the company have 
a regular establishment ; or by the Hill river, which also flows into the same 
Bay ; but on this latter conveyance, there is a separation of the waters for a 
short space, that is, it is requisite to go up a small stream whose waters join 
the Nelson river, and thence is a short portage into Hill river. 

The grant to the Earl of Selkirk is chiefly of the lands upon the Red River 
and its branches, and the Indians (Chippewas and Assinaboins) gave him also 
a regular grant pf a long tract, along the river, I think, up to the Grande 
Fourche. J. H= 

City of Washington, Feb. 1822. 
To Rev. Dr. Morse. 

This settlement, should it continue and prosper, would be an excellent stand 
for an Education Family. 



52 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



are about fifty families of Canadians, mostly of mixed blood, with 
two French Catholic priests, planted here, as permanent settlers , 
The priests appear to be useful, and are about erecting a place of 
worship. This settlement is about fifteen miles south of the 
north boundary of the United States." Such is Mr. Jacob's ac- 
count of this settlement, which differs not materially from that of 
Mr. Halkett. 

Mr. Jacobs passed along the northern shore of Lake Superior 
to Fort William, in the summer of 1819. He found this shore, 
with few exceptions, elevated, rocky, in many parts mountainous, 
and without good harbors. The British N. W. Fur Company have 
a schooner, the only vessel on this largest of our Lakes, which 
plies between the Saut of St. Mary's and Fort William. This Fort 
is at the west end of the Lake, at the mouth of that chain of wa- 
ters, which forms a part of our northern boundary between Lake 
Superior and the Lake of the Woods, about Ion. 90° W. and lat. 
48° N. This Fort, which is without troops, and on the bounda- 
ry line between the United States and Canada, is a mile from the 
shore of the Lake, on the north bank of the river Kaminiticuvia, 
which is here half a mile wide. Here is a grand depot of the N. 
W. Company, where all the Indian Traders assemble in July and 
August, and after receiving their goods, disperse in different di- 
rections on both sides of the boundary line, to the places of their 
abode, and their hunting grounds. In June following, they return 
with their furs and peltry again to receive their goods. This is 
their annual round. The furs collected here, are shipped in the 
schooner of the Lake, to the Saut of St. Mary's, whence they are 
conveyed to Montreal, and England. 

About tw r enty miles above Fort William, on the same side of 
the river, is Fort Meuron, where canoes are built for the Hudson 
Bay Company, and the colonial settlers. Here they quit their 
large boats, and take smaller ones, suited to the waters of the 
Indian country, which they traverse, passing through Red River 
to Athabasca. The Hudson Bay Traders do not return to Fort 
Meuron, as do those whose sphere of trade is more southerly, but 
pass through Lake Winnipic, and thence to Hudson Bay. 

On Lake Winnipic, at the mouth of Pike river, is the Depot of 
the Hudson Bay Company. The course pursued by their traders 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



53 



is from Montreal, with Canadian guides, or engages, who, under- 
standing both the French and Indian languages, are best qualified 
for this business. 

Mr. Jacobs spent three years as Indian Trader, for the North West 
Company, at Lake Winnipic. The articles given in barter to the 
Indians for their furs, are blankets, coarse cloths, silver arm bands, 
medals, and ornamental trinkets, powder, balls, shot, tobacco, ax- 
es, half axes, trenches (which are irons used to break the ice, and 
to make the trenches in which they set their beaver and rat traps) 
steel traps, spears, &c. and last, though not least, high wines. 
Of these high wines, seven quarts make nine gallons of Indian rum. 
The liquors, with which the traders purchase their provisions of 
the Indians, yield a large profit. If all the Indian Traders would 
agree not to carry liquors into the Indian country, Mr. J. assured 
me, the interest both of the traders and the Indians would be pro- 
moted by such an agreement. The Indians would make better 
hunts, and the traders receive better pay. Both fully believe 
this ; and the former would be " thankful," if the latter would not 
bring " whiskey" (as they call all our spirituous liquors) into their 
country. But they add, " If you will bring it, we will have it." 
When they get it, they always get drunk, and while they remain 
so, are very troublesome, and often dangerous. I asked Mr. J. 
why, if both traders and Indians were opposed to the introduc- 
tion of spirituous liquors, they were carried among them ? He 
answered, it was in self-defence. Some traders would carry 
" whiskey," and if others had it not, those who had it, would by 
means of it, allure the Indians, to their store-houses, and get the 
principal part of their furs. 

The Chippewas, unmingled with other tribes, Mr. Jacobs states, 
inhabit the country round Lake Winnipic, and are numerous. 

Drummond's Island. 

The name of DrummonoVs Island is familiar as the place of annu- 
al resort of thousands of Indians, to receive presents from the 
British Govornment. The following description of this Island was 



54 REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



verbally given to me, while at Mackinaw, by a very respectable 
inhabitant of that island. 

Drummond's Island lies on the Strait which connects Lake Hu- 
ron with Lake Superior, thirty-six miles north-east, in a direct 
course, forty-five by water, from Mackinaw. It is forty-five miles 
in circumference, four or five miles from the Canada shore, on the 
north or British side of the channel of the strait, which forms a 
part of the boundary line between the United States and the Can- 
adas. A British garrison of about one hundred and forty men in 
barracks, is established on the south side of the island, on a spa- 
cious harbor, one of the best on the Lakes, three miles in circum- 
ference, sheltered from every wind, entered by two narrow, deep 
channels, about sixty yards wide. The island is rough, made up 
chiefly of limestone, without any buildings or inhabitants, other 
than the barracks, and soldiers. Here are found many singular 
and curious petrifications, and stones, which would gratify the geol- 
ogist and mineralogist. Originally the island was covered with 
birch, maple and beach, which is now principally gone. The 
soil, though stoney, yields, plentifully, potatoes, garden roots and 
vegetables, and food for many cattle. 

In the month of June many thousands of the various tribes of 
Indians, within a circuit of five or six hundred miles around, south 
west, west and north west, resort to this island to receive presents 
from the British government, to an amount at least of ,£4000 ster- 
ling, in goods, beside a large sum in provisions. These presents 
are made, said my informant, "as a reward to the Indians for their 
services in the late war." " The Indians," he added, " were ill 
used by the British Government, and these presents are made to 
compensate and conciliate them — but all is thrown away upon 
them, and does them no good." 

This opinion, I believe to be correct. These presents serve 
to make the Indians, who receive them, idle and vain. A great 
deal of time, as well as property, is wasted, in going and return- 
ing from this place of resort. And during their visits at Mackin- 
aw, as they go and come, their necessities are supplied from the 
provision stores of our government. We are thus made to suffer 
loss of property, as well as the effects of bad influence. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



55 



The following is from Mr. Doty's letter to Governor Cass, and 
relates to the Indian trade on, and around Sandy Lake, two miles 
from the Mississippi. 

" A skin is estimated at $2. A half point blanket is sold for four 
skins. One fathom of stroud, the same. A half pint of powder 
one skin. Thirty balls, same. Five branches, or two hundred 
and fifty grains of wampum, one skin. A north west cased gun s 
ten skins ; one beaver trap four skins ; a large scalping knife, 
half a skin; twist tobacco, two skins pr. fathom, three plugs for a 
skin, and four skins pr. cwt. Forty branches of white beads, one 
skin. A pair of leggins, with ribbons and beads to garnish them, 
two skins; one "half axe" one skin, one hatchet, one skin. — 
These are the principal articles of trade. Divers other things 
are given as presents. If any Indian obtains a credit for his sup- 
plies for the season, he must be furnished with a flint, a needle, 
an awl, a gun worm, a little vermillion, rings, beads, and three or 
four inches of tobacco, besides various other articles, for which 
the trader charges nothing. In a credit of six hundred skins, if 
the trader gets three hundred in return for his goods, he considers 
himself recompensed. He frequently does not obtain even this 
proportion. The articles received from the Indians, are sugar, 
rice, and furs. A Mocock of sugar, weighing about forty pounds, 
is received for four skins ; a sack of rice, two skins ; a large prime 
beaver, two skins ; a large prime otter, two skins ; three martens, 
one skin ; three minks, one ; ten muskrats, one; a prime bear, 
two skins ; two prime bucks, one skin ; three raccoons, one ; two 
lynxs, one ; and two fishers, one. 

An axe is so essential an article with an Indian, that he is gener- 
ally punctual in paying for it ; and on returning from his hunt, he 
lays out a certain number of skins in payment for his axe, and calls 
the trader to notice it. 

The American South West Fur Company have the chief trade of 
this country ; but they sustain a considerable injury from the small 
traders. They sent from Leech Lake last year (1819) thirty-eight 
packs — from Sandy Lake, twenty-five — and from Fond du Lac, 
nine. This year, (1820) from the first place, fifty-three, the sec- 
ond, thirty-five, and the third, fifteen. Last year, the whole re- 
turn was not as much as usual, and this year rather more," 



56 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



From Mackinaw I addressed a letter, containing certain queries, 
to Maj. Marston, at Fort Armstrong ; from his answers to which, 
I give in this place, the following extracts : 

"I will now proceed, agreeably to your request, to give you my 
ideas relative to the Indian trade, &c. &c. 

In the first place, I have to observe, that the Factory system for 
supplying the Indians with such articles as they may need, does not 
appear to me to be productive of any great advantage, either to 
the Indians themselves, or to the Government. But very few, if 
any, of the Indians have sufficient forecast to save enough of the 
proceeds of their last hunt, to equip themselves for the next; the 
consequence is, that when the hunting season approaches, they 
must be dependant on some one for a credit. An Indian family 
generally consists of from five to ten persons, his wife, children, 
children in law, and grand children ; all of whom look to its head 
for their supplies ; and the proceeds of the hunt go into one common 
stock, which is disposed of by him for the benefit of the whole. 

When cold weather approaches, they are generally destitute of 
many articles necessary for their convenience and comfort, be- 
sides guns, traps, and ammunition ; some kettles, blankets, stroud- 
ing, &c. which are always wanting ; for these articles they have 
no one to look to but the private trader, as it is well known that 
the United States Factors give no credit ; but if they did, the num- 
ber of these establishments is too limited to accommodate but very 
few of the Indians, as but few of them will travel far to get their 
supplies, if it can be avoided : and farther, the Indians, who are 
good judges of the quality of the articles they want, are of the opin- 
ion, that the Factor's goods are not so cheap, taking into consider- 
ation their quality, as those of their private traders. In this I feel 
pretty well convinced, from my own observation, and the acknowl- 
edgment of one of the most respectable Factors of our Govern- 
ment, Judge Johnson, of Prairie du Chien, that they are correct. 
This gentleman informed me, but a few months ago, that the 
goods received for his establishment were charged at least 25 per 
cent, higher, than their current prices ; and that he had received 
many articles of an inferior and unsuitable quality for Indian 
trade.* 

* A similar complaint was made by the Six Nations at Buffalo the last Au- 
gust, when I was present. A member of Congress, I was told, had been invited 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR* 



51 



The annuities paid by Government to the Sauk and Fox nations, 
appear to be a cause of dissatisfaction among them, in consequence 
of their not being able to divide and subdivide the articles receiv- 
ed, so as to give every one a part. I believe that powder, flints, 
and tobacco would be much more acceptable to them, than the 
blankets, strouding, &c. which they have been in the habit of re- 
ceiving. 

If you speak to an Indian upon the subject of their Great Father, 
the President, supplying them with goods from his factories, he 
will say at once, " You are a pash-i-pash-i-to, (a fool) our Great 
Father is certainly no trader ; he has sent these goods to be given 
to us, as presents ; but his Agents are endeavouring to cheat us, 
by selling them for our peltries." 

The amount of goods actually disposed of to Indians, by the Uni- 
ted States' Factors at Green Bay, Chicago, Prairie du Chien, and 
Fort Edwards, if I am rightly informed, is very inconsiderable. 
The practice of selling goods to the whites, and of furnishing out- 
fits to Indian Traders, are the principal causes of their sales being 
so great as they actually are. 

In my opinion the best plan of supplying the natives, is by pri- 
vate American traders of good character, if they could be placed 
under proper restrictions. 

In the first place, it is for their interest to please the Indians, 
and prevent their having whiskey, particularly when they are on 
their hunting grounds, and to give them good advice. 

Secondly. They always give them a credit sufficient to enable 
them to commence hunting. 

Thirdly. They winter near their hunting grounds, and agreea- 
bly to the suggestions of a late Secretary of War, take to them- 
selves " help mates" from the daughters of the forest, and thereby 
do much towards civilizing them. 

to inspect the goods and to witness the fact of their inferiority. It was assert- 
ed to me, that much better goods, and at a less price than those which were 
distributed at this time ( an annuity payment) by the Indian Agent, could have 
been purchased at New- York. Had the amount due these Indians been judi- 
ciously expended in that city, the Indians, it was said, might have been bene- 
fitted by it, in the quality of their goods, several hundred dollars. It was ad- 
ded, that the Indians are good judges of the quality of goods, and know when 
they were well or ill treated. But they had, in this case, no means of redress. 

8 



58 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



Fourthly. They always have comfortable quarters for the In^ 
dians, when they visit them, and by the frequent intercourse, which 
subsists between them, become acquainted with us, and impercep- 
tibly imbibe many of our ideas, manners, and customs. 

Fifthly. From interested motives, if from no other, Traders will 
always advise the Indians to keep at peace among themselves, and 
with the whites. 

There are some changes which I think might be made to advan- 
tage, in the regulations for Indian Traders. In the first place, 
with a view to do away the impression, which almost universally 
prevails in the minds of the Indians in this part of the country, 
that the Traders, Clerks, Interpreters, Boatmen, and Laborers, 
and also their goods, are almost all British. This, unfortunately, 
is nearly the truth ; for there is scarcely a single boatman or la- 
borer employed by the Traders, who is not a British subject.— 
Their goods, it is well known, are almost altogether of British man- 
ufacture. I would recommend that no clerk, interpreter, boat- 
man or laborer be employed by them, who is not a citizen of the 
United States ; and further, that every Trader be obliged to dis- 
play the American flag on his boat, when passing on the water, 
and at his tent or hut, when encamped. 

The best and most successful means which could be employed 
by Government to civilize the Indians, or render them less savage, 
than they now are, in my opinion, would be, for the Agent of each 
nation to reside at, or near, one of their principal villages, there to 
have a comfortable habitation, and a Council room sufficiently 
large to accommodate all who might wish to attend his councils: 
To employ a blacksmith and a carpenter, and, of course, have 
shops and suitable tools for them. Every nation requires a great 
deal of blacksmith work ; there would probably be less for a car- 
penter to do, but he might be advantageously employed in making 
agricultural instruments, &c. &c. Let him cultivate, in the vi- 
cinity of the village, with the consent of the nation, a small farm, 
and keep a small stock of horses, oxen, and cows. It should be 
understood among the Indians, that the farming establishment is 
solely for the benefit of the Agent. Should it be known among 
them, that the object was to learn them to cultivate the soil, as the 
whites-do, they would most certainly object to it ; but if this is not 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



59 



known, they will soon see the advantages of employing the plough, 
harrow, &c. &c. and be induced to imitate our examples, and thus 
get on the road which leads to civilization, before they are aware 
of it. 

If an Agent of Government should go among them, as has some- 
times been the case, and inform them, that he has been sent by 
their Great Father, the President, to learn them how to cultivate 
the soil, spin, weave cloth, and live like white people, they would 
be sure to set their faces against him, and his advice, and say that 
he is a fool ; that Indians are not like white people ; the Great 
Spirit has not made them of the same color, neither has he made 
them for the same occupations. 

The next step towards their civilization would probably be, that 
some of their old people would remain at their respective villages, 
if they could be assured of being secure from their enemies, while 
the others are on their hunting grounds ; thus they would go on 
from step to step, until they would become civilized, and prepar- 
ed to receive and enjoy the blessings of Christianity. 

I consider it important that Government should exchange, as 
soon as practicable, all British flags and medals, which the Indians 
may have in their possession, for American ones. The Sauk, or 
Sac, and Fox Indians, have no American flags at present, and but 
few American medals. If you speak to them of the impropriety 
of their displaying British flags, and wearing British medals, they 
will reply, " we have no others ; give us American flags and med- 
als, and you will then see them only." The flags given to them 
ought to be made of silk, their British flag being made of that mate- 
rial ; besides, they are more durable, as well as more portable, 
than the worsted ones. One for each nation should be of a large 
size, for them to display at their villages on public occasions. — 
They have, at present, British flags considerably larger than the 
American army standards. The practice of painting these flags 
causes them to break, and soon wear out. They should be made 
in the same manner that navy flags are." 
Fort Armstrong, Nov. 1820. 
Rev. Dr. M0R6E. 



60 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



To the foregoing I could add the opinions and observations of 
many gentlemen of intelligence, with whom I have conversed on 
the subject. These opinions and observations were various, and 
of like tenor with those contained in the preceding documents, dif- 
fering on some important points — but all concurring in the imperi- 
ous necessity of radical changes in the present system of Indian 
Trade. A repetition of these opinions and observations, would 
throw no new light on the subject. 

Remarks and Suggestions.* 

These I had prepared with much thought and labor, and at 
considerable length, conceiving the subject to have a very impor- 
tant bearing on the benevolent object of the government. But on 
reflection, that so many able, official reports had been made upon 
it by heads of Department and Committees of Congress, much more 
competent than myself to discuss and illustrate a subject of this 
complex and delicate nature, and that there are considerable di- 
versities of opinion in respect to the plan most proper to be adop- 
ted and pursued, I have thought it would be prudent in me to lay 
aside what I had prepared, and to confine myself to a simple state- 
ment of my own opinion, as to the best manner of conducting the 
Indian Trade, and of the reasons which support this opinion. 

Before I make this statement, it is proper to remark, that the 
present mode of carrying on the Indian trade, partly by Govern- 
ment, on the Factory system; and partly by licensed Traders, ap- 
pears to have few, if any, advocates; and I presume will certainly 
and readily be abandoned. The question which seems to divide 
those who have considered this subject, is, whether the govern- 
ment shall take this trade wholly into their own hands, and pro- 
vide a capital competent to the purpose; or give it up wholly into 
the hands of licensed Traders, duly regulated and restricted by 

* I give here these Remarks and Suggestions, as the)' were presented to the 
President and Congress. The Report on Indian Trade was given separately^ 
and in this form is here inserted, while, in fact, it makes a part of the whole. 
This subject will be again resumed under the general head of Remarks and 
Suggestions, which close this Report. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



61 



law? It appears from the tenor of the official reports, which have 
been made on the subject, that the public feeling and opinion are, 
prevailingly, in favor of the latter course. The statement of my 
own views will, therefore, be predicated on the presumtipon, that 
this course will ultimately be adopted by Congress. It is in my 
opinion, decidedly the best course, the best adapted to raise and 
preserve the reputation of the Government in the estimation of In- 
dians, and to secure for it their confidence and respect; the best fit- 
ted in all respects, to accomplish the great object of imparting to 
them the blessings of civilization and Christianity. 

It is exceedingly important that every movement of the civil, 
military, commercial, and religious classes of the community, in 
reference to the improvement of the condition of the Indians, 
should be in unison and harmony; that there should be no inter- 
ference, no collision, the one with the other. The strength and 
influence of each should be combined, on a well digested plan, and 
exerted with patience, perseverence, and with one mind, for the 
accomplishment of the end in view. All this is practicable; and if 
done, the blessing of heaven will ensure the desired success. 

The Indian Trade, conducted by men of intelligence, with integ- 
rity, on correct principles, would yield a handsome profit to a Com- 
pany, who should have secured to them by charter the exclusive 
benefits of it Let such a Company be formed, of men of responsi- 
bility, as to monied capital; of respectability as to character; of 
men, especially, cordially disposed to promote the designs of the 
government in regard to the improvement of the condition of the In- 
dians. Let none of a different character be admitted into the Com- 
pany, Let this qualification be indispensable to membership. 
Let their charter be a liberal one, and provide for the establish- 
ment of branches, insufficient number, to embrace the whole of 
the Indian population with which we have intercourse. Let it 
state particularly the obligations, and prescribe the duties, of this 
company, and the manner in which they shall conduct their inter- 
course with the Indians, and with the Military posts, and Education 
Families, which may be established from time to time, in and near 
the Indian Territories, constituting the theatre of their trade. Let 
there always be carefullj r maintained a good understanding, and a 



62 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



friendly intercourse and co-operation, between the Traders and 
the Military posts, and the Education Families. Let this be par- 
ticularly enjoined, as an indispensable duty. On this plan, there 
would be a reciprocal watch of the Military, Education Families* 
and Traders, over each other, to guard against, to check, or, in 
case of necessity, to expose, any misconduct in either. The gov- 
ernment, on this plan, would have the best possible security of a 
faithful fulfilment of the respective duties of these several depart- 
ments, and would find great relief from their present responsibili- 
ties to the Indians. 

Let the Company who are to act under this charter, be selec- 
ted and formed by the Government; be responsible to it, and re- 
movable by it for mal-practices. Let the Company appoint their 
own agents, and be responsible for their good behavior; and, with 
due regard to their charter, conduct all their affairs in their own 
way. For the privileges of this charter, require of the Company 
a reasonable and generous bo?ius, of a fixed sum, to be paid out of 
their profits, annually, into the Treasury of the U. States, to be 
added to the fund appropriated by Congress for the civilization of 
the Indians. 

Among the advantages which would result from a plan of this 
kind, would be the following: — 

1. The Government would be relieved from a perplexing, un- 
profitable, burdensome, and, shall I add, undignified business and 
responsibility, which can be much better and more satisfac- 
torily performed and borne by others, in the way proposed, than 
by the Government. 

2. The Indian Trading Fund of $300,000, now yielding no in- 
come to Government, and no substantial benefit to the Indians, 
which would not be made up to them by the new system propos- 
ed, would be withdrawn, and with it the salaries of all those who 
are now employed in managing it, amounting to the annual sum of 
$ 16, 600. This latter sum, together with the interest of $300,000, 
($18,000,) the $10,000 now given by Government, and the bonus 
of the chartered company, say $10,000 more, would constitute a 
fund of about $55,000, to be expended for the civilization of the 
Indians, without increasing the present burdens of the Govern- 
ment; a sum not too great to carry on, with energy, the extensive 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



operations necessary to the full accomplishment of the liberal and 
benevolent views and projects of the Government. / 

3. The Government would have the easy inspection and con- 
trol of this trade, now conducted away from the notice of their 
eye, and so perplexing and difficult in its management; and this too 
without embarrassing interference with the concerns of the com- 
pany. 

4. From all the information and facts I have received, I believe 
the plan now recommended would be the most acceptable to the 
Indians, would best secure their interests, promote their civiliza- 
tion, excite their respect for the Government; and most effec- 
tually cure two prominent evils, the intercourse of corrupt, and 
corrupting white people with the Indians, and the introduction 
of zvhiskey among them, and thus prevent wars, and promote 
peace among themselves, and with us. 

5. This plan would place the now unhappy and irritating com- 
petition between the British and American Indian Trade and Tra- 
ders, on its proper and equal ground. Each company would 
know, and in the manner common in all cases of rivalry in trade, 
would maintain their respective rights; and where the interfer- 
ence of the Governments concerned should become necessary, 
it would devolve on the Companies to make application for redress 
of any wrongs, or for making any necessary arrangements in con- 
ducting this trade. 

But to this plan it may be objected, that it tends to an unjust and 
injurious monopoly. If this be admitted, and the plan in conse- 
quence be rejected, I would respectfully suggest the following 
substitute. Let the trade be open to all men of fair character 
integrity and intelligence, and of friendly feelings to the plans pur- 
suing by the government for the improvement of the Indians. Let 
Traders of this character, and of this character only, receive li- 
censes, from men qualified and authorized to give them, and be 
required to plant themselves in some central spot within the 
sphere of their trade, in companies of four or five, or more, say 
within a quarter of a mile of each other, or nearer, in a little vil- 
lage of separate stores, like so many merchants. At this village, 
let it be required that all trade with the Indians be done; that 
they may enjoy all the advantages of commendable rivalry, pur- 



64 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



chasing where they can have the best goods, and on the best 
terms. Let there be a reasonable and liberal sum required for 
the licenses of these traders, to be added to the sum now conse- 
crated to the education of Indians. At each of these trading vil- 
lages, let an Education Family be established, to be useful and 
agreeable companions to the Traders, and to do all other things 
for the Indians, which like families do at other stations. An ar- 
rangement of the Indian trade in this manner, though more com- 
plex, and difficult to manage, would secure the advantages of the 
other, without the danger of monopoly, and in the opinion of 
very competent judges, would be preferable to any which can 
be adopted. 

In case either of these plans shall be embraced by Government, 
there will be necessary an officer to be stationed at the seat of 
Government, who should have a general superintendance of all 
the Education establishments, so far as relates to the procuring and 
transmitting to the respective Education and Military stations, all 
the husbandry and mechanic tools and implements, provisions to 
be given to Indians on their visits, and in seasons of scarcity; 
funds, for erecting buildings for the accommodation of the Educa- 
tion Families, &c. which the Government will provide with the 
funds placed in its hands. This officer, whose title should cor- 
respond with the nature of his office, would have full employ- 
ment, should the Education Families be multiplied, as they have 
been for the last twelve months, and as there is reason to believe 
they will be, in time to come. 

Such are the plans for conducting the Indian trade, which I 
would respectfully submit to the consideration of the Government, 
and such the advantages which, I conceive, would result from 
the adoption of either. 

All which is respectfully submitted by 

JEDIDIAH MORSE. 

New-Haven, Nov. 1821. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. Q5 

The fourth and last article in my Instructions, is in these 
words — 

IV. " After you have collected your Materials, you will digest 
the whole into one body, and present it in such form, and accom- 
pany it with such reflections and suggestions, as you may deem 
necessary to accomplish the interesting objects, which it is inten- 
ded to promote by your tour." 

The readers, whoever they may be, who shall submit to the 
labor of examining the facts collected and embodied in this volume, 
will doubtless make their own " reflections" and form their own 
©pinions. Still, as it is required in my commission, and may be of 
use to those who have not the time fully to examine for them- 
selves, I submit, with much diffidence and respect, to the consid- 
eration of the Government, and of the public, the following 

GENERAL REMARKS AND SUGGESTIONS. 

Increase of Indians within the extended limits of the United States,, 
and their peculiar condition. 

By the treaty with Spain, of 1819, the Territory of the United 
States is extended from the Atlantic, to the Pacific Ocean ; and 
a host of Indian tribes, in consequence, has been brought within 
our national limits. Many of these tribes, in point of numbers, 
rank among the largest in our country. These tribes are shut up 
within their present continually narrowing limits. They can 
migrate neither to the north, nor to the south ; neither to the 
east, nor to the west. The cold and barren region, spreading 
from our northern boundary, in lat. 49 north, to the Frozen 
Ocean, has already a population, as large as its scanty productions 
can support. Other tribes possess the narrow strip of territory, 
between our southern borders, west of the Mississippi, and the 
Spanish settlements. The rapid advance of the white population 
presses them on the east ; and the great Pacific Ocean hems them 
in on the west. 

" Where the white man puts down his foot, he never takes it 
up again," is a shrewd and correct remark of an Indian Chief. 
The hunting grounds of the Indians on our frontiers are explored 

9 



66 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



In all directions, by enterprizing white people. Their best lands are 
selected, settled, and at length, by treaty purchased. Their game is 
either wholly destroyed, or so diminished, as not to yield an ade- 
quate support. The poor Indians, thus deprived of their accus- 
tomed means of subsistence, and of what, in their own view 5 can 
alone render them respectable, as well as comfortable, are con- 
strained to leave their homes, their goodly lands, and the sepulchres 
of their fathers, and either to go back into new and less valuable 
wildernesses, and to mingle with other tribes, dependant on 
their hospitality for a meagre support; or, without the common 
aids of education, to change at once all their habits and modes of 
life ; to remain on a pittance of the lands they once owned, which 
they know not how to cultivate, and to which they have not a com- 
plete title : In these circumstances they become insulated among 
those who despise them as an inferior race, fit companions of those 
only, who have the capacity and the disposition to corrupt them. 
In this degraded, most disconsolate, and heart sinking of all situa- 
tions in which man can be placed, they are left miserably to waste 
away for a few generations, and then to become extinct forever ! 
This is no fancied picture. In a few years it will be sad reality, un- 
less we change our policy towards them; unless effectual measures 
be taken to bring them over this awful gulf, to the solid and safe 
ground of civilization. How many tribes, once numerous and 
respectable, have in succession perished, in the manner descri- 
bed, from the fair and productive territories, now possessed by, 
and giving support to ten millions of people !* 

* This view of the state of the Indians, reminds me of a pertinent and elo- 
quent passage in a discourse I have lately read, which I am sure will interest, 
and I will hope benefit, those who may read it. 

"I hear too the voice of the savage, sounding from the bosom of-the trackless 
forest. And there is in that cry a wild and native eloquence, " You have 
stripped us of our hunting ground, all in life that we held dear ; you have cor- 
rupted our morals ; our tribes, already incalculably diminished, have nothing 
before them but the dreary idea of being swallowed up, unless it be the more 
feariul apprehension of perishing forever in our sins. Once we were the heirs 
of your soil ; we now only ask to die the heirs of that salvation, which is re- 
vealed to you in your bibles." A cry like this has been uttered and is heard. 
Already -the heralds of salvation have gone to look up the remnants of their 
depopiiated tribes, and point them to a Savior. Their sun is setting in the 
west, an J we should give evidence that we had their unpitying nature, as well 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



67 



The nature of the Indian Titles to their lands. 

The relation which the Indians sustain to the government of 
the United States, is peculiar in its nature. Their independence, 
their rights, their title to the soil which they occupy, are all im- 
perfect in their kind. Each tribe possesses many of the attributes 
of independence and sovereignty. They have their own forms of 
government, appoint their own rulers, in their own way, make 
their own laws., have their own customs and religion, and, with- 
out control, declare war and make peace, and regulate all other 
of their civil, religious and social affairs. The disposal of their 
lands is always done by formal Treaties between the government 
of the United States, and the tribe, or tribes, of whom the lands 
are purchased. They have no voice, no representation in our 
government; none of the rights of freemen, and participate with 
us in none of the privileges and blessings of civilized society. In 
all these respects Indians are strictly independent of the govern- 
ment and people of the United States. Yet the jurisdiction of the 
whole country which they inhabit, according to the established 
law of nations, appertains to the government of the United States; 
and the right of disposing of the soil, attaches to the power that 
holds the jurisdiction. Indians, therefore, have no other property 
in the soil of their respective territories, than that of mere occupan- 
cy. This is a common, undivided, property in each tribe. When 
a tribe, by Treaty, sell their territory, they sell only what they 
possess, which is, the right to occupy their territory, from which 
they agree to remove. The complete title to their lands, rests in 
the government of the United States. The Indians, of course, 
cannot sell to one another, more than what they possess, that is 
the occupancy of their lands. Nor can they sell any thing more 
than occupancy to individual white people. Indian conveyances 

as their soil, were we willing to see it go down in total darkness. If the few 
that remain may live forever, it alleviates the retrospect of their wrongs, and 
creates one luminous spot in the Egyptian cloud that hangs over the place of 
their fathers' sepulchres. I would give any price for their forgiveness and 
their blessing ; and it cheers my heart, that my country is beginning to pay 
the long arrears which are due to that injured people."* 



* Sermon of Rev. Daniel Clark, Amherst, Massachusetts, 



63 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



give no title to the soil. This title can come only from the pow 
erthat holds the jurisdiction. 

Besides, the territory necessary to give support to any given 
number of people, in the hunter state, as it is designated, is vastly 
greater than is required to yield subsistence to the same number 
of people in the agricultural state. Here, again, the Indian title, 
to their respective territories, is imperfect in another respect. 
When the hunter state, from whatever cause, is relinquished, 
and the agricultural state adopted, the Indians are entitled to no 
more of their territories, so changed, than is requisite to give 
them, from cultivating the earth, a support equal to that which 
they derived from their whole territory in the hunter state. The 
advantages of the agricultural, over the hunter state, are presu- 
med to be a just equivalent to the Indians for the lands they are 
constrained to resign to the civilized state. Such appear to be 
the established laws and doctrines of our general and state gov- 
ernments, in respect to our relation to the Indian tribes in our 
country, to their independence, their rights, and title to their 
lands. A few of the authorities, which support the foregoing state- 
ment, are given in the Appendix.* 

I have stated the foregoing, as the established opinions concern- 
ing Indian titles to their lands, and have referred to the au- 
thorities given in the Appendix. The opinion there stated, of 
a majority of the Supreme Court of the United States, however, 
is very guardedly expressed on this point. " The Indian title, ** 
the Court say, " is certainly to be respected, until it be legitimate- 
ly extinguished." But what constitutes a " legitimate" extinguish- 
ment of an Indian title ? On this point we have not the opinion 
of the Court, further than may be inferred from the following 
clause. The Indian Title to their lands is not such " as to be 
absolutely repugnant to seisin in fee, on the part of the state." 
We may, I conceive, fairly infer from this important decision of the 
first Court in our nation, made after a full discussion by some of 
the ablest members of the American bar, that they had some hesi- 
tancy, to say the least, in admitting the correctness of the common 
opinion on the subject of the Indian title to their lands. If their 
title were such as to be " repugnant to seisin in fee by the state." 



ir - See App. I. i. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



69 



it would of course follow, that their title and ours, to our lands re- 
spectively, is of the same nature, i. e. complete. But this is not, 
say the Court absolutely''' the fact. There is a difference in 
these titles ; but in what it consists is not stated. The phraseol- 
ogy of the Court, though indefinite and inexplicit, clearly implies, 
that in their judgment this difference is small. It is not " absolute- 
ly repugnant" — but it is nearly so. The difference is less than has 
been usually considered. This decision, is obviously at variance, 
in a degree very important, with the principles which have govern- 
ed in making all the vast purchases of Indian lands, which have hith- 
erto been made. It is a decision highly favorable to the interests 
of the Indians ; and if regarded, (and the decision of our highest 
Court must be regarded as the law of the land) in future purcha- 
ses of their lands, will give them advantages, such as they have 
never before enjoyed, and will effect much toward conciliating 
that confidence and good feeling, which are indispensable to the 
success of our efforts for their benefit. 



Persons and character of Indians. 

Indians, generally, are about the size of the white people. The 
Osages, and some other tribes, who are of remarkable height, and 
fine figure, are exceptions to this remark. In these respects they 
exceed any equally large body of white people known among us. 
In the shape of their limbs, and their erect form, Indians have ev- 
idently the advantage over the whites. Some, whom I have seen, 
would be perfect models for the sculptor. Instances of deformity 
are rare. In bodily strength they are inferior to the whites ; as 
is true of all savages ; civilized man being always superior in 
strength to savage man.* They are fleet in their movements. 

* M. Peron, one of the distinguished French Naturalists, has had opportu- 
nity to notice, that men in a savage state are inferior in strength to men civili- 
zed. By actual experiment, he is said to have demonstrated, in every satis- 
factory manner, that the introduction of social order, and the sober habits of 
civilized life, does by no means, as some have asserted, impair, but actually 



70 REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



Indian runners are prodigies in respect to their long continued 
rapidity in conveying messages to distant tribes. Their journies 
far exceed in length, what a white man could perform in the same 
time, and with less weariness. With wonderful quickness inter- 
esting information is circulated among the tribes friendly to each 
other.* 

Indians talk but little. Their knowledge is limited, and their 
ideas few ; and they have the wisdom not to talk when they have 
nothing to say — a trait of character worthy the imitation of many, 
who claim to be wiser than Indians. In conversation they do not 
interrupt each other, but wait respectfully till the speaker has fin- 
ished. Except when intoxicated, they are not vociferous, noisy, 
or quarrelsome, in their common intercourse, but mild and obli- 
ging. Backbiting, whispering, cursing and swearing, to our shame 
it must be said, are vices, not of savage, but of civilized man ! ! 
The Indians who have been conversant with white men, like the 
ancient Cretans, are liars. Many among them are full of subtil- 
ty, deceit and artifice, implacable, unmerciful, without pity.j 
When enmity toward an individual, family, or tribe, from whatev- 
er cause is imbibed, it remains till death, unless previously grati- 
fied and removed, by taking revenge on his enemy. The most 

strengthen our physical powers. The following has been quoted as the result 
of his experiments on the subject, made with the Dianometer of M. Regnier. 

Force. 

Savages. With hands. With traces. 

Of Diemen's Land, - - - 50.6 - 

New-Holland, - - - 51.8 - - 14.8 

Timor, - 58.7 - - - 16.4 

Europeans. 

French, - 69.2 - - 22.1 

English, 71.4 23.8 

By civilizing the Indians we may hence calculate how much physical 
strength we shall gain ; beside an increase of their numbers. 

* In the summer of 1820, 1 received my first intelligence, and this shortly af- 
ter the event, of the capture of the two Winnebago murderers, who have since 
been executed, from a solitary chief, on a solitary island, in Lake Michigan. 

t A Pawnee brave, the subject of a very interesting anecdote (See Appen- 
dix, p. 247) may be considered as one among many other honorable exception 5 ' 
to these general remarks. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



71 



horrid scenes of torture and cruelty are witnessed by whole tribes 
of both sexes, old and young, without any show of pity. Thou- 
sands of helplesjs women and children, crying for mercy, have 
been tomahawked, and scalped, and mangled, without mercy. But 
these dispositions, and the indulgence of them, unhappily are not 
Confined to Indians. I would to God, for the honor of our coun- 
try, they were. Were we to charge the Indians with indulging 
these ferocious dispositions, we should expose ourselves to the 
just retort, " Physician, heal thyself. Thou that reproachest us 
as implacable, unmerciful, unpitying toward white people ; dost 
thou suffer thy warriors to indulge these same dispositions toward 
defenceless Indians, desolating and burning our pleasant villages, 
and slaughtering our shrieking wives and children ?" 

Hospitality is a prominent trait in the Indian character. To 
the stranger, whether white or red, they are hospitable and gen- 
erous, furnishing the best food and accommodations their dwellings 
afford ; often relinquishing their own food and lodging for the re- 
freshment and comfort of the stranger. 

The women are slaves of the men, performing all the labor 
and drudgery of the house, of the field, and of raising their chil- 
dren. Those women who have families, generally stoop in their 
walk; their heads project forward; they are deformed by the bur- 
dens which they are constrained to bear. The man considers it 
a disgrace to labor, and while at home is a mere lounger. 

Indian Chiefs are generally, not always, the ablest and wisest 
men in the nation; more frequently they are old men, and manage 
their Councils, and the affairs of the nation with sober dignity, 
great order, deliberation and decorum. They proceed slowly, but 
surely. Nothing is permitted to interrupt their great business 
after they engage in it; and when they have finished it, the Coun- 
cil breaks up. Special care is taken to prevent divisions in their 
deliberations, and in their respective nations. In conversing with 
individual chiefs and sections of tribes, in my late tour among 
them, and asking what they thought of the propositions of their 
Great Father, the President ; their reply, in frequent instances 
was — " We are but part of the nation ; we cannot answer. We 
will deliver your proposal to the Chiefs in Council, who will de- 
liberate on it, and decide, and then we will let you know our 
opinion." Their public speakers are generally their most elo- 



72 



RFPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



quent men, and many of them, in point of natural and forcible ges- 
ture, graceful attitude, and manly sense, not, indeed, in learning 
and information, would rank among the first orators in any age or 
country. Next to the Chiefs, are the medicine men, a species of 
jugglers, of whom we have given an account,* and who have usu- 
ally the dominant influence in the tribe. 

The Indians are shrewd observers, and quick discerners o? 
character. They have a high sense of honor, justice, and fair 
dealing, and great sensibility, when advantage is taken of their 
weakness and ignorance, to deprive them of their property, and 
in other ways, to trespass on their rights. t When their confi- 
dence, in this way, is once lost, it is difficult to regain it. Their 
distrust too, is not limited to the man who injures them, but is ex- 
tended to all whom he is supposed to represent. " This white 
man would cheat us out of all our property. All white men would 
do the same. White men are all cheats." They have not our 
knowledge and means to make the just discrimination. This view 
shews again how necessary it is, that the Government, in all their 
transactions with Indians, should be just, faithful to fulfil all their 
promises to them with paternal kindness, in their uneducated, de- 
pendent state. In this way alone can they regain and secure their 
lost confidence ; and without their confidence and affection, we can 
do them very little good. This view of the Indian character, also, 
shews how indispensable it is to the success of any plans for the 
benefit of Indians, that none but men of good and exemplary char- 
acter, should ever be permitted to go among them, either in the 
Military profession, as Agents or Traders, or in any other capa- 
city. The reasons are so obvious, that no observations are ne- 
cessary to elucidate or enforce them. 

* Appendix p. 100. 

+ The following pleasant Anecdote is in point, and exactly illustrates my 
meaning. — A white man and an Indian agreed to hunt together, and to share 
equally the game they should take. At night it appeared, that they had only 
a turkey and a buzzard ; the latter a bird of no value. Well, said the white 
man to the Indian, we are now to divide what we have taken, and if you 
please, I will take the turkey and you shall take the buzzard — or else you 
may take the buzzard, and I will take the turkey. Ah, replied the Indian, you 
no say turkey for poor Indian once. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



73 



There is as visible a difference of character among the different 
tribes, as there is in our own population ; few general observa- 
tions, therefore, will apply to them as a body. Whatever may 
have been their origin, about which there are many opinions, and 
none of which can be relied on as correct, they are certainly an in- 
telligent and noble part of our race, and capable of high moral and 
intellectual improvement. When we consider their mode of life, 
the few advantages they have enjoyed for cultivating and enlarg- 
ing their minds, that they have no written language, no books, on 
education, but in the art of war, hunting, and a few other things, 
and no religion other than that, which, not to use stronger expres- 
sions is very imperfect, and of little moral effect; we may well won- 
der that we find them in the state we have described. They are 
«i race, who on every correct principle ought to be saved from ex- 
tinction, if it be possible to save them. They are entitled to all 
that can be done for this purpose. 

Poligamy. 

Poligamy, limited principally to the Chiefs, and to the wealthy, 
is practiced generally among the Indians. This practice should 
be delicately, but effectually discountenanced, not only because it 
is a violation of the laws of God, but because it tends to diminish 
the increase, and to endanger the harmony, of families, and to ren- 
der difficult and perplexing the proper government and education of 
children. This practice ever yields and vanishes before the light 
of civilization and Christianity. Let in this light on the Indians, 
and the abolition of this practice will follow of course. 

The education of Indian females and intermarriages between Indians 
and white people. 

I connect these subjects, because, in contemplating the latter, 
the former should be kept in view. While Indians remain in 
their present state, the minds of civilized people must revolt at 
the idea of intermarrying with them. It is natural, and decent, 
that it should be so. Intermarriages, however, in the present 
state of the Indians, or, that which amounts to the same thing, 

10 



74 REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 

have taken place to a great extent, and this too by many men of 
respectable talents and standing in society.* More than half the 
Cherokee nation, a large part of the Choctaws and Chickasaws, 
and I may add indeed, of all other tribes with whom the whites 
have had intercourse, are of mixed blood. The oifspring of this 
intercourse, a numerous body, are of promising talents and ap- 
pearance. Their complexion is nearly that of the white popula- 
tion. They require only education, and the enjoyment of our priv- 
ileges, to make them a valuable portion of our citizens. Let thi# 
education then be given them, particularly to the female Indians. 

It is essential to the success of the project of the Government, 
that the female character among our native tribes, be raised from 
its present degraded state, to its proper rank and influence. This 
should be a primary object with the instructors of Indians. By 
educating female children, they will become prepared, in turn, 
to educate their own children, to manage their domestic concerns 
with intelligence and propriety, and, in this way, they will gradu- 
ally attain their proper standing and influence in society. Many 
examples exist, to shew that all this is practicable.! Thus edu- 

* Mous. Peniere, an exile from France during her revolution, a man of gen- 
ius and information, who resided four years among the Indians, a careful and 
intelligent observer of their character, speaks thus on the subject of intermar- 
riages. " Encourage marriages between the whites and Indians. The sec- 
ond generation resulting from those alliances, would be totally white and 
beautiful. The Indians, in general, are better shaped, and more robust, than 
the whites ; and their birth is as pure and as noble as ours." 

MS. Memoir on the civilisation of the Indians. 

t The following extract from Capt. Bell's Journal of his tour to the Rocky 
Mountains, furnishes one example out of many others, to our purpose. 

"On the 22d Sept. 1820, we halted at the house of a Cherokee Chief, by 
the name of Watt Webber, a half breed, His place is beautifully situated on 
a high bluff upon the bank of the Arkansaw river, secure from inundation, and 
is the great thoroughfare of travellers from the Missouri, to the country 
south of the Arkansaw, above the Cadrons. Webber is tall, well-formed, 
dresses in the costume of the whites, is affable, and of polite manners. Though 
he understands English, he would converse only in the Cherokee language. 
His wife is a large, fleshy woman, a full-blooded Indian, dressed in every par- 
ticular like genteel, well dressed white women. She attends diligently her- 
self, to all her domestic concerns, which are conducted with the strictest or- 
der and neatness. She also spins, and weaves, and has taught these arts to 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



75 



cated, and the marriage institution, in its purity, introduced, the 
principal obstacles to intermarriage with them would be removed. 
Let the Indians, therefore, be taught all branches of knowledge 
pertaining to civilized man ; then let intermarriage with them be- 
come general, and the end which the Government has in view 
will be completely attained. They would then be literally of one 
blood with us, be merged in the nation, and saved from extinction. 

Society for promoting the general welfare of the Indian tribes with- 
in the United States. 

I would suggest the expediency of forming a Society, with the 
above or a similar title to be composed of members from each of 
the States and Territories, and of all denominations of christians 
within the U. States. This Society to be placed under the pat- 
ronage of the principal officers of the national Government. 

The object of this Society is summarily stated in its title. It 
should embrace every thing which such a Society could do, that 
has a bearing on the improvement of the whole Indian population 
of our country, in all branches of useful knowledge. For these 
purposes it should be made their business to investigate the his- 
tory, and to examine into the ancient memorials, government, re- 
ligion, customs and manners of the former, but more especially of 
the existing tribes ; to ascertain their capacity for literary, moral, 
and intellectual improvements — to enquire into the efforts which 
have hitherto been made for imparting to them the blessings of 
civilization and Christianity, and to bring into view the results of 
these efforts, whether successful or otherwise ; and where they 

her domestics. Her black servant acted as 'our interpreter, in conversing 
with her husband. We dined with this family. Their table was handsome- 
ly prepared, with China plates, and corresponding furniture. The food was 
cooked and served up after the manner of well bred white people ; and Mrs. 
W. did the honors of the table in a lady like manner, with ease, and grace, 
and dignity. v 

" These Cherokees lately removed from the rest of their tribe, on the east 
of the Mississippi, near the white settlements, where they became thus civili- 
zed ; and here, the civilized part of them, are an example which will not be 
without good effects, to the interior indians." 



76 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



have failed, to state the probable causes of failure, and to suggest 
the proper remedies ; to ascertain the places of residence, the 
numbers, dispositions, and, generally, the present actual state of 
these tribes, and ot the improvements which have been introdu- 
ced among them, and to suggest, from time to time, to the Gov- 
ernment, and to the religious Associations, who possess the au- 
thority, the means, and the disposition to act directly upon the In- 
dians, such plans and measures, as may assist them in conducting 
this wide spread, complex, and difficult service. 

This society should also be scientific in its character, and em- 
brace in its attentions, every thing in the Indian Territories, 
which might improve the geography, geology, mineralogy, natu- 
ral history, and agriculture of our country. Such a society, in its 
operations and results, would require public rooms for a cabinet, 
which might be made a very rich and useful one, and a library 
for depositing suitable books and documents, and the correspon- 
dence of the Secretaries. For these rooms the Society, consid- 
ering its nature and object, would naturally look to the Congress, 
and also for the funds, necessary to carry on its extensive opera- 
tions. 

I would further suggest, that the Society hold their annual meet- 
ings at the seat of the Government, at the periods for opening the 
sessions of Congress, and at these meetings make their annual Re- 
port, and transact their annual business. 

The advantages, and 1 might add, the necessity of such a Socie- 
ty for the purposes suggested, are obvious and great. The Gov- 
ernment require just the aid that such a society would be able to 
give, It would be as an eye to the Government, and act the part 
of pioneers and surveyors to them in pursuing an important object 
in an unexplored wilderness. 

Since the above article was written, a Society of the above kind 
Tecommended, has been formed and organized at the City of 
Washington. See its Constitution, App. K. k. 

Indian College. 

As an important aid to the Government in their project in regard 
to the Indians, I would suggest the expediency of establishing, in 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



77 



some suitable situation, a College, for the education of such In- 
dian youth, as shall have passed through the primary Indian 
schools with reputation and promise. Here, under competent 
instructors, let them be prepared to teach their brethren of the 
wilderness, all, even the higher, branches of useful knowledge. 
Let this College be liberally endowed out of the avails of those 
public lands, which have been purchased of the Indians. To 
what better purpose can a portion of them be applied ? Of these 
lands there is enough, and to spare, at the disposal of the Govern- 
ment. Let able and skilful Professors be appointed for this Insti- 
tution, and whenever any of the educated Indian youth shall be- 
come qualified for teachers, let them be rewarded, and encoura- 
ged, by promoting them to such offices in the instruction and gov- 
ernment of the College, as they are capable of tilling with reputation 
and respectability. Let them thus feel their own strength and im- 
portance, and have the full benefit of all the motives to exertion, 
which we enjo}^. 

Such an Institution, as has now been recommended, was early 
established, and nobly endowed, in India, for the benefit of that 
populous region; and its good fruits have far exceeded the high 
expectations of its friends.* We might reasonably expect the 
like good effects from a similar Institution in our own country. 

The Indians, within a very few years, might, and probably will be, 
extensively taught by their own civilized and educated brethren; 
numbers of whom are already prepared, as far as existing advan- 
tages would permit, and many more are preparing to engage in this 
work. And if we are, in future, hxxtjust to the Indians, and leave 
to them the means of supporting the necessary literary and religious 

* Among the Institutions in India, for the improvement of its mixed popula- 
tion, are the Asiatic Society, by Sir William Jones ; a College at Fort William, 
by the Marquis, Wellesley, in which are Professors of English, Mahometan, and 
Hindoo languages, history, geography, natural history, &c. In 1816, a College 
was established by the Hindoos themselves, for the instruction of their sons in 
the English and Indian languages, and in the literature and sciences of Eu- 
rope and Asia. Here Indian youth are educated to be preachers to their own 
countrymen. More recently still, an Episcopal Mission College has been es- 
tablished, and handsomely endowed, whose principal object is to prepare the 
natives and others to be preachers, catechists and school-masters. Beside 
which there is a School-Book and Bible Society, and others of less promi- 
nence. 



78 REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 

Institutions among themselves, and teach them how to use them, 
they will gradually, and ultimately be taken off our hands, and will 
be able, without the aid of our money or our labor, to take care of 
the education of their own children, and to support all the good in- 
stitutions requisite in a civilized community. Indians will educate 
Indians, and the whole business of their civilization will be carried 
on among themselves. 

The School at Cornwall,* in Connecticut, could be very easily 
raised into such an Institution. The foundations are already laid, 
and are broad enough to bear such an Institution, and able and ex- 
perienced instructors are now on the ground. Every thing, by a 
kind Providence, seems thereto be prepared to our hand. Let 
this then be the Indian College of our country; at least so long as 
to make a fair experiment. Let it be at once liberally endowed 
by the Government of the United States, and conducted, on liberal 
principles, by the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Mis- 
sions, who planted it, and have hitherto, by their Board of Agents, 
superintended and supported it. Let the number of Instructors 
be increased, and also the number of pupils, and liberal provis- 
ion be made for their support. Let it be open, as it now is, for 
heathen youth from all parts of the world, who may be thrown on 
our shores, and a department of instruction suited to these unedu- 
cated youth, be established in connection with the College. Let 
these be here gratuitously educated, on the bounty of the Govern- 
ment, and sent back to the several places of their nativity, to edu- 
cate their own countrymen in turn. What greater blessings can 
we send forth from our country into heathen lands, than youth 
thus liberally educated ? In what way can we, with so little ex- 
pense, raise and extend the reputation of our country, so effectu- 
ally promote peace and good will among men, and diffuse blessings 
through the world ? 

Education Families. 

I give this name to those bodies which have been commonly de- 
nominated Mission Families, because it seems better to describe 
their character, and may less offend the opposers of Missions. By 

*A full account of this School is given in the Appendix, p. 267. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



79 



an Education Family I mean, an association of individual families, 
formed of one or more men regularly qualified to preach the Gos- 
pel, to be at the head of such a family; of school-masters and mis- 
tresses ; of farmers, blacksmiths, carpenters, cabinet-makers, 
mill-wrights, and other mechanics — of women capable of teaching 
the use of the needle, the spinning-wheel, the loom, and all kinds 
of domestic manufactures, cookery, &.c. common in civilized fami- 
lies. This family to consist of men and women in a married state, 
with their children, all possessing talents for their respective offi- 
ces, with a missionary spirit, devoted to their work; contented to 
labor without salary, receiving simply support. The size of these 
families to be proportioned to the importance of their respective sta- 
tions, and to the number of Indians around them, who are to be ed- 
ucated. Such families have been established, and may be seen in 
actual operation, and accompanied with their fruits, among the 
Cherokee, Choctaw and Osage Indians. These bodies are to be 
the great instruments in the hands of the government, for educa- 
ting and civilizing the Indians.* 



The claims of the Indians on the government and people of the Uni- 
ted States, and the way to satisfy these claims. 

In the existing state of the Indians, and of our connections with 
them, what do we owe them ? What are the duties, in reference 
to them, of the civil, and of the religious community ? The duties 
of each are different, but connected. Neither, alone, can do all 
that seems necessary to be done. There is enough for both to do; 
and a necessity that there should be mutual co-operation. 

The Government, according to the law of nations, having juris- 
diction over the Indian territory, and the exclusive right to dis- 
pose of its soil, the whole Indian population is reduced, of neces- 
sary consequence, to a dependent situation. They are without 
the privileges of self-government, except in a limited degree; and 
without any transferable property. They are ignorant of nearly 
all the useful branches of human knowledge, of the Bible, and of 
the only Savior of men, therein revealed. They are weak, and 
ready to perish; we are strong, and with the help of God, able to 



* See Appendix. 



80 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



support, to comfort and to save them. In these circumstances 5 
the Indians have claims on us of high importance to them, and to 
our own character and reputation, as an enlightened, just and 
christian nation. In return for what they virtually yield, they are 
undoubtedly entitled to expect from our honor and justice, pro- 
tection in all the rights which they are permitted to retain. They 
are entitled, as "children" of the government, for so we call them, 
peculiarly related to it, to kind, paternal treatment, to justice in all 
our dealings with them, to education in the useful arts and scien- 
ces, and in the principles and duties of our religion. In a word, 
they have a right to expect and to receive from our civil and re- 
ligious communities combined, that sort of education, in all its 
branches, which we are accustomed to give to the minority of our 
own population, and thus to be raised gradually and ultimately, to 
the rank, and to the enjoyment of all the rights and priviliges of 
freemen, and citizens of the United States. This I conceive to 
be the precise object of the Government. If we fulfil not these 
duties, which grow naturally out of our relation to Indians, we 
cannot avoid the imputation of injustice, unkindness, and unfaith- 
fulness to them, — our national character must suffer in the estima- 
tion of all good men. If we refuse to do the things we have men- 
tioned for the Indians, let us be consistent, and cease to call them 
"children" — and let them cease to address our President, as their 
"great Father." Let us leave to them the unmolested enjoyment 
of the territories they now possess, and give back to them those 
which we have taken away from them. 

But the Government, and it is honorable to their character, 
have not forgotten their obligations. In fulfilment of them, in 
part, the Congress of the United States have placed at the dispo- 
sal of their President, the annual sum of ten thousand dollars, 
which will doubtless be increased, as the plans of the government 
shall be extended, and require it, to be expended by him in ways 
which he may judge the most suitable, for the civilization and hap- 
piness of the Indians. The regulations adopted to guide in the ex- 
penditure of this fund, and the account rendered by the Secretary 
of War, of the manner in which it has been expended, will exhibit 
this paternal and benevolent effort of the Government, both in prin- 
ciple and operation.* 



See App. L, I. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



81 



Objections to Civilizing the Indians. 

When we look back in the pages of history four or five hundred 
years, and see what then was the state of our own Ancestors, and 
whence sprung the most polished and scientific nations of Europe, 
we should scarcely have supposed, that any man, acquainted with 
history, or making any pretensions to candor, would be found among 
the objectors to attempts to civilize our Indians, and thus to save 
them from perishing. Yet, painful as is the fact, objections have been 
made to the present course of procedure with Indians, and from men 
too, whose standing and office in society are such, as it would be 
deemed disrespectful to pass unnoticed. "The project," it has been 
said, " is visionary and impracticable. Indians can never be ta- 
med; they are incapable of receiving, or of enjoying, the blessings 
proposed to be offered to them." Some, I will hope, for the hon- 
or of our country, that the number is small, have proceeded far- 
ther, and said, "Indians are not worth saving. They are perishing 
—let them perish. The sooner they are gone, the better." And 
to hasten such a catastrophe, a formal project has been actually de- 
vised, and put on paper, and the projector has had the effrontery to 
offer his infernal project for the adoption of the government ! ! !* 

A sufficient answer to such of these objections, as require no- 
tice (for truly some of them are so shocking, that one can hardly 
think of them, much less undertake to answer them) will be found, 
I conceive, in the facts collected into the Appendix of this work.1 
It is too late to say that Indians cannot be civilized. The facts 
referred to, beyond all question, prove the contrary. The ev- 
idence of actual experiment in every case, is paramount to all ob- 
jections founded in mere theory, or, as in the present case, in na- 
ked and unsupported assertions. The specimens of composition, and 
the account given, on unquestionable authority, of the acquisitions 
of Indian youths, of other kinds of knowledge, in the Cornwall, and 
other Indian schools, can hardly fail to convince all, who are wil- 
ling to be convinced, that it is practicable^ civilize, educate and 

*I have not seen the document here referred to, but the fact stated rests on. 
substantial authority. 

t See Appendix M. m. 
11 



82 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



save Indians. Without fear of contradiction, then, we assume 
this point as established. Indians are of the same nature and ori- 
ginal, and of one blood, with ourselves ; of intellectual powers as 
strong, and capable of cultivation, as ours. They, as well as our- 
selves, are made to be immortal. To look down upon them, 
therefore, as an inferior race, as untameable, and to profit by their 
ignorance and weakness ; to take their property from them for a 
small part of its real value, and in other ways to oppress them ; is 
undoubtedly wrong, and highly displeasing to our common Crea- 
tor, Lawgiver and final Judge. 

Plan for civilizing the Indians. 

The general plan, embracing all its ramifications, which I would 
respectfully submit to the consideration and adoption of the gov- 
ernment, with the improvements hereafter mentioned, is that, sub- 
stantially, which has been devised by the American Board of Com- 
missioners for Foreign Missions, and is now in successful operation 
under the direction of this Board, and of other similar associations 
of different denominations, and has already received the sanction 
and patronage of the Government. This plan, "in the full tide of 
successful experiment," is now in a course of exhibition before 
the public, and is looked at with joy and admiration, by philan- 
thropists on both sides of the Atlantic* 

Removal and colonization of the Indians, now living within the set-, 
tlements of the white people. 

On the subject of the removal of the Indians, who now dwell 
within our settlements, there are different opinions among wise 
and good men. The point on which they divide is, whether it 
be best to let these Indians quietly remain on their present Reser- 
vations, and to use oui^ndeavors to civilize them where they are; 
or for the Government to take their Reservations, and give 
them an equivalent in lands to be purchased of other tribes be- 

* See App. N. n. 



V 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 83 

yond our present settlements. The Indians themselves too, are, 
divided in opinion on this subject ; a part are for removing, and a 
a part for remaining, as in the case of the Cherokees, Delawares, 
Senecas, Oneidas, Shawanees, and indeed most of the other tribes 
living among us. Difficulties in deciding this question present them- 
selves, on which side soever it be viewed. To remove these In- 
dians far away from their present homes, from " the bones of their 
fathers," into a wilderness, among strangers, possibly hostile, to 
live as their new neighbors live, by hunting, a state to which they 
have not lately been accustomed, and which is incompatible with 
civilization, can hardly be reconciled with the professed views 
and objects of the Government in civilizing them. This would 
not be deemed by the world a wise course, nor one which would 
very probably lead to the desired end. Should that part of the 
tribes only, remove, who are willing to go, and the remainder be 
permitted to stay — this division of already enfeebled remnants of 
tribes, would but still more weaken their strength, diminish their 
influence, and hasten their destruction. Nor would this partial 
removal satisfy those who are for removing the whole ; nor those 
either, who are for retaining the whole. The latter wish them 
to remain for the benevolent purpose of educating them all where 
they now are, urging, that they are now among us, in view of ex- 
amples of civilized life; and where necessary instruction can be 
conveniently, and with little expense, imparted to them. On the 
other hand there is much to be said in favor of the removal of the 
smaller tribes, and remnants of tribes — not, however, into the 
wilderness, to return again to the savage life, but to some suitable, 
prepared portion of our country, where, collected in one body, 
they may be made comfortable, and with advantage be educated 
together, as has already been mentioned, in the manner in which 
we educate our own children. Some such course as this, I ap- 
prehend, will satisfy a great majority of the reflecting part of those 
who interest themselves at all in this subject, and is, in my belief, 
the only practicable course which can be pursued,- consistently 
with the professed object of the Government.* 



* See Appendix O. o. 



84 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



Revolution now in operation among the Indians. 

There is evidently a great and important revolution in the state 
of our Indian population already commenced, and now rapidly going 
forward, affecting immediately the tribes among us and on our bor- 
ders, and which will ultimately and speedily be felt by those at 
the remotest distance. The evidence of this revolution exists in 
the peculiar interest which is felt and manifested for the general 
improvement and welfare of Indians, and in the peculiar corres- 
ponding feelings and movements among the Indians themselves. 
The civil and religious communities are remarkably awake on this 
subject, and are making joint efforts for the improvement and 
happiness of Indians, such as were never made in any former pe- 
riod of our history. The Chiefs and sensible men among these 
tribes, to a great extent, feel that a change in their situation has 
become necessary, that they must quit the hunter, and adopt the 
agricultural state, or perish. Of this fact I myself am a witness. 
There is an increasing willingness, which in some instances rises 
to strong desire, on the part of the Indians, to accept the benevo- 
lent offers of instruction held out to them by the Government, and by 
Christian Associations. There is a most remarkable reciprocity of 
feelings on this subject, which plainly indicates,that the hand of heav- 
en is in it; as no power short of this could ever have produced such 
a state of things. This is for our encouragement, and it is encour- 
agement enough, to persevere. In such circumstances we can- 
not go back. Honor, justice, humanity, all that makes man re- 
spectable in the sight of God and men, imperiously require us to 
go forward, in full fait^j, till this work, so auspiciously commen- 
ced, shall be accomplished. 



Obligations of the government to meet this nezv state of things, and 
the manner of fulfilling these obligations. 

This new state of things requires corresponding measures on 
the part of the government, to whom we look to take the lead in 
carrying on this revolution, which, if rightly directed and conduc- 
ted, will save the Indians from ruin, and raise them to respecta- 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



85 



bility and happiness, and reflect high and lasting honor on the Ad- 
ministration which shall accomplish it. 

As the government assumes the guardianship of the Indians, and 
in this relation provides for their proper education, provision also 
should be made for the exercise of a suitable government and con- 
trol over them. This government, unquestionably, should be in its 
nature parental — absolute, kind and mild, such as may be created by 
a wise union of a well-selected military establishment, and an Edu- 
cation Family: The one possessing the power, the other the sof- 
tening and quailfying influence; both combined would constitute, 
to all the purposes requisite, the parental or guardian authority. 
A code of laws and regulations must also be formed, to meet the 
new state of the Indians, which should remove the unjust, morti- 
fying, and provoking differences which are now made between 
them and white people, in the administration of justice; a code, 
which shall provide effectually against the introduction of spiritu- 
ous liquors among them, which are the source and immediate occa- 
sion of most of the difficulties, quarrels and wars, which take place 
among themselves, and between them and us. This is an evil, 
which, if not effectually cured, will binder and render abortive, all 
efforts which may be made for their benefit. No good can be 
done to the Indians, while this evil remains. 

Another evil equally destructive of the Indians, and equally 
necessary to be provided against by proper laws and regulations, 
is, intercourse with unprincipled white people. Indians complain, 
and justly too, t)iat their "morals are corrupted by bad white men." 
This is well known to be the fact, and the cause of incalculable injury 
to the Indians, as well as of national disgrace. As we would hope 
to promote their welfare, this evil must, in some way, by the wisdom 
and arm of the government, be removed. It can be done effect- 
ually in one way, and but one way; and that is, by the appointment, 
exclusively, of good men to fill all public offices relating to Indians; 
men of principle, who, in the discharge of their official duties, will 
honestly, faithfully and disinterestedly promote the welfare of In- 
dians. Such men, of competent abilities and qualifications, can 
undoubtedly be found, and in sufficient numbers, to carry on the 
whole trade, and other intercourse with the Indians, on the plan 
suggested in another part of this Report; and to fill all the offices 
pertaining to the superintendancy and agency of Indian affairs, as 



86 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



well as to negotiate treaties for various objects, with the Indian 
tribes.* 

I am fully aware of the delicacy of this subject, in the view of it 
I am now taking; but its importance in order to the attainment of the 
object of the government, forbids that I should pass it unnoticed. I 
dare not be unfaithful to my government — to my conscience — nor to 
my God. Example, in the case before us, peculiarly, as in all oth- 
er cases, must accompany instruction and precept. We cannot rea- 
sonably expect that the latter will have any good effect, where the 
first is wanting. Let, then, the plan of Iudian trade, the selection 
of officers and soldiers for the military establishments, which are 
connected with Indians, the appointment of Indian superintend- 
ents and agents, and treaty commissioners, all be made, in future, 
in reference to the influence which these establishments and offi- 
cers, respectively, are expected to exert over the Indians. Let 
this whole combined influence be uniform in its character, and 
wholly good, and be made to bear upon every measure put in ope- 
ration for the civil, moral, and intellectual improvement of the In- 
dians. 

In other words, and to come to the very pivot of this business- 
Let the whole existing system of operations in regard to Indians, 
embracing trade, and all other kinds of intercourse with them by 
Indian Agencies, Treaties for their lands, and all laws relating to 
them, be annulled, and all things removed out of the way, prepara- 
tory to the laying of new foundations, and the erection of a new 
and more commodious and sightly fabric. I pass no censure 
on the present system. It was formed by our wise men. But it 
was formed for other times, and for a state of things among our- 
selves, and among the Indians, widely different from the present. 
The alterations in this system, which have been made at different 
periods, to meet the changes which have taken place, have de- 
formed it. It is now an unsightly, and, compared with what it 
might be made, an inefficient mass. In many instances its opera- 
tions are wasteful and injurious. Many agencies, formerly neces- 
sary, from the removal of the Indians, or a change in their cir- 
cumstances, have become mere sinecures, places of emolument, 
without business, consuming the public money, without contribu- 
ting any thing to the public good. Several of these agencies 
See next article. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 87 

combined, would furnish no more business than a single man, 
of proper qualifications for an agent, could perform. The fault is 
in the system itself, not in the minister whose office it is to carry 
this system into effect ; nor yet in the officers who occupy these 
sinecures. Many abuses, many sinks, uselessly swallowing up 
the public funds exist, which require, and no doubt will receive 
the pointed eye of the Executive, and remedies, which Congress 
alone can supply. These remedies will be found in a new system 
throughout, of all Indian affairs, into which is to be incorporated 
all that is sound and good in the old, leaving out only that which 
has become obsolete— a system shaped to the new state of things, 
to the great changes now in operation — a system, that shall com- 
bine in it all the results of past experience, all the wisdom of the 
Government, and command in its execution the energies of the 
nation — a system, which shall hereafter, when they shall have 
felt its effects, call forth the thanks of the Indians, and secure for 
our nation the applauses of the world. 

improvements in Education Families, and New Establishments re- 
commended. 

My instructions are "to report my opinion as to the improve- 
ments which may be made, and the new establishments, to pro- 
mote the object of the Government in civilizing the Indians, which 
can be advantageously formed." 

The number and location of the Education Families already es- 
tablished, the dates of these establishments and the religious asso- 
ciations who have made them, are given in a table annexed to this 
work. The manner in which these famines are formed, the pur- 
poses they are intended to accomplish, and the means they are to, 
employ, have also been stated. The single improvement which I 
would here respectfully suggest, and recommend, is the following: 
that, as fast as the course of things shall render expedient and 
practicable, Indian superintendants, agents, sub-agents, and all other 
officers of government, who have to do with Indians, for reasons 
stated in the last article, be either members of one or other of these 
Education Families, (the Families in future to be formed in refer- 
ence to this purpose, and to contain persons qualified for these 
several offices,) or, so intimately connected with, and friendly to 
them, as shall bring all their official influence and authority over 
tJte Indians, to aid them in all their operations. 



88 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



The advantages of such a course would be, 1st. An entire sav 
ing of all the salaries and expenses of these officers; because all 
the members of these families are without salaries, receiving mere- 
ly support. What is now given to these officers from the United 
States' treasury would, of course, go into the common treasury of 
the Education Families, and be expended in the same manner as 
are other funds, given by the government. The amount of this 
saving would be equal to the amount of all the salaries of the offi- 
cers above named, who should be taken from the Education Fami- 
lies. 2dly. Were these officers members of Education Families, 
it would bring to these families all their official influence with the 
Indians. Channels, in this way, would be opened, numerous and 
extensive, for diffusing useful knowledge among them. The duties 
of an Indian agent, faithfully and affectionately fulfilled, are pecul- 
iarly well adapted to open the hearts, and conciliate the esteem 
and love of Indians. 3dly. The selection of candidates for these 
offices, by the several religious associations who form these Edu- 
cation Families, would greatly assist the government in discharging 
a delicate and difficult duty, and would happily divide with them 
the responsibility for the faithful discharge of the duties of officers 
so appointed. It can hardly be supposed, that men so selected, 
appointed, and inspected, would violate their trust. 

It is extremely important that all these officers should be honest 
men, of fair moral character; men of discernment, of knowledge 
of human nature, of kind and affable dispositions and manners, of 
decision, promptness and energy in action. If to these should be 
added christian piety, the character would be complete. Were all 
the officers above named, of this description, their influence to do 
away existing prejudices in the minds of Indians, and to secure 
their affections and confidence, would be immense. On the char- 
acter of these officers in future, very much will depend in effecting 
the object of the government. These offices should never be con- 
verted into mere sinecures. 

Under this article it may be proper to suggest, the great impor- 
tance of establishing, at every military post in the Indian country', 
an Education Family. By the union of these two establishment? 
alone, in my opinion, can be formed, the kind of authority proper to 
be exercised over Indians, in their present state, with reference to 
iheir education. In this way, at the same time, would be imparted 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



89 



to the soldiery, that moral and religious instruction which is neces- 
sary to prepare them for wholesome and exemplary intercourse 
with the Indians. These military establishments, removed beyond 
the influence of civilized society and of its stated religious and mor- 
al institutions, without Chaplains, or any means to resist or 
check the natural propensities of man to become corrupt, have, in 
fact, degenerated into a lamentable state, exhibiting, at once, to 
Indians a demoralizing example; counteracting all the influence 
and exertions, of the Education Families, and weakening incalcu- 
lably the strength of the defenders of our country. One sober, 
moral, pious soldier will effect more for the preservation of 
the rights and liberties of a nation, than ten of an opposite char- 
acter.* 

In this view of the subject, Chaplains at all our military posts 
would be of most important benefit; but at the military posts es- 
tablished among the Indians, they are, in reference to their 
civilization, unquestionably indispensable. The Education Fam- 
ilies, were they established at each of these posts, would fulfil 
all the duties of Chaplains, and other duties also, of much im- 
portance, and all this, without any additional expense to the gov- 
ernment. 

The idea of having Indians every where see nothing in white 
people ; but what will give them favorable opinions of civilized 
life, and of the Christian religion, cannot be too strenuously urged, 
nor too deeply impressed on the public mind. The Indians 
quickly perceive the coincidence, or the contradiction, between 
professions and conduct, and their confidence or distrust, follow of 
course. This distrust, unfortunately, exists already extensively 
among the Indians. In repeated interviews with them, after in- 
forming them what good things their Great Father the President, 

* The following facts exhibit in a convincing light, the effects, and value of 
Christian Ordinances, and instruction. 

"A gentleman of large landed property (in England) lately declared, that 
on one of his estates the people were quiet, and sober, and industrious, and 
were never disposed to injure his property; whilst on another they were tur- 
bulent and profligate, and idle, and injurious. And he publicly confessed, that, 
the difference arose from the people, in the first case, having the instruction of 
faithful, pious ministers, and in the other not. If pure Christianity were univer- 
sally known and obeyed, the whole face of human society would be changed.' ' 

Rev. Thomas Scott. 

12 



90 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



was ready to bestow on ihem, if they were willing to receive them , 
the Chiefs significantly shook their heads, and said — " It may be so, 
or it may be not. We doubt it. We don't know what to believe." 
Unless this dustrust be removed from the minds of Indians, and 
their confidence in the Government established, the best efforts for 
their benefit will be impeded, if not wholly frustrated. 

I am happy in the explicit sanction of the President and Sec- 
retary of War to the sentiments now expressed, contained in their 
Regulations for distributing the funds deposited in their hands 
for the civilization of the Indians.* They say, " it is considered 
to be the duty of all persons, who may be employed, or attached 
to any institution, not only to set a good example of sobriety, in- 
dustry and honesty, but, as far as practicable, to impress on the 
minds of the Indians the friendly and benevolent views of the gov- 
ernment toward them, and the advantages they would derive by 
yielding to the policy of government, and co-operating with it in 
such measures, as it may deem necessary for their civilization and 
happiness. A contrary course of conduct cannot fail to incur the 
displeasure of government, as it is impossible that the object which 
it has in view can be effected, and peace be habitually preserved, 
if the distrust of the Indians, as to its benevolent views, should 
be excited.'* 

In these just and excellent sentiments, we have the pledge 
of the government, that they will remove at once every offi- 
cer in the Indian department, who does not " set a good ex- 
ample of sobriety, industry and honesty," to Indians, and that 
no officer in any branch of this department will be appointed in 
future, who is not a 44 sober, industrious, and honest man. This 
pledge is invaluable, and cannot fail to receive the applause and 
gratitude, and to command the confidence and warm support, of 
the religious community. 



J\ *ew stations for Education Families. 

Under this head I shall simplj name these stations, and refer to 
?he Appendix for my reasons for naming them. 



I 



* See App. p. 290. 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



91 



1. In East Florida, among the Seminoles, and the remnants of 
tribes in that Territory, at the place where it is proposed to col- 
lect these now scattered Indians. [App. N. n.] 

2. Among the Creeks, one or more. 

3. Several more among the Cherokees and Choctaws, in addi- 
tion to the stations already occupied. 

4. Among the Chickasaws, one or more. 

5. Among the Potawattamies and Ottawas, on the south east 
shores of Lake Michigan. [App. O. o.] 

6. On Flint River, and another on Saganau Bay, in Michigan 
Territory, west of Detroit. [App. p. 20.] 

7. At L'Abre Croche, on the east shore of Lake Michigan, 
thirty-six miles south west of Mackinaw. [App. p. 26.] 

8. At Mackinaw. [App. p. 6.] 

9. At Green Bay. [App. p. 50.] 

10. On the new purchase made by the Stockbridge Indians, 
with some portion of the Six Nations, on Fox river, between the 
Menominee and Winnebago Indians. [App. P. p.] 

11. At Chicago. [App. pp. 108 and 140.] 

12. At Fort Armstrong. 

13. At Prairie du Chien. [App. Q, q.] 

14. At Sandy Lake. [App. pp. 30, 31, 33, &c] 

15. At St. Peter's near St. Anthony's Falls. [App. R. r.] 

16. At Council Bluffs. [App. S. s.] 

17. Several more among the Osages, Cherokees, Kansas, and 
Quapaws, on Osage, Arkansaw and Kansas rivers. 

18. At or near Natchitoches, in Louisiana. 

19. On Columbia river. 

For reasons stated in the Appendix, all these are favorable 
openings for the establishment of Education Families. 

Small Pox„ 

To secure success in civilizing the Indians, it is necessary, by 
all acts of kindness for their welfare, to gain their confidence and 
their affections. This is done, as in other ways, so particularly, 
by making them comfortable, and by manifesting, that we take an 



92 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



interest in promoting their good. One effectual way of doing 
this is, to make them feel the benefits of our medical knowledge. 
One skilful physician should be attached to every Education Fam- 
ily. Contagious and fatal diseases have destroyed thousands of 
Indians, which, by the application of well known remedies, might 
have been checked on their first appearance, and their desolating 
effects prevented. The small pox, particularly, has frequently, 
and in many tribes, made awful havoc. In 1802, it swept off half 
the population from the Missouri to New-Mexico, in the region 
of the Pawnees, and west to the Rocky Mountains :* and the Ot- 
tawas, at L'Abre Croche, about the year 1799, lost half their 
number by the same disease. It is very desirable, therefore, that 
vaccination, should be, by all means, introduced as extensively as 
possible among the Indians. 



Plan for conducting Indian Trade. 

In addition to what has been said on this subject, page 39 to 64, 
I simply state, in few words, a plan of conducting Indian trade, 
practicable in its nature, which, if adopted, could hardly fail of 
producing the happiest results. It is this: Let the whole Indian 
territory, which is now the sphere of Indian trade, be divided into 
districts of convenient size, and the boundaries of each district de- 
lined. In each of these districts, at a place which shall best ac- 
commodate the Indians inhabiting it, let a village be formed of such 
traders as shall choose to occupy it, with their interpreters, and 
their families. Let no white people be permitted to reside with- 
in this district, but at this village; nor even here, without permis- 
sion from lawful authority. Let this requirement be strictly re- 
garded. At this village let the whole trade of the district be car- 
ried on, with the traders, each having his own store of goods, as 
so many merchants; their stores to be within the compass of a 
quarter of a mile. Plant in this village an Education Family, to 
be companions of the traders, and instructors of their children, and 
of such of the Indian children of the district, as their parents may 
wish to send to the school. Let a farm be laid out, and cultivated 

* See Report, p. 39, 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



93 



in the best style, with all the productions suited to the soil and 
climate, with all sorts of animals, poultry, &c. to be looked at and 
examined by Indians, whenever they shall visit the village. In 
this way the Indians will see and judge for themselves, and become 
agriculturalists from conviction and choice. Whiskey, and " bad 
white men, 1 ' in this way, may be effectually kept from Indians. 

Conclusion. 

In this Report, I have endeavored faithfully to spread before 
the Government, and through them before the whole community, 
the actual condition of a large and very interesting portion of our 
population. I have stated, and have aimed to do it fairly, their 
just claims upon the nation. In the facts and statements herein 
exhibited, the foundation of these claims will be perceived. 

The plans and means which have been thought best adapted to 
satisfy these claims, have been suggested. Our object, and our 
work are now before us ; the one, the noblest in which man can 
engage — the salvation of his fellow-men ; the other, arduous, and 
requiring the whole strength of the nation. The field of our la- 
bor is wide. It is a wilderness, in which successful cultivation has 
but recently commenced. It is a rich and hopeful field. " The 
harvest," already beginning to whiten for the sickle, " is great ;" 
and seeing that there are such numbers of qualified reapers offer- 
ing themselves for the service of gathering it in, and our means 
for paying them their wages are so abundant, let us not be con- 
strained to add, " hut the laborers are few .'" 

The scene here opened before us, is adapted to fill and to de- 
light minds bent on doing good. The view and contemplation of 
it by such minds will never tire. "Do good, and communicate to 
all men as ye have opportunity," is a divine command. Every 
man of real benevolence finds his chief happiness in obeying this 
command. To do good, and to communicate to those Indian tribes 
whom God has placed within our reach and under our special 
care, without a doubt, is our indispensable duty. They are a val- 
uable part of that large body of heathen in our world, who are 
shortly to become the inheritance of the Redeemer of men.* And 

* Psalm ii, 8, 



94 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



who does not covet the honor of helping to prepare this inherit- 
ance for such a possessor? 

Let no man despise these Indians. He who made them, who 
supports them, who has redeemed them with his blood, who looks 
forward to the day when they will make a part of his inheritance — 
He despiseth them not. Nor will he suffer any of his creatures, with 
impunity, to despise them, or to treat them with injustice or cruelty. 
He that despiseth Indians, despiseth Him who made, and has an 
arm to protect, Indians. He espouseth the cause of the oppress- 
ed. And " he shall have judgment without mercy, who showeth 
no mercy." 

It is gratifying to know, that the government have in their pos- 
session, and at their disposal, the most ample means, with the bless- 
ing of God upon them, to procure for the Indians all the privileges 
and enjoyments, which distinguish and elevate us among the nations 
of the earth : and, so singular is the fact, these very means have 
been furnished to our government, by the people for whose ben- 
efit we ask to have them employed. The Table which accompa- 
nies this Report, compiled from official documents, shows, that 
more than two hundred millions of acres of some of the best lands 
in our country, have been purchased, after our manner, and at 
6ur own prices, of the Indian tribes. Of these lands, previously 
to October, 1819, there had been sold by the government about 
eighteen and a half millions of acres, for more than forty-four 
millions of dollars. The remainder of these lands, if sold at the 
same rate, and the sums paid to the Indians for them deducted, 
would yield to the government a net profit of more than five 
hundred millions of dollars ! !* With this statement before 
him, founded on official documents, will any man hazard his rep- 
utation as an honest, fair, and just man, by saying, " We have no 
funds to give for civilizing the Indians?" 

Economy in our public expenditures, appears to be "the order 
of the day;" the fashion of the times. This, to a certain extent, 
and in reference to particular objects, is undoubtedly wise and well. 
There is a just and politic economy, the result of extended and lib- 
eral views; and there is also a false and spurious economy, the 

* The official details, shewing this amount, are given at large, and with ex- 
actness, in a Table which makes a part of this Report 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



95 



offspring of narrow views, and of little minds. The one is 
wholesome to the reputation, and to all the true interests of 
a nation. The other is hollow-hearted, vox, et praterea nihil, 
and in the result, is as wasteful to the public property of ana-' 
tion, as it is disgraceful to its character. It is earnestly hoped that 
the government, in their plans for economizing the national expen- 
ditures, will spare the allowance which is destined for the Indians. 
This allowance is not now too great; it is not indeed sufficient for 
all the contemplated, enlarge^ purposes and plans for Indian im- 
provements. There are loud calls for more Education Establish- 
ments, and for more funds to support those which have already 
been made. If we spare to take of our abundance for public ex- 
penditure, and, because they are weak and we are strong, we take 
the pittance destined to the moral and religious improvement of 
the Indians, for this purpose, shall we not expose ourselves, and 
with justice, to the keen censure conveyed in a well-known para- 
ble ?t I am very sure it would give heait-felt joy to millions of 
people in our country, if their government would be just, and kind, 
and liberal to Indians. They will be grieved, and complain loud- 
ly, if they are not. In no other way, than in this, can they with 
more certainty, and with less expense, secure for themselves that 
honor which a good man may covet, and shed true glory on their 
country. 

The work of educating and changing the manners and habits of 
nearly half a million Indians, as they are now situated, is acknowl- 
edged to be great, and arduous, and appalling. My enthusiasm on 
this subject, and I am not ashamed to acknowledge that I possess 

f'There were two men in one city; the one rich, and the other poor. The 
rich man had exceeding many flocks and herds : but the poor man had nothing - , 
save one little ewe lamb, which he had bought and nourished up , and it grew 
up together with him and his children ; it did eat of his own meat, and drank 
of his own cup, and lay in his bosom, and was unto him as a daughter. 

"And there came a traveller unto the rich man ; and he spared to take of his 
own flock, and of his own herd, to dress for the way-faring man that was come 
-unto him ; but took the poor man's lamb, and dressed it for the man that was 
come unto him. 

"And David's anger was greatly kindled against the man ; and he said unto 
Nathan, as the Lord liveth, the man that hath done this thing, shall surely die. 
And he shall restore the lamb four-fold, because he did this thing, and because 
he had no pity. And Nathan said unto David, thou art the many 



96 



REPORT TO THE SECRETARY OF WAR. 



it, does not blind me to the difficulties and obstacles which are to 
be overcome. But these difficulties are not insurmountable. No. 
The cost has been counted. The arm of the Lord, in whom we 
trust, is strong. His power can do all things. The old adage, 
full of pith and meaning, is "no cross, no crown." It is the des- 
tiny of man to get his food by "the sweat of his brow;" to labor 
for the comforts he enjoys, — for the riches and honors after which 
he aspires. On earth, indeed, "Ml things are full of labor." 
The labor required is usually proportioned to the magnitude of 
the good to be etfected, as its reward. Calculating on this prin- 
ciple, we see what will be the probable magnitude of the obstacles 
to be overcome, and of the labor to be performed in attaining our 
object. But even such obstacles, and such labor, formidable as 
they are, intimidate and palsy not the heart and arm of the man of 
real courage, in the cause of suffering humanity. The brave, in 
conflicts of another nature, court the posts of greatest danger, 
knowing that whether they conquer or perish, glory will be their 
reward. 

It is animating in no common degree, that the rulers and law- 
givers of our favored nation lead in this godlike work. Their re- 
ward, and surely it is a rich reward, is, "the blessings of manj r 
who are ready to perish." Their present prominent employ- 
ment appears to be, the devising of the best means to accomplish 
it well and effectually. With such dispositions on the part of the 
government, who have the wisdom to devise good plans, and 
the means and the power to carry them into effect; with the whole 
community awake, and ready zealously, and with one heart and 
one soul, to help forward the good work, what may we not ex- 
pect ? Surely the hand of God is here; the thing which we desire 
will be accomplished. None shall hinder it. May every heart 
and voice respond — So be it. 



APPENDIX 



A. Report p. 13. 

s3PEECH to the Chiefs of the Six Nations, left with the Indian 
Agent, and by him communicated to these tribes assembled at Buf- 
faloe, June 1, 1820. 

Brothers, 

The Great and good God has brought me and my son thus far 
on our long journey, to visit you and others of your red brethren. 
We ask you to unite with us in offering him praise and thanksgiv- 
ing for his goodness. 

Brothers, I regret that I cannot stay to meet you at your great 
Council fire, where we might speak together face to face. The 
reasons why I cannot be with you, I have communicated to your 
friends; Mr. Parrish, and Mr. Hyde, who, in my behalf, will ex- 
plain them to you. I leave with them also copies of my commis- 
sion, from your fathers in Scotland, beyond the great Ocean, and 
from your father the President of the United States. These pa- 
pers will inform you of the objects I have in view in visiting you 
and your brethren, who live within the United States. 

Brothers, Your father, the President of the United States, with 
whom 1 have conversed on the present state of the Indians, who 
live under his jurisdiction, and with many pious Christians, also, far 
and near, are thinking of you for good, and are now engaged in de- 
vising together the best means to promote your welfare. W e per- 
ceive that your numbers and your strength are diminishing ; that 
from being a numerous and powerful people, spread over a wide, 
and fertile country, in which was plenty of game for your support, 
you have become few and feeble ; that you possess but small 
tracts of land, compared with what your fathers possessed, and that 
your game, on which you formerly depended for your support, is 
gone. We see that there is no place on earth where you and 

1 



APPENDIX. 



your brethren can go, and dwelHogether, unmolested, in the state 
in which your fathers lived. We see that you cannot, many years 
longer, live in any part of the United States, in the hunter-state. 
The white people will push their settlements in every direction, 
and destroy your game, and take away your best lands. You have 
not strength to defend yourselves, were you disposed to make war 
with the white people. They have become too powerful to be 
resisted or restrained in their course. In these circumstances, 
your father, the President, and the good white people, extensive- 
ly, feel for you. We perceive that you are cast down and dis- 
couraged, that you are perplexed and know not what to do. Your 
situation, and that of your red brethren generally, has lately ex- 
cited an unusual interest. I am authorised to say to you, that 
the American nation, the civil as well as the religious part of it, 
are now ready to extend to you the hand of sincere friendship ; to 
aid you in rising from your depressed state, and in the best ways 
which can be devised, to save you from that ruin which seems 
inevitable in your present course, and to cause you to share with 
us in all the blessings, both civil and religious, which we ourselves 
enjoy. We fully believe from the recent events of Providence, 
that God has great blessings in store for you, and the rest of your 
red brethren in our country, if you will accept them ; and that 
you may yet "see good days, according to the days wherein you 
have seen evil." This is our most ardent desire. Let not then 
your spirits sink within you. Hope in God, who is able to save 
and to bless you. Trust in him and he will not leave you, but 
will be the health of your countenance, a refuge from all your 
troubles; a present help in time of need. 

Brothers, I have many things to say to you, which I cannot say 
now, on account of my feeble health, and the hurry of my depart- 
ure. 1 intend to write your friends, Mr. Parrish and Mr. Hyde, 
from Detroit. They will communicate to you what I may write, 
I hope God will preserve us to meet on my return. 

Brothers Farewell, 

JEDIDIAH MORSE, 

Butfaloe, May 31, 1820. 



APPENDIX. 



The Rev. Jabez B. Hyde, who at this time resided among the 
Seneca Indians near Buffaloe, having communicated the foregoing 
speech to the Council when assembled, and witnessed the effect, 
addressed to me at Detroit, the following letter : — 

Buffaloe , Seneca Village, June 7th, 1820. 

Rev. and dear Sir, 

Your communication was heard with a deep interest by the 
Council. After the Council, the Chiefs of the christian party, 
called on me to desire me (as they heard I should write to you,) to 
express their remembrance of you with grateful affection, and to 
assure you of their ardent desire, that God would preserve and 
prosper you in your labors of love for their people, and safely 
return you to them, and your friends. They also desired, if you 
should have an opportunity, that you would send them as early no- 
tice as you could, when they might depend on seeing you on your 
return, that they might have opportunity to notify all their vil- 
lages. 

We have had an interesting Council. The Gospel, externally, 
has greatly prevailed. 

Yours with esteem, 

JABEZ B. HYDE. 

Rev. Dr. Morse. 

On my arrival at Buffaloe, on my return, August 8th, I found 
that a Council, of a part of the Six Nations was in session, to 
transact business of their own ; and though they had no pre- 
vious notice of my coming, I concluded it best to attend the Coun^ 
cil, and know if they were prepared to say any thing on the sub- 
ject, which I had submitted to their consideration. I found them 
convened in their Council House, in very decent order, arranged 
in two parties, the Christian party on my right hand, Capt. Pol- 
lard at their head ; the Pagan party on the left hand, with the 
celebrated Red Jacket, at their head. 



4 



APPENDIX. 



Capt. Pollard, a Seneca Chief, first spoke, in substance as follows:— 
Father, 

We thank the Great Spirit for preserving you during your jour- 
ney. If we had had more notice of your coming, we should have 
been better prepared to answer the speech you left us to consider. 
We suppose our Great Father, the President, appointed you to 
come and see us, to enquire into our situation, because he had 
confidence in you. We readily give you all the information we 
can. 

Father, We are convinced, such is our situation, that we must 
have the Gospel. Without it we shall fall to pieces, and come to 
ruin. 

The Reservation on which we live, is small. We have no hunt- 
ing grounds. We cannot live as we formerly did. It is grateful 
to our hearts, therefore, to hear the proposal of our Father the 
President, which you have made to us, we grasp it with eagerness. 
We have begun, and are now moderately advancing to the accom- 
plishment of what he wishes, as you may see from a view of our 
fields, our cattle, &c. 

As to dividing our lands into farms, and holding them as individ- 
ual property, as among the white people, we think it will not do 
for us. Holding our lands in common, as we now do, keeps us to- 
gether. As Indians want goods of white people, and buy them on 
credit, we fear difficulties would arise in collecting these debts, 
according to your laws, and our lands would be taken to pay them. 

Father, As to the plan of removing to some other part of the 
country, and leaving our present habitations, we have no idea of 
it, and are at present determined to remain here. In this deter- 
mination, we and our brethren on the other side are agreed. Hou- 
ses for religious worship, and for schools are built among us for 
our use, and when once built, they remain. — Now listen to the Pa- 
gans on the other side. 



APPENDIX: 



5 



Red Jacket's Speech.* 

1 will be short. I understood that the time of your return would 
be appointed, and that we should have had notice of it. But you 
have come unexpectedly. We have not yet made up our minds 
on the subject you have proposed to us. We intend to call a 
great and general Council of our brethren from a great distance, and 
to take up the subject submitted to our consideration, which we 
think a great and serious one. We will send the result of our 
great Council, when it is adopted, to the President. By this we 
mean no disrespect to you. We regard it as a favor in the Pres- 
ident, that he has sent you to us. Our Council will not be held 
in private, but publicly, before the Congressman (meaning Mr. 
Tracy, who was present.) 

The Great Spirit made us of copper color, and gave us a dif- 
ferent language from that of the white people. All animals, as 
well as men, differ from each other in their forms and natural dis- 
positions. 

Observe, it is one thing for white people to attend worship — and 
another to be industrious. They can be industrious. 

We are in two parties, and our party wish that one course may 
be pursued by both. 

Cusic, a Tuscarora Chief then rose and said 

Father, 

I was not here when you passed through on your way to the 
west. I was, however, informed of it, and thank the Great Spirit 
for your safe return. The Tuscaroras received the Gospel thir- 
ty years ago. We were among the first to receive Agriculture. 
We have a school, and a small church, sixteen members only, but 
sincere. 

* Red Jacket was not well — and being called on suddenly, was not prepar- 
ed, as he intended to have been. These are probably the reasons why hit 
speech is so short, desultory, and abrupt. 



APPENDIX. 



The substance, only, of these speeches is here given from min- 
utes taken by another person, at the time. 

I closed the business before the council in a short reply, in 
which, after making my apology to them for not giving them no- 
tice of my coming, as I had intended, I expressed my regret at 
seeing them divided into two parties, in respect to their religion ; 
and that while it must give me pleasure, being myself a christian, 
and a preacher of this religion, to see so many among them who 
had embraced it, I yet entertained no prejudices against those who 
had not yet embraced it. I had on the contrary, a very sincere 
regard for their welfare, and wished that they would encourage 
the establishment of schools among them, that they might learn 
our language, and be able to read our books, and to examine for 
themselves the evidences of our faith in Christianity ; that we had 
no wish to impose our religion upon them, but that they should 
embrace it, if they embraced it at all, voluntarily, and from a con- 
viction of its truth, and infinite importance. 

As to their removal, dividing their reservations into farms, and 
having separate property, I had said nothing on these subjects in 
my speech ; it was not in my commission to give any advice con- 
cerning these things, but only to learn what were their feelings and 
dispositions concerning them — that though they were not agreed 
in their religion, I was glad to find them so well united in regard 
to other things, which related to their worldly interests ; and that 
they were making advances in agriculture and other improvements. 
I concluded by exhorting them, as their numbers had become 
small, compared with what they once were, to impart strength to 
the numbers which remained, by industry in tilling their lands, en- 
couraging schools for the instruction of their children, and by cul- 
tivating union among themselves, and peace with their neighbors. 



B. MlCHILLIMACKINACK. Rep. p. 14. 

This island is situated on the north side of the Strait, which con- 
nects Huron Lake with Lake Michigan. Its name, Michillimacki- 
natk, ( Mackinaw is an abbreviation of it) signifies the Great Tut- 



APPENDIX. 



7 



tie, which it remarkably resembles. The island is about seven miles 
in circumference. On the pinnacle of the back, is Fort Holmes, 
erected by the British, while the Island was in their possession, the 
beginning of the late war of 1 8 1 2, and which is a commanding object 
in approaching it from either of the adjoining Lakes. The old 
Fort, which is occupied by a body of United States' troops, is about 
half way down the side of the island, as you descend it to the south 
east, and about seventy or eighty (some say one hundred and fifty) 
feet above the level below, on which is the village, which surrounds 
a very safe, commodious, and beautiful circular harbor, open- 
ing to the south east, and looking into Lake Huron. The village 
has about 100 buildings of all kinds, among which is a Court House 
(now used as a place of religious worship) none of them large or 
splendid. Here the American south west Fur Company, in the 
summer season, transact their business, receiving from their 
agents, who have been dispersed the preceding winter, among 
the Indian Tribes, south west and west, the furs, peltry, &c. which 
they have collected, and receiving for the coming season their 
outfits of goods, to be given in barter to the Indians for the fruits 
of their hunting excursions. 

Here also resort, at this season, several thousands of the vari- 
ous tribes of Indians from the south, south west and west, some of 
them from a great distance, with their families, dwellings, furni- 
ture and provisions, packed in birch canoes, each of a size, suited 
to the number and wealth of the owner, on their way to Drummond's 
Island. On this island is erected a British fortress, at which pres- 
ents are annually distributed among the Indians to a large amount. 
They stop at Mackinaw, going and returning, to refresh them- 
selves, and obtain provisions for their journey. Hence Mackinaw 
is a very lively and busy place during the summer months. And 
since the Steam Boat has extended its voyages to this place ; it has 
become the resort of much respectable company. 

The surface of this island is full of stones of all sizes, with very 
little earth between. Small portions of it are cultivated. There 
are two or three farms tolerably productive. Potatoes and garden 
vegetables are cultivated here in great perfection. The original 
growth of trees has been principally used by the inhabitants, who 
resort to other neighbouring islands for their wood. 



1 



APPENDIX. 



C. Saut*' of St. Mary s. — Purchase of Chippawas for a Military 
Post.— Rep. p. 14. 

The following tract of land, beginning at the Big Rock in the riv- 
er St. Mary's, on the boundary line between the United States, 
and the British Province of Upper Canada ; and running thence 
down the said river, in the middle thereof, to the Little Rapids, 
and from those points, running back from the said river, so as to 
include sixteen square miles of land. This tract was ceded by 
treaty, June 16th, 1820, to the Government of the United States ; 
Lewis Cass, Governor of Michigan, being their Commissioner : 
tmd on the part of the tribe of Chippeway Indians, present, fif- 
teen Chiefs and warriors. 

In return for this grant, the United States secure to the Indians 
a perpetual right of fishing at the Falls of St. Mary, and also a place 
of encampment upon the tract ceded, convenient to the fishing 
ground, which place shall not interfere with the defences of any 
military work, which may be erected by the U. States, nor with 
any private rights. 

D. Martin Islands.— -Rep. p. 14. 

The Martin Islands are small, in sight of Mackinaw, covered 
with wood, and have abundance of plaster, (Gypsum) of a superior 
quality, for the sake of which, principally, this purchase was made. 
This Plaster, it is understood, is to be free for the use of all, who 
will take the trouble to transport it. The wood, at a future time, 
will be a valuable article, as there is none of consequence in the 
island of Mackinaw, where much is used. 

An instance of Indian sagacity and shrew r dness occurred at the 
treaty for the purchase of these islands. The Agent, for the pur- 
pose of impressing the Indians with the real object of the Govern- 
ment in making this purchase, observed to the Chiefs, in his speech 
to them on the occasion, that their great Father the Presidents, 

* Saut pronounced Sop. 



APPENDIX. 



9 



wanted these islands for his children, not for their soil, or timber, 
but for the Plaster— and this he intended to give to his children.— 
« Well," replied one of the old, venerable Chiefs, with a very 
grave countenance — " if our Father does not want the soil, nor the 
timber of these islands, but the Plaster only, we will keep the 
soil and timber, and he shall be welcome to the Plaster." 

E. Speech to the Oltawas at VArbre Croche, July 6th, 1820.— Rep, 

p. 14. 

Children, 

I have come with my son a long journey to see you. Our God, 
the great and good Spirit, has preserved us on our way. We 
thank him for his goodness. We are glad to see you, and your 
women and children, in your own dwellings, around your own 
fires. 

1 come to you by the desire of your Great Father the President 
of the United States, of your good fathers in Scotland across the 
great waters, and of your good fathers of the Missionary Society 
in Albany.* 

Efforts have heretofore been made to civilize the Indians, and to 
convert them to the christian faith. They have been in many in- 
stances successful. But as they were the efforts of small societies, 
or of individuals, and most of them have been discontinued, the 
success has been partial ; and in many places, where these efforts 
were made, their good fruits have disappeared. The day of small 
things is now past. A glorious day is dawning. The nation has 
engaged in this great work. Never before was the prospect for 
Indians so bright. Your fathers, the christian white people, are 
rejoicing in these auspicious events, and praying to God for their 
red brethren. They are devising plans for your happiness. The 
Congress of the United States, the great Council of our nation, feel 
for you, also, and have put money into the hands of your Father, 
the President, to promote the welfare of Indians. 1 am come in 
his behalf, to offer you the hand of sincere friendship, and the 

* Here my commissions were shewn, and the purport of them communica* 
ted. 

2 



to 



APPENDIX. 



blessings which he has to bestow upon you. We wish you to 
receive them, because we know, if you do, they will make you 
and your posterity happy. If you refuse them, the consequences 
to you, to your posterity especially, will be lamentable. Your 
game is already diminishing, and e'er long will be gone, and you 
will waste away, and perish, as hundreds of tribes of your breth- 
ren in the country east of you, have successively perished before 
you. Once they were numerous and prosperous like you. Now 
there is not one of their posterity to visit, and weep over, the 
sepulchres of their fathers. 

Children, Your father the President, thinks that a great change 
in the situation of his Red Children has become necessary, in or- 
der to save them from ruin, and to make them happy. 

I w ill now lay before you some of the reasons, w r hy he believes 
thai such a change in your situation is necessary to your existence 
and happiness. 

Children, Listen attentively to what I am now about to say to 
you. It is for your life, and the life of your posterity. 

Your fathers once possessed all the country, East and South, to 
the great waters. They were very numerous and powerful, and 
lived chiefly by hunting and fishing. They had brave warriors, 
and orators, eloquent in Council. Two hundred years ago, a mor- 
tal pestilence spread wide among the Indians on the coast of the 
great Ocean to the East, and swept away a great part of them. 
In some villages all died — not one was left. Ju&t after this great 
desolation, the white people began to come across the great wa- 
ters. They settled first on lands where no Indians lived; where 
they all had died. Other white people, about the same time, set- 
tled at the South. 

These white people came, not as enemies, but as friends of the 
Indians. They purchased of them a little land, to support them 
and their children by agriculture. They wanted but little, while 
they were few in number. God prospered the white people. 
They have since increased and multiplied, and become a great 
and powerful nation. They are now spread over a wide extent 
of the country of your fathers; and are spreading still more and 
faster over other parts of it; purchasing millions of acres of your 
good land; leaving for you and your children, Reservations here 



APPENDIX. 



II 



and there, small indeed, compared with the extensive hunting 
grounds you once possessed. What your brothers, the Osages, 
said to one of our missionaries, is true. " Wherever white man 
sets down his foot, he never takes it up again. It grows fast, and 
spreads wide." You have been obliged, either to go back into 
the wilderness, and seek new hunting grounds, and dwelling pla- 
ces, or to live on your small Reservations, surrounded with white 
people. Indians cannot associate with the white people, as their 
equals. While they retain their present language, and dress, and 
habits of life, they will feel their inferiority to the white peo- 
ple. Where they have no game to hunt, to furnish them with furs 
for trade, and with food to eat, they become poor, and wretched, 
and spiritless, dependant on the white people for their support. 
They w r ill give themselves up to idleness, ignorance and drunken- 
ness, and will waste away, and by and bye have no posterity on 
the face of the earth. Already many tribes who live among the 
whites, can never more gain renown in war, or in the chase. If 
this course continues, it will soon be so with the whole body of 
Indians, within the Territories of the United States. Indians can- 
not go to the west, for the great ocean would stop them; nor turn 
to the north or south, for in either course are the hunting grounds, 
and dwelling places, of other tribes of your red brethren: No, 
nor can you go to any other country, for all the countries on the 
globe, where Indians can live, as they now live, are already in- 
habited. 

Things being so, the wisest men among Indians know not what 
to advise, or what to do. They imagine that the Great Spirit, of 
whose character and government they have but very imperfect 
ideas, is angry with the red people, and is destroying them, while 
he prospers the white people. Aged and wise men among In- 
dians, with whom I have conversed, think and talk of these things, 
till their countenances become sad. Our countenances are also 
sad, when we think and talk of them. Hereafter, when these 
gs shall have come to pass, christian white people, who loved 
Indians, and wished and endeavored to save them, will visit their 
wserted graves, and with weeping eyes, exclaim, " Here In- 
dian once lived. Yonder were their hunting grounds. Here 
mounds of earth the bones of many genera- 



12 



APPENDIX. 



tions lie buried together. No Indian remains to watch over the 
bones of his fathers. Where are they? Alas ! poor Indians." 
But I forbear to pursue these sad reflections. The prospect must 
fill your minds with sad apprehensions for yourselves and your 
children, and sink your spirits, as it does my own. 

Children, I would not have presented this painful prospect be- 
fore you, had I not another to present, that I hope will cheer 
your hearts, raise your spirits, and brighten your countenances. 
I have made you sorry; I will now endeavor to make you glad. 

Children, Be of good cheer. Though your situation and pros- 
pects are now gloomy, they may change for the better. If you 
desire to be happy, you may be happy. The means exist. They 
are freely offered to you. Suffer them to be used. 

Children, listen. I will tell you in few words, what your great 
Father, and the Christian white people, desire of you. We im- 
pose nothing on you. We only lay before you our opinion for 
you to consider. We do not dictate, as your superiors, but ad- 
vise you as your friends. Consider our advice. 

Your father the President, wishes Indians to partake with his 
white children, in all the blessings which they enjoy; to have one 
country, one government, the same laws, equal rights and privi- 
leges, and to be in all respects, on an equal footing with them. 
These blessings, Indians cannot enjoy, so long as they remain dis- 
tinct, independent nations, each having its own government and 
laws, and language, and lands; while they remain ignorant of our 
language, of our religion, of our government and modes of life, 
while you live in the hunter state, dress as you now dress, and 
live in small villages, scattered over a wide tract of country. 
Your father would have you learn our language. You who are 
old may not be able to learn it, but you can encourage your chil- 
dren to learn. Your father wishes you to quit hunting for your 
support, and to live by cultivating the earth, and for this purpose, 
that you would collect together the scattered settlements of at 
tribe, and of other tribes, with whom you are related, or in fri 
ship and alliance, on some of your own good lands, of sufficient 
tent, and have these lands divided into townships and farms, as 
lands of the white people are divided, and each man -*rm 
as his own, with a title which he can transmit to his pr * 



APPENDIX. 



13 



house and barn, oxen, cows and horses, fields of corn, wheat 
and potatoes, gardens and fruits, and to dress and live like the 
white people; to have one language, and to enjoy all the comforts 
of life, which your white brethren enjoy. In this way, you would 
avoid the evils and impositions which you now suffer from wicked, 
unprincipled men. You would have plenty of provisions, and no 
longer suffer the pains of hunger and want, and dependence. You 
would be under no necessity of separating from your wives and 
children, during the winter; or taking them with you longjournies, 
through many sufferings. You might live with them, and have 
plenty of the comforts of life, at one continued home. You 
would then be companions and equals with your white brethren, 
and be prepared, in due time, to sit and deliberate with them in 
the councils of the nation. In all these privileges, and blessings, 
your father invites you to partake with his other children. 

To accomplish these good purposes, your great father, the 
President, and your christian fathers, will send among you, at 
their own expense, good white men and women, to instruct you 
and your children in every thing, that pertains to the civilized and 
christian life. Your red brethren, the Cherokees, Choctaws, 
Osages, the Six Nations, and other tribes, have had the same of- 
fers made to them, which I now make to you, and have accepted 
them with readiness and gratitude; and are beginning to reap the 
precious fruits of the cultivation, which has already been bestow- 
ed on them. Other tribes are listening to these offers, and we ex- 
pect will accept them. All who accept them will be in the way 
to be saved, and raised to respectability and usefulness in life. 
Those who persist in rejecting them, must, according to all past 
experience, gradually waste away, till all are gone. This we ful- 
ly believe. Civilization or ruin, are now the only alternatives of 
Indians. 

Among the means for your civilization, in addition to what have 
been already mentioned, we will bring you the best, the only ef- 
fectual, means of making you truly happy — we will bring you our 
Bible, the best of all Books. We will teach you to read and un- 
derstand it. This book is a revelation from God, and contains the 
words of eternal life. It reveals the true character of God, the 
Great Spirit, in whom you profess to believe, and of man, and the 



14 APPENDIX. 

relation and duty of man to his Maker, and to his fellow men. It 
maketh wise to salvation, by revealing a Saviour, the Lord Jesus 
Christ, and the way of salvation by him. It contains the doc- 
trines and precepts of the Christian religion. This book causes 
the wide difference which exists, as you see, between the white 
man and the Indian. We will bring you this blessed book; we 
will teach your children to read it, that they may be happy, and 
comfort you; that they may know how to live, and to do good; and 
how to die, and to live forever. 

Children, attend to what I have said. Lay it up in your memo- 
ries, and in your hearts. Deliberate well upon it, according to your 
usual custom. I am going to Green Bay, thence in two or three 
weeks to return to Mackinaw. There let me meet a delegation 
of your chiefs, with your answer, that 1 may communicate it to 
your Great Father the President. Till I receive your answer I 
have no more to say. 

To this speech no answer was received, my stay at Mackinaw 
on my return, being too short to give the chiefs the necessary no- 
tice. 

F. G. H. Michigan and North-West Territories. Rep. p. 15. 

This large section of our country, considered in reference to 
the object of the government, relative to the Indians, is probably 
more important than any other; and as it is to become the theatre 
of immediate and extensive operations, requires to be more thor- 
oughly and particularly known. It being the portion, also, which 
I have personally visited, more information concerning it is rea- 
sonably to be expected. 

The various tribes who inhabit these territories, are named in 
the Table, with their numbers, and places of residence. The 
map will shew the relative situation of these tribes, and the gene- 
ral features of the country. A few observations of the geograph- 
ical kind, will properly introduce the detail which will follow. 

These Territories spread between Lat. 41° 30', and 49° N. and 
Lon. 82° and 96° W. from London, or 5° and 19° W. from Wash- 
ington. 



APPENDIX. 



15 



The climate of this part of the country is salubrious; the soil 
adapted, with proper culture, to produce in abundance, the vari- 
ous kinds of grain, grasses, vegetables, and fruits, which are found 
in the same latitudes in New- York and New-England, and the 
southern parts of the two Canadas. The waters of the great 
Lakes, of the Mississippi, and of the boatable rivers, which to a 
great extent border on, and in every direction intersect them, are 
remarkably pure, and abound with fish in variety, and of the finest 
flavor. A very extensive interior portion of the North-West 
Territory, is watered with many lakes or ponds, and rivers, in 
which grow spontaneously, and without culture, immense quanti- 
ties of wild rice, a very palatable and nutritious food, which is gath- 
ered and prepared in autumn, with little labor, in any desirable 
quantity, and at very trifling expense. This rice invites, at the 
proper season, and furnishes food for, and fattens, immense flocks 
of ducks, geese, pigeons, and other wild fowl. These various 
natural productions, as they may properly be denominated, the 
fish, wild rice, and wild fowl, afford the Indians, who at present 
are the only inhabitants of the portion of these territories which we 
are now describing, with a great part of their subsistence; and 
these sources of support are unfailing, and inexhaustible. The 
interior rivers of these Territories, the Mississippi, which washes 
their western border, and the great lakes, which connect and bor- 
der them, and the water communications, opened and opening, to 
connect them with the great capitals of our nation, will serve to fa- 
cilitate intercourse between their inhabitants, and give them easy 
and cheap access to the best markets with their surplus produce. 

Should it bethought expedient, and be found practicable, to collect 
the remnants of tribes now scattered, and languishing and wasting 
away among our white population, and to colonize them for the 
purpose of preserving them from utter extinction, and of educa- 
ting them to the best advantage, and with the greatest economy, 
some portions of these Territories will, 1 think, unquestionably be 
found better suited to these objects, than any other in our coun- 
try, and as such I deliberately recommend them to the attention of 
the government.* 

* Since the above was penned, I am informed, that Mr. Williams, and the 
Delegation that accompanied him, with the countenance of the Government, 



16 



APPENDIX. 



Wyandots. 

Of this tribe some further account will be given hereafter.* The 
following, which is more particular, is from one of their chiefs, giv- 
en me by Col. Visger, (Fisher) Interpreter of their language, and 
who has had the care of that portion of the tribe which resides near 
Detroit. 

During the war of 1812, so disastrous to this part of our coun- 
try, the Wyandots, whose chief residence was atBrownstown, near 
Maiden, were reduced and dispersed, a part of them under Split- 
log, one of their chiefs, joined the British, the remainder adhered 
to the U. States. The former, about 100, after the war, with 
Splitlog at their head, removed to Amherstburgh, near Maiden, in 
1816. Five or six families, about thirty souls, established them- 
selves on Huron river, of Lake Erie, 10 or 12 miles from its 
mouth, on a reservation of five thousand acres of excellent land, 
to which they have a full and, legal title from the Government. 
Here Walk-in-the-zvater, a celebrated Wyandot chief, died in 1818, 
at the age of about seventy. Another part of this tribe, is planted 
at Sandusky, and another on the Scioto river in Ohio. Thus this 
far famed nation is divided, weakened, and brought to the verge of 
extinction. 

At Detroit I had conversation with Boyer, (Oumet-zi-ou-har,) a 
Wyandot, sensible, and of good appearance; the chief man of that 
small part of the tribe, who reside on Huron river. I asked him 
what he thought of the plan of collecting the scattered Indians to 
one spot, that they might be educated in the arts of civilized life, 
and in religion, to better advantage. He replied with decision and 
emphasis — " I will not consent — I never will." I was told that he 

has made a purchase of the Menominees and Winebagoes, of a tract 20 by 40 
miles in extent, on both sides of Fox river, 40 miles from its mouth. The 
principal part of the Stockbridge Indians, some of the Oneidas, and other of 
the Six Nations, and many of those mentioned by Mr. Sergeant as desirous of 
removing to White river, it is expected wiH shortly remove to this new coun- 
try. This will form a hopeful commencement of the colonizing plan. These 
may form the nucleus of a numerous colony, possibly, in due time, of a State* 

* See Mr. Johnson's account of the Indians of Ohio, under that head. 



APPENDIX. 



17 



"is a good farmer, and lives well, which accounts for his determina- 
tion. 

Boyer informed me, that he had, within a few days, heard a re- 
port from Amherstburgh, that the American Government had the 
intention to take from the Wyandots their lands. He gave no 
credit to the report, he said, as he had never seen any thing in the 
conduct of the government to sanction it. 

Under the head of Miscellaneous Articles in this report, I have pre- 
served two speeches of the celebrated chief Walk-in-the-water, de- 
livered to Gov. Hull, in 1809. The originals of these speeches, as 
taken by the interpreter, Col. Visger, were handed me by the 
Colonel, in his own hand writing. These speeches are preserved 
because they express strongly the feelings of one of the most sen- 
sible and candid Indian chiefs of modern times, and of the chief 
men of his tribe, on several important topics, but particularly in 
regard to the manner in which their lands have been, in too fre- 
quent instances, obtained. On this subject 1 shall have occasion 
to remark in a subsequent part of this report. 

Col. Visger has been employed by the government many years, 
as an interpreter, and instructor of the Indians in the vicinity of 
Detroit; particularly the Wyandots, at Monguaga, in the best 
method of cultivating their lands. In 1809, in a letter to Gov. 
Hull, he states, that he had spared no pains nor personal labor to 
accomplish the business assigned him ; that some of the most influ- 
ential men of the Indians had become sensible of the importance 
of cultivating their lands for subsistence ; that they were grateful 
to the government for their care of them, and for their assistance; 
that thirty families had joined them that year, and more were pre- 
paring to join them ; that they had planted one hundred and sixty 
acres of corn, and two individuals had sown twelve acres of wheat; 
that farming utensils were in great demand, and that successful 
experiments in agriculture had been made in six villages of In- 
dians, within forty miles of Detroit. All this success too, Col. 
Visger informed me, was in opposition to the Prophet, brother of 
Tecumseh, at this time in the height of his influence, who exerted. 



3 



13 



APPENDIX. 



his utmost efforts to prevent the introduction of agricultural im- 
provements.* 

From the representations of Col. Visger, there appears to be a 
general and growing impression among the Indians in all this re- 
gion, that they must change the hunter, for the agricultural life. 
Considering their reduced numbers, they have large tracts of rich 
and valuable land, a small part of which, if well cultivated, would 
furnish them with an abundance of all the necessaries and comforts 
of life; and yet, amidst all these means of wealth and happiness, and 
in view of the examples around them of the effects of civilization, 
they are, as a body, miserably poor, and filthy, and frequently in a 
starving condition. All the facts stated by Col. Visger, and oth- 
ers, relating to the past and present state of these Indians, served 
to evince the correctness, and importance of the plan of collecting 
and embodying those of them who are now scattered among the set- 
tlements of the whites, on some portion of our Territory; else, it ifr 
to be feared, notwithstanding all their partial improvements, and 
indications of disposition and capacity for still higher cultivation, 
provided they were placed in other and proper situations for the 
purpose, they must waste away, and ultimately become extinct. 

The Wyandots still retain their faith in witchcraft. A woman 
of this tribe, forty years old, sister of one of the chiefs at Browns- 
town, was recently accused of witchcraft, condemned and execu- 
ted, being knocked on the head with a club. 

* Tecumseh, before his untimely death, had conceived a plan of collecting 
all the Indians of N. America on some portion of the continent, not inhabited 
by white people, there to dwell together under their own government and 
laws, to enjoy their own customs and religion, inherited from their ancestors — 
to live in a state of independence ; to sell no more of their lands to the white 
people ; to cultivate, by all means, peace with them ; to wage no other than 
necessary defensive wars ; to quit roving and hunting for subsistence ; to di- 
vide their territory into farms ; and to live, as do the whites, by agriculture 
and the arts. In this way, and by these means, he conceived that Indians 
might recover what they had lost, rise again into importance and influence, 
and once more assume their rank among the nations of the earth. This plan, 
though no adequate means of accomplishing it exist, is a noble one, and wor- 
thy the great and patriotic mind of its author. Had he lived, and in earnest 
attempted its accomplishment, it probably might have been easily shaped, 
and, by compromise, have been brought, to coincide with that which is now 
c ontemplated by the government of the United States. 



APPENDIX, 



19 



Chippawas and Ottawas. 

The following information concerning the Indians of the Michi- 
gan Territory,* particularly of the Chippawas, I received for sub- 
stance from Mr. Jacob Smith, who has resided among these In- 
dians more than twenty years ; and at the treaty of Saganau, of 
1819, was appointed by government one of their guardians. 

Within the last twenty-five years, the Indians of this Territory, 
have disposed of, it can hardly be said sold, the greater part of 
their lands to the Government of the United States, reserving but 
small portions, in different places, for themselves. These Reser- 
vations, in most instances, have become adjacent to, or nearly sur- 
rounded by, white settlers from different parts of the Union. This 
has made the game scarce, and obliged the Indians, inhabiting 
these Reservations, to disperse themselves in small bands, into dif- 
ferent parts of the Territory, and even into U. Canada, to find 
game, hunting being their only means of subsistence. 

Formerly Indians were embodied in large towns, of from one 
to two hundred dwellings, as at Sandusky, Miami, St. Joseph's, L'- 
Abre Croche, Saganau, Flint river, &c. Now, their game hav- 
ing year after year become more and more scarce, and no substi- 
tute yet provided, and no corresponding change in their education 
and habits taken place, they are becoming spiritless, poor, objects 
of commisseration and charity. In their present state, they are, 
to a great extent, a burden on this part of the country, and a bar 
to its settlement. If thve General Government would adopt effect- 
ual means "to embody these dispersed Indians," and have them 
taught to till the ground for their subsistence, "civilization would 
gradually follow, and they would become a happy, and useful peo- 
ple to the United States — whereas if they remain in their pres- 

* The Indian agency of Mackinaw, includes all the Territory of the U. States, 
bordering upon Lake Superior, the country in the vicinity of Mackinaw s 
extending west to the line designated between this agency and that at Green - 
Bay ; and south-east to the river Au Sable, including the east shore of Lake, 
Michigan, as far South as Dead Man's River. 



20 



APPENDIX. 



ent deplorable state, in twenty or thirty years, they must become 
extinct." 

Mr. Smith is of the opinion, that if government would take a 
number, or all of these small Reservations now occupied by more 
or fewer of these divided or scattered tribes, and give them in ex- 
change an equal quantity of the lands belonging to the U. States, 
of which they have here enough, (say on Flint river, near Saga- 
nau, a tract selected for a like purpose by Gov. Hull, during his 
administration,) that the Indians would gladly make the exchange. 
This spot is admirably suited to this purpose. The land is excellent 
for cultivation; and that which the Indians would give in exchange is 
equally excellent for white settlements. The exchange would be 
reciprocally advantageous. The Indians would be taken from among 
the whites, a measure much and mutually desired, and by being pla- 
ced together, the Indians would be strengthened and animated, 
they would feel more their own importance ; and their numbers 
would authorize the establishment among them of a large and effi- 
cacious Education Family. The location proposed is peculiarly 
adapted to accommodate and invite all the Indians in this part of 
the Michigan Territory, in Ohio, New-York, and New-England, who 
might be inclined to remove ; a body of from twenty-five, to thir- 
ty thousand. Here is room enough to accommodate this number, 
and more. Its climate is fine, the soil is of the first quality; its 
rivers are boatable; it is in the vicinity of three of the great Lakes, 
in which are abundance of fish ; is eas}^ of access ; and away, suf- 
ficiently so, from white population. To this spot, so strongly re- 
commended by Mr. Smith, for the purposes mentioned, I would 
turn the attention of the government, as being probably next to the 
vicinity of Green Bay, the best situation for colonizing the Indians. 

In accomplishing any plan of this kind, especially should this be 
the selected spot, Mr. Smith, who has resided among the Indians 
here for twenty years successively, is familiarly acquainted with 
their language, has their confidence, is one of their guardians, and 
anxious for their improvement, might be an important and efficient 
Agent. 

Mr. S. states that from some partial experiments made on the 
Indians upon Flint river, they are found to be as " ingenious and 
susceptible of improvement, as were the uncultivated nations of 



APPENDIX. 



21 



former ages." " The Indians (Chippewas) on Saganau river, 
about six hundred in number, are a mixed body, strollers, the re- 
fuse of other tribes. Of these there is less hope, than of those on 
Flint river, who are of a different and better character." 

With the Chief of these Saganau Indians, Keesk-kah-ko-ne, 
Bears-Den, I had an interview at Detroit, through the polite- 
ness of John Williams Esq. who obligingly acted as interpreter, 
of which the following is the substance: — 

Quest. Would you wish to change your situation, and live as 
the white people live ? 

Ans. The Master of life made us Indians ; seeing it was his 
will that we should be born Indians, why should we wish to alter 
our condition ? 

Reply. It is not our wish that you should cease to be In- 
dians. The changes we propose to you to make, relate to your 
improvement as Indians. We wish you to lay aside the habits pe- 
culiar to the hunter state, and to adopt those of the agricul- 
tural life ; to have schools among you, to learn our language, 
that you may read our books, become acquainted with our laws, 
institutions, and religion ; be taught how to build houses and mills, 
to make clothes, to till the earth, to raise cattle, and to enjoy with 
the white people all their blessings. You can adopt all these im- 
provements, and yet not cease to be Indians. 

Ans. But where are our means to do, as the whites do, to build 
us houses &c. as they do ? I once spoke to my father (probably 
meaning the Agent at Detroit) to grant me certain things, but he 
said he could not, for he was not authorized to do it. Well then, 
you ask me for a thing that cannot be done now by us old folks. 
We are too old to alter our modes of life. We will live as our 
fathers lived. But the young, our children, might succeed to do 
as you say, or perhaps their children. 

Reply. You ask, " Where are our means to do what you pro- 
pose ?" You have these means in your lands, if you would suffer 
yourselves to be taught how to cultivate them, and make them, 
valuable to you. White people would think themselves rich, if 
they had half as much land as you have. You may be rich too, 
and have money enough to support schools for your children, to 
build houses for religious worship, support ministers, and to do 



22 



APPENDIX. 



all other things for your happiness, if you will only have farms 
and cultivate them as the white people do. Besides, till you are 
able yourselves to do these things, your great father, the Presi- 
dent, will give you farming and other tools, and send among you 
good men to teach you how to use them. And our Christian peo- 
ple will send good men to teach you and your children all good 
things for your improvement, if you will encourage them to come 
and settle with you. We propose these things as your friends, 
who wish to do you good, and see you happy. 

Ans. If we were to consent to all this, would the Government 
fulfil their promises? I believe they would not. 

I stated to him what was doing among the Chnrokees, ChoctawS, 
andOsages; what were the feelings of these Indians in regard to 
these things, and the happy results of the establishments made 
among them. 

Ans. These things may be true, but I don't know whether they 
are or not. 

Quest. Will you admit teachers to instruct your children, if we 
will send them? 

Ans. Yes, if they don't deceive us, will learn our language, and 
teach our children English. 

I closed the interview by expressing my gratification, derived 
from this interview with him; in having opportunity to make this 
communication, which I wished him to make to his people, to 
know his sentiments and feelings on the subjects I had mentioned, 
which I should make known to his father the President; who, I as- 
sured him, would do all he engaged to do, for Indians, and that he 
must not believe those who told him, their father would not fulfil his 
promises. I recommended to him to think of what I had said to 
him ; that he would find what I had said, true ; that he would not 
find himself deceived ; that some other persons, by and by, would 
come and talk further with him and his people on these subjects, 
and that he would then be convinced of the truth of what I had 
said to him; and that my wish was, that he would go home and use 
his influence to prepare his people to receive the good things, 
which were to be offered to them. We shook hands and parted. 

This chief appeared to be about sixty years old; was of fero- 
cious aspect, sensible, stout, and of commanding figure. He has 



APPENDIX. 



23 



great influence with his tribe. In what manner he will exert his 
influence, may be inferred from his opinions, expressed in the- 
preceding interview. 

Mr. Smith further stated to me, that great evils to these Indians, 
result from their annual visits to the British post at Drummond's 
Island, where they go, by invitation from the British, and receive 
very liberal and valuable presents from them, tending to alienate 
them from the United States, to attach them to a foreign power, and 
to make them unhappy with their present situation. He thinks, 
also, that there are great defects in regard to the place, (Detroit^ 
and the manner in which the Indian annuities are now paid. 
These Indians have to leave their homes and occupations, to trav- 
el on foot, going and returning, between two and three hundred 
miles. The expense of such a journey, even with the strictest 
Indian economy, would consume a great part of what they receive; 
and in the manner in which Indians travel, and with their habits, 
we can easily see, that their annuities, as they now receive them, 
tend to impoverish, rather than to enrich them: they are a curse 
rather than a blessing: they encrease their miseries, rather than 
minister to their comfort. It is believed, that scarcely a dollar of 
the thousands which they receive at Detroit, ever reaches their 
villages. These things ought not so to be. 



UAbre Croche Indians. 

These are a part of the Ottawa nation, seven hundred and sixty 
in number, on the east shore of Lake Michigan, thirty-six miles 
south south-west of Mackinaw. They claim, as their territory, 
from Black river, which empties into the south-east part of Lake 
Michigan, north of St. Joseph's river, northward to the Detour, as 
it is called, forty-two miles north-east of Mackinaw. The Martin 
islands, purchased of these Indians by the United States, in 
the summer of 1820, as before related, lie northward, a short 
distance from Mackinaw. I was present and witnessed the 
treaty. Their principal village is situated on a tract of table 
land, elevated considerably from the level of the Lake, 
of a good soil for tillage. They have long been in the habit of 



24 



APPENDIX. 



cultivating a part of their lands, raising corn, potatoes and pump* 
kins; and of the former more than a supply for their own wants. 
In the fall of 1819, they sent to the Mackinaw market, more than 
one thousand bushels of corn, for which they received payment in 
money or goods. In some years they have sent more than three 
thousand bushels. They use the hoe only, in cultivating their 
lands, having no ploughs, oxen, cows, nor, but in a single instance, 
horses. 

These Indians are much in advance in point of improvement, in 
appearance and manners, of all the Indians whom I visited. Their 
dress was in the Indian style, neat, and highly ornamented with sil- 
ver bands, plates, &c. in various forms, received principally as pres- 
ents from Drummond's Island. The women and children, who were 
apart by themselves, had a cleanly appearance; in countenance and 
manners, intelligent and modest. Their warriors, who occupied 
a separate station, would appear well on any of our military parades. 
They are a tall, strait, fine-faced band of men. The Chiefs are 
shrewd, sensible, well behaved men, most of them advanced be- 
yond middle age, and of venerable appearance. Cato or Ceitaw, 
as he writes his own name, is not a chief, but in consequence of his 
great wealth and gentlemanly manners, is a principal man in the 
nation, dresses like the white people, has horses, and a well dress- 
ed and well trained retinue of servants to attend him ; a house and 
farm, and wine, and lives in the style of a nobleman. With this 
man, who was chief speaker at the interview, I had several con- 
versations at Mackinaw, and opportunity to communicate to him, 
and through him, to his nation, the views and designs of the gov- 
ernment. These communications, and those made at L'Abre 
Croche, were received with much civility; but no direct, formal 
answer has been yet received from them. I apprehend, how- 
ever, from several indications, that they are not yet prepared to 
receive an Education Family. The " medicine influence," if I may 
so designate it, which is hostile to schools and Christianity, and to 
civilization generally, is strongly felt by these Indians. They are 
afraid to have priests come amongst them, because it happened, 
immediately after one had visited them, about the year 1799, that 
the small pox was introduced among them from Canada, and carried 
off nearly half their number. They were made to believe, by 



APPENDIX. 



25 



their medicine men, that the Great Spirit was angry with them for 
receiving this priest, and his instructions, and that this fatal dis- 
ease was sent among them to punish them for this offence. 

This same influence was manifest during my interview with 
them. Under its effects, the principal speaker among the chiefs, 
before I began my speech, rose and said, that they had received 
some information from Mackinaw, of the object of my visit, and 
had considered the subject, and concluded not to accept the pro- 
posals of the Government. They were contented and happy in 
their present situation. But, presuming that they had not receiv- 
ed full, or correct information on the subject I concluded it best to 
deliver my speech, which they heard patiently and respectfully.* 

L'Abre Croche, for sixty years or more, and till the order of Je- 
suits was suppressed, was the seat of the Jesuit mission of St. Ig- 
nace de Michilimakinac. A large part of these Indians were bap- 
tized by these missionaries, who resided on a form, devoted to 
their use, situated between the village and old Fort Mackinaw, both 
of which were under their pastoral care. The convent of the 
Jesuits was one mile north of the village. The improved state 
and appearance of these Indians may probably be considered, as 
the fruit of this mission. In 1761, the Ottawas, at L'Abre Croche, 
numbered two hundred and fifty warriors, or about one thousand 
five hundred souls. 

Father Reichard, a respectable and learned man, who now 
presides over the Catholic church at Detroit, as he informed me, 
was at L'Abre Croche in 1799, at which time there were about 
one thousand three hundred souls, among whom was but one, a 
very old Indian, remaining, who had been baptised. These Indians 
then lived together in one village, nine miles in length, and were 
much addicted to drunkenness. It was after father Reichard's visit 
that the small pox made such desolation among them, and so redu- 
ced their number; and it was evident that these people, from some 
source, were made to fear, that my visit, should they listen to my 
proposal, would be followed by a similar calamity. Some effectual 
means therefore must be used to remove this influence, before 
any thing can be done effectually for their improvement. An ap- 
peal to their good sense, and reference to what has been effected 

* See p. 8. 

4 



26 



APPENDIX. 



among some other of our Indian tribes, I think, would accomplish 
the purpose, and prepare the way for the establishment of an 
Education Family in this place, which is well situated for the pur- 
pose. Scattered villages of this nation, and of the Chippawas, who 
intermarry with the Ottawas, and in various ways are connected 
with them, might probably be induced to remove, and settle on the 
L'Abre Croche territory, which is abundantly large enough for 
the accommodation of several thousands. In this case, the station 
might become an important one for the education of a large num- 
ber of Indians in the vicinity. 

Description of the Shores of Lake Superior. 

The country, and its native inhabitants, on the southern shores of 
Lake Superior, between this Lake and the Mississippi, and west 
of that river, on the northern border of the U. States, has 
hitherto been but imperfectly known. A knowledge of them has 
become important to the Government, for the purposes of regula- 
ting the trade with the Indian tribes, who inhabit this region, for 
promoting their civilization, and making the military and education 
establishments necessary for these purposes. From the gentle- 
men, whose names are at the head of their respective communica- 
tions, much particular information has been received relative to 
this region, which, it is believed, will be useful to the Govern- 
ment in their plans and operations, in this remote, and but recent- 
ly explored part of their dominions.* 

While at Mackinaw I was favored with interviews with Messrs. 
Morrison and Holliday, Tndian Traders, of intelligence and veracity, 
in the service of the American South- West Fur Company, introdu- 
ced and recommended to me by Messrs. Crooks and Stuart, mem- 
bers of that company. They had often traversed the southern 
shores of Lake Superior, and resided many winters with the In- 

* Since this part of my Report was written, Governor Cass, with an ex- 
ploring part}', having- visited this part of our country, have published the val- 
uable results of their extensive tour, in various well written and interesting 
Reports. The facts and information which follow, though they relate to the 
same region, are, in many instances, new, and the whole will not be without 
its interest and use. 



APPENDIX. 



27 



*iians in the vicinity of them. They gave me verbally the partic- 
ular information which is subjoined. 

Their trading rout is from Mackinaw to the Saut of St. Mary's, 
eighty miles; thence into Lake Superior, and along the southern 
shore, thirty miles, to Taquarninan river, sixty yards wide, deep 
at its entrance, and boatable about twenty-four miles. Becksie or 
Betsie river, thirty yards wide, falls into the west side of the 
mouth of the Taquaminan. 

Proceeding fifteen miles from the river last mentioned, you 
come to White Fish Point, which projects north-east into the Lake, 
around which is the ship channel of the Lake. White Fish Bay 
receives the rivers above named. 

Next, twenty-four miles farther, is Grand Mariaix Pond, a safe 
harbor from all winds, four miles in circumference. Here com- 
mence the Sandy Hills, (Grand Sable,) which extend west nine 
miles along the banks of the Lake, and one mile back, perfectly 
barren, having neither trees nor shrubbery. They rise in the 
centre, about one thousand feet from the surface of the Lake, slo- 
ping at each end. Behind these hills is a Lake six miles long, by 
one wide; back of which is wood land. 

Great Rocks, (Portaile,) known also by the name of the Pictured 
Rocks, are twelve miles further. They continue nine miles along 
the borders of the Lake, rising perpendicularly one thousand feet 
above the level of the water. The rocks are of various kinds and 
colors, large pieces of which, broken from their sides, have fallen 
into the Lake below. These rocks form the greatest curiosity, 
and are the most stupendous object, in this part of the country. A 
substance, (a species of salts,) oozes from these rocks, which the 
Indians use as a purgative; also a green substance, used by the 
Indians in painting themselves, their pipe stems, &c. The rocks 
are of the grindstone species, and excellent in their kind. Mining 
river, a small stream, issues from about the centre of these rocks, 
into the Lake, which has a cataract near its mouth. 

About nine miles beyond the Rocks, are the Grand Islands, three 
in number, two small, and one large, projecting into the Lake, in- 
habited by about seventy-five Chippawa Indians, who fish in the 
Lake, and hunt in the winter on its shore. The soil of the Island 
is hard clay, mixed with sand, covered with a heavy growth of ma- 



28 



APPENDIX 



pie, beach, &c. These islands form many safe harbors for the 
boats and vessels which navigate the Lake. The entrance of these 
harbors is difficult, on account of shoals. 

La Train river, twenty-five yards wide, is nine miles beyond 
Grand Islands. The Indians ascend this river in their canoes six 
miles, into a Lake, which is the nearest boatable water of Lake 
Superior to the waters of Lake Michigan. The distance here be- 
tween the two Lakes is fifty miles. The Indians travel it, with 
ease, in one day. This is the channel of the intercourse, which 
is kept up between the Indians of Lake Superior, and those of 
Michigan. If a water communication between the two Lakes is to 
be opened, this is the spot for it. 

Proceeding west nine miles, we come to Laughing Fish river, 
forty yards wide, boatable at its entrance. Then pursuing the 
shore of the Lake west, twelve miles, is 

Chocolate river, forty yards wide, boatable at its entrance. 

Cash river, nine miles further, is thirty yards wide, and boata- 
ble at its mouth. 

Dead river, three miles further, is fifty yards wide, boatable at 
its mouth. 

Presque Isles, three miles further, are a cluster of small islands. 

Huron river, forty miles further, is sixty yards wide, boatable 
at its mouth. Opposite the mouth of this river are two islands, 
each seven miles in circumference, separated by a narrow strait, 
composed of high granite rocks, interspersed with a few trees. 

Baigne, or Pancake Point, six miles from Huron river, is twen- 
ty-seven miles wide, by forty-five miles long, broken land, cover- 
ed with stunted shrubbery. At the north end of this point is an 
island, twenty or thirty miles in circumference, uninhabited, lev- 
el, and well wooded. From this Point, the traders pass over to 
the main land. Here is a Chippawa Indian village of forty-five 
souls. About three miles from this Point, Mr. Holliday found a 
a quantity of pure copper, of which Gen. Brown, or Col. Jones, 
has a specimen. 

Quewionone, or Keweena river, is opposite the above Point, six- 
ty yards wide. This river comes from the south, through small 
Lakes and ponds, and is boatable twenty-seven miles, to a port- 
age of three miles, which brings you again to the Lake, west of 



APPENDIX. 



Baigne Point. To go round the Point would be ninety miles. 
Crossing by the above mentioned river and portage, saves sixty 
miles. 

Trout river, is nine miles from the portage, twenty yards wide, 
not boatable. 

Onlonagan, or, as it is erroneously named on some of our maps, 
Denagon, river, thirty-six miles from Trout river, is eighty yards 
wide at its mouth, boatable twenty-four miles, to a cataract of a- 
bout thirty feet, rapid descent, at the foot of which, in the mid- 
dle of the river, (here forty yards wide) is the celebrated Copper 
Rock, three fathoms in circumference; and on the banks of the 
river, are the copper mines, which, many years ago, were 
wrought by the French. On this river, is a Chippawa village, of 
about sixty souls. 

Iron river is west of the Ontanagan, fifteen miles. It is about 
eighty yards wide, and on its banks, the Indians say, iron and 
copper are found. 

Presque Isle river is west of Iron river, twenty-four miles, thir- 
ty yards wide, full of rapids. On the east side of this river, are 
the Porcupine Mountains, which are shaped like the animal, from 
which they take their name, extending nine miles along the shore 
of the Lake, rising to the height of about eleven hundred feet, 
sloping toward the shore. 

Montreal river empties into the Lake from the south, twenty- 
four miles west of Presque Isle, (sixty-three from Ontonagan) 
sixty yards wide, boatable only half a mile, then are two falls of 
water, which together, descend upwards of one hundred feet. 
Through this river, and over several portages, traders pass into 
Lake Flambeau. 

Bad river, fifteen miles west from Montreal river, is seventy 
yards wide, boatable eight or nine miles. On this river, the In- 
dians say, are silver and copper mines; but they conceal the spot 
where they are to be found. 

Sandy Point is nine miles from Bad river. Here was a settle- 
ment of the French, while they possessed this country. On this 
Point, the Indians say, is a silver mine, of which they have the 
ore, but refuse to tell where they obtained it. 



30 



APPENDIX. 



West of this Point is a cluster of thirty-six islands, some of con- 
siderable size, covered with various kinds of trees, of a strong 
clayey and stoney soil, inhabited by about one hundred Chippa- 
wa Indians. 

Iron river, forty yards wide, is sixty-three miles west of San- 
dy Point. 

Burnt river, eighty yards wide, is six miles beyond Iron riv- 
er. Traders ascend this river in canoes, to Follesvoine, through 
a short portage into St. Croix river, a water of the Mississippi, on 
which are establishments of the S. W. Fur Company. The Chip- 
pawas inhabit this country. 

St. Louis river, is twenty-one miles from Burnt river, one hun- 
dred and fifty yards wide. Up this river, twenty-four miles, is a 
trading establishment of the American S. W. Fur Company. At 
this place begin the Rapids, three miles in length. Boats ascend 
them with difficulty, to a portage, called Fondulac Grand Port-* 
age, of nine miles, along the banks of the river; then three miles 
to the next portage of two miles; thence up the river, ( strong cur- 
rent, nine miles of rapids) sixty -three miles to the 

Savan river, a western branch of St. Louis river. Traders as- 
cend this river, of easy current, twenty-four miles; then cross a 
portage of six miles, into Sandy Lake river, fifteen yards wide, 
boatable with difficulty nine miles into 

Sandy Lake. This Lake is nine miles in circumference, full of 
small, low islands, covered with wood, occasionally visited by 
the Indians after the wild fowls, that frequent them in abundance, 
and the wild rice, which grows plentifully in its shallow waters. 
On the south side of this lake, is an establishment of the Ameri- 
can S. W. Fur Company. From this lake, descending Sandy 
Lake river, thirty yards wide, two miles, you enter the Missis- 
sippi. 

The Rice country, extends north to the Lake of the Woods, 
thence along the northern borders of the United States, to Lake 
Superior; and south, to the Ouisconsin, and Fox rivers; and from 
the last river northerly along the west side of Lake Michigan. A 
tract of about one hundred and fifty miles wide, along the south 
shore of Lake Superior, is broken land, has no rice, and is the 
hunting ground of the Chippawa Indians. Their game is beaver, 



APPENDIX. 



31 



otter, marten, a few elks, bears, muskrats, and rein deer, weigh- 
ing from four to five hundred pounds weight. This large tract 
of country will not admit of cultivation and settlement, and 
may always remain hunting ground. 

Extract from Mr. Doty's Letter to Gov. Cass. 

I give next under this head, as containing additional informa- 
tion, an extract of a letter from Mr. J. D. Doty, who accompa- 
nied Gov. Cass in his late exploring expedition into the region of 
which we are speaking. This letter is addressed to Gov. Cass. 

" There are three chief places of residence, of the Indians in 
this country. The first, and principal, is Leech Lake; the sec- 
ond, Sandy Lake; and the third, Fond du Lac. At Leech Lake, 
there are more than two hundred men, at least three hundred and 
fifty women married to them, and about eleven hundred boys and 
girls. 

Their hunting ground is around the Lake, and extends north to 
Round Lake, west to the Red River, south to the Sioux, and 
east until they meet the Indians of Sandy Lake. Their game is 
deer, bear, beaver, otter, muskrats, marten, fisher, raccoon, and 
a few red and grey foxes. The only buffalo they kill is on the 
borders of the Sioux country. The beaver is hunted particular- 
ly on the river St. Peter's, and its tributaries; a few are found in 
other parts. Most of the small rivers abound in otter. The oth- 
er game is found throughout their country. 

None of the western waters are as abundant in white fish, as 
Leech Lake. There are great numbers in Winnipic, Red Cedar, 
and Cross Lakes; but the rivers are destitute of them. They are 
fine flavored, and more delicious than those of the Saut of St. 
Mary. There are various other fish in these and the other lakes, 
and rivers; as pike, carp, black bass, cat fish, &c. A fish called 
by the savages " Too-nie-bee," and by the English and French 
" Telibees," not equal to, but greatly resembling, the white fish, 
is found in the large Lakes above mentioned, and particularly, in 
abundance, in Leech Lake. The fish and the wild rice are the 
chief sustenance of the traders, and without them the trade could 



32 



APPENDIX. 



scarcely be carried on. The Telibees are taken in nets of from 
sixty to one hundred fathoms long, late in autumn, and to pre- 
serve them, are hung up by the tail in the air, until frozen. 
From July until November, the white fish are taken, and the 
Telibees, from the first of September, to the latter part of No- 
vember, at the setting in of the ice, and both on the same ground. 
Neither are taken in the winter; but from the 20th of May to the 
20th of June, immense numbers of Telibees are caught. During 
the winter, pike and pickerel may be obtained. 

The water fowl, throughout this north-western country, are 
nearly the same. They are the bustard, wild goose, several kinds 
of ducks, as the black, Frepch (resembling the tame) wood duck. 
&c. swan, pelican, loon, and the gull. A fowl called the " cor- 
morant" is found here. It lives on fish, is nearly the size of the 
ravens and of the same color, has a leg like a loon, a bill about 
four inches long, shaped like that of a snipe, except at the peak, 
which is crooked and sharp, rather like that of an eagle. It 
lights in the water, and on trees, and, it is said, roosts at night 
by suspending itself by the bill from the limb of a tree ! ! The 
birds are nearly the same, as those commonly found in the eastern 
states. 

The moose, elk, rein and common deer, wolf (not north of 
Sandy Lake) red and white ermine, wolverine, lynx, skunk, por- 
cupine, wood chuck, and red and striped squirrels, are found in 
different parts of the country. 

There are many turtles, and of different sizes; some very large 
and delicious, found in the lakes. 

No rattle, or other snakes, except the small striped or garter 
snake. 

The Indians of Leech Lake are in bands, and each band has 
its own Chief. No general leader of the whole is acknowledged. 
The Brachie, who resides at Sandy Lake, has, however, when 
he is present, considerable influence over them. The Chieftain- 
ship descends from father to son, and the line becomes extinct, by 
the death of the last male, the females being entirely excluded. 

In filling vacancies, they generally elect from the tribe, the most 
valiant, brave and powerful, or the man they deem the wisest, 
and the most eloquent speaker; and they are frequently determin- 



APPENDIX. 



33 



ed in their selection by this last quality, for they esteem it highly 
essential. The person elected becomes heir to all the honors of 
the old line. This right of election they always claim, but it is occa- 
sionally dispensed with, when some daring, bloody fellow, usurping 
the throne, either by his ferocity, or his many and influential re- 
lations, holds the tribe in awe. Such an one, however, is soon 
casually disposed of, if he does not in a short time ingratiate him- 
self by some extraordinary act, with the band. Even then he 
can scarcely be considered secure, for he is only feared, not lov- 
ed; and is moreover liable to be deposed at any time. Aware of 
this, he generally moves cautiously, and deals severely. 

The Chief of the Leech Lake Indians is Es-kee-buc-ec-rose, or 
"flat mouth;" the regular Chief of those at Sandy Lake, the Bras 
Casse, or " broken arm" in Indian, Book-oo-Sam-ge-gun; and of 
Fond du Lac, Shingwauby, or, as called by the English, " the 
deaf man." These are severally influenced by the Brachie, who 
it seems, raised himself to this superior station, merely by his 
eloquence. His ancestors have always been of good standing, and 
for a time furnished Chiefs for the tribe at Sandy Lake. It ap- 
pears that he is the first Emperor of these tribes, they having 
been entirely distinct and independent, previous to his time. 

The Sandy Lake Tribe of Indians is the second in size. It has 
eighty-five men, two hundred and forty three women and chil- 
dren, besides thirty-five half-breeds. They are divided into three 
parties; one resides about half way from Sandy Lake to Leech 
Lake, at a place called Pac-au-qum-aw, on the Mississippi, and 
near the boundary between these and the Leech Lake Indians. 
These Indians hunt north to Vermillion Lake, the head waters of 
the Fond du Lac river, on which the NorthrWest Company, has 
an establisnment; west to Pac-au-gum-aw above mentioned; east 
to the Fond du Lac river, and down it the portage du Prairie; and 
south to the borders of the Sioux country, or near Elk river, 
which falls into the Mississippi, It is about one hundred miles to 
Pac-au-gum-aw; the same to Vermillion Lake, fifty miles to Port- 
age du Prairie, $nd one hundred and twenty miles to Elk river, 
These are considered direct courses, 

Their furs and the game are the same as those of the Leech 
Lake Indians. The birds do not vary from those in the county 

5 



34 



APPENDIX. 



around Leech Lake. White fish and Telibees are found in San- 
dy Lake, but inferior in quality to those of Leech Lake. The lat- 
ter part of September the white fish begin to run, and continue 
until winter sets in. The Telibees are taken at the same period 
as in Leech Lake. 

Winter commences about the first of December, and breaks up 
by the first of April. It is about the same in severity as at Mon- 
treal. This applies also to Leech Lake; but it is much colder at 
Fond du Lac, where the season is generally fifteen days later. 

The depth of snow is not as great at Leech Lake as at Sandy 
Lake. Around Lake Superior, it falls two and a half or three feet 
deep, but decreases to the west, so that when the snow is three 
feet in depth at Fond du Lac, the ground is scarcely covered at 
Sandy Lake. A south wind may prevail three days at Fond du 
Lac, without decreasing the snow; while at Sandy Lake, one of 
twelve hours invariably produces a thaw. The summer is gene- 
rally warm and pleasant. Vegetation springs, and advances ra- 
pidly, as soon as the snow has disappeared. Potatoes grow finel}" 
at Sandy Lake, and most of the garden vegetables may be raised. 

The food of the Indians in this country principally depends upon 
the different seasons. They occasionally subsist on the Waub-es- 
see-pin. It resembles a potatoe, is mealy when boiled, and grows 
only in wet clay ground, and about one and a half feet deep. The 
crane potatoe is another article of food, called by them the Sitch- 
auc-waub-es-see-pin. It is of the same kind, but inferior in quali- 
ty, to the Waub-es-see-pin, and is found throughout this country. 
The Wau-tap-pin-ee, is a small root, frequently pulled three feet 
long, and is dried in order to preserve it. This root is found on 
the southern shore of Lake Superior, but is seldom brought as far 
as Sandy Lake. These three are prepared for food by boiling. 
They also use the Bois retors, or " twisted wood," in cases of 
extreme necessity. It resembles the bitter sweet, runs into the 
tops of the highest trees, and from one tree to another, has a thick 
bark, and is sweet and palatable, when boiled. To these may be 
added the wild rice, (foils avoine) and such game as they occasion- 
ally kill, of which they eat every kind, and every part. I saw 
them yesterday cooking a skunk, and even when ready for the ta- 
ble, it was impossible to approach the lodge, except to the wind- 



APPENDIX. 



35 



ward. They boil the excrements of the rabbit with their rice " to 
season it," and esteem it a luxury! To make that dish still more 
palatable, they occasionally take a partridge, pick off the feathers, 
and without any farther dressing, except pounding it to a jelly, 
fling it into the rice, and boil it in that state! In this they seem 
not far above the brute creation. It is scarcely possible to ac- 
count for such an appetite or relish, except it is, that necessity of- 
ten compels them to resort to this loathsome food for sustenance. 

A band of the Sandy Lake Tribe of Indians resides at Pauc-quau- 
me-no-min-ic-con, or Rice Lake, between twenty and twenty-five 
miles south of Sandy Lake. There are only thirteen men in the 
village. Their number of young men, squaws and children, is 
forty-seven. They hunt in the woods adjoining the Lake. To 
the east of their village, and near Fond du Lac, they occasionally 
kill a few moose. This band has never received much notice 
from the English Government, and has been generally well dis- 
posed towards ours. 

All of the men at Sandy Lake, and south of it, annually, in the 
month of March, go to the borders of the Sioux country, and as 
far beyond as their fears will permit them, to hunt the beaver; 
which hunt is called by them No-tah-mic-qua, and signifies 
" searching for Beaver." Their families being left behind them 
in this hunt, repair to the sugar camps, and are engaged in manu- 
facturing sugar from the maple tree, during the absence of the 
men. 

The Indians around Sandy Lake, in the month of September, 
remove to Rice Lake, to gather their rice. In no other place, 
near this point, does it grow in as large quantities, and as luxu- 
riantly, as there. This Lake is about five miles long, by three 
broad. It might, perhaps, be correctly called a morass, for the 
water is not over five feet deep, and is almost entirely covered 
with rice. It is only in morasses, or ponds, with muddy bottoms, 
that this grain is found. 

It was formerly the practice of the Indians, when the grain was 
in the milk, to pass around in canoes, and gather up the tops, in 
large shocks, or bunches, and fasten them, to render the collect- 
ing of the grain much easier, after it had ripened. By this 
means they obtained it also, in much larger quantities, than at 



APPENDIX. 



present. This work of harvesting is performed by the females, 
It is now gathered bj two of them, passing in a canoe, one sitting 
in the stern, and pushing it along, while the other, with her back 
to the bow, and with two small pointed sticks, about three feet 
long, one in each hand, collects it in, by running one of the sticks 
into the rice and bending it upon the edge of the canoe, while 
with the other she strikes the heads suddenly, and rattles the grain 
into the canoe. This process she performs on both sides of the 
canoe alternately, and while the canoe is moving. About a gill is 
generally struck off at a blow. It falls covered with a husk, and 
has a beard two inches long. It is not ripe when harvested. 

One method of curing the rice, and that which makes it most 
paktable, is, by putting it in a kettle in small quantities, and hang- 
ing it over a fire^ until it becomes parched. A round hole is dug 
in the ground, about one and a half feet deep, and three in circum- 
ference. Having first spread in this hole a moose skin, the grain 
is poured in, and is there trod by an Indian, until completely hull- 
ed. This is a very laborious work, and always devolves upon 
the men. After being sufficiently trod, it is taken out, and clean- 
ed in a fanj made of birch bark, shaped something like those used 
by our farmers. This is the most expeditious mode of curing it. 

The other method differs from this, only in drying. It is as 
follows: A scaffold is made of small poles, about three feet from 
the ground, and covered with red cedar slabs. On this the rice is 
spread, and under this scaffold a small slow fire is kindled, which 
is kept up until the grain becomes entirely dry. It takes nearly 
a day to dry one of the scaffolds full. The grain cured in this 
way, is more nutritious, and keeps much longer, than the other. 
In that parched in a kettle, the substance appears to be destroyed. 

The rice, when cured, is put into sacks of about a bushel. A 
sack is valued at two skins. A fathom of stroud or a blanket 
will buy two sacks. A skin is valued at two dollars; two skins 
for a sack, gives four dollars a bushel for the rice. One family 
ordinarily makes about five sacks, though those who are industri- 
ous, few in number, make twenty-five. A few provident families 
save a little for the spring of the year, to eat with their sugar, 
though generally, by the time they have done curing it, the whole 
is disposed of for trinkets and ornaments. Thus by gratifying 



APPENDIX. 



37 



their vanity, they are left nearly destitute of provisions for the 
winter, choosing to endure hunger, and the greatest misery, rath- 
er than to mortify their pride ! 

The Fond du Lac Indians are divided into bands, and have no 
fixed places of residence, wandering on the rivers and lakes, al- 
ternately hunting and fishing; their country being poorer than that 
of either of the above mentioned tribes. They hunt west, to the 
Sandy Lake Indians; north, to the sources of Snake river, which 
empties into the Fond du Lac river, eighteen miles above the 
mouth of the Savannah; north-east, to Encampment Island, in Lake 
Superior, thirty-six miles above Fond du Lac; and on the north- 
ern shore of the Lake, to the river Brule; and south, to Pine Lake, 
the northern boundary of the Foils avoine (Menomine) Indians, 
and about one hundred miles from the establishment on Fond du 
Lac. 

Their principal game is moose, bear, marten, mink, muskrat, 
case cat, (lynx,) hedge hogs, (plenty,) otter, and a few beaver. 
They have neither the buffalo, deer, wolf, raccoon, fox, or wol- 
verine. 

The tribe consists of forty-five men, sixty women, and two 
hundred and forty children. There are about thirty of the half 
breed, and three freemen, who have families. They are Cana- 
dians, married to Indian women, living entirely with the Indians, 
and are not engaged to the company, by whom, as well as by the 
Indians, they are considered as a great nuisance, being forever ex- 
citing broils and disturbances. An old negro, in the employ of the 
company, has a squaw for a wife, and a family of four children, 
who reside at Fond du Lac. These Indians have little of the spir- 
it and genius of those in the upper country, by whom they are 
considered very stupid and dull, being but little disposed for war. 
They consider the Sioux as their enemies; but make few war ex- 
ertions. They sometimes join those of other tribes, but never 
have taken a very deep interest in the struggle. In their manners 
and customs, they resemble the Indians of Sandy Lake, but are in 
no respect their equals; particularly in those things, which may 
be supposed to ameliorate their condition in life. 

There are two grand water communications with this country, 
the first by Lake Superior, and Fond du Lac river, which is con- 



38 



APPENDIX. 



sidered the most eligible; and the other by the Mississippi. It is 
about one thousand three hundred miles from St. Louis, up the 
Mississippi, to Sandy Lake, and one thousand and fifty from De- 
troit, by water, to the same place. There are many rapids in the 
Mississippi, particularly above the falls of St. Anthony, which it is 
almost impossible to ascend with boats or canoes.* The waters 
of this river are also considered unhealthy. On the other course 
the greatest difficulties are found in the rapids of the Fond du 
Lac river; but as this river is ascended only one hundred and 
fifty miles, and the rapidity of the Mississippi continues for six hun- 
dred, and a strong current the residue, the difference in the de- 
gree of exertion and fatigue between the two routes, is very great 
in favor of the former. 

Communication is had with the Mississippi from Lake Superior, 
by the Tenaugon, Iron river, Carp, Presque Isle, Black, Mont- 
real, Mauvais, Brule, and Fond du Lac, rivers. 

The Tenaugon is ascended thirty-six miles, where a portage 
commences of trvo hundred pauses, to the " old plantation," as 
commonly called, but by the French, " vieux desert, — old de= 
serted place," which is on a small lake about four miles long, and 
three broad. Two rivers rise in this lake, one the Menominee, 
which empties into Green Bay, the other discharges into the Sau- 
teur river. They are both navigable for canoes. 

Iron river is so rapid, that a portage is commenced at its mouth, 
and the canoe is scarcely put into its water in the whole length of 
the river. It heads near some navigable water of the Ouisconsin. 

Three miles above the mouth of Carp river, is a perpendicular 
fall, of about forty-five feet, over the Porcupine mountains. 
Above, the stream is small, and with difficulty ascended. 

Presque Me river, has man}' rapids, and is seldom used. Black 
river, is the same. 

The Montreal river is not navigated; but at its mouth, on the 
east side, a portage is made of one hundred and twenty pauses, to 
a small Lake; in w r hich distance the Montreal river is crossed 
twice, the first time at eleven pauses, and the second at eighty. 
The Lake is a league long, and is the head of another branch of 



* See Gov. Cass' letter, following this, 



APPENDIX. 



39 



the Sauteur. This fork runs -fifteen miles into Turtle Lake, which 
is about two miles over; thence it runs a few leagues into a small 
Lake, passing through which it continues on, until it joins the fork 
from old Plantation Lake, thirty-three miles from Turtle Lake. 
A Lake of considerable size is connected with Turtle Lake, on the 
north-east, by a river. 

On Lake du Flambeau, the American S. W. Fur Company, have 
an establisment of five traders, and twenty hands, the return from 
which the last season, was about fifty packs. It lies south-east 
from Turtle Lake. The rout is from the mouth of the Montreal 
to Turtle Lake, from which there is a portage of one fourth of a 
mile, to a pond, thence up the outlet of a small Lake, one fourth of 
a mile, from which a portage of three miles is made to old Planta- 
tion river. This is descended eighteen miles to the entrance of 
the river du Flambeau, which rises in the Lake of the same name, 
and is twenty-four miles long. The company's fort stands on the 
north side of the Lake. The Lake is crooked, is four miles long., 
and one broad. From this there is a chain of Lakes, which extend 
down to the head waters of the Ouisconsin. Portages are made 
from one to another, so as to connect the communication in that 
direction. The small river formed by the junction of the Turtle 
and old Plantation rivers, is almost entirely a rapid, and running 
over abed of rocks, is very dangerous. It takes seven days to de- 
scend it, and is one hundred and seventy-five miles long. The 
river Sauteur, or Chippawa, which is also rapid, is very wide, is 
about one hundred and eighty miles long, and empties into Lake- 
Pepin. 

Mauvais river, is ascended about one hundred miles. A port- 
age is then made of twenty-two pauses, to a small Lake, which is 
connected with another by a stream one fourth of a mile long. 

From this are portages through a chain of small lakes, to Clam 
Lake, in which a branch of the Sauteur rises. The Lake is one 
mile long, and three fourths of a mile broad, which is the general 
extent of all the lakes on this rout. It is from this, six miles, to 
Spear Lake, fifteen miles to Summer Lake, and twelve miles to a 
lake, called by the Indians, Poc-qua-yah-wan. The branch con- 
tinues through this Lake, and passes out on the south-east side. On 
the west a small river enters, which is ascended fifteen miles. 



40 



APPENDIX. 



whence a portage is made of ten pauses, into Lake Boutere, on 
which the American S. W. Fur Company have an establishment. 
It is nine miles long, and three broad, and is connected with Sau- 
teur, by a stream thirty miles long, which issues from it. 

The river Brule is ascended ninety miles, to a bend, from which 
a portage of two pauses is made to Lake St. Croix, the head water 
of the same name. It is three miles long by two broad. On the 
river St. Croix, one hundred miles from the lake, the American 
S. W. Company have another establishment. It discharges into 
the Mississippi, three hundred miles from the establishment. Be- 
tween the Mauvais and Brule rivers, several small streams empty 
into Lake Superior, as the Raspberry, Sandy, Sez-caw-maw-be- 
kaw, Cranberry, Bull-rush, and the little Iron rivers. 

The Fonddu Lac river rises in Vermillion Lake, is near three 
hundred miles long, and its general course is east. It may scarce- 
ly be called navigable above the Savannah, which enters one hun- 
dred and thirty miles from its mouth, though it is used by the In- 
dians. The Savannah is twenty-four miles long, and is ascended 
to its source. The portage to the small river, which empties into 
Sandy Lake, is six miles, the river is descended twelve. Sandy 
Lake is four miles long by two broad. By the outlet of the Lake 
to the Mississippi, is two miles, but by land it is hardly the half of 
a mile. It is two hundred miles by Sandy to Vermillion Lake, by 
way of the Mississippi, and Trout Lake. 

About half way from Sandy Lake to Red Cedar Lake, below, 
a river empties into the Mississippi on the west side, which rises 
in Duck Lake. This Lake is halfway to Leech Lake. A portage 
of six miles is made from the Mississippi, opposite Sandy Lake, to 
this river, which is ascended sixty miles. From Duck Lake, the 
communication with Leech Lake, is over a country, one half 
of which is covered with Lakes. The land is generally heavily 
timbered," 

Mode of conveyance in the winter- 

" The dogs used for drawing in this country are of the middle 
size, and a mixture of every breed. Their harness is made some- 
thing like the common dray harness; being a collar with tugs, a 



APPENDIX. 



41 



belly band, and two back bands, one across the shoulders, and the 
other the hips. Three bells on the second band, it seems, are indis- 
pensable. They have no lines or breeching. Thus harnessed, 
they are hitched to a train made of a white oak slab, dressed down 
smooth, about six feet long, and fourteen inches wide, and turned 
before in the shape of a sleigh runner. On the crust or ice a dog 
will travel, with two hundred pounds in his train, from morning to 
night, as fast as a man can walk. They frequently go sixty miles 
in a day. These dogs are starved in the summer, so that they 
can scarcely stagger around, but by the time winter sets in, they 
are put in the finest order. When worked, they are fed at night, 
not a morsel is given them in the day. Fish is their common 
food." 

Extract from Mr. Schoolcraft" 1 s communication to the Secretary of 

War. 

From this communication, I have, with leave, made the follow- 
ing extracts. Mr. Schoolcraft accompanied Gov. Cass, as mine- 
ralogist, and his information, is of a character appropriate to his 
profession. 

" Keweena, (Quewione,) river and point, are two hundred and 
seventy miles west of the Saut of St. Mary's, fifty miles east of On- 
tonagan river. The stones along the shore of the Lake here, con- 
tain native copper in pebbles, from the size of a grain of sand, to 
those of a pound weight. These indications continue along the 
shore of the Lake, fifty miles, to Ontonagan river. This river has 
long been noted for the large masses of native copper on its banks. 
It is the largest river that falls into the Lake, between Point Iro- 
quois and the Fon du lac. It rises in a district of mountainous 
country, intermediate between the Mississippi, and Lakes Michi- 
gan and Superior, and has a course of one hundred and twenty 
miles. It is connected by short portages with the head waters of 
Menomine river, which falls into Green Bay, and with the Chip- 
pawa river, a water of the Mississippi, routs of communication oc- 
casionally passed by the Indians in their canoes. At its mouth is 
a village of sixteen families of Chippawa Indians, whose principal 
food is fish. A strip of alluvial, sandy land, extends three or four 

6 



42 



APPENDIX. 



miles up the river, succeeded by high broken hills, a wild country 
in which are the noted copper mines, thirty-two miles* from -the 
Lake. The large mass of native copper, is on the west bank of 
the river, at the water's edge, at the foot of an elevated bank, em- 
bedded in a hard rock, estimated to weigh about five tons, of which 
the rock is much the largest part. The quantity of metallic cop- 
per is estimated by Mr. Schoolcraft, at two thousand two hundred 
pounds. 

Fond du lac river empties into Lake Superior from the south- 
west, and is the most considerable water communication between 
Lake Superior and the Mississippi. 

Pictured Rocks, (Great Rocks, Portaile,) on the south shore of 
Lake Superior, form "one of the most commanding objects of na- 
tional scenery. They are an unbroken wall, rising perpendicu- 
larly from the Lake, to the height of three hundred feet, exhibiting 
to the eye of the passing traveller, a fanciful and very grotesque 
appearance, a spectacle as tremendous as the imagination can 
conceive. 

The south shore of Lake Superior, to speak generally, presents 
few enticements to the agriculturalist. A large part of the shore 
is rocky; and the few alluvial portions of it, are of a sandy, light 
texture. With an elevation of seven hundred feet above the 
ocean, and drawing its waters from territories north of the 44th 
degree of N. latitude, Lake Superior cannot enjoy a climate fa- 
vorable to vegetable productions. The average heat of June, 
1820, was 69°. The weather, in the summer months, is subject 
to sudden transitions. Forest trees on the shores of the Lake, arc 
chiefly of the fir kind, mixed with pine and white birch, of the 
bark of which the Indians make their canoes." 

Governor Cass's Letter* 

From Gov. Cass's letter to the Secretary of War, I extract, 
with his leave, the following description of this part of our coun- 
try, over which he travelled. 

* Messrs. Morrison and Holliday say, twenty-four miles. 



APPENDIX. 



43 



" The first part of the south shore of Lake Superior, going west, 
is moderately elevated ; the next hilly, rising frequently into 
mountains ; the last, flat, sandy beach. 

Montreal river communicates with the Chippawa of the Mis- 
sissippi. The connexion is difficult, interrupted by long and pre- 
carious portages, which will not admit of improvement, but at an 
inadmissible expense. From the mouth of this river to its source, 
there are forty-five miles of portage. 

Mauvais river, (probably another name for Burnt river) and 
Brule river, both communicate, with difficulty, with the St. Croix 
of the Mississippi. 

St. Louis river, is boatable twenty-five miles without obstruc- 
tion. At this distance is an establishment of the American south 
west Fur Company. Here commences the Grand Portage of six 
miles, across the spurs of the Porcupine ridge of mountains. It has 
another portage of one and a half miles, and a continued succession 
of Rapids, called Grand Rapids, for nine miles, impassable by 
boats. From this to the head of Savannah river, a small branch 
of the St. Louis, the navigation is uninterrupted, and after passing 
four miles, the descent is easy into Lake Au Sable, whose outlet is 
within two miles of the Mississippi. Till 1816, this was the prin- 
cipal establishment of the British north west Company, on these 
waters ; and since that period, has been occupied for the same 
purpose, by the American south west Fur Company." 

Gov. Cass penetrated this inhospitable, unexplored region, to 
the head of the navigable waters of the Mississippi, which he thus 
describes. 

" Upper Red Cedar Lake, three hundred and fifty miles above 
Lac-au-Sable, is considered as the head of the navigation of the 
Mississippi. Between these two Lakes, the country is almost un- 
inhabitable. Immediately above Lac-au-Sable, the eountry is 
somewhat elevated, and interspersed with pine woods ; beyond is 
level, wet prairie. The sources of the Mississippi, are amidst 
swamps and lakes, whose geographical character indicates a re- 
cent formation, and which, though the highest table land of this 
part of the continent, is yet a dead level, presenting to the eye a 
succession of dreary, uninteresting objects, interminable marshes, 
numerous ponds, and a few low, naked, sterile plains, with a small 



44 



APPENDIX. 



stream, not exceeding sixty feet wide, in a very crooked channel 
— these are all the objects to reward the traveller for all his pri- 
vations and toils, necessarily endured, in reaching this spot The 
view, on all sides, is monotonous and dreary. In the whole ter- 
ritory, scarcely a living being is to be seen. One here seems to 
be removed far away from civilized life." 

Gov. Cass descended the Mississippi, from its source, in Upper 
Red Cedar Lake, nine hundred and fifty miles, to the mouth of 
St. Peters' river, and describes this part of his rout as follows. 

" Lac-au-Sable is six hundred miles above the mouth of St. Pe- 
ters' river. Between these places, for two hundred miles below 
the former, there are in the Mississippi, no obstacles to navigation. 
The land along the river is of a better quality than above ; the 
bottoms are more numerous, and the timber indicates a stronger 
and more productive soil. But near this point, as you descend 
the river, commence the Great Rapids of the Mississippi, more 
than two hundred miles in length. The river rolls over a rocky 
bed, creating a succession of Rapids, all of them difficult, and some 
of them dangerous. Here the country begins to open, and the 
immense plains, in which the herds of Buffalo range, approach the 
river. These plains continue to the Falls of St. Anthony, eleva- 
ted fifty or sixty feet above the water of the river. They are 
destitute of timber, and present to the eye a flat, uniform surface, 
bounded, at the distance of eight or ten miles, by high ground. 

" The title of this land is in dispute between the Chippawa 
and Sieux Indians, and their long and still continued hostilities, 
have prevented either party from destroying the game, in the im- 
provident, wasteful manner, too common among Indians.*" 

Interview with two Chippawa Chiefs. 

I close my description of this part of our country with an account 
of an interview with two Chippawa Chiefs from Lake Flambeau, 
who were among the numerous visitants at Mackinaw. These 

* The whole distance travelled by Gov. Cass and his company, from 24th 
May to 24th Sept. 1820, was upwards of 4,200 miles. The journey was per- 
formed without a single untoward occurrence. 



APPENDIX. 



45 



Chiefs, named Kishkimmon, King Fisher, or Snow shoe, an old man, 
and Shewabshes, the Big Marten, middle aged, reside, the former on 
the west side of the Lake, two days journey from Lake Superior, 
in a village of thirty souls ; the other one hundred miles distant, 
on the east part of the Lake, in a village of fifty souls, four days 
journey from Lake Superior. This is the country of the wild 
rice, which is here gathered in October. The animals, &c. of 
this country are the marten, deer, bear, beaver — also partridges, 
and other wild fowl. On the west side of the Lake, where the 
wild rice is less plenty, the women raise a little corn. At the 
village on the east side, a fine country for corn formerly, they 
now raise none, " because they can get no seed, and rice is plen- 

ty." 

From questions put to these chiefs, and their answers, I ascer- 
tained, that they believe in, and worship God, or the Great Spirit ; 
that they expect, after death, to go to heaven, though they 
know little about it, only that it is a place of happiness far beyond 
what they here enjoy. They expressed desire to know more 
about it. I shewed them a Bible, and said to them, " this book, 
if you could read it, or have it read and interpreted to you, would 
give you all the knowledge of God, of your duty to him, of heaven 
and a future state, which you could desire." They believe that 
liars and thieves do not go to the good, but to the evil spirit, who 
assists them to do evil. 

I gave them a summary account of the creation of the world, 
and of man, of his fall, and of the mission, life, and death of Je- 
sus Christ, and of his second coming to judge the world. They 
listened with readiness and apparent interest. I judged that they 
would readily hear the Gospel, were it preached to them. Their 
villages being small, distant from each other, and lonely, I asked 
them, whether, if they had the opportunity, they would be willing 
to remove with others of their scattered tribe, to some tract of 
good land, where they might have houses, farms, oxen, cows, 
horses, sheep, and cultivate the earth ; have schools tor their 
children, and ministers to teach them religion ; to have their wo- 
men taught to knit, sew, spin and weave ; to make butter and 
cheese, and live like the white people. They readily answered, 
" Yes, we should like it." I told them what was doing among the 



46 



APPENDIX. 



Cherokees, Choctaws and Osages ; and informed them of the de- 
sign of the Government concerning the Indians, generally, and of 
my visit to them. They listened with much apparent interest, 
expressed great satisfaction in what they had heard, and promised, 
at my request, to tell their brethren what I had told them, and to 
ask them what they thought of it, and to get one of the Traders 
to write me the result. 

I asked them if they were happy. They answered faintly, 
"yes, except when the Traders leave us, then we feel lonely." 
Their countenances, which were mild, nothing of ferocity in them, 
indicated that they were not happy ; there was in them apparent 
dejection and sadness. And this I think true, as a general obser- 
vation, not without exceptions, concerning the Indians with whom 
I had intercourse. Their situation seems peculiarly to call for 
our sympathy ; and I have no doubt they would gratefully re- 
ceive the friendly hand that should be extended to afford them 
comfort, and raise them from their present " low estate." This 
observation applies more particularly to those remnants of tribes, 
who are insulated among the white settlements, or scattered in 
small villages in the wilderness on our borders. 

The Chippawas and Ottawas, who possess and inhabit the coun- 
try we have been describing, in many parts of it, hold their lands 
in common, hunt together, intermarry, understand each the lan- 
guage of the other, there being but little difference between their 
languages, and may be considered, as to all purposes and meas- 
ures relating to their civilization, as one people. 

Advancing to the southern parts of the North West Territory, 
we come to the tribes mentioned below. 

Major Irvinh Communication. 

The following miscellaneous information concerning the Meno- 
mines, Winebagoes, and the neighboring tribes, their territo- 
ries, &c. was obligingly communicated in writing by Major Irvin. 
Indian Factor at Green Bay. I give it in his own words. 



APPENDIX. 



47 



Menomine Indians. 

" The tribe of Indians properly connected with Green-Bay is the 
Menomine. The Canadians designate them " Folls-avoine" a 
French term, signifying, wild oats, or rice. This is one of the prin- 
cipal articles on which the Indians subsist in this quarter. It is to 
be found in great abundance, in the fall of the year, in this and the 
Ouisconsin river, and is considered very palateable and nutritious. 

It is believed that enough of it could be gathered in the fall, to 
support several thousand Indians, for one year. 

The manner of preparing this article for use, is simply to dig a 
hole in the ground, into which a dressed deer skin is put ; then the 
wild oats, for wild rice, as some persons call it) is put upon the 
gkin and pounded with a stick, (having a thick end to it) for the 
purpose of disconnecting the husk from it. Then, after winnow- 
ing it, and heating it in any iron, tin, or copper vessel, it is tit 
for use. 

The Menomine tribe, has been estimated at five hundred war- 
riors. Their boundaries are said to be Fox river to the south, as 
far as Winnebago Lake ; Bay du Noquett to the North ; Menom- 
ine river to the north-east, and Mississippi to the west. On Me- 
nomine river is the only permanent village possessed by the 
Menominees, where corn, potatoes, pumpkins, squashes, &c. are 
raised. It is on the west side of Green Bay, in a north-eastern 
direction from the fort, on Fox river ; and is supposed to be dis- 
tant from the fort, from fifty to sixty miles. The village is eight 
miles above the mouth of the river ; and in the year 1817, con- 
tained one hundred and fifty warriors. Forty miles beyond this 
village, on the same river, is a Chippawa village, containing from 
thirty to forty warriors. From this last village, by Menomine 
river, Lake Superior is said to be distant from eighty to one hun- 
dred miles. It is well known that Menomine river opens an ea- 
sy communication with Lake Superior, which may at some remote 
period be found an important circumstance. The remainder of 
the Menominees place their lodges as circumstances justify, some- 
times on the borders of Fox river ; at others upon those of the 
Ouisconsin, and during the summer, and part of the fall, they have 



48 



APPENDIX. 



a village on the east shore of the head of Green Bay, about three 
miles from the fort, where they cultivate corn, pumpkins, &c. 
and another on the opposite side, from five to six miles lower 
down. In the spring they subsist on sugar and fish; in the sum- 
mer on fish and game; in the fall, on wild rice, and corn, and in 
the winter on fish and game. Those who are provident, have 
some rice during the winter. The fish, consisting principally of 
sturgeon and salmon-trout, are in the greatest abundance in the 
Bay. Very few persons here speak the Menomine language ; but 
as the Menominees speak the Chippawa, which is the prevailing 
language in use with the neighbouring tribes, the intercourse with 
them is conducted in that language. 



Winebagoes. 

The Winebagoes come to this place several times during the 
summer. It is said by respectable Traders, who have had some 
intercourse with them, that they consist of about seven hundred 
warriors. Their permanent villages are at the entrance of Win- 
ebago Lake, and on Rock river of the Mississippi. Little infor- 
mation has been obtained respecting this tribe, owing to the diffi- 
culty of acquiring any knowledge of their language. No other 
tribe seems to possess so much jealousy of the whites, and such 
reluctance to have intercourse with them, as this. 

They will suffer no encroachment upon their soil ; nor any 
persons to pass through it, without giving a satisfactory explana- 
tion of their motives and intentions. In failing to comply with 
this preliminary step, their lives would be in danger. They cul- 
tivate corn, potatoes, pumpkins, squashes, and beans, and are re- 
markably provident. They possess some horses. The Wineba- 
goes are industrious, frugal and temperate ; the Menominees are 
quite the reverse. There existed in time past, a mutual and an- 
cient hatred between these tribes ; but it is now happily subsiding. 

It is difficult to ascertain the definite boundaries of different In- 
dian tribes, living within a few miles of each other. The Indians 
themselves give vague and unsatisfactory accounts of their own 
boundaries, and so do some intelligent traders ; who have been, 



APPENDIX. 



49 



from twenty to thirty years, trading with them. This remark 
will apply to the population of the several tribes. For example, 
Mr. James Ard says, the Winebagoes consist of about five hundred 
warriors ; while Col. Robert Dickson estimates them at seven 
hundred. They both, however, agree, as to the number of the 
Menominees. Col. Dickson estimates the Chippawas, residing 
about the lakes, at ten thousand ; others, including from Quebec, 
at from twelve thousand to fifteen thousand, and the total number 
at thirty thousand. 

Sioux, Sauks, Foxes and Chippawas. 

" The Sioux, Mr. Ard thinks, consist of about five thousand; oth- 
ers say six thousand. 

The same tribe, in the neighborhood of the river St. Peters', 
at from five hundred to six hundred. The Sauks and Foxes (uni- 
ted by the ties of relationship) at eight thousand. 

With respect to the boundaries of the Winebagoes, Mr. Ard 
states them thus : Rock River and two rivers, and embracing the 
Ouisconsin from Winebago Lake. Col. Dickson says they claim 
from Winebago Lake, including the lands adjacent, as well as the 
east bank of the Fox and Ouisconsin rivers. And the Menominees 
the west bank of those rivers. That the Chippawas claim from the 
west of Menomine river, all of Lake Superior, including the Lakes 
and rivers adjacent, as far west as the Pacific Ocean. 



Distances of Places. 

*« The distances of places from each other is reduced to a good 
deal of accuracy. 

From Mackinaw to this place, (Green Bay) from two hundred 
to two hundred and ten miles, by water. From this place, to the 
Portage of the Ouisconsin, one hundred and eighty miles by water; 
and the same distance, (one hundred and eighty miles) from the 
said Portage to la Prairie du Chien. From the latter to the 
mouth of St. Peter five hundred miles. Winebago Lake is thirty - 



APPENDIX. 



six miles from Green Bay, the navigation to which, either in boats 
or canoes, is difficult, late in the summer or early in the fall ; as 
Fox river is full of shoals and rapids. The most favorable pe- 
riods for going to that Lake, are early in the spring, or late in the 
fall. 

The navigation of the Ouisconsin is said to be good, very early 
in the spring and late in the fall. It contains sand-bars. From St. 
Louis to Chicago, by the Mississippi and Illinois rivers, four hun- 
dred and fifty miles. From Green Bay to Chicago, by land, about 
one hundred and ninety miles. 

Chicago is in latitude 42° 9' 16". Green Bay in 45° 6' 55". 
The Portage from Fox River to the Ouisconsin is two thousand 
five hundred and ten yards by actual measurement. Winebag* 
Lake is thirty-three miles long and eighteen wide. 

Some Account of Green Bay. 

" This settlement extends about six miles on both sides of the 
mouth of Fox river and contains about eighty families. The fe- 
males are part of the half, and the remainder of the full, aboriginal 
blood, whose husbands, with few exceptions, are Canadians ; some 
of whom are Indian Traders ; others are farmers and indifferent 
mechanics. If their children are estimated at about five to each 
family, it would give a total of two hundred and twenty-five, 
almost in a state of nature. These people, and the Me- 
nominees with whom, by the ties of relationship, they are con- 
nected, make from the maple tree, about one hundred thousand 
pounds of sugar annually ; and from three to four hundred gallons 
of molasses. These, with their skins &c. are nearly all sold for 
whiskey, at an immense sacrifice. It is a common practice with 
these Canadians, to sow their garden seeds late in the fall ; which, 
from experience, has been found preferable to the usual method, 
elsewhere, of sowing them in the spring. This manner of gar- 
dening; is justified from the shortness of the season for vegeta- 
tion ; the sandy, (though good) soil, and the entire absence of 
rain in the winter; from which latter circumstance the seeds do 
not perish. 



APPENDIX. 



11 



This country, say to the whole of Fox river, was owned and 
occupied by the Sauks and Foxes, more than a century since. 
Many traces of fields cultivated by them, are still visible. Several 
tribes combined, killed some, and drove the remainder of those 
Sauks and Foxes, to their present residence on the Mississippi. 

Some remains of buildings, occupied by some, Jesuits, are to be 
seen six miles from the fort, on the east side of the river. Their 
settling here, had in view the converting the Indians to the Chris- 
tian religion." • 

Communication from Gentlemen, Indian Traders, residing at Green 

Bay. 

From these gentlemen,* some of them natives of Green-Bay, 
and who have had better advantages for knowing this country, and 
its Indian population, than any other persons, I received verbally 
the following account of these Indians, and of their country, differ- 
ing in some points from the foregoing given by Major Irwin. 

" The Menominees, or Folles Avoines, both signifying, in English, 
wild rice, have six hundred warriors, nine hundred women, two 
thousand and four hundred children, total three thousand and nine 
hundred. Theyliveinten villages, north-west of Green Bay, on Me- 
nomine river, which is their north-east boundary, but chiefly on Fox 
river, on and near Winebago Lake. A few are scattered at Prairie 
du Chien, Uppcfcr and Lower Mississippi,! and at Milwakie, on the 
west shore of Lake Michigan. 

" The Menominees claim the whole of the waters of Green- 
Bay, with its islands. On its north-west shores, and on Fox river, 
they claim from the entrance of Menomine river, in length, one hun- 
dred and twenty miles, south-west and north-east ; and in breadth 
sixty miles. On the south-east shore of the Bay, and on Fox riv- 

* Messrs. John Law, James Portier, Peter Grignor, Augustus Grignor 5 
Lewis Grignor, and Laurent Feley. These Gentlemen were together, and 
with joint consent gave me this as a correct account. 

t Upper Mississippi is above Pairie du Chien, and Lower Missiwippi, be- 
low it. 



52 



APPENDIX. 



er, from the river Rouge, or Red river, to the Grand Cockalaw, 
a distance of forty-five miles, and twenty-four in breadth." 

The Menominees have, in addition to the above territory, a 
common interest in the territories adjoining on the west, with the 
Winebagoes, Sacs, Chippawas, and Sioux. 

The soil of the tract of country belonging to the Menominees, is 
generally good, capable of productive cultivation of corn and oth- 
er species of grain, level, not stoney. Its natural growth, white 
oak, of middling size, good working timber, sugar maple, abundant, 
bass wood, poplar, white and red pine, cedar in great plenty along 
the lake, hickory, abundant ; beech, elm, hazle-nuts in great plen- 
ty, birch, wild cherry, cherries, plums, crab-apples, abundant; 
straw-berries, whortle-berries, grapes, wild hops, goose-berries, 
currants, &c. but particularly the wild rice. This grows in im- 
mense quantities, in marshy grounds, and shallow ponds, and lakes; 
and along the margins of the rivers. This furnishes a very pal- 
ateable and nutritious food (preferred by some, to the Southern 
rice) for the Indians, and also, for the ducks, pigeons, and other 
wild fowl, innumerable, that frequent this country at particular sea- 
sons of the year. The wild rice here is gathered in September, 
in small bark canoes, at a particular time, when the weather is 
calm, (the wind destroys it) with great industry and alertness. This 
remarkable production grows in abundance, in the proper pla- 
ces for its growth, some tracts excepted, over the whole coun- 
try, from Lake Michigan, on the east, to the Mississippi west ; and 
from Fox and Ouisconsin rivers, south, to the Lake of the Woods, 
north. This extensive territory has numerous small rivers, lakes 
and ponds, and generally, has not a soil as favorable for cultivation, 
as that where it is not found.* 

The Chiefs of this nation, (Menominees) are principally young 
men, and have less influence than their predecessors, on account 
of their age, and because the white people have not given them 
that attention and support, which they were wont formerly to re- 
ceive from them. 

* Of the language of this nation, we shall give an account under the head 
of Indian Languages. 



APPENDIX. 



Interview with the Chiefs and principal men of the Menomine In- 

dians. 

At this interview, I communicated, at considerable length, the 
views of the Government, and the design of my mission, and left 
them to consider my message to them. Two days after, I met 
them again, and received from the speakers, hereafter named, 
answers which follow. 

The names of three of the Chiefs present are, Man-cau-tau- 
bee, aged 22, son of the celebrated Thomaw * a modest, sensi- 
ble young man, of good countenance; Sha-kaut-che-o-ke-mazv, a- 
bout the same age; these are the two first Chiefs of the nation. 
The name of the other is I-wye-ma-taw. Their speaker, not a 
Chief, was Aus-kin-naw-wau-wish, a pleasant, affectionate old 
man. He said: 

" Father, I am happy to see you here to-day, and give you my 
hand, as if given to our Great Father the President himself. The 
sky is clear." 

Pointing to the three Chiefs above named, he said, " These are 
our three principal Chiefs, acknowledged to be such by the na- 
tion. They bear the names, and have running in their veins, the 
blood, of our former Chiefs.! 

* Thomaw died, and was buried, at Mackinaw, and over his grave Mr. 
Law erected a monument, on which is the following inscription : " Here 
rests the body of Thomas Canon, Grand Chief of the Folles avoine (Menom- 
ine) nation, who departed this life July 8th, 1818, aged 56 years, regretted 
by all who knew him." 

t This particular mention of the Chiefs, and of their troubles, and sorrows, 
was occasioned by a Treaty recently held by the Indian Agent with a small 
part of the Menomine nation, for the purchase of a large tract of the most 
valuable part of their Territory. The real Chiefs of the nation above named* 
were so decidedly opposed to the sale of this land, (a tract of forty miles 
square, intersected by Fox river from its mouth upward) that they refused to 
attend the Treaty at the invitation of the Agent, who, inconsequence, was 
constrained, of his own authority, to create Chiefs to sign his Treaty. "In this 
way their lands were sold in opposition to the will of the nation, though from 
the face of the Treaty, it would appear, as if done with their consent. This 
was the subject of their complaint. The President, on being made acquainted 
with these facts, as before stated, laid the Treaty aside, and it has not been 
ratified. See a more particular account of this affair in another part of this 
Appendix. 



54 



APPENDIX. 



Father, we are glad to see you. We welcome you here. We 
are poor. The Great Spirit put us here in this world, as well as 
his other children; and we were first found by the French. 

Father, You see your children here before you, full of grief 
and sorrow. We know not how to answer you. The moment we 
turned our backs, this spring, a change took place; and our fami- 
lies and children are all in trouble, in consequence of the conduct 
of some persons who are not true Menominees. 

Father, It is a clear day. We are happy in the opportunity to 
tell you our complaints, and to explain to you our situation. We 
disapprove of what has been done by the Agent, and of the con- 
duct of those of our nation, who treated with him, and sold our 
lands without our consent." 

After making some heavy complaints against the Agent, on ac- 
count of his rough treatment of them, and refusal to supply their 
wants, when in distress, their speaker added: 

" Father, notwithstanding our different color, the Great Spirit 
has made us all. We hope that our talk to day will go to our Great 
Father. 

Father, the Great Spirit made every thing. Formerly the 
white people lived on the other side of the Great Water, and the 
red people were thrown on this Great Island, and the game and 
the fish were given them for their support. 

Father, We are going to tell you what we think of the message 
you bring us from our Great Father the President— or (as they des- 
cribed him,) he who governs the eighteen branches" — meaning the 
eighteen states. 

Father, It is a great happiness that we see you here. You have 
foolish men among you, who have education, and laws to regulate 
and govern you. We also have foolish men among us. How can 
we, who have no education, or laws, govern them ?" 

The questions were here put to them, whether they would be 
willing to collect together in one place, large enough to accommo- 
date each family with a farm ; to cultivate the earth ; have 
schools for their children, and live as the white people live? All 
this, they were told, might be done in consistency with their hunt- 
ing and fishing, to a limited extent, and that their Great Father 
would aid and patronize them, in effecting these changes, so fa- 



APPENDIX. 55 

vorable to their happiness, if they would give their consent, and 
make the proper efforts to bring them about. They were inform- 
ed, that Mr. Williams, with a number of the Chiefs of the Six Na- 
tions, were on their way to Green Bay, to look out for a place of 
settlement for themselves, and such others of their tribes, as might 
be disposed to migrate and settle with them. Should they be pleas- 
ed with the country, they were asked, will you sell, or give thenij 
lands on which they may settle? 

Mau-cau-tau-bee, with apparent diffidence and modesty, then 
rose and said: 

" Father, We don't know what to say, or what to do, in re- 
gard to the question you propose. We know that what you say is 
all good, and all true, and we take it as a great favor that you have 
come to see us. But we are but few here. The great part of our 
nation is elsewhere. If we were all together, we would give you 
a final answer. 

Father, you see the few that are here of our nation. We can- 
not, therefore, give you a full and proper answer to your ques- 
tion. We can only speak for ourselves. But the Chiefs who are 
here, with myself, will endeavor to put in motion what our Great 
Father proposes. We hope to hear from our Great Father again 
on this subject. Our nation at present is scattered. 

Father, In regard to the Delegates from the Six Nations, we 
Menominees have no enemies. W e are ready to give them our 
hand. But in regard to a piece of land to give them, we know 
not what to say, our Territory is so small. 

Father, I listen always to what the white people say, but 1 d© 
not want to do as some of our foolish people have done. I do not 
want to take on myself, or to have those with me of the disposi- 
tion, to steal a piece of land;* but if all our nation were together, 
we would know what to do. 

Father, my conduct in life has not been irregular. We have 
listened to the whites. In general what they have told us is the 
truth, or nearly the truth; but in this place it is not the same 

* Alluding to the sale of a large tract of their land, by a minority of the 
nation, in opposition to the will of tfee majority* 



5.6 



APPENDIX. 



thing. We hate been led into errors and confusion by the Agent, 
and by his means have been scattered and divided. 
I have done." 

Aus-kin-naw-wa-wish, concluded, saying, 

Father, I look upon you the same as upon our Great Father the 
President. The sky is clear. It is a happy day. The Traders 
here have been our friends, have raised our children; and we 
wish, whatever may happen in regard to our lands, that they may 
not be molested, but remain quietly with us. 

Father, The Chiefs, your children, whom you see before you, 
are happy to see you, and hear you talk. They live in hope and 
belief, that they shall receive the blessings which our Great Fath- 
er proposes to give us, if we comply with their wishes, which is 
©ur intention." 

With another Menomine chief and three warriors, I afterward 
had a short conversation. The name of the chief was Sa-que-iock, 
in English, very good natured. His face and manners correspond 
very well with his name. His village, of only thirty-six souls, is 
on Green Bay, three miles below Fort Howard. Their food is 
fish, wild fowl, wild rice and corn. 

I asked him concerning the origin of the immense swarms of 
ilies, which, at the time we were talking, filled the atmosphere, 
and covered the trees and houses?* He answered, " They doubt- 

The Green Bay Fly. 

* Of the Fly here alluded to, Lewis Morgan, Esq. U. S. agent of Fortifica- 
tions, and resident four years at Green Bay, gave us verbally the following 
account : 

The French call this fly, Les Marines, or Le Epervier de Maranquoin. Its 
body is one and a quarter inches long, and three eighths of an inch in circum- 
ference ; its wings long and narrow ; its legs long and barbed. It has four 
feelers, two on the head, at an angle with each other of 20°, and two at the 
tail, one and a half inches long. A swarin of them makes its appearance about 
the 10th of July, and disappears in ten days ; is followed by a second, that by 
a third, which disappears about the 26th of August. They light on the shady 
sides of buildings, which are made black with them. The limbs of trees and 
their small branches, on which they hang in clusters, like a swarm of bees, are 
bent down and often broken with their weight. At particular times the at- 
mosphere is so filled with them, that at mid-day one cannot see across the pa- 
rade of Fort Howard. A very thick snow storm does not more effectually ob- 



APPENDIX, 



less come from the swamps and bad water along the shores of the 
Lake." 

I stated to them the design of the Government concerning 
the Indians, viz. to teach them agriculture and the arts, to dress 
and live like the white people, &c. 

" It will look droll," said he, " to see Indians in such a situation. 
We are willing," he added, " to receive these blessings, if others 
will.' 1 '' On this condition they were willing to quit their village 
and to live with others of their tribe as farmers, at a place (which 
they name,) thirty miles north-east of the Fort. This chief was 
not present at the late treaty held by the Indian Agent for the pur- 
chase of a part of the lands of the Menominees, and seemed very 
indifferent about the sale, though his own village was included in 
the purchase. 

Major Irwin informed me, on the authority of Col. Bowyer, and 
an old Ottawa chief, living at Ma-nitou-wauk, the river of bad spir- 
its, that more than a century ago, the Fox and Sac Indians, who 
then inhabited the country on Green Bay and Fox river, were 
conquered and driven away by the Menominees, aided by the Ot- 
tawas and Chippawas; that the Menominees hold this country by 
conquest, and that their title is admitted to be good by the Sacs, 
Foxes, Chippawas, and Ottawas. Charlevoix found the Meno- 
minees here, on his visit to this place in 1719. 

Judge Reaume, an Indian Trader, who has resided at Green 
Bay thirty years, said to me — " The Menominees, in great part, 
are of mixed blood, Ottawas, Chippawas, Pottawattamies, Sacs, and 
Foxes, with whom they intermarry . There is an intimate inter- 
course between all these tribes, who have a common language, 
(the Chippawa,) which they all understand, and many of them 

struct vision. Under an elm tree, whose wide spread boughs formed a shade 
of twelve or fifteen yards in diameter, the depth of several heaps of these 
flies, which had fallen dead from the trees near the edge of the shade, measur- 
ed by a rule, were found to be four inches deep, and increasing in depth toward 
the trunk of the tree, were, there found, on measurement, to be nine inches 
deep. Swine feed on them, as they fall from the trees and buildings. Their 
appearance is sudden, after a warm night. They cast their skin about once 
in twenty-four hours. While they remain, the musquitoes entirely disappear. 
These flies, when dead, in feet the air tor a short time ; but a hot sun soon 
dries up what are not eaten by the animals. 

8 



68 



APPENDIX. 



hunt together in the interior of the N. W. Territory, on the head 
waters of the Fox and Ouisconsin rivers." 

Fort Howard, now Fort Brown, is on the north side of Fox 
river, a mile from its mouth. Its situation is so low and sandy, that 
it has been deemed expedient to select another spot for the Fort. 
This has been done. An elevated, commanding site, a quarter of a 
mile ascending from the south side of the river, three miles above 
the present Fort, has been fixed upon, where a new Fort and ap- 
pendages are now (1820,) building, and when finished, and occupied 
by the troops, the Old Fort will be converted to another use. It 
may be converted into a residence of an Education Family, and used 
for the accommodation of such Indian youth, as may be induced to 
attend the schools, which such a family may here establish. For 
a purpose of this kind it is well adapted. 

In this place, on both sides of the mouth of Fox river, are about 
eighty families; some say less, principally French — all the married 
men, but one, connected with Indian women. There are here 
about two hundred and sixty children of mixed blood, beside the 
children of the officers and men belonging to the Fort, and of other 
inhabitants of the place. These children, falling little short of 
three hundred in number, are growing up without any public school 
education, and by far the greatest part of them, without any edu- 
cation at all. 

A small colony of French Jesuits settled in this place about the 
year 1700, from whom descended the greater part of its present 
inhabitants. 

The Menominees have ever shewn themselves to be friends to 
the white people, and have acted in their defence, whenever at- 
tacked by any tribe of their Red brethren. Some striking proofs 
were given of their friendship, particularly by a principal man of 
the nation, called the Rubber , during the last war with the British 
in this quarter. 

Winebagoes. 

The following account of the Winebagoes, and description of 
their country were verbally given by Mr. Law, and the other gen- 
tlemen, Indian Traders, who gave me the account of the Meno- 
minees, 



APPENDIX. 



59 



" Eight years ago, (1812,) the Winebagoes were numbered, 
and amounted to seven hundred warriors, one thousand women, 
and about two thousand eight hundred children — whole number, 
three thousandfive hundred souls. Their present number, f 1820,) 
is estimated at nine hundred warriors, one thousand three hundred 
women, three thousand six hundred children. Total, five thousand 
eight hundred souls; an increase in eight years of two thousand 
three hundred souls, a remarkable fact in the history of Indian 
population. 

The Territory of the Winebagoes embraces what is called the 
Rock river country, and commences at the south-east end of the 
Rapids, in Fox river, at the entrance of Winebago Lake. Here 
they have a large village, and two other villages at the S. end, 
where they raise considerable quantities of corn. On other parts of 
the Lake, they have two other villages, five in all. On Rock 
river and its branches they have fourteen villages, one of which, 
the largest, the lowest down Rock river, three hundred miles by 
water from its mouth, is called Kus-kou-o-nog. This village is the 
resort of Renegadoes from the other villages, and from other tribes, 
and the inhabitants have a corresponding character. Their vil- 
lage is on the west side of a Lake of the name of their village, six 
miles long by three wide, abounding with fine flavoured firm fish, 
suckers, pickons, and catfish. On this Lake are three other Win- 
ebago villages. On Green Lake, about the size of the one above 
named, with few fish, pure water; rocky and high banks, is another 
village, twenty five miles west of Winebago Lake, four or five 
miles south of Fox river, fifty south-east of the Portage. 

The Rock river country, extending south one hundred miles, to 
Illinois river; on the north-west side about sixty miles; thence 
north to Ouisconsin river, is Prairie land, without trees, except 
here and there an island, if it may be so called. This country has 
abundance of springs, small lakes, ponds and rivers; a rich soil, 
producing corn and all sorts of grain." 

[The remainder of the account of this interesting tribe of In- 
dians, of their country, character, and dispositions as to civiliza- 
tion, &c. was to have been committed to writing by the gentlemen, 
and forwarded to the Secretary of War, or to me, but has not yet 
been received. It is still expected.] 



60 



APPENDIX. 



Historical facts relating to Northern Tribes. 

The following facts, of a general and historical nature, relating 
to the Indian tribes, who anciently possessed the northern part of 
our country, from the Hudson to the Mississippi river, are derived 
chiefly from Bowen and Gibson's map of N. America, published in 
1763, and may be properly introduced in this place. 

The Iroquois, after expelling the Hurons, and exterminating the 
Eries, who inhabited the country bordering on the great Lakes, 
which now bear their names, events which happened about the 
years 1650 to 1660, took possession of this vast Territory, and re- 
tained it for more than a century after. Their hunting country, 
which they once occupied, is now embraced in the State of Ohio, 
and while in their possession, was called Canahague. 

The hereditary country of the Iroquois was between Lake 
Champlain and the Iroquois, now called St. Lawrence, river. 

In 1701, the Six Nations, by deed of sale, surrendered to Great 
Britain the vast Territory lying south and east of a line, beginning 
at the Mississippi, up the Illinois river, through the south and 
east parts of Illinois to Lake Michigan; across this Lake; thence 
across the west end of Lake Huron, and embracing the country of 
the Messasaugua Indians,* on the north side of Lake Huron, Up- 
per Canada. This tribe, (the Messasauguas,) had been subdued 
by the Iroquois, and afterwards united with them. 

As early as 1740, the English had a Fort and settlement on the 
head waters of the Great Miami, at the forks, one hundred and fif- 
ty miles from Ohio river; and another settlement, called White 
'woman's town, on Elk's Eye, now Muskingum river. 

Green Bay was formerly called Puans Bay, and the northern 
part Noquett's Bay, " north-east of which, toward Mackinaw, is 
St. Helena Island.! At the bottom or south end of Green Bay, 

* A remnant of these Indians, a poor, filthy, wandering, wretched set of be- 
ings, are in the neighborhood of York, in Upper Canada. I saw numbers of 
them, when I visited this place in the summer of 1821. 

t On this desert island, (formerly visited by Charlevoix,) July 5th, 1820, 
passing from Mackinaw to L'Abre Croche, four of us, my son, the Indian 
Agent and Interpreter, and myself, in two birch canoes, paddled by sixtee» 



APPENDIX. 61 

dwelt the Sakis (Sac or Sauk,) Indians, and here was established a 1 
Catholic Mission by Francis Xavier." 

The Foxes, according to Charlevoix, were the original possess- 
ors of the country on the river which bears their name, and were 
driven from it, through surprize, by the French and Menominees,. 
united. The Foxes, whose principal settlement was sixty miles 
up the river, had committed some depredations on the French 
Traders, exacting tribute of them, and doing other provoking | 
things. Whereupon, the French commander, with a party of his 
own men, in covered boats, and a party of the Menominees, to act 
in the rear, approached the settlement of the Foxes, who, sus- 
pecting no danger, collected on the shore of the river, when, at a 
signal given, a fatal fire on them commenced from the covered 
boats; the party of Menominees, at the same time, attacking them 
in the rear, a dreadful slaughter ensued. The consequences 
were, the removal of the Foxes, who survived the slaughter, to 

Indians, spent a night and part of a day. The island is about eighteen miles 
west of Mackinaw, is small, covered with trees and shrubs, and has nothing 
remarkable about it. It was on this island, that the Indian, who acted as our 
cook, named John, a Chief, perceiving that I was without appetite, and very 
feeble, of his own accord, and without any intimation from anyone, took his 
gun, went into the woods, and shot a pigeon ; dressed it very neatly ; cut a 
slice of pork ; prepared from the woods two small sticks, about a yard long, by 
sharpening the larger ends, and splitting the others into four quarters. Into 
the split end of one he neatly wove the dressed pigeon, and the pork into the 
other ; stuck the sharpened end into the ground so near the fire, as that, 
when bent down, the meats could feel the heat sufficiently to cook them ; bas- 
ted the pigeon with butter, and when done, brought them to me, with much 
apparent satisfaction, as savoury meat. The kindness with which he did all 
this, and the satisfaction expressed in his countenance, when he found I relish- 
ed his delicate morsel, were as gratifying to my feelings, as the food was to my 
appetite. The whole behavior of these Indians, while they were with us, three 
or four days, both toward us in fulfilling all their duties, and among them- 
selves, was perfectly unexceptionable. No men could have conducted with 
more propriety. They were well skilled in their business, temperate, faith- 
ful, respectful to us, and kind and pleasant among themselves. Some of these 
Indians, in their figure, and the form of their limbs, were as perfect as I ever 
saw among human beings, and would make fine models for the sculptor. We 
parted from these natives of the forest with reciprocal affection, and very fa- 
vorable impressions of the character of the Indians, and of their capacities for 
improvement in all that pertains to civilized life. 



64 



APPENDIX. 



5. Tolls of the Canal, as fast as completed and used. 

6. 100,000 acres of land, given by the Holland Compa- 
ny, estimated at 75 cents an acre, ... 75,000 

7. 1000 acres given by Hon. Gideon Granger. 

The commissioners of the Canal, appointed by the Legislature, 
were, His Excellency Gov. Clinton, Hon Stephen Van Rensse- 
laer, Myron Holley, Esq., Hon. Samuel Young, and Henry 
Seymour, Esq. 

First Engineer, Capt. Benjamin Wright ; second, James Geddes, 
Esq. ; third, David Thomas, Esq. Others, Canvass White, Esq. ; 
Nathan S. Roberts, Esq. ; David S. Bates, Esq. 

In passing up the Canal on its north bank, near Montezuma, we 
were pointed to a button wood tree, (Platanas occidentalis) forty- 
eight feet in circumference at bottom, by actual measurement, 
sixteen feet in diameter, hollow, large enough to contain forty 
men standing. A sermon was once preached to thirty-five men, 
collected at one time within this tree. 

K. Rep. p. 19. 

The Journal here referred to, with that to Green Bay in the 
summer of 1820, will be found under the head, Miscellaneous Ar- 
ticles, at the close of the work. 

L. Rep. p. 23. — Maine. 

J. St. John's Indians. These are the remnants of a tribe of 
Esquimaux Indians of mixed blood. They live mingled with 
about two hundred French families, in a village of about thirty 
wigwams, or lodges, at Meductic Point, on the junction of Matta- 
wascah river, with the St. Johns, N. Lat. 47° 15': about twenty- 
five miles west of the dividing line between Maine and New-Bruns- 
wick. Of these Indians we know very little. They have been 
under the care of the Catholics, and have seldom been visited by 
our missionaries. 



APPENDIX. 



65 



2. Passamaquoddies. These Indians, in number three hun- 
dred and seventy-nine souls, including some scattered families, 
(250 to 270 dwell together) have about fifty wigwams — have one 
hundred acres of excellent land, bordering on the Schodic river, 
open to the markets of Eastport, Lubec, and St. Andrews, from 
four to seven miles from these places, in a corner of the township 
of Perry. The anchorage in the harbor of this village is good. 
Here is abundance of rock weed for manure. The one hundred 
acres are capable of being made a garden by cultivation, and of 
forming a nourishing settlement for ship building, and other me- 
chanic arts. 

The Governor of these Indians is an old man of seventy-five 
years, of good understanding and disposition ; can speak a little 
English, wishes to know more of it ; is pious, and well disposed to 
receive instruction. Catholic Priests have had the care of these 
Indians. Sock Bosen, a man of about forty years old, is a Deacon 
in the Catholic communion, speaks pretty good English, writes a 
decent hand, is able to keep accounts, is intelligent, rigid, swayed 
by the religion in which he has been educated, but more by inter- 
est and ambition. His influence is against schools and improve- 
ments, and will be to be conciliated or overcome, before any thing 
for the good of these Indians can be done. " They are sadly giv- 
en to intemperance. None of the young speak English, and the 
aim of the influential men is to prevent their learning it. A school, 
notwithstanding, is about to be established in the whit* settlement 
near the Indian village, and a hope is entertained, that some of the 
Indian children may be induced to attend it.* 

3. Penobscots. For their present number and place of resi- 
dence, see Table. 

In 1811, the number of their families, by enumeration, was fif- 
ty-seven ; and of souls two hundred and forty-one. Their in- 
crease has been ascribed to an obligation imposed by the chiefs, on 
the young people, to marry early. 

* The information in this article, is the substance of a recent letter from 
Rev. E. Kellogg, to Rev. Dr. Holmes, Secretary of the society for propaga- 
ting the Gospel among the Indians and others in North America. Mr. K. in 
the employment of this Society as a missionary, visited these Indians, and gives 
the above information from personal knowledge. 

9 



62 



APPENDIX. 



the Mississippi, where they have since resided, and the possession 
©f the conquered country by the Menominees. 

From the few facts here stated, we can perceive the great and 
almost total change which has taken place in the population of this 
extensive portion of our country. Of the tribes, who could once 
number their thousands of warriors, we may ask, " Where are 
they? Many of them, by their perpetual wars among themselves, 
or with their white neighbors, or by both together, have become, 
long since, wholly extinct, and the rest reduced comparatively to 
a handful, in their numbers, are but the pitiable skeletons of their 
former selves. New races both of white and red people, with a 
few scattered exceptions, now inhabit this extensive country. 

Appendix I. Report p. 16. — Erie Canal. 

Under this head I give only a few facts from my journal. Oth- 
er sources of ample and authentic information on this great sub- 
ject, are open to the public. 

This noblest of all the internal improvements in our favored 
country, was begun July 4th, 1817, about two miles west of Rome. 
Judge Platt has the honor of striking the first stroke in opening 
this Canal. Among the projectors, or perhaps more correctly, sug- 
gestors of it, probably the first, was Elkanah Watson, Esq. who 
in this, and in various other projects and enterprizes for public 
improvements, has been a benefactor to his country. Its promi- 
nent and efficient Patron, is his Excellency Governor Clinton, to 
whose wisdom, energy, perse verence, and commanding influence, 
this country will, to the latest generation, be indebted for the ac- 
complishment of this splendid and immeasurably useful work. 

In September, 1819, this Canal was finished, and navigated from 
Utica to Rome, fifteen miles, and shortly after, twenty-five miles 
further west of Rome. In May, 1820, the time I was on it, it 
was finished ninety-six miles, from Utica to Montezuma, with a 
branch of a mile and a half, to the salt works at Salina. In this dis- 
tance are nine locks, each ninety feet long, and ten feet wide, and 
one unbroken level of sixty-seven miles, a fact, probably unparal- 
leled in any other Canal in the world. The average total expense 



APPENDIX. 



63 



for each mile, the above distance, including the nine locks, was 
$ 11,850. This was the estimate for the whole remaining west- 
ern section of the Canal. The eastern section was estimated at 
$ 13,000 a mile. The whole length of the Canal from Lake Erie 
to the Hudson, when completed, will be three hundred and fifty 
miles. We know of no other Canal of equal length. 

The width of the Canal, forty feet on the surface of the water, 
twenty-eight feet at the bottom, and four feet deep. It has many 
and plentiful feeders, supplied by waters drained from a tract of 
country of more than two millions of acres, abounding with lakes 
and rivers, and springs of water. 

The passage from Utica to Montezuma, ninety-six miles, is 
made in thirty-six hours ; the whole expense, provision as in 
steam-boats, $4. Our passage was more leisurely in the boat 
named Montezuma, commanded by Capt. Buss. This boat is sev- 
enty-six feet long, by thirteen feet wide ; will carry sixty or seven- 
ty tons, is well fitted for the accommodation of passengers, by 
night as well as by day. 

We passed a raft of four hundred and forty-six tons of timber, 
coming down the Canal, drawn by three horses, at the rate of 
eighteen miles in a day and" a half. The expense was estimated 
at $50 ; while the transportation of the same quantity by land, 
would be $1200. 

The calculation of the commissioners, with whom I traversed 
the Canal in May 1820, was, that it would be completed at far- 
thest by the year 1826, probably before, at a total expense of 
five millions of dollars; the whole to be paid by the State. 

The funds appropriated by the Legislature of the State, to de- 
fray the expenses of this work, are, 

1. A duty of 12i cents on every bushel of salt manufac- 
tured at Salina, and other places in the State — the 
amount of this duty in 1819, was - - - $ 62,000 

2. Auction duties, amounting annually to about - 100,000 

3. Duties on Steam-boats, do. - 5,00Q 

4. Proceeds of existing Lotteries, after the purposes for 
which they were originally granted, shall have been 
answered, the Lotteries to be continued, and their 
proceeds applied to the Canal. 



64 



APPENDIX. 



5. Tolls of the Canal, as fast as completed and used. 

6. 100,000 acres of land, given by the Holland Compa- 
ny, estimated at 75 cents an acre, - 75,000 

7. 1000 acres given by Hon. Gideon Granger. 

The commissioners of the Canal, appointed by the Legislature, 
were, His Excellency Gov. Clinton, Hon Stephen Van Rensse- 
laer, Myron Holley, Esq., Hon. Samuel Young, and Henry 
Seymour, Esq. 

First Engineer, Capt. Benjamin Wright ; second, James Geddes, 
Esq. ; third, David Thomas, Esq. Others, Canvass White, Esq. ; 
Nathan S. Roberts, Esq. ; David S. Bates, Esq. 

In passing up the Canal on its north bank, near Montezuma, we 
were pointed to a button wood tree, (Platanas occidentalis) forty- 
eight feet in circumference at bottom, by actual measurement, 
sixteen feet in diameter, hollow, large enough to contain forty 
men standing. A sermon was once preached to thirty-five men, 
collected at one time within this tree. 

K. Rep. p. 19. 

The Journal here referred to, with that to Green Bay in the 
summer of 1820, will be found under the head, Miscellaneous Ar- 
ticles, at the close of the work. 

L. Rep. p. 23. — Maine. 

1. St. John's Indians. These are the remnants of a tribe of 
Esquimaux Indians of mixed blood. They live mingled with 
about two hundred French families, in a village of about thirty 
wigwams, or lodges, at Meductic Point, on the junction of Matta- 
wascah river, with the St. Johns, N. Lat. 47° 15': about twenty- 
five miles west of the dividing line between Maine and New-Bruns- 
wick. Of these Indians we know very little. They have been 
under the care of the Catholics, and have seldom been visited by 
our missionaries. 



APPENDIX. 



65 



2. Passamaquoddies. These Indians, in number three hun- 
dred and seventy-nine souls, including some scattered families, 
(250 to 270 dwell together) have about fifty wigwams — have one 
hundred acres of excellent land, bordering on the Schodic river, 
open to the markets of Eastport, Lubec, and St. Andrews, from 
four to seven miles from these places, in a corner of the township 
of Perry. The anchorage in the harbor of this village is good. 
Here is abundance of rock weed for manure. The one hundred 
acres are capable of being made a garden by cultivation, and of 
forming a flourishing settlement for ship building, and other me- 
chanic arts. 

The Governor of these Indians is an old man of seventy-five 
years, of good understanding and disposition ; can speak a little 
English, wishes to know more of it ; is pious, and well disposed to 
receive instruction. Catholic Priests have had the care of these 
Indians. Sock Bosen, a man of about forty years old, is a Deacon 
in the Catholic communion, speaks pretty good English, writes a 
decent hand, is able to keep accounts, is intelligent, rigid, swayed 
by the religion in which he has been educated, but more by inter- 
est and ambition. His influence is against schools and improve- 
ments, and will be to be conciliated or overcome, before any thing 
for the good of these Indians can be done. " They are sadly giv- 
en to intemperance. None of the young speak English, and the 
aim of the influential men is to prevent their learning it. A school, 
notwithstanding, is about to be established in the whit* settlement 
near the Indian village, and a hope is entertained, that some of the 
Indian children may be induced to attend it.* 

3. Penobscots. For their present number and place of resi- 
dence, see Table. 

In 1811, the number of their families, by enumeration, was fif- 
ty-seven ; and of souls two hundred and forty-one. Their in- 
crease has been ascribed to an obligation imposed by the chiefs, on 
the young people, to marry early. 

* The information in this article, is the substance of a recent letter from 
R-ev. E. Kellogg, to Rev. Dr. Holmes, Secretary of the society for propaga- 
ting the Gospel among the Indians and others in North America. Mr. K. in 
the employment of this Society as a missionary, visited these Indians, and gives 
the above information from personal knowledge. 

9 



66 



APPENDIX. 



The three tribes above named live in great harmony and friend- 
ship with each other. When either tribe elects, and instals a 
chief, the chiefs of the other two tribes are always present to as- 
sist in the ceremonies. 

In religion, these tribes are professedly christians of the Catho- 
lic faith ; have each a church, with a bell, and Priests to instruct 
them, steadily or occasionally. The Priests, who minister to the 
two latter tribes, receive a stated stipend from the treasury of the 
State. The State has lately engaged to provide and support a far- 
mer among the Penobscots, to instruct them in agriculture. We 
know not that any of these tribes have ever admitted schools to be 
established among them. 

The Penobscots, in government and internal regulations, are 
independent The legislative and executive authorities are vest- 
ed in the sachems ; though the heads of all the families are invited 
to be present at their public meetings, which are held in their 
house of worship, and conducted with order and decorum. 

The Provincial Congress, at the commencement of the Revolu- 
tionary War, forbid that any white person should settle on land, 
commencing at the head of the tide in Penobscot river, and exten- 
- ding six miles on each side of the river, embracing a tract held in 
common by the whole tribe, twelve miles wide, by twelve long, 
intersected in the middle by the river. The tribe has the right 
to hunt and fish along the banks of the river, to the mouth of Pe- 
nobscot Bay. 

None of these tribes have made other than incipient improve- 
ments in any thing which pertains to civilized life. It is not prob- 
able, such is the religious influence under which they act, com- 
bined with their natural attachment to their native places, and to 
the sepulchres of their fathers, that a proposal to remove, and 
join a larger community of Indians, should it be made to them, 
would be accepted. It is probable they will remove in a sort of 
half independent, half civilized and evangelized state, gradually 
diminishing, as other tribes, once their powerful neighbours, have 
done before them, till there shall be none remaining. 

An interesting account of the tribes which formerly inhabited 
the Territory now constituting the State of Maine, follows, re- 
ceived from the Hon. Wm. D. Williamson, Esq. to whom I am in- 
debted for part of the foregoing information. 



APPENDIX. 



67 



<£ After considerable pains and inquiry, the best information I 
can obtain as to the Aborigines in this State, (Maine) is concisely 
this :— 

Probable original 
numbers about 
the year 1616. 

1 000 $ ^ e ^ewichwannucks, on the Piscataqua. 
' * £ 2. The Ossipee tribes, on the river of the same 
name, emptying into, and forming, the Saco. 

400. 3. The Pigwackets, whose principal town, a 
resting place, was the present Fry burgh, 
above the Ossipee. 

500. 4. The Amariscoggins, at the head of Casco Bay : 
These Indians, as far east as the Kennebec, 
were generally called by the generic name 
of " Abenaquies" 

600. 5. The Norridgewock tribe, whose ancient town, 
or head-quarters, was the present town of Nor- 
ridgewock, thirty miles above Hallowell, on 
the Kennebec. Of all the tribes above-men- 
tioned, a few only, say twenty souls of the 
latter, remain. 

600. 6. The Pemaquids. This was a powerful tribe, 
probably at the head of the Tarrateens, till 
the great and mortal sickness among the na- 
tives along the whole coast, from the Penob- 
scot to Narraganset, A. D. 1617. The seat 
of the Pemaquids was at Bristol, in the county 
of Lincoln, fifteen miles east of Bath. 
1,300. 7. The Penobscots, ) whose situation is de- 

600. 8. The Passamaquoddies, J scribed in the Table. 

5,000. 

The probable numbers of natives in the territory, constituting 
the present state of Maine, two centuries ago, was 5 or 6000 souls. 
The white population, in 1760, was estimated at 13,000 souls. It 
probably was not half that number in 1712, at the treaty of 
Utrecht. The Indians were more than a match for the settlers at 



68 



APPENDIX. 



that time, even after the numbers of the natives, during the pre- 
ceding century, had been greatly reduced,"* 

In the gradual diminution, and final extinction, of these tribes, 
who were the terror of the early settlers, we have a melancholy 
specimen of what has happened in like manner to all the Indian 
tribes, who once inhabited the territory of New-England, except 
the few feeble remnants we have enumerated ; and of hundreds 
of other powerful tribes, once spread over the settled parts of our 
country. And such will be the inevitable destiny of all Indians 
now mingled among our white population, if a radical change ia 
our treatment of them, be not adopted. 

Massachusetts. 

All the Indians remaining in this State, reside on their respec- 
tive Reservations at Marshpee, Herring Pond, Martha's Vineyard 
and Troy, in the south east part of the State, from fifty to one hun- 
dred miles from Boston. The State, by a Board of Overseers, 
exercises a guardian care over them, as to their lands, and civil 
rights and privileges ; and the corporation of Harvard College, 
and " The Society for propagating the gospel among the Indians 
and others in North America," provide for their religious and 
moral instruction ; each having charity funds in its Treasury, ap- 
propriated to the benefit of Indians, the former $12,000, the lat- 
ter, $9,000. A stated missionary is supported at Marshpee, and 
another at the Vineyard, who, as they have opportunity, visit the 
other remnants at Herring Pond, and Troy. 

No official census of these Indians has recently been taken. 
They are estimated in our table, at 750, viz ; at Marshpee 320 ; 
Herring Pond, 40 ; Troy, 48 ; the remainder at Martha's Vine- 
yard. 

* Mr. Williamson is preparing a history of this State ; and from our knowl- 
edge of the means he is employing to collect his materialsj we anticipate from 
his pen, a correct and valuable work. 



APPENDIX. 



Their lands are held in common, and are unalienable, but with 
the consent of their overseers.* Some have gardens, and culti - 
vate their lands to a considerable extent and advantage. The 
wood on their Reservations, pipe clay found on one of them at 
Martha's Vineyard, and pasturing the cattle of the white people, 
are sources of income. Many of the young men are employed in 
the whale and other fisheries, and shew much skill in their em- 
ployments : and all have at their command, the means in abun- 
dance of living in comfort, and even in affluence, if they had but 
the knowledge, and the dispositions, to use them. Their infirm 
and aged poor, are considered as foreigners, and taken care of by 
the State. The Indians are not taxed ; have no voice in elections, 
none of the rights and privileges peculiar to the citizens of the 
Commonwealth. In this, their state differs from that of the free 
negro population, who are taxed, and have the right of voting in 
elections, which many of them regularly exercise, and are eligi- 
ble to the highest offices in the government ; though other than 
legal obstacles, have prevented this sable race from receiving any 
of the civil honors, or oflices of the state, or town, in which they 
reside. 

The following are valuable and pertinent communications from 
missionaries residing among these Indians. In answer to ques- 
tions forwarded to Rev. Mr. Fish, the worthy and intelligent mis- 
iionary stationed at Marshpee, he writes me thus under dates of 
Feb. 1820, and Jan. 1821. 

" I will answer your several inquiries as well as I am able. 

1. As to the descent of the Indians of these parts, I believe it 
cannot be traced at this day. They have altogether adopted the 
habits of civilized life ; of course, have forgotten their ancient 
names, and indeed their language also, with the exception of a 
very few individuals, who retain a slight knowledge of it, and are 
able to converse a little. 

2. The number of pure blooded Indians is extremely small, say 
fifty or sixty, and is rapidly decreasing. The mixture of blood 

* These overseers are appointed by the government of the State, and their 
duties are, as guardians of the Indians, to see that they are not mal- treated by 
the white people, and to advise them in the management of their affairs. 



70 



AFPENIHTa.- 



arises far more frequently from connexion with negroes, than with 

whites. 

3. Professors of religion are considerably numerous. Perhaps 
there may he fifty ; composed of Congregationalists and Baptists ; 
a few of whom are eminently pious, considerable numbers decent 
in their lives, and not a few shockingly profligate. The number 
of men and women are perhaps nearly equal. The state of mor- 
als generally is low. Intemperance, with its concomitants, is 
found among them, as with almost all Indians. They manifest a 
wish, however, to have their children instructed. Schools are 
maintained among them at the expense of the plantation ; and 
though increased means of instruction would be desirable, there 
are few children, who are not taught to read and write. 

4. Their territory comprises about 13,000 acres, worth on an 
average about four dollars an acre ; held in joint stock (except 
what individuals choose to cultivate and enclose, which is theirs, 
not in fee, but only in tillage) guaranteed to them by the State, 
managed by a Board of Overseers, appointed by the Governor 
and Council, and rendered unalienable, except by legislative au- 
thority. 

5. As to the plan of removing them, were they in favor of the 
measure, it would scarcely be an object. They are of public 
utility here, as expert whalemen and manufacturers of various 
light articles; have lost their sympathy with their brethren of the 
forest; are in possession of many privileges, peculiar to a coast, 
indented by the sea; their local attachments are strong; they are 
tenacious of their lands; of course, the idea of alienating them and 
removing to a distance, would be very unpopular. This is evi- 
dent from the feelings manifested by those whom I have sounded 
on the subject; I have reason, therefore, to believe the scheme 
would not take with them. 

6. As to the Indians of Marshpee, they are, I think, diminish- 
ing, though rather slowly. The proximate cause of diminution is 
their vices, occasioned, I conceive, chiefly by their concern in 
whaling, and their unavoidable connexion with whites, whose 
vices they imitate, particularly the sin which most easily besets 
Indians, an intemperate use of ardent spirits. If industrious and 
sober, they might live with the greatest comfort, and be respecta- 



APPENDIX. 



71 



ble. Their connexion with the State, and with those immediately 
superintending their affairs, is a very happy one, did they but 
know the things pertaining to their happiness. 

7. At Herring Pond, there are not more than forty people of 
color. Their territory is considerable; but their affairs are em- 
barrassed, and probably at no distant day, Government will see fit 
to dispose of their land, and perhaps remove them to Marshpee. 
I preach to them as often as one sabbath in six or seven. They 
are fourteen miles from this place. Both at Marshpee and Herring 
Pond, there is a public allowance from the State for schools. A 
large proportion of their children live in white families, as ser- 
vants, and then the stipulation with their masters or mistresses 
always is, that they be taught to read and write, and frequently to 
manage domestic affairs, or the occupation of their master or mis- 
tress." 

The Rev. Mr. Thaxter, the venerable minister of Edgarton, on 
Martha's Vineyard, writes thus, to Rev. Dr. Holmes, Secretary 
to the Society for propagating the Gospel among the Indians and 
others in North America. 

" There was, early after the settlement of the Island, much 
pains taken by the Mayhems to Christianize the Natives. They 
were remarkably successful. The Natives of Gay Head made a 
grant of a large tract of land at Gay Head for the express purpose 
of obtaining instruction for themselves and their children."* Af- 
ter giving some account of their jealousies and disputes about this 
land, which they now consider as secure in their own hands, he 
observes: " Were they possessed of common prudence, such are 
the advantages they enjoy, they might contribute considerable to 
their own instruction. They are as jealous of one another, as 
they are of the white people. Those who have no children will 
not consent that their overseers shall apply any of their income for 
the instruction of the children of others. I consider the intruction 

* This is a tract of land, probably granted by the Indians of this island many 
years sgo, to the Society in England, for propagating the Gospel in Foreign 
parts, to enable that Society to extend the means of instruction among our In- 
dians. The revolutionary war interrupted their operations in this country, 
which have never since been renewed, and this valuable property, it seems, 
has reverted to the descendants of the Indians, who gave it. 



72 



APPENDIX. 



of these poor creatures an object of importance. I have been ac- 
quainted with them for near forty years, and am fully persuaded, 
that schooling the children ought to be the first object; preaching 
to them the second. Farm Neck and Christian Town are trifling 
objects, compared with Gay Head and Chab-aquiddick.j I am 
often at Chab-aquiddick. They appear thankful for the instruc- 
tion afforded them. I often admonish them to be attentive; that 
if they are not, I must report them to the Society, and then they 
will lose their Instructor. They appear to feel it. It is true, we 
think we see but little good in preaching to these people; did we 
not take into consideration what evils we probably prevent, who 
would not be discouraged, and give up the cause, saying, 1 have 
labored in vain, and spent my strength for naught? Having put 
our hands to the plough, we must not look back." 

Mr. Baylies, an active and successful Missionary on Martha's 
Vineyard, 1819, writes to Dr. Holmes : "In my visits (among 
the Indians on Martha's Vineyard) my feelings are often hurt. 
The universal complaint is, " Our children are suffering for want 
of a school, and we are not able to support one. Can you- help us?" 
Women schools, superintended by a man, would be productive of 
great good." " In my schools I had one hundred and thirty-two 
scholars ; one hundred and twenty-two were colored; eleven 
were married people. In all the schools, I should say, there 
were one hundred and fifty colored scholars, of both sexes. The 
Teachers of some of the schools were colored men and women. 
These schools are very pleasing to the Indians." Specimens of 
writing from seventy of the Indian scholars, left with the Secreta- 
ry, do great honor to the schools, and furnish good encourage- 
ment to their continuance. 

Mr. Baylies visited Troy, was well received by the Indians 
there, forty-eight in number. They have a decent house with 
two rooms, one for religious worship, the other for a school. 

The Legislature of the State has recently granted three hundred 
dollars to the Indians at Chab-aquiddick, " to build a suitable 
house for public worship and a school." The house is built and 
dedicated. The effect on the Indians is happy, and the prospect 
of future benefit to them promising. 

t An Island east of the Vineyard. 



APPENDIX. 



73 



The facts stated concerning the tribes above enumerated, shew 
the extent and value of several of their Reservations ; evince the 
dispositions, both of the old and young, in regard to schools; the 
capacities of their youth to receive instruction; their relation to 
the government of the states in which they reside ; their situation 
as to civil priviliges ; their feelings on the subject of a division of 
their lands and having individual property; of removal from their 
present places of abode; in regard to the christian religion and its 
institutions ; and the effects of their connexion and intercourse 
both with the white and black population around them. These 
results, of long experience, may be of much value to guide in 
forming plans, and devising measures, to preserve the remaining 
Indians from extinction. 



Rhode-Island. 

The only Indians remaining in this State are Narragansetts, at 
Charlestown, forty miles south-west of Providence, over against 
Block Island. This tribe, at the period of the first settlement of 
New-England, was one of the most numerous and powerful in all 
the country, and were long the terror of the English settlers, and 
of all the tribes around them. The territory which they occupied 
was extensive. As late as 1744, they were still so numerous, as 
that in a remarkable revival of religion, under Rev. Mr. Park of 
Westerly, sixty-four adults were baptized and received into the 
Charch.* Now, their numbers are but four hundred and twenty- 
nine. Of these, twenty-two were denominated negroes; the rest 
are of Indian extraction, but are nearly all, if not every individual, 
of mixed blood and color, in various degrees and shades. Their 
territory is reduced to about three thousand acres, the joint prop- 
erty of the tribe, and is estimated to be worth about $50,000 or 
$60,000. 

The Society for propagating the gospel among the Indians and 
Others in N. America, support a missionary, and two schools of 
about fifty scholars, among these Indians, a part of the year. 



* Prince's Ch'n. Hist, for 1744, 
10 



74 



APPENDIX. 



These schools are in a prosperous state, and doing much good. 
When these temporary schools cease, those who are disposed, 
send their children among the white people in their neighborhood. 

A regular church, of the Baptist denomination, has been formed 
among these Indians, who have a house for public worship, the 
only one in the town. The state of morals among this people is 
commendable. They are nominally independent, appointing a 
Council of five members, and a Clerk, from among themselves, to 
manage their civil affairs. Their lands are unalienable, but with 
the consent of the Legislature. Formerly they had chiefs, but 
this title has long since been extinct among them. 

As to the subject of removal, they say — 

" We wish not to be removed into a wild country. We have 
here farms and houses of our own. Those who will work, may 
here get a comfortable living; and those who will not work here, 
would not probably in a wilderness. We have land enough, and 
wood enough, and living on the salt water, and having boats of our 
own, have plenty of fish, &c. &c."* 

Part of this tribe, emigrated to Oneida and Brotherton, some 
years ago, with the Rev. Mr. Occum. 



Connecticut. 

The Mohegans, once a very numerous tribe, whose territories 
embraced a great part of the present counties of New-London, 
Windham, Hartford, and Tolland, are now reduced to a small 
remnant, few of them of unmixed blood, who are the proprietors 
and occupants, in their manner, of a reservation of about four or 
five thousand acres of fine land, on the Thames river, halfway 
between New-London and Norwich. A part of the tribe, with 
other Indians, in all about one hundred and fifty, under the care of 
Rev. Mr. Occum, by invitation, migrated and settled at Brotherton, 
near the Stockbridge and Oneida Indians, in New- York. Those 
who remain have made few advances in any thing which pertains 

*The principal part of the foregoing information, was obligingly collected 
from the Indians, and communicated at my request, by Rev. Oliver Brown, of 
South Kingston, near the residence of these Indians. 



APPENDIX. 



75 



to civilization; and are gradually wasting away, after the manner 
of other tribes now extinct. The State has assumed the care of 
their property, and of themselves, in like manner as the other 
New England States have done for their Indians. They have 
such advantages of religious and school instruction, as they are 
willing to receive, which are few, and the effects proportionally 
small. 

There is also a still smaller remnant of the Pequot tribe, of 
about fifty souls, in North Stonington. They own about three 
hundred acres of ordinary pasture land, with here and there a 
patch for tillage, worth about twenty dollars an acre. Their prin- 
cipal men are Samuel and Cyrus Shelley, Samuel Shentup, and 
James Ned. With very few exceptions, they are intemperate and 
improvident; of course, poor and miserable. They manufac- 
ture mats, brooms, baskets, &c. which are generally sold or ex- 
changed for ardent spirits. They have the same opportunity of 
sending their children to district schools, and of attending public 
worship, as have the white inhabitants of the town, but are gene- 
rally disinclined to avail themselves of these privileges. A few 
are apparently pious, and hold a meeting once in a month for reli- 
gious worship and exhortation, at which they all speak in turn. 

In Groton there is an Indian settlement of about the number and 
character of the above.* 

Individuals, a family, and in some places, several families togeth- 
er, are to be found, rarely however, in other parts of New Eng- 
land, than those named; but in no place in such numbers, as to de- 
serve notice in this Report. 

M. Report, p. 24. New-York. 

Of the few Indians who remain at Montauk Point, at the East 
end of Long Island, I have received no account, either of their 
present numbers or situation. 

The Six Nations of Indians, so celebrated in the history of our 
country, were originally the proprietors of a great part of the pres- 

* Letter to the author from G. Trumbull, Esq. of Stoningtom 



76 



APPENDIX. 



cnt State of New- York, particularly the northern and western parts 
of it, as far even as the Mississippi. This formidable confederacy 
of nations, has, long since, been broken in pieces. The Mohawks, 
" the true Old Heads of the Confederacy," as they were styled, 
emigrated to Canada, with Sir John Johnson, about the year 1776. 
Fifty-seven of this tribe, only, are at present within the U. States, 
settled on Sandusky river, Ohio. The Cayugas followed the Mo- 
hawks into Canada, leaving in the State of New- York, in 1796, on- 
ly forty of their number, who are now mingled with the Senecas, 
and other tribes, having no distinct reservation. 

The Tuscaroras, (who are the sixth nation of the grand confede- 
racy, there being but Jive before they joined it,) theMoheakunnuk 
or New Stockbridge, the Moheagans and Narragansetts, or Broth- 
erton Indians, have been adopted into the confederacy of the Six 
Nations, and by invitation, are settled in the vicinity of each other, 
on lands originally belonging to the Oneidas, and near their village. 
The Tuscaroras, who, in 1708, numbered one thousand two hun- 
dred warriors, or about six thousand souls, migrated from the sea 
coast of North Carolina.* The Moheakunnuks, to whom the 
Oneidas gave six miles square of their lands, removed from Stock- 
bridge, in the west part of Massachusetts, with their present ven- 
erable and worthy Missionary, Rev. John Sergeant, who has ever 
since lived with them, as their faithful missionary; and the Mohea- 
gans and Narragansetts, removed with the Rev. Mr. Occum, a cele- 
brated Indian preacher from Connecticut and Rhode-Island. 

In 1796, when I visited a part of these tribes, with the late 
Rev. Dr. Belknap, in behalf of the Society in Scotland for Propaga- 
ting Christian Knowledge, the whole population of the Six Nations, 
including their adopted children, was three thousand seven hun- 
dred and forty-eight. In 1818, according to an official return of 
Jasper Parrish, Esq. Indian Sub-Agent, to the Secretary of War, the 
number was four thousand five hundred and seventy-five. From 
the statements of this gentleman to the Secretary of War, and from 
several valuable communications and documents collected on my 

* An affecting account of the war which occasioned the migration of the 
Tuscarora Indians to N. York, is given by Dr. Williamson in his History of 
North Carolina, Vol. I. p. 187 to 203. 



APPENDIX. / 

tour, I give the following extracts, which contjain the facts desired 
by the President. 

In his statement to the Secretary, of Dec! 3d, 1818, he says, 
" Agreeably to orders and instructions from your predecessors, i 
transmit to you a report relative to the Six ! Nations of Indians, 
their places of residence, their numbers in fcach place, with the 
quantity of land in each of their reservations, and some brief re- 
marks on the subject of their advancement towards civilization. 

The Seneca Reservation, on the Alleghany river, contains 
30,469 acres, on which reside 597 Indians, including a few Onon- 
dagas. 

Cattaragus Reservation contains 26,880 acres, on which reside 
389, including a few Delawares. 

Buffalo Reservation contains 83,557 acres, on which reside (Sen- 
ecas, Cayugas, and Onondagas,) 686. 

Tonnewanta Reservation contains 46,209 acres, on which reside 
365. 

Tuscarora Reservation, contains 1,920 acres, exclusive of the 
lands they have purchased of the Holland Land Company, on 
which reside 314. 

On the Genesee river, the Indians have five Reservations, con- 
taining together 31,640 acres, on which 456 reside. They have 
also a small Reservation, containing 640 acres. 

The above are all the Reservations and numbers of Indians resi- 
ding west of this place, (Canandaigua,) in the State of New- Yor&. 
East of this place, and within the State of New- York, are 

The Oneidas, residing in Oneida county, on a Reservation of 
about 20,000 acres. Their number 1,031. 

Stockbridge Indians, who reside also in Oneida county, on a Res- 
ervation of 17,000 acres. Their number 438. 

The Onondaga Indians, residing at Old Onondaga village, on a 
Reservation of 7,000 acres. Their number 299. 

By the foregoing statement-, you will see that the population of 
the Six Nations of Indians is 4,575. That they own, and dwell on 
fourteen Reservations, scattered through this State, two hundred 
and fifty miles from their extreme points, containing in the whole 
265,315 acres. 

All their Reservations are surrounded by settlements of whites; 
in consequence of which, there are frequent depredations, petty, 



78 



APPENDIX. 



thefts, and trespasses committed on each other by the whites and 
Indians; most frequently commencing on the part of the former. 
It is very difficult to prevent these evils, while Indians and white 
people live, as they now do, in the near neighbourhood of each 
other. Under these circumstances, I think it would be for the in- 
terest of the U. States, and also for the welfare and happiness of 
the Six Nations, could they be rsuaded to concentrate them- 
selves, and comply with the suggt. ons made in your letter of the 
24th May last, which has been full} explained to them. 

The Six Nations have, for a numc er of years past, been furnish- 
ed by their Agent with implements of husbandry and farming uten- 
sils, suited to their wants and necessities, to enable them to culti- 
vate their grounds. The expenses have been paid from their an- 
nuities. The principal crops, which they raise, are corn, beans, 
and potatoes. The Oneida, Stockbridge, and Tuscarora Indians, 
raise English grain in considerable quantities; and some few fami- 
lies among the other tribes, do the same. For a few years past, I 
have observed, that they are becoming more industrious, enlar- 
ging their cornfields, making fences, and comfortable houses. A 
small portion of them still depe nd principally on hunting for sup- 
port." 

Under date of Nov. 3d, 1819, the same gentleman writes thus 
to the Secretary: — " During the past season 1 have spent a con- 
siderable part of my time among the Indians, at their different Tr- 
iages, for the purpose of persuading them to adopt the necessary 
measures for their civilization, and improvement in agriculture. I 
have also furnished th em with the necessary implements of hus- 
bandry, as far as the means for that purpose in my hands would 
permit. I find the Six Nations, within two years past, have made, 
and are still making, great advances towards civilization, and in 
agriculture and industry. They are making extensive improve- 
ments, by clearing their lands, building comfortable houses, good 
fences, &c. At a number of their villages they raise considerable 
quantities of English grain. A spirit of industry and ambition 
among their young men, to excel each other in building houses, 
making fences, &c. is evidently rising and spreading among these 
people. 

The Six Nations have lately held two Councils; one at Oneida, 
and the other at Buffalo, for the purpose of taking into considera- 



APPENDIX. 



79 



tion proposals made to them for the establishment of schools, and 
other improvements among them. I explained to them the act of 
Congress, at their last session, making an appropriation of $10,000 
for the civilization of the Indian Nations, which border on, and 
are surrounded by, our frontier settlements. Some of the Chiefs, 
at first, exhibited considerable opposition to all the proposed plans 
for civilization; but at length yielded to the arguments of the 
Christian party, and finally have unanimously consented to accept 
them. Although they have not unanimously agreed to receive reli- 
gious Teachers among them, yet they have indicated a much more 
favourable opinion on this subject, than formerly, and the senti- 
ments of many of the principal Indians, seem to be entirely chan- 
ged. The Oneida, Stockbridge, and Tuscarora Indians, have 
Missionaries among them, and for the change in their moral con- 
dition and conduct, we are undoubtedly indebted to the exertion 
of those men. The Oneidas have built them a handsome chapel, 
which, by the name of St. Peters', was consecrated September, 
1819, in which divine service, in the Episcopal form, is regularly 
performed, with decorum and solemnity.* 

*In 1815, Mr. Eleazer Williams, of Indian extraction, the son of a chief of 
the Iroquois nation, among whom he was born, was appointed School-Master, 
Catechist, and Lay Reader, to the Oneidas. The Book of Common Prayer, 
r th select portions of the Gospels, and of the Historical books of Scripture, 
translated more than a century since into the Mohawk language, which is the 
.common language of the Six Nations, by the Society in England for Propaga- 
ting the Gospel, it has been proposed by Bishop Hobart, to republish, under 
the superintendance of Mr. Williams, for the use of the survivors of these 
tribes. The following very encouraging account of the state of this mission, i« 
extracted from the Journal of the Diocess of New-York, 1818 : 

"It is a subject of congratulation, that our Church has resumed the labors, 
which for a long period before the revolutionary war, the Society in England 
for Propagating the Gospel in Foreign Parts, directed to the religious instruc- 
tion of the Indian tribes. Those labours were not wholly unsuccessful ; for on 
my recent visit to the Oneidas, I saw an aged Mohawk, who, firm in the faith 
of the Gospel, and adorning his profession by an exemplary life, is indebted, 
under Divine blessing, for his Christian principles and hopes, to the Missiona- 
ries of that venerable Society. The exertions more recently made for the con- 
version of the Indian tribes, have not been so successful, partly because not 
united with efforts to introduce among them those arts of civilization, without 
which the Gospel can neither be understood nor valued ; but principally be- 



30 



APPENDIX. 



The R^ v. John Sargeant has resided among the Stockbridge In- 
dians, as t heir Missionary and Instructor, for twenty-five years. 
The Tusc aroras have also a missionary among them, Rev. Mr. 
Crane. *jfhere has also been a school among them a considera- 
ble part of the time for the last three or four years. The Indians 
residing oji the Alleghany, Cattaragus, and Tonnewanta, have re- 
ceived fro! m the Society of Friends, to a considerable amount, in 
farming uf ensils and implements of husbandry, as well as instruc- 
tion in the art of agriculture. By these aids they have made consid- 
>rovements, and increased in industry the last three years, 
ca Indians, residing at Buffalo, have, for eight years, had 
established among them by the Missionary Society of 

ous instruction was conveyed through the imperfect medium of in- 



erable imj 
TheSene 
a school 

cause rehgi 

terpreters, by those unacquainted with their dispositions and their habits, and 
in whom th ey were not disposed to place the same confidence, as in those who 
are connected with them by the powerful ties of language, of manners, and of 
kindred. ' The religious instructor of the Oneidas, employed by our Church,- 
enjoys all tl tese advantages. Being of Indian extraction, and acquainted with 
their langu: ige, dispositions, and customs, and devoting himself unremittingly 
to their spii itual and temporal welfare, he enjoys their full confidence ; while 
the educati on which he has received, has increased his qualifications, as their 
guide in the faith and precepts of the Gospel. Mr. Eleazer Williams, at the 
earnest reqi lest of the Oneida Chiefs, was licensed by me about two yearn 
since, as the ir Lay-Reader, Catechist, and Schoolmaster. Educated in a dif- 
ferent coniE mnion, he connected himself with our Church from conviction, 
and appears j warmly attached to her doctrines, her apostolic ministry, and her 
worship. £[ ioon after he commenced his labors among the Oneidas, the Pagan 
party solem 
plained to tl 
the Divine < 
He combat 



nly professed the Christian faith. Mr. Williams repeatedly ex- 
iem, in councils which they held for this purpose, the evidences of 
>rigin of Christianity, and its doctrines, institutions, and precepts, 
ad their objections, patiently answered their inquiries, and was 
finally, thro) j ugh the Divine blessing, successful in satisfying their doubts. Soon 



after their c 
tian party, 1 
handsome ec 
In the wo) 
principal pai 
auxiliary. I 
calculated t( 
its decent an 
of worship. 



onversion, they appropriated, in conjunction with the old Chris- 
he proceeds of the sale of some of their lands to the erection of a 
ifice for Divine worship. 

rk of their spiritual instruction, the Book of Common Prayer, a 
t of which has been translated for their use, proves a powerful 

Its simple and affecting exhibition of the truths of redemption, is 
interest their hearts, while it informs their understanding; and 
1 significant rites, contribute to fix their attention in the exercise 
They are particularly gratified with having parts assigned them 



APPENDIX. 



81 



New- York, which has been placed under the care of Mr. Hyde. 
They appear to be warmly engaged in the education of their chil- 
dren, and have, this season, built a large school-house for that pur- 
pose. Mr. Young and his wife are now among them at Buffalo, 
who are to take charge of their school. He, to instruct their 
young men, while his wife is to teach the Indian girls in school, 
and to instruct them in the use of the needle, the wheel and the 
loom. Mr. and Mrs. Young appear to be persons of respectability, 
and are under the patronage of the same society. The Genesee 
Indians have not had the same advantages in instruction, as the 
other tribes. The only advantages they have had for improve- 
ment in agriculture, have been the examples of the white people 
around their reservations. The Six Nations of Indians, residing 
within- my agency, have, within the last season, raised more corn, 
wheat, oats, potatoes, &c. than they have before in any one season 
for thirty-five years. This change among them, from an indolent, 
hunting, fishing life, to that of useful industry, is to be ascribed, un- 

in the service, and repeat the responses with great propriety, and devotion. 
On my visit to them, several hundred assembled for worship ; those who 
could read were furnished with books ; and they uttered the confessions of 
the liturgy, responded its supplications, and chanted its hymns of praise, with 
a reverence and fervor, which powerfully interested the feelings of those who 
witnessed the solemnity. They listened to my address to them, interpreted by 
Mr. Williams, with so much solicitous attention ; they received the laying on 
of hands with such grateful humility ; and participated of the symbols of their 
Saviour's love, with such tears of penitential devotion, that the impression 
which the scene made on my mind, will never be effaced. Nor was this the 
excitement of the moment, or the ebullition of enthusiasm. The eighty-nine, 
who were confirmed, had been well instructed by Mr. Williams ; and none 
were permitted to approach the communion, whose lives did not correspond 
with their Christian professions. The numbers of those who assembled for 
worship, and partook of the ordinances, would have been greater, but for 
the absence of many of them, at an Indian council at Buffalo. 

I have admitted Mr Williams as a candidate for Orders, on the recommen- 
dation of the Standing Committee ; and look forward to his increased influence 
and usefulness, should he be invested with the office of the ministry. " 

"There is a prospect of his having, some time hence, a powerful auxiliary 
in a young Indian, the son of the head warrior of the Onondag-as, who was 
killed at the battle of Chippawa, and who, amiable and pious in his disposi- 
tions, and sprightly and vigorous in his intellectual powers, is earnestly desi- 



11 



APPENDIX. 



der Providence, not only to the means which have been employed 
ibr that purpose, but in part to their necessities, for the support of 
themselves and families. Their hunting grounds being small, and 
game becoming scarce, have operated as a powerful stimulus t© 
this change in their habfts. 

Mr. Hyde's Letter. 

From Mr. Jabez B. Hyde, who has for a number of years been em- 
ployed as an Instructor among the Senecas at Buffalo, in several 
communications before me, states,* that Tonnawanta, a Seneca 
village, thirty miles from Buffalo, had been " the head quarters 
of opposition." A young man of this village, was among the first 
nine, who publicly embraced Christianity. During three months 
instruction, which he received at Buffalo, he made progress in 
religious knowledge, and in sacred music, of which Indians are 
extremely fond, and admirable performers. He then returned to 
Tonnawanta, carrying with him a hymn book, in his native lan- 
guage. These hymns he sang to his neighbors, and became the 
open advocate of Christianity. Though opposed and ridiculed, 
he remained stedfast, and persevered. Success followed. In a 

rous of receiving an education to prepare him for the ministry among his 
countrymen. I trust that means will be devised for accomplishing his wishes. 
We ought never to forget, that the salvation of the Gospel is designed for all 
the human race ; and that the same mercy which applies comfort to our woun- 
ded consciences, the same grace which purines and soothes our corrupt and 
troubled hearts, and the same hope of immortality which fills us with peace 
and joy, can exert their benign and celestial influence on the humble Indian." 

In the Journal of 1819, it is stated, "The Young Onondaga chief, whom I 
mentioned in my last address,as desirous of procuring an education for the pur- 
pose of qualifying him as the spiritual instructor of his countrymen, will be 
able, through the bounty of Episcopalians and others, principally in the city 
of New- York, and through the aid of the government of the United States, to 
attain his object. He is advantageously receiving an education under the 
care ofthe Rev. Mr. Fuller, of Rensselaerville." 

In 1821, the Oneidas were again visited, and the Holy Eucharist administer- 
ed to forty or fifty of the Indians, and five adults and fifty children baptized. 

^In a letter Dec. 1819, to the Juvenile Charitable Society in Lenox. 



APPENDIX. 83 

few months, eleven young men had renounced Paganism, and de- 
termined to listen to the word of God, and to obey its precepts. 
These twelve met frequently for the purpose of singing hymns, 
and for religious conversation. This alarmed the Chiefs, who 
complained that these young men " were filling Tonnawanta with 
their doctrine." A Council of the people was called, and the 
young men entreated and admonished to renounce their new reli- 
gion. When they found entreaties and admonitions vain, they 
" commanded them to desist from advocating Christianity, and 
singing Christian hymns." The young men, one excepted, who 
drew back, and left his companions, said firmly, " We shall not 
obey you in this thing." The Chiefs then commanded them to 
" leave the Reservation and go to Buffalo, where such things were 
allowed, and not remain to disturb their village with their new 
and wicked ways." The young men refused to go, and to leave 
their possessions, saying, " You can take our lives; but you need 
not expect us to renouce the Gospel of Jesus Christ." The ef- 
effects of this persecution, on the one hand, and of the firmness 
and patience, in resisting and bearing it on the other, have been 
such as might be expected; converts to civilization and Christiani- 
ty have been multiplied." 



Alleghany Reservation. 

At the meeting of the Council of the Six Nations at Buffalo, 
which I attended in August, on my return,* the following state- 
ments were handed to me. 

" Cold Springs, {Alleghany River) 8th mo. 1, 1820. 
"At the request of the Chiefs and Warriors, named below, I 
inform, that the people on this Reservation have been number- 
ed, to see who are for school learning, Sabbath keeping, and im- 
provements on farms. They state the number to be two hundred 
and twenty-five for school learning, &c. eighty-seven of whom now 
pay attention to keeping the Sabbath day. They wish the United 
States Agent, Dr. Jedidiah Morse, to be informed, that the above 
is their number at present, who are disposed to join in the object 

* See this Appendix p. 3. 



84 



APPENDIX. 



of the United States government in improvements, in school learn- 
ing, and attention to sabbath keeping; and that the said Chiefs and 
Warriors believe, that many more of their people will soon fol- 
low the example of the above two hundred and twenty-five. 

Jonathan Thomas,* for 
James Robi?ison, 
John Peirce, 
George Silverheels, 
Sky Peirce, 
John King. 

John Parish, Jabez B. Hyde." 

The whole number of Indians on the Alleghany Reservation, is 
five hundred and ninety-seven, of whom five hundred are Sene- 
cas, the rest Onondagas; of whom sixty-four are of the same dis- 
position as to schooling, the sabbath, &c. as the two hundred and 
twenty-five Senecas. Two of the Chiefs, only, are in the oppo- 
sition. At Cattaragus are three hundred and eighty-nine Sene- 
cas, half of whom are for civilization and the Gospel; among 
whom are the principal Chiefs. The number, who are favorable 
to a reform, is fast increasing. 

Of the Senecas at Tonnawanta, twenty-four lately removed to 
Buffalo. Of the remaining three hundred and forty, thirty of the 
flower of their } r oung men and women, with the principal Chief at 
their head, have become friendly to the Gospel and its instruc- 
tions, and are honest enquirers after truth. Opposers are found 
chiefly among the idle and the filthy. Two years ago, Christiani- 
ty and its invariable accompaniment, civilization, had no friend in 
this place. The prospect now is very encouraging, as to the fu- 
ture. In 1796, the Pagan pnrty among the Oneidas, was strong; 
now, there is not a profest Pagan in the tribe. Paganism is evi- 
dently sinking among the Six Nations; and there is reason to 

* This gentleman is one of the Society of Friends, who early espoused the 
cause of the Indians, and engaged in promoting their civilization. They have 
had laborers among this section of the Senecas for several years, and from 
this report we learn, that their labors have not been in vain. Their efforts 
commenced with the Oneida and Stockbridge Indians, as early as the sum- 
mer of 1796. 



APPENDIX. 



85 



hope, that in a very few years, by means now using, and others 
which may be devised for the purpose, the whole body of these 
people will become professed, and we hope, by the divine bless- 
ing, real friends to Christianity. But more instructors of the va- 
rious kinds are needed among these tribes; especially since they 
are every day becoming more desirous of receiving them.t 

Serious inconveniences are felt in giving them the education 
they need, with the funds now at command, from the circum- 
stance of their scattered situation. Including the Brotherton In- 
dians, they live on fifteen Reservations, within a compass of two 
hundred and fifty miles. To educate each of these small sections, 
in all the branches of knowledge proposed to be imparted to our 
Indians generally, would require fifteen Education Families; to 
support which, large funds would be necessary. Could they be 
convinced that it would be for their interest and happiness, and be 
persuaded, to collect and plant themselves together on some suita- 
ble spot, to be selected and agreed upon by themselves, a single 
Education Family would be sufficient to finish their education, al- 
ready hopefully begun, and eight tenths of the expense saved; and 
the work, too, be much better and more speedily and effectually 
done. In my opinion this is the way, probably the only way, radi- 
cally and permanently to promote all their best interests, and to 
save them from gradual and final extinction. For such a course, 
a great part of the Stockbridge Indians, and many individuals of 
the other tribes, are already prepared. And could the others be 
made fully to understand a plan of this kind, and perceive the 
benefits which the adoption of it would certainly secure for them, 
and all opposing influence from without, cease, the plan would 
soon be eagerly embraced by the body of these nations. 



Stockbridge Indians. 

The Stockbridge, or Moheakunuck Indians have had schools, 
and a stated Missionary among them, for several generations, sup- 
ported for many years past, in part, by the Society in Scotland for 
propagating the Gospel, in part by the Corporation of Harvard 

t Seethe speech of Capt. Pollard, Appendix, page 4. 



/ 



86 



APPENDIX. 



College, and in part by the American Society for propagating the 
Gospel among the Indians and others in North America. They 
have a respectable house for public worship, which is regularly 
attended on the Sabbath. Their church music is performed in the 
modern style, in three parts, with a softness, delicacy, and melo- 
dy, which I have never heard equalled. Their venerable Mis- 
sionary, Rev. John Sergeant, preaches to them regularly on the 
Sabbath, usually in their own, the Moheakunuck language. Most 
of them understand English; numbers can read and write it, and 
several are able to instruct others. They are more advanced in 
the knowledge of our language, and in civilization, than any In- 
dians in our country; and many of them are capable of rendering 
essential service in accomplishing the plan of the government in 
respect to other tribes. There is one Indian woman of this tribe, 
a widow with three children, by the name of Mary Doxtator, who 
has a good education, whose heart is full of rational, and pious 
zeal for the conversion of Indians, who would make a very useful 
and efficient member of a Mission Family. She has been taught 
to spin and weave, and her manufactures, specimens of which I 
saw, discover much ingenuity. Her activity and industry in do- 
ing good, are highly exemplary. Among this tribe, I found a pi- 
ous and respectable lady, of the Society of Friends,* who, after 
the example of Dorcas, was piously employed in making garments 
for the Indians, and gratuitously instructing the Indian girls, how 
to make them. Having some property, she lives, and gives her in- 
structions, among the Indians, respectably, at her own expense. 
Her zeal, activity and disinterestedness, are highly to be com- 
mended. 



Oneidas. 

Of the Oneidas, an account has been given, p. Note. Seve- 
ral of this tribe have lately emigrated, and joined their brethren 

Note A. Since the foregoing was written, later information concerning the 
Six Nations, has been received, which may be found in a subsequent partoi 
the Report. 

* Lydia Mott. 



AFPENDIX. 



87 



in Canada. On my return, I had a familiar, interesting, interview 
with a number of the Chiefs and Warriors of this tribe, from which 
I inferred, that they were unsettled, and at variance in their minds, 
on some points of great importance to their welfare, and as to the 
course which they ought to pursue. Great anxiety, and depres- 
sion of spirits, were visibly marked in their countenances. 

Onondagas and Senecas. 

The New-York Missionary Society has supported a faithful and 
successful Missionary, Mr. Crane, among the Onondagas, and 
Messrs. Hyde and Young, as Instructors among the Senecas at 
Buffalo. Their labors have been productive of encouraging fruits. 
Mr. Young, in a letter addressed to me, Aug. 1820, says: 

" In the month of September last, I commenced building a 
house for a school and dwelling house. In the month of Novem- 
ber, I removed my family from Tuscarora, where I had been en- 
gaged as a teacher among that tribe, which is likewise under the 
care of the New-York Missionary Society. In the month of Feb- 
ruary, the school room was ready for the reception of the school, 
and was immediately opened. I commenced with a Sunday 
school; thirty-two attended; on the following day forty-two. 
Ninety have attended. The usual number through the winter 
and spring, until the business of farming called for their assistance, 
was from forty to forty-five. The number through the summer 
has been much smaller. About one third of the number have 
been girls. The improvement of the school, for the short time, 
has been promising, and the order, attention, and advancement in 
external appearance, have far exceeded expectations. Until the 
habits of this people are considerably changed, a large school, 
during summer, is not to be expected, a great proportion of their 
children, at present, being kept at home for labor. To secure 
their attendance, and stimulate the exertions of the children, I 
distribute among them, according to merit, small presents of va- 
rious kinds. I adopt the Lancasterian mode of teaching, as far as I 
can, intending to extend the use of it, as soon as I shall have 
qualified some to act as monitors. In teaching the art of writing, 



88 



APPENDIX. 



I commence with the children of both sexes very early, insisting 
on the greatest particularity in what relates to the rules of wri- 
ting. I use, for a considerable time, the slate, both on account of 
its economy, and its superior adaptation to the use of small chil- 
dren. Having my slates ruled with equi-distant, horizontal and 
slope lines, and never allowing the use of a shot pencil, or pen, I 
find the business of instructing in this branch uniformly easy and 
pleasing. 

In the month of December, we commenced the school for the 
instruction of the female adults, in the domestic branches of knit- 
ting, spinning, sewing and marking. The women were all unac- 
quainted with knitting and spinning. From fifteen to twenty-five 
have attended, and made very pleasing proficiency. Together 
with the women, the girls are taught two afternoons in the week. 
Mrs. Young, as soon, and as far, as practicable, intends to instruct 
them in various kinds of domestic economy, by visiting them in 
their houses, and instructing them in what may tend to raise them 
from their present degraded situation. 

In my Sunday School, I find much encouragement. The num- 
ber on the Sabbath is much larger than at the school through the 
week. The scholars are perfectly orderly and silent. 

It is to us extremely pleasing and animating to see so many of 
these rude children, who not long since could hardly be persuad- 
ed into a school, now cheerfully flocking together for instruction 
on the Lord's day. During the last winter, several Indian young 
men attended, two evenings in the week, to receive instruction 
in reading, writing, Arithmetic and music. This school, I ex- 
pect will increase in numbers. Its location is very central for 
the three settlements, and from what I can learn, an increasing 
disposition for improvement is manifested by this people. It is 
hoped, and expected, that the present opposition, manifested by 
the Pagan party, will gradually subside, and that many of the 
children of that hitherto unhappy section of this people, will ac- 
cept the offered benefits of civilization and the Gospel. 



APPENDIX. 



89 



Although some time may elapse before a fair experiment may be 
made, yet I think the present prospects of a successful school a- 
mong them are most promising. 

I remain, &c. JAMES YOUNG." 

Rev. J. Morse, D. D. New-Haven. 

" P. S. I enclose two specimens of writing and print done by 
two boys, scholars of mine, in Tuscarora, whose respective 
names are annexed to the pieces.* 

Union of the New-York and United Foreign Missionary Society. 

The New-York Missionary Society, in December last, for- 
mally resigned the charge and support of these Missions and 
Schools, with their present occupants, to the United Foreign Mis- 
sionary Society, who have accepted the charge. The two Socie- 
ties merged in each other, will now, we trust, act with increased 
energy and effect for the benefit of these tribes. 

While these tribes, for certain purposes, and to a limited ex- 
tent, are independent of each other, of the State, and of the Uni- 
ted States, and in all Treaties held with them are so regarded; 
yet they are in confederacy with each other, and are so far under 
the control, of the Legislature of New-York, in respect to their 
lands, as that they are not permitted to sell them to private indi- 
viduals, or companies, but to the State only, who claim the 'right 
of preemption and of disposing of this right, to whom they please. 
The Indians are thus deprived of the privilege, common to free 
men, of going into the market with their lands, and of course, of 
obtaining their fair and full value. As these Indians are not repre- 
sented in the Legislature, it has been made a question, whether 
the penal laws of the State bind them. We know of no case, 
which has decided this question. 

* These specimens accompanied this Report, when presented to the Presi- 
dent and Congress. They are equal to the best specimens in our English 
schools - 

12 



90 



APPENDIX. 



App. O. P. Q, R. Report, p. 27. Ohio. 

Of the Indians in this State, the Indian Agent, John Johnston, 
Esq. under date of June 17, 1819, has given the following ac- 
count:* 

" The Indians inhabiting Ohio, are the Delawares, Wyandots, 
Shawaneese, Senecas and Ottawas. 



Delawares. 

The Delawares emigrated from the lower parts of Pennsylva- 
nia, and the adjacent parts of New-Jersey, and were the primi- 
tive inhabitants of that country. They were once very numerous 
and powerful, but many disastrous wars with the white people, 
reduced them to a mere handful. Attempts have been made, 
without success,] particularly by the Moravians, to introduce 
Christianity and the habits of civilized life among them. At pres- 
ent, they are more opposed to the Gospel and the whites, than 
any other Indians with whom I am acquainted.]: The far greater 
part of this tribe reside on White river, in Indiana. They have 
sold their country without any reserve, at the treaty of St. Mary's 
of last year, (1818,) and the United States have engaged to re- 
move them west of the Mississippi; to provide them with a terri- 
tory there, and have guaranteed to them its peaceable possession. 
Their peculiar aversion to having white people for neighbors, 
induced them to remove to the westward. They intend to set- 
tle on the river Arkansaw. This tribe has been in Ohio, between 
fifty and sixty years. 

* Archeologia Americana, p. 27 1. 

t The writer of this article must have been unacquainted with the accounts 
given of the Missions among these Indians by Brainerd, Loskiel, and many- 
others, or he would not have used this expression. 

X See a different account of the dispositions of these Indians, given byCapt. 
Hendrick, who long resided among them, and by Rev. Mr. Sergeant, under 
the head of Indiana and Illinois, in this Appendix. 



APPENDIX. 



91 



Wyandots. 

The Wyandots came from the country near Quebec, about two 
hundred and fifty years since. In their migratory excursions, 
they first settled at Detroit; then removed to the upper end of 
lake Michigan, and settled near Mackinaw. They engaged in war 
with the Indians there, and separated into two companies; one of 
which went to the northward; and the other, which was the 
most numerous, returned to Detroit, and finally extended its set- 
tlement along the southern shore of Lake Erie, all the way to San- 
dusky Bay. 

Their language is entirety distinct from that of any of the other 
tribes in Ohio. Many words are pure Latin. All the time the 
French had dominion in Canada, the Roman Catholics maintained 
a mission among them. They were nearly all baptized by the 
Missionaries, and nearly all the aged people still wear crucifixes 
in their bosoms under their shirts. 

Between the years 1803, and 1810, the Presbyterians sup- 
ported a missionary and a farming establishment among them 
on Sandusky river. A few converts were made by them, who 
were put to death by the Catholic Indians, on account of their re- 
ligion. The British traders were all opposed to the mission, and 
had influence enough to get Gen. Hull to unite with them against 
the Missionary, Rev. Joseph Badger.* Mr. B. was recalled by 
the synod, and was succeeded by the Rev. J. Hughes. The 
minds of the Indians having been much agitated by the prospect of 
hostilities between England and the United States, which were 
commenced at Tippecanoe by the Impostor, called the Prophet, 
the mission was withdrawn." 

For three years past, the Wyandots have had a Methodist preach- 
er, a man of color, among them. His name is Stewart. His 
preaching has wrought a great change among them. About fifty 

* This worthy man, now advanced in life, but with unabated, pious zeal, 
is the projector of an Education Family, to be planted, as soon as the suitable 
preparations can be made, at the Council Bluffs, on the Missouri, under the 
direction of the United Foreign Missionary Society, or some other religious 
Aseociation. 



92 



APPENDIX. 



persons in the nation publicly profess to belong to the Protestant 
Church. A school is about to be established for them at Upper 
Sandusky. 

Since this successful beginning, Rev. James B. Finley, of the 
Methodist Church, has been appointed to this station, where his 
labors have been blessed. Scuteash, a Chief of the Big Turtle 
Clan, a pious man, is his Class Leader. Prospects of usefulness 
are pleasing. The people seem prepared to receive instruction. 
Mr. F. states, Nov. 1821, that if he had the means, he could at 
once have a school of fifty scholars. He had begun with fourteen, 
c: who learn fast, can speak the letters plainly, and will soon be 
able to speak English."* 

Shawaneese. 

The Shawaneese have been established in Ohio about sixty-five 
years. They came here from West-Florida, and the adjacent 
country. They formerly resided on Suwaney river, in Florida, 
near the sea. Black Hoof, who is eighty-five years of age, was 
born there, and remembers bathing in the salt water, when a boy. 
" Suwaney" river was doubtless named after the Shawaneese, 
56 Suwane}'," being a corruption of Shawaneese. The people of 
this nation have a tradition, that their ancestors crossed the sea. 
They are the only tribe with which I am acquainted, who admit of 
a foreign origin. Until lately, they kept a yearly sacrifice for 
their safe arrival in this country. From whence they came, or 
at what period they arrived in America, they do not know. It is 
a prevailing opinion among them, that Florida had once been in- 
habited by white people, who had the use of iron tools. Black 
Hoof affirms, that he has often heard it spoken of by the old peo- 
ple, that stumps of trees covered with earth, were frequently 
found, which had been cut down by edged tools. 

For several years past, the Society of Friends, at a considera- 
ble expense, have supported an agricultural establishment among 
the Shawaneese. They have a grist mill and saw mill, which are 

* Report of the Missionary Society of the Methodist Episcopal Church, 
June, 1822. 



APPENDIX. 



93 



kept in complete order for the use ef these Indians. The Friends 
are about to establish a school.* This truly benevolent denomi- 
nation of Christians do not yet attempt to instruct these people in 
the principles of Christianity, believing that they are not yet suf- 
ficiently acquainted with the arts of civilized life. This tribe is 
opposed to Christianity, alleging, that God gave them a dispen- 
sation suited to their situation; and that he did the same for the 
whites. They fancy that the Divine Being comes and sings in their 
religious meetings, and if they do not hear his " still, small voice," 
they conclude their sacrifice is not accepted. 

Senecas. 

The Senecas came from the western parts of New- York, 
( which is the home of the principal part of this tribe) and from 
the adjacent parts of Canada. > They have not been long in this 
State. They labor more steadily, have better houses and farms, 
and appear more like white people in their dress and manners, 
than any other Indians in Ohio. 

Ottawas. 

The Ottazvas have resided from time immemorial on the waters 
of Lake Erie. To improve them in their condition, no attempts 
have yet been made. The Ottawas, the Chippewas and Potowat- 
timies; from the similarity of their language, must have been one 
nation at no remote period. Agriculture makes a slow, but stea- 

* The public papers state, that the Society of Friends have commenced a 
plan, which is original with them, of dispersing Indian families among the 
white population, on farms, to dwell among them as neighbors and equals, 
to conduct their farms and business, and the education of their children, as 
the white people do theirs ; and mingled with them to enjoy tegether, on an 
equal footing, all the civil and other privileges which we enjoy. The plan 
is certainly worth the labor and expence of the experiment. Should it suc- 
ceed, it will be a speedy method of merging the Indian, with the white popu- 
lation, which is the result we wish. 



94 



APPENDIX. 



dy, progress among them. Many Indians have taken to the 
plough. Last year, the Indian Agent delivered to them thirty-six 
ploughs, and every thing necessarily belonging to them. These were 
chiefly furnished at the expense of the Society of Friends. The 
Agent has now on hand implements of husbandry, to the value of 
one hundred pounds sterling, to deliver them at the next Council. 
This was given them by an ancient female friend, of Cork, in Ire- 
land. The yearly meeting of the friends in Ireland have given the 
sum of one hundred and fifty pounds sterling, to be applied to the 
same benevolent purpose. The Indians are turning their atten- 
tion more and more to the raising of cattle. The Shawaneese have 
appropriated of this year's annuity, fourteen hundred and twenty 
dollars, for the purchase of cows and calves; and they previously 
had one hundred and twenty-five head of horned cattle, and two 
hundred hogs. 

The Senecas and others, at Lewiston, have three hundred 
hogs, and one hundred and fifty horned cattle. 

The Wyandots and Senecas, on Sandusky river, have fifteen 
hundred hogs, and five hundred horned cattle. 

The stock of the Indians is every where increasing within the 
limits of this Agency. One individual owns seventy head of cattle. 

The Reservation of the Wyandots, at Upper Sandusky, is 
twelve by nineteen miles, including within its limits some of the 
best land in the State. 

When the Wyandots first settled at Detroit, they killed buffa- 
loes and elks at Springwells. The whole country between the 
Lakes and the Ohio abounded with them." 



App. Q,. Rev. Mr. Hoge's Letter. 

The following letter from the Rev. Mr. Hoge, minister of Co- 
lumbus, gives further and valuable information of the state of the 
Indians in Ohio. 

" Columbus, Ohio, January 26th, 1820. 

Rev. Sir, 

Having been informed that you are the Agent for a Society in 
Scotland, whose object is to afford instruction and the means of 



APPENDIX, 



95 



improvement to the Aborigines of America, I take the liberty of 
asking some information respecting the definite objects, and the 
method of carrying them into effect. 

As a member of the Synod of Ohio, and of the Board of Mis- 
sions, acting under their directions, I will say, that such infor- 
mation as you may give, will be gratifying to me, and may lead to 
arrangements that will subserve the cause of religion, and the best 
interests of the savages of our country. The Synod have directed 
their Missionary Board to endeavor, in conjunction with the Sy- 
nod of Pittsburgh, to make arrangements for schools, &c. among 
the Indians at Sandusky, and perhaps ultimately at other places, 
in this State. One great difficulty in accomplishing our wishes, is 
the want of money; and this is a difficulty which will not be easily 
removed in the present state of pecuniary embarrassment. 

The present time appears to be very favorable to the establish- 
ment of such institutions among our Indians, as may render them 
a civilized and Christian people. The Reservations they made, 
when they ceded their lands in this State to the United States, are 
very valuable, and of considerable extent. They begin to be con- 
vinced, that their migratory life is unfriendly to their welfare, and 
desire instruction. They are aware also that it will soon be im- 
possible to gain subsistence by hunting, and that they must have 
recourse to agriculture and the mechanic arts. Some of them, 
too, profess to desire the means of literary and religious improve- 
ment. 

This favorable season will not, probably, invite us very long. 
The ground may be occupied by others, or the influence of deep- 
ly-rooted prejudices and habits, unless counteracted, may induce 
them to remove to the Northern or Western wilds. 

Should we need assistance, can you, conformably to your in- 
structions, afford us any? and if any, to what amount, and on 
what conditions? Should you be able to give a favorable answer 
to these enquiries, I wish to inform the Missionary Board at their 
meeting in April next. 

I am, your friend and brother, 
Respectfully, in the Gospel, 
(Signed) JAMES HOGE." 

Rev. Dr. Morse. 



APPENDIX, 



App. R. Interview with Richardville, a Miami Chief. 

While at Detroit, I had an interview with Jean Baptiste Rich- 
ardville, Chief of the Miami Nation, a man of property, and good 
sense, whose dress and manners were like those of our respecta- 
ble farmers. He was introduced to me as a man of much influence 
in his nation. He informed me that the whole number of the 
Miamies, residing in different places, was estimated to be between 
two and three thousand; that their annuity from the Government 
of the United States, was eighteen thousand dollars. That a 
Missionary, Mr. McCoy, a Baptist, resided at Fort Wayne, 
preached to them, and kept a school for their children; that a 
a great majority of the nation were friendly to the project of their 
civilization; but some were opposed to it, "because they were 
ignorant." As to religion, he said, " I do not know. The chil- 
dren should be instructed, and whiskey kept from the nation." 
As to the proposals of the Government generally, for the improve, 
ment of the condition of Indians, he thought well of them, and 
would communicate them to his nation, and use his influence to 
persuade them to accept the offered blessings. He spoke of the 
diminution of their lands, as a calamity, which was felt. The 
Shawaneese Prophet, he said, was hostile to the plan of the civil- 
ization of Indians; but that his influence was gone, and himself 
had been rejected as an impostor. 

He had met a number of the Cherokees at Baltimore, he said, 
who informed him of what was doing among them, and gave good 
advice to him, for his nation, as to manufactures and other improve- 
ments. 

Miami Reservations. 

They had, he informed me, three Reservations. One at Missis- 
sinua, forty-five miles square; another ten miles square; and a 
third six miles square. He thought the plan of collecting the In- 
dians, now scattered, into larger bodies, for the purpose of educa- 
ting them with more convenience, and at less expense, both prac- 
ticable and advantageous. 



APPENDIX. 



97 



The Government, he told me, were erecting a mill for the na- 
tion, ninety miles from Fort Wayne, which was to be completed in 
August, 1820. 

Divisions of Indian Tribes.* 

" All the Indian nations are divided into tribes or clans, after the 
manner of the Jews. The Shawaneese have four tribes, viz: — 

1. The Piqua tribe, which, they say, originated as follows:— In 
ancient times, they had a large fire, which having burned down, a 
great puffing and blowing were heard in the ashes; they looked, 
and behold a man stood up from the ashes ! — hence the name 
Piqua — a man coming out of the ashes, or made of ashes. 

2. The Mequachake tribe, which signifies a fat man filled; a 
man made perfect, so that nothing is wanting. This tribe has the 
priesthood. They perform the sacrifices and all the religious cer- 
emonies of the nation. None but certain persons of this tribe, are 
permitted even to touch the sacrifices. 

3. The Kiskapocoke tribe. The celebrated prophet Elsquata- 
way, and Tecumseh his brother, belonged to this tribe. They 
were always inclined to war, and gave much trouble to the nation. 
They finally separated, and took up their residence at Greenville , 
in this State, in 1806, since which time their history is generally 
known. In the late war, they lost twenty-two warriors in battle, 
and are quite reduced in numbers. They have now removed to 
their former place of residence at Tippecanoe. 

4. The Chillicothe tribe. Chillicothe has no definite mean- 
ing; it is a place of residence." 

Religion. 

" The Indians generally believe that they were created on this 
continent. The Shawaneese only have a tradition to the contrary; 
but it is somewhat doubtful whether the deliverance, which they 



* See Archeologia, p. 271. &c. 
13 



98 



APPENDIX. 



celebrate, has any other reference than to the crossing of some 
great river, or an arm of the sea ; — that the Indians are descen- 
ded from the people of the East, is, I think, incontestably proved, 
by their religious rites, ceremonies, and sacrifices. Considering 
the great length of time which must have intervened since they 
left that country, we are astonished at the resemblances which still 
exist between them. 

"Before attending treaties, great councils, or any other important 
national business, they always sacrifice, in order to obtain the good 
will of the Great Spirit. On a visit to the President of the United 
States, some years since, having arrived near Wheeling, they re- 
tired into the forest, encamped, killed game, and prepared the 
sacrifice. While singing, they heard, as they believed, the voice 
of the Great Spirit distinctly. They set forward on their journey 
with alacrity, anticipating the best success in their business. 

War. 

" War is always determined on by the head warrior of the town, 
which feels itself to have been injured. He lifts the war hatchet 
or club; but as soon as it is taken up, the head chief and counsel- 
lors may interpose, and by their prudent counsel, stop it. If the 
head warrior persists and goes out, he is followed by all who are 
for war. It is seldom a town is unanimous: the nation never is; 
and within the memory of the oldest men among them, it is not 
recollected that more than one half of the nation have been for 
war at the same time; or, as they express it, " taken the walk talk." 
The head warrior, when he marches, gives notice where he shall 
encamp, and sets out with one or two only; he fires his .gun, and 
sets up the war whoop. This is repeated by all who follow him, 
and they are, during one or two nights, marching off. Parched 
corn and jerked meat, constitute the warriors' provisions, while on 
the expedition. 

Peace. 

" Peace is determined on and concluded by the head chief, and 
his counsellors ; and «' peace talks" are always addressed to them. 



APPENDIX. 



99 



In some cases, when the resentment of the warriors runs high, the 
chief and his counsellors have been much embarrassed. 

Criminal Laws. — Murder. 

il If murder be committed, the family of the deceased; only, have 
the right of taking satisfaction; they collect, consult, and decree.* 
The rulers of a town, or of a nation, have nothing to do or say in 
the business. The relations of the deceased person consult first 
among themselves, and if the case is clear, and their family not 
likely to suffer by the division, they determine on the case defi- 
nitely. When their tribe may be affected by it, or in a doubtful 
case, or an old claim for satisfaction, the family consult the tribe, 
and when they have resolved on having redress, they take the 
guilty, if he is to be found, and if he flies, they take the nearest of 
kin. In some cases, the family who have done the injury, prom- 
ise reparation; and in that case, they are allowed a reasonable time 
to fulfil their promise, and they are generally quite earnest, of 
themselves, in their endeavors to put the guilty to death, in order 
to save an innocent person. This right of judging and taking sat- 
isfaction, being vested in the family or tribe, is the sole cause why 
their treaty stipulations never have been executed. A prisoner 
taken in war, is the property of the captor, to kill or save, at the 
time of capture, and this right must be purchased. 

Adultery. 

" Adultery is punished by the family and tribe of the husband. 
They collect, consult, and decree. If they determine to punish 
the offenders, they usually divide and proceed to apprehend 
them; one half of them go to the house of the woman, and the oth- 
er to the family house of the man; or they go together, as they 
have decreed. They apprehend them, beat them severely with 
sticks; cut off their noses, and sometimes crop them; and cut off 

* The custom of the Ooeidas, in 1796, was similar to the aboye. 



100 



APPENDIX. 



the hair of the woman, which they carry home in triumph. If both 
parties escape, and those in pursuit return home and lay down 
their weapons, the crime is satisfied; if they apprehend but one 
of the offenders, and the other escape, they take satisfaction from 
the nearest of kin. This crime is satisfied in another way; if the 
parties offending absent themselves, till the yearly sacrifice is over, 
then all crimes are buried in oblivion, murder excepted; and the 
mention of them, or any occurrence which brings them into recol- 
lection, is forbidden. 

War Physic. 

" When young men are going to war, by way of preparation, they 
are put into a sweat house, made for the purpose, and remain 
there four days, and drink tea made of bitter roots. The fourth 
clay they come out, have their knapsacks ready, and march. The 
knapsack is an old blanket, and contains some parched corn, flour, 
jerked meat, and leather to patch their mocasons. They have in 
their shot bags, a charm, a protection against all ills, called the 
" war physic ," or " war medicine ," composed of the bones of a 
snake and a wild cat. The traditionary account of this physick, is, 
that in old times the wild cat or panther devoured their people; 
they set a trap for him, and caught him in it, burned him, and pre- 
served his bones. The snake was in the water; the old people 
sang, and he shewed himself; they sang again, and he shewed 
himself a little out of the water; the third time he shewed his horns; 
and they cut off one of them; he shewed himself a fourth time, 
and they cut off the other horn. A piece of these horns, and the 
bones of the wild cat, or panther, is the great war medicine !" 

Medicine men. 

Concerning this class of professional men, who are to be found 
in most, if not all, of the Indian tribes, I add to the above informa- 
tion that, which Mr. Henry has given, in his Travels among (he 
Northern and Western Indians. 



/ 



APPENDIX. iqi 

u The medical information, the diseases, and the remedies of the 
Indians, often engaged my curiosity, during the period through 
which I was familiar with these nations; and I shall take this occa- 
sion to introduce a few particulars, connected with their history. 

" The Indians are, in general, free from disorders; and an instance 
of their being subject to dropsy, gout, or stone, never came within 
my knowledge. Inflammations of the lungs are among their 
most ordinary complaints, and rheumatism still more so, especially 
with the aged. Their mode of life, in which they are so much ex- 
posed to the wet and cold, sleeping on the ground, and inhaling 
the night air, sufficiently accounts for their liability to these dis- 
eases. The remedies on which they most rely, are emetics, ca- 
thartics, and the lancet; but especially the last. Bleeding is so 
favourite an operation among the women, that they never lose an 
occasion of enjoying it, whether sick or well. I have, sometimes, 
bled a dozen women in a morning, as they sat in a row, along a 
fallen tree, beginning with the first, opening the vein, then pro- 
ceeding to the second, and so on, having three or four individuals 
bleeding at the same time. 

" In most villages, and particularly in those of the Chippawas, 
this service was required of me; and no persuasion of mine could 
ever induce a woman to dispense with it. 

" In all parts of the country, and among all the nations that I have 
seen, particular individuals arrogate to themselves the art of heal- 
ing; but principally by means of pretended sorcery; and operations 
of this sort are always paid for by a present, made before they are 
begun. Indeed, whatever, as an imposter, may be the demerits of 
the operation, his reward may generally be said to be fairly earn- 
ed, by dint of corporal labor. 

"i I was once present at a performance of this kind, in which the 
patient was a female child of about twelve years of age. Several 
of the elder chiefs were invited to the scene; and the same com- 
pliment was paid to myself, on account of the medical skill for 
which they were pleased to give me credit. 

" The physician, (so to call him,) seated himself on the ground; 
and before him, on a new stroud blanket, was placed a bason of 
water, in which were three bones; the larger ones, as it appeared 
to me, of a swan's wing. In his hand, he had his shishiquoi, or rattle, 



102 



APPENDIX. 



with which he beat time to his medicine song. The sick child lay 
en a blanket, near the physician. She appeared to have much 
fever, and a severe oppression of the lungs, breathing with diffi- 
culty, and betraying symptoms of the last stage of consumption. 

"After singing for some time, the physician took one of the bones 
out of the bason ; the bone was hollow; and one end being appli- 
ed to the breast of the patient, he put the other into his mouth, in 
order to remove the disorder by suction. Having persevered in 
this as long as he thought proper, he suddenly seemed to force the 
bone into his mouth, and swallow it. He now acted the part of 
one suffering severe pain; but, presently finding relief, he made a 
long speech, and after this, returned to singing, and to the accom- 
paniment of his rattle. With the latter, during his song, he struck 
his head, breast, sides, and back; at the same time straining, as if 
to vomit forth the bone. 

" Relinquishing this attempt, he applied himself to suction a sec- 
ond time, with the second of the three bones ; and this also he 
soon seemed to swallow. 

" Upon its disappearance, he began to distort himself in the most 
frightful manner, using every gesture which could convey the 
idea of pain : at length, he succeeded, or pretended to succeed, 
in throwing up one of the bones. This was handed about to the 
spectators, and strictly examined ; but nothing remarkable could 
be discovered. Upon this, he went back to his song and rattle : 
and after some time threw up the second of the two bones. In 
the groove of this, the physician, upon examination, found and 
displayed to all present, a small white substance, resembling a 
piece of the quill of a feather. It was passed round the company, 
from one to the other ; and declared by the physician, to be the 
thing causing the disorder of his patient. 

" The multitude believe that these physicians, whom the French 
call jongleurs, or jugglers, can inflict, as well as remove dis- 
orders. They believe, that by drawing the figure of any per- 
son in sand or ashes, or on clay, or by considering any object as 
the figure of a person, and then pricking it with a sharp stick, or 
other substance, or doing in any other manner, that which is done 
to a living body, would cause pain or injury: the individual repre- 
sented, or supposed to be represented, will suffer accordingly. 



APPENDIX. 



103 



On the other hand, the mischief being done, another physician, of 
equal pretensions, can, by suction, remove it. Unfortunately, 
however, the operations which I have described were not suc- 
cessful, in the instance referred to ; for, on the day after they had 
taken place, the girl died. 

" With regard to flesh wounds, the Indians certainly effect as- 
tonishing cures. Here, as above, much that is fantastic occurs, 
but the success of their practice evinces something solid. 

" At the Saut of St. Mary's, I knew a man, who, in the result of a 
quarrel, received the stroke of an axe in his side. The blow was 
so violent, and the axe driven so deep, that the wretch who held 
it could not withdraw it, but left it in the wound, and fled. Short- 
ly after, the man was found, and brought into the fort, where sev- 
eral other Indians came to his assistance. Among these, one, who 
was a physician, immediately withdrew, in order to fetch his pen- 
egusan, or medicine bag, with which he soon returned. The eyes 
of the sufferer were fixed, his teeth closed, and his case apparent- 
ly desperate. 

" The physician took from his bag a small portion of a very white 
substance, resembling that of a bone ; this he scraped into a little 
water, and forcing open the jaws of the patient with a stick, he 
poured the mixture down his throat. What followed was, that in 
a very short space of time, the wounded man moved his eyes ; 
and beginning to vomit, threw up a small lump of clotted blood. 

" The physician now, and not before, examined the wound, from 
which I could see the breath escape, and from which a part of the 
omentum depended. This the physician did not set about to re- 
store to its place ; but, cutting it away, minced it into small pieces, 
and made his patient swallow it. 

" The man was then carried to his lodge, where I visited him 
daily. By the sixth day, he was able to walk about ; and within 
a month he grew quite well, except that he was troubled with a 
cough. Twenty years after his misfortune, he was still alive. 

** Another man, being on his wintering-ground, and from home, 
hunting beaver, was crossing a lake, covered with smooth ice, 
with two beavers on his back, when his foot slipped, and he fell. 
At his side, in his belt, was his axe, the blade of which came up- 
on the joint of his wrist ; and the weight of his body coming upon 



104 



APPENDIX. 



the blade, his hand was completely separated from his arm, with 
the exception of a small piece of the skin. He had to walk three 
miles to his lodge, which was thus far away. The skin, which 
alone retained his hand to his arm, he cut through, with the same 
axe which had done the rest ; and fortunately having on a shirt, 
he took it off, tore it up, and made a strong ligature above the 
wrist, so as in some measure to avoid the loss of blood. On reach- 
ing his lodge, he cured the wound himself, by the mere use of 
simples. I was a witness to its perfect healing. 

" I have said, that these physicians, jugglers, or practitioners of 
pretended sorcery, are supposed to be capable of inflicting diseas- 
es ; and I may add, that they are sometimes themselves sufferers 
on this account. In one instance, I saw one of them killed, by a 
man who charged him with having brought his brother to death, 
by malefic arts. The accuser, in his rage, thrust his knife into 
the bowels of the accused, and ripped them open. The latter 
caught them in his arms, and thus walked towards his lodge, gath- 
ering them up from time to time, as they escaped his hold. His 
lodge was at no considerable distance, and he reached it alive, and 
died in it.*" 



Marriage. 

"A man who wants a wife, never applies in person; he sends his 
sister, mother, or some other female, to the female relations of the 
woman he names. They consult the brothers and uncles on the 
maternal side, and sometimes the father, but this is only a com- 
pliment, as his approbation or opposition is of no avail. If the par- 
ty applied to, approve the match, they answer accordingly to the 
woman, who made the application. The bridegroom then pro- 
cures a blanket, and such other articles of clothing as he is able to 
spare, sometimes a horse, and sends them by the woman to the fe- 
males of the family of the bride. If they accept of them, the match 
is made, and the man may go to the house as soon as he choses; 
and when he has built him a house, made his crop, and gathered 

* Henry's Travels, p. 118. 



APPENDIX. 



105 



it in; made his hunt, and brought home the meat, and put all this 
in the possession of his wife, the ceremony ends; they are married; 
or, as they express it, " the woman is bound." The appellation 
is, " the woman that lives with me," or, the mother of my chil- 
dren." The law has been understood differently by some, who 
insist that when they have assisted the woman to plant their crop, 
the ceremony ends, and the woman is bound. A man seldom or 
never marries in his own tribe. 

Divorce. 

" This is at the choice of either of the parties. The man may 
marry again as soon as he will; but the woman cannot, during the 
continuance of the yearly sacrifices, which lasts about twelve days. 
Marriage gives no right to the husband over the property of his 
wife; and when they part, she keeps the children and the proper- 
ty belonging to them and to her. Not unfrequently they take 
away every thing the husband owns, his hunting equipage, only, 
excepted. 



Sacrifices and Thanksgiving. 

" The Indians have two sacrifices in each year. The principal 
festival is celebrated in the month of August; the precise time is fix- 
ed by the head Chief and the counsellors of the town, and takes 
place sooner or later, as the state of the affairs of the town, or the 
forwardness of the corn, will admit. It is called the green corn 
dance, or, more properly speaking, " the ceremony of thanks- 
giving for the first fruits of the earth." It lasts from four to 
twelve days, and in some places resembles a large camp meeting. 
The Indians attend from all quarters, with their families, their 
tents, and provisions, encamping around the council house, or house 
of worship. The animals killed for the sacrifice are cleaned, the 
heads, horns, and entrails, are suspended on a large white pole, 
with a forked top, which extends over the roof of the house. — 
The women having prepared the new corn and provisions for the 

14 



106 



APPENDIX. 



feast, the men take first some of the new corn, rub it between their 
hands, then on their faces and breasts, and they feast, the great 
Chief having first addressed the crowd, thanking the Great Spirit 
for the return of the season, and giving such moral instruction to 
the people, as he thinks proper for the time. On these occasions, 
the Indians are dressed in their best manner, and the whole nation 
attend, from the greatest to the smallest. The quantity of provis- 
ions collected is immense, every one bringing in proportion to his 
ability. The whole is cast into one pile, and distributed during the 
continuance of the feast among the multitude, by leaders, appoint- 
ed for that purpose. In former times, the festival was held in the 
highest veneration, and was a general amnesty, which not only 
absolved the Indians from all punishments for crimes, murder only 
excepted, but seemed to bury guilt itself in oblivion. There are 
no people more frequent or fervent in their acknowledgments of 
gratitude to God. Their belief in him is universal, and their con- 
fidence astonishingly strong." 

Indian ideas of the Great Spirit or of God, are very generally, 
as far as I have obtained information on the subject, similar to 
those of the ancient Athenians, whom St. Paul addressed, as wor- 
shippers of an " Unknown God and the Indians, as well as these 
Athenians, have need of Christian Teachers, to " declare to them 
this unknown God," whose true character is learned only from 
the Bible. 

S. Rep. p. 28. The view here referred to, is given in Ap- 
pendix, under the head of F. G. H. which see. 

T. Rep. p. 29. The information here referred to, will be found at 
large in Appendix B. b. 

App. U. Rep. p. 29. Gov. Clark's Letter on providing lands for 
the Delazz-ares.. 

By treaties held with the Wyandots and Delawares at St. Ma- 
ry's, in September and October, 1818, these tribes ceded to the 
United States, the former, a large part of their reservation, at Up- 
per Sandusky; the latter, all their lands in Indiana; and in ex- 



APPENDIX. 



10? 



change are to receive portions of country west of the Mississippi. 
This appears from the following letter of Governor Clark, to the 
Secretary of War, of Nov. 10, 1819. 

" Sir, 

Not until yesterday had 1 the honor of receiving your letter of 
the 24th of August, (enclosing an extract from a Treaty, and a 
copy of a letter from Gov. Cass,) on the subject of providing a 
county for the residence of the Delawares on the west side of the 
Mississippi, &c. From the delay of your letter on the rout to me, 
I fear that I am deprived of the pleasure of affording you (in time,) 
any assistance in determining on the country west of the Mississip- 
pi, most advisable to select for the permanent residence of that 
Tribe. 

One of the principal objects I had in view, in making the last 
purchase of the Osage Tribe, in 1818, of that part of their lands 
north of the Arkansaw river, and west of the Cherokee claim, was 
to enable the Government to exchange with such Indian Tribes, as 
wished to move to the west of the Mississippi, a part of the said 
purchase. I calculated on exchanging with the Shawanees and 
Delawares of the Missouri Territory, for their possessions on the 
Mississippi, above Cape Girardeau, in the event of their proposi- 
tion's receiving the approbation of the Government. 

In selecting a country for the permanent residence of the Dela- 
wares, I will venture an opinion, that a tract of country adjoining 
the Cherokee claim, and north of White river, above the white set- 
tlements, and immediately east of the old Osage boundary line, 
would be better suited to both parties, than any other tract of 
country within my knowledge. That country is mountainous, and 
will not admit of a thick population of whites; but within the tract 
there are vallies and small portions of county, very rich, well 
watered, and covered with cane, as well calculated for the conven- 
ience of the Indians, as a level country, if this tract of country 
is not approved, a part of the last purchase made of the Osage 
Tribes, embraces all the advantages which the Indians could ex- 
pect, or wish. I am told the soil is of the best quality, and lies 
beautifully." 

No information has been received on this subject later than the 
above. 



108 



APPENDIX. 



App. V. Rep. p. 30. Indiana and Illinois. 

Chicago. 

Chicago, in the State of Illinois, is on the west shore of Michi- 
gan Lake, twenty miles from its southern extremity, two hundred 
and twenty miles south of Green Bay. Fort Dearborn is on the 
south side of Chicago river, half a mile from the Lake, lat. 42° 9' 
16". The site is commanding. The buildings here are sufficient 
to accommodate two companies. This fortress is intended and 
adapted only to oppose and keep in subjection, Indians, when their 
hostile conduct renders military interference necessary. The po- 
sition of this place is bleak. Behind are extensive prairies; be- 
fore, the Lake, without a harbor for three hundred miles. The 
land, one mile wide, on the margin of the Lake, is a barren sand, 
thence a rich loam, on limestone strata. 

The Chicago river is sixty yards wide at the Fort, which is fif- 
teen miles from Des Planes river, a branch of the Illinois; thence 
thirty-five miles down the Des Planes, is its confluence with the 
Kankakee, forming together, the Illinois river. The portage from 
the Chicago to the Des Planes, is nine miles, so low as often to be 
covered by water, to a depth sufficient for the passage of loaded 
boats. 

Beside the people in the employment of the Government, there 
are at Chicago four or five Canadian Frenchmen, married to Indian 
women, with their children. The number of Indians in the imme- 
diate neighborhood, is estimated at from one thousand to fifteen 
hundred, the greater part Pottawattamies. 

The following account of the Indians, settled on White river, in 
Indiana, was verbally communicated to Rev. Mr. Sergeant, by 
Capt. Hendrick, in 1816, and by Mr. Sergeant, in a letter to the 
author of this Report, dated April 20th, 1816, while he held the 
office of Secretary of the Society for Propagating the Gospel among 
the Indians and others in N. America. 

" Dear Sir, 

I have been waiting for a long time to get Capt. Hendrick to 
write you the proposed letter. Previous to our conference meet- 



APPENDIX. 



109 



ing, he called on me, and I took down all the information he was 
able to communicate, agreeably to your request. The towns of 
Indians, he had visited, he reports in the following order. " I re- 
sided in the middle town, on White river. About twenty miles 
south, there is a town of Delawares, near the south line of their 
reservation. About sixteen miles north of the centre, there is an- 
other town. Between these two extremes there are two villages, 
making, in the whole, five towns, or villages, containing about one 
thousand souls, of Delawares, Munsees, Moheakunnuks, and Nan- 
tikokes, who are all favorably inclined towards civilization and re- 
ligion. They claim all the lands lying on the streams running into 
the White river, supposed to be one hundred miles square.* 

North, about forty miles, on a river called Mississinua, a 
branch of the Wabash, there are three villages or towns of Mia- 
mies. Still further north, on Eel river, one town of Maimies, 
(called Eel river Indians,) containing about eight hundred souls. f 
The land they own is about two hundred miles square. All the 
Indians last named, are complete Pagans, living on a small river, 
which empties into Miami of the Lakes. There is a tribe of the 
Shawanees, who are, in a small degree, inclined to hear instruc- 
tion. This town contains about five hundred souls. 

The Wyandots live on, or near, the Sandusky river, about four 
hundred souls, and own about two hundred square miles, who are 
somewhat inclined to hear instruction. Among these are many 
Delawares and Munsees. " All these places," Hendrick says, " I 
have visited. I Judge that the information is correct." 

Yours, &c. 

JOHN SERGEANT, 

Rev. J. Morse, D.D. 

Under date of March 30th, 1818, Mr. Sergeant writes as fol- 
lows : — 

Rev. and Dear Sir, 

I received your last in due season, and communicated the same 

* This was all sold in 1818, and the Delawares have now no lands east of the 
Mississippi. 

+ The Miami nation was formerly designated, " The Miami Eel river, and 
JVea tribes ;" the two latter being of the nation of the former, but living in 
separate settlements, taking the names of the rivers on which they were settled 



110 



APPENDIX. 



to Capt. Hendrick. Yesterday I obtained his answer in writing, 
and transcribe it for the information of the Society for Foreign 
Missions. 

" In 1802, a council was held at Wappecommehkoke,on the banks 
of White river, by Delawares and the delegates of the Moheakunnuk 
nation. The former then accepted all the proposals made by the 
latter, among which was civilization, of which, said the Chief, we 
" take hold with both hands." In the mean time he declared his 
dependence on his grand children; that is, that we should either 
teach them ourselves, or lead a white man by the hand, who we 
know is a good, honest man, to instruct them; that they were de- 
sirous it should take place before they die, &c. The Speaker 
was named Tatepahqsect, a principal sachem of the Delaware na- 
tion, and of the Wolf clan, and his head warrior, named Pokenche- 
lah. These, and a number of other principal men, are dead, and 
agreeable to human reasoning, I think the principal men, who hold 
the government at White river, will not readily accept such a pro- 
ject, and that, for certain reasons, I think the attempt should be 
put off, at least until next year. I will accompany such a mission 
when I see my way clear. 

" The Delawares, their number about eight hundred souls, re- 
side on the banks of White river, and the streams that flow into it. 

"The name of the principal town is Wapeminskink, or chesnut 
tree. This town lies parti}' on the north side of White river. 
The establishment* should be made, either east or west from this 
village. From conversation which took place between me and 
some of the principal men of the Delawares, three years ago, 1 
think many of them would receive such a proposal, provided my 
people should be seated near them. Their principal chief now is 
named Thahutooweele?it, or Wm. Anderson, of the clan of the Tur- 
key tribe. The names of their other principal men you will see 
in the copy of their speech annexed." 

" The Stockbridge Indians have long had a claim to a large tract 
of excellent land on, or near, the White river, a branch of the 

* It was, at this period, in contemplation to establish a mission station, some- 
where on White river, around which should be gathered the Stockbridge or 
Moheakunnuks and other remnants of Indians, for the purpose of enjoying 
the benefits of its instructions and influence. 



APPENDIX. 1 1 1 

Wabash, given them by the Miamies above one hundred years 
since. One object, among others, of the Stockbridge Indian Mis- 
sion, in years past, was, to get this title well established, which 
has been partly done by Capt. Hendrick, in the document below.* 
" A report was published in your Boston paper, about a year since, 
that "the Delawares had sold out their rights on White river,'* 
which greatly alarmed my people. They immediately wrote, by 
mail, to the Delawares, to know the truth of the report, and re- 
ceived the answer, a copy of which I shall enclose, accompanied 
by a string of Wampum.t We were also informed by a letter from 

* Thomas Jefferson President of the United States, to whom it may concern. 

Whereas it appears by the declaration of Captain Hendrick, a Chief, and 
Agent for the Delaware Indians, and is confirmed by the acknowledgment 
made to me personally by th« Little Turtle, a Chief of the Miamies. That 
the said Miamies have granted to the Delawares and Moheakunnuks and Mun- 
sees, and their descendants forever, a certain portion of their lands on White 
river, for the sole use and occupation of the said Delawares, Moheakunnuks 
and Munsees, and their descendants forever ; but under the express reserva- 
tion and condition, that neither they, the said Delawares, Moheakunnuks and 
Munsees, nor their descendants, shall ever alienate the lands to any other 
persons or purposes, whatsoever, without the consent of the said Miamies, and 
the said Chiefs before named having desired me to bear witness to their dec- 
larations and acknowledgments aforesaid. 

Now therefore, know ye, that I the said Thomas Jefferson, President of the 
United States, do testify, that the declarations and acknowledgments before 
mentioned by the said Chiefs of the Delawares and Miamies, before named, 
were made in my presence, and on my interrogation in the exact tenor before 
stated. 

Seal. In witness whereof, I have hereunto set my hand, at the 

H. Dearborn, City of Washington, on the 21st day of Dec. 1808- 

Secretary of War. Thos. Jefferson. 

t Doings of the Council at Wappecommehroke. 

White River, July 21st. 1817, 

Grand Children, the Moheakunnuks. 

Your Grand Fathers, the Delawares, beg leave to address you. 

Grand Children, We have received your speech forwarded us by Mr. John- 
son of Piqua. 

Grand Children, We gently take away the flying report, that is in your 
ears, put in by some bad person. 

Grand Children, Dont listen to any more false reports ; but hold fast the 
covenant that has existed these many years between the two nations of Wan- 
ponnoohkees. 



112 



APPENDIX. 



Mr. Johnson, the Indian Agent, that "there would be no attempt 
at present, to buy out and remove the said Indians.*" 

If nothing takes place unfavourable, I judge the Stockb ridge In- 
dians will all remove into that country in the course of eight or ten 
years. They say they must send a few families there this sum- 
mer, to take possession of the country, and satisfy the Delawares. 
As soon as this takes place, there will be an agreeable home at once, 
for a missionary, and a most excellent stand for the establishment 
you propose. f It is altogether probable, that in the course of a 
few years the Delawares from Upper Canada, and the Munsees 
from various parts, will remove to White river, probably making 
upwards of two thousand souls. The Brotherton Indians, so call- 
ed, are about to remove to this place. Some families are already 
gone. Two families of the Stockbridge Indians removed last sum- 
mer. It is expected three families will remove this summer, three 

Grand Children, Your Grand Fathers have at two different times, given 
you a seat on White river. 

Grand Children, Dont listen to false news ; but prepare in haste, and come 
and set down on the ground your Grand Fathers have given you. When you 
approach White River, you will see your Grand Fathers sitting where they 
have set these many years. 

Grand Children, You have now heard your Grand Fathers' words, which 
are candid ; that you ought to know, we shall from this time, when we rise in 
the morning, have our eyes fixed towards the way you are to come, in expec- 
tation of seeing you coming to sit down by us, as a nation. Our respects to 
our Grand Children at large, the Moheakunnuk Nation. 

WM. ANDERSON. 

Per request of the Delaware Chiefs. 
Capt. Killbeeck, 
Nalowwanpommondj 
Captain Buck, 
Pachenwowwolus, 
Lewohponnhilahy 
Lemotonouos, 
Wm. Conner, Interpreter. 

The within is a true copy from the original. 
Signed Solomon U. Hendrick, 

(Chief of the Stockbridge Indians.) 

* The whole of their lands were purchased for the government the October 
of the year following ! ! [Laws of U. S. 2d, session, 15th Congress, p. 24.] 



APPENDIX. 



JI3 



men and three women, professors of religion. Your missionary 
will have a Church at once; and perhaps the best station for mis- 
sionary exertions in the United States. It is the earnest wish of 
my people, that your society, as soon as may be, secure this 
station. 

" My people wish your Society to use their influence with the 
President of the United States, that no Commissioners should be 
appointed to buy out the Indian claim to this country. You will 
judge best how to proceed; but if the Committee of the Society 
should write to the President for his approbation and patronage of 
your proposed establishment, it might answer a valuable purpose, 

" The Delawares, who live among us, have determined to remove 
to White river, probably not till next year. They are waiting to 
sell the remainder of their lands in New- Jersey, to enable them to 
remove. B. Calvin, their principal man, who has had a liberal 
education, and is a man of good talents, wishes me to inform your 
Society, that he would wish to be employed as an Interpreter and 
school master by your society. 

"The Stockbridge Indians unitedly agreed to petition the govern- 
ment of this State, to appoint men to sell part of their townships, 
partly with a view to raise money to remove certain families to 
White river ; but it is expected their petition has failed of success.* 
The Government of this State do not feel towards the Indian rights 
to landed property, as they have always felt in the New-England 
States. They buy out the Indian title for one price, which tliey 
fix without consulting the Indians ; and sell it at another and advan- 
ced price, thus making a gain, often a large one, out of the Indians. 
The Stockbridge tribe, have a good title to their lands, and under- 
stand the value of such property, and are not willing to sell their 
" birth rights, for a mess of pottage." 

" I intend to communicate to your Society my ideas, at some 
length, concerning Missionary Establishments among the natives 
of America. At present I can state a few things in short. If 
desired, some future day, I will give some further suggestions. 

1. With regard to the Missionary; he ought to be a man of 

*It did fail. See Journal of Assembly, 1820. p. 383. 



15 



114 



APPENDIX. 



good abilities and extensive learning ; a man of prudence, and 
with all, of common sense. 

2. He ought to be instructed to learn the language of the na- 
tives. It is not so barren, but that every doctrine of the gospel 
can be communicated to them in their own language. 

3. Some books ought to be printed in their language, and chil- 
dren taught to read them. This plan is now in operation among 
the Oneidas. 

4. My people, I find, can read their own language very fluent- 
ly, when they pronounce English very indifferently. This will 
always be the case, so long as they speak their own language in 
their families. 

5. If they lose their own language, they will lose with it 
their national pride and respectability. This is the case with 
the Brotherton Indians. They have lost their language ; and are 
now, perhaps, more corrupt than any Indians in the country. 

6. Their Reservations ought to be large, and at least twenty 
miles from white or black inhabitants. 

7. Civilization and religion must go hand in hand, as I have read 
with regard to Africa. " The plough and Bible must go together." 
As soon as they can feel and taste the sweets of a civilized life, 
their disposition to hunt and wander will cease. I am decidedly 
of the opinion, that if the good people in your state, had fallen in- 
to this plan in Apostle Elliot's time, there might now have been 
large and flourishing towns of natives in the vicinity of Boston. 

It is a settled point, that they cannot flourish where white peo- 
ple are allowed to mix among them. In order, therefore, to have 
religion and civilization flourish among Indians, the societies and 
Missionaries must use their influence with the government, to 
keep them at a distance from all immoral squatters on Indian 
land. JOHN SERGEANT." 

To Rev. Drs. Morse and Worcester, Members 

of the Prudential Committee of the board of 

Commissioners for Foreign Missions. 

In a letter, dated June 29th 1818, Mr. Sergeant writes thus — 

Rev. and kind Sir, 

" About five families of my people will start for White River in 
three weeks. With the divine blessing they may arrive there 



APPENDIX. 



US" 



the beginning of September. Three male members, and four or 
five women of my church will go. It would be very desirable, if 
your Society could employ some Missionary to visit them the lat- 
ter part of October, by which time they may possibly get into a 
settled state, and it will be desirable that the sacrament of the sup- 
per should be administered to them. 

It is reported that the Indiana Government,* this season, intend 
to purchase the lands on the White river. It is my opinion, that 
they will not be able to do it, by fair means. If they should be 
able to do it by a stretch of unlawful power, the proposed plan 
will be at an end. Partly on this account, I would recommend 
that your Society employ some missionary, visiting the Ohio, or 
Indiana Territory, or some minister in the vicinity, to spend a few 
weeks among my people, and from the Chief, who is going, the 
Missionary will be able to report to your Society all necessary in- 
formation respecting your Missionary establishment. 

1 should be unwilling to have Capt. Hendrick go next spring to 
assist in your proposed plan, if it could be avoided, as I fear the 
tribe will go to destruction without him. He grows old, and at 
present, I am of the opinion, that the new chief, who is going, can 
do nearly as well. He is a very steady religious man. 

I understand the Delawares on White river are strongly averse 
to white people coming among them; therefore it is thought that a 
young man should be placed at the head of the establishment, and 
be empowered to employ some of my people, or pious Indian 
youth, in the establishment. This would be the most likely way 
to succeed. This Young Missionary would soon acquire the native 
language, which would be very popular among heathen Indians. 
I am well informed that the Tuscaroras, living near Buffalo, are 
about to remove to White river; and by a late letter from Buffalo, 
I understand a number of the Munsees will go on with my peo- 
ple. All these will be friendly to a religious establishment. 

I am, &c. JOHN SERGEANT." 

* The Government of the United States have the exclusive right to purchase 
Indian lands. The " Indiana government' ' have no authority to do what is 
here attributed to them. 



116 



APPENDIX. 



If these Indians were disposed to settle together in this place, 
why not, I ask, in some other eligible spot ? 

A letter from Mr. Sergeant on the same subject as the foregoing, 
of still later date, follows :— 

New Stockbridge, Dec. 15th, 1818. 

Rev. and Dear Sir, 

" I now enclose my journal, by which you will learn, that in Au- 
gust last, about one third of my church, and about one quarter 
part of the tribes started from this place with a view to form a set- 
tlement on White river, in Indiana. They did not get away so 
soon by a month, as they had intended ; and on that account they 
did not arrive at their place of destination before the country was 
all sold ! /* 

<e We have had direct information of the Treaty with the Indians, 
and it is reported, that " the Delawares were forced to sell, and to 
sign the Treaty;'' and that " the poor Delawares had not a friend 
to support their cause ! !" 

" The Stockbridge Indians, we understand, concluded to stop for 
the winter in a Reservation of the Shawanees, in Ohio, and to ap- 
ply to Congress to have the part of the country restored to them, 
to which they have long had a just claim. t How they will succeed, 
depends on the kind providence of God. They request your 
prayers for them. 

" Capt. Hendrick, accompanied by some faithful agent, will soon 
set out for Washington, and lay their grievances before the Gene- 
ral Government. When the truth is told to wise and good men, I 
have a strong faith, that some certain part of the country will be 
restored to them, as their undoubted right, with a good title. J 

" About three weeks after our people left this place, with their 
families, my people, hearing of the danger they were in of losing 
their lands, sent off two young men, as runners, who arrived in 

* See the Speech sent by the Delawares, to quiet the apprehensions of the 
Stockbridge Indians, p. 111. Note. What deception somewhere ! 



t|3ee p. Ill, note. 



% The application was made and failed. 



APPENDIX. 



117 



Ohio a few days before their friends. They returned on Satur- 
day evening last, and report, that they visited the Delawares. 
After delivering their speeches and information, the Delawares 
were much affected: treated them with the greatest possible friend- 
ship, and told them they should write to the President of the United 
States, and inform him how greatly they had been deceived by their 
pretended friends in Ohio and Indiana ! 

I wish your Foreign Missionary Society would, at their first 
meeting, take up the subject of praying the Government to allow 
the Indians a large and handsome reservation, and by some effec- 
tual means, prevent immoral people from getting among them, 
when they shall have settled upon it. I can, with truth, inform 
you, that among the Indian tribes in Indiana, there are white men 
who have half a dozen wives. Here are the strong holds of Satan, 
which can, and may, be broken up; if the General Government 
would remove all such people, and appoint Traders and Agents of 
good moral character, to be near the tribes. In this way, with 
the blessing of the Lord on the labors of the Missionaries, I believe 
the poor tribes might be among the happiest people in the world. 
I am clear that this cause is the Lord's. 

Yours, &c. 

JOHN SERGEANT/ 

I take the liberty here respectfully to suggest to the President, 
whether it would not be expedient, and have a conciliatory and 
good effect on the Stockbridge Indians, and on others also, white 
people as well as Indians, to consider the hard case of these Indians, 
and to grant them a portion of the lands which they claim on 
White river, with an understanding, that they shall exchange them 
for a tract some where in the N. W. Territory, which shall be 
agreeable to them, and which the Government might purchase of 
the present owners for this specific purpose? Or make them a 
grant in the first instance, in some part of the N. W. Territory. 

I have conversed with Mr. Sergeant on this subject, and he has 
suggested to me, that some course like this would satisfy the 
Stockbridge Indians. This, I think, might lead ultimately to the 
gathering together of many of the scattered remnants of tribes, in 
this Territory, so peculiarly adapted to this purpose. 



118 



APPENDIX. 



The course above recommended, it will be perceived, has 
since been substantially pursued. Under the patronage and aid of 
the Government, a purchase in this territory was made the last 
summer, (1821) as stated below, and thither these disappointed set- 
tlers on White river, with others, of different tribes in that vi- 
cinity, are intending to remove, in due time, and to settle on this new 
purchase with the rest of their tribe, and such as will accom- 
pany them.* 

Indian Civilization. 

In a letter from Mr. Sergeant, dated December 16, 1821, 
he refers to his journal sent to the Society, for propagating the 
Gospel among the Indians and others in North-America, and says, 
" There you will find a great plan in progress, to concentrate about 
five thousand of the natives in the vicinity of Green Bay, on the 
west side of Michigan Lake. My people, with a few of the Six Na- 
tions (so called) have been very successful in purchasing a large 
country there; and we understand the General Government are 
pleased, and have confirmed their title. This was a plan of Dr. 
Morse's. The means have been blessed hitherto. Means will now be 
used to obtain a law of Congress, to exclude Spirituous Liquors and. 
White Heathen from Green Bay. If the Lord in his kind overrul- 
ing Providence should prosper this plan, my people would all be 
willing to remove. In this case, there will soon be the most inter- 
esting establishment for the benefit of near twenty thousand souls 
of these heathen tribes, scattered in, what is called, the North 
West Territory, that has ever been planned. My people 
would carry with them almost all the arts of civilized life. 

" If I should live until spring, I shall be disposed to give you 
further information of this interesting plan for the benefit of the 
poor natives, who cannot flourish surrounded by a white popula- 
tion. 

* See App. p. 15, Note, and a more full account of the purchase here re- 
ferred to, wnder the head of Miscellaneous Articles . 



APPENDIX. 



119 



e * There was a colony of my people moved to Indiana about 
three years since, consisting of sixty or seventy persons, and a 
small church was formed; they then had a lawful right to a large 
territory. Before they arrived it was sold. Pains have been ta- 
ken to have it restored, but without success. They are in a very 
unpleasant situation. We feel it a duty often to pray for them. 
Our wish is to obtain their consent to remove to Green Bay next 
season. 

" I am in hopes to obtain copies of Elliot's Bible in the Indian 
language, and am of opinion, that this Bible will be understood 
by a good part of the natives in the N. W. Territory. 

" My church, about thirty in number, have for several years 
kept up the Monthly Concert for prayer, and the praying women 
meet on Thursday of every week for prayer." 

The fact that Indian Females associate for prayer, will be 
gratifying to every Christian sister; and their prayers are request- 
ed for that little band; and that such meetings may be. multiplied 
among Indians. — [Recorder, May 15, 1822.] 

I have been induced to insert here the foregoing authentic docu- 
ments, because they contain plain facts, which ought not to be kept 
back from the public, as they shew in what manner Indian rights 
have been regarded, and what is " the actual state," of the tribes 
here named, which my commission requires me to ascertain. 

The following information was received verbally from Rev* 
Isaac McCoy, a minister of the Baptist denomination, the instruc- 
tor of the school mentioned. 

" In Missasinua, sixty miles south of west from Fort Wayne, and 
one hundred and twenty north north-east of Vincennes, about the 
centre of Indiana, north and south, are about fifty lo dges of Miami 
Indians, two or three families in a lodge. They have no school 
established among them; but a dozen boys and four girls are sent 
by their parents to a school, supported by Baptists, at Fort Wayne. 
This school, at the close of the year 1821, consisted of forty- 
eight scholars, fourteen of them girls, who are said to learn faster 
than the boys, and are taught, also, to knit, spin, and sew. Of 
these scholars, sixteen are' Miamies, eighteen Potta watt amies, 



120 



APPENDIX. 



eight Stockbridge, three Shawanees, and three Ottawas. Their 
progress in learning is equal to that of white children, with like 
advantages. In eighteen months, this school increased from eight 
to forty-eight scholars. 

" Since 1820, Mr. McCoy states, a perceptible change in the 
minds of the tribes, has taken place. Considerable, and continu- 
ally increasing numbers, are already inclined, or becoming so, to 
quit their Indian habits, and to adopt those of civilized life. 

" The Pottawattamies inhabit the northern part of Indiana, 
round the southern shore of Lake Michigan. Of their lands, some 
are good, but the greater part is of a middling quality." 

Sauks, Foxes, Kickapoos, Pottawattamies, fyc. 

The following information concerning these Tribes is from 
Maj. Marston, commanding officer of Fort Armstrong, received 
in a Letter, dated at his Post, Nov. 1820. 

Rev. Sir, 

" Your letter, dated Mackinaw, June 20th, 1820, requesting me 
to give you " the names of the Indian tribes around me within as 
large a circle as my information can be extended with convenience 
and accuracy; the extent of the territories they respectively occu- 
py, with the nature of their soil and climate, their mode of life, 
customs, laws and political institutions; the talents and character 
of their Chiefs and other principal and influential men; and their 
disposition, in respect to the introduction and promotion among 
them of education and civilization; what improvements in the 
present system of Indian trade could, in my opinion, be made, which 
would render this commercial intercourse with them more condu- 
cive to the promotion of peace between them and us, and contri- 
bute more efficiently to the improvement of their moral condition; 
together with a number of particular questions to be put to the In- 
dians for their answers, or to be otherwise answered according to 
circumstances," came to hand in due time, and would have been 
answered immediately, had it been in my power to have done so, 
a* fully as I wished. 



APPENDIX. 



121 



Interview with Sauk and Fox Chiefs. 

" Soon after the receipt of your communication, I invited four of 
the principal Chiefs of the Sauk and Fox nations to my quarters, 
with a view of gaining all the information wished, or expected, 
from them; three of whom accordingly attended, when I made 
known to them, that you, as an Agent of the President, had re- 
quested certain information relating to their two nations, which I 
hoped they would freely communicate, to the best of their knowl- 
edge and belief; a6 their great father the President was anxious 
to be made acquainted with their situation, in order to be enabled 
to relieve their wants, and give them such advice from time to 
time, as they might need. 

" They replied, that they were willing and ready to communi- 
cate all the information in their power to give, relative to their 
two nations; but I soon found that when the questions were put to 
them, they became suspicious and unwilling to answer them, and 
that many of their answers were evasive and foreign to the ques- 
tions. Such information, however, as I was able to obtain, by 
putting your questions to them, follows: — 

Question to Mas-co, a Sauk Chief. What is the name of your 
nation? 

Answer. Since we can remember, we have never had any oth- 
er name than Sau-kie or Sau-hie-uck * 

Question to Masco. What its original name? 

Answer. Since the Great Spirit made us, we have had that 
name, and no other. 

Ques. to Masco. What the names by which it has been known 
among Europeans? 

Answer. The French called us by that name; they were the 
first white people we had ever seen, since the white people call- 
ed us Sauks. 

Question to Wah-bal-lo, the principal Chief of the Fox nation; 
What is the name of your nation? 

* Saukie is the singular, and Saukuck, the plural. The plural number 
of most names in the Sauk and Fox languages, is formed by the addition of 
the syllable itch. 



122 



APPENDIX 



Answer. Mus-quak-kie, or Mus-quak-kie-uck. 

Question to Wah-bal-lo. What its original name? 

Answer. Since the Great Spirit made us, we have had that 
name, and no other. 

Question to Wah-bal-lo. What are the names by which it has 
been known among Europeans? 

Answer. The French called us Renards, and since, the white 
people have called us Foxes. 

Question. Are any portion of your tribes scattered in other 
parts? 

Answer. Yes. 

Question. Where? 

Answer. There are some of our people on the Missouri, some 
near Fort Edwards, and some among the Pottawattamies. 

Question. To what nations are you related by language? 

Answer. The Sauk, Fox and Kickapoo nations are related by 
language. 

Question. Manners and customs? 

Answer. The Sauk, Fox and Kickapoo's manners and customs 
are alike, except those who have had intercourse with the whites. 
One of the Chiefs added, that the Shawanees descended from the 
Sauk nation; that at a Bear's feast, a Chief took the feet of the ani- 
mal for his portion, who was not entitled to them, (which were 
esteemed the greatest luxury) and that a quarrel ensued, in con- 
sequence of which he and his band withdrew, and have ever since 
been called the Shawanee nation. 

They acknowledged that the Sauks, Foxes, Kickapoos and 
Iowas, are in close alliance; but observed that the reason for be- 
ing in alliance with the Iowas, was, because they were a bad peo- 
ple, and therefore, it was better to have their friendship, than 
their enmity. 

Question. With what tribes can you converse, and what is the 
common language in which you converse with them? 

Answer. There are only three nations with whom we can con- 
verse, the Sauk, Fox and Kickapoo nations. By being with any 
other nation, we might learn their language; but if we never see 
them, how can we speak to them, or they to us? Is it not the , 
same with you white people? 



APPENDIX. 



123 



Question. What do you call Grand Father? 

Answer. The Delawares call us and all other Indians Grand- 
children, and we in return call them Grand-father; but we know 
of no relationship subsisting between them and us. 

Question. What are Grand-children? 

Answer. There are no tribes or nations we call Grand-chil- 
dren. 

Question. Where is the great Council fire for all the tribes, con- 
nected with your own tribes? 

Answer. We have no particular place; when we have any 
business to transact, it is done at some one of our villages. 

Question. Do you believe that the soul lives after the body is 
dead? 

Answer. How should we know? None of our people who have 
died, have ever returned to inform us. 

" No more questions were put to the Chiefs, as they appeared 
determined to give us no further information. In conversation 
with one of them afterwards, upon the subject, they give as a 
reason for declining to answer the remainder of the questions, that 
Gov. Clark had not treated them with that attention they were en- 
titled to, when last at St. Louis. This plea, however, was proba- 
bly without foundation. It is the character of these people to 
conceal, as much as possible, their history, religion, and cus- 
toms from the whites; it is only when they are off their guard, 
that any thing upon these subjects can be obtained from them. 

History. 

"I have since been informed by some of the old men of the two 
nations, that the Sauk and Fox nations emigrated from a great dis- 
tance below Detroit, and established themselves at a place called 
Saganau* in Michigan Territory ; that they have since built vil- 
lages and lived on the Fox river of the Illinois, at Mil-wah-kie] on 
the west bank of lake Michigan, on the Fox river of Green Bay, 
and on the Ouisconsin ; that about fifty years since, they removed 

* Saganau is probably derived from Sau-kie-nock, (Saukielown.') 

t Mil-wah-kie is said to be derived from Man-na-wah-kie (good land.) 



124 



APPENDIX. 



to this vicinity, where they lived for some time, and then went 
down to the Iowa river, and built large villages ; that the princi- 
pal part of both nations remained on this river until about sixteen 
years ago, when they returned to their present situation. This 
is all the information I have been able to collect from themselves , 
relating to the rise and progress of their two nations. 

Villages. 

" At present their villages are situated on a point of land formed 
by the junction of the Rock and Mississippi rivers, which they 
call Sen-i-se-po Ke-be-sau-kee (Rock river peninsula.) This land, 
as well as all they ever claimed on the east side of the Mississippi, 
was sold by them to our Government, in 1805. The Agents of 
government have been very desirous for some time past, to effect 
their removal, but they appear unwilling to leave it. 1 recently 
spoke to one of the principal Fox chiefs upon this subject, and he 
replied, that their people were not willing to leave Ke-be-saw-kee, 
because a great number of their chiefs and friends were buried 
there ; but that he wished them to remove, as they would do much 
better to be further from the Mississippi, where they would have 
less intercourse with the whites. They claim a large tract of coun- 
try on the west of the Mississippi, commencing at the mouth of the 
Upper Iowa river, which is above Prairie du Chien, and follows 
the Mississippi down as far as Des Moin river, and extends back 
towards the Missouri, as far as the dividing ridge, and some of 
them say, quite to that river. A large proportion of this tract is 
said to be high prairie ; that part of it which lies in the vicinity 
of the Iowa and Des Moin rivers, is said to be valuable. Their 
hunting grounds are on the head waters of these rivers, and are 
considered the best in any part of the Mississippi country. 

I have not been able to ascertain the extent of territory claimed 
by any other nations. 

The Sauk village is situated on the bank of the Rock river, about 
two miles from its mouth. 

The principal Fox village is on the bank of the Mississippi, op- 
posite Fort Armstrong. It contains thirty-five permanent lodges. 



APPENDIX. 



125 



There is also a small Sauk village of five or six lodges on the west 
bank of the Mississippi, near the mouth of Des Moin river, and 
below Fort Edwards; and a Fox village near the lead mines (about 
a hundred miles above this place,) of about twenty lodges; and an- 
other near the month of the Wapsipinica* of about ten lodges. 
The Sauk and Fox nations, according to their own account, which 
I believe to be nearly correct, can muster eight hundred warriors, 
and including their old men, women and children, I think they do 
not fall short of five thousand souls ; of this number about two 
fifths are Foxes ; but they are so much mixed by intermarriage, 
and living at each others villages, it would be difficult to ascertain 
the proportion of each with any great precision. 



Hunting and its fruits. 

"These two nations have the reputation of being better hunters, 
than any others who are to be found inhabiting the borders, either 
of the Missouri or the Mississippi. 

"They leave their villages as soon as their corn, beans, &c. are 
ripe and taken care of, and their traders arrive and give out their 
credit, (or their outfits on credit,) and go to their wintering 
grounds ; it being previously determined in council, on what par- 
ticular ground each party shall hunt. The old men, women, and 
children, embark in canoes ; the young men go by land with 
their horses ; on their arrival, they immediately commence their 
winter's hunt, which lasts about three months. Their traders fol- 
low them, and establish themselves at places convenient for col- 
lecting their dues, and supplying them with such goods as they 
need. In a favorable season, most of these Indians are able, not 
only to pay their traders, to supply themselves and families with 
blankets, strouding, ammunition, &c. during the winter, but to 
leave considerable of the proceeds of their hunt on hand. The 
surplus, which generally consists of the most valuable peltries, such 
as beaver, otter, &c. they take home with them to their villages, 

* Wap-si-pin-i-ca ; so called from a root of that name, which is found in 
great plenty on its shores, of the potatoe kind, and which they use as a substi- 
tute for bread. 



126 



APPENDIX. 



and dispose of for such articles, as they may afterwards find neces- 
sary. 

"In the winters of 1319—20, these two nations had five traders, 
who employed nine clerks and interpreters, with annual salaries 
of from two, to twelve hundred dollars each, (the average about 
four hundred dollars,) and forty three labourers, whose pay was 
from one hundred to two hundred dollars each per annum. These 
traders, including the peltries, received at the United States Fac- 
tory, near Fort Edwards, collected of the Sauk and Fox Indians 
during this season, nine hundred and eighty packs. 
They consisted of 2,760 beaver skins. 

922 Otter. 
13,440 Raccoon. 
12,900 Musk Rat. 
500 Mink. 
200 Wild Cat. 
680 Bear Skins. 
28,680 Deer. 



Whole number, 60,082 

The estimated value of which wasjlfty-eight thousand and eigfU 
hundred dollars. 

"The quantity of tallow, presumed to be collected from the deer, 
was two hundred and eighty-six thousand eight hundred pounds. 
The traders also collected, during the same time, from these In- 
dians, at least three thousand pounds of feathers, and one thousand 
pounds of bees wax, 

Agriculture, Crops, Manufactures, Wines. 

" They return to their villages, in the month of April, and after 
putting their lodges in order, commence preparing the ground to 
receive the seed. The number of acres cultivated by that part oi 
the two nations, who reside at their villages in this vicinity, is sup- 
posed to be upwards of three hundred. They usually raise from 
seven to eight thousand bushels of corn, besides beans, pumpkins, 
melons, &c. &c. About one thousand bushels of the corn they an- 



APPENDIX. 



127 



nually sell to traders and others ; the remainder (except about five 
bushels for each family, which is taken with them,) they put into 
bags, and bury in holes dug in the ground, for their use in the 
spring and summer. 

" The labor of agriculture is confined principally to the women, 
and this is done altogether with a hoe. In June, the greatest part 
of the young men go out on a summer hunt, and return in August. 
While they are absent the old men and women are collecting rush- 
es for mats, and bark to make into bags for their corn, &c. &c. 

"The women usually make about three hundred floor mats eve- 
ry summer ; these mats are as handsome and as durable, as those 
made abroad. The twine which connects the rushes together, is 
made either of bass wood bark, after being boiled and hammered, 
or the bark of the nettle ; the women twist or spin it by rolling it 
on the knee with the hand. Those of the able bodied men, who 
do not go out to hunt, are employed in digging and smelting lead, 
at the mines on the Mississippi. In this business a part of the wo- 
men are also employed. From four to Jive hundred thousand 
weight of this mineral is dug by them during a season ; the loss in 
smelting of which, is about twenty-five per cent. The most of it, 
however, is disposed of by them in the state in which it is dug out 
of the mine, at about two dollars per hundred. 

"About two hundred members of these tribes built a village last 
season near the mouth of Rock river. 

"I now proceed to give such further information as a years res- 
idence in the vicinity .of the Sauk, Fox, and part of the Kickapoo 
nations, and considerable intercourse with several other nations, 
has enabled me to collect. 

" In the first place it is no more than justice for me to aknowledge, 
that I am greatly indebted for much of the information contained 
in this letter, to Thomas Forsyth, Esq. Indian Agent, Mr. George 
Davenport and Dr. Muir, Indian Traders. To the first mention- 
ed gentleman I am principally indebted for an account of the man- 
ners and customs of the Chippewa, Ottawa, and Pottawattamie na- 
tions, which are similar to those of the Sauks, Foxes, and Kicka- 
poos. In addition to the information furnished by these gentlemen, 
I have long been in expectation of receiving more from Mr. Blon- 
deaUj late a sub Indian Agent, and a man of intelligence in the re- 



128 APPENDIX. 

ligion, manners and customs, of the Sauk and Fox nations ; he was 
born with the Sauks, his mother being a woman of that nation, and 
is probably more competent to give a correct account of them 
than any other man. In this, however, I have been disappointed, 
as yet, in receiving ; the expectation of receiving this document, 
has been the principal cause of the delay in answering your com- 
munication. 

Language. 

"Among your queries are the following. — What are your terms 
for Father, Mother, Heaven, Earth ? The pronouns /, thou, he ? 
In what manner do you form the genitive case and plural num- 
ber ? How do you distinguish present, past, and future time in 
the Sauk tongue ? 

No-sah, is my father. 

Co-sah, your father. 

Oz-son, his father. 

JVa-ke-ah, is my mother. 

Ke-ke-ah, your mother. 

O-chan-en-e, his mother. 

Heaven is Che-pah-nock. Earth, Ar-kee. 

I is JVeeu — thou, Keen — he, Ne-nou. 
I have not been able to ascertain the manner in which they 
form the genitive case. The plural number of most nouns is 
formed by the addition of the syllable uck, as Sau-kie, Sau-kie-uck . 
The plural of personal pronouns is generally formed by the addi- 
tion of the syllable Wah. 

Names, character, and disposition of Chiefs — manners and customs 
of the Sauks, Foxes, Pottawattamies, Ottawas, and Kickapoos. 

" The name of the principal chief of the Sauks, is Kan-nah-que , 
about forty years of age, rather small in stature, unassuming in his 
deportment, and disposed to cultivate the friendship of the whites; 
but he does not appear to possess any extraordinary capacity. 
The two next Chiefs in rank, are Mus-ke-ta-bah, (red head,) and 



APPENDIX. 



129 



Mas-co; the latter a man of considerable intelligence, but rather 
old, and too fond of whiskey to have much influence with his na- 
tion. These chiefs are all decidedly opposed to a change of their 
Condition. About a year since, this nation met with a heavy loss, 
in the death of Mo-ne-to-mack, the greatest chief that they have 
had for many years. Among other things, which he contemplated 
accomplishing for the good of his people, was, to have their lands 
surveyed and laid off into tracts for each family or tribe. He has 
left a son, but as yet he is too young to assume any authority. 

" The principal chief of the Fox nation, is Wah-bal-lo. He ap- 
pears to be about thirty. He is a man of considerable capacity, 
and very independent in his feelings, but rather unambitious and 
indolent. The second chief of this nation, is Ty-ee-ma, (Strawber- 
ry,) about forty years old. This man appears to be more intel- 
ligent than any other to be found, either among the Foxes or 
Sauks; but he is extremely unwilling to communicate any thing 
relative to the history, manners, and customs of his people. He 
has a variety of maps of different parts of the world, and appears 
to be desirous of gaining geographical information, but is greatly 
attached to the savage state. I have frequently endeavored to 
draw from him his opinion, with regard to a change of their condi- 
tion, from the savage to the civilized state. He one day informed 
me, when conversing upon this subject, that the Great Spirit had 
put Indians on the earth to hunt, and gain a living in the wilder- 
ness; that he always found, that when any of their people depart- 
ed from this mode of life, by attempting to learn to read, write, 
and live as white people do, the Great Spirit was displeased, and 
they soon died; he concluded, by observing, that when the Great 
Spirit made them, he gave them their medicine-bag, and they inten- 
ded to keep it. 

I have not had an opportunity of becoming much acquainted 
with that part of the Kickapoo nation, who live in this vicinity. 
There are two principal chiefs among them, Pah-moi-tah-mah, 
{the Swan that cries,) and Pe-can, (the Nut;) the former is an old 
man: the latter appears to be about forty. This nation has had 
considerable intercourse with the whites, but they do not appear 
to have profited much from it. They are more apt to learn and 
practice their vices, than their virtues, 

17 



130 APPENDIX. 

" The males of each nation of the Sauks and Foxes, are separated 
into two grand divisions, called Kish-co-qiiah,?md Osh-kosh: to each 
there is a head, called War chief. As soon as the first male child 
of a family is born, he is arranged in the first band; and when a 
second is born, in the second band, and so on. 

" The name of the Chief of the first band of the Sauks, is Ke-o- 
kuck. When they go to war, and on all public occasions, his band 
is always painted white, with pipe clay. The name of the second 
war Chief is Ka-cala-quoick. His band is painted black. Each of 
these Chiefs is entitled to one or two aids-de-camp, selected by 
themselves from among the braves of their nation, who generally 
accompany them on all public occasions, and whenever they go 
abroad. These two chiefs were raised to their present rank, in 
consequence of their success in opposing the wishes of a majority 
of the nation, to flee from their villages, on the approach of a body 
of American troops, during the late war; they finally persuaded 
their nation to remain, on the condition of their engaging to take 
the command, and sustain their position. Our troops, from some 
cause or other, did not attack them, and they, of course, remained 
unmolested. In addition to these, there are many petty war 
chiefs, or partizans. who frequently head small parties of volun- 
teers, and go against their enemies; they are generally those who 
have lost some near relation by the enemy. An Indian, intending 
to go to war, will commence, by blacking his face, permitting his 
hair to grow long, and neglecting his personal appearance, and also 
will frequently fast, some times for two or three days together, 
and refrain from all intercourse with the other sex. If his dreams 
are favorable, he thinks that the Great Spirit will give him suc- 
cess. He then makes a feast, generally of dog meat, (it being the 
greatest sacrifice that he can make, to part with a favorite dog,) 
when all those who feel inclined to join him will attend the feast. 
After this is concluded, they immediately set off on their expedi- 
tion. It frequently happens that in consequence of unfavourable 
dreams, or some trifling accident, the whole party will return with- 
out meeting with the enemy. 

"When they are successful in taking prisoners, or scalps, they re- 
turn to their villages with great pomp and ceremony. The party 
halt several miles from the village, and send a messenger to inform 



APPENDIX. 



131 



the nation of their success, and of the time that they intend to en- 
ter the village; when all the female friends of the party dress them- 
selves in their best attire, and go out to meet them. On their ar- 
rival, it is the privilege of these women to take from these warriors 
all their blankets, trinkets, &c. The whole party then paint them- 
selves, and approach the village with the scalps stretched on small 
hoops, and suspended on long poles or sticks, dancing, singing, and 
beating the drum; in this manner they enter the village. The 
Chiefs in council then determine, whether they shall dance the 
scalps (as they term it) or not. If this is permitted, the time is 
fixed by them, when the ceremony shall commence, and when it 
shall end. In these dances, the women join the successful war- 
riors. I have myself, seen, more than a hundred of them dancing 
at once, all painted, and clad in their most gaudy attire. 

" This manner of raising a war party, &c. is peculiar to the Sauks, 
Foxes, and Kickapoos; with the Chippewas, Ottawas, and Potta- 
wattamies, it is somewhat different. A warrior of these nations 
wishing to go against his enemies, after blacking his face, fasting, 
&c. prepares a temporary lodge out of the village, in which he 
seats himself, and smokes his pipe. In the middle of his lodge 
hangs a belt of wampum, or piece of scarlet cloth, ornamented. A 
young Indian, who wishes to accompany him, goes into the lodge, 
and draws the belt of wampum, or piece of cloth, through his left 
hand, and sits down and smokes of the tobacco already prepared 
by the partizan. After a sufficient number are collected in this 
manner, the whole begin to compare their dreams daily together. 
If their dreams are favorable, they are anxious to march immedi- 
ately; otherwise they will give up the expedition for the present, 
saying, that it will not please the Great Spirit for them to go, or 
that their medicine is not good, or that their partizan has cohabited 
with his wife. If every thing goes right, the whole body meet at 
their leader's lodge, where they beat the drum, and pray to the 
Great Spirit, to give them success over their enemies. When the 
party consists of twenty or upwards, its leader will appoint a con- 
fidential man, to carry the great medicine bag. After they are as- 
sembled at the place of rendezvous, and in a readiness to march, 
the partizan makes a speech, in which he informs them, that they 
are now about to go to war; that when they meet their enemies 



132 



APPENDIX. 



he hopes they will behave like men, and not fear death; that the 
Great Spirit will deliver their enemies into their hands, and that 
they shall have liberty to do as they please with them; but at the 
same time, if there are any among them who are fearful and faint- 
hearted, they are advised to return and remain at home. 

" Among the Ottawas, the partizan leads when they march out; 
but the warrior who first delivers him a scalp, or prisoner, leads 
the party homeward, and receives the belt of wampum. On the 
arrival of the party at the village, they distribute the prisoners to 
those who have lost relations by the enemy; or if the prisoners 
are to be killed, their spirits are delivered over to some particular 
person's relations, who have died, and are now in the other- 
world. 

" Among the Pottawattamies, it is different; all prisoners or scalps 
belong to the partizan, and he disposes of them as he may think 
proper; he will, sometimes, give a prisoner to a family, who have 
lost a son; and the prisoner, in this case, is adopted by the family, 
and considered the same as though he was actually the person 
whose place he fills. This latter practice is also observed among 
the Sauks and Foxes. 

" In addition to the grand divisions of the males, each nation is 
subdivided into a great number of families, or clans. Among the 
Sauks there are no less than fourteen tribes; each of them distin- 
guished by a particular name, generally by the name of some ani- 
mal, as, the Bear tribe, Wolf tribe, Dog tribe, Elk tribe, Eagle 
tribe, Partridge tribe, Sturgeon tribe, Sucker tribe, Thunder tribe. 
&c. 

Government. 

" Except in particular cases, all the Indian nations here mentioned 
are governed principally by the advice of their Chiefs, and the 
fear of punishment from the evil Spirit, not only in this, but in the 
other world. The only instances in which I have ever know, laws 
enforced, or penalties exacted, for disobedience of the Chiefs, by 
the Sauks and Foxes, have been, when returning in the spring from 
their hunting grounds, to their villages. The village Chiefs then 
advise the war chiefs to declare the martial law to be in force. 



APPENDIX. 



133 



which is soon proclaimed, and the whole authority placed in the 
hands of the war chiefs. Their principal object in doing this ap- 
pears to be, to prevent one family from returning before another, 
which might expose it to an enemy; or, by arriving at the village 
before the others, dig up its neighbor's corn. It is the business of 
the war chiefs, in these cases, to keep all the canoes together, and, 
on land, to regulate the march of those who are mounted, or on 
foot. One of the chiefs goes ahead to pitch upon the encamping 
ground for each night, where he will set up a painted pole, or 
stake, as a signal for them to halt; any Indian going beyond this, is 
punished, by having his canoe, and whatever else he may have 
with him, destroyed. On their arrival at their respective villa- 
ges, sentinels are posted, and no one is allowed to leave his vil- 
lage, until every thing is put in order. When all this is accom- 
plished, the martial law, of course, ceases. 



Education. 

"A great deal of pains are taken by the Chiefs and principal men, 
to impress upon the minds of the younger part of their respective 
nations, what they conceive to be their duty to themselves, and to 
each other. As soon as day light appears, it is a practice among 
the Sauks and Foxes, for a Chief, or principal man to go through 
their respective villages, exhorting and advising them in a very 
loud voice, what to do, and how to conduct themselves. Their 
families, in general, appear to be well regulated. All the labori- 
ous duties of the lodge, and of the field, however, devolve on the 
women, except what little assistance the old men are able to af- 
ford. 

" The children, both boys and girls, appear to be particularly un- 
der the charge of their mothers; the boys, till they are of a suita- 
ble age to handle the bow or the gun. Corporal puViishrnent is 
seldom resorted to for correction. If they commit any fault de- 
serving correction, it is common for their mother to black their 
faces, and send them out of the lodge; when this is done, they are 
not allowed to eat, till it is washed off ; sometimes they are kept a 
whole day in this situation, as punishment for their misconduct. 



134 



APPENDIX. 



" When the boys are six or seven j^ears of age, a small bow, with 
arrows, are put into their hands, and they are sent out to hunt birds 
around the lodge, or village; this they continue to do five or six 
years, and then their father purchases them short guns, and they 
begin to hunt ducks, geese, &c. Their father, particularly in 
winter evenings, will relate to them the manner of approaching a 
deer, elk, or buffalo; also the manner of setting a trap, and when 
able, he will take them a hunting with him, and shew them the 
tracks of different animals. To all these instructions, the boys pay 
earnest attention. 

"The girls, as a matter of course, are under the direction of their 
mothers, and she shows them how to make moggasins, leggins. 
mats, &c. &c. She is very particular to keep them continually 
employed, so that they may have the reputation of being industri- 
ous girls, which is a recommendation to the young men. 

Marriage. 

" Most of the Indians marry young, the men from sixteen to twen- 
ty generally, and the girls from fourteen to eighteen. There ap- 
pears to be but little difficulty in a young Indian's procuring him- 
self a wife, particularly if he is a good hunter, or has distinguished 
himself in battle. There are several methods of courtship. 
Sometimes the match is made by the parents, without the knowl- 
edge of the parties to be connected, but the most common mode of 
procuring a wife is as follows : 

"A} r oungman fancies a young woman. He commences his ac- 
quaintance with her by making a friend of some young man, a re- 
lation of hers, often her brother. This done, he discloses his in- 
tention to his friend, saying, that he is a good hunter, and has been 
several times to war, &c. &c. ; appealing to him for the truth of 
his assertions ; and concludes by saying, " If your parents will 
give me your sister for a wife, 1 will serve them faithfully accor- 
ding to our custom," which is till she has a child ; after which he 
can take her to his own relations, or live with those of his wife. 
During the servitude of a young Indian, neither he or his wife has 
any thing at their disposal ; he is to hunt, and that in the most in- 



APPENDIX. 



135 



dustrious manner ; his wife is continually at work, dressing skins, 
making mats, planting corn, &c. &c. Such are the modes of pro- 
curing a wife among the Sauk, Fox and Kickapoo nations ; with 
the Chippewas, Ottawas, and Pottawattamies, a wife is sometimes 
purchased by the parents of the young man, when she becomes at 
once his own property ; but the most common mode of procuring 
a wife in all these nations, is by servitude. 

" It frequently happens that when an Indian's servitude for one 
wife has expired, he will take another, his wife's sister perhaps, 
and again serve her parents according to custom. Many of these 
Indians have two or three wives, the greatest number that I have 
known any man to have at one time was five. When an Indian 
wants more than one wife, he generally prefers that they should 
be sisters, as they are more likely to agree, and live together in 
harmony. A man of fifty or sixty years old, who has two or three 
wives, will frequently marry a girl of sixteen. It but seldom hap- 
pens that a man separates from his wife. It sometimes happens 
however, and then she is at liberty to marry again. There are 
no apparent marriage ceremonies among these Indians. 



Punishment for adultery. 

"The crime of adultery is generally punished by the Pottawatta- 
mies, by the husband's biting off the woman's nose, and afterwards 
separating from her. 

Religion. 

"The Pottawattamies have a ceremony in naming their children; 
which is generally performed when they are about a month old, 
as follows : The parents of the child invite some old and respect- 
able man to their lodge in the evening, and inform him, that they 
wish him to name their child on the day following. The old man 
then engages two or more young men to come to the lodge early 
in the next morning, to prepare a feast ; this feast must be cooked 
by young men in a lodge by themselves ; no other person is per- 
mitted to enter, till it is ready for the guests, who are then, and 
not before, invited. After the feast is over, the old man rises and 



136 



APPENDIX. 



informs the company of the design of their meeting, and gives the 
child its name, which he follows with a long speech, in substance 
as follows : He expresses hope that the Great Spirit will pre- 
serve the life of the child, make him a good hunter, a successful 
warrior, &c. &c. With the Sauks, Foxes, and Kickapoos, this 
ceremony is not always regarded : they, however, in common 
with the Chippewas, Ottawas, and Pottawattamies, have a great 
number of feasts. They all make a feast of the first deer, bear, 
elk, buffalo, &c. killed by a young man ; and even the first small 
bird that a boy kills is preserved, and makes a part of the next 
feast. There appears to be a great deal of secrecy and ceremony 
in preparing these feasts. 

" Other feasts to the Great Spirit are frequently made by these 
Indians, sometimes by a single person, but oftener in companies. 
They repair to the lodge where the feast is to be made, shut them- 
selves up, and commence beating the drum, shaking the che-che- 
quon, (a gourd shell with a handful of corn in it,) singing and 
smoaking ; this is alternately continued from twelve to eighteen 
hours, during the whole time the feast is preparing. When every 
thing is ready, the guests are invited by sending to each a small 
stick or reed. As soon as they arrive, they seat themselves in a 
circle on the ground, in the middle of the lodge, when one of the 
guests places before each person a wooden bowl, with his propor- 
tion of the feast, and they immediately commence eating. When 
each man's proportion is eaten, the bones are collected and put 
into a wooden bowl, and afterwards thrown into the river, or 
burnt. The whole of the feast must be eaten. If any one cannot 
eat his part of it, he passes his dish, with a piece of tobacco, to his 
neighbor, and he eats it, and the guests then retire. Those who 
make a feast, never eat any part of it themselves. They say they 
give their part of it to the Great Spirit. They always leave some 
consecrated tobacco, which they afterwards bury, and which con- 
cludes the feast. 

"The women of these nations are very particular to remove from 
their lodges, to one erected for that particular purpose, at such 
seasons as were customarily observed by Jewish women, accord- 
ing to the law of Moses. No article of furniture used in this 
lodge is ever used in any other, not even the steel and flint, with 



APPENDIX, 



137 



which they strike fire. No Indian ever approaches this lodge, 
while a woman occupies it, and should a white man approach it 
and wish to light his pipe by the fire of a woman, while in this sit- 
uation, she will not allow him by any means to do so, saying, that 
it will make his nose bleed, and his head ache ; that it will make 
him sick. 

Burial of the dead. 

" When an Indian dies, his relations put on him his best clothes, 
and either bury him in the ground, or put him on a scaffold ; but 
the former is the most common mode of disposing of the dead. As 
soon as an Indian dies, his relations engage three or four persons 
to bury the body. They usually make a rough coffin of a piece 
of a canoe, or some bark ; the body is then taken to the grave in a 
blanket or buffalo skin, and placed in the coffin, together with a 
hatchet, knives, &c. and then covered over with earth. Some of 
the near relations usually follow the corps ; the women on these 
occasions appear to be much affected. If the deceased was a war- 
rior, a post is usually erected at his head, on which is painted red 
crosses of different sizes, to denote the number of men, women, 
and children he has killed of the enemy during his life, which 
they believe he will claim as his slaves in the other world. 

"It is frequently the case that some one of his friends will strike 
a post, or tree, and say I will speak ; he then in a loud voice will 
say, at such a place I killed an enemy, I give his spirit to our de- 
parted friend ; and sometimes he may give a greater number in 
the same manner. The friends of the deceased will afterwards 
frequently take victuals, tobacco, &c. &c. to his grave, and there 
leave it, believing that whatever they present to him in this man- 
ner, he will have in the other world. 

"An Indian always mourns for the loss of near relations from six 
to twelve months, by neglecting his personal appearance, blacking 
his face, &c. A woman will mourn for the loss of a husband at 
least twelve months, during which time she appears to be very 
solitary and sad, never speaking to any one unless necessary, and 
always wishing to be alone. At the expiration of her mourning 

18 



138 



APPENDIX. 



she will paint and dress as formerly, and endeavor to get another 
husband. 

Their ideas of the Creation of man. 

"The belief of these Indians relative to their creation is not very 
unlike our own. Masco, one of the chiefs of the Sauks, informed 
me, that they believed that the Great Spirit, in the first place, cre- 
ated from the dirt of the earth two men ; but finding that these 
alone would not answer his purpose, he took from each man a rib, 
and made two women ; from these four he says sprang all red 
men ; that the place where they were created was Mo-ne-ac, 
Montreal. That they were all one nation, until they behaved so 
badly that the Great Spirit came among them, and talked different 
languages to them, which caused them to separate and form diffe- 
rent nations : he said that it was at this place that Indians first saw 
white men ; that they then thought they were spirits. 

"I asked him how they supposed white men were made ; he re- 
plied that Indians supposed the Great Spirit made them of the fine 
dust of the earth, as they knew more than Indians. 

Their ideas of a future state. 

"They appear to entertain a variety of opinions with regard to a 
future state. A Fox Indian told me their people generally belie- 
ved, that, as soon as an Indian left this world, he commenced his 
journey for the habitation provided for him by the Great Spirit in 
the other world ; that those who had conducted themselves well 
in this life, met with but little difficulty, in finding the road which 
leads to their appointed habitation ; but that those who had beha- 
ved badly, always got into the wrong road, which was very crook- 
ed, and in which it was difficult to travel ; that they frequently 
met with broad rivers, through which they had to swim, and in 
this manner they were punished, until the Great Spirit thought 
proper to put them into the good road, and then they soon reach- 
ed their friends, and the country of their future residence, where 



APPENDIX. 



139 



all kinds of game were plenty, and where they had but little to do, 
but to dance by night, and sleep by day. He further observed 
that when young children died they did not at first fare so well. 
That originally there were two Great Spirits, who were brothers, 
and equally good ; that one of them died and went to another 
world, and has ever since been called Mach-i Man-i-to, the Evil 
Spirit ; that this spirit has a son, who makes prisoners of all the 
children that die too young to find the good path, and takes them 
to his own town, where they were formerly deprived by him of 
their brains, in order that when they grew up they might not have 
sense enough to leave him. That the Good Spirit seeing this, sent 
an Eagle to pick a hole in the head of every young child as soon 
as it dies, and makes its appearance in the other world, and to de- 
prive it of its brain and conceal the same in the ground ; that the 
child is always immediately after taken a prisoner by the Evil 
Spirit, and kept until a suitable age to travel, when the eagle re- 
turns its brains, and then, it having sense enough, immediately 
leaves the bad spirit, and finds the good road. 

" Most of these Indians say, that their deceased friends appear 
occasionally to them in the shape of birds and different kinds of 
beasts. A Fox Indian observed, one morning last summer, that 
the spirit of a certain Indian, who was buried the day before, ap- 
peared last night near his grave in the shape of a turkey, and that 
he heard the noise he made almost all night. I enquired of anoth- 
er Indian, quite an old man, if any of their people had ever re- 
turned from the dead. He replied, that he had heard of only one 
or two instances of the kind ; but that he believed they knew what 
we were about in this world. 

" No part of what I have witten is taken from books, but almost 
every thing has been drawn either from the Indians themselves, or 
from persons well acquainted with their language, manners cus- 
toms, &c. &c. On this account I presume it will be the more ac» 
ceptable. 

"The annuities paid by Government to the Sauk and Fox nations 
appear to be a cause of dissatisfaction among them, in consequence 
of their not being able to divide and subdivide the articles receiv- 
ed, so as to give every one a part. I believe that powder, flints, 
and tobacco, would be much more acceptable to them than the 



140 



APPENDIX, 



blankets, strouding, &c. which they have been in the habit of re- 
ceiving. 

" I enclose a list of the nations of Indians who inhabit the upper 
Mississippi,* and the borders of the great Lakes, showing the names 
by which they are known among Europeans and by each other , 
the latter information I have obtained principally from the Indians 
themselves. 

I have the honour to remain 

With great respect, Your obdt. servt. 

M. MARSTON, 
Bt. Maj. 5, Infy. Commandant.''' 

Interview with a Chippewa Chief. 

While at Mackinaw, I had an interview with a Chippewa chief, 
Au-to-ko-ko-ne-be, from Grindstone river, Sheguening, near Flint 
river, one hundred and seventy miles from Detroit. He was 
mourning for his mother. His face was blacked, which is the cus- 
tomary token of mourning among this and other tribes. I asked 
the number of souls in his village. In answer he handed me a 
bundle of thirty-three small sticks. This is the usual manner in 
which Indians, in this region, ascertain and communicate their 
numbers. In the same manner, similar questions were answered 
by the Ottawas atL'Abre Croche, and by the Menominees at Green 
Bay. 

Potlawattamies, Chippewas and Ottawas. 

The following information was furnished by Major Cummings, 
of the 3d Regt. Commandant at Fort Dearborn, Chicago,! in an- 
swer to questions which I gave him at Mackinaw. 

*See this list in the general table. 

tin a letter accompanying this communication Maj. C. sajs, "The Indians ap- 
pear to be suspicious,that there may be some design in proposing these questions, 
and refuse to answer. For the little information I here communicate,I am indebt- 
ed to Mr. Kinzie, who has resided many years among these Indians, as a trader. 



APPENDIX. 



141 



<4 Questions put to the Indians at Chicago with their answers. 

Quest. 1st. What is the name of your tribe ? what its original 
name ? what the names by which it has been known among Euro- 
peans ? 

Ans. There are three tribes of us joined, viz. the Pottawatta- 
mies, Chippewas and Ottawas. Since the white people were in- 
troduced among us, we are known by these names. Our tradi- 
tions go no further back. 

Quest. 2cL What is your number of males, females and chil- 
dren ? 

Ans. We cannot tell ; being so remote from each other, and no 
wars between us and our neighbors, we deem it unnecessary to 
take a census of our nations, and no individual considers it a matter 
of sufficient importance to take the trouble on himself. 

Quest. 3d. Where do you live ? the extent and soil of your ter- 
ritory? 

Ans. (by Pottawattamies.) We live on a large tract of country, 
west of Detroit, extending to the Mississippi. Our soil we care 
little about, and take but little pains to cultivate it, hunting being 
our chief employment. 

Quest. 4th. Are your tribes divided and scattered in other 
parts? and where? 

Ans. Not to our knowledge. 

Ques. 5th. To what tribe or tribes are you related by lan- 
guage, manners, and customs, or descent or compact? 

Ans. (by the Pottawattamies.) The Chippewas and Ottawas 
speak our language more correctly than any other tribes within 
our knowledge. Their customs and manners are similar to ours, 
and we are bound, by compact, to support each other in war and in 
peace. 

Indeed I know of no other way of obtaining a satisfactory knowledge of them ; 
but by a long residence in their country. Their jealousy of every white man, 
particularly of every American,* is such, that they seem inclined to avoid, as 
much as possible, all intercourse with us. Nor is this to be wondered at, 
when we consider that the few whites who go among them, are generally of 
the most abandoned character, whose sole object is to defraud the poor In- 
dians of what little property they possess.' ' 

* Meaning an inhabitant of the United States. 



142 



APPENDIX. 



Quest. 6th. Have you any tradition of your ancestors, and of 
your descent, as a tribe? 

Ans. We have none. We know not when our ancestors first 
came into this country. 

Quest. 7th. With what tribes can you converse, and what is 
the common language in which you converse with them? 

Ans. The three tribes above named converse in the Pottawat- 
tamie language. 

Quest. 8th. What tribe do you call Grand-father? 

Ans. We call the Delawares our Grand-father, and sometimes, in 
derision, we call them Grand-mother. 

Quest. 9th. What tribes are Grand-children? 

Ans. The Delawares call all the tribes Grand-children. 

Quest. 10th. Where is held the great council fire of all the 
tribes connected with your tribe? At what times do you meet? 
What business do you transact? How long are you usually togeth- 
er? What are your forms of doing your public business? Do 
you open or close them with any religious ceremony? if any, what? 
Who performs the ceremony? How do you address your chiefs in 
council? By what titles? What is the badge of your tribe? 

Ans. Fifty years ago, our great council fire was kindled at the 
Miami Rapids, by the general consent of all the tribes of Indians 
then residing in the country, and has since been renewed by the 
British and Indians, at the same place. Since that period, it has 
been removed to Maiden, near Detroit, as the Americans have 
never called the Indians together, but to consult on peace. This 
fire has been left in the care of the British and Wyandots, to pre- 
vent its going out. The times of our meeting are not stated, but 
occasional. When our peace is in danger, we call on all the na- 
tions to aid us, and the British assist us with their advice, provis- 
ions, &c. 

We remain no longer together than is necessary to settle our af- 
fairs, (and that depends on the nature of the business) as our wants 
have to be supplied by our friends the British, while together. 

Our forms of transacting business are simple; we open our 
council by smoking a pipe, selected for the occasion, and we ad- 
dress the audience through a speaker, chosen for that purpose, 
first invoking the Great Spirit to inspire us with wisdom sufficient 



APPENDIX. 



143 



to enable us to give the sense of our discourse to the audience, and 
then the subject follows. 

We open our council in the name of the Great Spirit, and close 
with the same. 

We address our Chiefs and Council by the terms, Brothers, 
Chiefs, and Warriors, and lately, Young Men. 

At the commencement of the late war, when the Chiefs were 
called on to raise the hatchet against the United States, in favor of 
the British, they, (the Chiefs,) declined. The British then took 
the power from the Chiefs, and gave it to the Warriors and young 
men, who readily accepted it. Since this time they are always 
called in council. 

Our tribes take their badges from parts of some insect, animal, 
fish, or fowl; as bear, fin, tendon, &c. Those of the fish are one 
tribe; of the beast another; of the fowl another, &c. 

Quest. 11th. What ceremonies have you at the burial of your 
dead? 

Ans. These vary. We bury by putting the body under 
ground, in a coffin, or wrapped in skins; sometimes by placing it 
in trees, or standing it erect, and enclosing it with a paleing. This 
difference arises generally from the request of the deceased, or 
dream of a relative. We place with the dead some part of their 
property, believing that, as it was useful to them during the pres- 
ent life, it may prove so in that into which they are gone. 

Quest. 12th. What are your ideas of the state of the dead? 

Ans. We expect a better world than the one we leave; one 
where there is no labor; plenty of game, and where we shall join 
our departed relatives. We believe there is no end to this hap- 
piness. 

Quest. 13th. Do you believe that the soul lives after the body 
is dead? 

Ans. We do; and that it does not leave this world till its rela- 
tives and friends feast, and do brave actions, to obtain its safe pass- 
port. 

Quest. 14th. Do you believe there is a place of happiness and 
of misery ? 

Ans. We do. The happy are employed in feasting and dan- 
cing. The miserable wander about in the air, without the pleas- 
ure of feasting or dancing with their friends. 



144 



APPENDIX. 



Quest. 15th. What entitles a person to the place of happiness, 
and what condemns a person to the place of misery? 

Ans. To be entitled to the place of happiness, a man must be a 
good hunter, and possess a generous heart. The miser, the envi- 
ous man, the liar, and the cheat, are condemned to the place of 
misery." 

Indian customs. 

Devil's River falls into Fox river, about one hundred and twen- 
ty miles above its mouth in Green Bay. In passing the mouth of 
the river first named, Indians, as soon as they come in sight of it, 
drop their paddles; one begins to speak, and continues till they are 
opposi i the entrance, when they strew the water with tobacco, 
feathers, painted hair, &c. then chaunt a hymn, and resume their 
oars. 

On Illinois river, two hundred and eighty miles from its mouth, 
one hundred and twenty from Chicago, near its bank, is a large 
rock, whose top resembles the figure of a man. The Pottawatta- 
mies, passing this rock, stop and spend several hours in acts of 
devotion. 



Catholic Missionaries. 

The Rev. Father Meurain died at Praire du Rocher, forty-five 
miles below St. Louis, fifteen above Kaskaskias, on the Mississippi, 
in the year 1778. He was the last of the Jesuits in this country, 
He was ordered home ; but at the request of the Indians he re- 
turned and died with them. He was a very learned man, and has 
left a valuable Library, and a manuscript Dictionary of the Indian 
and French languages, in twenty-four volumes. He was Missiona- 
ry to the Illinois Indians, and was respected and beloved by them, 
as a very pious and faithful missionary. 

The two last Jesuit Missionaries at Mackinaw and L'Abre 
Croche, were Fathers Le Franc and Du Jaunay, who were sixty 
3'ears in this country. 



APPENDIX. 



Welsh Indians. 

Father Reichard, of Detroit, from whom I received the facts 
jnst stated, informed me at the same time, that in 1793, he was told 
at Fort Chartres, that twelve years before, Capt. Lord commanded 
this post, who heard some of the old people observe, that Mandan 
Indians visited this post, and could converse intelligibly with some 
Welsh soldiers in the British army. This hint is here given, that 
any person who may have the opportunity, may ascertain whether 
there is any affinity between the Mandan and Welsh languages. 

App. W- Rep. p. 32. 

In 1708, there lived in N. Carolina, near the settlements, and 
had intercourse with them, the following Indian tribes, viz: — 



Tuscarora, warriors, in fifteen towns, 


1,200 


Waccon, in two towns, 


120 


Maramiskeet, 


30 


Bear river, 


60 


Hatteras, 


16 


Neus, in two towns, - > 


15 


Pamlico, . - - 


- 15 


Meherring, 


50 


Chowan, - 


15 


Pasquotank, 


10 


Poteskeet, (Currituck,) 


30 


Nottaway, - 


30 


Connamox, two towns, 


25 


Jaupim * : 




Total Warriors, 


1,608 



Admit that there are five persons for each warrior, 5 

The whole number of souls would be 8,040 

It is not known that any of these Indians remain in N. Carolina, 

and but few, except the emigrant Tuscaroras, in N. York, any 

where else. 

19 



140 



APPENDIX. 



App. X. Rep. p. 32. Creek, or Muskogee Indians, 

This nation, among the most numerous on this side of the Mis- 
sissippi, has long been in high renown among white people, as 
well as Indians. It is composed of various bands, or tribes, who, 
after a series of destructive w r ars, united against the Choctaws. 
The names of these tribes were Apalaches, Alibamas, Abecas, 
Cawittaws, Conshacks, Coosas, Coosactees, Chacsihoomas, Natch- 
ez, Oakmulgees, Oconees, Okohoys, Pakanas, Taensas, Talepoo- 
sas, Weektumkas, and some others. Their union rendered them 
victorious over the Choctaws, and formidable to all the other tribes. 
Their whole number, in 1786, amounted to 17,280; of whom 5,860 
were fighting men. They are a well made, hardy, sagacious, and 
politic people; extremely jealous of their rights; and averse to 
parting with their lands. 

In 1796, Col. Hawkins was appointed superintendant of Indian 
affairs, south of the Ohio. Great praise is due to this gentleman 
for his judicious, benevolent, and persevering exertions to melio- 
rate the condition of these Indians. He spent most of his time, 
from the period above mentioned, till his death, in drawing them 
off from a savage state, and in introducing among them the vari- 
ous arts of civilized life. His successor in office, David B. Mitch- 
ell, Esq. has pursued the steps of his predecessor. Till the late 
destructive war with them, they were fast advancing in useful im- 
provements. This war has alienated them from the white people, 
and lessened their inclination to receive instruction. They, how- 
ever, now cultivate tobacco, rice, maize, potatoes, beans, peas, 
and cabbages; and raise plenty of peaches, plums, grapes, straw- 
berries, and melons. They have abundance of tame cattle, hogs, 
turkies, ducks, and other poultry. The loom, the wheel, the an- 
vil, and many other mechanical implements, are usefully estab- 
lished among them; and some of their children are now regularly 
taught reading, writing, and arithmetic. 

The country which they formerly claimed, extended from Flor- 
ida to lat. 34° N.; and from the Tombigbee to the Atlantic 
ocean; they have successively ceded most of their lands by dif- 
ferent treaties, to the state of Georgia. Their principal towns 



APPENDIX. 



147 



lie in lat. 32° and Ion. 11° 20' W. from Philadelphia. They are 
settled in a hilly, but not mountainous, country. The soil is 
fruitful in a high degree; and well watered, abounding in creeks 
and rivulets, whence they are called the Creek Indians. Their 
present number is given in the table. 

Col. Hawkins made a manuscript grammar of the Creek lan- 
guage, which is said to be in possession of Mr. Jefferson. 

Some movements were made several years since, by the Geor- 
gia Baptist Association, under the patronage of the late Gov. Ra- 
bun, to establish the means of instruction among these Indians, of 
the progress and success of which, no information has been re- 
ceived. 

For an account of the Cherokees in Georgia, and th^e neigh- 
boring States, see this App. Aa. p. 152, 

App. Y. Rep. p. 33. Florida. 

The following description of a part of East Florida, and of its 
White and Indian population, is from manuscript communications 
of the intelligent J. A. Peniere, Esq. late Indian Agent, stationed 
in this Territory, to Gen. Jackson, and the Secretary of War. 

St. John's River and its Borders. 

Picolata, 15th July, 1821. 

" I again ascended the St. Johns river, which, as it appeared' to 
me, is only a long and wide bay. At about two hundred miles 
above its mouth, I found scarcely forty dwellings on both its banks, , 
1 again went up more than fifteen miles above the last plantation 
southerly. I saw scarcely five or six Spanish families, and as ma- 
ny laboring farmers. The rest live in the greatest idleness. 
Fish, which is abundant in this bay, game, cabbage trees, milk, 
tortoises, oranges, and a little Indian corn, constitute the living of 
the half breeds, or demi Indians. 

" Seven years ago, some self styled patriots committed great rav- 
ages among the Europeans and Friendly Indians, in this part of 



148 



APPENDIX, 



Florida. Almost all the houses were burnt; the domestic animals 
killed, and the slaves carried off. The ruins seen, wherever 
there were settlements, go to prove these facts. 

" For about one hundred and fifty miles, the St. John's affords 
the finest navigation. There are constantly two fathoms of water 
from the bar or mouth, to the south-eastern extremity of Lake 
George, which is about sixty miles in circumference. 

" Here there is a shoal, where there are but four feet of water 
found, but some miles above, the arms of the river re-unite, and 
form a wide and deep channel. Steam-boats and keel-boats, of 
less than four feet draft, can, at all seasons, easily go from Sa- 
vannah to the last lake of St. Johns, (more than five hundred 
miles,) without going out to sea. Natural canals, every where 
along the Islands, or rather islets, favor this fine navigation. 

" The long bay of St. John's, which never overflows, presents 
charming views on every side. Its gentle course admits the 
growth of an infinite number of natural flowers on its banks, and 
some floating plants, whither innumerable alligators retreat for 
refuge and enjoyment. Their skins, within a few years, have 
become an object of trade. 

" Almost all the lands situated east, between St. Johns and the 
ocean, are slightly rising, and intersected by marshes, or stagnant 
creeks. Some herds, of course, are seen; some small Indian 
horses, too weak for draught; some h_ogs, and but very little culti- 
vated land. 

" Water, fit for drinking, is every where met with, at the depth 
of five or six feet. This long tract of land is almost level. I do 
not think it is twenty feet above the level of the spring tides. 
What proves this, is, that the ebb, which is seven feet at the bar 
of the St. Johns, is perceivable as high as the great lake, (lake 
Jackson,) which is two hundred miles distant. 

" These light lands are not suitable for Indian corn. The best 
produces scarcely twenty bushels per acre. Indigo, cotton, mad- 
der, sugar cane, the mulberry tree, the date, the olive, the pome- 
granate, the almond, the Madeira vine, the coffee tree, beyond the 
twenty seventh degree; the lemon, and above all, the orange 
trees, thrive well, on choosing suitable soil and exposure. The 



APPENBIX. 149 

swamps, situated on the north of the Floridas, would furnish kali 
for a rich and abundant manufacture of Soda. 

Population. 

" It appears certain, that the Floridas have never been well peo- 
pled. Some deserted plantations and ruined villages are visible, 
but according to the information I have been able to procure, this 
country has never contained ten thousand souls, white population, 
and at present does not contain more than five thousand. 

The Island of Amelia, Fernandina, and Talbot Island, 400 



Nassau river, and St. Mary's river, south, - 220 

St. Augustine, - - - - - 2,600 

St. John's bay or river, - 260 

Between the St. Johns and the ocean, - - 250 

Southern points of the Floridas, (five families,) 30 

Pensacola and its environs, - - - 800 



4,560 

" The population of the Indian Tribes, known under the col- 
lective name of Creeks, composed of six others, designated 
by the names of Mickassauky, Souhane, Santa-fe, Red Stick, 
and Echitos, in time past, furnished one thousand two hundred 
warriors, which, at the rate of five to each warrior, would give a 
population of six thousand souls. 

" The nation, known by the name of Seminoles, is composed of 
seven tribes, which bear the names of Latchione, Okleouaha, Chok- 
echaitta, Pyaclekaha, Fatehonyaha, Topkelake, and one other. 
There are besides, some remains of ancient tribes, known by the 
names of Outchis, Chias, Cana ake, but they consist of only a few 
straggling families. There is, also, on the frontiers of Georgia, 
another tribe, called Lahouita, which raised one hundred or one 
hundred and fifty warriors, under Mackintosh. Seven years 
ago they waged a barbarous warfare against the whites and Semi- 
noles, who detest them. 

M We must add to this enumeration, which will make the Indian 
population amount to more than five thousand souls, fifty or sixty 



150 



APPENDIX. 



negroes, or mulattoes, who are maroons, or half slaves, to the In- 
dians. These negroes appeared to me far more intelligent, than 
those who are in absolute slavery, and have great influence over 
the Indians. 

" I have had several conferences with three Chiefs, who prom- 
ised to bring several others with them from above Lake George. 
I waited for them ten days, in vain. They sent me word that 
they would come to Picolata. I prayed the Chief of the Chiaas, 
(Georges,) thrice, to go for them, but they have not arrived. 
They are very mistrustful, very poor, very lazy, and very great 
beggars. They love the English and Americans very little. 

I have neglected no means of contradicting reports, which were 
spread among them; for instance, that two thousand troops are 
coming by your (Gov. Jackson's^ order, to drive them off, and 
take from them their slaves and cattle. 

" There is another kind of mistrust, especially among the 
Spaniards. They say, that when the Americans become more 
numerous in the Floridas, they (themselves) will be treated as 
slaves. I think I have observed that the fear of seeing order and 
justice restored, is what they most dread. There are no school- 
masters among the Spaniards. They are very ignorant, and su- 
perstitious in the extreme. Although the greater part of the pop- 
ulation is English or American, scarcely any intelligent or indus- 
trious men are to be found. They are fugitives, deserters, or 
smugglers. It will be difficult to form a prudent determination, 
with respect to the maroon negroes, who live among the Indians, 
on the other side of the little mountains of Latchioua. Their 
number is said to be upwards of three hundred. They fear being 
again made slaves, under the American Government; and will 
omit nothing to increase or keep alive mistrust among the Indians, 
whom they in fact govern. If it should become necessary to use 
force with them, it is to be feared the Indians would take their 
part. It will, however, be necessary to remove from the Flori- 
das, this group of lawless freebooters, among whom runaway ne- 
groes will always find refuge. It would, perhaps, be possible to 
have them received at St. Domingo, or to furnish them with the 
means of withdrawing themselves from the United States. 



APPENDIX. 



151 



" There was formerly in the St. John's, two small fortifications, 
of which there still remain some traces. The first was at St. Nich- 
olas, and the second at Picolata. 

" Picolata, situated at about eighty miles from the mouth of the 
St. John's, appears to me a very suitable position for a military 
post, under command of a good officer. 

" This place is in the midst of the white population, twenty 
miles from St. Augustine, and in front of the land occupied by the 
tribe of Latchiouas. Here was formerly an English factory, pro- 
tected by a low square tower, (in which twenty soldiers might 
manoeuvre,) and a small piece of cannon. Here is still part of a 
wall, seventeen feet wide, by eighteen feet high. The establish- 
ment of a factory appears also to me indispensable, to prevent ra- 
pacious traders from carrying disorder among the Indians, by sell- 
ing them strong liquors, in what quantities they may please. It 
will be impossible to put the American laws in force among the 
Indian nations, if the Government does not establish a military 
post, with a factory, under the direction of an intelligent and judi- 
cious man. 

" The little city of St. Augustine contains many public edifices, 
which are falling into ruins. It is for the public interest to sell all 
the buildings, which are not necessary for public service. The 
fort, a barrack, the powder magazine, a prison, a court-house, and 
a dwelling for the governor, should alone be reserved." 

[Signed] J. A. PENIERE. 

The death of this Indian Agent, shortly after the above was 
written, was a serious loss to the Indians, and the country. He 
was a foreigner, of education and refinement, attached to his adop- 
ted country, particularly to Indians, for whose civilization and hap- 
piness he suggested many good plans', and devoted several years 
of his life. His loss is well supplied by his successor, Capt. John 
R. Bell, whose intention it is, with all practicable speed, to collect 
the Seminole Indians in a body, on the Appalachicola river, or some 
other eligible spot, and to plant an Education Family among 
them. 



3 52 



APPENDIX. 



App. Aa. Rep. p. 83. Cherokees. 

The body of this nation is in the north-west part of Geor- 
gia, and a few in the north-east part of Alabama, and the 
south-east part of Tennessee. The tract of country belong- 
ing to the Cherokees, before their late cessions were made to the 
United States, was 250 miles, greatest length, and from 100 to 150 
broad, comprising about 24,000 square miles, generally of an ex- 
cellent soil, in a fine healthy climate, variegated with mountains 
and plains, watered by the Tennessee, and its northern and south- 
ern branches, and the head branches of some of the rivers that 
pass into the gulf of Mexico. 

The population of this country, b}' actual enumeration of the 
Agent in 1809, was 12,395 Cherokees, half of whom were of mix- 
ed blood ; besides 583 negro slaves, and 341 whites, total 13,319. 
They have since increased to 14,500 souls. They had property 
in horses, cattle, sheep, ploughs, mills &c. estimated at about 
$57 1,500. They had at the above period, 65 villages and towns. 
A part of this tribe, about 3000, in 1818, migrated and settled on 
the Arkansaw river, in Arkansaw Territory. Others of this tribe 
had gone thither before them, and the whole number, as given by 
Gov. Clark in 1819, was 6000. In 1805, by the treaty of Tellico, 
and by another treaty of March, 1819, a part of their lands has 
been ceded to the United States ; in which were made for partic- 
ular purposes, a number of reservations of land; in the latter trea- 
ty, a reserve of a tract, equal to twelve miles square, as a school 
fund for the Cherokee nation, to be sold by the United States, in 
the same manner as they sell their own lands, and the proceeds 
vested, under the direction of the President, of the United States, 
in the most productive stocks ; the income to be applied by the 
President, in the manner which he shall judge best calculated to 
diffuse the benefits of education among the Cherokees, on this side 
of the Mississippi. By these treaties, a part of their territory, 
north of the Tennessee, and east of the Chatahouche, has beeo 
ceded to the United States.* 

* The boundaries of this cession are as follows. " Beginning on the Ten- 
nessee river, at the point where the Cherokee boundary with Madison county 



APPENDIX. 



153 



The character of the Cherokees for courage, fidelity, hospital- 
ity, and cleanliness, stands high. They are generally of a fine fig- 
ure, as to their persons, polite in their manners, and fond of learn- 
ing and improvement in the arts. They are said universally to 
believe in the being of God, call him the Great Spirit, whose at- 
tributes are goodness and power. They never profane the name 
of God in their own language. They have no words to express 
such profanity. 

In 1801, amission establishment was made among these Indians 
at Spring-place by the Moravian Brethren, of which an official 
account follows : — 

Spring Place, Cherokee Country, 13th Nov. 1819. 

To the Honourable the Secretary 

of the War Department, Washington: — 

Honored Sir, 

In answpr to the circular of the Department of War, of the 3d 
Sept. last, I. have the honor to report: — 

That the missionary establishment of the United Brethren 
among the Cherokee Indians, is located at Spring-place, the situ- 
ation of which is three miles east of the Connesaga river, near the 

in Alabama joins the same : thence, along its main channel, to the first hill 
which closes in on said river, about two miles above Hiwassee Old Town ; 
thence, along the ridge which divides the waters of the Hiwassee and Little 
Tellico, to the Tennessee river, at Tallassee ; thence, along the main channel 
to the junction of the Cowee and Nanteygalce ; thence, along the ridge in the 
fork of said river, to the top of the Blue Ridge ; thence, along the Blue Ridge, 
to the Unicoy Turnpike Road; thence, by a straight line, to the nearest 
main source of the Chestatee ; thence along its main channel, to the Chata- 
houchee; and thence to the Creek boundary." The islands in the rivers na- 
med, except Jolley's island in Tennessee, belong to the Cherokees. 

The tract equal to twelve miles square, to constitute a School Fund, 
** commences at a point formed by the intersection of the boundary line of 
Madison county, already mentioned, and the north bank of the Tennessee riv- 
er ; thence, along the said line, and up the said river, twelve miles." 



20 



APPENDIX. 



public road, which leads from Georgia to West Tennessee. The 
establishment was begun in the year 1801, at that place, and has 
ever since been continued thereat. Since the commencement of 
the establishment up to this present time, between sixty and sev 
enty youths, of both sexes, have been educated, in reading, wri- 
ting, and Arithmetic, and some have had instruction in English 
grammar and geography. Some of the female youth have been 
instructed in spinning, sewing, knitting and marking, so that at the 
present time, they can manufacture their own stockings, and those 
of their families. Even some of the boys have learned to make up 
their clothing. Formerly, when farming was carried on here, the 
boys, between schools, were employed in agricultural labors. 
This business has for some years past been interrupted for want 
of assistants. Some of the boys, have also learnt the art of draw- 
ing, to a good degree of perfection. At the present time, but five 
boys are in the school, but more are shortly expected, all of 
whom are, or will be, instructed in reading, writing, arithmetic, 
and perhaps in some more branches after they shall have obtained 
a competent knowledge of the former. Our main object being 
the preaching of the gospel, and to be instrumental in the turning 
of the natives from darkness to light — all, both old and young, are 
instructed in the christian religion, as revealed in the Bible. The 
Cherokee church here, consists now of nine members, all genu- 
ine christians, who show their faith by their deeds. Besides 
dwelling houses for ourselves and visitors, we have lately been at 
the expense of erecting a commodious meeting and school house. 
The scholars have all been, and are now maintained by the society 

The above cessions satisfy, in full, all claims of the United States, on the 
Cherokee nation, for the lands on the Arkansaw, granted in 1817 by the Uni- 
ted States to the emigrants from said nation, to the Arkansaw Territory. 

All improvements on the lands ceded as above, are to be paid for by the 
United States, according to the Treaty of July 8th 1817. The treaty stipulates, 
also, the "allowance of a reservation of 640 acres to each head of any Indian 
family residing within the ceded territory, those enrolled for the Arkansaw 
excepted, who choose to become citizens of the United States, in the manner 
stipulated in said Treaty." This article holds out to these Indians, the priv 
ileges of citizen-ship of the United States, and encouragement to avail them- 
selves of these privileges. 



APPENDIX. 



155 



of the United Brethren, and so are the missionaries. The directors 
of that society have no funds. The necessary expences are defrayed 
by semi-annual collections, made of the members of the society. At 
the present time only Mrs. Gambold* and myself are engaged in 
the work, but we are in hopes of assistance when the school may 
be enlarged. 

For a nearer developement of the funds, the plan, the prospec- 
tive extent, the aid, and of all such matters as relate to the subject, 
I beg leave to refer you to the directors of the Society of the Uni- 
ted Brethren for the Southern states, residing in Salem, Stokes 
county, North Carolina, who may, and will give you a more full 
statement. 

f have the honor to be, &c. kc. &c. 
{Signed) JOHN GAMBOLD,. 

A yearly allowance of $250 has been made to this school by the 
Department of W ar, from the general fund of the Indian Depart- 
ment, in the way of erecting buildings, &c. with a promise of pay- 
ing two thirds of all building expences which may hereafter be- 
come necessary. 

To this official letter, I subjoin the following more particular 
account of the progress of improvement under this oldest estab- 
lishment among the Cherokees, copied from the first number of 
;£ The United Brethren's Missionary Intelligencer." 

"At present only that portion of the Cherokee nation, which 
is confessedly the most indigent and degraded, continues to live 
in towns. The greater and more respectable part live on their 
plantations, and thus acquire those habits of industry and sobriety, 
which are uniformly counteracted by their congregating together. 
Hence it has become a principle of sound policy in the govern- 
ment of the United States, to employ all its influence to wean them 
from that habit, and to encourage the plantation system. The most 

* Mrs. Gambold, a lady of thorough education, and distinguished piety and 
worth, has since died. 



156 



APPENDIX. 



beneficial consequences have already resulted from it. Much will 
therefore in future depend upon the visits of the missionaries in 
the dispersed families, and this will become the chief means of 
discharging their duties to the new converts. Brother Gambold 
remarked, as a circumstance uncommonly favorable, that so great 
a portion of those who have already become believers, consists of 
mothers of families, because they, according to the manners of 
the Cherokees, exercise the principal influence on all the other 
members of a family, both as to external arrangement, and their 
way of thinking. Most striking results have already become ap- 
parent, giving well-founded hopes of an important advancement in 
the Work of the Lord among this nation. 

Respecting this divine work in the hearts of those, whom the 
Spirit of God had awakened during the above period, the verbal 
communications of Brother Steiner, and the letters of Brother 
Gambold, assured us, that it was truly astonishing and continued 
to spread. The grace of our Lord having become conspicuous 
even among such, as did not understand English, our first baptized 
Brethren and Sisters, and especially Charles and William Hicks, 
and Sister Crutchfield, were extremely active in imparting to 
them that instruction which they stood in need of, by indefati- 
gable exertions in translating the words of the Missionaries, and 
by their own experimental comments. It was edifying and pleas- 
ing to observe, how zealously they were engaged in thus assisting 
the Missionaries, both when their countrymen attended at Spring- 
Place, and when they visited each other at their homes. It even 
happened, that Major Ridge, a very sensible and respected In- 
dian, although candidly confessing, that for his own part he could 
not yet resolve to devote himself to Jesus, made himself most 
useful, by employing his talents and knowledge of both languages, 
to assist in the instruction of his own wife, who is become a true 
christian. He expressed his joy at her conversion, and added, of 
his own accord, the warmest exhortations of perseverance in the 
truth she had found, accompanied by a hope that his own time 
would likewise come. No less agreeable and remarkable was the 
circumstance, that many of those who had learnt to read at Spring- 
Place, read diligently out of the Scriptures to those who had not 
had this advantage, explaining what they had been taught, although 
they themselves seemed not yet to be partakers of the grace of 



APPENDIX. 



157 



God in their hearts. At festival seasons, and indeed on most Sun- 
days, numbers, expressing their desire to know their Saviour, and 
obtain through His merits the forgiveness of their sins, resorted 
to Spring-Place, where they were instructed as well as circum- 
stances would admit, with evident proofs of the power of the gos- 
pel. The misssionaries testified with joy and wonder, that fre- 
quently, without their being conscious of having been instrument- 
al therein, the Spirit of the Lord awakened souls, perhaps through 
the reading of the Scriptures by a child in a family, or in some 
unknown way, who then came to them, full of eagerness to be in- 
structed; and it was truly astonishing what a degree of useful and 
truly christian knowledge and conviction, had been acquired by 
some, notwithstanding the imperfection of the means of instruction. 
A proof of the hunger of souls for spiritual nourishment was af- 
forded by the zeal, with which the Indians made use of every op- 
portunity of hearing the Gospel, though most of them live thirty, 
forty, and more miles from Spring-Place. This was particularly 
remarkable at such times, when the congregation approached the 
Lord's table, and when baptisms took place, which happened sev- 
eral times in the course of the year. On the 14th of November 
1819, the new church was solemnly consecrated, during the time 
of Brother Steiner's visit, when nearly all were present who had 
hitherto been admitted to the Church, or expressed a desire to be- 
come believers, besides a number of others; and the presence of 
the Lord was sensibly felt upon that occasion. Christmas and 
Easter were no less distinguished by a powerful manifestation of 
the grace of God, and it was remarked concerning the latter festi 
val, that some distant converts, although they took all possible 
pains, and travelled more than sixty miles backwards and forwards 
to inform themselves, missed the time, because they could not 
meet with any one, even among those that were able to read, who 
understood the numerical figures, which rendered both almanacs 
and text books* useless in this respect. The letters, which 
Brother Hicks and Sister Crutchfield wrote to us, from time to 
time, bore testimony to their growth in grace and knowledge, and 
to their gratitude for the benefits conferred on them. 

* A selection of texts for every day in the year, is annually printed for the 
use of the Brethren's Congregations. 



158 



APPENDIX. 



In the course of a year, nine persons were added to the Church 
by baptism, so that our little flock of believers now consisted of 
fourteen persons, besides those, in whose hearts there was an ev- 
ident work of the Holy Spirit." 

The latest intelligence received from this establishment is in 
the subjoined letter from Rev. John Renatus Schmidt, missionary 
at Spring-Place, dated Dec. 10, 1821. 

"You have probably learnt before now, that 1 was favoured on 
the 14th of October, to baptize sister Nancy Hicks, wife of our 
brother Charles Renatus Hicks, under a lively sense of the gra- 
cious presence of our Lord. Our School increased greatly, in 
the course of the summer ; we now have nineteen children, six- 
teen boys and three girls, all of whom are hopeful subjects. On 
the Lord's day, and the festivals of the Church, I frequently have 
quite a respectable number of hearers, Indians, half-breeds, 
blacks, and sometimes whites. I cherish the fond hope, that our 
Divine Master will cause the seed, here sown in weakness, to 
spring up in his own good time, and bear much fruit." 

In 1803, the Rev. Gideon Blackburn, a respectable and en- 
terprising minister of Marysville, Tennessee, projected a plan for 
the improvement of this nation, to which he obtained the sanction 
of the government of the United States, and of the Indians them- 
selves, and in fulfilment of it, opened a school in the spring of 
1804, by appointment of the committee of missions, of the Gene- 
ral Assembly of the Presbyterian Church, which he continued 
with uncommon zeal, ingenuity and perseverance, and with great 
success, for four or five years, till his means were exhausted, and 
he was constrained to abandon his enterprise. He had at one peri- 
od, eighty scholars, who were clothed, fed, and taught, at his ex- 
pense. His labors have not been lost. They have helped to 
prepare the way for the enlarged and more permanent establish- 
ments since made. 



APPENDIX. 



159 



Establishments of the American Board of Commissioners Jor Foreign 
Missions, among the Cherokees and Choctaws. 

The public, through the medium of the numerous periodical 
works of the day, have already been made familiar with these Es- 
tablishments, probably the best organized, the most efficient, and 
successful, of any hitherto instituted for the benefit of our Indians. 
Experience has tested their wisdom. They have been models 
according to which other Societies have since made their Estab- 
lishments, and will be, doubtless, with some improvements, mod- 
els for future establishments of the kind. 

On these accounts I feel justified in extending this article to a 
considerable length, for the purpose of giving a full view of the 
plan on which these establishments are formed, of their operations 
and results. 

The first establishment made by this Board in 1817, was 
in the district of Chickamaugah, in the State of Tennessee, 
on a creek of this name, which runs into the Tennessee river. 
The village, comprising the buildings and improvements belonging 
to the establishment, received, at its commencement, the name ol 
Brainerd, from an affectionate respect to the memory of that best 
of missionaries, and of men, Rev. David Brainerd. It is on the 
southerly side of the Tennessee river, six miles distant in the 
nearest course, fifteen as the creek runs, on which it stands, 
and which is boatable to the village; 140 miles south-west of 
Knoxville, seven east of the Lookout mountain; 100 east of Hunts- 
ville; 155 north-west of Athens, in Georgia, two miles north of 
the north line of Georgia. The buildings, erected at the expense 
of the government of the United States, previous to 1819, were, a 
mission-house, a school-house, dining hall, and kitchen, and seve- 
ral smaller buildings, with a grist mill. 

The school, in May 1818, consisted of forty-seven scholars, Cher- 
okees; and was taught on the Lancastrian plan, and the progress 
of the youths in their studies, at this period, was highly credita- 
ble to themselves, and to their instructors, and very gratifying and 
encouraging to their patrons, and to the public. A considerable 
tract of excellent land is attached to this establishment, and about 
fifty acres of which were under productive cultivation. 



160 



APPENDIX. 



The beginning of August, 1821, the number of scholars belong- 
ing to the school at Brainerd was one hundred and two, sixty-two 
boys and forty girls. They have generally been healthy. Pros- 
pects, with a few exceptions, were never more flattering than at 
that time. Several of their pupils had become hopefully pious; 
and others very thoughtful and serious.* 



Regulations of the Schools, adopted Oct. 1820. 

Resolved, That the principal teachers of the schools at this 
place have charge of all the clothing, books, &c. sent out for the 
use of the mission; that all applications for any of the said articles, 
by any member of the mission family, either at Brainerd, or any 
of the local schools, be made to one of them; that they keep an 
accurate account of all articles given out, in a book reserved sole- 
ly for the purpose; and that a copy of the account of articles sold, 
or given out, to any member of the mission family, or to the lo- 
cal schools, be given to the Treasurer of this mission, to go up 
to the Treasurer of the Board, with our regular account. 

Resolved^ That we deem it important, that a female teacher be 
provided for the school at Taloney to take charge of the girls. 

Resolved, That at each general meeting, the teachers of the 
local schools shall report the whole, and the average, number of 
scholars at their several schools, — their classes, and improve- 
ment from the time of the last general meeting; and that the same 
be entered by the Secretary in a book kept for that purpose. 
Also, that each teacher report, at the same time, the general 
state and prospects of religion and civilization, at his station. 

Resolved, That our general meetings be held semi-annually, 
viz. on the Saturdays after the second Wednesdays of October and 
April, and that the order of said meeting shall be as follows: 

1st. Preparatory lecture on Saturday. 2d. Sermon and com- 
munion on the Sabbath. 3d. Examination of the schools in this 
place on Monday. 4th. Meeting for business conducted as fol- 
lows: First, read all communications, relative to the concerns of 
the missions from the Corresponding Secretary and Treasurer of 

* The Rev. Mr. Hoyt's letter. 



APPENDIX. 



161 



the Board, which may have been received since the last general 
meeting, and all resolutions passed in the meetings for business at 
Brainerd. Secondly: The teachers of the local schools make 
their reports. Thirdly: The business of each local school, in 
alphabetical order. Fourthly: General business of the mission. 

Resolved, That, with the approbation of the Prudential Com- 
mittee, there be a semi-annual vacation of three, weeks, to com- 
mence at the local schools, on the Saturdays after the first 
Wednesdays in October and April, and at this place the day after 
examination. 

Encouraging Fruits. 

The following letter, (Oct. 1820,) was sent to the Education 
Family at Brainerd, by the Chiefs at Creek Path, where the Rev. 
Mr. Butrick was establishing a school. 
" Friends and Brothers, 

" We are glad to inform you, that we are well pleased with Mr. 
Butrick, who has come forward as a Teacher to instruct our peo- 
ple. We believe he does discharge his duty; and we hope his 
coming will be of great advantage to our people. Our wish is^ 
that you may prosper throughout our nation, in your laudable 
undertaking. It is out of our power to see you, in any short 
time, on account of the National Council, and other business we 
are obliged to attend at this time. It is our wish that the school 
should continue at this place. Mr. John Brown, sen. will deliver 
this, who will present you our hands in friendship. We hope we 
shall see each other before long. We are glad to see our chil- 
dren advancing so well. We conclude with our best respects." 

Wau-sau-sey, Bear-meat, Speaker. 

The National Council met near the residence of Maj. Ridge, 
Oct. 1820. Mr. Chamberlain lodged at Maj. Ridge's, (who has 
a very promising son at Cornwall school,) and attended the Coun- 
cil — " Major Ridge says, he can never be thankful enough to the 
Missionaries for providing a way for his son to receive an educa- 
tion. He wishes him to stay at Cornwall until he gets a great ed~ 

21 



162 



APPENDIX. 



tication; and he hopes the Lord will give him a good heart, so 
that when he comes home, he may be very useful to his nation." 

The Council have made a law to compel parents to keep their 
children at school, when once entered, until they have finished 
their education, or to pay all expenses incurred for clothing, board, 
and tuition. They have also given the Superintendants of each 
Education Family, authority to take out of their schools such 
children, as they shall think proper, and, with the consent of 
their parents, put them to such trades, as are attached to their 
establishments; and when such children have learned a trade, 
they are to be furnished with a set of tools at the expense of the na- 
tion. 



Official Report of the Secretary of the American Board, to the Secre- 
tary of War, Nov. 3, 1819. 

" Our establishments, actually commenced in the Indian coun- 
try, are three; one at Brainerd, and one at Talloney, in the 
Cherokee nation; and one at Eliot, on the Yalo Busha, in the 
Choctaw nation. The establishment at Brainerd was commenced, 
or rather ground began to be cleared, in January 1817. The 
first tree for that at Eliot, was felled in August 1818. At Tallo- 
ney, the beginning was made only a few weeks ago. 

In the Cherokee nation, we have seven men and seven women 
devoted to the service for life; and three young men, of excellent 
promise, who probably will engage for life; besides hired labor- 
ers. Of the men, three are ordained missionaries; four are well 
qualified for instructing; and all are men of sterling character, 
capable, industrious and cheerfully and ardently engaged in pro- 
moting the benevolent design. The women are of like spirit and 
character. Great care, indeed, is taken, that none of a different 
spirit and character be employed. The company possesses theo- 
retical and practical knowledge of agriculture, carpentry, smithe- 
ry, coopering, tanning, tailoring, and several other trades; and to 
these various occupations expect to apply themselves, as shall 
best serve the purposes of the establishments. 



APPENDIX. 



163 



In the Choctaw nation we have five men and four women, on 
the same principle of life-engagement with those in the Cherokee; 
and four more men, now under appointment, will soon he sent to 
the station, with, probably, as many women. This company will 
not appear to disadvantage in comparison with the other. The 
Rev. Mr. Kingsbury, whose name is well known, is at the head of 
it; and one of the members is a respectable physician. 

At Brainerd, about one hundred Cherokee youths and children, 
of both sexes, are lodged, fed and instructed, and in considerable 
part clothed, at the expense of the establishment. Besides being 
taught the various branches of school education, they are exer- 
cised regularly in various labors, and made acquainted, generally, 
with the rural and domestic arts. 

The establishment at Elliot is upon the same plan, and already 
enrols about sixty Choctaw pupils. 

At Talloney, the preparations are not yet in sufficient forward- 
ness for the school to be opened. 

We have sent out two missionaries, who^are now on their way , 
to the Cherokees of Arkansaw, and are soon to be followed by 
others, for an establishment there, similar to thosQ already des- 
cribed. 

Besides the establishments in the Indian nations, we have a 
school at Cornwall, Connecticut, instituted for the purpose of 
educating youths of Heathen nations, with a view of their being 
useful in their respective countries. This school commenced in 
May, 1817. The number of pupils is at present about thirty; 
fifteen of whom are Indian youths, of principal families, belonging 
to five or six different Indian tribes; several of these last receive 
an allowance from the government; and I beg to commend them 
all to the favor of the President, as very promising youths, in a 
course of education, which will qualify them for extending influ- 
ence, and for important usefulness, in their respective nations. 
They, as well as the pupils in the schools in the nations, are 
exercised in various labors, and inured to industry; and the 
school comprises most of the branches of academical education, 
and is under excellent instruction and government. 

It is our desire, and our purpose, to proceed in this general 
system, to as great an extent as our means will admit. The na- 
tions of the South West, the Cherokees on both sides of the Mis- 



164 



APPENDIX. 



sissippi, the Choctaws, and the Chickasaws, particularly engage 
our earnest attention. We intend, as soon as possible, to com- 
mence establishments in two other districts of the Choctaw nation, 
and in the Chickasaw country. They have earnestly besought 
us; we have pledged ourselves to them; and they are impatiently 
expecting the schools. The Choctaws, especially, have not only 
testified a strong desire for the extension of our system in their 
country; but have also shewn a wonderful liberality towards the 
object, an account of which, as I am informed by the agent, Col. 
McKee, has been officially communicated to your department. 

We wish by all means, to meet these favorable dispositions as 
early, and as fully as possible; and in this we persuade ourselves 
that we shall have the kind approbation of the government. 

We are deeply and very gratefully impressed with the kind 
and liberal manner in which our plans and operations for the 
benefit of the Aborigines, have been regarded and aided by the 
government," 

Important suggestions on the organization of Education Families. 

The following is extracted from an address to the Education 
Families among the Choctaws, from the Rev. Dr. Worcester, 
while at Mayhew, among the Choctaws, in the spring of 1821, 
shortly before his lamented death. 

" The mission among the Choctaws is one. It is designed to 
occupy different stations, and to be in different divisions; — all to 
be under a great superintendency. Each primary establishment 
is to have a head, or rector, who is to be also an ordained minis- 
ter. The work, besides, is to be divided into several parts, and 
to be assigned to different persons, according to their respective 
qualifications. You are all indeed brethren, and are always to re- 
gard yourselves as such. Nevertheless there are, and must be, 
distinctions of a very important kind. So it is in the church. It 
has its distinctions of office — of labor and service — order and sub- 
ordination — distinctions according to the will of God. Besides the 
general principles of the Bible, which imply order and subordi- 
nation, there are several chapters in the Epistles on the subject. 



APPENDIX. 



165 



This order is of no less importance on missionary ground, than 
elsewhere. 

" Husbandn^ is a secular business in common life. But here 
husbandry is to be considered in a different light. The mission- 
ary farm should be regarded as the farm of the Lord; and those, 
who labor here, are to labor as for him, every day, and every 
hour. All, who are thus employed, are as really his servants, as 
the missionary. And they should shew cheerfulness in this labor; 
as for him, every day, and every hour. All, who are thus em- 
ployed, are as really his servants, as the missionary. And they 
should shew cheerfulness in this labor; as much so, as if they 
were laboring for themselves." 

In the several departments of the work, that of a steward is a 
very important one. I know not exactly how much is assigned to 
this office. It is not important to know, in reference to the re- 
marks I shall make. The Steward will be Treasurer, and have 
the management of the money. This is an important office. The 
Stewardship, in connexion with the whole concern, gives it a still 
greater importance. 

The department of husbandry is an important one, as a means 
of supporting the mission. In this respect it must become a great 
resource. The missions must depend much upon it. The chil- 
dren are to be educated in reading and writing, and all the arts of 
civilized life, on missionary ground. They are not taught at 
home. Every thing is to be learned here. They are both to be 
instructed and inured to labor. They must be made acquainted 
with husbandry and the labors of the field. This is a leading ob- 
ject. 

" You are ever to teach the children in the house — in the field — 
and by the way. You must teach them, that there is another and 
a better kingdom. This must be more sacred territory than is 
found in Christian communities. It must be here, as in Otaheite, 
where every thing assumes at once a Christian character." 

These sound observations, worthy a dying man, are to be re- 
garded as applicable to all Education Families, established among 
Indians. 



166 



APPENDIX. 



Baptist Establishment among the Miamies, Ottawas, and Cherokees. 

Extract of a letter from the Rev. Dr. Staughton, Corresponding 
Secretary of the American Baptist Board of Commissioners for 
Foreign Missions for the United States, at Philadelphia, to the 
Secretary of War, August 3d, 1819. In this letter the writer 

states, " that 

" Said Board, besides their other engagements, are endeavouring 
to carry forward the great object of Indian Reform — 

They have a valuable missionary and agent in Illinois, the Rev. 
Isaac McCoy, who appears entirely devoted to the cause of Indian 
improvement, and is making arrangements for the permanent es- 
tablishment of a school among the Indians (Miamies and Ottawas,) 
there. For him the Board would respectfully solicit an appoint- 
ment under the patronage of government, to carry forward the 
plan and operation of said school, with means to provide buildings 
&c. The object of the establishment is to teach the Aborigines 
our own language, to make them acquainted with the arts of civil- 
ized life, and to unfold to them the principles of the Christian re- 
ligion. 

Among the Cherokees the Rev. Humphrey Posey, under the 
patronage of said Board, is making arrangements for a similar es- 
tablishment, on the same general plan, and for the same benign 
purpose. 

The Board have been recently apprized, by a communication 
from his Excellency Governor Rabun, of Georiga, that an estab- 
lishment of the same nature, and on the same principles, among 
the Creeks is much to be desired. The Board will immediately 
employ measures for the accomplishment of this object. 

An Indian School has been originated in Kentuckjr, near the 
Great Crossings, and is under the patronage of the Board, the ob- 
ject of which is, to obtain Indian youth, and then give them a suit- 
able education, embracing, as a strong feature of it, an acquaint- 
ance with the arts, with husbandry, and with the economy of civ- 
ilized society; hoping that many may return to their tribes, and 
promote, still more extensively, the object of schools among them. 
This experiment the board have conceived it their duty to make. 



APPENDIX 167 

especially as a sentiment decidedly in its favor prevails among 
their western (Baptist) brethren. Eight Indian youths have been 
already several months at the institution, where progress presa- 
ges the most happy results. A young chief of the Shawanee tribe, 
and his wife, are among the number. An agent has been appoint- 
ed by the Board, to proceed to the Indian districts of country, to 
obtain more of their youths for the School. It is probable that in 
the current year, their number may be augmented to 50, possibly 
to 100. For this institution the patronage of the Government is 
respectfully and earnestly solicited." 

Progress of civilization among the Cherokees. Cherokee Schools, 

Letter from Charles Hicks, a Chief of the Nation. 

The following letter is interesting on two accounts, for the in- 
formation it contains, and as a specimen of the talents and acquisi- 
tions of its respectable author. I give it, for obvious reasons, in 
his own style, with no other alterations than the writer of it would 
make, were he to inspect it for the press. It goes to the print- 
er in his own hand writing. It is addressed to the Secretary of 
War. 

" Having received a communication through Mr. David Brown, 
on the 25th of Sept. last, by the request of Dr. Morse, which ex- 
pressed a desire of information on the state of improvements made 
by the Cherokees, east of the Mississippi; and to be transmitted 
through the Secretary of War, the information asked for, will be 
given here, only in a general view of the nation, as it would take 
considerable time to examine into the condition of each family of 
this nation. But the state of the schools, and the scholars and 
christianization, will be minute and particular. 

"It may with propriety be said, that the Cherokees had already, 
with stimulus spirits, entered the manufacturing system in cotton 
clothing, in 1800, which had taken rise in one Town in 1796 and 7, 
by the repeated recommendations of Silas Dinsmoor Esq. which 
were given to the Chiefs in Council, during his residence of -the 



168 



APPENDIX. 



three or four years of his agency among them. Those were 
repeated to the people in his excursion through different 
parts of the nation. The growth of cotton, the use of the wheel 
and cards, and the manufacturing of their own clothing, and the 
advantages of the labor and aid of the horse and plough, have 
also been found in the enlargement of their farms. The recom- 
mendations to the Cherokees made favorable impressions on 
many of them, who removed themselves from their Towns, and 
mproved separate farms. The waggon roads, which were open- 
ed through the nation a short period after, were also a stimulus to 
settling on, or near the road, which progressively improved their 
agricultural labors on their farms. But it is believed, that the 
manufacturing spirit, which had been improving in the middle 
parts of the nation, had received a check by the prices given for 
grain on those roads, which were travelled by numerous emigrants 
of the whites, to the westward; and the high prices demanded of the 
citizens of the adjoining States for live Stock, had primated the 
the interests of farming labor. But the emigrations on those roads , 
which have been opened by the natives themselves, have near- 
ly ceased ; and the high prices given for corn, and live stock, 
have subsided from their former requisition. It is now believed, 
that the manufacturing spirit that had been depressed, has taken 
a new rise in their occupations, as their domestic dependence is 
on the loom and wheel. 

" From what has already been stated, the Cherokees may be con- 
sidered in a progressive state of improvement, more particularly 
those in the middle part of this nation, for there is scarcely a fam- 
ily but what understands the use of the card and spinning wheel : 
except those in the mountainous parts of this territory, who 
have not had the same advantages, as those have had in the 
middle and lower parts of this nation. But the greater part of 
them understand the use of the wheel and cards. The arts of 
weaving and knitting have become a common part of the female 
attention of this nation. There are ten families within twenty or 
thirty miles of this place, who weave coverlets and double twilled 
cloth; a considerable number of persons besides these are provided 
with sheets, to supply the wants of their families. 



APPENDIX. 



169 



u The agricultural labor of the male part of the Cherokees, it is 
hoped, will continue to advance with progress to the improvement 
of their farms, to supply the wants of their families and live stock, 
as the aid and labor of the horse, and the advantages of the use 
of the plough are properly estimated, as their best acquisition 
to their farms. Most families cultivate from ten, twenty, thir- 
ty to forty acres of land, without the assistance of black people: 
The greatest number of whom might raise plentiful crops of corn, 
were they to get into the habit of plucking out one or two stalks in 
a hill in old ground. It is believed that there is not more than 
one eighth or ninth part of the families, but has either horses or 
cattle; and perhaps there is none without a stock of hogs. The art 
of making the spinning wheel and loom, has been acquired by five 
or six Cherokees, known in this neighbourhood; and also making 
water vessels out of wood. Besides, there are six or seven oth- 
ers, who work at the blacksmith's trade, though not to any extent, 
but only in repairing the plough, the axe, the gun, and shoeing of 
horses, some of whom even make the plough. 

"The convenience of mills is begun to be felt, and much wanted 
in different parts of the nation; as a considerable number of fam- 
ilies, that live ten or fifteen miles from any mill, go to have their 
corn made into meal; as but five are in operation in this country, 
and lie scattered about in different parts. There are six grist, 
and two saw mills owned by natives, and fourteen or fifteen grist, 
and two saw mills owned by whitemen, who are married into native 
families. It is contemplated by the nation, as soon as circumstan- 
ces will admit, to purchase tools for those who work at some me- 
chanical branch of business, as they work on their wheels and 
looms to disadvantage with their rude tools, in the coopering and 
other kinds of business. Some sets of tools for blacksmiths have 
already been furnished to some of the Cherokees, and will be con- 
tinued as circumstances may be found necessary. 

"The Cherokee Nation is governed by the acts of one National 
Council, held one a year by a national Committee, and members of 
Council, constituted in separate bodies. A reform in this has been 
attempted, and it has been thought necessary to divide the nation 
into districts, with powers to hold Councils, or Courts, in ea:h of 
them, to settle all controversies brought before the District and 



22 



170 



APPENDIX. 



Circuit Judges appointed for that purpose; from which a hope is 
entertained, that much good may result to the convenience of the 
people in the present arrangements, when they become well 
acquainted with the laws that are now, or hereafter may be 
made for their government. It is believed, that the fewer the 
laws devised the better; too great a number would but clog the 
memory. 

"The intercourse with the whites in, and through, this country is 
still very considerable, on those roads leading from Georgia to east 
and west Tennessee, and from Tennessee to Alabama. Turnpike 
gates have been erected on the federal road, to enable the compa- 
ny to keep it in good repair, under the control of the national 
Council. Other roads, that have been opened by private per- 
sons, have been regulated in the rates of tollage by the national 
Council. 

" The information obtained from the Superintendant of the 
school at Brainerd establishment of the state of education among 
the growing youths of this country, will no doubt be considered 
a flattering advancement in literature among natives, who have 
had to learn their letters in English, to pronounce them in the 
same language without understanding the meaning. And a hope 
is entertained by the Cherokees that the advancement already 
made in education, will continue and increase, as more knowledge 
of their advantages shall be acquired. The present state of the 
school (Jan. 1822,) as given by the Rev. Ard Hoyt, as follows: — 

"The school at Brainerd commenced in the spring of 1817. 
Since that time, 29 boys and 18 girls have left the school, who 
could read and write; and the present number of scholars, inclu- 
ding those absent, expected to return, is 100, which has been the 
usual number for some time, and as many as can be accom- 
modated. 

"There have been baptized here ten Cherokees, two whitemen. 
and four African adults, and twenty-three Cherokee, and four 
white children. 

" The numberof scholars at Tallony is twenty, at Creekpath eigh- 
teen. The number of adults baptized at Creekpath is seven : of 
children nine; of candidates for baptism four. 



APPENDIX. 



171 



" The buildings at Brainerd, are a dwelling house, dining room, 
kitchen, lumber house, meat house, a framed house for the girls, 
school house for the boys, framed barn, log stable, six cabins im- 
proved as dwelling houses, a grist-mill, a saw-mill, smiths' and 
carpenters 1 shops, a cabin used for a wash house, and five cabins 
occupied by the boys. 

"We have engaged this year, of Cherokees, 800 bushels of corn, 
many sweet potatoes, pumpkins, beans, kc. and a considerable 
quantity of Beef. A Cherokee, apparently full blooded, called 
on us to day, wishing to sell us 400 bushels of corn, (another Mr. 
Ross) has lately informed us, that by means of reasonable informa- 
tion, he would have supplied us with pork, and principally with 
corn. We hope, through the blessing of Divine Providence, to 
obtain most of our supplies from Cherokees another year.*" 

" The missionary school established in this nation by the United 
Brethren, fifteen or sixteen years, ago, at Springplace is now un- 
der the superintendence of the Rev. John R. Smith. The state 
of this school, from its commencement has been received from him, 
extracted from the church records, is here subjoined. 

" The number of children who have been educated by them in 
reading and writing, is eighty, sixty-one of whom have left it and 
gone, and the number that still remain under the tuition of the mis- 
sionaries, is nineteen. 

"The advances in christianization among the Cherokees, by the 
missionaries at that place, are twelve persons, who have been 
baptized, and twenty-four children, of whom six are black, and 
five white children, and twelve are communicants; four other per- 
sons are received intothe brethren's congregation from other de- 
nominations; and eight pair of marriages of the Cherokees. The 
present number of persons belonging to the brethren's Congrega- 
tion is fifteen, including three white men, married to natives; and 
the whole of the members, including the missionaries, is twenty, 
at Springplace and Eukilloggee. 

"There has been no particular information received from Elder 
Posey himself, superintendant of the mission schools at the Valley 
Towns, as to the number of scholars belonging to that establish- 



* They have purchased these articles heretofore, in the white settlements. 



172 



APPENDIX. 



ment, nor from the local school at Tensewattee, under his direc- 
tion. The only certain accounts have been obtained, a few days 
past, from one of the people who had visited Elder Posey's school 
in October last, to satisfy his own curiosity, and to see the number 
of scholars there. He stated that there were fifty-four, of whom 
thirty-two were boys. Other accounts received last summer from 
the local school at Tensewatee, state that there were upwards of 
twenty. It is reasonable to believe that there is, at these two 
schools, upwards of eighty scholars, as Mr. Posey had written to 
the chiefs in October last, after the visit already stated, that his 
schoool was increasing, and there is good reason to believe the 
present number of scholars may be relied on to contain the num- 
ber stated. CHARLES HICKS." 
The How.. John C. Calhoun, Secretary of War. 

Extracts from the Laws of the Cherokee Nation, passed by the Na- 
tional Committee and Council. 

New-Town, Cherokee Nation, } 
October 24, 1820. $ 
" Resolved by the National Committee and Council, That the 
Cherokee Nation shall be laid off into Eight Districts, and that a 
Council House shall be established in each District, for the pur- 
pose of holding Councils to administer justice in all causes and 
complaints that may be brought before it for trial. There shall be 
one Judge and one Marshal in each district, and one Circuit Judge, 
who shall have jurisdiction over two districts, to associate with the 
district judges in determining all causes agreeable to the laws of 
the nation; the marshals are to execute the decisions of the judges 
in their respective districts; the District Councils to be held in 
the spring and fall seasons, and one company of light horse to ac- 
company each Circuit Judge on his official duties in his respective 
districts, and to inflict such punishments on thieves, as the Judges 
and Councils decide agreeably to law. It shall be the duty of the 
marshals to collect all debts, and they shall be entitled to eight per 
centum for the same. The Nation to defray the expenses of each 
District Council. 



APPENDIX. 



173 



44 In case of opposition to the marshals, in the execution of their 
duty, they shall be justifiable in protecting their persons in the 
same manner, as is provided for the National light horse, by law. 
By order of the Committee, 

JOHN ROSS, President. 
Approved by the Council, 

PATH KILLER, 
CH. R. HICKS " 

A. Mc Coy, Clerk National Committee. 

Other acts provide, " That each head of a family shall pay a 
poll tax of fifty cents, and each single man under the age of sixty 
years, shall also pay fifty cents per annum, to be collected by the 
marshals, in each district, and paid into the national treasury, to 
be applied for such purposes as the National Committee and 
Council shall deem proper." 

" That a Ranger shall be appointed in each District, whose du- 
ty it shall be to receive, post and advertise, all stray horses that 
may be found in their respective districts." 

" That single white men are hereby admitted to be employed 
as clerks in any of the stores that shall be established in this Na- 
tion, by natives, on condition that the employer obtains a permit, 
and becomes responsible for the good behavior of such clerks. 

" That any person or persons whatsoever, who shall bring into 
the Cherokee Nation, without permission from the National Com- 
mittee and Council, a white family, and rent land to the same, 
proof being satisfactorily authenticated before any of the Judges in 
the District Councils, for every such offence, they shall forfeit 
and pay the sum of five hundred dollars, and receive one hundred 
stripes on the bare back." 

New-Town, October 28, 1820. 
" Whereas much inconvenience and expense have devolved upon 
the Missionaries, from their scholars running away from schools, 
and the negligence on the part of the parents to take such chil- 
dren back to the schools: Therefore, 



174 



APPENDIX. 



" Resolved by the National Committee and Council, That in future 
any scholar or scholars who are now, or may hereafter be, put un- 
der the tuition of the Missionary Seminaries, in the Cherokee Na- 
tion, by the voluntary consent of their parents or guardians, who 
shall leave such schools without permission from their teachers, 
and without just provocation, and shall return home to their par- 
ents or guardians, and after application being duly made by any 
person authorised by the superintendant of the Mission establish- 
ment, from which such scholars run away to their parents or guar- 
dians, for the return of the scholar or scholars, and the parents 
or guardians refusing to take proper measures to compel their 
children to return to school, shall be bound to pay all expenses 
incurred by their children to the Mission establishments for cloth- 
ing, board and tuition, to the superintendant of such institution. 

" And be it further resolved, That the superintendant of the 
Missionary stations, shall have the privilege to take out of their 
schools such scholars as they shall deem proper, with the consent 
of their parents or guardians, and bind them out to learn such 
mechanical trades as may be attached to their respective establish- 
ments, to the best interest of the apprentice so bound. And in 
case of the elopement of such apprentice, the same rules and 
regulations, as provided for in the foregoing resolution, shall be 
observed. The nation shall procure at the public expense, a set 
of tools for every such apprentice, who shall have faithfully served 
his time, and shall have learned a trade." 

" t Resolved, That any person who shall permit his negro or 
negroes to purchase spirituous liquors and vend the same, the 
master or owner of such negro or negroes shall forfeit and pay a 
line of fifteen dollars for every such offence, to be collected by 
the marshals within their respective districts for the national use; 
and should any negro be found vending spirituous liquors, with- 
out permission from their respective owners, such negro or ne- 
groes, so offending, shall receive fifteen cobbs, or paddles for 
every such offence, from the hands of the patrollers of the settle- 
ment or neighborhood in which the offence was committed; and 
everysettlement or neighborhood shall be privileged to organize 
a patrolling company." 



APPENDIX. 



175 



In Committee, New-Town, October 26, 1819. 
" Unanimously agreed, That school-masters, blacksmiths, mil- 
lers, saltpetre and gun-powder manufacturers, ferrymen and turn- 
pike keepers and single hirelings as mechanics, are hereby privil- 
eged to reside in the Cherokee Nation, under the following condi- 
tions, viz: Their employers procuring a permit from the Nation- 
al Committee and Council for them, and becoming responsible for 
their good conduct and behavior; and subject to removal for mis- 
demeanor. And further agreed, That black-smiths, millers, fer- 
rymen and turnpike keepers, are privileged to improve and culti- 
vate twelve acres of ground for the support of themselves and 
families, should they please to do it." 

" All citizens of the Cherokee Nation, establishing a store or 
stores for the purpose of vending merchandize, shall obtain a li- 
cense for that purpose from the clerk of the National Council, for 
which each and every person so licensed shall pay a tax of twen- 
ty dollars per annum, and no other but citizens of the Cherokee 
Nation shall be allowed to establish permanent stores within the 
natioti. No pedlar or pedlars not citizens of the Nation, shall be 
permitted to vend merchandize in the Nation without first obtain- 
ing a license from the Agent of the United States for the Cherokee 
Nation, agreeably to the laws of the United States; and each and 
every one so licensed, shall pay a tax of eighty dollars per annum 
to the treasurer of the Cherokee Nation. No person or persons, 
not citizens of the Nation, shall bring into the Nation, and sell any 
spirituous liquors; and all such person or persons, so* offending, 
shall forfeit the whole of the spirituous liquors that may be found 
in his or their possession, and the same shall be disposed of for 
the benefit of the Nation; and if any person or persons, citizens of 
the Nation, shall receive and bring into the Nation spirituous li- 
quors for disposal, and the same or any part thereof, be found to 
be the property of a person or persons not citizens of the Nation, 
and satisfactory proof be made of the fact, he or they shall forfeit 
and pay the sum of one hundred dollars, and the whiskey be sub- 
ject to confiscation as aforesaid. This decree to take effect from 
and after the first day of January, one thousand eight hundred and 
twenty, and to be strictly inforced. 



176 



APPENDIX. 



" Resolved, That any white man who shali hereafter take a 
Cherokee woman to wife, be required to marry her legally by a 
minister of the Gospel, or other authorised person, after procur- 
ing a license from the National Clerk for that purpose, before he 
shall be entitled and admitted to the privilege of citizenship. 

And in order to avoid imposition on the part of any white man, 
Resolved, That any white man who shall marry a Cherokee wo- 
man, the property of the woman so married shall not be subject 
to the disposal of her husband, contrary to her consent; anv white 
man so married, and parting from his wife without just provoca- 
tion, shall forfeit and pay to his wife such sum or sums as may be 
adjudged to her by the National Committee and Council for said 
breach of marriage, and be deprived of citizenship; And it is also 
resolved, That it shall not be lawful for any white man to have 
more than one wife, and it is recommended that all others should 
also have but one wife hereafter." 

" Resolved, That there shall be regulating parties, or light horse, 
to be employed in this Nation, to continue in service for one year. 
When any person or persons engage therein; and to consist of six 
men to each company, whose duty it shall be to suppress horse 
stealing, as well as of other property, and to protect fatherless chil- 
dren, to their father's property, which children he may have had 
by his last wife, with whom he lived at the time of his decease." 

" hi Council, Oostinaleh, } 
April 18, 1810. S> 

" 1. Beit kno'xn this day, That the various- clans or tribes which 
compose the Cherokee Nation, have unanimously passed an act 
of oblivion for all lives for which they have been indebted one to 
the other, and have mutually agreed, that after this evening the 
aforesaid act shall become binding upon every clan or tribe there- 
of. 

" 2. The aforesaid clans or tribes have also agreed, that if in 
future, any life should be lost without malice intended, the inno- 
cent aggressor shall not be accounted guilty; and should it so hap- 
pen, that a brother, forgetting his natural affections, should raise 
his hands in anger and kill his brother, he shall be accounted 
guilty of murder and suffer accordingly. 



APPENDIX. 



177 



"3. If a noan has a horse stolen and overtake the thief, and 
should his anger be so great as to cause him to let it remain on 
his own conscience, but no satisfaction shall be required for his 
life from his relative or clan, he may have belonged to. 

By order of the seven clans, 

TURTLE AT HOME, 
Speaker for the Council?^ 
BLACK FOX, 
PATH KILLER, 
TOOCHALAR, 
KEACHATALOO, 
BOAT, 
CHULEOA, 
Charles Hicks, Secretary of the Council." 

Rev. Mr. Hoyfs Report. 

Extract from the Report of the Rev. A. Hoyt, of the progress of the 
Schools in the Cherokee nation, under his superintendence, date4 
" Brainerd, Cherokee Nation, October 1st, 1821." 
" There are belonging to the two schools, taught in this place, 
ninety-six Cherokee children of both sexes, about two thirds 
males; all of whom are boarded, and many of them clothed, at the 
expense of the mission. Many promising children we have been 
obliged to reject, or put by until those now in school should be 
prepared to go out and make room for them, as we cannot accom- 
modate, and profitably teach, more than we have had. Of those, 
who attended school last year, three have finished their course 
and left the institution, and six others have left the school who 
could read and write. Twenty-four have entered the past year. 

" At the local schools we board but few scholars, not to exceed 
eight or ten at each school, and at present not more than four or 
five at Talloney. As some of the scholars who board at home have 
a great distance to walk, they are not all constant attendants, and 
the number of those who attend at all, is not so great as when the 
schools first commenced. The average number attending the two 
local schools, the year past, has been between forty and fifty. 

JPublic worship is attended at each of these schools on the Sabbath^ 

23 



173 



*§t which numbers-of the parents, as well as the children, attend, 
and some have made a public profession of the Christian religion. 

" The children of the schools continue to manifest an aptness 
to learn, a willingness to labor, and a readiness to submit to all 
the rules of the school. The Cherokees, we think, are fast ad- 
vancing towards civilized life. They generally manifest an ar- 
dent desire for literary and religious instruction." 

Extracts from a communication of J. Evarts, Esq. Secretary to 
the Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, to the Pruden- 
tial Committee of the Board, dated Knoxville, May 29, 1822, 
published in the June Herald. This is the latest information from 
the Cherokee Nation. 

Boundaries and Extent of the Cherokee Country. 

Though large tracts have been purchased by our government 
of this tribe, at different times, their territory is now supposed to 
comprise 10,000,000 acres, sufficient, did it lie regularly, to fill 
a space 150 miles long by 100 wide; which is larger than the 
three states of Massachusetts, Rhode-Island and Connecticut united, 

" As the form is irregular, however, the greatest length and 
greatest breadth are more extensive, than the numbers just men- 
tioned. From the missionary school in the Valley Towns, under 
the superintendence of the Rev. Mr. Posey, which is in the south 
west corner of North-Carolina, to the station at Creekpath, on 
the south side of the Tennessee, in Alabama, is full two hundred 
miles. The latter of these places lies about W. S. W. from the 
former. This does not give the full length of the Cherokee coun- 
try, which, I apprehend, can hardly be less tham two hundred 
and fifty miles. The greatest breadth is not far from one hundred 
and thirty, from the mouth of the Hiwassee, in a a S. S. E. direc- 
tion, to the boundary line between the Cherokees and the Creeks. 
From what has been said it will be seen, on looking upon the map, 
that the Cherokee country embraces the S. W. corner of North- 
Carolina, the N. W. part of Georgia, the N. E. part of Alabama, 
and that portion of Tennessee which lies south of the Hiwas- 
see and Tennessee rivers. Brainerd is about thirty miles from 
the N. W. corner of Georgia, in an easterly direction, two 
miles within the chartered limits of Tennessee, on the wes- 



APPENDIX. 



179 



tern side of Chickamaugah creek. It is nearly equi-distant from 
the eastern and western extremities of the Cherokee country, and 
perhaps twenty-five or thirty miles from the northern limit, which 
is the mouth of the Hiwassee. Augusta is 250 miles S. E.; Nash- 
ville, 150 N. W. ; Knoxville, 110 N. E." 

Encouraging Prospects. 

" It is very evident that the Cherokees are improving more 
rapidly at present, than at any previous time. There are more 
instances of laborious industry among them every returning year- 
There are more instances of serious inquiry after moral and reli- 
gious truth. There is an increasing conviction, that many of the 
whites sincerely wish to promote the welfare of the Indians. The 
best informed and more intelligent Cherokees are very favorably 
disposed toward the mission and school at Brainerd. At several 
places in the nation, is found an earnest desire to have village 
schools, with regular preaching; and there is nothing to prevent 
the establishment of these, except what results from the want of 
pecuniary means, and of interpreters. It is hoped that the defi- 
ciency, in both these respects, will be removed, to such an ex- 
tent, that the present generation may have lights kindled in all 
their borders; and that generations to come may be saved from 
the darkness and wretchedness of their fathers. 

" It used to be said, a few years since, with the greatest con- 
fidence, and is sometimes repeated even now, that " Indians can 
never acquire the habit of labour." Facts abundantly disprove this 
opinion. There are numerous instances among the Cherokees, 
of very laborious and long continued industry; and, in some of 
these instances, the habit has commenced and become establish- 
ed, after the individuals had grown up in hereditary freedom from 
any thing like regular labour. In more instances, the habit com- 
menced in youth, and is confirmed by practice. Some Indians 
not only provide an abundant supply of food for their families, by 
the labour of their own hands, but have a surplus of several hun- 
dred bushels of corn, with which they procure clothing, furni- 
ture, and foreign articles of luxury, particularly sugar and coffee, 
of which they are immoderately fond. Others manufacture their 
own clothes from cotton produced in their own fields. The cur- 
rent is now setting very strongly in favor of agriculture, and other 



180- 



APPENDIX. 



laborious pursuits. All are convinced, that the very existence 
of the community must be preserved in this way, if preserved at 
all. 

" Notwithstanding these encouraging appearances, however, it 
is not to be disguised, that many things, still remaining among the 
Cherokees, are greatly to be deplored. Much poverty and wretch- 
edness, several gross vices, particularly drunkenness, and an al- 
most total ignorance of God, his law, and the plan of salvation, 
need to be chased away, before the people generally can reach 
the proper standard of rational and immortal beings. What has 
been already done, in the way of communicating evangelical in- 
struction, though of inestimable value to such individuals as have 
received spiritual benefit, and as an experiment of what may be 
done, is yet a mere specimen of that benevolent agency which 
needs to be extended, not only to every part of the Cherokee 
country, but to all the Indian tribes in North- America, and to all 
the heathen on the globe. 

" The attempts of the Cherokees to institute civil government for 
themselves, adapted to their improving condition, succeed quite 
as well as could be expected. Their incipient jurisprudence ap- 
pears to secure the respect of the people. The distribution of 
the legislative, judicial, and executive powers of government, is 
made with considerable skill and judgment. I have in my posses- 
sion, the details of the system; but cannot conveniently transcribe 
them here.* While I was at Brainerd, a court was held for 
Chickamaugah district; and a member of it reported to me two of 
the cases, which were then decided. 

"During my stay, I visitedMr. Hicks, who lives seven miles from 
Brainerd. The Christian and public character of this man is well 
known. Though he has been confined for a long time by ill health, 
his mind is active and vigorous. He appears to be influenced, in 
his labors for the good of his countrymen, by patriotism under the 
control of Christian principle. He became a member of the Mo- 
ravian church about thirteen years ago; and his wife lately joined 
the same communion. 

" It deserves to be mentioned with gratitude, that there ha? 
been no instance hitherto, among the Cherokee converts at Brain 

* They are given, p. 172 to 177 of this work, 



APPENDIX, 



181 



erd and Creekpath, of any such departure from Christian conduct, 
as to bring scandal upon the cause, or call for censure from the 
church. On the contrary, all these converts discover a great de- 
sire to ascertain their duty; and, when they have learned what 
their duty is, an uncommon willingness to perform it. The same 
is true, so far as I have been informed, of the members of the 
Moravian church." 

The following impressive, closing observations of Mr. Evarts, 
cannot be too widely circulated, or too often read. 

" It is obvious to every reflecting person, that now is the time 
to benefit these south-western tribes, by the communication of the 
Gospel. If this time should pass away without being employed to 
the best advantage; if the present attempts should fail, either from 
the want of pecuniary means, or a deficiency of wisdom in plan- 
ning and directing the business, or of fidelity and perseverance in 
the missionaries, or in consequence of the divine blessing not be- 
ing granted; it is impossible to see how a remedy can ever be ap- 
plied hereafter. The present state of things cannot continue long. 
The Cherokees, the Choctaws, and the other tribes, must either 
rise to the rank of intelligent men, and well instructed Christians, 
or they must melt away, destroyed by vices copied from unprinci- 
pled whites, having sold their birthright for a mess of pottage, and 
being left, in the land of their fathers, without property, without 
a home, and without a friend. Who would not be pained at so 
lamentable an issue? How can any disciple of Christ hesitate, 
whether he shall do all in his power to impart the blessings of civ- 
ilization and Christianity, at this critical period? A favorable im- 
pulse may now be given, which, with the continued smiles of 
Providence, shall perpetuate the privileges and the hopes of the 
Gospel among a people, whose ancestors, from time immemorial, 
were enveloped in all the darkness of heathenism. Is not such an 
object worthy of continued labors and persevering efforts? 

" Whatever may be the issue of any plans now in operation, 
there is no doubt that the cause of missions is a good cause, and 
will ultimately succeed. No friend of humanity, who should wit- 
ness the present state of the Indians, and the efforts to improve 
their temporal condition, could fail to give these efforts his decid- 



182 



APPENDIX. 



ed approbation. But if he were also the friend of his Redeemer: 
if his heart were filled with an anxious desire that the souls of 
men may be saved; if he consider the melancholy state of those 
who have never heard of a Saviour, and whose minds are utterly 
destitute of religious truth, while their depraved dispositions lead 
them far from righteousness; if, in short, he had a just apprehen- 
sion of the equal and urgent need of the Gospel for all men, of 
every country and kindred, he would count the exertions hith- 
erto made as nothing, compared with the value of the object; 
and would set himself most industriously at work to bring new re- 
sources into action, and to hasten the progress of a cause, which 
he would wish above all things to see immediately successful. 

" Such feelings, beyond a question, would be prompted by a 
survey of the present missionary attempts, in behalf of the Indians 
within our borders. May it please the great Benefactor of nations, 
speedily to rescue these tribes from their present state, and to 
make use of such instruments, in communicating his mercy, as to 
his unerring wisdom shall seem ber-t. ,? 

CHOCTAWS. 

Boundary of their country ; population; advancement in civiliza- 
tion ; Religion ; treatment of the dead. 

The Choctaws, or Flat-Heads, occupy the country between the 
Tombigbee and the Mississippi, bounded north by the country of 
the Chickasaws, and south by a line running a little below the 
parallel of 32°. A small part of this territory is in the State of 
Alabama, but it lies principally in Mississippi. The number of 
the Choctaws is estimated as in the Table. Within a few years 
they have made great advances in agriculture, and other arts of 
civilized life. They raise corn and different kinds of pulse, mel- 
ons, and cotton. In one year they spun and wove ten thousand 
yards. An ingenious Choctaw, for a series of years, raised his 
own cotton, made wheels, cards, &c. spun it, wove it, and made 
it into clothing. The Choctaws raise a great many cattle. They 
have laid aside hunting, as a business, though they sometimes en- 
gage in it for amusement. 



APPENDIX. 183 

They speak very reverentially of the Supreme Being ; but have 
no exterior worship. Polygamy is very common ; there is no 
marriage ceremony, and their morals, in this respect, are very 
loose and corrupt. Till within a few years the/ did not bury their 
dead, but left the bodies on scaffolds, erected before their doors, 
till the flesh was consumed. Their government is entirely ad- 
visory. They are divided into three tribes, each of which has a 
chief : The tribes are subdivided into clans. The individuals of 
different clans do not intermarry. 

The Choctaws have strong tendencies towards a civilized state. 
They are friendly to travellers, for whose accommodation they 
have established a number of public inns, which for neatness and 
accommodations, actually excel many among the whites. 

The American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, 
in June, 1818, established a missionary station among the Choc- 
taws, which they named Eliot, after the celebrated New-England 
missionary of that name. The seat of this mission is about four 
hundred miles south-westerly from Brainerd. It is three miles 
south of Yalo Busha Creek ; about thirty miles above its junction 
with the Yazoo ; seventy or seventy-five miles west of the Choc- 
taw Agency ; one hundred north of that of the Choctaws ; one 
hundred and forty-five north-west of Walnut Hills. It is in a good 
country, adapted to the raising of cattle, in a climate supposed to 
be salubrious, and by the Yalo Busha, the Yazoo, and the Missis- 
sippi rivers, has a water communication with Natchez and New- 
Orleans. 

The state of this establishment, Nov. 1819, and Dec. 1820, was 
given by Rev. Mr. Kingsbury, who is at the head of it, in his Re- 
ports to the Secretary of War, as follows : — 

" Since the last report, thirty-eight scholars have been admitted 
to the school. Ten have left it, and one has been dismissed for 
ill conduct. The number now in school is seventy-four ; six 
more are considered as belonging to it, but are at home on a visit. 
Of the whole number, sixty are males, and twenty females. All 
these board in our family, and are entirely under our direction, 
excepting ten, who live in the neighborhood, go home on Satur- 
day, and return generally on the Sabbath morning. Fifty of the 
scholars now belonging to the school could not speak our language 
when they entered. These have all made progress in proportion 



184 



APPENDIX. 



to the time they have been here, and several of them now speak 
English fluently. Others, who have not advanced so far, can read 
correctly, and will soon acquire the spoken language. Sixty-five, 
now in the school, began with the alphabet. Twenty-eight of 
these can read with facility in the New Testament. All the schol- 
ars have been accustomed, from the first, to write their lessons on 
slates ; and, when advanced, to write on paper. Thirty-nine 
write a plain hand without a copy. Nineteen others can form let- 
ters with tolerable accuracy. Ten have made some progress in 
arithmetic, and two, who were considerably advanced, when they 
entered, have attended to grammar and geography. 

" The boys, when out of school, are employed, as circumstan- 
ces require, in the various business of the farm and family. Each 
one, who is of sufficient size, is furnished with an ax and a hoe. 
We cultivated the past season about fifty acres of corn and pota- 
toes, most of which was planted and hoed by the boys. 

" The girls are in two divisions, and are employed alternately in 
the kitchen, and in sewing, spinning, knitting, and other domestic 
labors. At present, they are taught in a room separate from the 
boys ; and, a part of the time, by one of the females of the mis- 
sion. When our expected help arrives, it is designed to have 
them entirely under the direction of a female teacher. The edu- 
cation of girls is considered of primary importance, as it respects 
the prospective education of children, and the progress of civiliza- 
tion. 

" Since Oct. 1819, there have been erected, at Eliot, a joiner's 
shop, a meat house, two corn cribs, and four large cabins, which 
are occupied as dwelling-houses. Fifty thousand bricks have 
been made, and two brick chimneys built ; also, considerable oth- 
er brick work has been constructed for the accommodation of the 
kitchen, including an oven, and arches for kettles. 

" There is now building a house ninety feet by forty, including 
a piazza, calculated for four families. When this is completed, a 
sufficient number of cabins can be vacated for the accommodation 
of all the children, who can be admitted to the school. A barn 
will then be needed, to complete the principal buildings for this 
establishment. 



APPENDIX. 



185 



" The improvements have been considerably enlarged, both by 
clearing new land, and by inclosing two small unoccupied fields, 
which lie at the distance of about a mile. 

" Since the death of Mr. Fisk, (who was a blacksmith) an in- 
dustrious young man has been constantly employed in the smith's 
shop ; and one Choctaw lad, and one half breed are learning the 
trade. They are alternately in the shop and school, and their 
proficiency has been good. Several other lads are desirous of 
learning trades ; but we are not yet able to give them an opportu- 
nity. 

" Two wheel-wrights, and a cabinet maker, have been employ- 
ed for several months. It would be desirable to have permanent 
mechanics of the above description, that some of the scholars may 
be instructed in those arts. 

" In order to facilitate the communication with Eliot, and par 
ticularly between Eliot and the new establishment on the Ook-tib~ 
be-ha, we have, with the assistance of Capt. Folsom, (a half breed) 
opened a waggon road from this place to the Pigeon Roost, on the 
road from Nashville to Natchez. There is now a waggon commu- 
nication from the navigable waters of the Yazoo, to those of the 
Tombigbee. This road will accommodate those, who may wish 
to remove from Tennessee and Alabama, to the valuable lands on 
the Yazoo, lately obtained from the Choctaws. A few bridges, 
and a little more labor on a part of the way, would render the 
road good at all seasons of the year, from the ferry, on the milita- 
ry road at Columbus, to Eliot. We have been with a waggon, as 
far down the Yazoo, as the new purchase ; but the road is not 
opened below our station. 

" The property belonging to the establishment, on the first of 
Oct. 1820, is estimated as follows : — 

Sixty acres of improvements at $15 - $900 

A horse mill 200 

Joiner's and blacksmith's shops, tools and stock - - 600 
Twenty-two other buildings of various sizes, - - 3,000 
A waggon, two carts, two ploughs, harness, and other 
farming utensils 

Seven horses, at $60 420 

A yoke of oxen - 1 60 



- 400 



186 



APPENDIX. 



Two hundred and twenty head of neat cattle, at $8 - 1,760 

Sixty swine at $2 50 - - - - - . . 1 50 

Pork, flour, corn, potatoes, &c. - 1,758 

Groceries 360 

Beds and household furniture - 500 

Cloth of various kinds - - - - - - 250 

Library - - - - - - . - 320 

A keel boat, the Choctaw packet - 400 

Fifty thousand brick at g6 - 300 

§11,478 

" Seven cows and calves, one yoke of oxen, two waggons, one 
cart, and various other articles, had been taken from Eliot, for 
the new establishment. Similar aid will hereafter be afforded to 
other stations. 

" The government allows an additional sum of a thousand dol- 
lars towards the expenses of the buildings at Eliot. The plan of 
the buildings at Mayhew is also approved, and a stipulated sum is 
allowed towards erecting them." 

The following incident will show in what light the school at 
Eliot is viewed by the natives : — •" A half-breed Choctaw, whose 
name is M'Curtin, had five children at school, and sent a sixth. 
The school was then full, and the sixth could not be received. 
The missionaries had repeatedly been obliged to decline receiving 
children. On the return of his child, the father fell into a pas- 
sion, sent for his other five children, and took them from the 
school. Not long afterwards, the father being absent, an uncle of 
the children, called Capt. Cole, hearing that Mr. Kingsbury was 
at Eliot, repaired thither with a petition, that the children might be 
received again. It is a custom of the Choctaws, that an uncle is a 
sort of guardian to children, even during the life of the father. 

The following is a copy of Capt. Cole's petition. 

" A-be-ate-up-in-bogue, June 6, 1821. 

" Friend and brother, 

u I reflect that my nephews and nieces have been taken from 
your care, and the loss of education gives me a great dissatisfacr 



APPENDIX. 



187 



lion of mind. I wish to return the boys to your care again. Your 
sanction to my request will give me much pleasure. The girls, 
I leave that to your own breast, whether you wish to call them to 
your care once more. 

" When they were taken from you, it gave me dissatisfaction of 
mind ; but I gave way to the father, as I thought it my duty. 

" Should you be willing to take them, you will please to answer 
me by the first opportunity, and you will oblige 
Your Friend and Brother, 

ROBERT COLE." 

" We the undersigned humbly request that Mr. Kingsbury should 
sanction Capt. Cole's request, and receive his nephews in the 
school again, as we feel sorry for his nephews — the loss of their 
education, which appears much to affect him. 

Capt. Levi Perry, his x mark. 
Tus-cam-i-ub-by, x 
Tag-le-on-tub^by, x 
A-no-a-ga, x 
Hi-a-ca-gey, x 
Na-ho-le-ub-by, x 
Che-co-au-chub-by, x 
Neth-la-hom-a-chub-by, x 

" What can more clearly show the value, which the natives set on 
education, than the fact, that nine chiefs of a large district, should 
unite in a humble request, that children, who had been rashly ta- 
ken away, might be restored again to the school ? The mission- 
aries agreed to receive the children again ; but they had not re- 
turned at the last intelligence. Capt. Cole is the chief speaker of 
the district, in which he resides, and may succeed Puck-sha-nub- 
bee, in the government of that district." 

Rev. Mr. Kingsbury's Report to the Secretary oj War, January 

30, 1822. 

Mayhew, Choctaw Nation, Jan. 30, 1822. 

« Sir, 

" In compliance with instructions from the War Department, 
I have the honor of submitting the following Report, of the 
Schools in the Choctaw Nation. 



188 



APPENDIX. 



"As this report has been long delayed, I would observe that 
at the time it ought to have been made, the family at Eliot were 
suffering by severe sickness, and the scholars who in August went 
home for a vacation of six weeks, were, by the sickness, prevent- 
ed from returning until late in the autumn, and some have but re- 
cently gone back. The report was delayed until it could be seen 
what effect this afflictive dispensation would have on the school. 

" There are two primary schools in this nation, under the joint 
patronage of the government, and the American Board of Com- 
missioners for Foreign Missions ; and one local school which is 
assisted from the funds of the other two. I shall notice these, in 
the order of time in which they were commenced, beginning 
with— 

Eliot. 

" This establishment was commenced in August, 1318. During 
the past year, it has been strengthened by the arrival of the Rev. 
Mr. Byington ; Captain John Smith, and Mr. Elijah Bradwell, with 
their families ; and a single female. The following is a list of the 
persons permanently employed at Eliot, with their occupations. 

Rev. Cyrus Byington, Missionary and Rector. 

Mr. Moses Jewell, Mechanic. 

Mrs. Jewell and one child. 

Mr. Zechariah Hawes, Farmer and Shoemaker- 
Mr. Anson Dyer, Steward. 

Mr. Joel Wood, Teacher. 

Mrs. Wood. 

Capt. John Smith, Farmer, and Manager of Plantation. 

Mrs. Smith and five children. 

Mr. Elijah Bard well, Farmer and Teacher. 

Mrs. Bardwell and three children. 

Miss Hannah Thacher, Teacher. 
"All these persons, children excepted, have freely offered their 
services to labor for the support of the school, and have been 
duly accepted by the Prudential Committee of the A. B. C. F. M. 
All, 'whose health will permit, are diligently, and most of them 
laboriously employed in their respective departments. 

"Besides the above, from 8 to 12 Mechanics, laborers, and 
domestics, are hired to labor for the establishment. 



APPENDIX. 



189 



" In the school, there is an annual vacation of six weeks, com- 
mencing on the first Wednesday in Aug. The past vacations have 
been longer, on account of sickness in the family. From the com- 
mencement of the term in Oct. 1820, to Aug. 1821, when it closed, 
the number of scholars varied from 50 to 70. During this peri- 
od, 29 new ones were admitted ; one was expelled for obstinate 
disobedience ; and six others were taken home by their parents, 
who thought that they could no longer spare them to attend school. 
The latter had all been at school before they came to Eliot, and 
when they left, could read and write very well. 

" The boys' school is taught on the Lancasterian plan. During 
the three last months of the term, the organization and discipline 
of the school was improved, and the progress of the scholars 
more rapid. While out of school they labored cheerfully, and 
with effect. Besides planting and hoeing, and laboring in various 
other employments, they cleared several acres of land. It is be- 
lieved that ten to fifteen acres, may in this way be annually ad- 
ded to the plantation. Three of the scholars are learning the 
blacksmith's trade. They are alternately in the school and shop. 

" The female scholars have been placed under a female teach- 
er. While out of school they are employed in various domestic 
labors, under the superintendence of their teacher, and the other 
ladies. Their improvement has fully equalled our expectations. 

'* Exertions were made to provide, as far as possible, for the 
support of the school, and family from our own resources. The 
plantation was cultivated in the best manner — the stock carefully 
attended to and every department was managed with economy, 
skill and persevering industry. The prospects of the establish- 
ment were never more promising than at the commencement of 
the vacation. 

" About that time a distressing and fatal sickness commenced in 
the family. One after another was attacked with the bilious or 
intermittent fever. Those who for a time enjoyed health by at- 
tending day and night on the sick, soon became the victims of dis- 
ease. Of 28 persons, including children, who composed the per- 
manent family at that time, not one escaped. Several of the hired 
people, and 3 or 4 scholars, who continued at Eliot through the 
vacation, were also sick. 



190 



APPENDIX. 



" Mrs. Judith Williams, after a long and distressing illness, died 
on the 13th of October. She had taken an active and laborious 
part in the domestic concerns of the family.* Mr. and Mrs. Jew- 
ell buried their oldest child. One of the scholars, a promising 
half breed lad, about 13 years old, also died. He was kind and 
affectionate in his deportment, much engaged in learning, and we 
hope truly pious. 

" The school and the labors of the establishment were neces- 
sarily interrupted by the sickness. But we would acknowledge, 
with gratitude, the many mercies, which a kind Providence min- 
gled with these afflictions, health in a good degree, has been res- 
tored. The products of the field have been secured without 
loss, and have abundantly rewarded our labors. There have 
been harvested 1200 bushels of corn, 750 bushels of potatoes, 
besides some beans, peas, oats, turnips, barley, &c. 

" The schools are more flourishing than at any former period. 
There are in both 75 scholars, descendants of the Choctaws, and 
about 20 of them full blooded natives. Five children belonging 
to the white families, also attend the school. The natives, espe- 
cially in the neighborhood of Eliot, are friendly, and highly pleas- 
ed with the opportunity of educating their children. 

"The past year, in some respects, has been an expensive one. 
Sickness obliged us to hire more than would otherwise have been 
necessary. There has been erected a house 90 feet by 40, two 
stories high, and calculated for four families. This house is not 
yet completed. Sixty of the scholars have been entirely support- 
ed, as to board and tuition, and many of them clothed. Smith- 
work and other property, to the amount of more than $300, have 
been furnished from Eliot, to the school now establishing among 
the Cherokees, on the Arkansaw. 

" The whole amount of disbursements from Sept. 30, 1820, 
to Oct. 1st, 1821, was §8,388, 87; And the receipts, during the 
same period, amounted to $8, 191, 23. 

[A classified statement of the disbursements and receipts fol- 
lows, not important to be here inserted.] 

* Mr. Williams died at Eliot of a fever in 181?. 



APPENDIX. 



191 



" The property belonging to the school the first of October, 



1821, was 


estimated as follows : — 




70 


acres improved land at $10 


$700 


7 


horses $420 — 3 yoke of oxen $225 


645 




nCdll llcdl Ccllllt! tjO 




1 7fl 


SWIIlc !f)Z 






waggons, one cart, and other farming tools 


a nei 
4UU 




Joiner's shop tools and stock 


350 




Blacksmith's shop tools and stock 


250 




Horse Mill $100 — 22 other buildings $4000 


4,100 


50 


barrels of flour $350—33 do. pork $494 


844 




Sugar, coffee, salt, and other groceries 


795 




Crop of 1821 


1,200 




Beds and other household furniture 


886 




Clothing, cloth, and other articles in store 


2,000 




Library $400 — keel boat $300 


700 




$15,490 



u Much credit is due to Captain Smith, and those who have la* 
bored in the several departments, for their unremitting exertions 
in the midst of sickness, and difficulties. They have labored 
for this school with more persevering industry and self-denial, 
than almost any persons exercise for the support of their own 
families. Mr. Wood and Miss Thacher, have been indefatigable in 
their attention to the schools. Mr. Byington is an active man, 
and watches with a vigilant eye over the interests of the institu- 
tion. 

" The second school established in this nation, is called 

Mayhew.* 

" Preparations for this school were commenced on a small scale, 
in February, 1820. Two small cabins were erected, and about 
25 acres of ground cultivated. In the autumn of the same year, 
other buildings were commenced, and it was expected the school 
would be opened in the fall of 1821. But t\m society from whom 
we expected supplies of various articles, were unable to forward 

* In honour of several celebrated Missionaries of this name among the 
Vineyard Indians in Massachusetts. 



192 



APPENDIX. 



them at that time. But a very partial supply of money could be 
furnished by the Society, and some disappointment was experien- 
ced as to the time of receiving the annuity granted to this school 
by the Choctaws. The work, though prosecuted under some dis- 
advantages, did not stop. The buildings and other preparations, 
were carried forward by obtaining extensive credit, until the 
money in expectation, should be received. 

The following buildings have been erected, viz : — 
A framed dining room and kitchen 64 feet by 23 

3 log dwelling-houses, 40 feet by 20 
1 do. 14 feet by 16 

4 dwelling cabins, 18 feet by 18 

3 cabins for meat, grain, and meal 
A joiner's shop, a blacksmith's shop 
3 stables, 2 corn cribs, and two other out-houses. 
Five brick chimneys have been built, 4 of which accommodate 
two rooms each. These buildings have cost nearly $4000. Six- 
ty-five acres of good land are enclosed, and most of it under culti- 
vation. Valuable teams of oxen and horses have been purchased. 
Four waggons, one ox cart, and a good supply of farming and me- 
chanical tools, also belong to the establishment. The property of 



all kinds, is estimated as follows : — 

65 acres of improved land at $10 $650 

1 1 horses $660—4 yoke of oxen $300 960 

100 head neat cattle $8 800 

50 swine $2 100 

4 waggons, one cart, and other farming tools 490 

Harness for waggons, saddles and bridles 200 

Joiner's shop, tools, and stock 300 

Blacksmith's shop, tools, and stock 200 

14 other buildings- 3,650 

Shoemaker's tools and stock 87 

Provisions on hand 450 

Cooking stove and kitchen furniture 150 

Beds and other household furniture 488 

Clothing, cftth, and other articles in store 400 

Library $200—30,000 brick $180 380 



$9,305 



The disbursements for May hew, frem its in 
February, 1 820, to October 1st, 1 821 , were $2,212, 6 J . The re- 
ceipts during the same period, were $8,489, 2$. 

tk The annuity for 1821, has since >been received, and also 
$1275 from the civilization fund towards the buildings. The ex- 
f&enses of this establishment will continue to be heavy for some 
time to come. A school house, horse mill, and several more 
dwelling houses will be needed. 

" Clothing, kitchen and table furniture, school hooks, and vari- 
ous other supplies, to the amount of about $4000, are on their 
way from Boston, for this school. When they arrive, the school 
will be opened to receive scholars. Some of the natives have ex- 
pressed dissatisfaction at so long a delay in opening the school. 1 
can only say, that we have done what we could. Nor do we 
ihink there has been any loss by a few months delay. All the 
funds have been employed in purchasing necessary articles, with- 
out which the work could not be prosecuted to advantage. 

" The money we have received, has not been sufficient to erect 
the necessary buildings, purchase teams, waggons, farming tools, 
mechanical tools, &c. and support a school at the same time. 
These things must be taken in course, according to our ability, 
and the fund so disposed of as will, in the end, most effectually 
contribute to the permanent support of the school. 

" There are connected with this station, the following persons, 
viz : — 

Rev. Cyrus Kingsbury, Superintendant. 

Mrs. Kingsbury, and two children. 

Rev. Alfred Wright, Missionary. 

Doct. William W. Pride, Physician. 

Mr. Calvin Cushman, farmer and manager of plantation. 

Mrs. Churchman and three children. 

Mr. William Hooper, teacher and shoemaker. 

Mr. Samuel Wisner, joiner and wheelright. 

Mrs. Wisner, Teacher. 

Mr. Philo B. Stewart, saddler and shoemaker. 
" These persons, children excepted, are engaged for life, and 
receive no other compensation than their board and clothing. Dr. 
Pride officiates as physician, both at Mayhew and Eliot. 

25 



194 



APPENDIX. 



Besides the above, there are from ten to 15 hired mechanics, 
labourers, ond domestics, employed at Mayhew. Two half breed 
Choctaw lads, also reside here, one as interpreter, the other is 
learning the blacksmith's trade. 

" In May last, three white men who have Choctaw families, and 
whose children had been .at Eliot, proposed to put up buildings in 
their own neighborhood for a small school, and board and clothe 
their own children, if we would furnish a teacher. This propo- 
sal was accepted, and Mr. and Mrs. Williams, who formerly had 
charge of the scholars at Eliot, were designated for this purpose. 
They left Eliot about the first of October. Several buildings 
have been erected, and a school of about 15 scholars, commen- 
ced with favorable prospects. Mr. and Mrs. Williams have been 
unwearied in their labors. The men who engaged to put up the 
buildings, and provide for their children, have made commenda- 
ble exertions. They have been assisted by a widow woman, a 
half breed Choctaw, who has a family she is educating. Supplies 
to the amount of $300 have been furnished to this school from 
Eliot and Mayhew, and Mr. Williams is authorised to support 4 or 
5 poor scholars. At this school also, the scholars board with the 
teacher ; the parents furnish provision and a book. While out 
of school, they are trained to habits of industry. The place se- 
lected for this school is called Newell, and is on the old Natchez 
trace, about 25 miles south of the road leading from Mayhew to 
Eliot. 

"One thousand dollars have been paid by the United State* 
Agent to the superintendant, being the annuity for 1821, granted 
by the Choctaws for a third primary school in the S. E. District. 
This is reserved for the specified object, and will be employed so 
soon as sufficient additional funds can be secured, and suitable per- 
sons engaged to carry on the work. 

" Before closing this report, I beg leave respectfully to intro- 
duce a few remarks. The schools in the Choctaw Nation have 
very considerable resources, and are becoming extensive and im- 
portant in their effects. All the arrangements respecting them, 
have been made with reference to their permanent support, and 
gradual increase. The advantages of this plan are already per- 
ceptible at Eliot. By a comparison with the former Report, it 



APPENDIX. 



195 



will be seen that the disbursements for the last year, were less by 
almost §4000, than those of the preceding. It will, however, be 
several years before the advantages of the plan will be fully re- 
alized. 

" Benevolent persons in the United States, have sent large sup- 
plies of clothing and other valuable articles for the use of these 
schools. These donations have been of essential service. With- 
out them the schools must have languished, and perhaps have been 
given up. Of some of these articles there has been a much 
larger supply received than we expected, and we presume larger 
than was anticipated by the various donors. After supplying the 
wants of the scholars and of the family, a large surplus remained. 
Some of this is sold to hired persons, and so far saves the payment 
money. Some is given to the Indians, in exchange for corn, beef, 
and other articles purchased of them, to the mutual advantage of 
the schools and the natives. The remainder of the surplus will 
be reserved until some way is opened for its disposal. 

" The proper distribution of these charities, imposes on us 
highly responsible and difficult duties. We wish ever to keep 
in mind, that an injudicious bestowment of charity, increases the 
evil, it is designed to remedy. This is especially the case among 
savages. Our object has ever been to furnish them only such 
aid and instruction as would enable them better to provide for 
their own wants, and not to induce them to depend on the United 
States for a supply. 

" The fact, that such a liberal support of clothing has been sent 
to the schools, doubtless induces some to do less for their chil- 
dren, than they otherwise would. The parents of most of the 
scholars are poor, and unable to do much towards the board and 
clothing of their children. But it is sometimes a question how far 
charity ought to be extended to those, whose parents are well able 
to support them. Several of this description have clothed their 
children, and paid for their board, and all appeared willing to do 
it, until they were told by gentlemen from the States, that the 
Government would educate their children, and that they need be 
at no expense for it. Previously to this rumor, the Choctaws 
had manifested a noble liberality. It is presumable they will again 
manifest a similar spirit, when they come better to appreciate the 



APPENDIX. 



advantages of education, and more correctly to understand the 
means by which it is supported among them. 

" As yet but a small portion of the children of this nation can 
be educated at these schools. What is contributed by the rich 
towards the support of their own children, will enable us to ex- 
tend just so much further the benefits of instruction to the poor. 

" The wretchedness of this people is daily becoming more 
manifest; as is also the importance of extending, as speedily as 
possible, to the rising generation, the salutary influences of civ- 
ilized and christian education. On this rests the only hope of 
rescuing them from the avarice of unprincipled white people, and 
from the influence of their own ungoverned appetites and pas- 
sions. 

" During the past summer, in one neighborhood of about eight 
miles square, ten men and two women lost their lives by whiskey. 
Capt. L. Perry, one of the most useful Chiefs in the nation, was 
recently murdered in a drunken affray. The murderer of course 
was killed. Two other men committed suicide, in consequence 
of having lost their property by intemperance. 

" We would respectfully submit to the consideration of the Ex- 
ecutive, whether any direct measures can be adopted to diminish 
this great evil, and stop the effusion of human blood, with which 
this land is so deeply stained. 
With great respect, 

I have the honor to be your obedient servant, 

CYRUS KINGSBURY, 
Super intendant of Schools in the Choctaw Mission." 
The Hon. John C. Calhoun, Secretary of War. 

The following information was verbally communicated to me at 
Washington, March, 1822, by a respectable gentleman from 
Natchez. 

The Choctaws, in Council the last October, resolved, that small 
schools shall be established in all populous parts of their country, 
so that none of the families should be more than three or four 
miles from a school, that children might conveniently go home at 
night, and save expense. 



APFENDIX. 



197 



They passed a law, at the same time, prohibiting the introduc- 
tion of ardent spirits into the country, on penalty of its forfeiture. 
Committees were appointed and authorized to carry the vote into 
effect, by seizing and destroying all such articles, wherever found. 
He added, that these Indians were making rapid advances in civil- 
ization, and that it was the desire of the white inhabitants of this 
state, that these Indians, as soon as educated, should be merged 
among them, and enjoy with them, the rights and privileges of 
freemen. 

Description of Mayhew. 
Letter from the Rev. Mr. Goodell. 

" Creek-Path, April 30, 1822. 

My dear Sir, 

" I have visited Mayhew, the French Camps, and Eliot, with 
much satisfaction ; and am now on my way, with Mr. Kingsbury, 
to meet the Corresponding Secretary at Brainerd. The situation 
of Mayhew is pleasant indeed. As you approach it from the east, 
there opens unexpectedly to view, an extensive prairie, which 
contains several thousand acres, and which appears to be without 
a single stone, or tree, or fence, except now and then a small 
cluster of of trees at great distances, like the little isles of the sea, 
and except also the railing which incloses the fields of Mayhew. 
These fields are on the north side of the prairie, and directly in 
front of the Mission-houses. " Beautiful for situation, the joy of 
the whole earth, is Mount Zion, on the sides of the north." Cast- 
ing your eve over the prairie, you discover here and there, herds 
of cattle and horses, and wild deer, all grazing and happy. — - 
" This," said Dr. Worcester, as he passed Mayhew, on his way 
towards home, and towards heaven — " This is the loveliest spot 
my eyes ever saw." The grass, which will soon be eight feet 
high, is now about eight inches, and has all the freshness of spring 
The prairie has very gentle elevations and depressions, which 
contain each from 100 to 1000 acres, and which, from a distance, 
resemble the. undulating motion of the Atlantic, a few leagues from 



198 



APPENDIX. 



land, after a storm. An hundred horses and chariots could go 
abreast in any direction, and with almost any speed. As you pro- 
ceed, Mayhew often almost wholly disappears ; again it rises to 
view in still greater loveliness, half encircled with the oak, which, 
with the sycamore and mulberry, border the prairie on all sides. 
Flowers of red, purple, yellow, and indeed of every hue, are 
scattered, by a bountiful God, in rich profusion, and in all the 
beauty and innocence of Eden, on each side of the path ; and their 
fragrance is, as if the very incense of heaven were there offered. 
You can stand in almost any place, and count flowers of ten or 
twelve different hues. The distance to Mayhew, which at first 
appears to be no more than a few hundred yards, is no less than 
two miles. And as you walk on, contemplating this lovely scene, 
with all its interesting associations, your soul, or ever you are 
aware, will make you like the chariots of Amminadab. 

" This," said one of the missionaries to me, "is the Lord's plan- 
tation. These are his fields. These houses, these cattle, and 
these utensils, are also his. We are his servants, and hope to die 
in his service." The missionaries are laboring constantly, cheer- 
fully and prayerfully, and with much of a spirit of self-denial. A 
school, on a large scale, is about to go into operation. 

"Last week Mr. Kingsbury assembled the chiefs and principal men 
of the district, and explained to them the nature and design of the 
school. To this, one of the chiefs replied; — " I be not accustomed to 
make a talk with the whites, but when a man's heart feel glad, he 
can say it. We have listened to your talk. We never understood 
this business so well before. We never before understood so well, 
that the missionaries labor here without pay ; but leave their farms 
and houses, and all for good of the Choctaws. The Choctaws are 
ignorant. They know when day come, and when night come. 
That all they know." He wished, when I returned to the north, 
through the great cities, I would say to the white men, — "You 
are our fathers. We are poor and feeble. Fathers must pro- 
vide for the children. When these missionaries die, send more. 
We expect to die in our old habit ; but we want our children do 
better." 



APPENDIX. 



199 



I close my account of the Cherokees with the following extract 
of a letter from an intelligent lady, who lately made a visit to Brain- 
erd, and was a witness of what she relates. 

" Delightful as social intercourse must be in the mission family, 
we found but few opportunities of spending an evening as a do- 
mestic circle. In one of these few, the conversation turned on 
" the Star in the West.*" Elijah Hicks, son of the venerable 
Charles Hicks, and clerk of the nation, was one of the circle. 
His presence would not have disgraced any circle, either in ap- 
pearance, manner, or conversation. He listened to our various 
remarks with deep attention, but gave not his opinion. At length 
with much propriety of manner and expression, he asked, 
" Whether our divines generally supposed the return of the Jews, 
predicted by the Prophets, was a spiritual, or a temporal return ?" 

" Judge Boudinot's statements were found by the missionaries to 
be correct. Customs, like those of the Jews, were from time to 
time, discovered. Their present " city of refuge for the man- 
slayer," is in the vicinity of a white settlement, where the guiltv 
must stay till after corn-planting, when he may return in safety." 

Progress of civilization among the Indians. 

" Some of the Indians are said to live in very decent style, cul- 
tivate their lands, and keep good tables. Two Cherokees by the 
name of Fan, have built good brick houses, and another Cher- 
okee, who would imitate the Missionaries in all they do, has 
built him a house in exact imitation of theirs. A pious man from 
Georgia, four years ago, passed through the nation, and again, 
last year : he says, " their improvement is astonishing." The 
Missionaries are richly compensated for all their trials, in knowing 
that a nation are reaping, not only temporal, but eternal benefit, 
through their exertions. Father Hoyt says, nothing of any con- 
sequence transpires at the mission, but it is known through the 
nation in three days. Circumstances, little thought of by our- 
selves, would excite much interest and observation through the 

* A book with this title, of which the late President of the American Bible 
Society (Dr. Boudinot) wa3 the author. 



200 



APPENDIX. 



land. The Missionary lias hardly time to reflect on the eminence 
on which he stands. 

" Civilization, and a knowledge of the Scriptures, will doubtless, 
dispel the mist which has so long hung over these nations, and 
show them to be not inferior to any other people. Their lands 
are now divided into counties ; judges are appointed ; and courts 
held. Judge Brown was once at Brainerd, while I was there. 
He possessed no small degree of unaffected dignity. I saw his 
neice, Delilah Fields, a girl not twelve years old, make coffee , 
and prepare him a breakfast in good style, and then wait on the 
table. 

" I saw but one intoxicated person, and did not hear an oath 
from a Cherokee, during the term of three months. 

" Theft was common : but the nation condemned it. During 
our stay, two horses were stolen from the mission. Several Cher- 
okees assured us of their safe return, and, with our brother Reed, 
were many days engaged in their pursuit. The thieves were of- 
ten heard of, in different parts of the nation ; and finding no pros- 
pect of escape, they turned the horses loose upon the mountains, 
where they were soon found. Several small articles had also 
been stolen. Mr. Butler made a journey to the venerable Charles 
Hicks, for redress. The good man said, " We are to have a 
council next week. 1 will have a taik. and you will hear no 
more of it." 1 

Chick as a ws. 

The territory of the Chickasazus is included within the charter- 
ed limits of the States of Tennessee, Kentucky, and Mississippi. 
More than half is in Mississippi. It is bounded west by the Mis- 
sissippi river ; north by the Ohio ; east by the Tennessee river, 
and Alabama Territory, and south by the country of the Choc- 
taws. The boundary line, commences on the Mississippi, a little 
below Lat. 34° north, proceeds up this river to the entrance of 
the Ohio; up the Ohio to the junction of the Tennessee ; up the 
Tennessee to Cany Creek, about twenty miles below the Muscle 
Shoals ; up Cany Creek to its source ; thence in a line to the 



APPENDIX. 



201 



Tombigbee ; down this river to the mouth of Oketibba, in about 
Lat. 30°, where it meets the Choctaw line ; and from this point 
in a north-west direction, to its commencement on the Missis- 
sippi. A large portion of the country is very fertile and valua- 
ble. They have, by late treaties, ceded to the United States, all 
their lands lying north of the parallel of 35° N. Lat. or the south- 
ern boundary of Tennessee. Their present Territory lies whol- 
ly in the State of Mississippi. 

The number of souls in this tribe is given in the Table. There 
are four males to one female. This inequality is attributed to the 
practice of polygamy, which is general in this tribe. 
^ The Chickasaws have always been warm friends of the United 
States, and are distinguished for their hospitality. Some of the 
Chiefs are half breed, men of sense, possess numerous negro 
slaves, and annually sell several hundred cattle and hogs. The 
nation resides in eight towns, and like their neighbors, are con- 
siderably advanced in civilization. The American Board of Com- 
missioners for Foreign Missions, have in contemplation the spee- 
dy establishment of a mission among these Indians, preparations for 
which are already made. This is done at the earnest solicitation 
of the nation.* 

One of the Synods of the Carolinas, is engaged in planting an 
Education Family among this Indian nation. 

Of the Tribes west of the Mississippi, and north of the Missouri. 

Of these tribes I have here nothing to state, other than what 
will be found in pp. 34 and 35 of the Report, and in the Table. 

Appendix B. b. — Rep. p. 34. 

The contemplated establishment at the Council Bluffs, planned 
by Rev. Mr. Badger, of which some further account may be giv- 
en, if our limits permit, under the head of Miscellaneous Articles.- 

* See Dr. Worcester's Letter to the Secretary of War, p. 164. 

26 



202 



APPENDIX. 



is for the present suspended, but will probably, in some form, be 
renewed. 

App. C. c. — Rep. p. 35. 

See an account of the settlement referred to, in Report, p. 50- 
note. 

App. D. d. — Rep. p. 35. 

Interesting extracts from Mr. Harmon's Journal, relating to the 
manners and customs of the Indians on the north west borders of 
the United States, and the adjoining territories on the north, will 
be given under our Miscellaneous head, which see. 

The Table gives the names of the Tribes in this portion of our 
country, with their numbers and places of residence. 

In Maj. Marston's letter, p. 120, App. and Mr. Sibley's, p. 203, 
will be found important information concerning several of the large 
tribes w r ho inhabit the Territory of which we are speaking. With- 
in this Territory two military posts, one at the mouth of SL Pe- 
ter's river, and the other at the Council Bluffs, have been estab- 
lished by the Government. 

Of the Indian Tribes between the Missouri and Arkansaw rivers. 

Within the Territory of which I am now speaking, i. e. be- 
tween the Missouri river, north, and Red river, south, and the 
Mississippi, east, and the Rocky Mountains, west ; a number of 
the tribes lately residing on the east of the Mississippi, having 
sold all their lands to the U. States, are re-planted, or to be re- 
planted, on lands selected; or to be selected, and such as shall be 
approved by the tribes concerned. Some of these tribes are sat- 
isfactorily settled : others have had lands assigned them, with 
which they have been dissatisfied, and have refused to accept 
them ; and others still linger on the lands of their fathers' sepul- 
chres, which they have sold, and the places which are to be their 



APPENDIX. 



203 



future home are unknown to them. Not a few of the tribes lately 
rich in valuable lands, have now no spot to which they can point, 
and say, " that is my land; there is my home." 

Of the Indian tribes within the limits just mentioned, the fol- 
lowing information has been collected from various sources. 

Under this head I give first a letter from G. C. Sibley Esq. Fac- 
tor, at Fort Osage, to Thomas L. McKenney, Esq. giving a partic- 
ular and valuable account of the 

Osages, Kanzas, and Ioway Indians. 

" Fort Osage, 1st October, 1820. 

" Your letter of the 9th August, was received three days ago, 
I hasten to reply to the queries therein contained. 

" The tribes of Indians, who usually hold intercourse with this 
trading house, are 

" 1st. The Kansas, residing about three hundred miles up the 
Kansas river, in one village. They hunt all through the exten- 
sive country watered by the Kansas River, and on the Missouri, 
south side, above this place to the Noo!oway. I rate this tribe at 
somewhere about eight hundred souls, of whom about two hun- 
dred and thirty are warriors and hunters, thirty or forty superan- 
nuated old men, and the rest women and children. 

" 2d. The Great Osages, of the Osage River. They live in 
one village on the Osage river, seventy-eight miles (measured) 
due south from Fort Osage. They hunt over a very great extent 
of country, comprising the Osage, Gasconade and Neeozho rivers 
and their numerous branches. They also hunt on the heads of the 
St. Francis and White Rivers, and on the Arkansaw. I rate them at 
about one thousand two hundred souls, three hundred and fifty of 
whom are warriors and hunters, fifty or sixty superannuated, and 
the rest are women and children. 

" 3d. The Great Osages of the Neeozho, about one hundred 
and thirty or forty miles south west of Fort Osage ; one village on 
the Neeozho River. They hunt pretty much, in common with 
the tribe of the Osage river, from which they separated six or 



204 



APPENDIX. 



eight years ago. This village contains about four hundred souls, 
of whom about an hundred are warriors and hunters, some ten 
or fifteen aged persons, and the rest are women and children. 

" 4th. The Little Osages. Three villages on the Neeozho 
River, from one hundred and twenty to one hundred and forty 
miles south west of this place. This tribe, comprising all three 
villages, and comprehending about twenty families of Missouries 
that are intermarried with them, I rate at about one thousand 
souls, about three hundred of whom are hunters and warriors, 
twenty or thirty superannuated, and the rest are women and 
children. They hunt pretty much in common with the other 
tribes of Osages mentioned , and frequently on the head waters of 
the Kansas, some of the branches of which interlock with those of 
the Neeozho. 

" 5th. The Ioways, only visit this place occasionally. This 
tribe is about as numerous as the Kansas. They are latterly much 
divided, so that I am unable to state precisely how many villages 
they occupy, or where they are located. About half the tribe I 
understand joined the Ottoes, near the Council Bluffs, last year, 
with the intention of remaining there. I am not sure whether they 
still remain there or not. The other part of the tribe remains in 
two villages, I believe, on the De Moines and Grand Rivers*. The 
Ioways hunt principally between the Missouri, north of it, and 
Mississippi rivers, from the heads of the two Chacatons, up to the 
Nodoway, and sometimes still farther up. 

" 6th. Of the Chaneers, or Arkansaw tribes of Osages, I need 
say nothing, because they do not resort here to trade. I have al- 
ways rated that tribe at about an equal half of all the Osages. 
They hunt chiefly in the Arkansaw and White Rivers, and their 
waters. 

fc< It must be understood, that the above is merely an estimate 
of numbers founded on the general knowledge I have of the sev- 
eral tribes mentioned, and without any pretensions to accuracy, 
though I do not believe I am far from the truth ; if any thing, I am 
over the mark. As relates to the Osages ; it is next to impossi- 
ble to enumerate them correctly. I have made several attempts 
in vain. They are continually removing from one village to an- 
other, quarrelling and intermarrying, so that the strength of no 



APPENDIX. 



205 



particular village can ever be correctly ascertained. I do not be- 
lieve that any of the tribes, named above, increase in number, take 
them in the aggregate, and I think they are rather diminishing. 
They are always at war, and not a year passes that they do not 
lose some in that way. Epidemic diseases attack them now and 
then, and sweep them off by families. % 

" I proceed to answer your 4th query. The main dependence 
of each and every of the tribes I have mentioned, for clothing and 
subsistence, is hunting. They would all class alike in respect of 
their pursuits ; therefore, one general remark will suffice for all. 

" They raise annually small crops of corn, beans, and pumpkins, 
these they cultivate entirely with the hoe, in the simplest man- 
ner. Their crops are usually planted in April, and receive one 
dressing before they leave their villages for the summer hunt, in 
May. About the first week in August they return to their villa- 
ges to gather their crops, which have been left unhoed and unfen- 
ced all the season. 

" Each family, if lucky, can save from ten to twenty bags of corn 
and beans, of a bushel and a half each ; besides a quantity of dried 
pumpkins. On this they feast, with the dried meat saved in the 
summer, till September, when what remains is cashed, and they 
set out on the fall hunt, from which they return about Christmas. 
From that time, till some time in February or March, as the season 
happens to be mild or severe, they stay pretty much in their vil- 
lages, making only short hunting excursions occasionally, and dur- 
ing that time they consume the greater part of their cashes. In 
February or March the spring hunt commences ; first the bear, 
and then the beaver hunt. This they pursue till planting time, 
when they again return to their village, pitch their crops, and in 
May set out for the summer hunt, taking with them their residue, 
if any, of their corn, &c. This is the circle of an Osage life, 
here and there indented with war and trading expeditions ; and 
thus it has been, with very little variation, these twelve years past. 
The game is very sensibly diminishing in the country, which 
these tribes inhabit ; but has not yet become scarce. Its grad- 
ual diminution seems to have had no other effect on the In- 
dians, than to make them more expert and industrious hunters, 
and better warriors. They also acquire more skill in traffic, 



206 



APPENDIX. 



become more and more prone to practice fraud and deception in 
their commerce ; are more and more dependent upon the Tra- 
cers, and consequently more and more debased and degraded. 

" I ought to have stated that these people derive a portion of 
their subsistence regularly from the wild fruits their country 
abounds with. Walnuts, hazlenuts, paeons, acorns, grapes, plums, 
papaws. persimmons, hog potatoes, and several other very nutri- 
tious roots ; all of these they gather and preserve with care, and 
possess the art of preparing many of them, so^that they are really 
good eating. I have feasted daintily on the preparation of acorns 
(from the small white oak,) and Buffalo grease. I had the ad- 
vantage, however, of a good appetite, well whetted by nearly two 
days abstinence from food. The acorns and fat agreed with me, 
however, and convinced me that a man may very well subsist on 
it, if he can get nothing better. This dish is considered as the 
last resort, next to acorns alone. From these facts you will not 
be surprised to learn, that the arts of civilization have made but 
little progress, as yet, among the Indian nations in this quarter, 
knowing as you do, the natural propensity of the Indian to live 
without toil, upon the bounties of wild nature, rather than to sub- 
mit to what he considers the degradation of labor, in order to pro- 
cure sustenance. So long as the facilities I have enumerated exist, 
so long will exist the propensity to rely chiefly on them. This 
is nature. Art assumes the reins when nature gives them up, and 
we cling to nature as long as we can. So long as her exuberant 
bosom affords us sustenance, there we tenderly repose, free and 
untrammelled. On the failure of that resource we are obliged 
to resort to art for support. The whole history of man shews that 
art never gets the ascendency of nature, without a desperate strug- 
gle, in which the object of contention is most piteously mangled, and 
often destroyed, and a compromise is always obliged to be effected; 
which compromise, if I understand the subject, is the very thing 
we call civilization, in reference to the Indian nations; an objectwe 
are all aiming at, and what I feel as anxious as any one to effect. 

" I have often noticed Indians observing, with much appa- 
rent interest, the effects of our agricultural skill, our fine gar- 
dens, abundant crops, and our numerous comforts and convenien- 
ces. A very sensible Osage, the Big Soldier, who had twice been 



APPENDIX. 



207 



at Washington, once said to me, when I was urging the subject of 
civilization on him; " I see and admire your manner of living, 
your good warm houses ; your extensive fields of corn, your gar- 
dens, your cows, oxen, work-houses, waggons, and a thousand ma- 
chines, that 1 know not the use of. I see that you are able te 
clothe yourselves, even from weeds and grass. In short you can 
do almost what you choose. You whites possess the power of 
subduing almost every animal to your use. You are surrounded 
by slaves. Every thing about you is in chains, and you are slaves 
3'ourselves. I fear if I should exchange my pursuits for yours, I 
too should become a slave. Talk to my sons, perhaps they may be 
persuaded to adopt your fashions, or at least to recommend them 
to their sons ; but for myself, I was born free, was raised free, 
and wish to die free." It was in vain to combat the good man's 
opinions with argument. " I am perfectly content," he added, "with 
my condition. The forests and rivers supply all the calls of na* 
ture in plenty, and there is no lack of white people to purchase 
the surplus products of our industry." This is the language that 
is held by the Indians in this quarter generally. Like all people 
in a state of ignorance, they are bigoted, and obstinately adhere 
to their old customs and habits. 'Tis in vain to attempt to bend 
the aged oak to our purposes. The tender sapling, however, can 
be made to yield to our efforts, and bend to our will. 

"The Missionary establishment now forming near the Osages, I 
have no doubt will tend very much to promote the civilization of 
those tribes, so far at least, as regards the rising generation. Few, 
if any, of those now above the age of fifteen, will ever wholly aban- 
don their present savage pursuits. 

" It is a singular fact, however, that although the Indians who 
have attained the age of twenty -five years and upwards, generally 
refuse instruction, yet they seem by no means averse to have their 
children taught our arts. 

" I will conclude this communication with the following proposi- 
tion, which you may make use of as you think proper. It is for 
the Government, by compact with the Indians, to cause to be 
surveyed certain dstricts of the Indian lands, suitable for the pur- 
pose, in the same manner that the United States lands are survey- 
ed: only I would recommend that the lines should be more dis- 



208 



APPENDIX. 



tinctly marked. Whenever an Indian evinced a serious disposi- 
tion to settle himself permanently, and to pursue civilized habits, a 
portion of this land, from 160 to 640 acres, as might be proper, 
should be allotted to him, patented to him by the Government, and 
secured to him and family forever. He should not have the right 
to sell, or alienate it, in any manner, except by the express per- 
mission of the President of the United States, nor should it be held 
liable for debts. 1 believe that by locating each Indian family, dis- 
posed to adopt our mode of living, on a tract of land, of their own 
distinctly marked out, and permanently secured to them, Govern- 
ment would greatly promote the scheme of civilization. You 
would thus give them, at once, a distinct and permanent property, 
an interest in the soil, instead of a vague, transient, undivided, 
property in a vast extent of country, from which the art of a few 
of his leaders may expel him forever at any time. Each individ- 
ual may thus be secured in his own right. He may have a house, 
where he and his family, may live securely on the fruits of their 
own industry. Each may sit under his own vine and fig tree, and 
have none to make him afraid. At present each individual Indian 
is emphatically an outcast in his own territory. We are perpetu- 
ally norrowing their limits by purchases. By degrees they resign 
to us their best lands, and rind themselves at length hemmed up, 
like a herd of Buffaloes, in a remote corner of their once boundless 
possessions. Here they sit down in despair; they have no longer 
a home or a country. Yet here we pursue them, and importune 
them to become farmers, after their spirits are broken, and after 
they have unwillingly deprived themselves of the power of posses- 
ing what a farmer values most, an independent home. 

I forbear any farther remarks on this subject for the present. 
A little reflection, will, I am sure, satisfy you that it is worthy of 
consideration. GEO. SILBY. 

Extinction of Indian title to State of Missouri, and part of Arkan- 
sas® Territory. 

"In the year 1817, the Indian title (by different Treaties,) had 
been extinguished to about 70,000 square miles, a tract as large a? 



APPENDIX. 



209 



the whole of New-England, included within the following bounda- 
ries. Beginning at the mouth of the Kanzas, three hundred miles 
up the Missouri river, in lat. 39° 5' north, and running north over 
a rich country, 100 miles, to the head of the little river Platte; 
then east, over naked sterile ridges, 160 miles, to the river des 
Moines, (river of the monks) then down that river, 16 miles, to 
its mouth in the Mississippi. South of the Missouri, the line be- 
gins at Prarie de Flu, thirty miles below the mouth of the Kanzas, 
and runs south, 254 miles down that river to Arkansaw; then down 
that river, supposed 250 miles, to the Mississippi."* 

The above limits embrace the whole state of Missouri, and the 
eastern part of Arkansaw Territory. 

Education Establishments. 

Within these limits, I may say, indeed, within the whole of that 
part of the United States, which lies west of the Mississippi river, 
but three Education Families have as yet been planted; these are 
named Dwight, among the Cherokees on the Arkansaw river; Union 
and Harmony, among the Osages. These Establishments were co- 
etaneously made. The first, was projected, and has been conduct- 
ed by the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions; 
the other two, by the United Foreign Missionary Society. I in- 
troduce my account of these Establishments with the following 

"Extract of a letter from the Rev. Dr. Milledoler, Corresponding 
Secretary of the United Foreign Missionary Society, dated, Nezv- 
York, Nov. 30th, 1819, addressed to the Secretary of War. 

" Since my last communication which 1 had the honor to make to 
you in behalf of the U. F. M. Society, the Board of Managers 
have received a letter from their agents, Rev. Messrs. Chapman and 
Vinall,t dated, Cherokee nation, Dardanelles, 400 miles up the 
Arkansaw, July 17, 1819. 

* Brown's Western Gazetteer. I do not find the Treaties which authen- 
ticate the above statement. I give it on Mr. Brown's authority, 

tMr. Vinall, in ascending the Arkansaw river, overcome by his great fa- 
tigues and privations, was unable to proceed with his companions to the end 
of his joerney. He was left in the best practicable situation, languished and 

27 



210 



APPENDIX. 



" Aided as they were by the government of the United States, 
and by their agents in that quarter, they met with a very friendly 
reception from the Indians. 

" Their disposition towards us will appear from the following 
Talk, dictated by Speaker, a principal chief in a council held at 
fort Detroit, and addressed to their emigrant brethren, whom they 
shortly expect to join on the Arkansaw. 

Fort Deposit, Cherokee Nation, June 23, 1819. 

"Friends and Brothers, 

"We have had the pleasure to have had Messrs. Chapman and 
Vinall, missionaries from New- York with us two days. They 
have come a great way. We approve of their object. We wish 
our children to be educated, and we are much pleased to know 
that they, as well as the good men that have sent them to us, are 
disposed to do good to our children. We feel the want of those 
things, which they will teach our children, and which we are sen- 
sible will prove beneficial to them. They come well recommend- 
ed. They have recommendations from the Department of War, 
and also from the Department of State, and from the honorable 
Society which have sent them. We do therefore request all those 
chiefs who are now in the Arkansaw county, to receive these 
missionaries kindly, as our friends and brothers, and render them 
all the assistance in their power in establishing schools among the 
Cherokees, and in endeavoring to etablish schools among the 
neighboring tribes : and thus let us manifest by our conduct, that 
the Cherokees are not behind any other red people in acknowl- 
edging the endeavors of good white men, to raise our youth to 
equal privileges, with those of an}^ nation of the Earth. 
We are your friends and brothers, 
By the beloved man, a King. 

Speaker, 

John Brown, Sen'r. and by other 
Chiefs to the number, in all, of twenty -four." 
To Reuben Lewis, Esq. U. S. Agent. 

died, a martyr to his pious zeal to save the Indians. He was a young man of 
respectable talents, eminent piety, and devoted to the cause of missions. Hie 
spirit, we trust, is with the host of martyrs in heaven. 



APPENDIX. 



211 



"The above talk was presented by Maj. Lewis (our missionaries 
being sick at the time) to a council of the principal chiefs on the 
Arkansaw convened to receive it, and was received in a very favor- 
able manner. They determined to locate the desired establish- 
ment not many miles from the east line of their country, "be- 
cause, (to use their own language) wherever white man sets down 
his foot, he never could be made to take it up, but it grew and 
spread with astonishing rapidity." They also reserved to them- 
selves the privileges of removing the missionaries, if their future 
operations should be found injurious to the rights of the nation. 
These Indians are represented by our agents, as extremely desir- 
ous of having their children instructed; and they also speak very fa- 
vorably of the site which has been marked out for the missionary 
establishment. 

"With respect to the sums wanted to carry into effect our mis- 
sionary plans, I can only say, that a single establishment, on the 
plan contemplated in our general principles, will necessarily incur 
a heavy expenditure; but as our views are not confined to a single 
establishment, and we intend, if means are afforded, to plant one 
star after another, until the whole western wilderness shall be 
lighted up, from Arkansaw to the Missouri; we are ready thank- 
fully to receive, and faithfully to apply, all the means that the 
friends of missions among ourselves, and the munificence of the 
general government, shall place at our disposal. 

"As soon as our agents shall have returned from their tour, who 
are daily expected, and we shall have been favored with an an- 
swer to this communication, we shall be ready and disposed to com- 
mence our exertions." 

App. E. e. — Kep. p. 36. 

I begin this article with a general description of that part of the 
extensive Territory of Arkansaw, which embraces all the stations 
of the Education Families, mentioned under this head. This de- 
scription is furnished to my hand by Kis Excellency, Gov. Miller, 
in a letter, dated, " Post of Arkansaw, 3ept. 2, 1820,* as follows: 

* Am. Miss. Reg. for Jan. 1821. 



212 



APPENDIX. 



" This country must be called sickly. Every new comer, with- 
out exception, has been sick. The sickness here is fever and 
ague ; a slow bilious fever, &c. Very few deaths occur by dis- 
ease, but people remain weak and fit for nothing a long time. 

" I suppose it would be agreeable to you to receive some de- 
scription of this unknown country. It is situated between 33 a 
and 36° 30' N. Lat. and extends from the Mississippi to the west- 
ern boundary of the possessions of the United States. It is a very 
large extent of country, thinly settled. In the village of Arkan- 
saw there are seventeen houses, (dwellings) and this is, perhaps, 
as large a village as is in the Territory. From this, on the mail 
route, we have to travel without a house or shelter, three days, to 
get to a settlement, across a prairie. In crossing this, water is a 
scarce article. In fact, there is a great want of water all over this 
country, with very few exceptions. 

" The Arkansaw is a fine navigable river, for more than a thou- 
sand miles, at a middle stage of water, and affords as rich land, on 
both sides, as there is in the world. In fact, on all the rivers 
land abundantly rich and fertile is uniformly to be found. Back 
from the water streams, the land is quite indifferent ; you may say 
poor, till you go west two or three hundred miles, then it is very 
good. The country is flat and level from the Mississippi west for one 
hundred and sixty miles, then it becomes hilly and broken, and 
rocky on all the hills. Of animals in this country, both winged and 
quadruped, we have no want. There is almost every species of 
the bird and fowl in great abundance — wild geese and swans, tur- 
kies, quails, rabbits, raccoons, bear, wolf, catamount, wild-cat, bea- 
ver, otter, deer, elk, and buffaloe ; the huntsman has full scope. 

" As to the minerals, we have plenty of iron, lead, coal, salt, 

&LC. 

" This country is the best for raising stock of every kind that I 
have ever seen. A man may raise and keep, summer and winter, 
any number he pleases. They grow large and handsome. 

" Cotton and corn are the staple articles. The land, well ten- 
ded, will average about one thousand in the seed, to the acre ; 
corn from fifty to sixty bushels. The crop is good this year, but 
the birds destroy vast quantities of the corn. 

" I have spent more than two months on a visit to the Chero- 
kee and Osage Indians this summer. The object of my visit to 



APPENDIX. 



213 



the Indian villages, was to settle a difficulty between them. I went 
on to the Cherokees, (250 miles) and held a council with them. 
They agreed to send four of their chiefs with me to the Osages, 
about 350 miles further. The settlement of the Cherokees is 
scattered for a long extent on the river, and appears not much dif- 
ferent from those of the white people. They are considerably 
advanced towards civilization, and were very decent in their de- 
portment. They inhabit a lovely, rich part of the country. 

" The Osage village is built as compactly as Boston, in the centre 
of a vast prairie. All the warriors, chiefs, and young men met us 
two miles from the town on horseback, mounted on good horses, 
and as fine as they had feathers or any thing else to make them. 
They professed much friendship. I got them to suspend their 
hostilities. 

" The Osage town consisted of one hundred and fifty dwellings, 
with from ten to fifteen in each house. The average height of 
the men is more than six feet. They are entirely in a state of 
nature. Very few white people have ever been among them. 
They know nothing of the use of money, nor do they use any ar- 
dent spirits. 

" I pitched my tent about half a mile from the town, and remain- 
ed five days. They made dances and plays every night to amuse me. 
These Indians have a native religion of their own, and are the on- 
ly tribe I ever knew that had. At day-break, every morning, I 
could hear them at prayer, for an hour. They appeared to be as 
devout in their way as any class of people. They made a present 
of eight horses when I left them. 

" I got there two horned frogs — they are a curiosity. I kept 
one of them alive twenty-two days ; it then laid twenty-two eggs 
as large, and about the shape and appearance of a large white 
bean, and died. I have them all preserved in spirits. I obtained 
the skin of the young wild hog : this is a curiosity — likewise the 
skin of the badger. I procured also some salt that came from the 
salt prairie, which is covered for many miles from four to six inch- 
es deep, with pure, white, crystallized salt. All men agree, both 
white and Indian, who have been there, that they can cut and slice 
off a foot square. This place is about one thousand three hun- 
dred miles, by the course of the river, above this. One branch of 
the Arkansaw passes through this prairie, and sometimes over- 



214 



APPENDIX. 



flows it. When this i 3 the case, the water in the river here is too 
salt to drink. There is a place about one hundred and fifty mile? 
from this where the w^ater gushes out of a mountain so hot, that 
you may scald and dress a hog with the water as it comes from 
the ground. This is a fact which admits of no doubt." 

Dzvight. 

This is the name given to the Education Establishment formed 
by the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, 
among the emigrant Cherokees, on Arkansaw river. In June 
1820, the two branches of the Family destined for this distant sta- 
tion, having proceeded by different routs, met on the spot destin- 
ed for their future residence, and scene of labor in civilizing and 
evangelizing the Indians, Gov. Miller, with whom they had an 
interview on their arrival, expressed his very cordial approba- 
tion of their object, and his readiness to lend them all the aid in 
his power for its accomplishment. 

The site selected for the Establishment, is on the west bank of 
the Illinois river, a northern branch of the Arkansaw, about five 
miles from their junction, on a gentle eminence, covered with a 
growth of oak and pine. At the foot of the eminence issues a large 
spring of pure water, yielding an abundant supply of this comfort 
and necessary of life. The Illinois, three fourths of the year, is 
navigable for keel boats, as far as the Establishment. Above, op- 
posite, and below it, is plenty of excellent bottom land for cul- 
ture, and conveniently near a good mill seat. From the circum- 
stances mentioned, the situation promises to be very eligible ; 
pleasant and healthful ; and is also conveniently near the Indian 
villages. It is one hundred miles below Fort Smith ; two hun- 
dred above the Arkansaw post ; and about five hundred, as the 
river runs, from the mouth of the Arkansaw. The first log-house 
was raised here the 28th September, 1820. 

" The name of Dwight was given to this establishment in af- 
fectionate remembrance of the late Timothy Dwight, D. D. LL. 
D. President of Yale College, who was a warm and devoted friend 
to Missions, a distinguished and active member of the Board, and 
ihe first of that body who died, after its incorporation."* 

* Annual Report of the Missionaries to the Secretary of War, Sept. 1821. 



APPENDIX. 



215 



The Superintendants of this Establishment, in their last annual 
Report to the Secretary of War, give to him the following ac- 
count. 

" We all arrived in this country in the month of Juty, 1820. 
Sickness, however, with which we were all affected, prevented 
our entering immediately on the work in view, and has greatly 
retarded our operations since their commencement. The site 
selected was a wilderness. The first tree was felled on the 25th 
of August. Since that time, we have cleared and enclosed with a 
substantial fence, about twenty acres, most of which is improved 
the present season. We have also erected four cabins of hewed 
logs, for dwelling houses ; two of which are twenty feet square, 
with piazzas on two sides, and two are 18 feet by 22, with piazzas 
on one side. A school house, 24 feet by 36, is nearly completed, 
constructed on the Lancasterian plan, and designed to accommo- 
date one hundred children. A considerable part of the work is 
done for a dining hall and kitchen in one building, 24 feet by 68, 
with piazzas on both sides, and a cellar under it, 24 feet by 40. 
Aside from what has been mentioned, we have built a corn-crib 
and stable, and have cleared and fenced a garden, yards, &c. 

" The property, at present belonging to the establishment, con- 
sists principally of stock and farming utensils : — three horses, two 
yoke of oxen, ten cows and calves, between thirty and forty head 
of swine, two waggons, one cart, ploughs, &c. 

" We have not yet made sufficient progress to enable us to open 
b school for the instruction of heathen children ; but hope to do 
so in about tw r o months. The number, which will be admitted to 
enjoy the privileges of instruction, cannot at present be named, 
as no limits will be set. to the extent of benevolent action, except 
what is involved in the want of means. 

The plan upon which the school will be conducted, is similar t^o 
that of the schools at Brainerd and Eliot, with which the executive 
is in some measure acquainted, and which has already received its 
approbation. The plan requires, that all the children taken into 
the school, be received also into our family, that they may be con- 
stantly under our care and direction. By taking them before 
their habits are formed, placing them in a Christian family, and 
teaching them not only the common branches of human learning, 
but the various kinds of labor on the farm, and in the work-shop; 



216 



APPENDIX. 



and thereby inuring them to habits of industry, temperance, and 
sobriety, there will be a foundation laid for their future useful- 
ness, and reason to hope, so far as the influence of such an educa- 
tion extends, that the condition of our aborigines will be essential- 
ly improved. This plan of education, embracing a practical 
knowledge of agriculture, and such of the arts as are suited to the 
condition of the Indians, on the part of the boys ; and spinning, 
weaving, sewing, and the various kinds of labor in a well regula- 
lated family, on the part of the girls ; is that which we design to 
introduce into the school, about to be commenced. We fully ac- 
cord with the views of government, so far as they are known to 
us, as to the high importance of teaching Indian children to la- 
bor ; and not only how to do this to good advantage, but also to 
feel sensible of the necessity and utility of it in their own case ; 
and to prepare their minds gradually to be pleased with industri- 
ous habits and active life. But for the accomplishment of the 
object contemplated, time, perseverence, exertion, and no small 
expense, will be requisite ; particularly is it necessary, in order 
to make the Establishment respectable, useful, and permanent, 
that buildings for various mechanics, a saw and grist mill, and 
more dwelling and other houses, be erected, and a large planta- 
tion cleared, and put under the best cultivation, and farming and 
mechanic tools, and live stock increased in quantity and variety. 

" The actual performance of all this, will require greater means 
than we can at present expect, unless the benevolent aid and fos- 
tering hand of government be extended to us. To this we look 
with humble confidence, for at least a part of our resources for 
carrying on the great and highly important work of civilizing a 
part at least of our long neglected aborigines. To this work we 
have devoted ourselves for life, desiring and expecting no other 
earthly reward, than what is experienced in benevolent exertion, 
having a full conviction of its entire practicability." 

The distressing war, which has raged for some time between 
these Cherokees and the Osages, has created insurmountable ob- 
stacles to the progress and success of the infant Establishments 
among them. It is asked with deep solicitude, whether the gov- 
ernment, if persuasion fails to reconcile these contending nations, 
as is the fact, ought not, authoritatively, to forbid it? These In- 
dians, as are all others, within, and on the borders of our settle- 



APPENDIX. 



217 



merits, being by Treaties, in friendship and under the care of the 
Government, it would certainly be correct and humane, to inter- 
pose by force, if necessary, to stop this shocking warfare in the 
midst of us. It is chilling and painful to every good feeling in man, 
to witness such bloody and murderous scenes. But what can we 
say in condemnation of this savage warfare, while we permit, in 
open violation of the laws of God and of our country, our own cit- 
izens, and these too of the respectable class— -law-givers, to at- 
tempt deliberately and repeatedly to murder each other, without 
the effectual interposition of the authority which should prevent 
it ? How can we escape the just judgments of heaven, while such 
crimes are committed with impunity !* 

Union. 

This station, occupied by one of the Families sent out by the 
United Foreign Missionary Society, " is about twenty-five miles 
from the principal Osage village. It is situated on the west bank 
of Grand River, about twenty-five miles north of its entrance into 
the Arkansaw, and about seven hundred miles above the junction 
of the Arkansaw and the Mississippi. The buildings are erected 
on a moderate eminence, about one mile from the river, and 
equally distant from a valuable saline, at which a considerable 
quantity of salt is annually manufactured for the supply of the 
settlements below. The situation is pleasant, the soil rich, the 

*' Since the above was written, the following; article from the Fifth Report 
of the United Foreign Missionary Society has come under my notice. 

" It is believed that the Governor of the Territory, and the Commandant of 
the Garrison, had made every effort within their reach, to prevent the disas- 
ters which have occurred. They were not clothed with authority, to inter- 
pose the arm of military power ; nor had the Executive of our Government 
the right to communicate that authority. A bill to empower the President 
to resort to military force, for the purpose of suppressing Indian wars within 
the limits of the United States, was introduced into Congress during its late 
session ; but the friends of Missions, and the advocates of Indian civilization, 
have to lament, that a measure so interesting to both, was finally rejected. 
Until such a law shall have been enacted, or the Indians shall have univer- 
sally imbibed the spirit of the Gospel, no calculations can be made of a per- 
manent peace among the contiguous and conflicting Tribes in our country.'^ 



218 



APPENDIX. 



face of the surrounding country diversified, and the air and cli- 
mate generally more salubrious than in most places under the 
same latitude. The tract of land ceded to the Mission by the In- 
dian Chiefs, is bounded by Grand River, on the north and east, and 
by the adjacent hills, on the west and south ; embracing a prairie 
of about four square miles in extent. As its name denotes, it is 
unincumbered with trees or shrubs, and is at once fit for the 
scythe or the plough. So far as fuel is concerned, the deficiency 
of timber is already supplied by the discovery of mineral coal. 

" On the 20th of February, two days after the arrival of the 
Mission, they were visited by Tally, the second Osage Chief, and 
several of the counsellors and warriors of the tribe. The Chief 
expressed the warmest satisfaction at the arrival of the family. 
Among other things, he observed, "When Mr. Chapman first 
came to this country, he said he would come again and bring good 
white men and women to teach us. Now we see your faces ; and 
feel glad. We know you are true men." After a friendly inter- 
view, it was mutually agreed, that the Missionaries should visit 
the principal village in the course of a few days, for the purpose 
of attending a Council of the Chiefs, and of being formally introdu- 
ced to the tribe. 

"On the 5th of March, the Superintendant, Assistant, Physician, 
and one of the other brethren, proceeded, according to agreement, 
to the Indian village. On their approach they were met by Cla- 
more, the principal Chief, who bade them welcome, and conduc- 
ted them to his own residence. On their way through the village 
they were surrounded by hundreds of the natives, all apparently 
gratified by their arrival ; and, during the whole of their visit, 
they were entertained with a spirit of hospitality and kindness, 
which would have done honor to a civilized community. On the 
ensuing morning, a general council was convened. The Mission- 
aries were introduced, and their papers, furnished by the Society 
and the Government, were interpreted and explained. The prin- 
cipal Chief expressed on the occasion, the highest satisfaction ; 
and, in an animated and eloquent strain, recommended the Mis- 
sion, and its object, to the attention and the confidence of his peo- 
ple. He concluded with the assurance, that, should war not pre- 
vent, he would send his own children to the Missionary school, 
as soon as it should be opened for their reception. 



APPENDIX. 



219 



" The Osages of the Arkansaw occupy several villages. The 
principal village contains about three hundred lodges or huts, and 
about three thousand souls. The lodges are generally from fifty 
to a hundred feet in length ; and, irregularly arranged, they cover 
a surface of about half a mile square. They are constructed of 
posts, mattings, bark and skins. They have neither floors nor chim- 
neys. The fire is built on the ground, in the centre of the lodge, 
and the family, and the guests, sit around in a circle, upon skins 
or mats. The men are generally of a lofty stature, of a fine form, 
and of a frank and open countenance. In council they are dignifi- 
ed, and, in their speeches, eloquent. The women, although strong 
and active, are not proportionally tall. As in all uncivilized and 
pagan countries, the women are doomed to perform the drudgery 
of the nation, while the men resort to the chase or the battle, or 
consume their time in vain and unprofitable amusements. Their 
children are numerous, and remarkably submissive to parental au- 
thority. As a people, they are punctual, and apparently fervent 
in their morning and evening devotions ; but, like the ancient 
Athenians, they address their worship " to the unknown God." 
They live in the practice of polygamy, and of many other vices ; 
and like many a whiter, and better informed pagan, they deem it 
a virtue of the purest order, and an honor of the highest grade, to 
plunder, torture, and destroy their enemies. Such is a brief ac- 
count of the village, and of the character of the people, to whom 
you are conveying the arts of civilized life, and the glad tidings of 
the gospel. 

" On the 30th of October, 1821, the Superintendant and As- 
sistant transmitted the first annual Report of their improvements 
to the Secretary of War. By this report, it appears that the esti- 
mated value of the Missionary property at this station, including 
buildings, live stock, produce of the firm, agricultural and me- 
chanic tools, medicines, books, and furniture, amounted to more 
than seventeen thousand dollars. In addition to this amount, sup- 
plies to the value of three thousand dollars, shipped at this port, 
are now ascending the Arkansaw, or have recently arrived at the 
station. 

" In the month of August, it was ascertained, that the Great O- 
sage Mission had arrived at Harmony, and that a skilful interpreter 
had been found at the United States' Factory, in the immediate vi- 



220 



APPENDIX. 



cinity of that station. It was thought expedient that two of the breth- 
ren should repair thither, and pursue their study in company with 
the Assistant of the other Mission. Under the date of the 28th of 
December, Mr. Chapman states, that they had finished a Dictiona- 
ry, and the most important parts of a Grammar, and were then at- 
tending to the construction of sentences in the Osage language. 

" Another object of early attention and solicitude to the Fami- 
ly, was the opening of a school for the instruction of the Indian 
youth. As soon, therefore, as their school-house was finished, 
information of the fact was conveyed to the Chiefs, and they were 
invited to send their children without delay, Four children were 
brought to the school on the 27th of August, accompanied with 
the message, that others would soon follow, if war should not pre- 
vent. At the date of the latest advices, three of the children were 
still at the school, conducting themselves well, and making good 
improvement. The oldest of the four had been seduced away by 
a woman of the village, and was unwilling to return. Both the 
woman and the child were severely reprimanded by the Chiefs : 
and renewed assurances were given, that as soon as peace should 
be restored, as many children should be committed to the care of 
the Missionaries, as they would be able to accommodate and in- 
struct." 

Mr. Chapman's Journal. — Union, May 30, 1821. 

On the 10th November 1820, we examined the celebrated Sa- 
line, on Illinois river, and the apparatus just erected for making 
salt. This place had evidently been before occupied by Indians, 
or others, for the like purpose. 

" This country is, perhaps, better adapted to the raising of 
stock, than any other in the United States. Our cattle this spring, 
appear in a better state with only what they have gathered from 
the woods and prairies, than those in the country from which we 
came, with all the usual care and expense bestowed upon them. 
We have had, an accession of ten calves — so that we at present 
number thirty-seven head. They are perhaps, as fine a stock as 
can be found in any part of the country. Cattle, in this region, 
being a mixture of the Spanish breed, are generally larger and 
more beautiful, than those at the eastward. 



APPENDIX. 



221 



This country consists principally of prairies, large and small, 
skirted, near the rivers and creeks and on the mountains, with a 
scrubbed growth of oak. The inferiority of the timber is owing 
to the annual burning of the prairies. The river-bottoms contain 
ash, walnut, black-walnut, locust, hack-berry, cotton wood, &c. 
of various sizes. But these bottoms are of small extent, and gen- 
erally at a considerable distance from our residence. It is, there- 
fore, difficult to find suitable timber for large buildings. We have 
however, lately found a small grove of beautiful pine, about five 
miles distant. 

Soon after our arrival at Union, which was the 15th of No" 
vember, " the Principal Chief, with his son made us a visit. Hav- 
ing welcomed us with the utmost affection, he gave a history of 
the circumstances of his family and nation, since he saw me last 
year. He observed, among other things, that his family had been 
very sick, and that one of his wives had died. " But," he added, 
" the Great Spirit has been so good, that the remainder are all 
now in health." When he had finished, and expressed a wish to 
hear what I might have to say, I informed him, that after I had 
parted with him last year, I passed through his country, and told 
him by a letter the place I had selected for our settlement. I 
asked him whether he had received the letter, and whether my 
choice met his approbation. He replied in the affirmative ; and 
said, that the place I had selected was a good one, and was appro- 
priated to our use for the education of his people ; and added, 
that its limits should be Grand River on the east and north, and 
the surrounding hills on the other sides. This tract contains about 
four square miles. I then told him, that after having been long 
interrupted by sickness on my return home, I arrived and infor- 
med their Great Father, the President, and the Society of good 
white brothers, who had sent me out, that their red brethren, the 
Osage Indians, were desirous that good men and women should 
come to teach them ; that, when the inquiry was made who would 
go and help our red brothers and sisters, these good people who 
had come with me said "we will go ;" and that we all immedi 
ately left our fathers and mothers, brothers and sisters, and came 
on to instruct them and do them good. I mentioned, that sickness 
had kept some of our good people back ; that the Great Spirit 
was so merciful that only two had died ; and that the remainder 



222 



APPENDIX. 



were recovering, and would join us as soon as the water should 
rise. Having finished my 'narrative, I showed him our papers. 
He then, evidently elevated with jo} r , exclaimed — " This is a 
bright day ! This day is glorious ! There are no dark clouds to 
hinder the light of this bright day !" 

Harmony, 

The best view of the location and present state of the Educa- 
tion Establishments at this station, is given in the letters and jour- 
nals of its principal members. 

Mr. Newton writes to General Steele, from Harmony, state of 
Missouri, September 27th, 1821, thus — 

" Harmony is situated on the margin of the Marias de Cein river, 
about six miles above its junction with the Osage. This place 
was granted to us by the Indians in Council, on the 13th of Au- 
gust. 

" Our limits embrace excellent timber in abundance ; first rate 
prairies for ploughing, pasturing, and mowing ; the only mill-seat 
known in this vast country ; stone coal on the surface of the 
ground, and within a few rods of our buildings : and a large ridge 
of lime stone, sufficiently near for our convenience. Our river 
bottoms are rather low for cultivation, without draining ; but our 
prairies are high, and inclining towards the creeks, which re- 
ceive and carry off the surplus water. The soil of our prairies 
is a dark, rich loam, about two feet thick, beneath which we have 
clear clay, as deep as we have yet penetrated. We shall depend 
on wells for water for family use. The grass of the prairies va- 
ries from two to seven feet in height, and forms an average im- 
pediment to travelling, equal to that of snow from eight to ten in- 
ches in depth. 

Cattle are raised in this country without much expense. Indian 
corn can be bought for fifty cents a barrel, of about jive bushels. 
Pork in the hog is advertised at seventy-five cents per hundred 
weight. This abundance is within a hundred miles of us, and 
there is a waggon way from our Station to Fort Osage, seventy- 
eight miles of the distance. 



APPENDIX. 



223 



Mr. Sprague writes about the same time to his brother — 

" Our buildings will be erected on the river's bank, but suffi- 
ciently remote to give us a spacious and handsome green in front. 
In the rear we have a vast prairie, covered with grass, yiekling in 
its uncultivated state, from one and a half to two tons of hay on the 
acre. On either side of us we have good timber in great plenty. 
We have, also, near at hand, an excellent spring of water, stone 
coal, lime stone, and clay of the first quality for making bricks. 
Our Mill-sent is about a mile below us, and directly opposite to 
the United States' trading house, which was commenced in July, 
and which is to be completed by the first of next month. We 
are within fifteen miles of the great Osage village. 

" The Indians appear very friendly. They frequently visit us; 
and we feel the assurance, that some of their children will be 
sent to us as soon as we are able to accommodate them. Mr. Wil- 
liams, the interpreter, talks of giving us his little daughter, who 
can speak both the English and the Osage languages, and who, of 
course, would be of great help to us." 

The latest accounts from Harmony, are up to February of this 
year. (1822.) 

Mr. Dodge writes thus to the Domestic Secretary. Jan. 1822: — 
" We have already twelve children, who are given to us for in- 
struction. We have not as yet built a school house, but, at pres- 
ent, occupy one of our houses for the use of the school. We cal- 
culate to build accommodations for the school, as fast as they are 
needed, so as not to reject one Indian child that may be offered 
for our instruction. As our family is now large, and we have the 
prospect of a numerous school, we think it would promote the 
interests of the mission, if the Board were to send us a carpen- 
ter and joiner, a thorough workman at tanning and shoemaking, an 
additional farmer, and a man acquainted with brickmaking and 
bricklaying. Some, or all of these, would be ver}' useful at this 
station immediately. * 

"We have several hands employed in assisting us in erecting 
some necessary out-buildings, preparing us a well, splitting and 
hauling ra ; !s to fence our field, &c. We calculate to commence 



224 



APPENDIX. 



building a saw-mill, and grist-mill, early this spring, with the hope 
of having them finished in the fall. We have fitted up a room, 
which will probably hold forty scholars; and our school is now in 
operation under as favourable circumstances as we could expect. 
We find much difficulty in persuading the natives to give up their 
children, and in keeping them after they have been given up. 

" Brother Sprague is doing very well in the blacksmith depart- 
ment; but he very much needs an assistant, which we wish you 
would procure for us, one who is a real, substantial workman; for 
we have not only our own work to do, which we find must be 
considerable; but the Indians are determined to come here for 
their work also, although they have a blacksmith under pay from 
the United States. Some of the principal men among the Osages 
have manifested a wish that governmennt would establish their 
blacksmith at our station. 

" The mode of building in this country, if it is ever settled, will 
undoubtedly be with brick, as there is abundance of the best of 
clay to make them, and of lime-stone for lime; and there is but 
little timber, the country being principally open prairie. If econ- 
omy is used in this country with the timber, there may be enough 
to finish brick buildings, and no more. We have concluded, if we 
ever erect permanent buildings in this place, they must be of brick . 

Rev. Mr. Pixley to the Domestic Secretary, 

" Previous to our coming out to this distant country, the public 
jnind had been prepared, to suppose these Osages a very different 
people from what they are ; but, however things may have been 
presented to our minds about the condition and desires of this 
people, a better knowledge of their case, from actual observation, 
does not less excite our pity, nor make us wish we had not come 
out for their instruction. They pray, indeed, if it may be called 
prayer, as we were told ; and even now, as the day dawns, whilst 
I am writing in my house, I can hear them at their orgies, where 
their lodges are set up more than a mile from me. They begin 
very high in a sing-song note, as loud as they can halloo, and then 
run their voice, as long as they can carry breath, to the lowest 
key. Thus they continue the strain, until they are wrought to 
a pitch, wherein you will hear them sob and cry, as though their 
hearts would break. I have not yet learned, whether it be some 



APPENDIX. 



225 



particular individuals, who make this their business, as mourning 
men and women, or whether they are all adepts in it. In such a 
case, they put mud upon their faces and heads, which, as I under- 
stand, they do not wash off till their desire is in some measure an- 
swered. Thus, you will often see men, women, and children, be- 
daubed with black mud. But this is more especially the case 
when they are going off upon an expedition to shoot game, or to 
fight their enemies, or when they hear some bad news, or have 
lost some friend or relative. In warm weather, the men go quite 
in a state of nature, except a cloak around their waists. Many, 
and indeed most of their little children, are seen going abroad na- 
ked, even at this cold season of the year, notwithstanding the ther- 
mometer has sometimes stood below zero, and the ground is fro- 
zen six or eight inches deep. Their villages are nothing more 
than what they can remove on the shortest notice, one horse be- 
ing capable of carrying house, household furniture, and children 
all at one load. From this period of the year to the time of plant- 
ing their corn, they generally reside together at one place, which 
they call their village. The rest part of the time, they separate 
into parties, and stay but a few days in a place, in proportion to 
the abundance or scarcity of the game where they happen to set 
up their lodges. 

" Our school went into operation about two weeks since ; and 
we have now twelve children from the natives, of both sexes, and 
of all sizes ; five of the full blooded, and seven half breed. These 
children are certainly as interesting and active as the generality 
of children among the whites, and I have sometimes thought they 
are more so : and the Lancasterian method of instruction is pe- 
culiarly calculated to interest them. We are now all turning our 
attention to the more particular business of our designation ; and 
mine is the laborious undertaking of becoming master of the In- 
dian language. It is not, however, that which I dread. Strange 
as it may seem, never did I enter upon the Latin or Greek with 
more desire than I do upon this language ; and the thought of be- 
ing able to speak to them fluently in their own tongue, makes no 
sacrifice or privation appear great or difficult, to compass such an 
object: and when this is gained, I am not certain but that a trans- 
lation of some part of the Scriptures, and readers sent out from 
the school, as soon as they should be prepared, would be a most 



226 



APPENDIX. 



valuable method of advancing the mass of the nation in knowledge 
and of improving their morals. 

Miss Comstock to her f riend in Connecticut. 

" I have a little girl, twelve years old, given to me. She has 
only been with me six days ; and has learned all her letters, and 
will write them very well. She is, as far as I can judge, a very 
amiable girl. She is the daughter of a Chief ; and, of course, 
quite distinguished among them. She was obtained by the instru- 
mentality of our interpreter, who gave her the name Ballariah. 
It is my prayer, and let it be yours, that she may prove a second 
Catharine Brown. We have the promise of several more of the 
children of the tribe, when they return from their winter's hunt. 

" We receive visits from the natives almost daily. Sans Neuf 
was present last Sabbath during our worship. He expressed 
much satisfaction, that he could see so many children with us. 
How frequently do I weep over their moral blindness, and pray 
that Christians may do much to remove it ; and by their prayers, 
strengthen our hands, and encourage our hearts. This is an ar- 
duous, self-denying work, but the most interesting in which I was 
ever engaged." 

Extracts from the Journals of Superintendants, and other Members 
of the Education Establishments, at Union and Harmony, des- 
cribing their present state, and the character and manners of In - 
dians. 

From Union, Dr. Palmer writes — March 18, 1820. 

" The soil I find superior perhaps to any I have before seen. 
The place chosen is a fine prairie, containing eight hundred or 
one thousand acres of land, fringed around by woods. On one 
side flows Grand river, a rapid stream; and navigable part of the 
year. In this country are to be found, in considerable abundance, 
wild horses, buffaloes, elk, bears, wolves, deer, panthers, swans, 
geese, ducks, turkies, and honey. About a mile distant, is a salt- 
spring, which will be wrought this season. 

" Soon after we arrived, some of the Indians came, as they 
said, to shake hands with us. We found them equal to our ex- 



APPENDIX. 



227 



pectations in every respect, a noble race of people. In this in- 
troduction, we agreed, at their request, to hold a council with 
them at their town, within ten days. At the appointed time, I was 
one of the four, who went over to the council. In passing that 
distance, about twenty-five miles, we found the land a continued 
level, and rich prairie. When we came in sight of the town, we 
had one of the grandest prospects I ever beheld. To a great ex- 
tent around the town, the land appears perfectly level. On one 
side runs the Vermillion river. At two or three miles distance 
from the town, there are several natural mounds, rising directly 
from a perfect plain, to the height of about two hundred feet. All 
the mounds appear to rise just to the same height, and as level 
at the top as the adjacent plains. The one nearest the town has 
about three acres on the top, and is accessible only in one or two 
places. 

"As we approached the town, the head Chief came out to meet 
us, and bid us welcome. In a short time we were surrounded by 
hundreds, apparently happy to see us. The Chief took us to his 
lods;e. In walking through the town we were continually annoy- 
ed by a host of surly, snarling dogs, who were not accustomed to 
the dress and appearance of the whites. The dress of the Indians 
consists of buckskins dressed, made into leggins, reaching to the 
hips ; on their feet mockasins ; and a buffaloe robe or blanket 
about their shoulders. They shave off their hair close to their 
heads, except a line, about half an inch wide, running round the 
head. The hair thus left, is cut about an inch long ; within this 
line of hair, they fasten an ornament. Their ears are slit in sev- 
eral places, and filled with strings of beads. In addition to these, 
they have many other kinds of ornaments about their arms and 
legs. 

" Their houses are made of poles, arched from fifteen to twenty 
feet, covered by matting made of flaggs. At the sides they set up 
rived planks, lining the inside with neatly made flagg matting. 
They build several fires in the lodge, according to its size, or the 
number of wives the owner has. For a fire-place, they dig a hole 
about as big as a bushel-basket, leaving the smoke to ascend through 
a hole in the roof. Around the fire they spread their mats to 
sit or eat. 



228 



APPENDIX* 



" Having entered the lodge, and had our horses turned out, we 
took a humble seat around the fire. Presently there was brought 
to us a wooden bowl, filled with food made of corn. In a short 
time we were invited to eat at another lodge, and before we had 
finished, at another, and another. In the same manner we were 
treated, during all the time we remained in the village. It is im- 
possible to give you any idea of their cooking. It was so strange, 
as well as new, and withal they were so filthy, that I believe, if I 
were to live with them, I should have a dangerous seasoning." 

From Rev. Mr. Vaill — Union, Aug. 24, 1821. 

s< The Osages on the Arkansaw greatly need an Agent. They 
think they have been neglected, and we believe they have reason 
to think so. They are a numerous and powerful part of the Na- 
tion. No village is so large as this. By a late estimation, it con- 
tains more than twice the number of any other. We strongly hope 
that Congress will attend to their wants the next session." 

Mr. Redfield— Union, Sept. 26, 1821. 

" The Osages, during the most of the summer, have been ab- 
sent from their town, following the chase. Game about home being 
scarce, they hunt at a distance. They move from home in a body: 
men, women, and children, leaving none behind. Wanderers, 
indeed, upon the mountains, without a shepherd. They know 
no other way. They have never been taught. 

" I was awaked in the morning by the cries of the Osages, in 
every direction to the Great Spirit. I walked out, with my inter- 
preter, to see them and to know what they said. Their prayers 
appeared to be, that their enemies might be subdued, and that 
they might triumph over them. I was informed that they always 
pray for that which concerns them most at the time. In the midst 
of their prayers they black their faces, but wash again before they 
eat." 

From Harmony — Mr. Sprague. 

k ' It is painful to reflect on the condition of the Indians to whom 
we have come. The moon they call heaven, to which we are all 



APPENDIX. £29 

going at death. The sun they call the Great Spirit, which governs 
the moon and earth. When asked, " Where do the bad white 
men go?" they answer, "to the moon." 

"On the 14th of August we began to cut hay, which is produc- 
ed at about one and an half or two tons to the acre. On Monday, 
the 27th, brothers Chapman and Fuller arrived from the Union 
Mission, on the Arkansaw ; which is about one hundred and fifty 
miles from us." 

Mrs. Jones — Harmomy, Aug. 17, 1821. 

" While I write this, five of my red brethren and sisters are 
seated by my side. One woman, with a smiling countenance, sits 
viewing me, and says, she cannot write, but can speak some En- 
glish. On our first interview, about fifty men, women and chil- 
dren unexpectedly came on shore to see us. They appeared 
much pleased. We visited their wigwams. They gave us green 
corn and water-melons. 

" Some of the Indians have pleasant, intelligent countenances. 
They appear to have great confidence in us. They say our hearts 
appear good outside now, but they wish to try us three years, and 
in that time they can judge whether they are good inside." " They 
appear fond of our children, often clasp them in their arms, and 
bring them presents of nuts. The Chiefs and the Big Warrior as- 
sure us, that they will protect us from injury from their nation, 
and that our smallest child shall experience no harm." 

Mr. Jones — Harmony. 

"From the time we left New-York to the time we reached our 
station, was something more than five months. The distance not 
far from two thousand two hundred miles. 

"When the Council assembled at Harmony, we found it a truly 
interestingseasontoall present. The Indians discovered to us minds 
as well stored with knowledge, as could be expected of the children 
of nature. They seemed to be happy that we had come, and ex- 
pressed much willingness to give up their children to be instruct- 
ed in the arts of civilization. They promised to give to us what- 
ever land we should mark out. Since that time they have fre- 
quently visited us, and seem to be happy in our society. They 



230 



APPENDIX. 



are in appearance as noble a race of people as I have ever seen. 
We are hoping in the spring to be able to put our school into ope- 
ration, and then we shall be able to find what abilities they have 
to learn. 

" The men are large and well-built— not many of them are less 
than six feet in height. I think we have great encouragement to 
believe, that it will not be long before their habits will be changed, 
and they become both civilized and christianized." 

From the Super intendant — Union, Dec. 26, 1821. 

"We are daily talking among ourselves about the way to obtain 
more of the Osage children. We can say to them, in the words 
of the Gospel — Come, for all things are now ready. Brother 
Woodruff made them a visit last week. He was much affected 
with a sight of their poverty. He rode over in company with the 
father of the children who are with us. On their arrival, the fa- 
ther told the Osages how well his children were fed and clothed, 
and how fast they learned to speak the American language. Cla- 
more, the principal chief, was exceedingly pleased with the ac- 
count, and said — " I wish that the war was over, that I might send 
my children there also." 

Supply of Mineral Coal — Thursday, Nov. 6th. 

" Brother Woodruff and two of our hired men have gone out to 
bring home a load of mineral coal. The place is fifteen miles dis- 
tant, on a creek, near the Verdigris. Brother Woodruff has 
brought home the second waggon load of coal. He has been gone 
but 36 hours. Should we not be able to find coal nearer, this mine 
will supply us. 

" There is living near Union Mission a half-breed, whose father 
was a Frenchman, and his mother a Pawnee. He has been adop- 
ted, and was claimed by the Osages, as one of their own nation." 

Dr. Belcher—Harmony, Dec. 21, 1821. 

" The season is cold. Snow, two or three inches deep, has 
lain upon the ground for more than two weeks. We find our 



APPENDIX. 



231 



flannels in this climate, not only acceptable, but very beneficial to 
health. In addition to a good kitchen, and warehouse, we have 
finished ten small, but comfortable log houses ; and as soon as the 
weather will permit, we shall erect a school-house. We hope 
soon to enter upon our Missionary labors. From present ap- 
pearances, we have no doubt of obtaining as many of the Osage 
children for the school, as we shall be able to accommodate. 
Several of the tribe have called on us, and offered their children, 
expressing a wish that they might be taught to read and to live 
like white people." 

Dwight, July 7, 1821. 

^ John Jolly, the principal chief, and two other Cherokees, 
called upon us for the first time, to look at our place of building 
and progress, and to ascertain how soon we should open a school. 
HjjB wished us to excuse him for not visiting us before. As he was 
now on his way to a council about convening, he could make but 
a short etay." f 

Exemplary Devotedness — Aug. 7, 1821. 

• ; Meeting for business. Resolved; 1. That we hold ourselves 
consecrated to the work, on which we have entered, for life. 

" 2. That we neither expect nor receive any earthly emolu- 
ments whatever for our services, except what is necessarily ex- 
pended for our support while under the patronage of the Board. 

" 3. That we consider all the property committed to our care, 
as sacred to the Lord, and ourselves bound to use it as such. 

" 4. That we will endeavour, at all times, to consider ourselves 
as brethren, engaged in the same work, and to cultivate a spirit of 
union and peace among ourselves ; that we may not retard a 
growth of grace in our own hearts, nor the progress of the Gospel 
among those with whom we dwell." 

Darkness of Paganism — Aug. 9. 

" A half-breed Cherokee, brother to Catharine and David 
Brown, called to make us a visit. He can speak English well ; 



232 



APPENDIX. 



has had considerable acquaintance with the whites ; and is a young 
man of some intelligence ; but appeared notwithstanding, deplo- 
rably ignorant of all spiritual subjects. He said he had never been 
told, and never knew, butthatmen died like the beasts ; — heknew 
not that man has a soul, which exalts him above them, and would ex- 
ist after death ; or that there was a beloved book, which inform- 
ed us of a future state. He said he rather thought in himself, that 
man did not die as beasts ; but that they lived somewhere after 
death, but how, or where, he knew not. While describing to him 
the two different places, where the righteous and the wicked will 
forever dwell in a future world, he appeared very solemn ; but 
when told of the way by which the wicked might become right- 
eous, escape from sin and misery, and finally go to the happy 
place, he appeared to be much interested and pleased : said he 
would come again, and hear more good talk. 

" A small company of Delaware Indians, about twenty-five or 
thirty, came in as allies to the Cherokees in their war. They 
have taken their stand for the present, within about two miles of 
Dwight. Three or four blacksmiths are employed in shoeing 
horses for the purpose of an expedition against the Osages. 

" Water minnee, a chief and famous warrior, called upon us. 
He said he was very glad we had got in so good a way, and were 
soon to have a school for the instruction of the children of his peo- 
ple ; but added, that he was going to war, and that it was not very 
likely that he should live to return, or ever be permitted to see 
any thing we should do for his nation. He has been noted for his 
courage and success in war ; but in the present case appears much 
disheartened, acting under the impression, that he shall die in the 
contest with the Osages. 

" The Cherokees were becoming very impatient to see the 
Commencement of the school ; and the Missionaries felt bound not 
to postpone it much longer, though the preparations were not ful- 
ly made. 

" Mr. Washburn states, that " the school-house had been com- 
pleted, and the body of the dining hall and kitchen raised. The 
Lord still surrounds us with goodness," adds Mr. W. " and dispo- 
ses our hearts to be pleased with this great work. May he bless 
pur labors, and save, for his mercies' sake, this benighted peo 
pie." 



APPENDIX. 



233 



Mr. W. C. Requa—Feb. 3d, 1822. 

" I live at present among the Osages, at one of their villages 
about fifty miles from Union. This unhappy people live in low 
huts, covered with long grass or flag, but so badly put together 
that they leak considerably in a storm of rain. They have very 
little furniture, merely a few pots or kettles in which they boil 
their provisions. The art of cooking their meat in any other way 
than boiling is unknown among them, except roasting it on a stick 
before the fire. They have very little variety in their food. 
Wild game, corn, dried pumpkins, and beans, constitute about all 
on which they subsist. With this however, they are contented. 
They have wooden bowls, out of which they eat, drink, wash 
themselves, and clean the dirt and filth about them. Neatness 
and cleanliness are qualities of which they are totally destitute. 
Their meat which they bring home from the chase, is generally 
covered with blood and dirt; yet I never knew them to wash it 
before it was cooked. Their pots and kettles they rarely if ever 
clean. This is merely a specimen of their defilement and un- 
cleanliness. The half has not been told. 1 could give you an 
account of their lewd and immodest conduct. Let it suffice to 
say, that chastity and modesty are not known, or very little regard- 
ed by them. They have little or no sense of shame. 

"All the laborious operations are performed by the women. They 
build their houses, cut and carry the timber and fuel. They dress all 
the skins, and make mocasins for themselves, their husbands, and 
their children. Indeed all drudgery is imposed upon the female 
sex. 

" The moral darkness in which this people are involved, is 
greater than has yet been communicated to the christian world. 
It has been commonly reported that they worship God, and ac- 
knowledge him as the great first cause of all things. This, howev- 
er, will, I believe, be found to be a misrepresentation. From the 
best information I can obtain, it appears, that they are an idola- 
trous race, and that they worship the sun, the earth, the moon, 
the thunder, and the stars. They worship these creatures of 
God, as creators. If asked who made the sun, moon, earth, &c. 
they cannot tell. Hence it is evident that they have no know! 

30 



234 



APPENDIX. 



edge of Him who made the heavens and the earth, and all thin<~ 
that are therein. 

" Ohi now apt is the human mind to forsake and forget what is 
right, and to learn and remember what is wrong! How apt to for- 
get the God who made and who governs all things, and to worship 
the creatures of God, or the workmanship of men's hands! The 
Osages will rise in the morning before the day dawns, black their 
faces with the earth, look towards the rising sun, and, with an affect- 
ed air, pray sometimes until the sun has risen. But their gods are not 
able to change their hearts, or put right spirits within them. It is no 
uncommon thing to see them start, immediately after their morn- 
ing devotion, on some mischievous and atrocious expedition; per- 
haps to murder some of a neighbouring tribe, or steal their sub- 
stance. I will mention the following as an instance of their readi- 
ly learning that which is sinful, and their proneness to do evil. 
Many of them are playing cards around me while 1 am writing, 
and are uttering, in broken English, the oaths which are so com- 
monly uttered at the card table. Both the card playing and the pro- 
fanity, they have doubtless learned from the traders, who pass 
much of their time in the village. 

" I will now mention some things which are laudable, and 
worthy of the imitation of all men. First — They are kind 
to each other. If at any time some are more prosperous in 
hunting than others, their doors are opened, and the desti- 
tute are invited to enter id partake. They also frequently 
send provisions to the lodges of the wretched, the widow, and 
the fatherless. Secondly — They are very hospitable and kind 
to strangers, who are not their enemies. They are espe- 
rialty hospitable to white people. The moment a white man 
enters their village, he is invited from one cabin to another, to 
partake of their simple fare. One of their principal Chiefs told 
me, that whenever I came to his village, hisjioiise was my home, 
and that I must consider nrryself at home; and added, that when he 
came to see me, he should make nry house his home.'* 

The Superintendent — Harmony, April 2nd, 1822. 

' c Our family now consists of eighty persons. In onr School, we 
have sixteen Osage children, who are making pleasing progress in 



APPENDIX. 



235 



their learning. Some of them can spell readily in words of two 
syllables. I have under my care three fine little girls, the oldest 
seven years of age, and the others about three. They begin to 
speak English a little, and can understand all that is said to them. 
We have also a Sabbath School; most of the hired men attend it, 
and appear quite engaged in their studies. 

" We have a garden of four acres fenced and ploughed. A part 
of it is planted, and several kinds of seeds are up. The brethren 
are preparing to plant forty acres of corn. They are also engaged 
in erecting a grist-mill, and saw-mill, about a mile below us; and the 
latter they expect to put in operation in the month of June. Our 
labors are arduous, and our situation responsible. Pray for us, 
that we may be strengthened to a faithful discharge of our duty." 

Journal of the Mission, for the month of December Friday Dec, 

28th. 1821. 

" Saw White Hair again to day. He says that the meddling tra- 
ders who are among them, will be a great hindrance to our success 
in obtaining their children, as they are scattering the people. It 
appears evident that there are some traders among them that con- 
trive every plan, and adopt every kind of artifice and intrigue, to 
lead or drive the Indians away from the trading houses established 
by government, in order to gain the trade themselves. V/hits 
Hair says, he thinks we shall obtain some children; but until these 
things can be regulated by government, we cannot expect very 
great success." 

Of the other Tribes in Missouri and Arkansaw Territory. 

Beside the Cherokees of the Arkansaw, the Great and Little 
Osages of whom so large an account has been given, I proceed to 
other Tribes living in the district of country now under consid- 
eration. 

Shawanees. 

A part of this Tribe, not many years since, migrated from their 
ancient residence on the east of the Mississippi, and planted them- 
selves ona branch of the Merrimack river, a tributary to the Missis- 



236 



APPENDIX. 



sippi in Missouri, about thirty miles north west of the Lead Mines. 
Lewis Rogers, a very respectable and worthy man, is the Chief of 
this section of the Shawaneese. This chief is a warm advocate 
for Indian civilization. He said to the Rev. Mr. P. who visited 
him at his own house in 1819 ; — " If a good Teacher come here 
and stay with Shawaneese, we have for him plenty of corn, and 
plenty of hogs." But a week before this interview, he had call- 
ed a meeting of the principal men, the result of which was, " four 
of the wealthiest families had agreed to pay a Teacher, could one 
be obtained, in cattle and skins, to instruct their children the way 
of the whites." When told that they must be taught to cultivate 
the earth, Rogers said — 44 Shawaneese can work some too ; and 
will build him that comes, a great big house." — 44 Who will build 
the house ?" he was asked. — 44 All the town will build it," said 
Rogers. These Indians appear to be ripe for instruction. Their 
number has no where, to my knowledge, been stated. 

Delawares. 

A number (I know not how many, nor what is their state and 
character,) of the Delawares, emigrants from the east of the Mis- 
sissippi, are settled on the east side of White river, at the bend, 
in about Lat. 35° 40' N. Their hunting grounds are in their 
neighbourhood. 

i Quapaws. 

A letter from Little Rock, on the Arkansaw, dated Feb. 1, 1822, 
states — 44 The condition of the Indians is wretched, though they 
hold vast quantities of land. The single tribe of Quapaws, not 
exceeding in number four hundred souls, own 3,000,000 acres of 
the first rate land." Upon this fact, the writer pertinently asks : 
44 Would it not be good policy in the Government to purchase 
this land, and pay for it in agricultural implements ?"* We per- 
ceive in this tribe, as in almost every other Indian tribe in our 
country, the most abundant means, if vigorously and judiciously 
employed, for their civilization, comfort, and happiness, both here 
and hereafter. 

* N. Y. Statesman. 



APPENDIX. 



237 



The present country of the Quapaws is on the south side of the 
Arkansaw, between that river, and the Washita ; opposite the Ar- 
kansaw Post, and Little Rock, and of the river between these pla- 
ces- In 1818, they ceded to the U. States, 30,690,660 acres of ex- 
cellent land between the Arkansaw and Red rivers ; for which 
was given to them $4000 in goods and merchandize, and an annui- 
ty, also in goods, of $1000! 

Kanzas. 

This tribe contains about one thousand seven hundred and fif- 
ty souls.* They live on the north west side of Kanzas river, at 
the mouth of the Grand Saline river. They sustain a respectable 
character among their neighbors. Their hunting grounds are on 
the upper branches of the river on which they reside. Their 
game is becoming scarce, and their Chiefs, who were at Wash- 
ington last winter, manifest a willingness to have schools estab- 
lished among them for the education of their children. 

Pawnees. 

This tribe, containing about ten thousand souls, are divided in- 
to three bands, viz. Grand Pawnees, Pawnee Republics, and Paw- 
nee Loups; all residing on Platte river, and its branches. 

Of these tribes, and of some others — of their character, country, 
customs, &c. Capt. Bell, Secretary of the Expedition to the Rocky 
Mountains, under Maj. Long, has obligingly given me the fol- 
lowing interesting account. 

Grand Pawnees. 

" The village of these Indians is on the second bank of the Loup, 
or Wolf, Fork, of the Platte river, north side, on a high, level 
prairie, which extends nearly two miles from the river. At this 
distance the land becomes undulating ; the soil is rich ; the grass 
and pasturage abundant. Individual Indians here possess from 

* These numbers, and those of the following tribes, were given me by Maj. 
O'Fallon, the Indian Agent for these tribes, and Capt. Crooks. 



238 



APPENDIX. 



twenty to sixty horses ; these are the principal indications and 
representations of wealth. A man's standing in society, however, 
is net estimated by his wealth ; but by his success in hunting and 
war. 

" The Grand Pawnee village contains about one hundred and six- 
ty lodges. At a distance, the village has the appearance of a reg- 
ular square ; but on a nearer inspection, it has no regularity, as 
to streets, &c. The description which Clark and Lewis give of 
the Riccara lodges, answers to that of these Pawnee lodges. Long 
Hair, the Chief, is five feet, ten or eleven inches high, slender, 
well-formed, intelligent, of commanding countenance, dignified ; 
he seldom laughs. His subjects fall on the ground when he ap- 
proaches." 

Pan-nee Republics. 

" Their villagers four miles above that of the Grand Pawnees. 
Fool-Robe is their Chief. He apologized to Maj. Long for not see- 
ing him at his village ; it was because no word had been sent him 
of his (Maj. L's.) approach ; and his wives were engaged in the 
field, hoeing their corn. Their village is on the margin of the 
Loup fork of the Platte, resembling that of the Grand Pawnees, 
above described. It has about forty lodges. Its site is not so 
handsome, nor so elevated, as that of the Grand Pawnees, to 
whom they are much inferior in dress and manners. Many of 
the young men of this band, have joined the Grand Pawnees, 
among whom they have better advantages for trade, and in other 
respects fare better. 

Pan-nee Loups. 

"Three miles farther, on the margin qi^iie same fork of the 
Platte, is the Pawnee Loup village. Old Knife is their Chief, a 
large fleshy man, of fine, open, pleasant countenance. He boast- 
ed that he had always been a friend to white men ; and that his 
people had never spilled their blood, and gave many assurances 
of his friendship. He had lost many of his braves in war with 
the Mountain Indians ; and requested Maj. Long to assure any of 



APPENDIX. 



239 



these tribes, whom he might meet, that he wished to bury the 
hatchet, and smoke with them the pipe of peace. 

" Their village is on a plain nearly a mile wide, bordering on 
hills and an undulating prairie. On one of the hills is their buri- 
al ground. Their lodges, like those of the other bands, 120 in 
number, are much neater, and better regulated, than those of the 
other two. The son of this Chief is the hero of the story told at 
the close of this* article. He has two wives ; both reputed hand- 
some. The young men are addicted to gaming. 

" The Pawnees are generally tall and well formed ; not corpu- 
lent. The adult females are short in stature, not handsome, ow- 
ing to hard service, to which they are subjected. The young 
girls under fifteen, might vie in beauty with most females, of that 
age, in polished life. 

" When they smoke, the first puff is upward, intended for the 
Great Spirit, as an act of homage to him ; the next is to their 
mother earth, whence they derive their corn and other suste- 
nance ; the third is horizontal, expressive of their good will to 
their fellow-men. 

I " The men cut their hair close, except a tuft on the top, which 
they suffer to remain, and%hich they plait as a valued ornament, 
the removal of which is disgraceful. In seasons of mourning, 
however, they make the sacrifice, to express their grief. Over 
their shoulders is thrown a loose buffalo robe, dressed and worn 
with the hair inward. A girdle, close tyed, an inch wide, encom- 
passes their body, to which is attached their breech clout. Their 
mocasins are made of elk or deer skins. They have also their 
war or winter dresses. 

" Some of the females suffer their hair to grow long, which im- 
parted on the forehead, and gathered and tied at the back of the 
head. Others wear it loose, falling over their foreheads and 
shoulders. They w-gg^nocasins, like the men, and leggins of an- 
telope skins, reachlp|; to the knee, over which is a long, loose 
covering of dresseotleer, or antelope skin, fastened over the 
shoulders by a string, and falling down nearly to the ankles. It has 
no sleeves, except a few pieces of skin, hanging a short distance 
down the arm. Sometimes it is bound with a girdle round the 
waist, and occasionally a robe, such as the men wear, thrown over 
the whole. The girls of all ages are clothed ; the boys mostly 



240 



APPENDIX. 



naked in summer. The wives and daughters of distinguished In- 
dians, and also women, who were supposed to be the wives and 
daughters of French traders, wear mocasins, leggins of red serge, 
a stroud, which is a kind of short petticoat, ornamented round the 
bottom with red or jetted binding, and a shift of callico, fringed 
round the neck and bosom with the same. 

" The police of the village is appointed by the Chief, consisting 
of a certain number of warriors. Their duty is to preserve or- 
der and peace in the village by day, and to guard it at night. 
They remain in office a few days, and are then succeeded by oth- 
ers. While in office, their persons are held sacred ; and when 
executing their functions, no resistance is suffered. 

" The duties of women are to cultivate the ground ; to dress 
skins ; make wearing apparel for both sexes ; saddles, ropes, and 
halters, of buffalo hide ; and to preserve the dead game brought 
to them by the hunters. The men, when not engaged in war or 
hunting, amuse themselves by exercise on horseback. Adjacent 
to each lodge, in the village, is a large circular pen, in which they 
are placed for safety, during the night, from which they are re- 
leased in the morning, and guarded during the clay. Their com- 
merce is chiefly with the traders, whqtexchange with them goods 
for their peltries and furs. They are fond of dress and show. 

Note — Miscellaneous information, collected from Capt. BelVs Journal. 

Buffalo herds. — Bulls herd together by themselves. The cows and calves 
also by themselves. They instinctively form into two separate bodies. 

Prairie dogs, are thus described by Maj. Pike in his Journal. " The Wish- 
tonwish of the Indians, prairie dogs of some travellers ; or squirrels as I should 
be inclined to denominate them ; reside on the prairies of Louisiana in towns 
or villages, have an evident police established in their communities. The 
sites of their towns are generally on the brow of a hill, near some creek or 
pond in order to be convenient to water, and that the high ground which they 
inhabit, may not be subject to inundation. Thjg^tesidenc e, being under 
ground, is burrowed out, and the earth which af^^Bthe double purpose of 
keeping out the water, and affording an elevated piK in wet seasons to re- 
pose on, and to give them a further and more distinct view of the country. 
Their holes descend in a spiral form, therefore I could never ascertain their 
depth ; but I once had one hundred and forty kettles of water poured into one 
of them in order to drive out the occupant, but without effect. In the circuit 
of the villages, they clear off all the grass, and leave the earth bare of vegeta- 
tion ; but whether it is from an instinct they possess inducing them to keep 



APPENDIX. 



These three bands of the Pawnees, with the O'Mahas, Ottos, 
Missouries, and Kanzas, seven bands of the Missouri tribes, sent a 
deputation of their principal men, sixteen in all, the last winter, to 
Washington, under the direction of Maj. O'Fallan, Indian Agent, 
for these and other tribes. The following extracts from their speech- 
es, delivered to the President of the United States, will shew 
what are their feelings, particularly on the subject of civilization. I 
should, however, consider these feelings, which are natural in their 
state of ignorance of the value and necessity of the blessings offered 
them, as forming no serious obstacle to a prudent commencement 
of an Education Establishment among them, under the protection of 
the Government, and their intelligent and efficient Agent, at the 
Council Bluffs. 

the ground thus cleared, or whether they make use of the herbage, as food, 1 
cannot pretend to determine. The latter opinion, I think, entitled to a prefer- 
ence's their teeth designate them to be of the granivorous species ; and I 
know of no other substance which is produced in the vicinity of their positions 
on which they could subsist; and they never extend their excursions more 
than half a mile from their burrows. They are of a dark brown color, except 
their bellies, which are white. Their tails are not so long as those of our grey 
squirrels, but are shaped precisely like theirs ; their teeth, head, nails, and 
body, are the perfect squirrel, except that they are generally fatter than that 
animal. Their villages sometimes extend over two and three miles square, 
in which there must be innumerable hosts of them, as there is generally a 
burrow every ten steps, in which there are two or more, and you see new ones 
partly excavated on all the borders of the town. We killed great numbers of 
them with our rifles, and found them excellent meat, after they were exposed 
a night or two to the frost, by which means the rankness, acquired by their sub- 
terraneous dwelling, is corrected. As you approach their towns, you are sa- 
luted on all sides by the cry of Wishtonwish, from which they derive their 
name with the Indians, uttered in a shrill and piercing voice. You then 
observe them all retreating to the entrance of their burrows, where they post 
themselves, and regard every, even the slightest, movement that you make. 
It requires a very nice shJ^Kith a rifle to kill them, as they must be killed 
dead, for as long as life W/^>> they continue to work into their cells. It is 
extremely dangerous to pass through their towns, as they abound with rattle- 
snakes, both of the yellow and black species ; and, strange as it may appear, I 
have ^n the Wishtonwish, the rattle snake, the horn frog, of which the 
prairie abounds, C termed by the Spaniards the camelion, from their taking 
no visible sustenance) and a land tortoise, all take refuge in the same hole. I 
do not pretend to assert, that it was their common place of resort, but I have 
witnessed the above facts more than in one instance." 

31 



242 APPENDIX. 

Speech of a Pawnee Chief to the President of the United States , 



"My Great Father. — I have travelled a great distance to see 
you. I have seen you, and my heart rejoices; I have heard your 
words; they have entered one ear, and shall not escape the other; 
and I will carry them to my people as pure, as they came from 
3'our mouth. 

" My Great Father. — I am going to speak the truth. The 
Great Spirit looks down upon us, and I call Him to witness all 
that may pass between us on this occasion. If I am here now 3 



Extract from Capt. Bell's Journal, continued. 

" Cotton wood. — This is found all along the Missouri, and Platte rivers, to 
the Roc'^y Mountains, in clusters every three or four miles. The prairies 
are generally undulating. 

" Rattle Snakes. — On a north branch of the Platte, called Cherry Creek, are 
abundance of rattle snakes. There are foxes, antelopes, faloes, prairie wolves, 
(the dogs possibly, of Maj. Pike) all herding together with the buffaloes. 
These wolves, or dogs, are about the size of the common dog, nearly of the 
color of the fox. They howl when hungry. Here, also, are large herds of 
wild horses. The river, three hundred yards wide. 

** Rocky Mountains — The first sight of them, (June 30, 1821) presented a sub- 
lime appearance. A snow-capt peak, towering high above the general range, 
first struck the eye ; then the general range. The river now narrowed fast ; 
cotton wood was more abundant, but of smaller size. The soil of the prairies, 
gravel and sand, with little vegetation. Thermometer, at 10 o'clock A. M. 
87.° Wild horses and deer were here in plenty ; buffaloes scarce ; sand flies 
troublesome. Clouds hide the mountains which are now near. The river 
bends to the south, and meanders at their base. The vallies along the river 
are timbered; rivulets of various sizes come from the Mountains. The moun- 
tains now are on the right hand, and barren prairie on the left. Herds of 
elk are here. We pass Cannon Ball Creek from the Mountains named from 
stones in the Creek, which resemble cannon It is a beautiful, limped 

stream, abounding with fish. The Platte here IHBI hundred yards wide. 

"On the 6th July we reached the foot of the mountains, distant from Engineer 
Cantonment, near Council Bluffs, by our actual rout, five hundred and sixty- 
eight miles. The nature of the ground, over which we travelled, preventing 
a nearer rout. 

" The mountains appeared, on a near approach, to run in parallel ranges, 
gradually rising one above the other, to the centre chain. The ranges pre- 



APPENDIX. 



243 



and have seen your people, your houses, your vessels on the big 
lake, and a great many wonderful things, far beyond my compre- 
hension, which appear to have been made by the Great Spirit, 
and placed in your hands, I am indebted to my father here, who 
invited me from home, under whose wings I have been pro- 
tected.* Yes, my Great Father, I have travelled with your chief. 
I have followed him, and trod in his tracks; but there is still anoth- 
er Great Father, to whom I am much indebted — it is the Father 
of us all. Him who made us and placed us on this earth. I feel 
grateful to the Great Spirit for strengthening my heart for such an 
undertaking, and for preserving the life which he gave me. The 
Great Spirit made us all — he made my skin red, and yours white. 
He placed us on this earth, and intended that we should live differ- 
ently from each other. He made the whites to cultivate the earth, 

sented a broken surface of rocks, with here and there a little clump of bush- 
es, and without snow. In some places the prairie extends quite to the base of 
the mountains ; in others, even up its sides, for a short distance. The soil ap- 
peared better, as we approached the point where the river issues from the 
Mountains. 

"Red, yellow, and black currents, grow on the sides of the Rocky Mountains, 
at the head of Platte river ; the effects of eating a few of them was injurious." 

" Head Springs of the Arkansaw river.- — This river issues from a perpendic- 
ular rock, near which are six remarkable springs, issuing from the earth 
within the area of a rod square. Their waters are highly impregnated with 
different mineral substances. The surrounding soil, from the banks of the 
stream, a distance of about one hundred yards, produces grass af various spe- 
cies. 

Remarkable Springs. 

" At the base of what is called the Peak of the Rocky Mountains, are two 
remarkable medicinal Springs, bubbling up into basins, through limestone 
rocks. One is a strong and pleasant soda, of the temperature of 62° with a di- 
ameter of about three feet ; the other impregnated with sulphur, has a diam- 
eter of thirty inches, anPPtemperature of 75°. Both are on the margin of a 
rivulet issuing from the mountain near to an Indian trace. When passing 
these springs, the wandering bands throw into them their ornaments of beads, 
shells, &c attended with a religious ceremony, intended as an offering to the 
Great Spirit. The French Traders, it is said, are accustomed to obtain these 
ornaments from the springs, and to sell them again to the Indians. 



Pointing to Major O' Fallon. 



244 



APPENDIX. 



and feed 'on domestic animals; but he made us red skins, to rove 
through the uncultivated woods and plains, to feed on wild animals, 
and to dress in their skins. He also intended that we should 
go to war to take scalps — steal horses, and triumph over our ene- 
mies — cultivate peace at home, and promote the happiness of each 
other. I believe there are no people, of any color, on this earth, who 
do not believe in the Great Spirit — in rewards and in punishments. 
We worship him, but we worship him not as you do. We differ from 
you in appearance and manners, as well as in our customs; and 
we differ from you in our religion. We have no large houses, as you 
have, to worship the Great Spirit in; if we had them to day, we 
should want others to morrow, for we have not, like you, a fixed 
habitation — we have no settled home, except our villages, where 
we remain but two moons in twelve; we, like animals, rove 
through the country, whilst you whites reside between us and 
heaven; but still my Great Father, we love the Great Spirit — we 
acknowledge his supreme power — our peace, our health, and our 
happiness depend upon him; and our lives belong to him — he made 
us, and he can destroy us. 

"My Great Father— Some of your good chiefs, or, as they are call- 
ed, Missionaries, have proposed to send of their good people among 
us to change our habits, to make us work, and live like the white 
people. I will not tell a lie, I am going tell the truth. You 
love your country; you love your people; you love the manner 
in which they live, and you think your people brave. I am like 
you, my Great Father, I love my country; I love my people; I 
love the manner in which we live, and think myself and war- 
riors brave; spare me then, my Father, let me enjoy my country, 
and pursue the buffaloe, and the beaver, and the other wild ani- 
mals of our wilderness, and I will trade the skins with your peo- 
ple. 1 have grown up and lived thus long without work; I am in 
hopes yon will suffer me to die without it. We have yet plenty 
of buffaloe, beaver, deer, and other wild^fcmals; we have also 
an abundance of horses. We have every thing we want. We have 
plenty of land, if you will keep your people off of it. 

"My Father has apeice on which he lives (Council Bluffs) and 
we wish him to enjoy it. W T e have enough without it; but we 
wish him to live near us to give us good counsel; to keep our ears 



APPENDIX. 



245 



and eyes open, that we may continue to pursue the right road; 
the road to happiness. He settles all differences between us and 
the whites, and between the red skins themselves — He makes the 
whites do justice to the red skins, and he makes the red skins do 
justice to the whites. He saves the effusion of human blood, and 
restores peace and happiness in the land. You have already sent 
us a father; it is enough, he knows us, and we know him. We 
have confidence in him. We keep our eye constantly upon him, 
and since we have heard your words, we will listen more atten- 
tively to his. 

" It is too soon, my Great Father, to send those good men 
among us. We are not starving yet. We wish you to permit us 
to enjoy the chase, until the game of our country is exhausted: 
until the wild animals become extinct. Let us exhaust our present 
resources, before you make us toil, and interrupt our happiness. 
Let me continue to live as I have done, and after I have passed to 
the Good or Evil Spirit from the wilderness of my present life, the 
subsistence of my children may become so precarious, as to need 
and embrace the offered assistance of those good people. 

" There was a time when we did not know the whites. Our 
wants were then fewer than they are now. They were always 
within our control. We had then seen nothing which we could 
not get. But since our intercourse with the whites, who have caus- 
ed such a destruction of our game, our situation is changed. W e 
could lie down to sleep, and when we awoke, we found the buffaloe 
feeding around our camp; but now we are killing them for their 
skins, and feeding the wolves with their flesh, to make our chil- 
dren cry over their bones. 

" Here my Great Father, is a pipe which I present you, as I anil 
accustomed to present pipes to all red skins in peace with us. It is 
filled with such tobacco as we were accustomed to smoke, before 
we knew the white people. I know that the robes, leggins, mocca- 
sins, bear's claws, &c. are of little value to you, but we wish you 
to have them deposited and preserved in some conspicuous part of 
your lodge, so that when we are gone, and the sod turned over our 
bones, if our children should visit this place, as we do now, they 
may see and recognize with pleasure the deposites of their fathers, 
and reflect on the times that are past." 



246 



APPENDIX, 



OTTOE PARTIZAN. 

" My Great Father: I am brave, and if I had not been brave, I 
should not have followed my father here. I have killed my ene- 
mies, I have taken their horses, and will do any thing he tells me. 
I will not submit to an insult from any one. If my enemies, of 
any nation, should strike me, I will rise in the might of my 
strength, and avenge the spirit of my dead." 

o'maha chief. 

" My Great Father : Look at me — look at me, my father; my 
hands are unstained with your blood; my people have never 
struck the whites, and the whites have never struck them. It is 
not the case with other red skins. Mine is the only nation that 
has spared the long knives. I am a Chief, but not the only one 
in my nation; there are other Chiefs who raise their crests by my 
side. I have always been the friend of the long knives, and be- 
fore this Chief* (Maj. O'F.) came among us, I suffered much in 
support of the whites. I was often reproached for being a friend , 
but when my father came among us, he strengthened my arms, and 
I soon towered over the rest. 

" My Great Father — I have heard some of your Chiefs, who 
propose to send some good people amongst us, to learn us to live 
as you do; but I do not wish to tell a lie — I am only one man, and 
will not presume, at this distance from my people, to speak for 
them on a subject with which they are entirely unacquainted — 
I am afraid it is too soon for us to attempt to change habits. We 
have too much game in our country. We feed too plentifully on the 
buffaloe to braise our hands with the instruments of agriculture. 

" The Great Spirit made my skin red, and he made us to live as 
we do now; and I believe that when the Great Spirit placed us 
upon this earth, he consulted our happiness. We love our coun- 
try, we love our customs and habits. I wish that you would per- 
mit us to enjoy them as long as I live. When we become hungry, 
and naked; when the game of our country becomes exhausted, and 
misery encompasses our families, then, and not till then, do I want 
those good people among us. Then they may lend us a helping 

* Pointing to Major O'Fallon. 



APPENDIX. 



?hovv us the wealth of the earth; the advantages and 
o be derived from its culture." 

o'maha partizan. 

" My Great Father. — My Father was a Chief, but he grew old, 
and became dry like grass, and passed away, leaving the root from 
which I sprung up, and have grown so large without one mark of 
distinction. I am still green, but am afraid to die without the 
fame of my father. I wish you would be so good as to give me a 
mark, to attract the attention of my people, that when I return 
home, I may bring to their recollection the deeds of my father, 
and my claims to distinction. Since I left home, I have been much 
afflicted; death sought me, but I clung to my father, and he kept 
it oif. I have now grown fat, and am in hopes to return to my na- 
tion. There is my Chief, (pointing to the Big Elk,) who -has no 
claims, no inheritance from his father. I am now following behind 
him, and tracking upon his heels, in hopes that you and my Fath- 
' er here,* will take pity on me, and recollect who my father was." 

Anecdote of a Pawnee Brave. 

The facts in the following anecdote of a Pawnee Brave, son of Old 
Knife, one ofthe delegation who visited Washington, the last winter? 
highly creditable to his courage, his generosity, and his humani- 
ty, were taken, by permission, from a very interesting M. S. Journal 
ofCapt. Bell, of his expedition with Major Long, to the foot ofthe 
Rocky Mountains, in 1821, and are sanctioned by Major O'Fallon, 
Indian Agent, near the scene of the transaction here related, and 
also by the Interpreter, who witnessed this scene. 

This Brave, of fine size, figure, and countenance, is now about 
twenty-five years old. At the age of twenty-one, his heroic deeds 
had acquired for him in his nation, the rank of " the bravest of 
the braves."* The savage practice of torturing and burning to 

* The Braves, are warriors who have distinguished themselves in battle, and 
stand highest in the estimation of the tribe. 

t Pointing to Major O'Fallon. 



248 



APPENDIX. 



death their prisoners existed in this nation.! An unfortunat 
male, taken in war, of the Paduca nation, was destined to ihis hor- 
rid death. The fatal hour had arrived; the trembling victim, far 
from her home and her friends, was fastened to the stake; the 
whole tribe was assembled on the surrounding plain, k> wi 3 
the awful scene. Just when the funeral pile was to be kindled, 
and the whole multitude of spectators were on the tiptoe of ex- 
pectation, this young warrior, having, unnoticed, prepaid ...0 
fleet horses, with the necessary provisions, sprang from his seat, 
rushed through the crowd, liberated the victim, seized her in his 
arms, placed her on one of the horses, mounted the other himself, 
and made the utmost speed toward the nation and friends of the 
captive. The multitude, dumb, and nerveless with amazement at 
the daring deed, made no effort to rescue their victim from her de- 
liverer. They viewed it as the immediate act of the Great Spirit, 
submitted to it without a murmur, and quietly retired to their village. 
The released captive was accompanied three days through the wil- 
derness, toward her home. Pie then gave her the horse on which 
she rode, with the necessary provisions for the remainder of her 
journey, and they parted. On his return to the village, such was 
his popularity, no inquiry was made into his conduct, no censure 
was passed on it. And since this transaction, no human sacrifice 
has been offered in this, or any other of the Pawnee tribes. The 
practice is abandoned. Of what influence is one bold act in a good 
cause ! 

The publication of this anecdote, at Washington, led the young 
ladies of Miss White's Seminary in that city, in a manner highly 
creditable to their good sense, and good feeling, to present this 
brave, and humane Indian, with a handsome silver medal, with ap- 
propriate inscriptions, as a token of their sincere commendation 
of the noble act of rescuing one of their sex, an innocent victim, 
from a cruel death. Their address, delivered on this occasion, 
is sensible and pertinent, closing as follows — 

" Brother — Accept this token of our esteem — always wear it 
for our sakes, *ind when again you have the power to save a poor 
woman from death and torture — think of this, and of us, and fly to 
her relief and her rescue." 

f This custom does not now exist in the surrounding tribes. 



APPENDIX. 



249 



THE PAWNEE'S REPLY. 

" Brothers and sisters — This* wifl give me ease more than I ev- 
er had, and I will listen more than I ever did to white men. 

"Iam glad that my brothers and sisters have heard of the good 
act that I have done. My brothers and sisters think that I did it 
in ignorance, but I now know what I have done. 

" I did it in ignorance and did not know that I did good ; but by 
giving me this medal I know it. 

Talk with several Chiefs of the Missouri delegation of Indians. 

While I was at Washington the last winter, Big Elk, Chief of 
the O'Mahas ; Ish-ka-tap-pa, of the Republican Pawnees, with 
others of the delegation, called on me at my lodgings, with their 
interpreter, for the purpose of communicating to me some infor- 
mation, which I wished to obtain from them personally. 

On the subject of their civilization, and sending instructors 
among them for that purpose, they observed, that they had told 
their Great Father what they thought ; and I should hear it from 
him.f 

Quest, Who made the Red and the White people ? 

Ans. By Big Elk. " The same being who made the White 
people, made the Red people. But the White, are better than 
the Red, people." 

Quest. From whence did your fathers come ? 

Ans. By the Otto Chief. " We have a tradition among us, that 
our ancestors came to this country across the Great water. We 
inherit our country from them." 

There is a tradition among these, and other Indians, that eight 
men were originally made by the Great Spirit, and that mankind 
of all nations and colors sprang from these. 

Quest. How have you been pleased with your visit to the white 
people ? 

Ans. By the Otto Chief, "lam glad I come. I have seen ma- 
ny things, which I wished to see." 

* His medal. t See their speech to the President, p. 242, 

32 



250 



APPENDIX. 



- — ~. By a Pawnee. " I am glad, and I am sorry too. I have 
lived so well among the white people, that when I get back to my 
own country, I fear I shan't be so happy as I was before." 

Quest. When you die, whither will your spirit go ? Do you 
expect your bodies will rise, and live in another state ? 

They appeared not to know what to answer ; and made no in- 
telligible, or distinct reply. 

Quest. What do you think of the Great Spirit. Where does he 
live ? 

Ans. " We pray to the sun and moon, and think he must be 
near the sun." 

Quest. But did not the Great Spirit make the sun and moon, as 
he did the earth, and the men who inhabit it ? 

Ans. (After a pause and hesitancy.) " We dont know what to 
say. What do you think ?" My question appeared to have pre- 
sented a difficulty, which they had never before perceived. They 
felt that they were ignorant on this subject, and put their question to 
me with evident solicitude to receive an answer, which I endeav- 
ored to give them in plain and intelligible language, to which they 
listened with interest. By their question to me, in the manner 
stated, the thought was suggested, that in imparting instruction to 
Indians, it would be well, by a course of easy questions, to lead 
them, by imperceptible steps, to feel that they need instruction, 
and in such manner, as shall, at the same time, excite desire to 
receive it. 

Quest. Do you believe the Great Spirit is present, and that he 
sees and knows what you do ? 

Ans. " Yes, when we pray and deliberate in Council. It is not 
we that deliberate, but the Great Spirit. Therefore it is, that we 
have great courage." 

Quest. Does the Great Spirit punish the bad, and reward the 
good ? Who are good, and who bad ? 

Ans. " The good, are good warriors and hunters. The bad, 
are the idle, who do no good. There are two roads for the dead. 
Good people take the good road ; bad people the bad road." — 
But where either leads, they know not. They have some faint 
ideas, that they shall live in a future state. This is evidently in- 
dicated by the manner in which they bury their dead, in that 
they make provision of food, and implements for hunting, &c. in 



APPENDIX. 



251 



the new world into which they enter immediately after death. 
But in regard to this new world, " shadows, clouds, and darkness 
rest upon it." 

Ottoes and Missouriem , 

These tribes, about 1,500 souls, dwell together in one village 
on the south east side of the Platte river, forty miles above its 
junction with the Missouri, near the mouth of the Elkhorn. In 
their character and customs, they resemble their neighbors, the 
Pawnees. 

O'Mahas. 

The O'Mahas, in number 2,250, not long ago, abandoned their 
old village on the south side of the Missouri, and now dwell on 
the Elkhorn river, due west from their old village, eighty miles 
west north-west from Council Bluffs. 

Pancas. 

This tribe live higher up the Missouri, at the mouth of Quic- 
coane* river, a south western branch of the Missouri. Their 
number is 750. 

Chayene Indians. 

This tribe of 3,250 souls, dwell and hunt on the river of their 
name, a western tributary of the Missouri, a little above the Great 
Bend. 

Sioux of the Missouri. 

A band of this numerous and wide spread tribe, of 4,500 souls, 
dwell in the vicinity of the two tribes last named. 

* Pronounced Ke-koi-ne, running river. 



252 



APPENDIX. 



Arricaras, or Riccaras. 

This tribe number 3,500 souls. Their old villages are on 
the Missouri, about half way between the Great Bend, and the 
Mandan villages. They have lately removed some distance west f 
toward Cannon Ball river. 

Mandans. 

The Mandans, numbering 1,250 souls, live on the Missouri, a 
few miles on this side Mandan Fort. It has been suggested,* that 
these Indians are descendants of the Welsh colony, who are said 
to have early immigrated to this country. 

Minetaries. 

These Indians, 3,250 in number, have their village on the south 
side of the Missouri, east of the Little Missouri, about half way 
between Mandan and Yellow stone. 

Absorokas, or Crows. 

These are a wilder class of Indians than those above named, 
estimated at 3,250 souls, dwelling higher up on the Missouri, quite 
to the Rocky Mountains. 

Blackfoot Indians. 

These, with the Crows abovementioned, and other roving 
tribes not already named, of whom we know but very little, who 
inhabit in the Indian manner, the head waters of the Missouri, 
within the extensive limits of the Missouri Territory, have been 
conjecturally estimated, exclusively of the Crows, at 20,000 souls. 
This probably is too low an estimate. The names of some of 
these tibes are scarcely known ; still less their numbers. 

* See p. 145, of this App. 



APPENDIX. 



253 



Arrapahays. 

^These Indians were visited by Capt. Bell. He states, " that 
they are generally well formed, slim and 'iall, with good counte- 
nances. They wear their hair long, collected on the forehead 
into a large roll, which serves as a protection to their eyes from 
the bright rays of the sun." Their number is estimated at 10,000. 
Their country extends from the head waters of the Kanzas, south, 
to the Rio del Norte. They are a warlike people, and often ma- 
king predatory and murderous excursions on their eastern and 
northern neighbors. 

Kaninavisch. 

These Indians having no abiding place, rove south west of the 
Pawnees, on the heads of the Yellow stone, toward the Rocky 
Mountains, about 2,000 souls. 

Staitans, or Kite Indians. 

These, 500 in number, rove between the head waters of the 
Platte river, and the Rocky Mountains. 

Kiazvas, or Wetapahato Indians 

Dwell, or rather rove, above those last mentioned. They are 
estimated at 1,000 souls. " They wear their hair long, in three 
plaits, hanging down the back. The other two, from behind each 
ear, hanging front, decorated with beads and buttons." 

The Kaskayas, or Bad Hearts. 

The name of these Indians indicates their character. Their 
number is not known. They are estimated at 3,000. " They 
part their hair across the head from ear to ear. The front is 
again divided into two parts, brought a little back of the eyes, tied, 
ornamented and cut ^bout eight or ten inches in length, tied be- 
hind with a piece of skin, to which feathers or some other orna* 



254 



APPENDIX. 



ments are attached. All wear a piece of leather, or cloth, about 
a foot wide, between their legs, with moccasins ; the rest of their 
bodies are naked, except when a buffalo robe is thrown over it. 
Some wear rich blue and scarlet cloth robes, highly ornamented 
with beads, &c. obtained from the neighboring Spaniards.*" 

Chiens, or Chayennes. 

" A small band of this tribe, (say 200) reside near the head of 
the Chien river. Sometime since they left their own nation, and 
attached themselves to the Arrapahuys. They are bad fellows, 
faithless, and fond of plunder." 

Other tribes along the eastern side of the Rocky Mountains, 
and head waters of the Missouri and its branches, and of the Co- 
lumbia river, are named in the Table ; which see. 

Further extracts of a Miscellaneous nature, from Capt. BelVs MS. 

Journal. 

On his return from the Rocky Mountains, down the Arkansaw,, . 
Capt. B. visited 

Fort Smith's at Belle Point. 

" Belle Point, is situated below the confluence of the Portean 
and Arkansaw rivers, about one hundred and thirty miles from 
the Osage village on the Verdigris river, one hundred miles above 
the Cherokee settlements on the Arkansaw, and seventy-five be- 
low the trading house at the mouth of Grand or Neozho rivers. 
Its site was selected in 1817, by Maj. Long, as a military station, 
being a commanding position in every direction, sixty feet above 
the level of the river. Next to the water, its figure is two sides 
of a square, on soil twenty feet deep, under which is rock about 
forty feet deep, whose base is washed by the united waters of the 
Portean and Arkansaw. The plan of the Fort, yet unfinished, is 
a square of one hundred and thirty-two feet, with two block hou- 
ses at opposite angles, to be surrounded \y a ditch. The sides 

* Capt. Bell's Journal. 



APPENDIX. 



255 



next the land, and two block houses are completed. The sur- 
rounding country, for about one hundred miles, is very healthy, 
hilly, in many places broken. Limestone is said to be found here. 
The diseases of the country are, fever and ague, bilious fever, 
seldom fatal. Fruits and vegetables grow here in great abundance 
and perfection. 

" No settlers are permitted to go above the Portean river of 
the Arkansaw, and the Cayamechee, of the Red River. 

" A negotiation was said to have commenced with the Osages 
for the section of their country, between their Cherokee west boun- 
dary, and the rapids of the Verdigris river. This section is said 
to include some of the finest lands in the Arkansaw Territory. 

Cherokees of the Arkansaw. 

" The Cherokee country is on the north side of the Arkansaw, 
well adapted to cultivation, well timbered with oak, pine, and oth- 
er trees of this region. It contains plantations, in a good state of 
cultivation, bearing cotton, corn, sweet potatoes, beans, pump- 
kins, &c. They have decent log houses, like the whites. A 
body of light horse patrol the settlement, and are the instruments 
of preserving order, and preventing crimes. The Captain acts 
as judge, and sentences criminals to punishment. A white man 
among them convicted of crime, is delivered over to white peo- 
ple for punishment. These Indians, lately removed from the rest 
of their nation, in Tennessee and Alabama, are considerably ad- 
vanced in civilization." 

Captain Bell further states, that " on his way from the 
Arkansaw, to Cape Girardeau, September 1821, he met Captain 
Rogers, a half breed Cherokee, on his way to Belle Point, with 
a number of Osage prisoners, who were to be delivered up. 
Among them was an Osage woman, who was unwilling to return 
to her own nation, having accustomed herself to the dress and 
manners of the white people, and to make her own clothes. To 
return to the savage manners and customs, was painful to her. 
her children were well dressed, and appeared to have been well 
brought up ; had been at school, and spoke English. The Cher- 
okee Chiefs were divided on the subject of war with the Osages," 



256 



APPENDIX. 



Indian Phrases. 

In passing through this Indian Country, Capt. Bell became fa- 
miliar with certain phrases of its native inhabitants, which stri- 
kingly exhibit the liveliness of their imaginations, and the highly 
metaphorical and descriptive character of their language. 

When discussing the subject, Whether or not war shall be de- 
clared ; if no cause for war is found to exist, they say — " The 
hatchet is buried. The bones of my warriors are also buried. 
The blood of my women and children, which has been spilt, is 
covered." 

If there must be war, they say — "The tomahawk is raised. 
The blood of my women and children smokes from the ground. 
The bones of my warriors and old men lie uncovered, whitening 
the earth." 

When peace is to be preserved with another tribe, they say 
— " The path between us must be kept clean. Xo weeds must 
be suffered to grow in it." When a good understanding is to be 
maintained between them and white people, the phrase is — " The 
chain which binds us together must be kept bright, and never be 
permitted to rust. ? ' When differences arise — " A weed grows in 
the path." ' ; The chain is beginning to rust." When this is 
perceived, and the cause of the difference known — " The weed 
must be plucked from the path." " The rust must be rubbed 
from the chain ; else the path will soon be covered with weed':, 
er the chain with rust."* 

App. F. f.— Rep. p. 36. 

The following account of the Indians residing between Red, and Rio 
del Xorte. rivers, was given at its date, to the Secretary of War. 

Washington City, 7th August, 1818. 

Sir, 

" The enclosed estimate of the Indians residing on the waters 
of Red River, and the Rio del Norte,t is made from information 

*The reader will find a large collection of these metaphorical expressions in 
the excellent work of Rev. Mr. Heckewelder, p. 123. 

t See Table, into which this estimate is copied. 



APPENDIX. 



257 



which I procured in 1817, while in command of the western sec- 
tion of the 3th Military Department. 

" But few of those Indians reside in villages, or have permanent 
residences. Some of the tribes are nearly extinct, and others 
have become so blended, from association and intermarriages, 
that it would be difficult to draw between them the line of distinc- 
tion. The precise number of each tribe, cannot be accurately 
ascertained. 

"In making thi* estimate, I have placed the number considera- 
bly below that reported by hunters and Indian Traders. Some 
of the tribes inhabiting that country, have not been included, be- 
cause no certain information respecting them could be obtained. 

" My information was received from Americans, Frenchmen, 
and Spaniards, who pronounce Indian names very differently. 
The orthography, therefore, which I have adopted, may not, in 
every case, represent the proper Indian sound, and it is probable 
that the proper Indian name of the tribe or nation, has not always 
been preserved. 

"The small tribes of Indians, which reside on the Washita, 
and on Red River, below the obstructions, subsist principally on 
vegetables and domestic animals. Game has become so scarce in 
those parts of the country, that there is now but little inducement 
to pursue the chase. 

" When the French established themselves on Red River in 
1717, the Caddos formed the most numerous and warlike nation 
inhabiting that country, which they claimed to the sources of Red 
River. This nation suffered greatly from the small pox, and from 
their wars with the Osages, Towcash, and Camauches; by whom 
they were driven from the sources of the Red river. They now 
reside on the waters of Lake Ceodo, about ninety miles north- 
west from Natchitoches, and they claim the country of Red River 
from Bay on Pierre and Lake Bistianeau, to the Cross timber; a 
remarkable tract of wood land, which crosses Red River more 
than a thousand miles above its mouth. 

"The Coshattas, Delawares, and Cherokees, obtained permis- 
sion from the Caddos, to settle on Red River, They do not 
claim part of the country. The Coshattas migrated from Flori 
da, and are believed to be a tribe of the Muscogee?. 

33 



258 



APPENDIX. 



" The Delawares migrated from the Mississippi, near Cape Gir 
rarcleau; and the Cherokees came, within the last few years, from 
the Arkansaw. The Choctaws migrated from the state of Missis- 
sippi, and are scattered over the country from Red river to the 
Trinity. They have no government, nor fixed habitation, but wan- 
der over the country in small parties. 

"The game has almost disappeared from the Lower Red Riv- 
er, and is not found in any considerable number, until you ascend 
as high as Blue River, where is entered the immense tract of 
Prairie, which extends from the Arkansaw to the sources of the 
Trinity, and the Brassos. Those extensive plains are covered 
with the Buffaloe, Elk, Deer, Wild Cows, Hogs, and Horses. 
On the rivers are found the Black Bear. 

" The Indians, who reside on Red River, Sabine, Nechez, 
Trinity and Brassos, hunt on these Prairies. The white people 
are encroaching on that delightful hunting ground, and in the most 
wanton manner, are destroying the game. 

" To restrain the white people, and prevent the indefinite ex- 
tension of their settlements, to protect the Indians, and to give se- 
curity to that important section of the frontier, it would be impor- 
tant, to establish a military post on Red River,* and to draw a line, 
bevond which the white people should not be permitted to pass. 
The line should commence on the Arkansaw at the mouth of the 
Canadian; ascend the river till it interlocks with Blue river, and 
descend the Blue river to its junction with Red River. Thence it 
might run a south-east, or south, course to the Sabine, or some 
river which falls into the Gulf of Mexico. This line, it is believ- 
ed, would divide a country possessing many agricultural advanta- 
ges, from one which abounds in game, and which offers few advan- 
tages to the agriculturalist. West of this line the country is com- 
paratively poor, and nearly destitute of timber; but is most high- 
ly valued by the Indians, on account of the plenty of its game. 

" The valley of Red River, from the mouth of Blue river to the 
mouth of Kosek river, a distance, by water, of three hundred and 
eighty miles, is one of the most fertile, tracts on the Southern 
waters. 

* A small and feeble post has been since established ; but in order to be effi- 
cient to attain its object, must be strengthened. 



APPENDIX. 



259 



There is a settlement of twelve families, at Nanatscho, or 
Pecan Point ; and one of twenty families at the mouth of Kia- 
misha. At the lower settlement there are five, and at the upper 
settlement three, traders, who in consequence of their contiguity 
to the fine hunting ground, have taken the Indian trade of that 
country from Natchitoches. 

" This country, in a few ) r ears, would supply a garrison on 
much better terms, than the troops are now supplied at Natchi- 
toches. 

" The Indians near the Gulf of Mexico, subsist chiefly on Fish, 
Alligators, and the proceeds of the chase. The Towacano, or 
Panis nation, live in villages, cultivate the soil, and pursue the 
chase. 

" The Comauch Indians are the largest and most warlike na- 
tion in this country. They have always been at war with the 
Spaniards, upon whom they commit the most horrible depreda- 
tions. The whole nation moves with the Buffaloe, from south to 
north, in the Spring; and from north to south in Autumn. During 
the winter, they occupy the country on the sources of the Brassos, 
and Colerado. They spend their summers on the sources of the 
Arkansaw and Missouri, among the eastern spurs, of the Rocky 
mountains. They carry on, with traders from Red River, an ex- 
tensive traffic, in horses and mules, which they catch in the plains, 
or capture from the Spaniards. 

" Before any measure is executed in relation to the estab- 
lishment of a military post, or Indian boundary, it would be 
proper to hold a treaty with the Indians of that country, and to 
obtain a cession from the Caddos, of such parts of the country, as 
may be thought necessary for those purposes. 

" The Caddos are considered as the mother nation of the coun- 
try, and have a general superintendence overall the tribes in their 
vicinity, except the Choctaws; between whom and the Caddos 
there is great jealousy. 

" It would perhaps be practicable to effect a peace between the 
Comauches and Spaniards. Such a measure would harmonize 
with the general policy of the government. 

"The small pox has made dreadful ravages among the Indians 
of that country. The Comauches compute the loss which they 
sustained in 1816, from this horrible disease, at four thousand 



260 



APPENDIX. 



souls. The vaccine innoculation might be introduced among 
them at a trifling expense; such a course is dictated by humanity. 

With sentiments of very great respect, &c. 
(Signed) W. A. TRIMBLE, 8th Reg't. U. S. Army.' 

Hon. J. C. Calhoun, Sec'y. of War, Washington. 

Story of Totapia, and Hocktanlubbee, Choctaws, known to their 
White neighbors by the names of 

Jenny and her son Tom. 

The following affecting and authentic story, related to me by a 
lady of respectability and piety, who was an eye witness to a part 
of what she relates, strikingly illustrates the Indian character and 
customs, and shews the high importance of giving, to these natives 
of our wide wilderness, the benefits of our laws and religion. 

"Jenny was the wife of a Choctaw, who murdered an Indian of 
his own tribe, about twenty years ago ; fled over the Mississippi 
into Louisiana, where he was overtaken and put to death by his 
pursuers. Jenny, with four or five small children, of whom Tom 
was the eldest, afterwards settled in the neighborhood of St. 
Francisville, Louisiana, where lived a lady, a widow, of much be- 
nevolence and wealth, who had compassion on Jenny, and acted 
toward her the part of a friend. 

"About six years ago, Tom, then of the age of about twenty-five, 
murdered an old Indian ; for which act, according to an unaltera- 
ble law of the nation, his life was demanded, and he was senten- 
ced to die. The day of his execution was fixed, and had arrived, 
and the relatives and friends, both of the murdered, and the mur- 
derer, with others, a mingled throng, were assembled, after their 
usual manner, and all things were ready for inflicting on the crim- 
inal the sentence of the law. At this moment of strong and min- 
gled feeling, Jenny, the mother, pressed through the crowd, to the 
spot where her son stood, by the instruments prepared to take 
from him his life. She then addressed the Chiefs and the com- 
pany, demanding the life of her child, offering in its stead her own. 
Her plea was this. " Tom is young. He has a wife, children, 
brothers, sisters, all looking to him for counsel and support. I am 



APPENDIX. 



261 



old. I have only a few days at most, and can do but little more 
tor my family. Nor is it strictly just ; rather is it a shame to take 
a nezv shirt for an old one.'"* 

"The magnanimous offer of Jenny was accepted, and a few hours 
allowed her to prepare for her death. In this interval, she re- 
paired to the house of her kind and liberal friend, and protector, 
Mrs. T. whose place of residence was in the near vicinity of this 
awful scene, for the purpose of giving her her last look, and fare- 
well. Mrs. T. was all this time in ignorance of what had passed 
in the camp near her, and of Jenny's offer, and determination : 
nor did Jenny divulge them to Mrs. T. She had come, she said, to 
beg a coffin, and wiuding sheet, for her son ; adding, " When the 
sun has reached its height, (pointing upwards,) Tom dies." Not 
suspecting the arrangement Jenny had made to preserve her son, 
Mrs. T. with comforting words, gave her all she requested. When 
asked what should be the length of the coffin, and the grave 
clothes, Jenny replied — " Make them to suit my size, and they 
will answer for my son." 

"Soon after Jenny had left Mrs. T.'s for the camp, where all 
things were ready for her execution, a messenger, in haste, arriv- 
ed, and informed Mrs. T. what was passing in the camp, and that 
Jenny was immediately to die. Mrs. T. hastened to the scene, 
with the intention of rescuing her friend ; but Jenny, the moment 
she saw her carriage coming, at a distance, imagining, doubtless, what 
was her object, standing by her grave, caught the muzzle of the 
gun, the prepared instrument of her death, and pointing it to her 
heart, entreated the executioner immediately to do his duty. He 
obeyed, and she fell dead. 

"During five years after this, Tom was treated with sneers and 
contempt by the friends of the old man, whom he had murdered. 
They said to him : " You coward; let your mother die for you. 
You afraid to die, coward." Tom could not endure all this. A 
year ago, Tom met a son of the old man whom he had murdered, 
on the bank of the Mississippi, ten miles from his home, and for 
some cause unknown, (probably he had been his principal tor- 
mentor,) plunged his knife into him, giving him a mortal wound. 

*Alluding to the circumstance, that the Indian murdered by her son was 
old, and he young. 



262 



APPENDIX. 



He returned home with indications of triumph, brandishing his 
bloody knife, and without waiting for enquiry, confessed what he 
had done. He told his Indian friends, that he would not live to 
be called a coward. "I have been told," he said, "that I fear to 
die. Now you shall see, that I can die like a man." A wealthy 
planter, whose house he passed, he invited to witness how he 
could die. This was on the Sabbath. Monday, twelve o'clock, 
was the hour, which he appointed for this self-immolation. 

"Here," says the lady who gives me this information, who was 
present, and relates what she saw — "here a scene was presented, 
which baffles description. As I approached, Tom was walking 
forward and back again, still keeping in his hand the bloody knife, 
which he seemed to consider, as the duellist does his sword or 
pistol, h ; s badge of honor. With all his efforts to conceal it, he 
discovered marks of an agitated mind. The sad group present, 
consisted of about ten men, and as many females; the latter, with 
sorrowful countenances, were employed in making an over shirt 
for Tom's burial. The men, all except two brothers of Tom, 
were present, smoking their pipes, with apparent unconcern. 
Several times Tom examined his gun, and remained silent. His 
grave had been dug the day before, and he had laid himself down 
in it, to see if it suited as to length and breadth. When the shirt 
was completed, and handed to him, he immediately drew it over 
another garment, the only one he had on ; drew a pair of calico 
sleeves on his arms ; tied two black silk handkerchiefs round each 
shoulder, crossed on the breast, and a third wrapped about his 
head. His long hair was tied with a blue ribbon, and a yard or 
two on each arm, above the elbow. The pipe of peace went 
round three times. The old Chief's wife then arose, retired into the 
bushes, and sung the Death-song, in words, rendered in English, 
"Time is done: Death approaches." This done, Tom went round 
and shook hands with every person present. While he held the 
hand of one of his neighbors, a white man, he said to him, "fare- 
well ; you see me no more in this world. When you die, you see 
me." His neighbor said, "Tom, where are you going?" "I 
am going to mother," said Tom. "Where is your mother?" "In 
a good place.' '"But Tom, will you not wait? Perhaps the friends 
of the young man you killed, will accept of a ransom. We will 
do what we can to save you." Tom replied: "No, I will die." 



1 



APPENDIX. 



263 



" No one had demanded his death ; for all who were interested, 
and would have considered their honor and duty concerned in it, 
resided at the distance of forty or fifty miles. The death song was 
repeated, as was the shaking of hands. Both were again repeat- 
ed, the third and last time. Immediately after, Tom stepped up 
to his wife, a young woman of eighteen, with an infant in her 
arms, and another little child two or three years old, standing by 
her side, and presented to her the bloody knife, which till now he 
had kept in his hand. She averted her face to conceal a falling 
tear ; but recovering herself, turned, and with a faint, forced 
smile, took it. His sister was sitting by the side of his wife, whol- 
ly absorbed in grief, apparently insensible to what was passing ; 
her eyes vacant, fixed on some distant object. Such a perfect 
picture of woe, I never beheld. His pipe he gave to a young 
brother, who struggled hard to conceal his emotions. He then 
drank a little whiskey and water ; dashed the bottle on the ground, 
sung a few words in the Choctaw language, and with a jumping, 
dancing step, hurried to his grave. His gun was so fixed, by the 
aid of a young sappling, as to enable him to take his own life. No 
one, he had declared, should take it from him. These prepara- 
tions and ceremonies being now completed, he gave the necessary 
touch to the apparatus, the gun was discharged, and its contents 
passed through his heart. He instantly fell dead to the earth. 
The females sprang to the lifeless body. Some held his head, 
others his hands, and feet, and others knelt at his side. He had 
charged them to sjiew no signs of grief while he lived, lest it should 
shake his resolution. As far as possible, they had obeyed. Their 
grief was restrained, till he was dead. It then burst forth in a 
torrent, and their shrieks and lamentations were loud and undis- 
sembled. From this last scene, I retired, leaving the poor dis- 
tressed sufferers to bury their dead. 

" What heart is there, enlightened by one ray of the gospel, 
that would not, in view of such a scene, feel deep anguish of spirit 
and compassion for these children of the forest, who are perish- 
ing by thousands, for lack of knowledge ! And who would not, 
in such circumstances, desire, and endeavor, not faintly, not cold- 
ly, nor inactively, but with all their soul, and all their might, te> 
send the blessed gospel among them V M. C. 

Neze-Haven, July, 1822. 



264 



APPENDIX, 



App. G. g.— Rep. p. 39. 

Cornwall school, for educating Heathen youth. 

The following account of the origin, progress, and present state, 
of School, is taken from the Report of the Prudential Com- 
mitiee of the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Mis- 
sions, Sept. 1820, of which the author of this Report was then a 
member ; and from subsequent communications of its worthy, and 
Highly esteemed Principal, Rev. Mr. Daggett. 

Cornwall is in the State of Connecticut, in a retired situation y 
on the east bank of the Housatonnic river, ten miles west of Litch- 
field. The consecrated Seminary established here " was instituted 
in the autumn of 1816, and opened in the beginning of May, 1817. 
There belong to it a commodious edifice for the School, a good 
mansion house, with a barn, and other out-buildings, and a garden 
for the Principal ; — a house, barn, &c. with a few acres of good 
tillage land for the Steward and Commons : all situated sufficiently 
near to each other; and eighty acres of excellent wood land, about 
a mile and a half distant. 

" The object of the School, as set forth in the Constitution, is 
i — " Tlie education in our own country, of Heathen Youths, in such 
manner, as, with subsequent professional instruction, will qualify 
them to become useful Missionaries, Physicians, Surgeons, School- 
masters, or Interpreters ; and to communicate to the Heathen na- 
tions such knowledge in agriculture and the arts, as may prove the 
means of promoting Christianity and civilization.'''' As these youths 
are designed for a higher education, than is expected to be obtain- 
ed at our Mission Schools in heathen countries, it is deemed of no 
small importance, that they be only such as are of suitable age, 
of docile dispositions, and of promising talents. 

" In the constitution there is a provision, that youths of our own 
country, of acknowledged piety, may be admitted to the school ; 
at their own expense, and at the discretion of the Agents. 

" In the first year of the School twelve youths were admitted. 
The number of pupils, Sept. 1820, was twenty-nine ; four from 
the Sandwich Islands — one from Otaheite — one from the Mar- 
quesas — one Maylay — eight Cherokees — -two Choctaws — three of 



APPENDIX. 



265 



the Stockbridge Tribe — two Oneidas — one Tuscarora — two Caugh- 
newagas — -one Indian youth from Pennsylvania, and three youths 
of our own country. 

" Under the instruction of the able and highly respected Prin- 
cipal, the Rev. Mr. Daggett, and his very capable and faithful As- 
sistant, Mr. Prentice, the improvement of the pupils, in general, 
has been increasing and satisfactory, and in not a few instances, 
uncommonly good. Besides being taught in various branches of 
learning, and made practically acquainted with the useful arts of 
civilized life ; they are instructed constantly, and with especial 
care in the doctrines and duties of Christianity. Nor has this in- 
struction been communicated in vain. Of the thirty-one Heathen 
Youths — including with the twenty-six now at school, the deceased 
Obookiah, and the four, who have gone with the Mission to their 
native Islands — seventeen are thought to have given evidence of 
a living faith in the Gospel ; and several others are very serious- 
ly thoughtful on religious concerns. The Lord, in his sovereign 
goodness, has made it strikingly manifest, that his face is toward 
this favored Seminary, and that his blessing rests upon it. May it 
be eminently instrumental in making known the glory of his Name 
in many lands, and of bringing multitudes of different nations and 
tongues, to unite in songs of everlasting joy and praise." 

English names, native names, and countries, of the members of 
the Foreign Mission School at Cornwall, March 1, 1821.* 

Names. 
*James Ely, 
*George L. Weed, 
*Hbratio N. Hubbell, 
*Adin C. Gibbs, 
*Stephen Popohe, 
* Joseph Potang Snow, 
*Elias Boudinot, 
Leonard Hicks, 
*Thomas Bassel, 
*David S. Taucheechy, 
John Ridge, 
*John Vann, 
*James Fields, 
*David Brown, 
tMcKee Folsom, 

Israel Folsom, 
*William Kummooolah, 
tJohn C. Irepoah, 
tRichard Kriouloo 
Robert Whyhee, 

* This document, and others subjoined, were prepared for me to exhibit to 
the Government at Washington, and made a part of my Report to the President. 

34 



Native Names. 



Po-po-he, 
Sar'-duk, 
Kub-le-ga-nah, 

Taw-tohoo-o, 
Taw-chee-chy, 



A-wih, 



Kum-mooo-lah, 
I-re-p6-ah, 
Kri-ou-loo, 
Why-hee, 



Country. 
Anglo- American, Hadlime Ct 

Bo. Catskill, N. Y. 

Do. Trumbull, Ct. 

Indian youth from Penn. 
Otaheite. 
Malay. 



Cherokees. 



Choctaws. 

Mowhee. 
¥t cLj Owhyhee. 
' cL 3 i Owhyhee. 
i ™ Mowhee. 



266 



APPENDIX 



Names. 



Native Names. 
Bau-hi-you-tuth, 



Country. 



Jacob Seth, 
*Johu Newcom, 
tJohn N. Chicks, 
tPeter Augustine, 
* Aaron Johnson, 

Peter Jacob Tarbel, 

Peter Gray, 
Thomas Zealand. 



Pau-poon'-haut, 
Ta-kon-o-tas 



Thau-re-weeths, 



Wau-ne-nauk-theet. 



^ Stockbridge Indiane. 

Oneida. 
Tuscarora. 



^ Caughnewagas. 
New-Zealand. 



Since the above date, the number of scholars has increased to 
thirty-two; one of those added, is from the Sandwich Islands, a 
pious youth, who has been baptized by the name of John Eliot 
Phelps ; another is a youth of the Narraghanset tribe. 



This Seminary has attracted the attention, and received the lib- 
erality of the honorable and benevolent Baron de Campagne, of 
Basle, Switzerland. In a letter to the Rev. Principal of the 
School, he writes, under the date of June 6, 1820, thus: — " What 
I have read of the Foreign Mission School at Cornwall has given 
me great pleasure ; especially as human powers cannot of them- 
selves produce the desired effect ; but they produce it only as in- 
struments in the hands of Him, who is the source of all good — of 
love and pure charity ; and it is thus only, that the mind is capa- 
ble of being fully enlightened. I beg you to use the accompany- 
ing sum of 100 ducats, I according to your best judgment, as an ex- 
ternal mean, which by divine grace, may impart those spiritual 
blessings, inseparable from the attainment of supreme love. This 
little offering is accompanied by the very sincere prayers, not on- 
ly of the humble individual, who sends you these lines, but like- 
wise of his friends in Jesus Christ, that grace may enliven the 
hearts of the heathen youths under your direction, and may so fill 
them with the pure love of Jesus Christ, as that they may be able 
by the same grace, to kindle a similar happy flame in the hearts 
of their countrymen, who are still as blind men, in the darkness 
of sinful Adam." 

Were all our titled and honorable citizens, of like sentiments 
and feelings with this noble foreigner, what encouragement would 



Baron de Campagne. 



* Professors of religion. t Hopefully pious, 

1 The net proceeds of the bill were 212 dollars. 



APPENDIX. 



267 



they give to those who are engaged for the benefit of the heathen! 
What glorious effects would their combined exertions and influ- 
ence produce ! It is our comfort to know, that the hearts of all 
men are in the hands of the Lord ; and he turneth them, as the 
rivers of water are turned, whithersoever he will. 

This letter of the Baron was answered, as it should be, by the 
Principal of the School ; and presuming that it would gratify this 
generous foreigner to receive a specimen of the improvements of 
the youth under his instruction, he directed that the following let- 
ters should accompany his own ; which, with the others subjoin- 
ed, are here exhibited to the public, as fair and conclusive evi- 
dence of the capacities of Indians for improvement. A part of 
these letters, it will be perceived, were intended, by the Princi- 
pal of the School, to be exhibited to the President of the United 
States, as specimens of the attainments of his pupils. 

Letter of Elias Boudinot, to Baron de Champagne. 

Foreign Mission School, Cornwall, [Con.) Jan. 8, 1821.* 

'"Honored and Respected Sir, 

" Having been requested by my beloved teacher, Mr. Daggett, I 
have the pleasure of writing to you; and in the name of my fel- 
low students, to thank you for your benevolent donation of 100 
ducats. We feel thankful to the Giver of every good and perfect 
gift, that we are not destitute of Christian friends, who are willing 
to give their property for our sustenance, while receiving an ed- 
ucation in this charitable institution. We are here, far from our 
native countries, brought here by the kind providence of God; 
and blessed be his name, that he has given us friends to support 

*It will be proper, before reading these letter?, that the reader should know 
that they are in truth the compositions of the youth whose names are subscribed 
to them. Of this their Instructor assures the Baron, in his letter. 

"On the following pages' ' he says, " are a few lines addressed to you, by two of 
my present pupils, of the Cherokee nation of Indians, about seventeen years of 
age, who appear to be the devoted followers of the Lord Jesus Christ. These let- 
ters were composed and written by these Indian youths, without any assistance, 
excepting the correction of a very few words. The catalogue of the school was 
transcribed by Thomas Bassel, another Cherokee youth." 



268 



APPENDIX. 



us, and to instruct us in human knowledge, but especially in that 
science, which treats about the immortal soul, and the only way 
to everlasting felicity. While we are looking with grateful hearts 
to the Christian people of the United States, we are gratified to 
think, that we have a kind benefactor m Switzerland, -y, 

" My honored Sir, we have nothing in this world with which 
we can reward you, for your act of benevolence. Only we re- 
turn you our grateful thanks. But I hope the Lord will reward 
you, and make you the instrument of good to many souls. May 
he yet grant you prosperous, peaceful, and useful days of your 
remaining life, and a crown of glory in the life to come. May 
your prayers be answered for this school ; that numbers here 
may be trained up, who shall go into the vinej^ard of the Lord, 
and be faithful laborers in bringing many unto Christ, who are 
now sitting in darkness. Our school promises extensive good- 
Here are numbers, we hope, who are willing to be employed in 
the work of the Lord. 

" We need the prayers of all christian people, and we are truly 
encouraged to think, that we are remembered by the christians of 
Europe, as well as of America. You will likely, Sir, wish to know 
from what nation I came. I am a Cherokee, from a nation of In- 
dians living in the southern part of the United States. There are 
eight of us here from that nation. Six out of eight profess to be 
the followers of the meek and lowly Jesus. I came to this school 
more than two years ago ; and, if it is the will of God, I expect to 
leave it in about one or two years. I feel sometimes an ardent 
desire to return to my countrymen and to teach them the way of 
salvation. Pray for me, that my faith fail not, and that I may not 
finally prove insincere. That we may meet in the kingdom which 
is eternal in the heavens, is the wish of your unworthy and un- 
known young friend." 

From David Brown to the same. 

January 6, 1821. 

"Hon. and Dear Sir, 

" By the request of my worthy preceptor, 1 think myself high- 
ly privileged to have this opportunity in addressing you, from this 



APPENDIX. 269 

distant land. It is a matter of great joy to us, who are heathens, 
to contemplate the goodness of God, in causing his children to 
have compassion on the poor benighted heathen nations, who are 
yet groaning under the bondage of Satan, the deceiver of man- 
kind. Our hearts ought truly to glow with praise and gratitude 
to our Heavenly Father, in your taking such deep interest for 
this institution, and for the welfare of heathens universally. Our 
land was once covered with darkness, and we heard not the joy- 
ful sound of the Gospel proclaimed in our ears. We knew noth- 
ing of Jesus Christ, who has died for sinful men. But now, bles- 
sed be God, that he has sent the word of redeeming life to us. 
Yea, we feel his love and presence, and praise him for sending 
the news of salvation to our long lost, and wretched tribes. But, 
dear Sir, many of my brethren have not heard of Jesus Christ, 
which is very painful to me. The late exertions among Chris- 
tians in America have, in some degree, promulgated among differ- 
ent languages, nations, and people, the Gospel of our Lord and 
Savior Jesus Christ. 

" I came here last June, and I trust the Lord will prepare me 
for usefulness among my dear brethren the Cherokees. Pray for 
me, respected Sir ; and while the Atlantic rolls between us, may 
we be near in spirit ; hoping soon to meet and join with all the 
blood-bought millions, in singing the redeeming love of God 
through an endless eternity. 

w May the God of peace ever be with you, and reward you for 
your kind benevolence to us. This is the wish and sincere pray- 
er of your heathen friend, in the Lord Jesus." 

David Brown to J. Evarts, Esq. 

After tenderly expressing his obligations to the Board, he pro- 
ceeds as follows : — 

" But why do I talk thus, while the idea of some people is, that 
an Indian cannot be civilized ? He has no capacity for religion. 
He cannot learn. He has no faculties ; therefore let him go, and 
again traverse the regions of his native woods, and turn to his sav- 
age state, which is wretchedness and woe. But the God of heav- 
en has spoken, and who can recal his blessed words, when he 
said, Go ye into all the world, and preach the Gospel to every crea- 



270 



APPENDIX 



tare. I presume these persons who are so eager to help in the 
destruction of Indians, rather than to aid in reclaiming them from 
their degradation, are generally those, who are unfriendly to reli- 
gion and good society, and who are themselves going swift to de- 
struction." 

Having intimated his desire of being useful among his country- 
men, he adds : — 

" Indeed, to tell the truth, I am ashamed to see the dear spot, 
Brainerd, without having at least some qualifications for useful- 
ness. 

" Oh, how great would be the blessing, could we see many 
young Cherokees, as heralds of salvation to their dear benighted 
countrymen, and who would hail the little flock of Christ in the 
Cherokee nation, and overthrow the dominions of darkness there, 
and make the banks of Chickamaugah tremble ; and then fly on 
the wings of heavenly love, over the lofty Lookout,* and visit the 
slumbering inhabitants there ; and then reach the plains of Creek 
Path, and turn the path toward heaven, that it may be travelled 
by Cherokees also ; and so on, until spring Taloney, Tas-tu-ga, 
and all the people would acknowledge God as their Savior." 

Letter j rom Catharine Brown, to her brother, David Brown, at the 
For. Mis. School at Cornwall, dated Creek Path, Feb. 21. 

" My Dear Brother, 

" I received your kind letter some time since, and it gave me 
great satisfaction to hear from you. I should have written to you 
before this time, but did not know how to send to Brainerd. I am 
truly happy to hear that you feel so well contented with your sit- 
uation in school, and that you are well pleased with your dear in- 
structor. Our dear parents are in good health. They have re- 
moved from the place where they lived before, and are now liv- 
ing with brother John. I think they have truly passed from 
death unto life ; they seem to be growing in grace and in the 
knowledge of Him who has redeemed their souls from hell. In- 
deed, you cannot imagine how differently they seem from what 

* The name of a majestic mountain, the base of -which is washed by the 

Tennessee. 



APPENDIX. 



211 



they did when you left us. All they desire now is to do the will 
of our dear Savior. This work is the Lord's, and no doubt he 
will keep them and carry them safe through this sinful world, un- 
til he receives them to his heavenly kingdom. O, dear brother, 
truly the Lord has heard our prayers for the souls of our parents. 
We have great reason to rejoice. May we not say, not unto us, 
but to thy name be all the praise. You have doubtless heard 
that Brother J. has joined the church. Dear Brother D. my 
heart is full while I am writing. How shall I express my grati- 
tude to God for bringing him to a knowledge of the Savior. He 
says sometimes he feels happy in praying to God, and feels wil- 
ling that he should do with him as seemeth good in his sight. 

" My brother David, when we look back and see what the 
Lord has done for our family in the course of a few years, O let 
us call upon our souls, and all that is within us, to praise our God 
for his great blessings to us. 

" I sometimes long to see your face once more in this world, 
to converse and pray with you before our Savior. I often think 
of the happy hours which we spent when we were at Brainerd, 
when we first tasted the sweetness of religion, and when we used 
to take each other's hand to walk and sing our favourite hymn, 

" Come we that love the Lord." 

We then knew the happiness of saints, and felt that religion never 
was designed to make our pleasures less. But now our heavenly 
Father has separated us for a time in this world ; I hope for his 
glory, and for the good of perishing souls around us. We have 
much to do for our Savior. As we hope we are children of the 
most high God, let us be good soldiers, and not be weary in well 
doing, for in due season we shall reap if we faint not. 

" Father and mother send love to you, and to the scholars in 
Cornwall. I hope you will write to us soon, and let us know how 
you do. 

£ ' Adieu, dear brother, till we meet again.'* 



272 



APPENDIX. 



The following letter is from the mother of Elias Boudinot, who 
is a member of the Cornwall School, dictated by her to the writer 
of it, in Jan. 1821. 

"Dear Son, 

"When you shall have finished your education, I shall rejoice, 
just as if I had got the education. I hope the Lord will have mer- 
cy on me, that 1 may find the ^od way. As you have found the. 
Savior before me, I will take yoftr advice, and listen to your talk. 
I am in hopes that the Lord, in his mercy, will turn my heart: 
and that I may find the dear Savior. I will not get discouraged. 
I will still try." SUSANNAH." 

The reading of this letter forcibly reminds us of the declara- 
tion of the blessed Savior, (Matth. xxii. 31,) "Verily I say unto 
you, that the puhlicans and harlots [the heathen,] go into the 
kingdom of God before you." 

Letter from Rev. Mr. Daggett. 

"Rev. and Dear Sir, 

"At your request I present you with a few specimens of the im- 
provement of some of my pupils, in the F. M. S. They are all 
in the hand-writing of those whose names are undersigned. The 
letters of David Brown and Israel Folsom, are their own composi- 
tion, with such trifling corrections as are usually given to the com- 
positions of youths in school, and the suggestion of three sentences 
in one of the letters, and one in the other. The letter of John 
Ridge is without any correction, in consequence of which, some of 
the pointing is erroneous, and two or three words are mis-spelt. 
The calculation of the lunar eclipse, was made understandingly, 
by Elias Boudinot, (Kul-le-ga-nah,) seventeen years of age, under 
my superintendence; and the projection was made by him, with- 
out any assistance except the directions of the book. It may be, 
that we shall discover some error in the calculation, on a review, 
as it has been gone through rather hastily. John Ridge and Elias 
Boudinot have studied Geography extensively, Rhetoric, Survey- 
ing, Ecclesiastical and Common History, three books in the iEneid, 



APPENDIX. 273 

two Orations of Cicero, and are attending to Natural Philosophy. 
The conduct of my pupils is, with very few exceptions, remarka- 
bly good, and their dispositions amiable. It is a pleasant task to 
guide them in paths of science and religion, in the hope, especial- 
ly, tfta*4ome of them are destined to become extensively useful in 
promoting the temporal and spiritual good of their respective, 
tribes and nations. 

"It is with concern we perceive*our climate to be unfriendly to 
the health of the Islanders, three of whom, as you know, have al- 
ready fallen a sacrifice to it. On this account, it is probable, that 
Divine Providence intends this school to be chiefly useful to the 
Aborigines of this country. And as Congress has done considera- 
ble, and will probably do more, to advance the civilization of these 
long-neglected and injured fellow-beings, I would suggest, whether, 
on a proper representation, they would not judge it expedient, in 
some way, to provide permanent funds for the support of this be- 
nevolent Institution. This, I think, would be very desirable, as its 
support, at present, is very precarious, and its means limited. 

"Should you think proper, on your southern tour, to present the 
following specimens to the President of the United States, I have 
no objection to your doing it. 

"With most sincere and ardent wishes for your success in the 
great objects of your expected tour, and for your preservation 
and safe return, I am, Rev. and dear Sir, 

very affectionately and respectfully yours, 
HERMAN DAGGETT." 

To the Rev. Jedidiah Morse, D. D. New- Haven, {Con.) 
Cornwall, (Con.) March 12, 1321. 

i : 

To his Excellency James Monroe, President of the United States of 

America. 

?<£ SlR, 

"As Dr. Morse is about to proceed to the seat of government, on 
business relative to the Indian Tribes in this country, I take the 
liberty, by permission of my instructor, to address a few lines to 
you. I congratulate you, sir, upon your re-election to the high 
office which you sustain. I thank you for the paternal regard 

35 



274 APPENDIX. 

wKeh you have manifested towards my countrymen, and other 
Indian Tribes. Divine* Providence has brought me from the 
western wilderness, to this your happy land. I now dwell, as it 
were, under your roof, and worthy patronage, and enjoy the means 
of learning many things, which are calculated to make me useful 
among my dear countrymen. 

, "The nation, to which I am connected, was once large and pow- 
erful, and could behold a great portion of land as their possession. 
But now they have decreased to a very small number. They 
have become a weak and dependent nation. But thanks be to 
Him, who has all power in heaven and on earth, for causing you, 
and the people over which you rule, to make efforts for bringing 
the long-lost and neglected tribes in f o an evangelical state, and for 
teaching them industry, cultivation of the et th, the arts of civili- 
zed life, and the good religion of Jesus Chn._ which promotes 
friendship, and harmony, between all nations, h *s truly gratify- 
ing to me, dear sir, to hear, what you have alrea« done for my 
brethren, and am persuaded that }'ou will not forsake ? children 
of the forest, but that you will protect them from wars 1 trou- 
ble, and take them under your great wing. 

"Ever since Columbus landed on our shores, blood has b n 
shedding abundantly, and the war-whoop has been proclaimed 
such a tone, that large nations have been swept away from the 
earth. But I hope these wars with Indians themselves, and oth- 
er people, are now declining, the weary Indian burying his bloody 
tomahawk, changing his war-whoop for the praises of God in the 
songs of Zion, and fisting under the blood-stained banners of 
Christ. 

"I think you showed* a great token of your regard, in travelling 
through such an extensive wilderness to make a visit to f>rainerd. 

"It makes me rejoice to reflect that we, the Cherokees, are 
now enjoying, in a little measure, the means of comfort; and I 
trust, that our dear father, the President, will not suffer us again 
to be driven to the west, and to return again to our savage state; 
but rather that you will send us teachers, bibles, and the precious 
gospel; and doubtless you may see some faithful and devoted chil- 
dren of the wilderness, as your subjects. 

"This Institution, of which I am now a member, I doubt not, 
will be the means of diffusing knowledge and truth to the remotest 

•4 



APPENDIX. 



275 



parts of the globe, and will aid greatly the good work which is 
now performing by the benevolent peopje^of America, and of oth- 
er lands. J" ▼ " ; 

"May He, who is the source of all light and blessedness, give 
you wisdom to rule over the great people of these United States, 
and make you a rich blessing to your country, and to us, who now 
desire to become your happy children, is the prayer of your de- 
voted servant, DAVID BROWN." 

Cornwall, March, 1821. 

Cornwall, (Conn.) March 18, 1821. 

"Honored Sir, 

"Agreeable to the request of my Instructor, I take the pleasure 
of addressing your Excellency: and consider myself particularly 
honored, in having the privilege of writing to a man, whom we, 
the Indians, call "Father." 

"I am happy to understand that Doct. Morse is about to visit the 
seat of government, to exhibit to you, his report, relative to the 
Indians, whom he has visited. We their sons, who have the ad- 
vantages of instruction in this seminary, hope that it may meet 
your cordial approbation, and that assistance may be proffered to 
the long-neglected and despised people. 

"In reading the histories of the various kingdoms, which have 
risen to an exalted pitch, since the creation of the world, we be- 
hold the wonder ! which the sword, and the wheels of revolving 
ages have swept away : I hope this will not be the lot of my coun- 
try. I rejoice, that my dear nation now begin to peep into the 
privileges of civilization — that this great and generous government 
is favorable to them, and that ere long, as I hope, Congress will 
give them the hand of strong fellowship — that they will encircle 
them in the arms of love, and adopt them into the fond embraces 
©f that Union, which the immortal Washington and others have 
made in this western world! 

"Honored Father, these are the consolations I entertain for the 
Indian nations, which I hrope will be accomplished. I have read, 
that you have, in your visit to Brainerd, been pleased to encour- 
age that Institution by your liberality: which is truly gratifying to 
me, and am led to believe with confidence, that our President 
loves the Indians too ! 

k 



276 



APPENDIX. 



"It is a known fact, that those Indians who have missionaries 
among them, and who live on this side the Mississippi, are coming 
up, with faster steps to civilization, than- those who have been en- 
ticed to remove to the west. An instance of this, may be found in 
viewing the condition of my dear people. I left them about two 
years ago; when they were at work: the tools of the whites were 
used — some possessed large farms; cattle, horses, hogs, &c. Their 
women were seen at the wheel, and the weaver's shuttle was ia 
motion. 

"How different is the condition of that part of my nation, w 7 ho 
have been enticed, by their foolish imaginations, and particularly 
by the allurements of the white man, to remove to the Arkansaw. 
The equipage of a hunter, viz. a brass-kettle, gun and knife were 
offered to them, which, mortified at the sight, we saw them eager- 
ly receive and depart. They are now in the pursuit of game, in 
which employment, we have reason to apprehend, they would 
have continued, or perhaps might have sunk into oblivion, were it 
not, that teachers have been sent to them, by christian benevo- 
lence. 

"My health is not very good at present; my disease, the scrofu- 
lous complaint, has again attacked my system. My father wishes 
me to return, which I will perhaps do in a short time. Lwi ' Mo 
him, and requested him, to send me to a College at the soutij, 
whenever I may have the happiness to recover. My father and 
mother are both ignorant of the English language, but it is astonish- 
ing to see them exert all their power to have their children edu- 
cated, like the whites ! 

"Honored Sir, wishing you Ihe blessings of heaven, and con- 
gratulating you in your re-election to your high seat, I subscribe 
myself most excellent Sir, your humble servant, 

JOHN RIDGE." 

To his Excellency James Monroe, ) 
President of the U. S. of America. $ 

Foreign Mission School, Cornwall, (Con.) March 8, 1821. 

^'Honored Sir, 

"As I am persuaded you are the true friend of the poor red 
people, I do hereby express my gratitude to you, for your bene- 



APPENDIX. 277 

volence towards the Choctaws, and other infatuated sons of the 
forest. 

"I am a stranger to you, Sir, and unworthy to address you in 
this manner. Yet reflecting that you are the father of the poor 
Indians, and having permission from my dear Preceptor, I would 
say a few things, in behalf of my countrymen. 

"The Choctaws have considered you, with unfeigned impres- 
sions of respect. We have called you father, because you show 
a kind, and compassionate spirit towards us; and we will make 
application unto our father, whenever the circumstances require. 

"The Choctaws are so ignorant, they know not what is good, 
and are ready to follow the disgraceful example of bad men: yet, 
in general, the Choctaws are very submissive to what is said to 
them by their true friends. 

"I hope I am preparing to return to them soon, and tell them 
what they must do. It is my chief object, when I finish my edu- 
cation, to return to my dear nation, and endeavor to persuade 
them to forsake their ancient customs, habits and manners, and 
lay hold on the culture of the land, after the example of their 
white brethren; to lay their guns and tomahawks down, for the 
plough, hoe, and the axe; to cultivate their lands, and exchange 
their whiskey, that detestable liquor, to which they are perpetu- 
ally devoted, for the coffee, and the tea; and the war-whoop, for 
the praises of God. 

"One thing increases the deplorable condition of the Choctaws; 
that is, the examples of the bad white people, who come into the 
Nation, and show the poor Indians how to pursue the way down 
to ruin, instead of showing them the way unto the living God. 
But we have reason to be thankful that so many benevolent peo- 
ple are now engaged to do them good, and to lead them in the 
right way. And no doubt it was designed by Providence, that 
you, Sir, might be an instrument in regulating the temporal affairs 
of our people, and in civilizing and christianizing the poor heathen 
Indians. 

"When I was on my way, coming to this christian school, from 
the Choctaw nation, I passed by your palace, in December, 1818. 
I intended then to visit you, but the hour which I had to spend in 
Washington dkl not admit. I have a brother in this school, eldei 
than myself, who had opportunity (when he was on his way,) to 



278 



APPENDIX. 



visit you, and three Cherokee boys. From your unworthy hea- 
then friend, ISRAEL FOLSOM." 
To his Excellency James Monroe, ) 
President of the U. S. A. $ 

Accompanying the foregoing letters, were the calculation of the 
eclipse of August 2d, 1822, very neatly projected, and the results 
stated in the usual form, by Elias Boudinot, a Cherokee of seven- 
teen; a translation of the 119th psalm, into the Mah-he-con-nuk 
language, by John Hicks, of that tribe, which is inserted under the 
head of Miscellaneous Articles; with a number.of very neat and 
beautiful specimens of Chirography, of the pupils. In this artthey 
are equal to any people on the globe. 



App. H. h. Rep. p. 39. 

West of the Rocky Mountains, within the limits oF<the United 
States, the number of Indians is estimated, from the best informa- 
• tion which can be obtained, at about 150,000. This body of fellow 
beings, in a state of nature, ignorant of all the blessings of Christiani- 
ty and of civilized life, undoubtedly have strong claims on our be- 
nevolent attention. The political affairs of this remote part of our 
territory are unsettled. They have been before Congress, and left 
unfinished. It is in contemplation to establish here, in due time a Mil- 
itary Post, a Colony, and a Territorial Government. It is of the first 
importance that with these, whenever made, there be planted a 
large and well selected Education Family, similar to that propo- 
sed for Council Bluffs,* for the benefit of the soldiery and colo- 
nists, as well as of the Indian tribes. Experience, in New-Eng- 
land particularly, has proved the wisdom of making these establish- 
ments coetaneously. Together, they form a whole, and may co^ 
operate to great advantage. Each, in the case under consideration, 
would be imperfect, and unsafe, without both the others. From 
the joint efforts, and influence of the whole, we might reasonably 
expect the best results. 



* See Appendix M. m, 



APPENDIX. 



279 



App. I. i. Rep. p. 68. — Indian Titles. 

The following opinion was given by an eminent Lawyer, in a 
case stated to him relative to the nature of Indian titles to their 
inds. — 

" The case stated must be examined and considered with refer- 
nce to certain established principles, the original foundation of 
vhich is now no longer open to enquiry. The European settlers 
»f this country, claimed to have a right to appropriate it to them- 
elves, and the mildest and least exceptionable form in which they 
:xercised that right, was to treat the aboriginal inhabitants as enti- 
tled to a limited or qualified property, a right to occupy and enjoy 
under certain modifications, but with no power to convey nor, in- 
deed, to do any other acts of ownership. The right of soil, or 
the absolute property, and the jurisdiction over it, were in the 
mean time deemed to belong to the Sovereign, or State under 
whose authority the discovery and settlement were made, and to 
the Grantees of such Sovereign or State. The interest in the soil 
carried with it the right to buy off, or otherwise remove, the in- 
cumbrance, which right, as respected the Sovereign or state, was 
of course full and absolute, but as respected individuals, was sub- 
ject to such restrictions as might be thought fit to be imposed, 
either by general legislation, or by terms annexed to the respec- 
tive grants. 

" It resulted, necessarily, from this view of the subject, and I 
presume it may be considered as a general principle adopted and 
acted upon, if not uniformly, at least very extensively, in the Brit- 
ish colonies and possessions in North America, that no title could 
be derived to Individuals, merely by purchase from the Indians. 
A title to the soil could not be acquired, because, according to the 
theory adopted, the soil was not theirs; and a title could not be ac- 
quired to the occupation and enjoyment, because these were re- 
garded as personal privileges, or rather privileges of the nation or 
tribe in possession, and were- not permitted to be transferred. 

"At the revolution, the rights, of territory and jurisdiction, which 
belonged to the foreign Sovereign, and such Sovereign rights as 
had been granted by him to individuals or bodies, became vested 
in the States of this Union, within whose limits the territory lay* 



280 



APPENDIX. 



" Individual rights, previously vested, were, on the contrary, 
respected and preserved; or, (as was perhaps the case in some 
instances) where they were seemingly blended with certain sove- 
reign powers, or powers, too extensive to be held by individu- 
als, were made the subject of an equitable commutation. 

"Among the rights which thus became vested in the States, was 
the sovereign authority over the lands inhabited by the Indians 
within their bounds, and not yet become the subject of individual 
ownership or claim. It comprehended the right of soil, the juris- 
diction, and the exclusive authority to purchase, or otherwise ex- 
tinguish the qualified property of the Indians. This right was 
transferable to individuals, in the manner the State might deem 
best, and when so transferred was commonly called a right of pre- 
emption. The transfer or grant in whatever form, was usually 
accompanied with a condition, either expressed or understood, 
which required for the validity of the purchase from the Indians, 
that it should be made under the authority and with the sanction 
of some person or persons appointed by the State; and as these 
purchases were made from the tribe, or nation, and not from in- 
dividuals, they have most commonly been made by treaty. 

" The right of pre-emption, then, when granted to an individual, 
was a right to the soil, subject only to the occupation by the In- 
dians, and to become absolute, so as to entitle him to possession, 
when that should be extinguished. It is clear that such a grant would 
create a vested interest, in the individual, which could not right- 
fully be divested or mpaired, without his own consent, or by such 
acts of legislation as are competent to effect any other vested in- 
terest. 

" These general views are in some measure applicable to all the 
questions proposed, and I believe them to be in coincidence with 
the opinion expressed by the Supreme Court of the United States, 
in the case of Fletcher v. Peck (6 Cranch 87. 141 — 2.) 

"I am of opinion, that (naming an Indian tribe) did not 

acquire any legal right in the lands purchased by them from the 
(here naming another Indian tribe,) and of course that no legal ti- 
tle can be acquired by purchase from them. The tribe who sold 

had no power to sell. The constitution of the state of ( ) 

expressly prohibits a sale, and the general principles before ad- 
verted to, which no doubt were in the view of those who framed 



APPENDIX. 



281 



the constitution, lead to the same result. Regarding the sales 
merely void, as a nullity, producing no legal consequences, it can- 
not, I think, be considered as working a forfeiture, &c." 

VatteW opinion on Indian Titles. 

Vattels' opinion on this subject, is, that a nation, merely by ta- 
king possession of a country, acquires, by this act, a title to "no 
more than it is able to people or cultivate." — "The law of na- 
tions only acknowledges the property and sovereignty of a nation 
over uninhabited conntries, of which they shall really, and in fact, 
take possession, in which they shall form settlements, or of which 
they shall make actual use." " A nation may lawfully take pos-, 
session of a part of a vast country, in which are found none but 
erratic nations, incapable, by the smallness of their numbers, to 
people the whole." — " The earth belongs to the human race in 
general, and was designed to furnish it with subsistance : if each 
nation had resolved from the beginning, to appropriate to itself a 
vast country, that the people might live only by hunting, fishing, 
and wild fruits, our globe would not be sufficient to maintain a 
tenth part of its present inhabitants. People have not then devia- 
ted from the views of nature in confining the Indians within nar- 
row limits. However, we cannot help praising the moderation of 
the English Puritans, the first settlers in New-England; who, not- 
withstanding their being furnished with a charter from their sove- 
reign, purchased of the Indians the land they resolved to culti- 
vate.* This laudable example was followed by Mr. William 
Penn, who planted the colony of Quakers in Pennsylvania."! 

Opinion of Hon. J. Q. Jldams Esq. on Indian Titles.^ 

" There are moralists, who have questioned the right of the 
Europeans to intrude upon the possessions of the aboriginals in any 

* History of the English Colonies in North America, 
t Vattel ch. 18th,p. 160, 161. 

X Oration on the anniversary Festival of the sons of the Pilgrims. Plymouth, 
Dec. 22, 1802. 

36 



282 



APPENDIX. 



case, and under any limitations whatsoever. But have they ma- 
turely considered the whole subject? The Indian right of posses- 
sion itself stands, with regard to the greatest part of the country, 
upon a questionable foundation. Their cultivated fields; their 
constructed habitations; a space of ample sufficiency for their sub- 
sistence, and whatever they had annexed to themselves by per- 
sonal labor, was undoubtedly by the laws of nature theirs. But 
what is the right of a huntsman to the forest of a thousand miles 
over, which he has accidentally ranged in quest of prey? Shall 
the liberal bounties of Providence to the race of man be monopo- 
lized by one of ten thousand for whom they were created? Shall 
the exuberant bosom of the common mother, amply adequate to 
the nourishment of millions, be claimed exclusively by a few hun- 
dreds of her offspring? Shall the lordly savage not only disdain the 
virtues and enjoyments of civilization himself, but shall he control 
the civilization of a world? Shall he forbid the wilderness to blos- 
som like the rose? Shall he forbid the oaks of the forest to fall be- 
fore the axe of industry, and rise again, transformed into the habi- 
tations of ease and elegance? Shall he doom an immense region of 
the globe to perpetual desolation, and to hear the howlings of the 
tiger and the wolf, silence forever the voice of human gladness? Shall 
the fields and the vallies which a beneficent God has framed to 
teem with the life of innumerable multitudes, be condemned t© 
everlasting barrenness? Shall the mighty rivers poured out by the 
hands of nature, as channels of communication between numerous 
nations, roll their waters in sullen silence, and eternal solitude to 
the deep? Have hundreds of commodious harbors, a thousand 
leagues of coast, and a boundless ocean been spread in the front 
of this land, and shall every purpose of utility to which they 
could apply, be prohibited by the tenant of the woods? No, gene- 
rous philanthropists ! Heaven has not been thus inconsistent in the 
works of its hands ! Heaven has not thus placed at irreconcileable 
strife, its moral laws with its physical creation! The Pilgrims of 
Plymouth obtained their right of possession to the territory on 
which they settled, by titles as fair and unequivocal as any human 
property can be held. By their voluntary association they recog- 
nized their allegiance to the government of Britain; and in process 
of time received whatever powers and authorities could be con- 
ferred upon them by a charter from their sovereign. The spot 



APPENDIX. 



283 



ou which they fixed had belonged to an Indian tribe, totally extir- 
pated by that devouring pestilence which had swept the country, 
shortly before their arrival* The territory thus free from all ex- 
clusive possession, they might have taken by the natural right of 
occupancy. Desirous however of giving ample satisfaction to ev- 
ery pretence of prior right, by formal and solemn conventions with 
the Chiefs of the neighboring tribes, they acquired the further 
security of a purchase. At their hands the children of the desert 
had no cause of complaint. On the great day of retribution, what 
thousands, what millions of the American race will appear at the 
bar of judgment, to arraign their European invading conquerors ! 
Let us humbly hope that the fathers of the Plymouth colony will 
then appear in the whiteness of innocence. Let us indulge the 
belief that they will not only be free from all accusation of injus- 
tice to these unfortunate sons of nature, but that the testimonials 
of their acts of kindness and benevolence towards them, will plead 
the cause of their virtues, as they are now authenticated by the 
records of history upon earth." 



Indian Titles. — J. Q. Adams' plea, before the Supreme Court of the 
United States. 

" What is the Indian Title ? It is mere occupancy for the pur- 
pose of hunting. It is not like our tenures; they have no idea of 
a title to the soil itself. It is overrun by them, rather than inhab- 
ed. It is not a true and legal possession. Vattelb. 1. § 81 p. 
37. and § 209. b. 2. p. 96. Montequieu, b. 18. c. 12. Smith's 
Wealth of Nations, b. 5. c. 1. It is a right not to be transferred, 
but extinguished. It is a right regulated by treaties, not by deeds 
of conveyance. It depends upon the law of nations, not upon mu- 
nicipal right." Fletcher v. Peck Cranch. Vol. 6. p. 121. 



Decision of the S. Court of the United States, on the subject of Indian 

Titles. 

" The majority of the Court is of opinion, that the nature of the 
Indian Title, which is certainly to be respected by all courts, until 



284 



APPENDIX. 



it be legitimately extinguished, is not such as to be absolutely re- 
pugnant to seisin in fee on the part of the State." ibid. 143. 

See also the opinions on this subject, of the Commissioners at the 
Treaty of Ghent.— Amer. State Papers— 1812 to 1815. Vol. 9. p, 
389 to 425. 

" The recognition of a boundary," say the American Commis- 
sioners, " gives up to the nation in whose behalf it was made, all 
the Indian tribes and countries within that boundary. It was on 
this principle that the undersigned have confidently relied on the 
Treaty of 1783, which fixed and recognizes the boundaries of the 
United States, without making any reservation respecting the In- 
dian tribes." — ibid. p. 424. 

App. K. k.— Rep. p. 76. 

Constitution and Officers of a Society for promoting the general wel- 
fare of the Indian Tribes in the United States. 

PREAMBLE. 

1 'Whereas the public attention has been recently awakened, and 
turned with peculiar interest, to the civilization of the Indian 
Tribes within the United States, and it has hence become neces- 
sary to investigate the history, character, and actual condition of 
these tribes : And whereas the labor of a full, extensive and accu- 
rate survey of this wide-spread and interesting field, is too great 
for individual effort : Therefore, for the purpose of combining the 
wisdom, the talents, and active energies of men of information, 
qualified and inclined to engage in this benevolent work, and di- 
recting them to the aid and support of those, whose office requires 
that they take the lead in accomplishing it, a Society has been 
formed and organized under the following 

CONSTITUTION. 

1. The name of this Association shall be, "The American So- 
ciety FOR PROMOTING THE CIVILIZATION AND GENERAL IMPROVE- 
MENT of the Indian Tribes within the United States." 



APPENDIX. 



285 



II. The special objects of this Society shall be, to secure for 
these tribes instruction in all branches of knowledge, suited to 
their capacities and condition; and for this purpose, to ascertain 
the character and strength of their moral and intellectual powers, 
and their dispositions to receive instruction : to examine into their 
origin, history, memorials, antiquities, traditions, governments, 
customs, manners, laws, languages, and religions ; into their dis- 
eases, remedies, and manner of applying them ; — also, into the 
efforts which have been already made for meliorating their condi- 
tion, and the results of those efforts, and where they have failed, 
the causes of failure : to ascertain the number and names of the 
tribes, their places of residence, the extent, soil, and climate, of 
their respective territories, the stations where education families 
may be most advantageously located, and to suggest whatever 
means may be employed for their improvement. 

Other objects of the Society shall be, to obtain a knowledge of 
the geography, mineralogy, geology, natural history, &c. of the 
Indian country ; to collect specimens in all these branches of sci- 
ence, for the purpose of forming a Cabinet for the use of the 
Government of the United States : Also, to select suitable spots 
in the Indian country, for making experimental farms in the im- 
mediate view of Indians, on which to cultivate the different kinds 
of grains, grasses, trees, plants, roots, and other garden veg- 
etables, acUpted to the various soils and climates of the aforesaid 
country ; to introduce the best breeds of domestic animals, and 
feathered fowls : And generally, to do all other things, which such 
a Society can do, to accomplish its grand object, the CIVILIZA- 
TION OF THE INDIANS. 

III. Two rooms in this city shall be procured and appropriated 
to the use of the Society ; one for its Cabinet, the other for its 
Library, and the use of the Secretaries. 

IV. The Officers of this Society shall be such number of Pat- 
rons, as it may see fit to appoint, a President. Vice Presidents, a 
Corresponding Secretary, with two Assistants, a Recording Sec- 
retary, with an Assistant, a Treasurer, an Auditor, a Board of 
Directors, a Committee of Ways and Means, a Cabinet-Keeper, 
a Librarian, and a select body of Special Correspondents. 

V. The successive Presidents of the United States, who shall 
have retired from office, shall be, ex-officio, Patrons of this So- 



286 



APPENDIX. 



ciety, the Vice-President of the United States, ex-officio, its Pres- 
ident ; the Heads of Departments, Judges of the Supreme Court 
of the United States, and Governors of the several States and Ter 
ritories, ex-officio, Vice-Presidents. 

VI. The President of the Society, at its meetings, shall take 
the chair, and fulfil all the customary duties belonging to a pre- 
siding officer. In his absence, the senior Vice-President, or next 
senior officer present, shall take his place and fulfil his duties. 

VII. The Recording Secretary, Treasurer, Auditor, and all 
the Assistant Officers, will perform all the duties appropriate to 
their respective offices, which are usually performed by officer* 
of like name in other Societies. 

VIII. The Corresponding Secretary shall carry on correspon- 
dence with such members of the General, State, and Territorial 
Governments ; with the Special Correspondents of the Society ; 
with Military Officers ; Missionary Societies ; Indian Superinten- 
dents and Agents ; and all other associations and individuals in 
our own country, who may be able to furnish information touch- 
ing the objects of this Society, or otherwise assist its operations ; 
Also with Foreign Societies of like character and objects ; and 
shall communicate his correspondence and the information he 
shall have received, at the annual meeting of the Society; and. 
under the instructions of the Board of Directors, shall prepare 
the Annual Report of the Society. 

IX. The Board of Directors shall consist of thirteen members. 
five of whom shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of all 
business of the Society, except the alteration of its Constitution, 
and the disposal of its funds ; and for these purposes nine mem- 
bers shall be required for a quorum. The Board shall make, 
modify, and repeal, at its discretion, all rules and by-laws form- 
ed for the regulation of the Society ; superintend its general 
concerns ; advise the Corresponding Secretary in the discharge 
of his duties ; and after the first organization of the Society, 
shall fill their own vacancies, and vacancies of all other elec- 
tive officers of the Society ; and shall make such alterations and 
improvements of the Constitution, elect such Honorary Members, 
and add such Special Correspondents, as they may think expedient 
for the better attainment of the objects of the Society. 



APPENDIX-. 



287 



The Corresponding Secretary, his First Assistant, and the Re- 
cording Secretary, shall be, ex-officio, members of this Board. 

X. The Committee of Ways and Means, shall consist of five 
members, three of whom may constitute a quorum. This com- 
mittee shall devise and prosecute to effect, the measures most 
practicable, and best adapted, to supply the Treasury with the 
necessary funds to carry on its operations. They shall also pro- 
vide and superintend the rooms for the Cabinet and Library of the 
Society, for the accommodation of its officers, and for its annual 
public meetings, and shall appoint and instruct the Cabinet-Keep- 
er and Librarian in their respective duties. 

It shall also be the duty of this Committee to collect materials, 
books, manuscripts, &c. for the Cabinet and Library, suited to the 
objects of the Society. 

XI. It shall be the duty of the Special Correspondents of the 
Society, to communicate to the Corresponding Secretary, from 
time to time, such facts, books, documents, printed and manu- 
script, ancient and modern, and general and particular information, 
as they may possess or collect, and may think it expedient to 
transmit, with their own remarks and suggestions, to be deposited 
in the Archives of the City of Washington. 

XII. Members of both Houses of Congress ; General officers of 
the Army ; Commissioners of the Navy ; the Presidents and Pro- 
fessors of Colleges and Theological Seminaries ; the Clergy of all 
denominations throughout the United States ; the Presidents and 
Secretaries of all Associations and Societies, who embrace Indians 
among the objects of their attention ; all Commanding Officers of 
Military Posts, within, or near, the Indian Territories ; all Su- 
perintendants of Indians, and Indian Agents, shall be, ex-officio, 
members of this Society. 

Any person may become a member of this Society, by trans- 
mitting the sum of Jive dollars with his name and address, to the 
Recording Secretary, to be placed on the Register of Members. 

The Society will depend on the voluntary contributions of its 
members, to supply its Treasury with the funds necessary to car- 
ry on its various and extensive operations. 

XIII. There shall be an annual meeting of the Society, at the 
seat of the Government of the United States, at twelve o'clock, on 
the Wednesday succeeding the day appointed for the opening of 



2S8 



APPENDIX. 



Congress, of which notice shall be given in the public papers, by 
the Recording Secretary. 

OFFICERS OF THE SOCIETY, 

PATRONS. 
* * * 

Hon. John Adams. 
v Hon. Thomas Jefferson. 
Hon. James Madison. 
Late successive Presidents of the United States 

PRESIDENT. 

The Vice-President of the United States, ex-officio. 

VICE-PRESIDENTS, eX-officio. 

The Hon. The Secretary of State. 
The Hon. The Secretary of the Treasury. 
The Hon. The Secretary of War. 
The Hon. The Secretary of the Navy. 

The Hon. The Judges of the Supreme Court of the United States. 
Their Excellencies, the Governors of the several States and Terri- 
ries, comprised in the National Union. 

HONORARY MEMBERS. 

Hon. John Jay. 
Gen. Charles C. Pinckney, 
Hon. James Hillhouse. 
Gen. Thomas Pinckney. 
Gen. Andrew Jackson. 
Hon. Henry Clay. 

* * * The name of the President of the United States might be ex- 
pected to stand at the head of this respectable list ; but as he is, from the na- 
ture of his office, the head of the nation, and of course of all its public 
institutions, which are strictly National in their character, it is deemed su- 
perfluous and improper to place it here. 



APPENDIX. 



289 



Rev,, Jedidiah Morse, D. D. Corresponding Secretary. 
George H. Richards, Esq. First Assistant Secretary. 
Sidney Edzvards Morse, A. M. Second Assistant, do. 
Elias B. Caldwell, Esq. Recording Secretary. 
George Watterson, Esq. Assistant do. 
Joseph JVourse, Esq. Treasurer. 
Peter Hagner, Esq. Auditor. 

BOARD OF DIRECTORS. 

Hon. Wm. Wirt, Attorney General of the United States. 

Francis S. Key, Esq. 

Rev. James Milnor, D. D. 

Rev. John Heckew elder. 

Thomas Eddy. 

Robert Ralston, Esq. 

Rev. William Staughton, D. D. 

Rev. Philip Milledoler, D. D. 

Rev. James Laurie, D. D. 

Rev. William Ryland. 

The Corresponding Secretary, ex-officio. 

The First Assistant Secretary, do. 

The Recording Secretary, do. 

COMMITTEE OF WAYS AND MEATUS. 

Josiah Meigs, Esq. 
Gen. Walter Jones. 
Gen. John Mason. 
Col. Thomas MKtnney. 
Thomas Sezvall p M. D. 

SPECIAL CORRESPONDENTS. 

The Presidents and Professors of Universities and Colleges in tjte 

United States, ex-officio. 
Peter S. Duponceau, Esq. 
Samuel L. Mitchell, M. D. LL. D. 
Isaiah Thomas, Esq. 
David Hosack, M. D. 
John Pintard, Esq. 
Cjo\. Wm. MRee. 

37 



290 



APPENDIX. 



Hon. John Davis. 
Rev. James Freeman, D. D. 
Thomas Walcotl, Esq. 
Rev. Abiel Holmes, D. D. 
Samuel R. Trevett, M. D. 
James G. Trotter, Esq. 
Hon. John Pickering. 
Rev. John Sergeant* 
Caleb Atwater, Esq. 
Hon. Daniel Coney. 
Rev. Mr. Gambold. 
Rev. Win. Jenks. 
Jeremiah Evarts, Esq. 
John Law, Esq. 
Rev. Eleazer Williams. 
George I. F. Clark, Esq. 

Solomon T. Hendrick, a Chief of the Muhheconnuks. 
Charles Hicks, Chief of the Cherokees. 
Indian Agents, ex-officio, 



Rep. p. 80. — App. L. 1. 

[circular.] 

Department of War, 3c? September, 1819. 

Sir, 

In order to render the sum of ten thousand dollars, annually 
appropriated at the last session of Congress for the civilization of 
the Indians, as extensively beneficial as possible, the President is 
of opinion, that it ought to be applied in co-operation with the ex- 
ertions of benevolent associations, or individuals, who may choose 
to devote their time or means to effect the object contemplated by 
the act of Congress. But it will be indispensable, in order to ap- 
ply any portion of the sum appropriated in the manner proposed, 
that the plan of education, in addition to reading, writing and 
arithmetic, should, in the instruction of the boys, extend to the 
practical knowledge of the mode of agriculture, and of such of the 
mechanic arts as are suited to the condition of the Indians; and in 
that of the girls, to spinning, weaving, and sewing. It is also in- 
dispensable, that the establishment should be fixed within the lin> 



APPENDIX. 



291 



its of those Indian nations who border on our settlements. Such 
associations, or individuals, who are already actually engaged in 
educating the Indians, and who may desire the co-operation of the 
government, will report to the Department of War, to be laid be- 
fore the President, the location of the institutions under their su- 
perintendence; their funds; the number and kind of teachers; the 
number of youths of both sexes; the objects which are actually 
embraced in their plan of education; and the extent of the aid 
which they require; and such institutions as are formed, but have 
not gone into actual operation, will report the extent of their funds; 
the places at which they intend to make their establishments; the 
whole number of youths of both sexes, which they intend to edu- 
cate; the number and kind of teachers to be employed; the plan 
of education adopted; and the extent of the aid required. 

This information will be necessary, to enable the President to 
determine whether the appropriation of Congress ought to be appli- 
ed in co-operation with the institutions which may request it, and 
to make a just distribution of the sum appropriated. 

In proportion to the means of the government, co-operation will 
be extended to such institutions as may be approved, as well in 
erecting necessary buildings, as in their current expenses. 

I have the honor to be 

Your most obedient servant, 
(Signed) J. C. CALHOUN, 

The following regulations, in addition to those prescribed in the 
circular of the 3d of September, 1819, have been adopted, with 
the approbation of the President of the United States, to govern 
the future distribution of the sum appropriated by Congress for 
the civilization of the Indians, among individuals or societies who 
have established, or contemplate establishing, schools for the edu- 
cation of Indian children, in conformity to the above mentioned 
circular, and who desire the co-operation of the government: 

The position selected for the establishment, a plan of the build- 
ings contemplated, with an estimate of the costs, to be submitted 
to the Secretary of War to be laid before the President. 

Government will, if it has the means, and approves of the ar- 
rangement, pay two thirds of the expense of erecting the necessa* 
ry buildings. 



292 



APPEitDIX. 



No part of the money to be advanced until after the building? 
are commenced; and one-fourth to be reserved until they are 
completed. The payment to be made on the certificate of the 
Agent of Indian affairs, for the tribe or nation in which the estab- 
lishment is located, as to the facts of the commencement and com- 
pletion of the buildings. 

The President of the United States will contribute out of the 
annual appropriation, to each institution which may be approved 
of by him, a sum proportionate to the number of pupils belonging 
to each, regard being had to the necessary expense of the estab- 
lishment, and the degree of success which has attended it. 

No advance to be made except for the buildings, till the school 
is in actual operation; of which fact, and the number of pupils be- 
longing to it, the certificate of the superintendant or person having 
the chief control of the institution, will be sufficient evidence. 

A report will be annually made for each establishment on the 
1st of October, of the number and names of the teachers and other 
persons belonging to it; the number of students; the number 
which have completed their course and left the institution, since 
the first day of October of the preceding year; the number enter- 
ed, the amount of disbursements for the same period, and the value 
and description of property on hand: which report will be certifi- 
ed by the superintendant or person having the principal control of 
the establishment. 

It is considered to be the duty of all persons who may be employ- 
ed, or attached to any institution, not only to set a good example 
of sobriety, industry and honesty, but, as far as practicable, to im- 
press on the minds of the Indians, the friendly and benevolent 
views of the government towards them, and the advantage to them 
in yielding to the policy of government, and co-operating with it in 
such measures as it may deem necessary for their civilization and 
happiness. A contrary course of conduct cannot fail to incur the 
displeasure of government, as it is impossible that the object which 
it has in view can be effected, and peace be habitually preserved, 
if the distrust of the Indians, as to its benevolent views, should be 
excited. 

(Signed) J. C. CALHOUN. 

Department of War, Feb. 29, 1820. 



APPENDIX. 



293 



n - 

3- 



& er < •#* sr. 
p:P ^ 

?g-B"2-* 5'P-S 

a 2 <w - 2. 0* ft 
« rt> ft ^ 



3 „ 
• p B 

^ a ft 3 
ft- 5 

— • ft 
w 3 



3 o 
21 ore 



■T JO 

s © 

c 
1-1 



3" 
ft 



ft 



Ocn O 3 



2 . 5T 5 * S" a e- 



QfQ 

J g 4 (t 
C r+ ft to 

sr. «ra 
o CO c © 

-i 3 3 & 



©' ffi SL 

P *0 ST 



CD 



g s o 
a co a 

03 ^ 



cr 3 3 

(T> ft 



ft 



ft s afiJ 
3- P- © 

£L o- 3-^ ^ 
3St<j "-s — 
O 



3 q 



o ft 



_ © 

CO 

3* ©- as ft 

ft <X> ©"" ft 



ft 



CD 



- 5. S» 

ft ft <— ►• ft 

s-are Pft o 

• a 5s °-| % 

J» © m ft 



.ore 



1 o 



da 



3 3 



sl§ oil 

© cr> as pr P, 
"as 

^ o g S o- 3 
■? ~» 2. ft ft c 

g p § ? o 
ft 2 '> £ 

S aT^ Q |£ 
3- & 9 W" rt 

2-3 1 •t! © 



CO 



as 

as o * © 

lW O- ft HJ ft, (f, 

cn X' ft P-< 3 
£T ST. 3 - 3d B 

'4, as 0-0 o o 



O O 

3- 3- 

n> © 

^ o 

CD < 

° 3 

C as 

p C 
sr. © 

© 3 

3 - 

03 as 



3- ^ P - 3- 

0©-g H 

^ ^ 2- S 

"3 w -5 ft 

ft .ft ft a? 
© s 



ft as 



"3 
-? O 



ft 3 

ft ©• 
3 3 
ft 
© 
as 

3 

I • 

O 
3 



co c 
O 

I— k 

CO 

CO 



as C 
3 o 
3 C 

03 <"♦■ 

^ CD 

h- » ft 

CO P 
^ 03 

• 83 

© 



© 

"3^2. 

ST. as ft 

ft ^ 

Wen 
- o 



5 § tf > 

p- 5 3 

-J § p- 
w 
ft 



as 

& »n 

ft © 

W 2. 
© cr<? 
» 3 



2. 3 ^ 

© as r*- 
3 < P - 
en £• ft 

' I ©° 



5 i 

ft* C/2 

as © 
3 ft. 

W 2- 
© 



© 
3 

© 



CO 

o 
2. 
ft' 

© 

!2J 
ft 

© 



ft 
o 
3 

3 

ft 
3 
ft 
n> 
o- 



W 

p - 

© 



s.r I 

2! 

2 I s 



O 

O O 



00 00 OS 
OO C" Cn 
OO OO 



ft 2 

p- 3 



P- 0 

"11 



A, 



>1 



1 »• 



iff 

ft" 

8 S S 



§1< 

CO 



O 

! ^ 8 
si 1 ^5 



O <^> 

■I 1 



8 2 



294 



APPENDIX, 



App. M. m. Rep. p. 81. 

Mr. Hodgson's visit to Brainerd and Eliot, and hip reflections on the 
state and prospects of the Indians. 

In the summer of 1820, Adam Hodgson Esq. an English gen- 
tleman of intelligence and philanthropy, made a tour through the 
Choctaw and Cherokee nations, visiting on his way Eliot and 
Brainerd. His visits gave great pleasure to the missionaries at 
these stations; aind his liberality to the mission, delicately bestow- 
ed, is mentioned with gratitude. 

On his return to England, Mr. Hodgson published an interest- 
ing account of his tour in the Church Missionary Register, from 
which I quote, as peculiarly appropriate to the design of this Re- 
port, -his concluding remarks. 

Mr. Hodgson's Reflections. 

What animation would an occasional glance at Eliot, and 
Brainerd infuse into our Missionary Committees ! and how cheer- 
ing to many a pious collector of one shilling per week, would be 
the sight of her Indian sisters, rescued from their degraded condi- 
tion, and instructed in the school of Christ! What, though we are 
but hewers of wood or drawers of water for our more honored 
and enterprising brethren; our humble labors, feeble and desulto- 
ry as they are, and ever attended by imperfections, by which their 
efficiency is much impaired, are still a link in the chain of human 
agency, by which God is pleased to accomplish His purposes of 
mercy to a fallen world. 

" With respect to the degree, in which the efforts of the mission* 
aries have already beer? successful in reference to the spiritual 
interests of their heathen brethren, the}' do not expect the harvest 
when only beginning to breakup tiie soil. They are aware, also, 
that, in a subject in which their hopes and fears are so sensibly alive, 
they are in danger of being misled by very equivocal symptom? ; 
and even where they believe that they discern the fairest promise, 
they shrink from the idea of blazoning forth to the world, as deci- 
sire evidence of conversion, every favorable indication of a change 



APPENDIX. 



295 



of heart. Still, however, even in this respect, and at this early 
stage of their exertions, they have the gratification of believing 
that their labor has not been in vain. 

"Soon after leaving Brainerd, i crossed the river Tennessee, 
which here forms the boundary of the Cherokee nation. 

Reflections on the State and Prospects of the Indians. 

"I now bade a last adien to Indian territory; and, as I pursued 
my solitary ride through the woods, I insensibly fell into a train of 
melancholy reflections, on the eventful history of this injured 
race. 

"Sovereigns, from time immemorial, of the interminable forests 
which overshadowed this vast continent, they have gradually been 
driven, by the white usurpers of their soil, within the limits of their 
present precarious possessions. One after another of their fa- 
vorite rivers has been reluctantly abandoned, until the range of 
the hunter is bounded by lines prescribed by his invader, and the 
independence of the warrior is no more. Even their present ter- 
ritory is partitioned out in reversion ; and intersected with the 
prospective boundaries of surrounding states, which appear in the 
maps, as if Indian titles were actually extinguished, and these an*- 
cient warriors were already driven from the land of their fathers. 

" Of the innumerable tribes, which, a few centuries since, 
roamed, fearless and independent, in their native forests, how ma- 
ny have been swept into oblivion, and are with the generations be- 
fore the flood! Of others, not a trace remains but in tradition, or 
in the person of some solitary wanderer, the last of his tribe , who 
hovers like a ghost among the sepulchres of his fathers — a spark 
still faintly glimmering in the ashes of an extinguished race. 

"From this gloomy review of the past history of these injured 
tribes, it was refreshing to turn to their future prospects; and to 
contemplate those missionary labors, which, under the blessing of 
God, are arresting the progress of that silent waste, by which diey 
were fading rapidly from the map of nations. Partial success, in- 
deed, had followed the occasional efforts of the American govern- 
ment for the civilization of the Indians, but it was reserved for the 
perseverance of disinterested christian love, to prove, to the world 
at lar^e, the practicability of an undertaking which had often been 
abandoned in despair. 



296 



APPENDIX. 



Moral obstacles, which had bid defiance to worldly policy or in- 
terested enterprize, are yielding to a simple confidence in the 
promises of God, and a faithful compliance with the divine com- 
mands — Go ye into all the world, and preach the Gospel to every 
creature. Christians, of different denominations, are sending la- 
borers to the task, and it is animating, indeed, to contemplate the 
United States — in the name, as it were, and as the representative 
of the various nations who have participated in the wrongs inflict- 
ed on this injured race — preparing to offer the noblest compensa- 
tion in their power, and to diffuse the Gospel throughout the ab- 
origines of this western world. 

" And, surely, if any arguments were necessary in support of 
missions, in addition to those derived from the force of divine 
commands, and the suggestions of diffusive charity, we should find 
them in the history of the early intercourse of Christian Europe, 
with Asia, Africa, and America. Or, if viewing the wide range 
and growing energies of British missions, a deep sense of our de- 
fective efforts should at any time be insufficient to repress every 
feeling of self-complacence, we have but to recollect how large a 
portion of the past labours of our missionaries has been consumed, 
in eradicating the vicious habits which we have introduced into 
some heathen nations, or in dispelling the prejudices which our 
inconsistent condilet has diffused through others. 

" It is not in our naval, our military, or our commercial char- 
acter, that we have as yet appeared generally as a blessing to 
benighted nations. It is not when we press into the wars of chris- 
tians, the tomahawk or scalping-knife of the Indians — it is not 
when, deluging his country with spirituous liquors in the prosecu- 
tion of an unequal traffic, we send forth a moral pestilence, before 
which the frail virtues of the savage fall, like the dry leaves of his^ 
forests in the blasts of autumn — it is not when thus engaged, that 
we either conciliate his affections, or elevate his moral tone. The 
men who fertilize the moral wilderness and evangelize the hea- 
then world, are animated by a higher spirit than the desire of con* 
quest, or the lure of gain — by the spirit of our Marsdens, our Ca- 
reys, our Buchanans, and our Henry Martyns. These are the 
men, who, at once the benefactors of their species, and the repre- 
sentatives of Christian Britain, secure for their native country the 
veneration of far distant tribes, while preaching on their mouh- 

I 



APPENDIX. 



297 



tains the glad tidings of salvation, or filling their vallies with hymns 
of praise. 

"The time, I hope, will come, when not our missionaries only, 
but our naval and military commanders, our soldiers, our sailors, 
and our merchants, will all carry with them to every country 
where they hoist the British flag, unequivocal demonstrations that 
they come from a Christian land; and it is animating, indeed, to 
regard our colonial establishments, our extended commerce, and 
our vast marine, as instruments, in the hands of Providence, to 
prepare paths for our missionaries, and to subserve that sacred 
cause in which they count not even their lives dear. 

" In that cause, it is scarcely possible to be neutral. The ques- 
tion of missions is now brought home to every breast; and the in- 
fluence of individual opinion on the social and domestic circle, car- 
ries into the most retired situations an awful responsibility as to 
the decisions which may be formed, and the sentiments which 
may be expressed, on a subject so deeply affecting the high inter- 
ests of the human race." 

A strong argument, from analogy, in refutation of objections 
against attempts to civilize our Indians, may be derived from the 
following speech of Rev. Mr. Ward, relating to the happy effects 
of Missions in British India. If, in the less favorable state of India, 
so much has been effected in a few years, by a few individuals, 
what success may we not expect from the combined efforts, now 
making on the far less numerous and more hopeful subjects, our 
American Indians ? 

"When I went to India," says Mr. Ward, "there were the 
greatest apprehensions that we should all be sent back. We went 
no where but, as missionaries, we were received with a frown; 
and yet, for hospitality and friendship, and every thing else that is 
dignified, India will bear a comparison with an}' country in the 
world. But, as missionaries, we were considered as enemies ; 
and it was supposed that the prosperity of India depended upon 
our being excluded. The distance too, was such as to present a 
formidable obstacle. The climate of India was another formida- 
ble objection. Of the number of missionaries, who went out at 
the same^time with myself, half of them are gone to their ever- 
38 



(59S 



APPENDIX. 



lasting reward. Of an after-cargo of missionaries, six have long 
ago been taken to their heavenly home, and only two remain. 
Another great impediment to our progress, was, the languages of 
India. The slaves in the West-Indies are taught the English, or 
the European languages; along the Western coast of Africa too, 
many are taught the English language, and your access to them is, 
of course, easy; but, in India, there were no fewer than fifty dia- 
lects, derived from the Shanscrit alone. In America, the great 
objection had been, that the language of a single tribe was diffi- 
cult; but, in India, we had twice the number of languages to ac- 
quire, that prevailed in the whole of America. This, too, was to 
be done by plain men, many of whom had not been, in the least, 
accustomed to the study of languages. But, blessed be God ! no 
man can mix with that population, without acquiring their langua- 
ges. In addition to all these, were the prejudices of the natives 
themselves. To convey to you an idea of this, is exceedingly diffi- 
cult; but you may form some opinion of it from this circumstance: 
that if our gracious king, George the Fourth, should go to that 
country, and the lappet of his robe should happen to touch the 
food of an Indian, he would throw it away, if he were dying with 
hunger, and would consider it as defiled by the touch of the great- 
est man in the empire. How, then, is it possible, that such men 
can be brought to sit with Europeans at the same table ? This dif- 
ficulty existed in full force in India, and no where else. Another 
difficulty, and a great one too, was the ignorance of the natives. 
When we address other persons, we have a conscience to appeal to, 
and you know the effect of it well, — but they ha\ r e not a word for 
conscience, in their language. In no Hindoo book, or Hindoo 
custom, have I found any thing like it. Besides this, there are a 
number of expressions, of which they are equally ignorant. Talk 
to a Hindoo about God, and he thinks you are talking about Vish- 
noo or Ram, or some of his other deities. Talk about heaven, and 
he thinks you mean one of the heavens of his gods. Talk about a 
future state, and he thinks you are talking about transmigration. 
But in the superstitions of the Hindoos, we have a still more for- 
midable obstacle. 

"Hindooism can boast of hermartys every day — of women, who 
sacrifice themselves, every day, on the funeral pyres of their hus- 
bands. Now, if even women will go to these lengths, this must be 



APPENDIX. 



299 



a people, to all human appearance, invulnerable, and to whom no 
access can be gained. This has struck Europeans as justly formi- 
dable. They have said, "What! will persons who suffer them- 
selves to be drawn up into the air, by means of hooks in the integu- 
ments of their backs= — will women, who thus sacrifice themselves 
on the funeral pyres of their husbands, or destroy themselves in 
the Ganges, be bzought to renounce this superstition, and to em- 
brace Christianity ?" Such was the feeling of our countrymen on 
the subject, and our object was treated with derision and con- 
tempt. 

"But the caste exceeds all that I have mentioned. By this, they 
are divided into different societies, with distinct observances; and 
there is no possibility of these intermixing with one another, with- 
out breaking caste. Every person marrying, or even eating, with 
one of another caste, falls from it, and can never be restored to it 
again. The christian missionary feels this difficulty in its full 
force. These people are as susceptible of the endearments of 
civilized life, as any people upon earth; and for one of them to 
make up his mind to see his friends and his beloved parents no 
more; to renounce all human society, and to incur the frowns of 
his relatives, is such a sacrifice, that we need not wonder at our 
countrymen there saying, "You have indeed undertaken a hope- 
less task." I remember one young man, who, after he had been 
baptized, seemed at first to have forgotten his connexions; he 
came at length, and said to me, "1 do not want to return to caste; 
I do not want to return to Hindooism; but cannot I go and see my 
mother again ? Cannot I see my father once more ?" This was 
impossible, and he well knew, and deeply felt, that his parents 
would have shut the door against him, if he had attempted to enter 
the house in which he was born. 

"With all this accumulation of difficulties, we had to attempt the 
conversion of this country. Our own government, the European 
residents in India, and all the superstition, prejudices, and pecul- 
iar feelings of the people, being against us, we do not wonder that 
it was said, "India is invulnerable." 

"There were, indeed, a few good men in Calcutta, who weie la- 
boring there for the conversion of souls; but they thought it was 
impossible to do any good elsewhere, even if they could make any 
progress in that city. 



300 



APPENDIX. 



"Such were the appearances of India; and I have mentioned 
these circumstances to shew, that, if in that part of the world (of 
all others the most hopeless,) the Gospel has obtained any success- 
then you need not despair of Africa, or of any part whatever of 
the world. But I have now to tell you, that all these difficulties, 
great as they appeared, have vanished into air. 

"The government of India acts, as far as is prudent, entirely 
with us; and, in a variety of ways, they are assisting us, and assist- 
ing us in the most powerful manner. They have established gov- 
ernment-schools, for the instruction of the natives; and the name 
of the present governor-general of India, will live in their recol- 
lection to the latest posterity. It would be unjust in me not to 
mention the name of the marchioness of Hastings, who is doing 
every thing in her power for the benefit of the female natives of 
that country. In our own country, every facility has been kind- 
ly afforded to us, and the missionaries can go without opposition to 
every corner of India. Such a door is open there, as never was 
before; every voice cheers the missionaries as they enter. Of 
our own countrymen, I scarcely know one individual who opposes 
us; on the contrary, they now have a Calcutta bible-society, 
chiefly supported by the Anglo-Indians, which has circulated ex- 
tensive editions of the scriptures, in the various languages of In- 
dia. There is a Calcutta school-book society, and there is a Hin- 
doo college. Natives themselves, are taught and educated, for the 
very purpose of becoming preachers of the everlasting gospel; 
and thus the distance of fifteen thousand miles is subdued and su- 
perseded, by God's raising up natives themselves, to become mis- 
sionaries to their countrymen, who are inured to the climate, and 
familiar with its manners. The languages of India are now sub- 
dued; and the holy scriptures, or part of them at least, with a 
number of tracts, have already been translated and circulated, in 
twenty-five languages of the country. The prejudices of the na- 
tives have been overcome. As one proof of this, I can state, that, 
when I left Serampore, a deputation had come from a village at 
some distance, in which they were attempting to establish a school, 
to request one of our school-masters to visit them, and afford them 
some instruction as to the manner of conducting their school. 
There cannot be a stronger proof of their prejudices being subdu- 
ed, than for the natives to solicit a visit from a man, whose appear- 



APPENDIX. SOI 

ance in their school would have once been thought a crime; these 
schools are now so common in India, that there is scarcely a town, 
or even a village, that has not one. The ignorance of the natives 
has been overcome; we have found a conscience at last; and*sev- 
eral thousand Hindoos have turned from the worship of idols, to 
serve the living and the true God; have renounced their supersti- 
tion, and embraced the faith of Christianity. Public opinion, which 
had been almost universally against us, is now almost universally 
for us. The foundation is laid, and we have only to go forward 
in the work which has been so successfully begun. 

" I have been thus minute in the statements of the situation of the 
work of God in that extensive empire, in order that I, as an eye- 
witness, might excite the thankfulness of this society for what God 
has done there; and that, when I am gone into those distant re- 
gions again, to aid by my feeble efforts this great cause, your 
prayers may be excited and encouraged by the prospect of ulti- 
mate success. 

"The missionaries of this society depend especially on divine 
influence. On that influence their eyes are always fixed; and, 
feeling that they are but weak instruments in the hand of God, they 
go forward in their simple career, looking to Him."* 

More directly to our purpose is a late communication of Rev. 
Wm. Goodell, to the United Foreign Missionary Society in New- 
York, containing a very interesting account of the present state of 
improvements among the Choctaws and Cherokees. 

" The American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions 
have three schools among the Choctaws, and three also among the 
Cherokees, and are now making preparations for a fourth school 
in each of those tribes. The children connected with those 
schools, not only receive the ordinary instructions of a school, but 
they are taught all the arts of civilized life. Indeed, to instruct 
them in all the arts of civilized life is deemed a very important 
part of their education. In both these tribes, much more good 
has been already accomplished by the Missionaries, and much 
greater advances have been made by the natives towards civiliza- 
tion, than we should naturally suppose from reading the public 
journals. The Missionaries have been exceedingly careful not 
*Miss. Her. Sep. 1821, p. 297. 



302 



APPENDIX. 



to state things too favorably. Many of the Cherokees and some 
of the Choctaws cultivate their lands with much regularity and in- 
dustry ; and, in regard to their dress, their manner of cooking 
food, their style of building, the furniture of their houses, &c. &c. 
they have adopted our customs throughout. Twenty Cherokees 
have united with the churches under the direction of the Ameri- 
can Board, and about twenty have united with the Moravian and 
Baptist churches ; making forty in the whole, besides some white 
men, who have Cherokee families, and besides, also, some people 
of color, who live in the nation. I was told that, among these for- 
ty Cherokee converts, there had not been a single instance of in- 
temperance, immorality, or any thing which required discipline 
or reproof. A large proportion of them are adults. Some of 
them are supposed to be more than seventy years of age. Two 
of them are Cherokee chiefs, one of whom signalized himself at 
the battle of the Horse Shoe, and for his bravery received from 
Congress a rifle with a very handsome inscription on it ; and 
the other is a man of great authority in his tribe. I spent a 
night with him. In the evening he called his family together, 
brought forward his family bible, read a chapter himself in Eng- 
lish, sang a hymn, in which we all joined, and offered the prayer 
himself ; and in the morning called upon one of the brethren pres- 
ent to lead in the devotions of the family. Those of the profes- 
sors of religion who can read, and many who are not professors, 
take some religious publication, and appear to know more about 
the religious state of our world — about our Sabbath Schools, our 
revivals of religion, our Bible, Missionary, Education and Tract 
Societies, than multitudes in our land, who have been connected 
with our churches for twenty years. 

" I spent several nights with a Choctaw chief. He has learnt 
to read. He takes the Boston Recorder, the Missionary Herald, 
the Religious Intelligencer, and several political papers. He in- 
quired, with a lively interest, how I had succeeded in my agency, 
what states I had visited, how the people of K. felt towards civili- 
zing the Indians ; and when 1 had told him, he said he was glad 
the people of K. were becoming more civilized ; and, indeed, 
the Choctaws and Cherokees generally appear to rejoice as much 
that we are coming to a better mind towards them, as we rejoice 
that they are coming to a better mind. The joy is mutual. This 



APPENDIX. 



303 



chief made many inquiries respecting Christian experience, what 
faith in Christ was, how a Christian felt towards the Savior, how 
a Christian felt when he had an opportunity of making a good bar- 
gain, by using a little deceit or equivocation, and many other in- 
quiries of the like nature. Ten in the evening, he brought for- 
ward, without any proposition from myself, his very elegant fam- 
ily Bible, and several Hymn books, to have family worship, and 
the same again in the morning. He joined in singing, and his lit- 
tle girls, that were eight and ten years of age also joined, and I 
was told, that on the Sabbath he would appoint lessons from the 
Bible and from Sabbath-School Hymns for his little girls to learn, 
and towards the close of the Sabbath he would hear them recite. 

" 1 spent a Sabbath at Huntsville, a very considerable town in 
the State of Alabama, where I found a large flourishing Sabbath 
School in operation. In this Sabbath School I saw a Cherokee 
youth about 18 years of age, who had formerly attended school at 
one of the Missions in his nation, but is now living at Huntsville 
with a pious family, learning a trade. He was one of the teachers 
in this Sabbath-School. He had under his care a class of white 
boys, and, when I was in the school, he was hearing them say 
their prayers, their hymns, and their bible lessons, and was ten- 
derly and faithfully endeavoring to instil into their minds the prin- 
ciples of virtue, morality and religion. He gave me a dollar for 
the Palestine Mission — the first dollar, perhaps, he ever had in 
his life. 

" At Creek Path, I saw Catharine Brown, the converted Cher- 
okee, whose name is so familiar to all the American churches. 
She greatly exceeded my expectations. No person, not even a 
Cherokee, who should enter the Mission family as a stranger, 
would in the least suspect but that she was one of the Mission Sis- 
ters from the North. She is not darker than half of our young 
ladies, and possesses prudence, discretion, and apparent piety, to 
a degree rarely to be met with. Not five }'ears ago, she went to 
Brainerd, a vain, proud, ignorant heathen girl, and used to sit on a 
seat with the little Cherokee girls, and try to spell " Baker," and 
to learn " Our Father, who art in Heaven." Now she is a Chris- 
tian of no ordinary attainments and usefulness ; and has been the 
means of the conversion of her parents, two of her brothers, and 
three others of her near kindred. One of her brothers has since 



304 



APPENDIX, 



died — died in the triumphs of faith ; the other brother is studying 
with a view to the ministry, and promises to be exceedingly useful 
to his nation. Q, Sirs, a holy joy is now lighted up in the counte- 
nances of that family, which will grow brighter and brighter 
through the countless rounds of infinite duration. Catharine gave 
me three dollars for the Palestine Mission, and her ear-rings, 
which she used to wear when a heathen, which cost twelve dol- 
lars. She, with good Mrs. Potter, has been instrumental in for- 
ming among the Cherokee ladies, in her neighbourhood, a Female 
Cent Society. They were at a loss how to dispose of their funds. 
Catharine was for aiding the Mission among the Osages, with whom 
her own nation was then at war. Others, feeling their obligations 
to our churches for sending our sons and daughters to instruct 
them, were desirous of aiding us in the education of more pious 
young men for the work of the Gospel Ministry ; and they accor- 
dingly paid over their funds to the Education Society, in the state 
of Tennessee — a fact which ought to put to the blush the many 
thousands in our country, who have as yet contributed nothing, ei- 
ther for the education of our own pious young men, or for the 
conversion of any heathen tribe or nation on the face of the earth. 

" The children of those schools make much greater progress 
than is common in our schools ; and this for two reasons : 1st. 
More attention is paid to them ; and 2d. They go to school on 
purpose to learn, and not as a matter of course. To these rea- 
sons, 1 may also add the fact, that many children apply for admis- 
sion into the schools, and repeat the application with the most 
pressing and affecting importunity, but are rejected, because the 
Missionaries are not furnished with the means of supporting them; 
of course, the children at school feel the importance of improv- 
ing their privileges, lest they should be dismissed to make room 
for those who will improve them better. I heard a class of little 
girls, at Brainerd, recite in grammar, and I have never heard a 
class of boys or girls, in any school, recite better, or seem to un- 
derstand the subject better^than those little girls, considering the 
time devoted to it. 1 saw also, at Brainerd, six little girls under 
the direction of one of the Mission Sisters, engaged, when out of 
school, in sewing; and I have never seen any ladies, of any age, 
in any part of our country, whatever might be their character for 
industry, who would sit and sew more steadily, than those little 



APPENDIX. 



305 



girls. They were dressed very neatly and cleanly, and made a 
very interesting appearance. 

" All the Missionaries declare, that the children of their schools 
are more modest and affectionate, and are more easily managed, 
than is common in our schools. One of the teachers said, that 
when any mischief was done in school through the inattention or 
carelessness of the boys, and he inquired who did it, he never 
knew them to rise and say, " I didn't do it, I didn't do it, John did 
it ;" but one would rise in one part of the house, and say very 
modestly, " Sir, I did it ;" another would rise in another part and 
say, " Sir, I helped him ;" and then tell all how it was done, with 
as much sincerity, and honesty, and penitence, as you could de- 
sire. There is much of this sort of frankness among them. 

" I went into the school at Eliot, and said to the boys : — " Many 
of the children at the North are saving their money to establish 
schools, and procure books for the Choctaw children ; I expect 
myself, to go to Jerusalem, to establish schools for the poor igno- 
rant children there, and I want you should become civilized and 
pious, as speedily as possible, that you may not only support your 
own schools in the Choctaw nation, but may aid me at Jerusalem, 
and may aid in sending the blessings of civilization and Christianity 
to the Chickasaws, Creeks, and other heathen tribes, and may 
also yourselves be prepared to go as Missionaries, teachers, me- 
chanics, and farmers." The boys took the hint, and soon after I 
went out, they brought me a donation of about thirteen dollars for 
the Palestine Mission. They obtained the money in this way : — 
when they were out in the field every morning in the week by 
such a minute, or when they have committed certain lessons in 
school, they are entitled to a certain premium ; and when they 
fail, they forfeit something. There is, of course, debt and credit. 
Some had 50 cents placed to their credit, some more, and some 
less. All they had, they brought me ; and some, who had re- 
cently paid away their ticket money to purchase a Spelling-book, 
or Testament, or some article of clothing, came to the Instructor, 
and begged him to advance as much money for them, as they could 
earn in this premium way, in three, four, or five weeks." 



39 



308 



APPENDIX. 



App. N. n. Rep. p. 91. 

Actual state of Indians in Florida. 

In a letter of Capt. John H. Bell, Agent for the Indians in 
Florida, addressed to a Committee of Congress, the last February, 
the following Indian villages are enumerated, viz. 

1. " Red-town, at Tampa Bay. Number of souls unknown. 

2. Oc-lack-o-na-yahe, above Tampa Bay. A number of souls. 

3. O-po-nays Town, back of Tampa Bay. 

4. Tots-ta-la-hoeets-ka, or Watermelon Town on the sea- 
board, west-side Tampa Bay; the greater part of all these fled 
from the Upper Creeks when peace was given to that nation. 

5. A-ha-pop-ka, situated back of the Musquitoe. 

6. Low-walta Village, composed of those who fled from Coosa, 
and followed M'Queen and Francis, their prophets. 

7. M'Queen's Village, east side Tampa Bay. 

8. A-lack-a-way-talofa, in the Alachua Plains. A great number 
of souls. Took-o-sa-moth-lay, the chief. 

9. Santa-fee-talofa, at the east fork of Suwany. Lock-taw-me- 
ccrocky, the chief. 

10. Waw-ka-sau-su, on the east side of the mouth of the Suwa- 
ny, on the sea-board; these are from the Coosa river, followers 
of M'Queen and Francis. 

11. Old Suwany Town, burnt in 1818, on the Suwany river. 
These are from the Tallapoosa towns, and they are from the Up- 
per Creeks. 

12. A-la-pa-ha-tolafa, west of Suwany and east of the Miccasuky. 
The chief Ockmulgee is lately dead. 

13. Wa-cissa-talofa, at the head of St. Mark's river. These are 
from the Chattahouchy, Upper Creeks. 

14. Willa-noucha-talofa, near the head of St. Mark's river, west 
of Wa-cissa-talofa. Natives of Florida. 

15. Talla-hasse, on the waters of the Miccasuk}^ pond. These 
have lived there a long time, have about 100 warriors, and sup- 
pose 10 souls to a warrior; say 1,000 souls. 

16. Top-ke-gal-ga, on the east side of the O-clock-ney, near 
Tal-la-hasse. 



APPENDIX. 



307 



17. We-thoe-cuehy-tafola between the St. Mark's andO-clock- 
ney rivers, in the fork of the latter; very few of them are natives 
of the land. 

18. 0-chuce-ulga, east of the Apalachicola, where Hambly and 
Blunt live; about 250 souls. Coth-rin, the chief. 

19. Cho-co-nickla Village, the chief is Nea-thoe-o-mot-la, the 
second chief, Mulatto-King; were raised here; have about sixty 
warriors on the west side of the Apalachicola. 

20. Top-hulga. This village and Cho-co-nick-la join each oth- 
er. Raised in East Florida, and removed there. 

21. Tock-to-eth-la, west of Fort Scott and Chatta-houchy, ten 
miles above the forks; forty or fifty warriors were raised at the 
O-cun-cha-ta, or Red Ground, and moved down. 

22. Another town in East Florida Point, called O-chu-po-cras- 
sa. These moved down from the Upper Creeks. About thirty 
warriors, and a great many women and children settled there. 

The foregoing list is extracted from a talk held by General Jackson, 
with three Chiefs of the Florida Indians, viz. Blount, JVea-moth-la, 
and Mulatto King, at Pensacola, 19th September, 1821. To 
which may be added the following settlements in East Florida: 

23. Pe-lac-le-ka-ha, the residence of Miccanopa, chief of the 
Seminole nations, situated about one hundred and twenty miles 
south of Alachua. 

24. Chu-ku-chatta, about twenty miles south of Pilactehaha. 

25. Hich-a-pue-susse, about twenty miles south east of Chuk- 
uchatta, at the same distance from the head of Tampa. 

26. Big Hammock settlement, the most numerous, north of 
Tampa Bay and west of Hechapususse. 

27. Oc-la-wa-haw, on the river of that name, west of St. John's 
river. 

28. Mulatto Girl's Town, south of Caskawilla Lake. 

29. Bucker Woman's Town, near Long Swamp, east oi Big 
Hammock. 

30. King Heijah's, south, and Payne's negro settlements in Ala- 
chua; these are slaves belonging to the Seminoles, in all about 
three hundred. 

31. John Hicks' Town, west of Payne's Savannah, Miccasukys, 



308 



APPENDIX. 



32. Oke-a-fenoke swamp, south side, a number of Cozvetas. 

33. Beech Creek, settlement of Cheehazi-s, 

34. Spring Garden, above Lake George, lichees. Billy is their 
Chief. 

35. South of Tampa, near Charlotte's Bay, Choctazcs. 

The whole number of Indian population in Florida may be esti- 
mated at about five thousand souls. 

From the opinions of several gentlemen acquainted with the sit- 
ution of the Indians in Florida, and from my own observations in 
that country, I would respectfully suggest and recommend to the 
consideration of the proper committee of Congress, the propriety 
of providing by law, that a treaty be held with the Seminole Indi- 
ans. That they be concentrated on a certain part of Florida, suf- 
ficiently large and convenient for their accommodation and com- 
fort, and properly denned by artificial or natural boundaries. 
That they have an agent and sub-agent appointed for them and to 
reside among them. That $25,000 be given in compensation for 
their lands which they abandon, to be laid out in agricultural tools, 
&c. and paying a few mechanics to keep those tools in order. 
And that all the lands in East and West Florida, except the part 
set aside as aforesaid, be considered public lands. I would re- 
commend that the ungranted lands between the Suwany and Apa- 
lachicola rivers, except a slip of twelve miles wide, on the sea- 
coast, be set apart for those Indians. This will embrace most of 
their old settlements, viz. Miccasuky and Suwany towns. This 
country is large enough, and fertile enough, and will include all 
the old settlements (except the Alachua towns, which, having 
been destroyed, they have abandoned.) I take it for granted, that 
the interests of the United States, as well as the peace and quiet of 
the Indians themselves, require, that they should be concentrated 
and removed from the sea coast; for, whilst there, their settle- 
ments will be the resort of pirates, smugglers, kc. the most aban- 
doned of all nations, who keep up a communication between the 
Islands and Cuba, excite disaffection, violate our laws, and escape 
with impunity, from the country. And our refugee slaves aim 
for their settlements, with a view of escaping to the neighboring 
Islands." 



APPENDIX, 



309 



Number, Character, Dress, Employment and present state of the 
Seminole Indians. 

The pure Seminole Indians, Capt. Bell, verbally stated to me, 
are about twelve hundred in number. They live in houses of 
wood, constructed like those of the white people. The dress of 
the men is a cotton shirt, fringed down below the knee, with a 
belt. The poor use a deer skin, in place of the cotton. The 
women wear a petticoat and short gown, like the white women. 
The cotton of which they are made, is manufactured by the 
whites; but they are their own tailoresses. They have none of 
the Indian fondness for ornaments and finery. They are honest, 
speak the truth, and are attached to the British and Americans. 
The wars, however, of Mackintosh, and the late desolating war 
with the United States, and the depredations of frontier white set- 
tlers, on their settlements, have destroyed their confidence in the 
Americans. By kind, just and liberal treatment, in their present 
afflicted state, which they will now receive, it may soon be re- 
gained. 

They raise corn with the hoe, having no ploughs in the coun- 
try. They hunt from November to March. Their hunting 
grounds, are south of 28° north latitude. Their principal game is 
fleer, whose meat serves them for food, during their hunting sea- 
son, and the ; r skins are exchanged for manufactured cotton and 
blankets. These Indians have negro slaves, who live in sepa- 
rate families; of from five to ten in a family. They raise corn for 
their subsistence; if they have a surplus, it goes to the families of 
their masters. It is with these Indians as with others, the women 
perform the labor. One exception, Capt. Bell relates, of an In- 
dian called Friday, who is an industrious man, cultivates and fen- 
ces his lands, splits rails, &c. but is laughed at and discarded by 
his neighbors, because he " works like a negro." When they see 
this man at his work, they exclaim, " Are we reduced to this de- 
graded state ?" Their game has become scarce, and they are of- 
ten constrained to feed on nuts. Their cattle, on which they for- 
merly subsisted, have been wantonly destroyed. Cattle and hor- 
ses are individual property, but not their lands. When a beef is 
killed it becomes common property, and is taken and eaten by any 
one who chooses to partake of it. . 



310 



APPENDIX. 



These Indians in their persons, are tall, strait, slender, fine limbed, 
with good countenances, intelligent, docile, brave, but not ferocious. 
Those of them who have mingled with the white people, are intem- 
perate; but while intoxicated are not quarrelsome. In this state 
they would sooner, than when sober, resent an injury; but would 
not offer one. They feel themselves to be in a feeble, dependent 
state, and willingly yield to any reasonable measures proposed by 
the government for their good. They are unwilling to leave their 
country, but make no objection to quitting their present scattered 
villages, and dwelling together in one body, in some suitable part 
of Florida, there to do whatever their Great Father shall advise 
them to do. 

The negroes, who dwell among these people, as their slaves, 
are intelligent, speak the English language, having been purchased 
of the English, and are much pleased with the proposal of having 
their children taught to read; because, as they believe, it will in- 
crease their influence and their comforts. 

The foregoing facts, received from a source so respectable and 
authentic, from the gentleman who now fills the office of Indian 
Agent among this very people, and who has acquired great influ- 
ence over them, shew that there is a station well prepared and 
ready for the immediate establishment of an Education Family. 

I close this article with Mr. Peniere's observations, in a letter 
to Gen. Jackson, (July 1821.) 

Population. 

"It appears to a certainty, that the Floridas have never been 
thickly settled; some abandoned plantations are found, and some 
small destroyed villages; but, from the information I have been 
able to obtain, this country has never had a population of white 
people exceeding ten thousand souls; and, according to the same 
information, it appears demonstrated to me, that the actual number 
of inhabitants now, does not amount to five thousand — viz: 
The Isles of Amelia, Fernandina and Talbot, - 400 
Nassau river, and St. Mary's river, south, - 220 

St. Augustine, 2,600 

St. John's river or bay, ... - 260 
Between the St. John's and the sea, - - 250 



APPENDIX* 



311 



Southernmost point of the Floridas, 5 families, - 
Pensacola and environs, 



30 
- 800 



4,560 



"The Indian tribes known under the denomination of the Creeks, 
are divided into bands, designated to me as follows: the Mekasous- 
ky, Souhane, Moskoky, Santa-Fe, Red-stick and Echitos. I have 
been assured that those bands had raised, during the late war, 
more than twelve hundred warriors, which may lead to suppose a 
population of more than three thousand individuals. 

"The nation known under the denomination of Seminoles, is com- 
posed of seven bands, viz: the Latchivue, Oklevuaha, Chocke- 
chiatte, Pyaklekaha, Talehouyana and Topkelake. Besides these 
are some remnants of ancient tribes, as the Houtchis, Chaas, Cana- 
acke, &c; but of these there are only a few straggling families. 

"On the borders of Georgia is another tribe, called Cahouita. 
This tribe, under the orders of Mc'Intosh, raised from one hundred 
to one hundred and fifty warriors; who, under this chief, about 
seven years ago, waged a civil war on the whites and Seminoles, who 
hold them in the utmost detestation. 

"To this census, which would carry the Indian population to more 
than five thousand individuals, of both sexes, must be added five 
or six hundred maroon negroes, or mulattos, who live wild in the 
woods, or in a state of half slavery among the Indians. These 
negroes appear to me to possess more intelligence than those who 
are in a state of complete slavery, and they have a great influence 
over the weak minds of the Indians." 



Openings for Education Families among the Potawattamies, Otia- 
zvas and Miamies. 

In the treaty held in August, 1821, with the Fotawattamies and 
Ottawas, living round the south and eastern parts of Lake Michi- 
gan, (when four million acres of their lands were purchased by 
the United States,) the former of these tribes stipulated, that the 



App. O. o. — Rep. p. 91. 



312 



APPENDIX. 



government should furnish them with a teacher and a blacksmith, 
and allow them for their support, one thousand dollars a year, for 
fifteen years. A tract of land, one mile square, to be selected by 
the President, is reserved, on which to locate this teacher and 
blacksmith. The Ottawas in the same treaty stipulated, that the 
Government of the United States should furnish them with a 
teacher, farmer and blacksmith, and allow them one thousand five 
hundred dollars for ten years, for their support; and also furnish 
the nation with a number of cattle. These are new stipulations 
in Indian treaties, and indicate tendencies in the minds of these In- 
dians, to civilization. The government are to select these teach- 
ers, blacksmiths and farmers, and to locate them in stations, where 
they ma}^ discharge their duties to the best advantage. The Bap- 
tist Missionary Board have their attention already directed to thes« 
stations, with a view to supply them, should the government see 
fit to appoint the applicants. 

I add under this head, that the Western Missionary Society, un- 
der the direction of the synod of Pittsburgh, contemplate estab- 
lishing an Education Family among the Ottawas, on one of their 
two reservations, one of which is near Fort Meigs, the other on 
the Miami river near Sandusky Bay. A survey of these stations 
has lately been made. 

App. P. p. Rep. p. 91. 

The new purchase of the Stockbridge Indians on Fox river, recom- 
mended as a commanding site for establishing an Education 
Family. 

In the summer of 1821, the "Six Nations," St. Regis, Stockbridge 
and Munsee Nations," by permission of the government of the 
United States, purchased of their brethren, the Menominee and 
Winnebago nations of Indians, lands comprehended within, and 
described by, the following boundaries, viz. "Beginning at the 
foot of the rapids on the Fox river, usually called the Grand 
Kockalaw; thence up the said river, to the rapids at the Winne- 
bago lake, from thence extending back, in^this width on each side, 
to the north-west and the south-east, equidistant with the lands 



APPENDIX. 



313 



claimed "by the said Menominee and Winnebago nations of Indians." 
Another negociation, with leave of the government, is going for- 
ward, by the same parties, for the extension of this purchase to 
the east, down Fox river, to within four or five miles of fort How- 
ard. In this last purchase, it is proposed to include the White 
settlers at Green Bay, who have Indian wives, and their children 
of mixed blood. The expectation is, that a great part of the 
Stockbridge Indians, with numbers of the St. Regis tribe, of the 
Six Nations, of the Munsees, Nanticokes, Delawares and of other 
tribes, in the course of the next season, will migrate and plant 
themselves on this purchase. Should this take place, a colony 
will be formed at once, and a current to it created; and should 
its foundations be laid broad, and with wisdom, there is little 
doubt of its gradual increase. Should the plan be popular with 
the Indians, and the prospect is, that it will be, a large colony, 
enough perhaps, to form a Territory or even a State * may be ulti- 
mately collected here, educated together, and received into the 
Union, and to the enjoyment of the privileges of citizens. 

In the treaty with the Choctows of October, 1820, it is stipula- 
ted that "the boundaries" of the territory of this nation shall "re- 
main without alteration, until the period at which said nation 

*The idea of an Indian State, though suggested to the President in my Re- 
port, as new, (it was so at the time,) had been suggested, it seems, many years 
ago, in a treaty with the Delaware Indians, as follows : 

Art. 6. "Whereas the enemies of the United States have endeavored, by 
every artifice in their power, to possess the Indians in general, with an opin- 
ion, that it is the design of the states aforesaid, to extirpate the Indians, and 
take possession of their country ; to obviate such false suggestions, the United 
States do engage to guarantee to the aforesaid nation of Delawares, and their 
heirs, all their territorial rights, in the fullest and most ample manner, as it 
hath been bounded by former treaties, as long as the said Delaware nation 
shall abide by, and hold fast the chain of friendship, now entered into. And 
it is further agreed on between the contracting parties, (should it, for the fu- 
ture, be found conducive for the mutual interest of both parties,) to invite any 
other tribes who have been friends to the interest of the United States, to join 
the present confederation, and to form a State, whereof the Delaware nation 
shall be the head, and have a representation in Congress : provided nothing 
contained in this article to be considered conclusive, until it meets the appro- 
bation of Congress.t 

tExtract from a treaty with the Delaware Indians, Sept. 17th, 1778, — Laws 
of United States, Duane's edit. vol. I. p. 304. 

40 



314 



APPENDIX. 



shall become so civilized and enlightened, as to be made citizens 
of the United States, and Congress shall lay off a limited parcel of 
land for the benefit of each family, or individual in the nation." 
Also, 

That "out of the lands ceded by the Choctaw nation to the Uni- 
ted States, fifty -four sections be reserved, of one square mile each," 
of good land, to be selected by the President of the United States, 
"and sold for the purpose of raising a fund, to be applied expressly 
and exclusively to the support of the Choctaw schools." Further, 

"All those who have separate settlements, and fall within the 
limits of the lands ceded by the Choctaw nation to the United 
States, and who desire to remain where they now are, shall be 
secured in a tract one mile square, to include their improve- 
ments." And lastly, 

That, "in order to promote industry and sobriety among all 
classes of the Red people, in this nation, particularly the poor, it 
is further provided by the parties, that the agent appointed to re- 
side here shall be, and he is hereby vested with full power to 
seize and confiscate all the whiskey, which may be introduced 
into said nation," except for necessary purposes, and by special 
permission.* 

Let similar regulations be made relative to the proposed colony, 
with such variations and additions as shall suit their peculiar cir- 
cumstances; one particularly, which shall prohibit the introduc- 
tion of white settlers within the limits of the territory assigned for 
the proposed colony; i. e. within the limits bounded south by Illi- 
nois, east by lake Michigan, north by lake Superior, and west by 
the Mississippi: Let this territory be reserved, exclusively for 
Indians, in which to make the proposed experiment of gathering 
into one body, as many of the scattered and other Indians, as 
choose to settle here, to be educated, become citizens, and, in due 
time, to be admitted to all the privileges common to other territo- 
ries and States, in the Union. Such a course would probably save 
the Indians. 

With special reference to the purpose above stated, a full de- 
scription of this Territory has been given in the foregoing Report, 
p. 50 to 60, and in the Appendix, p. 26 to 60, from which its pe- 
culiar adaptedness to the object proposed will be perceived. With- 

*See Laws of United States, vol. VI. p. 766 to 768. 



APPENDIX. 



315 



in its limits, are more than twenty thousand souls, exclusive of the 
new colony to be planted on the late purchase. Half of these are 
Menominees and Winnebagoes; the rest, Chippawas, Sioux, Sauks 
and Foxes. If the whole of these tribes last mentioned be reckon* 
ed, as belonging to the Territory, (though a great part of them are 
now west of the Mississippi,) the whole number would exceed 
sixty thousand; enough, when educated, to form a separate Terri- 
tory, and to have a representative in Congress. 

In respect to the dispositions of the Indians, in this Territory, 
to become civilized, it will be perceived what they are from a pe- 
rusal of the parts of this work above referred to; but particularly 
from a letter to the Secretary of War, addressed to him February 
last, by Solomon M. Hendrick, one of the Stockbridge Chiefs, and 
the principal negociator in making the late purchase. He says, 
"with regard to the Menominees and Winnebagoes," (of whom 
the purchase was made,) " they manifest great desire that we 
should come and reside among them, in order to learn them the 
arts of civilized life." The,se emigrants, going among these igno- 
rant, but well disposed Indians, with all the improvements they 
have made, liberally patronized by government, directed and aid- 
ed by a respectable Education Family, protected by the Military 
establishments in this region, with the advantages to be derived 
from the settlements of people of mixed blood, already on the 
ground, would have the most encouraging prospects of success in 
their enterprize : and this success again, would prove a strong in- 
ducement to other Indians, to join the colony. To this point, then, 
and to the things connected with it, I would earnestly request the 
particular and immediate attention of the government. 

Should the expectations raised in regard to this project, be real- 
ized in any good degree, I should think this the place for the ulti- 
mate establishment of the Indian College, which might in time, be 
furnished with Indian officers and instructors, as well as students, 
and have their own Trustees to manage its concerns. The funds 
belonging to Moor's Indian School, which is connected at present 
with Dartmouth College, deposited with the other funds, consecra- 
ted to the benefit of American Indians, in the Treasury of the So- 
ciety in Scotland for propagating Christian Knowledge ; together 
with funds in the Treasury of Harvard College, and of the Society 
for propagating the gospel among the Indians and others in North 



316 



APPENDIX. 



America, should the colonization plan succeed, might be appro- 
priated, in whole, or in part, to this Institution. And if our breth- 
ren in Canada shall be disposed to unite with us in this great 
and desirable object, and make the Institution common for the 
benefit of Indians on both sides of the line which separates us, as 
one College might be sufficient for both, large funds, as I am in- 
formed by a letter received, while I am writing this article, ex- 
ist in England, designed expressly for an object of this kind. This 
letter is from a respectable clergyman in Nantucket, Rev. Abner 
Morse, dated July 26, 1822, in which he says, " You are no doubt 
acquainted with all that was formerly done in Great Britian for 
the Indians of North America. A gentleman who was born upon 
this Island, but who has resided in England the last thirty years, 
and become extensively acquainted among the nobility, has lately 
been here upon a visit, and informs me, that the annual interest 
of the fund granted in the reign of George II, ' for civilizing and 
christianizing the Indians in New-England, ,' amounts to tzvo hun- 
dred thousand dollars ; and that the Trustees make no appropria- 
tions," &c. probably for want of information, how to make them 
to advantage. " Perhaps you may, among other measures for the 
good of the Aborigines, effect the establishment of a College under » 
the patronage, either in the United States or Upper Canada,where 
thousands of natives may be trained up to preach the gospel from 
Labrador to California." 

I throw out these ideas, and this information, merely by way of 
suggestion for the consideration of those concerned, leaving it, of 
course, for them to do what their wisdom shall dictate. 

App. Q. q. Rep. p. 91. — Prairie Du Chien. 

This is a Military Post, near the confluence of the Ouisconsin 
with the Mississippi, an old French settlement, where are three 
or four hundred inhabitants, principally of mixed blood. The 
Sauks, Foxes, Ioways, &c. dwell around this station, an important 
and prepared one for an Education Family. 



APPENDIX. 



317 



Appi R. r. Rep. p. 91. St. Peter's. 

This Military Station, on the Mississippi, at the mouth of St. Pe- 
ter's river, near St. Anthony's Falls, and not very distant from 
Lord Selkirk's settlement (Caledonia) on the Red River of Lake 
Winnipec, is recommended as very suitable for the establishment, 
of an Education Family. The climate is healthful, and the land 
around it fruitful in com, and other grains, potatoes, fruits, garden 
vegetables &c. It is in the country of the Sioux, who are among 
the most numerous and powerful of the Indian nations. A station 
here would have within the sphere of its influence different bands 
of the above nation, to the amount of more than four thousand 
souls, beside some portion of Yonctons, Chippawas and other 
tribes^ To the scattered villages of these Indians, there is access 
by three great channels, the Mississippi, St. Croix, and St. Peter's 
rivers. The river last named, passing through the Sioux country, 
is navigable several hundred miles in a direction towards Council 
Bluffs, with which might be opened, a safe, easy, and advantageous 
communication for trade and other purposes, in time of peace or 
war. 



App. S. s. — Rep. p. 91. — Council Bluff's. 

This place, on the Missouri, six hundred miles from its mouth, 
is one of our interior military stations, the farthest to the west. 
Messrs. Clark and Lewis speak of it thus, "Its situation is exceed- 
ingly favorable for a fort and trading factory. The soil is well 
calculated for bricks; and there is abundance of wood in the 
neighborhood. The air is pure and healthy. It is central, and 
the chief place of resort for the Indians; one day's journey to the 
Ottoes; one and a half to the Grand Pawnees; two day's from the 
Mahas; two and a quarter from the Pawnee Loups' village. It is 
also convenient to the hunting grounds of the Sioux; and twenty- 
five days journey to Santa Fe." 

Within a sphere around this station, in every part of which it 
would be easy to cause the influence of an Education Family to be 
felt, there are more than thirty thousand Indians of different 



318 



APPENDIX. 



tribes, who will all soon become objects of special attention. Two 
years ago, a plan somewhat new was originated, and progress 
made in its execution, by the Rev. Joseph Badger of Ohio, for the 
purpose of evangelizing some of the Western Indian tribes; and 
Council Bluffs was to be the seat of it. In a communication on 
this subject for Mi*. Whiting's Religious Intelligencer, of July 1820, 
Mr. Badger states: — 

" That the number of families wanted will soon be engaged. 
Seven families have offered themselves for this service; two Pas- 
tors, two Physicians, one Clothier, (one of the Physicians and the 
Clothier, are single men.) and four family farmers. The greatest 
difficulty that now appears in our way, is that of disposing of land- 
ed property. Many more than would be necessary for one mis- 
sionary station would be ready to go, if their property was at com- 
mand. Perhaps there are some pious families in the East, who 
are in circumstances to enter any missionary field on this plan, that 
are ready to offer themselves. 

44 We calculate as soon as the ice leaves the waters of the Ohio 
next spring, to commence our voyage from Warren or Hartford, 
in Ohio, in as many boats as we shall find necessary and con- 
venient to carry our families, and provisions for one year: and if 
possible, to be at the place of our destination, as early in the sea- 
son, as to plant gardens and raise a summer crop. If the Lord 
makes our way prosperous, there will be no Lion in the way. 
The word of God, and prayer, are the only weapons of warfare to 
be carried out with us, for our defence. May the Lord Jehovah 
make us skilful in handling these weapons, and his word a light to 
poor benighted heathen. 

" Some duties are binding on Christians at all times. From 
the moment our Lord looked on the desolate multitudes of Judea, 
and gave that injunction to his disciples — " Pray ye the Lord of the 
harvest that he would send forth laborers into the harvest'' — from 
that moment, prayer for this object, has never ceased to be the 
duty of every Christian. From the moment when he left that last 
command — " Go ye into all the world and preach the gospel to ev- 
ery creature" — from that moment every possible effort has been 
the duty of every Christian in every age. The command of 
the Redeemer we should humbly try to obey; and meet the dy- 



APPENDIX. 



319 



ing wants of thousands in the regions of the west. The work 
si hopefully begun. Who will go with us, to the help of the 
Lord? 

" To carry into effect the establishment of a Missionary Church 
in some place west of the Mississippi, suitable for the purpose of 
introducing civil and religious improvement among the Indians, 
and collecting their children for school instruction; tfye following 
articles are proposed for general rules and regulations for the gov- 
ernment of said Church. 

" Article 1. The families constituting this community shall be 
styled the Missionary Church, being regularly constituted, and 
provided with two ordained Pastors, whose duty it shall be to la- 
bor with the Church, and with the Indian people, as Providence 
shall open the door. 

"Art. 2. This community shall form into a body politic, for 
the purpose of managing secular business. And in order to pre- 
serve unity and safety, there shall be chosen by the male mem- 
bers, three or five Trustees, annually, on the month and day, 
when the Church shall actually commence missionary operations; 
whose business and duty it shall be to direct and superintend the 
secular concerns of the body politic. 

"Art. 3. This community shall possess one common interest, 
in all business relating to the Mission, and prosecute the same 
with all fidelity as a community, and as individuals, under the di- 
rection of the Trustees, whose duty it shall be to promote indus- 
try by their own example. 

Art. 4. The property put into common stock by each individ- 
ual, shall be correctly entered in a book in which all the proceed- 
ings of the Society in their secular capacity shall be recorded, by 
a clerk chosen by the society at their annual meetings. The church 
records shall be kept by the Pastors. The Society, as soon as the 
patronage of the President of the United States can be obtained, 
shall send out a committee to locate a place, or proceed in any 
other way, that shall be agreed upon as prudent and economical ; 
to some place convenient for cultivation, and water machinery; 
and for collecting Indian children, for the purpose of teaching them 
civilization. The Society shall settle as compactly as may be, 
and each family have a garden. A convenient house shall be 
erected in the centre for public worship ; and a school house. 



320 



APPENDIX. 



Single persons, young men and women, may join in this Society, 
who are pious and wish to become active in the missionary cause; 
each uniting with particular families, and to be provided for as the 
other members. 

" Art. 5. There shall be a baker and brewer, who shall bake 
the bread and brew the beer for the Society. The beer shall be 
good wholesome table beer ; to be made with malt and hops as 
soon as they can be provided. 

"Art. 6. In the formation of the Missionary Church or Society, 
there shall be no family admitted, unless both the husband and 
the wife do profess, and appear, understandingly to give up them- 
selves to God in this service; nor any young person arrived at the 
age of eighteen or twenty-one years, unless he or she shall give 
hopeful evidence of piety, and be a member of the Christian 
Church. 

" As it is the object of this Society to introduce Christian knowl- 
edge and the civil arts, among the Indian people, it will be neces- 
sary there should be two well informed and pious physicians; 
one or more blacksmiths; two or three carpenters, one of which 
shall be a mill-right; one wheel-right; one of the carpenters to un- 
derstand making and rigging of looms, and the women be well in- 
formed in the art of spinning and making cloth. It will be neces- 
sary there should be one clothier; a tanner and shoemaker, and 
several persons who understand the cutting and making of clothes. 
It is hereby provided, that physicians and mechanics labor with 
the other members, under the direction of the Trustees. 

" Art. 7. It shall be the first object relating to the secular bu- 
siness of this Society, when arrived at the place selected and 
agreed upon, to build comfortable houses for the accommodation 
of each family; and to cultivate the land for raising such crops as 
will afford support to the Society; also, flax, hemp, and cotton, as 
the climate will afford: it will be their object also, to raise cattle, 
sheep, hogs, and poultry. In all this, the Society will keep their 
eye on the great object; and as soon as provisions can be had suf- 
ficient to justify the proceeding, they will prepare accommodations 
for receiving and instructing Indian children in common religious 
education; the boys in farming, and the girls in sewing, knitting 
spinning and making of cloth. 



APPENDIX. 



32i 



11 The teacher of the school shall be a young man of good abili- 
ties, a good English scholar, apt to learn, apt to teach, who shall 
give himself wholly to the work of teaching the children: and at 
the same time learn the language of a tribe, as fast as possi- 
ble, with a view of preaching to them in their own tongue. The 
male children shall attend to instruction in the school, two hours 
in the morning, and two hours in the field before dinner; and then 
from one o'clock until three, they shall be in the school; then in 
the field until five, under the direction of one or more foremen, 
who shall show them how, and encourage them to work. The 
female children shall attend school as directed above, and their 
hours for labour shall be assigned by the women, who shall teach 
them the several branches of spinning, sewing, knitting, and making 
of cloth. 

" Art. 8. To prevent complaints of injustice in dealing with the 
Indians, it shall be the business of one man, appointed by the 
Trustees, to transact all traffic with them, whose duty it shall be, 
to preserve a strict regard to truth and justice in dealing with them. 
But there shall not be introduced, at any time, the use of ardent 
spirits, or of fermented, intoxicating liquors, as an article of traffic. 
No ardent spirits shall be kept, or used by the members of this 
Society, unless for special medical uses. No distillery of ardent 
spirits shall ever be introduced within the sphere of this So- 
ciety. 

M Art. 9. When a sufficient number of families, possessing 
means necessary for prosecuting the plan, shall dedicate themselves 
and their substance to the Lord for this service, they shall be 
formed into a church with two Pastors, and three deacons; and the 
Society choose five Trustees, and make every necessary arrange- 
ment, as soon as may be, in order to proceed to the place of destina- 
tion. It shall be the duty of each acting member, and especially 
the Trustees, to get information, the best they can, in regard to the 
rout and means of conveyance, to the place for settling the 
mission. 

"Art. 10. As soon as the probable expense of conveying the 
missionary company to the place of destination, and supporting 
them until they can raise provisions sufficient to subsist them- 
selves, the Trustees shall fairly lay the account before the Socie- 
ty; that each one may make such advances of property as they 

41 



APPENDIX. 



can, to meet the demand. Also the expense of mill-irons, cloth- 
iers', blacksmiths', carpenters', joiners', and wheelrights' tools. 
All forming tools and loom furniture must be added to the account. 
Each family will furnish themselves with family utensils, and fur- 
nish an exact inventory of the same, wit'h the value of each arti- 
cle, to be entered on the records of the Society. 

" Art. 11. There shall be provided for the use and benefit of 
the Society, a library of well chosen books, consisting of sermons* 
theological dissertations, Ecclesiastical history, and other histories 
and miscellaneous writings, Travels and Lives, such as the pur- 
chasing committee shall judge profitable for the Society. The 
books shall be carefully preserved and kept without use, until the 
Society are settled in their missionary station; and adopt such 
regulations, as said Society shall agree upon by their committee or 
Trustees, for the purpose of using the books and preserving them 
from damage. And the Society will gratefully receive any dona- 
tions of books and paper suitable for the use of the Society, or to 
be used in school. The Society will thankfully receive, and 
faithfully apply any articles of clothing, or cloth for making gar- 
ments for Indian children, who shall attend the school. 

" Art. 12. It shall be the duty of this Society to meet on the 
first Monday in each month for special prayer, that the great 
Head of the Church would prosper the Missionary cause; remem- 
ber his covenant with Abraham, and favour the dust of Zion 
throughout the earth. They shall habitually meet on the Sab- 
bath for public and social worship, and the Indietn children con- 
vene with them. The school shall be opened and closed with 
prayer daily. 

"Art. 13. The Society shall commence their preparations, as 
soon as the patronage of the President of the United States can be 
obtained, and fifteen or twenty families of suitable character offer 
themselves for this service, and subscribe to these articles: and at 
a suitable time fixed upon by the Trustees, they shall commence 
their journey to the place of destination, and faithfully prosecute 
the above proposed plan of missionary labour, to whichsoever 
of the Indian tribes they shall be directed; looking to God, in hum- 
ble dependence, for direction, and his safe and holy keeping. 

" We, whose names are undersigned, do solemnly pledge our- 
selves to each other, and devote ourselves and property to the 



APPENDIX. 



325 



cause of Christ, for carrying into effect the object of the above 
Constitution." 

Some obstacles, which there is hope of removing, have delayed 
this Establishment, which, could it be accomplished under the pat- 
ronage of government, after due revision, might be of immense ad- 
vantage to the Indians, to the traders, and the military post at this 
place. 

A letter from this post, of October last, states that "the present 
crop at the Bluffs promises a very abundant harvest; more than 
fifteen thousand bushels of corn will be stored, besides the product 
of forty acres of land, cultivated in potatoes, and the fruit of 
twelve or fourteen extensive kitchen gardens. 

A grist and saw-mill, equal to any west of the Alleghany, have 
been erected at the above post the past summer, which will ena- 
ble the troops to manufacture their own bread stuffs, and relieve 
them from the fatigues of sawing plank, &c. by hand.' 1 — Enquirer. 



MISCELLANEOUS ARTICLES AND OMISSIONS. 

Onondagoes. — Appendix, p. 77. 

in July 1821, on my way to Canada, I visited the section of 
these Indians, who reside in the Old Onondaga village, in the Hoi- 
lozv, as they call it, about four miles south of the great western 
turnpike road. Their number, as given me on the spot, was two 
hundred and seventy-two souls. Their reservation, is five miles 
long, by two and a half broad, a very finely situated and rich tract 
of land, three hundred and eighty acres of which are under culti- 
vation, on which they raise the various grains, vegetables, and 
fruits, more than is sufficient for their own consumption. Some 
of their number work at several of the mechanic trades. They 
hold their lands in common, and seem averse to the plan of having 
individual property. In regard to religion, thirty-four of their 
number profess to believe the christian religion, in the Presbyte- 
rian form of worship ; the rest are still pagans. About half the 
whole number are disposed to have schools established among 
them; others probably will send their children, when schools are 



324 



APPENDIX. 



established. Mary DoxtataBr, a pious, intelligent, and well educa- 
ted widow woman of the Stockbridge tribe, of her own accord, 
and without support from any society, or individuals, has kept a 
school among these Indians the last summer, and is probably, in the 
present season, in the same employment with them. 

This tribe are unanimously opposed to removal. They must 
be educated where they are. They have resolutely abandoned 
the use of ardent spirits, till lately, some " bad white people ," as 
they complained to me, have introduced this poison among some of 
the thoughtless young men, to the great alarm and grief of the old 
men. The chiefs wished severe laws might be passed by the state 
against this practice so ruinous to Indian*, and earnestly request- 
ed that I would speak to the Governor of the state on the subject. 

The Onondagoes sustain a high and respectable rank for intelli- 
gence and improvement, among their fellow tribes of the Six Na- 
L, -.: before my visit, Rev. Mr. 31 ills, minister of the Pres- 

byterian Congregation in the neighborhood of these Indians, in- 
formed me, that he had been applied to, to marry a couple of 
these Indians. The ceremony was peformed in the Presbyteri- 
an form at his house. A number of the tribes were at the wedding, 
who appeared pleased ; and it was thought that marriages among 
these Indians in future would be performed in the same manner. 

Mission among the Ottazvas. — Appendix, p. 166. 

The Western Missionary Society, at a meeting in April last, de- 
termined on establishing a mission among the Ottawas in Michigan 
Territory. To the Secretary of this Society, Governor Cass, on 
this occasion, addressed the following letter : — 

" Detroit, April 3, 1821. 
il Sir, — I received yesterday your letter of the 31st ultimo. 
I am rejoiced to learn, that the Western Missionary Society have 
determined to establish a mission among the Ottawas upon the 
Miami. There are no Indians in this quarter more favourably 
situated for such an object, nor to whom its successful accomplish- 
ment would be more important." 



APPENDIX, 



325 



GEOGRAPHICAL. 

Lake St. Clair. Huron river. Mt. Clements. Illinois river. Sa- 
ganau Bay and River. 

This lake is twenty-one miles long, by three broad. Its depth 
from eight to twenty feet. Its waters generally clear ; a north 
east wind renders them less so. There are five channels out of 
this lake into the river. The ship channel formerly had seven 
and a half feet water, but has now only six and a half. 

Huron river, twelve rods wide at its mouth, from eight to ten 
feet deep, empties into the lake, about its center, from the north 
west. At the mouth of this river is an ancient village of twenty 
to twenty-five houses, of French people, with good farms. The 
banks of the Huron are settled sparcely for thirty miles. 

Mount Clements is an elevated pleasant village, of twelve or fif- 
teen houses, of two years growth, (1820.) It is the seat of justice 
for McComb County, and has a court house and jail. It has a 
good soil, and is fast settling. 

Saganau Bay, one hundred and eighty miles above Detroit, one 
hundred and twenty on this side Mackinaw, on the west side of 
Lake Huron, is thirty-five miles wide at its mouth, and sixty -five 
deep, from north east to south west. About twenty-five miles from 
the mouth of the Bay is a chain of islands, called The Traverse, 
where boats pass, bound up and down the lake, to and from Mack- 
inaw, to avoid going round the shore of the bay. The Traverse 
is twenty-two miles across. Point a Barque, is the south point of 
the entrance of the bay. The south shore is full of shoals and 
islands. The channel for vessels is on the north side of the bay, 
twenty miles wide, till you arrive near the Traverse, when it 
narrows to seven miles. Saganau river, which comes in from 
the west, four miles from the head of the bay, forms the only har- 
bor in this bay. The river at its mouth is narrow, about three 
hundred and fifty feet wide, and has eight feet water. Point au Sa- 
ble is the north point of the bay, about two miles from which enters 
Point Sable river from the north west, about one hundred and fif- 
ty yards wide. The depth of water in the channel up to the 
Traverse, is ten fathoms ; thence to within six miles of Saganau 
river seven fathoms ; thence from four to three. 



326 



APPENDIX. 



The bay is usually rough, owing to the meeting of opposing cur- 
rents, and flawy winds, as at Cape Hatteras. 

On Saganau river, fourteen miles from its mouth, is the principal 
Tillage of Chippawa Indians, where a treaty for the purchase of a 
large tract of their land, was held in 1819. Here it is contempla- 
ted to plant an Education Family.* 

Illinois river is formed by the union of O Plaine and Kankakee 
rivers, sixty miles from Chicago. From Chicago river into the 
O Plaine is a portage, across a prairie, of two miles, which, when 
the water is high, is passed with loaded boats. From the mouth 
of the Illinois, up two hundred and forty miles, there were, in 
1819, but three families settled. These were at Fort Clark. 

Letter from the Rev. Charles Stewart relative to the state of the In- 
dians in the two Canadas, in answer to one addressed tohim.\ 

" Talbot Street, Upper Canada, July 3d, 1822. 

Rev. J. Morse, D. D. 
Rev. Sir, 

"Your letter of last September I did not receive, until 1 arrived 
at York in May. I thought it advisable to postpone writing to you, 
till after I had visited the Six Nation Indians on Grand River. I 
did not accomplish that visit till the second week in June; and it 
has not been convenient to me to write to you, till I arrived at this 
place. 

"You do me honor in wishing to communicate with me on 
the subject of ameliorating the state of the Indians, but I am not 
competent to afford you much information. It gives me pleasure 
to find that your Goverment and country are taking measures 
for the benefit of the Indians; and I am happy to say, that there is 
a good prospect of due attention being paid to their interests, in 
Canada. I hope that a law will soon be made to prevent the sale 
to them of spirituous liquors, for the use of these certainly does 

* The above description was communicated, verbally, by Capt. Knapp,who 

had oi'.^n visited this bay. 

f See Report, p. 20. 



APPENDIX. 



32? 



more harm among them, than any thing else. It is intended that a 
Missionary shall be placed on the Grand River without unnecessa- 
ry delay. 1 am of opinion that the residence of a good missionary 
among them should be the first institution for their benefit; and next 
to this, the appointment of schoolmasters. I lately visited the Rev. 
Mr. Crane, Missionary to the Tuscarora Indians, near Lewiston ; 
and I was well pleased with him, and his account of the people^ 
He advises that pains should be taken to instruct all the Indians in 
the English language. He says there are so many dialects among 
them, it will be difficult to print books for them all, or for teach- 
ers to speak to them in their own tongue. 

" I am not acquainted with the number or circumstances, of the 
Canada Indians, except with those of the Six Nations settled on the 
Bay of Quinte, and the Grand River, west of York. The former 
part amounts to about 250 souls, while those on the Grand River 
are nearly 2,000 souls. I expect that John Brandt, the son of the 
late Joseph Brandt, who is probably by this time returned from 
England, will reside on the Grand River, and that he will be very 
useful to the Six Nations in contributing to their welfare; for I 
have a good opinion of his abilities and disposition. 

"The Six Nations are Protestants; for most of them profess 
Christianity. The Indians in Lower Canada, in general, are Ro- 
man Catholics. There are nearly two hundred of the Misisaugas, 
who are settling on the river Credit, near York, I understand, un- 
der the auspices of Government. The Western Tribes have 
been used to frequent, in some thousands, annually, I believe, the 
post at Drummond's Island* and also, in as large a body, the post 
at Amherstburg; but I cannot speak accurately as to their num- 
bers; and nothing has been done, I fear, in the way of civilizing 
them. 

" I am sorry that I cannot give you more extensive and use- 
ful information. If it be in my power to do so at a future period, 
it will give me pleasure to communicate with you on the interest- 
ing subject in which you are so laudably engaged. 

*The Commissioners for running the Northern line of the United States . 
have lately decided that this island, contrary to expectation, is within the Uni- 
ted States. 



328 



APPENDIX. 



Sandwich, July 13. 

P. S. I propose to go to Detroit, to day, to wait on the Gov- 
ernor of the Michigan Territory. I shall suggest to his excellen- 
cy the propriety of every thing being done, that can be done, to 
prevent the sale of spirituous liquors to the Indians. 

Unless the Government, on both sides of the river Detroit, co- 
operate in this measure, little good can be accomplished among 
the Indians. I understand that Governor Cass is desirous of 
doing all that is in his power to ameliorate the state of the Indians. 

C. STEWART. 

Extracts from a Journal of Voyages and Travels in the interior of 
North- America, between the 41th and 58th deg. JV. hat. during a 
residence of nineteen years; by Daniel W. Harmon, Esq. 

Mr. Harmon left Montreal, in April 1800, and proceeded west 
into the Indian country, as a clerk to the North- West Company. 

Credulity of Indians. -~Mr. H. on his way, passed a place called 
Lost Child, so named from the circumstance, that a body of Indians 
encamped here, a few years ago, and lost a child, for whom they 
made a fruitless search. They imagined they heard its cries in the 
bowels ofthe earth, and accordingly dug, but in vain, to find it. The 
cause of their disappointment, they conceived was, that the Bad 
Spirit carried the child continually from one place to another, to 
elude their search. The holes dug by the Indians on this occa- 
-don, were shewn to Mr. H. 

Alexandria on Assiniboin, or Upper Red River, 

Character and conduct of Traders among Indians. 

Sunday, Nov. 16. "The Indians, who come to this establish- 
ment, are Crees and Assiniboins. The principal part of the for- 
mer, generally remain in the woody part of the country, and hunt 
the moose, elk, beaver, &c; and the latter remain in the large 
prairies, and hunt buffaloes, wolves, &c. Last Wednesday, twelve 
families of Crees and Assiniboins came from the large prairies ; 



.APPENDIX. 



329 



and let us have furs and provisions. Both the men and women 
have been drinking, ever since, and their noise is very disagreea- 
ble; for they talk, sing and cry, at the same time. Our men play at 
cards on the sabbath, the same as on any other day. For such 
improper conduct, I once reproved them; but their reply was, 
there is no sabbath in this country; and, they added, no God nor 
devil; and their behavior but too plainly shows, that they spoke 
as they think. It is a lamentable fact, that those who have been for 
any considerable time in this savage country, lay aside the great- 
er part of the regulations of civilized and christian people, and be- 
have little better than the savages. It is true, we have it not at 
all times in our power to observe the sabbath as we ought, as the 
natives come to our establishments as often on that day, as any 
other; and when they do come, they must be attended to, and 
their wants must be supplied. We are, also, frequently under 
the necessity of travelling on the sabbath. But it is likewise true, 
that, if we were rightly disposed, our minds might, on this day, 
be almost wholly occupied with divine things. I must, therefore, 
acknowledge, that we have no reasonable excuse for violating the 
sabbath, as we all do." 



An Indian drunken scene described. 

"Yesterday, eight families of Crees came in. While drinking, 
one of their women, who had a sharp pointed knife about her, fell 
down, and drove it nearly two inches into her side; but the wound 
is not thought to be mortal. To see a house full of drunken In- 
dians, consisting of men, women and children, is a most unpleasant 
sight; for, in that condition, they often wrangle, pull each other 
by the hair, and fight. Sometimes, ten or twelve, of both sex- 
es, may be seen fighting each other promiscuously, until at last, 
they all fall on the floor, one upon another some spilling rum 
out of a small kettle or dish, which they hold in their hands, while 
others are throwing up what they have just drunk. To add to 
this uproar, a number of children, some on their mother's shoul- 
ders, and others running about and taking hold of their clothes, 
are constantly crying; the older ones, through fear that their pa- 
rents may be stabbed, or that some other misfortune may befal 
42 



330 



APPENDIX. 



them, in the fray. These shrieks of the children, form a very 
unpleasant chorus to the brutal noise kept up by their drunken 
parents, who are engaged in the squabble." 

Indian mode of taking a sweat. 

"The women make a kind of hut, of bended willows, which is 
nearly circular, and if for one or too persons only, not more than 
fifteen feet in circumference, and three or four in height. Over 
these, they lay the skins of the buffaloe, &c. and in the centre of 
the hut, they place heated stones. The Indian then enters, per- 
fectly naked, with a dish of water in his hand, a little of which, he 
occasionally throws on the hot stones, to create steam, which, in 
connexion with the heat, puts him into a profuse perspiration. In 
this situation he will remain, for about an hour; but a person un- 
accustomed to endure such heat, could not sustain it for half that 
time. They sweat themselves in this manner, they say, in order 
that their limbs may become more supple, and they more alert, in 
pursuing animals, which they are desirous of killing. They also 
consider sweating a powerful remedy for the most of diseases. As 
they come from sweating, they frequently plunge into a river, qt 
rub themselves with snow." 

Crees and Assiniboins; their customs, dress, 4*c. 

;i The Indians, who come to this establishment, are, as has been 
already observed, Crees and Assiniboins; or, as some call them, 
Knistinoes and Stone Indians. Both of them are numerous tribes; 
and as they often meet, and some of them intermarry, their man- 
ners and customs are similar; but there is no resemblance in their 
languages. Both tribes are well furnished with horses. The As- 
siniboins, however, are by far the best horsemen. They never go 
any distance on foot, and it is generally on horseback, that they 
kill their game. 

"They mount their horses, and run down, and kill the buffaloe, 
and some other animals, with bows and aicows, which they find 
every way as convenient for this purpose. as fire-arms. But the 



APPENDIX. 3 31 

Crees, when they can procure them, always make use of guns. 
Their clothing consists of leggins of cloth, or dressed antelope 
skins, a shirt or frock of the same materials, and a blanket of 
dressed buffaloe skin, which they wrap round their bodies, and 
tie about their waists. To the above they will often add a cap or 
bonnet, of the wolf skin, and shoes for their feet." 



Indian hospitality. 

Wednesday, February, 11, 1801. "On the lstinst. accompanied 
by eight of our people, and one of the natives as a guide, I set off, 
with a small assortment of goods, to go and trade with about fifty 
families of Crees and Assiniboins. 

"When we had approached within about a mile of the camp of 
the natives, ten or twelve of their Chiefs, or most respectable 
men among them, came on horseback, to meet, and conduct us to 
their dwellings. We arrived at them, through a crowd of people, 
who hailed us with a shout of joy. Immediately after our arrival, 
the principal Chief of the village sent his son, to invite me and my 
interpreter to his tent. As soon as we had entered it, and were 
seated, the respectable old Chief caused meat and berries, and the 
best of every thing which he had, to be set before us. Before we 
had eaten much, we were sent for to another tent, where we re- 
ceived a similar treatment; and from this, we were invited to an- 
other; and so on, till we had been to more than half a dozen tents. 
At all these, we ate a little, and smoked our pipes; for, my interpre- 
ter informed me, they would be greatly affronted, and think that 
we despised them, if we refused to taste of every thing which was 
set before us. Hospitality to strangers, is among the Indian vir- 
tues. During several days that we remained with these people, 
we were treated with more real politeness, than is commonly 
shown to strangers in the civilized part of the world." 



Indian crime. 



Friday, 20. "During the last night, we sat up to deal out spirits 
to the Indians. One of them has his own daughter for a wife, and 



332 



APPENDIX. 



her mother at the same time ! Incest, however, is a crime, of 
which the Indians in this quarter are not often guilty. When one 
of them does commit it, he is regarded by the rest of his tribe, as 
void of sense." 

Rapid Indians; or, as they call themselves, Paw-is-tuck I-e-ne-zvuch. 

"This is a small, but brave tribe, who remain a considerable dis- 
tance out in the large prairies, and toward the upper part of the 
Missouri river." 



Indian worship. 

Wednesday, April 21. "All our Indians, who for several days 
encamped near the fort, have now departed, to hunt the beaver. 
While they were here they made a feast, at which they danced, 
cried, sung and howled, and in a word, made a terrible, savage 
noise. Such feasts, the Crees are accustomed to make, at the 
return of every spring ; and sometimes at other seasons of 
the year. By so doing, they say, they appease the anger of the 
evil spirit or devil, and thus prevent him from doing them harm, 
to which they consider him as ever inclined. They have, also, 
certain places, where they deposit a part of their property, such 
as guns, kettles, bows, arrows, &c. as a sacrifice to the same 
spirit. To the Supreme Being, however, the creator and gov- 
ernor of the universe, whom they call Kich-e-mon-e-too, that is, 
Great Spirit, they address their prayers; yet they say there is no 
necessity of paying him any sacrifice, since he is a good spirit, and 
is not disposed to do them injury; whereas the evil spirit is mali- 
cious, and therefore it is proper they should strive to ap- 
pease his anger. The above mentioned feast was made by the 
Chief of the band, whose name is Ka-she-we-ske-wate, who, for 
the long space of forty-eight hours previous to the entertainment, 
neither ate nor drank any thing. At the commencement of the 
feast, every person put on a grave countenance; and the Chief 
went through a number of ceremonies, with the utmost solemnity. 
After the entertainment was over, every Indian made a voluntary 



APPENDIX. 333 

sacrifice of a part of his property to the devil, or, as they call him, 
Much-e-mon-e-too." 

Grasshoppers. 

Friday, 23. "There are at present in this vicinity, grass-hop- 
pers in such prodigious numbers, as I never before saw in any 
place. In fair weather, between eight and ten o'clock, A. M. 
which is the only part of the day when many of them leave the 
ground, they are flying in such numbers, that they obscure the 
sun, like a light cloud passing over it. They also devour every 
thing before them, leaving scarcely a leaf on the trees, or a blade 
of grass on the prairies; and our potatoe tops escape not their 
ravages." 

Indian inhumanity. 

"Yesterday, six families of Crees came to the fort, who have 
been drinking ever since. An Indian had a few wrangling 
words with a squaw, belonging to another band, to whom he gave 
a slight beating. At that time, the Chief, who was the friend of 
the Indian, was passing by; and he was so enraged at the abusive 
language given by the woman to his friend, that he commenced 
beating her on the head with a club, and soon terminated her life. 
This morning, the Indian women buried her corpse; and no more 
notice is taken of her death, than if a dog had been killed; for her 
relations are at a considerable distance, in another part of the 
country. An Indian is not much regarded or feared by his fel- 
lows, unless he has a number of relations to take part with him in 
his contests while in life, or to avenge his death, in case he should 
be murdered. This is true among all the Indian tribes, with 
which I have been acquainted." 

Indian customs. 

Wednesday, Aug. 11. "On the ninth inst. a Chief among the 
Crees, came to the fort, accompanied by a number of his relations, 
who appeared very desirous that I should take one of his daugh- 



334 



APPENDIX. 



ters to remain with me. I put him off by telling him, that I could 
not then accept of a woman, but probably might in the fall. He 
pressed me, however, to allow her to remain with me, at once, 
and added, "I am fond of you, and my wish is to have my daugh- 
ter with the white people; for she will be treated better by them, 
than by her own relations." In fact, he almost persuaded me to 
keep her; for I was sure that, while I had the daughter, I should 
not only have the father's furs, but those of all his band. This 
would be for the interest of the company, and would, therefore, 
turn to my own advantage, in some measure; so that a regard to in- 
terest, well nigh made me consent to an act, which would have 
been unwise and improper, But, happily for me, I escaped the 
£nare." 

Rainy Lake. 

Friday, July 5. "On the margin of the waters which connect 
this lake with the Great Winipick Lake, the wild rice is found. 
This useful grain is produced in no other part of the north-west 
country. This grain is gathered in such quantities, in this region, 
that, in ordinary seasons, the North-West Company purchase, an- 
nually, from twelve to fifteen hundred bushels of it, from the na- 
tives; and it constitutes a principal article of food, at the posts in 
this vicinity." 

Sicaunies. 

"The Sicaunies, on the Rocky Mountains, are a quiet, innoffen- 
sive people, whose situation exposes them to peculiar difficulties 
and distresses. When they proceed to the west side of the moun- 
tain, the natives of that region, who are Tacullies and Atenas, at- 
tack and kill many of them; and when they are on this side, the 
Beaver Indians and Crees, are continually making war upon them. 
Being thus surrounded by enemies, against whom they are too fee- 
ble successfully to contend, they frequently suffer much for want 
of food; for when on the west side, they dare not, at all times, visit 
those places where fish are in plenty, and when on the east side, 
they are frequently afraid to visit those parts where animals 
abound. They are compelled, therefore, oftentimes to subsist 



APPENDIX. 



335 



upon the roots, which they 6nd in the mountains, and which ena- 
able them to barely sustain life. Their emaciated bodies frequent- 
ly bear witness to the scantiness of their fare. 

"We here begin to see lofty mountains at a distance. This 
place is in the 56° of north latitude, and 121° of west longitude." 

Monday, 22. "It has snowed and rained during the whole of 
this day. We are now in the heart of the Rocky Mountains, the 
lofty summits of which, on each side of the river, tower majestic- 
ally toward the heavens, and are perpetually whitened by snows, 
that are never dissolved, by solar heat. They are by far the 
highest mountains that I have ever seen. The timber which 
grows upon them, is chiefly spruce fir, birch and poplar. It is a 
curious fact in the geography of North-America, that so many of 
the lakes and rivers, jon the west side of this lofty range of moun- 
tains, discharge their waters through one narrow passage, in this 
great barrier, and eventually enter the North Sea." 

Wednesday, 22. "This afternoon, just as we got through the 
mountain, we passed Finlay's, or the North Branch, which appears 
to be of about the same magnitude as the South Branch, which we 
are following. These two branches take their rise in very differ- 
ent directions. The source of the South Branch is in the Rocky 
Mountain, at the distance of nearly two hundred miles from the 
place where we now are. The North Branch runs out of a very 
large lake, called by the natives Musk-qua-Sa-ky-e-gun, or Bear's 
Lake. This lake, which is so large that the Indians never at- 
tempt to cross it in their canoes, and which, those who reside at 
the east end of it affirm, extends to the Western ocean, is situated 
nearly west from the place where the two branches form a junc- 
tion, at the distance, as is thought, of about one hundred and fifty 
miles. Both branches, before their junction, run along the foot, 
of the mountain, as if in search of a passage through. 

Thursday, Nov. 1. McLeod's Lake Fort. "This place is situa- 
ted in 55° north latitude, and 124° west longitude. The country 
lying between this place and Fiulay's Branch, is thickly covered 
with timber, on both sides of the river; and, on the right, in com- 
ing up, the land is low and level. Mountains appear at a consid- 
erable distance. We have not seen a large animal, nor even the 



336 



APPENDIX. 



track of one, since we left the Rocky Mountain Portage. About 
twenty miles from this place, we left Peace river, and have come 
up a small river, of five or six rods in breadth, which, a little be- 
low this, passes through a small lake. Here we leave our canoes, 
and take our goods, by land, to the establishment at Stuart's Lake, 
which place is situated nearly one hundred miles to the west from 
this. 

"McLeod's Lake is sixty or seventy miles in circumference. 

"The Sicaunie Indians frequent this establishment. Their dia- 
lect differs little from that of the Beaver Indians. There are but 
few large animals in this part of the country; and when the snow 
is five or six feet deep, as is frequently the case in the winter, few 
beavers can be taken, nor can many fish be caught, in this cold 
season of the year. Yet after all the difficulties which these peo- 
ple encounter, in procuring a subsistence, such is their attachment 
to the country that gave them birth, that they would not willingly 
exchange it for any other part of the world." 

Wednesday, 17. Stuart's Lake. "This lake is called by the na- 
tives Nuck-aws-lay, and the establishment on it, where we now 
are, is situated in 54° 30' north latitude, and in 125° west longi- 
tude. 

The fort stands in a very pleasant place, on a rise of ground, at 
the east end of Stuart's Lake, which I am informed, is at least 
three hundred miles in circumference. At the distance of about 
two hundred rods from the fort, a considerable river runs out of 
the lake, where the natives, who call themselves Tacullies, have 
a village of one hundred souls, or rather a few small huts built of 
wood. At these they remain during the season for taking and dry- 
ing salmon, on which they subsist, during the greater part of the 
year. Their language strongly resembles that spoken by the Si- 
caunies; and no doubt they formerly constituted a part of the same 
tribe, though they now differ from them, in their manners and 
customs. The Sicaunies bury, while the Tacullies burn, their 
dead. 

Monday, 26. "The corpse of a woman of this place, who died 
on the 20th inst. was burned this afternoon. While the ceremo- 
ny was performing, the natives made a terrible savage noise, by 
howling, crying, and a kind of singing. 



/ 



APPENDIX. 



337 



Saturday, Dec. 29. Frazer's Lake. ''Incoming to this place, I 
passed through a country, which is very rough, and thickly cover- 
ed with timber, consisting of spruce, fir, poplar, aspin, birch, cy- 
press, &c. We crossed one considerable mountain, and several 
small lakes. 

"The establishment is at the east end of this lake. The natives 
have here a large village, where they take and dry salmon. This 
lake may be eighty or ninety miles in circumference, and is well 
supplied with white-fish, trout, &c. 

Tuesday, Jan. 1, 1811. "This being the first day of another 
year, our people have passed it, according to the custom of the 
Canadians, in drinking and fighting. Some of the principal Indians 
of this place desired us to allow them to remain at the fort, that 
they might see our people drink. When they began to be intoxi- 
cated, and to quarrel among themselves, the natives appeared not 
a little surprised at the change; for it was the first time that they 
had ever seen a person intoxicated. 

Wednesday, May 22. "It is perhaps a little remarkable, that 
pike or pickerel have never been found in any of the lakes and 
rivers, on the west side of the Rocky Mountains. 

Tuesday, June 11. "Three Indians have arrived from Sy-cus, a 
village, lying about one hundred and thirt}' miles down this river, 
who say, that it is reported by others from farther down, that 
there is a very extraordinany and powerful being on his way here, 
from the sea, who, when he arrives, will transform me into a 
stone, as well as perform may other miraculous deeds; and the 
simple and credulous natives fully believe this report. 

Sunday, 16. "A number of Indians have arrived, in six large 
wooden canoes, from the other end of this (Stuart's,) lake; and 
among them are two, a father and his son, who say that they be- 
long to a tribe, who call themselves Nate-ote-tains. These are 
the first of that nation, whom we have ever seen here. They 
state, that their tribe is numerous, and scattered in villages over 
a large extent of country, lying directly west from this; and that 
it is not more than five or six days' march to their nearest village. 
They also inform us, that a large river passes through their coun- 
try, and at no considerable distance from it enters the Pacific 
Ocean. They likewise say. that a number of white people come 
up that river in barges, every autumn, to trade with the Indians, 
43 



338 



APPENDIX. 



who reside along its shores. But I could not learn from them, to 
what nation those white people belong. I imagine, however, that 
they are Americans, who come round Cape Horn, to carry on 
what is called a coasting trade; for I cannot learn that they ever 
attempted to make establishments along the sea coast." 

Thursday, Aug. 22. "One of the natives has caught a salmon, 
which is joyful intelligence to us all; for we hope and expect, that 
in a few days, we shall have them in abundance. These fish vis- 
it, to a greater or less extent, all the rivers in this region, and 
form the principal dependence of the inhabitants, as the means of 
subsistence. 

Monday, Sept. 2. "We now have the common salmon in abun- 
dance. They weigh from five to seven pounds. There are, 
also, a few of a larger kind, which will weigh sixty or seventy 
pounds. Both of them are very good, when just taken out of the 
water. But, when dried, as they are by the Indians here, by the 
heat of the sun, or in the smoke of a fire, they are not very pala- 
table. When salted, they are excellent. 

"As soon as the salmon come into this lake, they go in search of 
the rivers and brooks that fall into it; and these streams they as- 
cend, so far as there is water to enable them to swim; and when 
they can proceed no farther up, they remain there and die. None 
were ever seen to descend these streams. They are found dead 
in such numbers, in some places, as to infect the atmosphere with 
a terrible stench, for a considerable distance round. But, even 
when they are in a putrid state, the natives frequently gather 
them up and eat them, apparently with as great a relish, as if they 
were fresh. 

Tuesday, 17. "Between nine and ten o'clock this forenoon, the 
sun was eclipsed, for nearly half an hour, which event alarmed 
the natives greatly; for they considered it as foreboding some 
great calamity, about to fall upon them. They therefore cried 
and howled, making a savage noise. Their priests or magicians 
took their hands full of swan's down, and blew it through their 
hands towards the sun, imploring that great luminary to accept of 
the offering thus made to him, to be put on the head of his sons, 
when engaged in dancing, and to spare the Indians. They sup- 
pose that the Sun has children, who, like those of the Carriers, 
are fond of putting swan's down on their heads, when they dance. 



APPENDIX. 



339 



t explained to them the cause of the darkness; at which they ap- 
peared both pleased and astonished, and acknowledged that my ac- 
count of the subject was rational, but wondered how I could ob- 
tain a knowledge of such hidden and mysterious things. 

Wednesday, Jan. 1, 1812. "This being the first day of the year, 
Mr. McDougall and I dined with all our people, in the hall. After 
our repast was ended, I invited several of the Sicauny and Car- 
rier Chiefs, and most respectable men, to partake of the provisions 
which we had left; and I was surprised to see them behave with 
much decency, and even propriety, while eating, and while drink- 
ing a flagon or two of spirits. 

"After they had finished their repast, they smoked their pipes, 
and conversed rationally, on the great difference which exists, 
between the manners and customs of civilized people, and those 
of the savages. They readily conceded that ours are superior to 
theirs. 

Monday, 13. "On the 9thinst. a Sicauny died at this place ; and 
the following circumstances attended his incineration, to-day. The 
corpse was placed on a pile of dry wood, with the face upwards, 
which was painted and bare. The body was covered with a robe, 
made of beaver skins, and shoes were on the feet. In short, the 
deceased was clothed in the same manner as when alive, only a little 
more gaily. His gun and powder-horn, together with every trinket 
which he had possessed, were placed b}' his side. As they were 
about to set fire to the wood, on which the deceased lay, one of 
his brothers asked him if he would ever come among them again; 
for they suppose that the soul of a person, after the death of the 
body, can revisit the earth, in another body. They must, there- 
fore, believe in the immortality, though they connect witL it 
the transmigration, of the soul. 

"The deceased had two wives, who were placed, the one at tht 
head, and the other at the foot of the corpse; and there they lay 
until the hair of their heads was nearly consumed by the flames, 
and they were almost suffocated by the smoke. When almost 
senseless, they rolled on the ground, to a little distance from the 
fire. As soon as they had recovered a little strength, they stood 
up, and began to strike the burning corpse with both their hands 
alternately; and this disgusting, savage ceremony was continued, 
until the body was nearly consumed. This operation was inter- 



340 



APPENDIX. 



rupted by their frequent turns of fainting, arising from the intensi- 
ty of the heat. If they did not soon recover from these turns, and 
commence the operation of striking the corpse, the men would 
seize them by the little remaining hair on their heads, and push 
them into the flames, in order to compel them to do it. This vio- 
lence was especially used towards one of the wives of the deceas- 
ed, who had frequently run away from him while he was living. 

"When the body was nearly burned to ashes, the wives of the de? 
ceased gathered up these ashes, and the remaining pieces of bones, 
which they put into bags. These bags they will be compelled to 
carry upon their backs, and to lay by their sides, when they lie 
down at night, for about two years. The relations of the deceased 
will then make a feast, and enclose these bones and ashes in a box, 
and deposit them under a shed, erected for that purpose, in the 
centre of the village. Until this time, the widows are kept in 
a kind of slavery, and are required to daub their faces over with 
some black substance, and to appear clothed with rags, and fre- 
quently to go without any clothing, except round their waists. 
But, at the time of this feast, they are set at liberty from these 
disagreeable restraints. 

Thursday, 30. 4 'On the 17th inst. accompanied by Mr. McDou- 
gall, twelve of my men and two Carriers, I set out on a journey to 
the territory of the Nate-ote-tains, a tribe of Indians, who have 
never had any intercourse with white people, and few of whom 
have ever seen them. After travelling, with all possible expedi- 
tion, during seven days, generally on lakes, we arrived at their 
first village. 

"They treated us with much respect, and with great hospitality. 

"The day following, we proceeded on our route; and, during 
our progress, we saw four more of their villages. The five villa- 
ges, which we visited, contain about two thousand inhabitants, who 
are well made and robust. They subsist principally on salmon, 
and other small fish. The salmon here have small scales, while 
those at Stuart's Lake have none. The clothing of these people, 
is much like that of the Carriers. I procured from them vessels, 
curiously wrought, of the smaller roots of the spruce fir, in differ- 
ent shapes. Some of them are open, like a kettle, and will hold 
water. They also let me have a blanket or rug, which was man- 
ufactured by the Atenas, of the wool of a kind of sheep or goat. 



APPENDIX. 



341 



"These animals are said to be numerous, on the mountains in 
their country. They told us, that we had seen but a small part 
of the Nate-ote-tains, who, they say, are a numerous tribe. They 
speak a language peculiar to themselves, though the greater part of 
them understand that spoken b}' the Carriers. 

"The country which we travelled over in this route, is generally 
level. Few mountains are to be seen. A heavy growth of timber 
evinces that the soil is good. We saw no large animals, except- 
ing the cariboo; but we were informed, that black bears, and other 
kinds of the larger animals, exist in considerable numbers, in that 
region. 

Monday, April 6. "Six Indians have arrived from Frazer's 
Lake, who delivered to me a letter, written by Mr. David Thomp- 
son, which is dated August 28th, 1811, at Ilk -koy-ope Falls, on 
the Columbia river. It informs me, that this gentleman, accom- 
panied by seven Canadians, descended the Columbia River, to the 
place where it enters the Pacific Ocean, where they arrived on the 
16th of July. There they found a number of people, employed in 
building a fort for a company of Americans, who denominated them- 
selves the Pacific Fur Company." 

Mr. Harmon resided more than eight years west of the Rocky 
Mountains, and gives the following account of the Indians dwelling 
there: — 

"That part of the country, west of the Rocky Mountains, with 
which I am acquainted, ever since the North-West Company first 
made an establishment there, which was in 1806, has gone by the 
name of New-Caledonia; and extends from north to south, about 
five hundred miles, and east to west, three hundred and fifty or 
four hundred. The post at Stuart's Lake, is nearly in the centre 
of it, and lies, as already mentioned, in 54° SO' north latitude, and 
in 125° west longitude from Greenwich. In this large extent of 
country, there are not more than five thousand Indians, including 
men, women and children. 

"New-Caledonia is considerably mountainous. Between its ele- 
vated parts, however, there are pretty extensive vallies, along 
which pass innumerable small rivers and brooks. It contains a 
great number of small lakes, two of which are considerably large. 
These are Stuart's Lake, which is about four hundred miles in 



\ 



342 



APPENDIX. 



circumference, and Nate-ote-tain Lake, which is nearly twice as 
large. About one sixth part of New-Caledonia is covered with 
water. There are two large rivers. One of these 1 denominate 
Frazer's river, which may be sixty or seventy rods wide. It ri- 
ses in the Rocky Mountains, within a short distance of the source 
of Peace river; and is the river which Sir Alexander McKenzie 
followed a considerable distance, when he went to the Pacific 
Ocean, in 1793, and which he took to be the Columbia river; but 
it is now known to be several miles north of that noble stream. 
The other large river of New-Caledonia, rises near Great Bear's 
Lake; and after passing through several considerable lakes, it en- 
ters the Pacific Ocean, several hundred miles north of Frazer's 
river. 

"The mountains of New-Caledonia, in point of elevation, are 
not to be compared with those which we pass in coming up that 
part of Peace river, which lies between the Rocky Mountain por- 
tage and Finlay's branch. There are some, however, which are 
pretty lofty; and on the summits of one in particular, which we 
see from Stuart's Lake, the snow lies during the whole of the 
year, 

"The weather is not severely cold, except for a few days in the 
winter, when the mercury is sometimes as low as 32° below zero, 
in Fahrenheit's thermometer. The remainder of the season is 
much milder than it is on the other side of the mountain, in the 
same latitude. The summer is never very warm, in the day time; 
and the nights are generally cool. In every month in the year, 
there are frosts. Snow generally falls about the fifteenth of No- 
vember, and is all dissolved by about the fifteenth of Ma}'. 

"There are a few moose; and the natives occasionally kill a 
black bear. Cariboo are also found at some seasons. Some 
smaller animals are found, though they are not numerous. They 
consist of beavers, otters, lynxes or cats, fishers, martins, minks, 
wolverines, foxes of different kinds, badgers, polecats, hares, and 
a few wolves. The fowls are swans, bustards, geese, cranes, ducks 
of several kinds, partridges, &x. All the lakes and rivers are 
well furnished with excellent fish. They are the sturgeon, white 
fish, trout, sucker, and many of a smaller kind. Salmon, also, 
visit the streams, in very considerable numbers, in Autumn. A 
small share of industry, therefore, would enable the natives, at 



APPENDIX. 



343 



all times, to provide for themselves a sufficient supply of agreea- 
ble, wholesome and nutritious food. 

The natives of New-Caledonia, we denominate Carriers; but 
they call themselves Ta-cul-lies, a people who go upon water, 
This name originated from the fact, that they generally go from 
one village to another, in canoes. They are of the middle stat- 
ure, and the men are well-proportioned; but the women are gen- 
erally short and thick, and their lower limbs are disproportionate 
large. Both sexes are indolent and slovenly, in their persons, 
and filthy in their cookery. Their dispositions are lively and qui- 
et; and they appear contented in their wretched situation. They 
are not in the habit of stealing articles of great value; but they 
are the slyest pilferers, perhaps, upon the face of the earth. They 
are remarkably fond of the white people. They seldom begin a 
quarrel with any of us, though they are naturally brave. When 
any of our people, however, treat them ill, they defend themselves 
with courage, and with considerable dexterity; and some of them 
will fight a tolerable Canadian battle. 

"Their language is very similar to that of the Chipewyans, and 
has a great affinity to that of the Beaver Indians, and the Sicau- 
nies. In all the different villages of the Carriers, there is a differ- 
ent dialect. 

"Their clothing consists of a covering made of the skins of the 
beaver, badger, muskrat, cat or hare. 

"Both sexes perforate their noses; and from them the men often 
suspend an ornament, consisting of a piece of an oyster-shell, or a 
small piece of brass or copper. The women, particularly those 
who are young, run a wooden pin through their noses, upon each 
end of which they fix a kind of shell bead, which is about an inch 
and an half long, and nearly the size of the stem of a common clay 
pipe. These beads they obtain from their neighbors, the At-e- 
nas, who purchase them from another tribe, that is said to take 
them on the sea-shore, where they are reported to be found in 
plenty. 

"The Carriers are not so ingenious as their neighbors, the Nate- 
ote-tains and At-e-nas. The men, however, make canoes, which 
are clumsily wrought, of the aspin tree, as well as of the bark of 
the spruce fir. The former will carry from half a ton to a ton 
and an half burthen, while the latter will carry from one to four 



344 



APPENDIX. 



grown persons. The women make excellent nets, of the inner 
bark of the willow tree, and of nettles, which answer better for ta- 
king small fish, than any which we obtain from Canada, made of 
twine or thread. 

"The Carriers are remarkably fond of their wives, and a few 
of them have three or four; but polygamy is not general among 
them. The men do the most of the drudgery about the house, 
such as cutting and drawing fire-wood, and bringing water. 

"The Carriers have little that can be denominated civil govern- 
ment, in the regulation of their concerns. There are some per- 
sons among them, who are called Mi-u-ties or Chiefs, and for 
whom they appear to have a little more respect than for the oth- 
ers; but these chiefs have not much authority or influence over 
the rest of the community. Any one is dubbed a Mi-u-ty, who is 
able and willing, occasionally, to provide a feast, for the people of 
his village. An Indian, however, who has killed another, or been 
guilty of some other bad action, finds the house or tent of the chief 
a safe retreat, so long as he is allowed to remain there. But as 
soon as he leaves it, the Chief can afford the criminal no more 
protection, than any other person in the village, unless he lets 
him have one of his garments. This garment of the Chief, will 
protect a malefactor from harm, while he wears it; for no person 
would attack him, while clothed with this safe-guard, sooner than 
he would attack the Chief himself; and if he should, the Chief 
would revenge the insult, in the same manner as if it were offered 
directly to himself. The revenge, which the Chief, in this case, 
would take, would be to destroy the life of the offending person, 
or that of some of his near relations, or the life of one of the same 
tribe, if he should happen f o be a stranger. 

"The Carriers are the most ignorant people among whom I have 
ever been. They appear to have only a very confused and limi- 
ted idea of the existence of a Supreme Being, the maker and gov- 
ernor of the world, or of the devil, or any evil spirit; and they, 
therefore, neither worship the former, nor fear the latter. But 
they believe in the immortality of the soul, and think when it 
leaves its present bod} r , it goes into the bowels of the earth, where 
they suppose it will be more happy than when an inhabitant of its 
surface. But they seem to have no idea of future rewards or 
punishments, in consequence of any thing which they may have 



APPENDIX. 



345 



done, while resident on earth. And whether the soul will be 
furnished with another body, when it leaves that which it anima- 
ted on earth, they say they cannot tell; it being, as they add, be- 
yond their comprehension. They firmly believe, however, that 
a departed soul can, if it pleases, come back to the earth, in a hu- 
man shape or body, in order to see his friends, who are still alive. 
Therefore, as they are about to set fire to the pile of wood, on which 
a corpse is laid, a relation of the deceased person stands at his feet, 
and asks him if he will ever come back among them. Then the 
priest or magician, with a grave countenance, stands at the head of 
the corpse, and looks through both his hands on its naked breast, 
and then raises them toward heaven, and blows through them, as 
they say, the soul of the deceased, that it may go and find, and en- 
ter into a relative. Or, if any relative is present, the priest will 
hold both his hands on the head of this person, and blow through 
them, that the spirit of the deceased may enter into him or her; 
and then, as they affirm, the first child which this person has, will 
possess the soul of the deceased person. 

"When the Carriers are severely sick, they often think that the}' 
shall not recover, unless they divulge to a priest or magician, eve- 
ery crime which they may have committed, which has hitherto 
been kept secret. In such a case, they will make a full confes- 
sion, and then they expect that their lives will be spared, for a 
time longer. But should they keep back a single crime, they as 
fully believe, that they shall suffer almost instant death. 

"Murder is not considered by the Carriers as a crime of great 
magnitude; and therefore it makes no part of their acknowledg- 
ments, in their confessions to the priests or magicians. 

"The Carriers give the following account of the tradition, 
which they believe respecting the formation of the earth, and the 
general destruction of mankind, in an early period of the world. 

"Water at first overspread the face of the world, which is a plain 
surface. At the top of the water, a muskrat was swimming about, 
in different directions. At length he concluded to dive to the 
bottom, to see what he could find, on which to subsist; but he 
found nothing but mud, a little of which he brought in his mouth, 
and placed it on the surface of the water, where it remained. He 
then went for more mud, and placed it with that already brought 
up; and thus he continued his operations, until he had formed a 

44 



346 



APPENDIX. 



considerable hillock. This land increased by degrees, until it 
overspread a large part of the world, which assumed at length its 
present form. The earth, in process of time, became peopled in 
every part, and remained in this condition for many years. After- 
wards a fire run over it all, and destroyed every human being, 
except "one man and one woman. They saved themselves by 
going into a deep cave, in a large mountain, where they remained 
for several days, until the fire was extinguished. They then came 
forth from their hiding-place; and from these two persons, the 
whole earth has been peopled. 

"These Indians erect buildings, in which they deposit the ashes 
and bones of their dead. 

"Among the Indians who inhabit New-Caledonia, are the Sicau- 
nies. They are a small part of a tribe, who, but a few years 
since, came from the east side of the Rocky Mountains. They 
now bring the produce of their hunts to McLeod's Lake. The 
winter months, however, a greater part of them pass among their 
relations, on the east side of the mountain, where they subsist on 
buffaloe, moose and red deer. 

"The people who are now called Sicaunies, I suspect, at no 
distant period, belonged to the tribe, called Beaver Indians, who 
inhabit the lower part of Peace river; for they differ but little 
from them in dialect, manners, customs, &c. The Sicaunies are 
a wretched people; for they suffer greatly for the want of food, 
during nearly one fourth part of the year, when they barely sup- 
port life, by means of a few unpalatable roots. 

"There is a tribe of Indians not far from the Columbia river, 
who are called Flat-Heads. By fixing boards upon the heads of 
their children, they compress them in such a manner, as to cause 
them to assume the form of a wedge. Another tribe in New-Cal- 
edonia, denominated Nate-ote-tains, pierce a hole through the un- 
der lips of their daughters, into which they insert a piece of wood, 
in the shape of the wheel of a pulley; and as the girls grow up, 
this wheel is enlarged, so that a woman of thirty years of age, will 
have one nearly as large as a dollar. This, they consider, adds 
niuch to their beauty." 



APPENDIX. 



347 



Indians east of the Rocky Mountains, and north of the Missouries. 

"I have been acquainted with fifteen different tribes of Indians, 
which are the Sauteux, Crees, Assiniboins, Rapid Indians, Black- 
Feet Indians, Blood Indians, Sursees, Cautonies, Muskagoes, 
Chippawas, Beaver Indians, Sicaunies, Ta-cullies, Ate-nas and 
Nate-ote-tains."* 

"The tribes that are the most enlightened, and that have ad- 
vanced the farthest towards a state of civilization, are the Sauteux 
or Chippawas, the Muskagoes, and the Crees, or Knisteneux, as 
they have sometimes been denominated. These tribes have a 
greater knowledge, than the other Indians, of the medicinal quali- 
ties of the bark of trees, and of herbs, roots, &c. and their medi- 
cal skill, enables them heavily to tax the other tribes. 

"The white people have been among the above mentioned 
tribes, for about one hundred and fifty years. To this circum- 
stance it is probably to be attributed, that the knowledge of these 
Indians is more extensive, than that of the other tribes. But I 
very much question whether they have improved in their charac- 
ter or condition, by their acquaintance with civilized people. In 
their savage state, they were contented with the mere necessaries 
of life, which they could procure, with considerable ease; but now 
they have many artificial wants, created by the luxuries which we 
have introduced among them; and as they find it difficult to obtain 
these luxuries, they have become, to a degree, discontented with 
their condition, and practice fraud in their dealings. A half-civil- 
ized Indian is more savage, than one in his original state. The 
latter has some sense of honor, while the former has none. I 
have always experienced the greatest hospitality and kindness 
among those Indians, who have had the least intercourse with 
white people. They readily discover and adopt our evil prac- 
tices; but they are not as quick to discern, and as ready to follow, 
the few good examples, which we set before them. 

"The Indians in general, are subject to few diseases. The 
venereal complaint is common to all the tribes of the north; many 
die of a consumption. For relief, in nearly all their diseases, they 
resort to their grand remedy, sweating. 

*The parts of the country, which they severally inhabit, are noticedin the tables 



348 



APPENDIX. 



"There is no material difference in the size, features and com- 
plexion of the different tribes, with whom I have been acquainted. 
The Sauteux, Crees and Assiniboins, together with the other In- 
dians who inhabit the prairies, are, however, the fairest, and most 
cleanly. The Assiniboins, of both sexes, are the best made, and 
walk the most erect of any tribe that I have ever seen. Fools 
and disfigured persons, are seldom to be met with among the In- 
dians; the reason of which, I believe to be, that their mothers 
put them to death as soon as they discover their unhappy condi- 
tion. 

Mode of Cooking. 

"Those Indians who have only bark kettles, generally roast 
their meat. This they do, by fixing one end of a stick, that is 
sharpened at both ends, into the ground, at a little distance from 
the fire, with its top, on which the meat is fixed, inclining towards 
the fire. On this stick, the meat is occasionally turned, when one 
part becomes suiSciently roasted. 

"On the Columbia river, there is a people who subsist, during 
the greater part of the summer, on nothing but roots, and a kind of 
bread, if it may be so called, made of the mossy stuff, which grows 
on the spruce fir tree, and which resembles the cobwebs, spun by 
spiders. This substance contains a little nourishment. They 
gather it from the trees, and lay it in a heap, on which they sprin- 
kle a little water, and then leave it, for some time, to ferment. 
After that, they roll it up into balls, as large as a man's head, and 
bake them in ovens, well heated, which are constructed in the 
earth. After having been baked about an hour, they are taken 
out for use. This substance is not very palatable; and it contains 
but little nourishment. It will, however, barely support life, for 
a considerable time. 

"The Sauteux, who remain about the Lake of the Woods, now 
begin to plant Indian corn and potatoes, which grow well. The 
Mandans, also, along the Missouri river, cultivate the soil, and 
produce Indian corn, beans, pumpkins, tobacco, &c. As they do 
not understand curing their tobacco, it is of little use to them* 
The Sauteux, who live back from Mackana, raise large quantities 
of Indian corn, beans, &c; and also make much sugar, from the 



APPENDIX. 



349 



maple tree, which they dispose of to the North-West Company, 
for cloth and other articles. As soon as the animals become 
scarce, that are hunted for their firs, the natives must till the 
ground for subsistence, or live upon fish. This state of things al- 
ready exists, in many places; and must, in all probability, be ex- 
tended. 

"The Indians, throughout the whole country that I have visit- 
ed, have no other animals domesticated, than the horse and the 
dog. AD Indians are very fond of their hunting dogs. The peo- 
ple on the west side of the Rocky Mountains, appear to have the 
same affection for them, that they have for their children; and 
they will discourse with them, as if they were rational beings. 
They will frequently call them their sons or daughters; and when 
describing an Indian, they will speak of him as father of a particu- 
lar dog which belongs to him. 

"The Assiniboins, Rapid Indians, Black-Feet and Mandans, to- 
gether with all the other Indians who inhabit a plain country, al- 
ways perform their journies on horse-back. Indeed they seldom 
go even a short distance from their tents in any other manner. 
They have some excellent horses, which will carry them a great 
distance in a day. They sometimes go seventy miles in twelve 
hours; but forty or fifty miles is a common day's ride. They do 
not often use bridles, but guide their horses with halters, made of 
ropes, which are manufactured from the hair of the buffaloe, which 
are very strong and durable. 

"Few of the Indians live in a state of celibacy. They general- 
ly marry when they are between eighteen and twenty-five years 
of age. Polygamy is allowed among all the tribes; but only a few 
persons among them, have more than one wife each. I knew, 
however, a chief among the Beaver Indians, who had eleven 
wives, and more than forty children. 

"It is not often that an Indian chastises his children; and, in- 
deed, it is not necessary: for they appear, in general, to have 
much affection and respect for their parents, and are therefore 
ready to obey them. A father never interferes in the bringing up 
of his daughter; but leaves her wholly to the care of her mother. 
When a son becomes of a suitable age, his father takes him with 
him in hunting, and learns him the different modes of taking ani- 
mals. A son, until he is married, considers himself as under his 



350 



APPENDIX. 



father's control; and even after that, he will generally listen to any 
advice, which his father may give to him. The aged are com- 
monly treated with much respect, which they consider themselves 
as entitled to claim. Should a young man behave disrespectfully 
towards an old man, the aged will refer him to his hoary head, and 
demand of him, if he be not ashamed to insult his grey heirs. In 
short, the aged of both sexes are generally treated with kindness; 
and are not suffered to want any thing which they need, and which 
it is in the power of their relations to procure for them. 

4 'All the Indians on the east side of the Rocky Mountains bury 
their dead. 

"The Indians generally appear to be more afflicted with the loss 
of an infant, helpless child, than of a person that has arrived to ma- 
ture age; for the latter, they say, can provide for himself, in the 
country whither he has gone, while the former is too young to de- 
pend upon himself. 

"The men appear to be ashamed to manifest their grief at the 
loss of any one, however dear he might have been to them; but 
the women give full vent to the feelings of nature. The fond 
mother, when she looses a young child, will pull out all the hair 
of her head; cut her face, arms, and legs, in a shocking manner; 
burn all her clothes, excepting a few rags, which she has upon 
her; and, to render herself as wretched, as she expresses it, as 
her child, when the weather is stormy, she will stand, for hours 
at a time, in the open air, and pitifully moan, in such language as 
this: "How wretched are you, my child, to be torn from your 
friends while so young and helpless; and to be sent alone, .into a 
strange country ! Who will now give you bread when you are 
hungry, and water when you are thirsty, and make a covering for 
you to lie under when it rains or snows ? O that I could once 
more press you, my dear child, to my troubled breast ! Of what 
use to me are all my medicines, since they could not save your 
life, and keep you a little longer with us ?" Then, in a rage of 
passion and of grief, she will rush into her tent, and seize her 
medicine-bag, and throw it into the fire. 

"All the Indian tribes are frequently at war with each other; 
and at some times, two tribes will league together, against one 
or more of the other tribes. 



APPENDIX. 



351 



Religion. 

"AH the different tribes of Indians, on the east side of the Rocky 
Mountains, believe in the existence of one Supreme Being — the 
creator and governor of the world, whom they call Kitch-e-mon- 
e-too, or the Great Spirit ; and to him they ascribe every perfec- 
tion. They consider him as the author of all good, and as too 
benevolent to inflict any evil upon his creatures. They render 
him little worship; but occasionally supplicate of him success in 
their important undertakings, and very rarely, render him some 
sacrifices, consisting of some part of their property. 

"They also believe in the existence of a Bad Spirit, whom they 
call Much-e-mon-e-too, to whom they ascribe great power, and 
who, they believe, is the author of all the evils, which afflict 
mankind. To him, therefore, in order to obtain deliverance 
from evils which they either experience or fear, they offer many, 
and sometimes expensive sacrifices. They consider him as ever 
employed, in plotting against their peace and safety; and they 
hope, by such means, to appease his anger. 

"They also believe that there are good and bad spirits, of an 
inferior order, who are superior to men in the scale of existence, 
and who have allotted spheres of action, in which they are con- 
tributing to the happiness or misery of mankind. These beings 
they suppose preside over all the extraordinary production of na- 
ture; such as large lakes, rivers and mountains, and spacious 
caverns, &c. and likewise over the beasts, birds, fishes, vegeta- 
bles and stones, that exceed the rest of their species in size, or in 
any other remarkable quality. On this account, they pay to all 
these objects some kind of adoration. 

They also believe in a future state of existence. Those who, 
while in the present world, have, according to their icjeas of right 
and wrong, led a good life, will, at death, immediately enter on 
another and a better state of existence, where they will meet their 
departed relatives and friends, who will welcome them in the 
most affectionate manner, to their happy abode. In the future 
world, they believe that they shall possess bodies more beautiful, 
and healthy, and vigorous, than those which they animated on 
earth; and that they shall be much more happy, than they were 



352 



APPENDIX. 



in the present life, since the country in which they will reside, 
abounds with all kinds of game, which they will be able to take, 
with little or no trouble, and supplies every gratification, in which 
they now delight, in perfection, and without end. 

"But those who lead wicked lives on earth, they suppose will, 
at death, be-conveyed into the middle of an extensive swamp or 
marsh, where they will, for a considerable length of time, be 
doomed to wander about alone, in search of their deceased 
friends, After having suffered greatly, from hunger and cold, they 
suppose that they will, at length, arrive at the pleasant habitation 
of their departed relatives, and participate with them in all their 
delights, forever. 

"Among the Indians there are poets, who are also musicians. 
The person who composes a song, does it by singing it over alone, 
in the air which he designs shall accompany it; and he repeats 
this exercise till he has it in his memory. After that he frequently 
teaches it to others. Songs are frequently composed for particu- 
lar occasions, such as feasts, &c. Among the Carriers, there are 
often several competitors for this honor; and he who composes 
the best song, is rewarded, while the unsuccessful poets are treat- 
ed with derision. The subjects of their songs are generally love 
and war, though they have some which are ludicrous and obscene. 
They have a great variety of songs; and I have known an Indian 
who could sing at least two hundred, and each song had its pecul- 
iar air. Female poets are not common among them. Some of 
the women, however, are excellent singers. 

No two of the fifteen tribes of Indians with whom I have been 
acquainted, speak precisely the same language; but the languages 
of nine of them only, seem to be radically different. There is on- 
ly a variation of dialect among the Crees, Sauteux and Muskagoes. 
The same is true of the Chipewyans, Beaver Indians, Sicaunies, 
Tacullies and Nateotetains. The language spoken by the Sau- 
teux, Crees and Muskagoes, is by far the most copious and manly; 
but that used by the Assiniboins, is the most harmonious and ele- 
gant." 

"Every tribe has its particular tract of country; and this is di- 
vided again, among the several families which compose the tribe. 
Rivers, lakes and mountains, serve them as boundaries; and the 
limits of the territory which belongs to each family are as well 



APPENDIX. 



353 



known by the tribe, as the lines which separate farms are, by the 
farmers in the civilized world. The Indians who reside in the 
large plains, make no sub-divisions of their territory; for the 
wealth of their country consists of buffaloes and wolves, which ex- 
ist in plenty every where among them. But the case is other- 
wise with the inhabitants of the woody countries. 

General Remarks. 

"That part of the country which lies betwen the 44th and the 
o2d degree of north latitude, is a plain or prairie country, almost 
wholly destitute of timber of any kind. It is in general sufficient- 
ly dry for any kind of cultivation, and is covered with grass, which 
commonly grows to the height of from six inches to a foot, though 
in some marshy places it is much higher. This grass furnishes 
food for innumerable herds of buffaloes, which are constantly rov- 
ing about from place to place, followed by thousands of wolves, 
and many grey and black bears, that are always on the watch for 
favorable opportunities to fall upon and devour them. The grey 
bear, on account of his strength and ferocity, may well be denom- 
inated the monarch of the forest; and should he at any time find 
an hundred wolves or more, feeding on the carcase of the buffaloe, 
the sight of him would cause them all to retire, with all the humil- 
ity and submission of conscious weakness, and he would be per- 
mitted to make his meal, at his leisure, and in quietness. 

"The country lying between the 52d and the 70th degree of 
north latitude, may be denominated mountainous. Between its 
elevated parts, however, there are vallies and plains, of consider- 
able extent, and which are covered with timber of a small growth, 
more than one fourth part of which is the spruce fir. The other 
kinds of timber are aspin, poplar, birch, hemlock, spruce, cedar, 
willow, and a little pine. Much of this country, in its less elevated 
parts, is covered with large rocks and stones, with so thin a coat 
of earth upon them, that it could not be cultivated. I am of opin- 
ion, however, that one fourth, if not one third part of the whole of 
this great extent of country, might be cultivated to advantage. 
The soil, in general, is tolerably good; and in many places is not 
exceeded in richness, by any part of North-America. I think it 
45 



354 



APPENDIX. 



probable, that as much as one sixth part of the whole of this coun 
try, is covered with water. The great number of large lakes 
which are scattered over it, and of noble streams which pass 
through it, afford a water communication in almost every direc- 
tion. 

"As this country is so extensive, it is natural to suppose that 
the climate is various. In all parts it is considerably cold. In 
latitude 54° or 55° the mercury, for several successive days in the 
month of January, is as low as 30 or 32 degrees below zero. 
There are not, however, more than ten or twelve days during a 
winter, that are so severely cold. The summers are sufficiently 
warm and long, to bring most kinds of grain and vegetables to per- 
fection. Indian corn will never ripen farther north than about 
latitude 53°. 

"In the summer of 1816 there was found, on the margin of a 
small stream that falls into Peace river, in about the 56th degree 
of north latitude, and in the 1 18th of west longitude, a part of the 
thigh bone of a mammoth, which was about eighteen inches in 
length, and which weighed twenty-eight pounds." 

The reader of the foregoing extracts will require of me no apol- 
ogy for presenting him with a body of facts so interesting, relating 
to a part of North-America, hitherto but very imperfectly known. 
To Mr. Harmon I would tender my thanks for his valuable work; 
and as the foregoing extracts comprise but a small part of his vol- 
ume, it may reasonably be expected, that what is here given will 
excite a desire to see the whole. 

Blowing Snake, of Lake Erie. 

The existence of a snake of this kind has been doubted. Col. 
Peter P. Ferry, Collector of the District of Sandusky, told me, 
that on the 1st July 1815, when in his garden picking some leaves 
for a medical purpose, he heard, near him, a singular noise, like 
the 1 hissing of a gander. Looking around to ascertain whence it 
came, he espied, within six inches of his head, a monstrous black 
snake, with a remarkably flat head, four inches broad, a little ele- 
vated, with a wide mouth, in the act of violent blowing, making the 



APPENDIX. 



355 



noise which was heard. The next day Col. F. began to feel the 
effects of the breath of this serpent, first in his eyes, which in- 
creased till the 4th day, when he became totally blind. The eyes 
were very painfully inflamed, emitting a hot fluid running down 
the cheeks, making a black streak and taking off the skin. These 
effects continued more than a fortnight. 

Col. F. saw but about twenty inches of the body of this snake. 
He judged it was four or five inches in circumference. The head 
was in a state of expansion, while in the act of blowing. When in 
a quiet state it contracts to a size somewhat less than the body. 
The bite of this snake is not poisonous; its breath does the injury. 
This snake was found on an island in Sandusky bay; and snakes of 
the same kind are found, as Col. F. stated to me, not in great num- 
bers, in the western country. 

Tuscaroras. 

Two years ago, Longbeard, a celebrated Pagan Chief of this 
tribe, led away seventy of their number into Canada. He, with 
his family, and two other families, have voluntarily returned with 
feelings and dispositions friendly to the Missionaries, and ready to 
receive their instructions. 

Sentiments of a Choctaw Chief on the subject of Civilization. 

"In January 1821, Tush-eami-ubbee^n old and venerable Choc- 
taw Chief brought his son of sixteen, to enter the school at Eliot. 
He said his people could not lead that wandering kind of life, 
which they had heretofore led ; and therefore it was necessary 
for the children to obtain an education, and to acquire habits of in- 
dustry to fit them for civilized life." — Journal of Missionaries, 

Fort Smith.- — Appendix, p. 254, 255. 

In April 1822, two hundred and thirty soldiers were in this 
Fort, which was established to protect frontier settlers, and Edu- 



356 



APPENDIX. 



cation Families, and to preserve peace among the Indians. There 
is no settlement of white people above this fort, except the trading 
houses, seventy miles above, at the confluence of the Neozho or 
Grand river, and the Arkansaw. The situation is commanding, and 
healthy. An excellent farm of eighty acres, easily defended, and 
cultivated by the soldiers belonging to the Fort, yields a great vari- 
ety and abundance of vegetables, and one thousand bushels of corn, 
the last year, more than was consumed at the Fort. At the time 
above mentioned theyhad one hundred head of neat cattle, and 
four hundred hogs. Several Indian tribes are in this neighborhood. 
It is an advantageous site for an Education Family. 



Indian Languages. 

To treat this copious subject, as it ought to be treated, would 
swell this Volume, already much larger than was expected, to an 
an inadmissible size. The materials we have collected, with 
some others necessarily omitted, may hereafter fill a sepa- 
rate tract. It may be sufficient for all the immediate purposes 
of the Government, simply to refer to the able and useful 
treatises on this subject, of Messrs. Duponceau, Colden, Heck- 
ewelder, Pickering and Jarvis, and to the Collections of the 
Massachusetts and New-York Historical, and the American An- 
tiquarian, Societies. The authors and compilers of these pub- 
lications have nearly exhausted this subject. I have some new 
materials, perhaps, to add to the mass they have collected, which 
will in some proper way be put into a state for preservation and 
future use. I shall, therefore, dismiss this topic, alter a few gen- 
eral remarks. 

It is matter of surprise that the Indians, situated as they have 
been for so many successive ages and generations, without books, 
or knowledge of letters, or of the art of reading or writing, should 
have preserved their various languages in the manner they have 
done. Many of them are copious, capable of regular grammatical 
analysis, possess great strength, gracefulness and beauty pf expres- 
sion. They are highly metaphorical in their character, and in 
this and other respects, resemble the Hebrew. This resem- 
blance in language, and the similarity of many of their religious 



APPENDIX. 



357 



ceremonies, customs, &c. to those of the Jews, certainly give 
plausibility to the ingenious Theory of Dr. Boudinot, exhibited 
in his interesting work, entitled " The Star in the West." Before 
this theory will be generally admitted, however, more evidence 
than has been exhibited, or probably can be, will be required. 
The labor which this excellent and useful man has bestowed on 
this work, will not be lost to the world. At a future period the 
facts he has collected, will be turned to some good account. 

A faithful and thorough examination of the various languages of 
our Indian tribes, would probably shew, that there are very few 
of them that are, throughout, radically different. A great part of 
them are so mixed, as that the different tribes, with more or less 
difficulty, can understand each other in conversation. With a 
knowledge of a very few of the radical languages, and of the In- 
dian language of signs, one might, without great difficulty, travel 
through all the tribes in our country. The differences in these 
languages, are mostly differences of mere dialect. This is a fact 
favorable to the accomplishment of the object of the Government, 
as it shews the ease with which extensive intercourse among 
these tribes can be maintained, and information circulated. But 
after a few generations, it is hoped, the English language will take 
the place of them all. 

I should not think it desirable to employ means to preserve any 
of these Indian languages among the living languages. Correct 
specimens of them, doubtless, should be preserved in the archives 
of our literary societies. As fast as possible let Indians forget 
their own languages, in which nothing is written, and nothing of 
course can be preserved, and learn ours, which will at once open 
to them the whole field of every kind of useful knowledge. I am, 
therefore, opposed to the idea of making any very laborious or 
expensive translations of the Bible, or of any other books, into 
any of the Indian languages, for reasons which I have already giv- 
en in a charge delivered to the missionaries first sent to the Sand- 
wich Islands, and to others destined to our Indians, and which I 
take the liberty here to introduce as containing my present senti- 
ments on this subject. 

" Some of you are to be Missionaries to Indian tribes in our 
own country. These heathen are in different circumstances from 
the foreign heathen, have another character, and your duties of 



358 



APPENDIX. 



course will be different. Our Indians live a wandering life, which 
generates habits peculiarly unfavorable to the spirit and institu- 
tions of the gospel. The heathenism of our American Indians is 
less informed, and neither so gross, nor so wicked, as that of the 
Indians of the East. The Asiatics can themselves read the scrip- 
tures, when translated into their own written languages ; and you 
have but to learn their languages, in order to qualify you to 
preach to them the unsearchable riches of Christ. But the In- 
dians of America have no written language, and in their unwritten 
language, no words to express a great part of the most important 
truths of the Bible. This must necessarily be the case, as the 
Bible is a revelation of new truths, previously unknown to man- 
kind, the knowledge of which can be derived from no other source 
than the Bible itself. To express these truths, new words must 
be invented ; and hence a translation of the scriptures into the 
Indian languages, would be a Herculean labor ; and after it were 
finished, it could not be read by those who speak the language, 
till they were taught, as our children are taught, to read it. But 
there is another objection more formidable still. The number of 
dialects spoken among the different tribes of American Indians is 
immense. It probably amounts to several hundred. The indi- 
viduals, therefore, composing these continually diminishing tribes, 
w 7 ho could be benefited by any single translation, would be few ; 
and if translations were attempted in all the different dialects, the 
difficulties which have been mentioned, would be multiplied an 
hundred fold. From these considerations, it is evident, that the 
advantages of translations into the Indian languages would be small , 
and the labor wholly disproportionate to their value. 

" By how few has Eliot's Bible ever been read ! It is indeed a 
monument of the patient industry and piety of this apostle of the 
Indians ; but there has not probably for a century, been an indi- 
vidual, among the Indians, that could read it. No, my brethren, 
you are not to be employed in translating the scriptures, nor, to 
any great extent, in the ungrateful labor of learning the barbarous 
and barren languages of the Indian tribes. You are to be engaged 
in the more pleasant employment of teaching them (their children 
especially) your own language ; and in that language you are to 
acquaint them with the arts and improvements of civilized life, 
and to instruct them in the religion of the gospel, Let the Indians 



APPENDIX. 



359 



of our country be taught to read and speak the English language, 
and it will effect more towards civilizing and christianizing them, 
than all human means besides. To this object then you must di- 
rect your primary efforts. At the same time you are not to neg- 
lect other means of communicating useful knowledge; and by eve- 
ry method in your power, both by precept and example, you 
are to impress their minds with the supreme excellence of Chris- 
tianity."* 

The correctness of the preceding remarks may be tested by 
the following — 

Translatian of the 19th Psalm into the Muh-he-con-nuk language, 
done at the Cornwall School, under the superintendance of Rev. 
John Sergeant, Missionary. 



1. Neen woh-we-koi-wau-con-nun 
wih-tom-mon-nau-woh neh week-chau- 
nauq-tho-wau-con Poh-tom-now-waus ; 
don neh pau-muh-hom-mau-we-noi-eke 
wpon-nooth-ne-kaun wnih-tau-nuh- 
kau-wau-con. 

2. Woh-kom-maun aup-to-naun, don 
tpooh-quon wau-wiht-no-waun nooh- 
tom-mau-wau-con. 

3. Stoh nit-hoh aup-to-nau-wau-con 
een-huh un-neekh-tho-wau-con neh 
au-ton-nih stoh ptow-wau-mooq. 

4. Wtoh-pih-haun-woh pkoch-chih 
au-so-khaun mau-weh pau-paum'h 
hkey-eke, don neen wtaup-to-nau-wau- 
con-no-waun pau-chih wihq'h hkey- 
eke. Whuk-kau-wauk wtuh-tow-waun 
we-ke-neet neen ke-soo-khun, 

5. Nuk nun au-now ne-mon-nawu 
tauq-peet wauk wpih-tow-we-kau- 
neek, don au-nom-me-naut au-now uh- 
wau-pau-weet nee-mon-nawu au-naut- 
wau-cheh. 

6. Nik woh-wok nun wih-que-khuk 
woh-we-koi-wau-con-nuk, don neh 
wtin-ih wew-no-kbaun psih-kauch aun- 
quih-quok : don-stoh nit-huh kau-qui 
kau-cheekh-no-wih nih stop au-pauth 
mooq. 



1. The heavens declare 
the glory of God ; and the 
firmament sheweth his han- 
dy work. 



2. Day unto day utter- 
eth speech, and night unto 
night sheweth knowledge. 

3. There is no speech 
nor language, where their 
voice is not heard. 

4. Their line is gone 
out through all the earth, 
and their words to the end 
of the world. In them 
hath he set a tabernacle 
for the sun, 

5. Which is as a bride- 
groom coming out of his 
chamber, and rejoiceth as 



6. His going forth is from 
the end of the heaven, and 
his circuit unto the ends of 
it : and there is nothing hid 
from the heat thereof. 



* Rev. Mr. Beecher's Sermon at the Ordination of Rev. Sereno E. D wight , 
Boston, Sept. 3, 1817, p. 63, 64. 



360 



APPENDIX 



7. Neh wton-kom-meek-tho-wau- 
con Tau-paun-mo-waut kse-khau-yow, 
wquihg-nup-puhg-tho-haun-quoa nuh 
wchuch-chuh-queen : neh wtaup-to- 
nau-wau-con weet-nuth-theek nu h Tau- 
paun-mo-waut wau-we-che-khun, wih- 
wau-wau-tom-no-haun-quon nuh stoh 
kau-qui wau-wih-tauq. 

8. Neen wtun-kom-meek-tho-wau- 
con-nun Tau-paun-mo-waut-wneekh- 
nuh, wtih-hon-nom-mih-hooq-nuh nuh 
wtuh-heen : neh whok-koh-keet-wau 
con Tau-paun-mo-waut kse-khau-yow, 
wih-wau-po-haun-quon-nuh neen 
wkees-que-nuh. 

9. Qkhaun Tau-paun-mo-waut pe- 
nau-yow, neen O-neem-wau-wau-con- 
nun Tau-paun-mo-waut wnau-mau- 
wau-con-no-won wauk conut-tuh toht- 
que-wih. 

10. Un-no-wewu uh-hau-youn- 
quohk neen don khow-wot, quau, don 
mkheh wowh-nihk khow-wot ; un-no- 
wew sook-te-pook-tuh don aum-wau- 
weh soo-kut queh-now-wih neh wse- 
khi. 

11. Wonk-nuh-hun, neen wewh- 
chih kton»nuh-kau-con eh-hom-maum- 
quoth-theen ; don koh-khon-now-wau- 
tau-thow neen htawu mau-khauk hpon- 
noon-to-wau-con. 

12. Ow-waun aum wke-sih nooh- 
tom-mon-nuh wpon-non-nuh-kau-wau- 
con-nun ? kse-khih-eh key-oh neh 
wchih nke-mih mbon-nun-nuh-kau- 
wau-con-nih-koke. 

13. Kaun-nuh kton-nuh-kau-con 
wonk neh wchih maum-cheen-wih-nau- 
kih mchoi-wau-con-nih-koke ; cheen 
un-naun-tom-hun neen wauch aum un- 
nowh-kau-quoh : nun kauch ney-oh 
no-noi, wauk chih n'nkus-see-khoi neh 
wchih mau-khauk mchoi-wau-con-nuk. 

14. Un-naun-tohneen ndaup-to-nau- 
wau-con-nun don neh oi-nih pnow- 
waun-tok nduh, wauch aum wow-we- 
kih-nau-yon, O Tau-paun-me-yon, 
duh-wau-paw-con wonk Pohp-quaukh- 
kon-neet. 



7. The law of the Lord 
is perfect, coVerting the 
the soul : the testimony of 
the Lord is sure, making 
wise the simple. 



8. The statut.es of the 
Lord are right, rejoicing 
the heart : the command- 
ment of the Lord is pure, 
enlightening the eyes. 



9. The fear of the Lord 
is clean, enduring forever : 
the judgments of the Lord 
are true, and righteous all 
together. 

10. More to be desired 
are they than gold, yea, 
than much fine gold ; sweet- 
er also than honey, and the 
honey-comb. 

11. Moreover, by them 
is thy servant warned ; and 
in keeping of them there is 
great reward. 

12. Who can understand 
his errors ? cleanse thou 
me from secret faults. 



13. Keep back thy ser- 
vant also from presumptu- 
ous sins; let them not have 
dominion over me : Then 
shall I be upright, and I 
shall be innocent from the 
great transgression. 

14. Let the words of my 
mouth, and the meditation 
of my heart, be acceptable 
in thy sight, O Lord, my 
strength, and my Redeem- 
er. 



STATISTICAL TABLES. 



No. I. — A statistical table of all the Indian Tribes within the limits of the 
United States, including a few bordering on our north and south boundaries, 
related to, or intermingling with them; exhibiting their names, the number of 
souls in each tribe, the places of their residence, with references to the map, 
and to the pages of this work, pointing to the places of residence of each tribe, 
on the one, and to the pages in the other, where they are described. 

INDIAN TRIBES EAST OF THE MISSISSIPPI. 



Names of the 
Tribes. 



P. in rep. 
and app. 

where 
each tri. 
is desc'd. 



Places of Residence and Remarks. 



Oh Ph 

(0 pi, 



g 


r 1 


St. Johns Indians 


300 




64 


\ 


2 


Passama- ) 
quoddies $ 


379 




65 




3 


Penobscots 


277 




65 


<n 


4 


Marshpee 


320 




68 


a 


< 5 


Herring Pond 


40 




do. 


si. Mass 


6 


*MarthVs ) 
Vineyard ) 
Troy 


340 

50 




do. 
do. 


'. R.I 


r 


Narragansett 


420 




73 


s 


9 


*Mohegan 


300 




74 


1 


10 


Stonington 


50 




75 


3 


.11 


Groton 


_50 




do. 


Total in New-England 


2,526 








Montauk Indians 


300 




75 


13 


tBrotherton 


400 


24 


76 


14 


tStockbridge 


438 




77,85 


15 


tOneidas 


1,031 




86 


16 


Tuscaroras 


314 




77 


17 


Onondagas 


229 




323 


18 


SenecasandOnon- ) 
dagas $ 


597 




77,84 
87, 93 


19 


do. and Delawares 


389 




do. 


20 


do. 


do. 


340 




77,84 


21 


do. Cayugas, & 0- ) 
nondagoes \ 
Senecasandafew > 
of other tribes ( 


700 

456 




77,84 
do. 


Total in New- York 


5,184 







fOn St. John's River, Meductic 
Point, sixty miles above Fred- 
ericktown in N. Brunswick. 
Supposed to be a mixture of 
the Esquimaux, with other In- 
dians and white people princi- 
pally French. 
Pleasant Point, on Scodic r. town 
of Perry, 5 m. N. of East Port. 
Indian Old town, Penobscot riv- 
er, 12 m. above Bangor. 
At Marshpee, 78 m. S. E. Boston, 
Barnstable Co. 
At Sandwich, 14 m. from Marshpee. 
' Island on the S. coast of Mass. S. 

E. of Boston. 
In Troy50m. S. Boston, Bristol Co. 
( In Charlestown 40 m. S. W. of 
f Providence. 

(In Montville, N. London, Co. 
< between N. London and Nor- 
( wich, on Thames river. 
i In Stonington, S. E. corner of 
I Connecticut. 
In Groton, adjoining Stonington. 

( At Montauk Point E. end of 
I Long-Island, N. Y. 
Near Oneida Lake. 

At New-Stockbridge, 7 m. S. of 
Oneida castle. 
At Oneida castle near Oneida Lake. 
At Lewiston near Lake Ontario. 
( In Onondaga Hollow, near Onon- 
( daga Lake. 

^ On the Alleghany river, border- 
I ing on Pennsylvania. 
At Cattaraugus, in the county of 

this name, do. 
At Tonnewanta, between Bata- 
via and Buffaloe. 

At Buffalo 3 m.E. of Lake Erie. 

On 5 small Reservations on Gen- 
esee river and at Oil Creek. 



* The numbers in these tribes are conjectural; no particular account of 
them having been received. 

t These tribes live within the antient limits of the Oneida Territory, 

46 



362 



TABLE No. I. CONTINUED. 



Names of the 
tribes. 



5^; 
fl o 



Places of Residence and Remarks 



33 



34 



Munsees, Dela- 
wares,Sopoonee 



£1 


M yandots 


22 


do. 


22 


do. 


22 


do. 


23 


Shawnees 


23 


do. 


23 


do. 


24 


Senecas 


24 

as 


do. 
Delawares 


26 


Mohawks 


27 


Ottowas 


27 


do. 


27 


do. 


28 


do. 



Total in Ohio 
Wyandots 

Pottawattamies 
Chippawas 

Ottawas 
tChippawas 



Chippawas and 
Ottawas 



Menominees 



IWinnebagoes 



364 
44 
.' 37 

97 
559 

72 
169 

348 

203 
80 

57 

10 
64 

56 

150 



2,40' 



Vail in Mich . and N .W . Te r. 



166 

5,669 

*2,873 
8,335 

1,600 

3,900 
5,800 



28,380 



91—94 
do. 
do. 

do. 

92 
do 
do 

93 

do 
90 



93 
do 
do 

do. 



16 

19 

23 

26—46 
50 

47— 58 

48— 59 



30 years ago, there were of these 
tribes, in this State, about 1300 
souls. Of the number now re- 
maining, of their condition, and 
of the places of their abode, no 
information has been received. 

C Upper Sandusky, on Sandusky r. 

( 44 S. of Sandusky Bay. 

( Zanes, Mad r. on the head wa- 

( ters of the Great Miami of Ohio . 

( Fort Finley, waters of the Au- 

( glaise, on Hull's road. 

( Solomon's town, on the Great 

( Miami of Ohio. 

Wapaghkonetta, 27 m. N. of Pequa. 

( Hog Creek, 10 m. N. of Wa- 

( paghkonetta 
Lewiston, 35 m. N. E. of Piqua. 

( Seneca town, Sandusky r. bet. 

I Upper and Lower Sandusky. 

Lewiston, 35 m. N. E. Piqua. 
Upper Sandusky, Sandusky r. 

( Honey Creek, near Upper San- 

) dusky, Sandusky r. 

\ Auglaize r. 45 m. N. Wapagh- 

\ konetta 

12 m. W. Fort Defiance. 

< Rock de Beauef, near the rapids of 
) Miami of Lake Erie. 

Not Stationary, about Miami 
Bay, on S. shore L. Erie. 

On Huron r. 30 m. from Detroit, 
Mich. T. 
On Huron r. Mich. T. 
On Saganau Bay, river and vicinity. 
' Along the E. shore of Lake Mich- 
igan, on therv's. in 11 villages. 
i From Mackinaw, W. along the 

< shore of L. Superior to the 
( Mississippi 19 settlements. 

C In villages scattered from the S. 
1 side of L. Superior along the 
) W. side of Green Bay, and 
' Michigan Lake, to Chicago. 
( In a number of villages, on Win- 

< ebago Lake, Fox river, Green 
( Bay and Menominee river. 

( In the River country, on Winne- 

< bago L. and S. W. of it to the 
{ Mississippi. 



* A part of this number are a mixture of Ottawas; Chippawas and Winebagoes. 

tCol. Dickson, long a resident^among the'Chippawas, states their number resid- 
ing about the Great Lake, at 10,000. Others make the whole number of the 
tribe, 30,000. 

IMajor O'Fallon states the number of Winnebagoes at about 4,000. 



TABLE No. I. CONTINUED. 



363 



Names of the 
tribes 



Places of Residence and Remarks. 



35 



36 



Q } 
< 



Delawares, Mun- 
sees, Moheakun- 
nuks and Nanti- 
cokes 



Pottawattamies 



Chippawas 
Menominees 



Peorias, Kaskas- 
kias andCahokias 



37 Kickapoos 



Miamies, Weas & 
Eel river Indians 



Sauks of the Mis 
sissippi 



Foxes 



I o ways 



Kickapoos 



Total in Indiana and Mint 



1,700 



3,400 

500 
270 



36 



4,00 

1,400 

4,500 
2,000 

1,000 
1,800 



17,006 



29 



•29 



108 



119 to 
140 



119& 
109 



120 to 
140 

120 to 
140 



204 



"On White river Indiana, in 5 vil- 
lages, in a compass of 36 miles. 
This was their state in 1816. 
Since, their lands have all been 
sold, and these Indians are 
scattered, none can tell where. 
Scattered in villages in the vi- 
cinity ofChicago,inthe north- 
ern part of Indiana, on the S. 
shore of Michigan Lake, and 
S. near the centre of Indiana. 
Scattered in several villages a- 
mong the Pottawattamies. 
On Illinois river, 
f Once inhabited a large part of 
Illinois and Indiana. In the we r 
kindled against these tribes by 
the Sauks andFoxes,in revenge 
for the death of their chief, Pon- 
tiac, these 3 tribes were near- 
ly exterminated. Few of them 
now remain. About one hun- 
dred of the Peorias are settled 
on Current river, W. of the 
Mississippi. Of the Kaskaskias 
s_ 36 only remain in Illinois. 
About the centreof Illinois. They 
I have sold- all their lands and 
) are about to remove over the 
. Mississippi. 

' At Mississippi, about the centre 
I of Indiana from N. to S. The 
I Weas, and Eel riv. Indians, are 
. different bands of the Miamies 
' On both sides of the Mississippi 
\ from Illinois r. to the Ouiscorf- 
I sin. Their hunting grounds. 
. N. of Mandan. 
Mingled with the Sauks in the 

same Territory. 
"These Indians are mingled with 
the tribes last mentioned. 
Their principal villages are on 
the Ioway and La Moines riv- 
ers, the greater part W. of the 
Mississippi. 
"About this number of the tribe 
are on the territories they 
have lately sold, or settling 
themselves on ther new lands 
East of tee Great Osages. 



364 



TABLE No. I. CONTINUED. 



Names of 
the tribe. 



53 
< 

a 

o 



Place of Residence and Remarks. 



Nottaways 
Pamunkiesfc 
Mattaonies 
Catawbas 
jSeminoles 
other rem 
nantsof tribe 
in Florida 



27 31 
20 31 
45032 



5,000 33 
5497 



147 



In Southampton co. S. E. part 
of Virginia; W. side of Not- 
tawoy river. 

On Catawba river in S. and N. 
Carolina. 

The places where these Indian? 
dwell, are stated in Capt. 
Bell's letter, quoted in Ap- 
pendix p. 303. 



Micasukeys 

Fowl Towns 
Oka-tiokinans 
Uchees 

Ehawho-ka-les 

Ocheeses 
Tamatles 

Attapulgas 



Telmocresses 

Cheskitalowas 

Wekivas 

Emussas 

Ufallahs 

Red grounds 

Eto-husse-wakkes 

Tatto-whe-hallys 

Tallehassas 

Owassissas 

Chehaws 



Talle-whe-anas 
Oakmulges 



1,400 

300 
580 
130 

150 

220 
220 

220 



100 

580 

250 
20 
670 
100 
100 
130 
15 
100 

670 

210 
220 



[The following is the account given of these Indians, by Capt. Young, ta- 
ken from his M.S. Journal. — Not reckoned in the footing.'] 

30 miles N. N. E.from Fort St. Mark, on 
a pond 14 miles long, 2 or 3 wide — land 
fertile, and of abeautifiul aspect. 
12 miles E. Fort Scott— land tolerable. 
Near Fort Gaines. 
Near the Mikasukey. 

On Apalachicola, 12 miles below Ochefese 
bluff. 

At the bluff of their name. 
7 miles above the Ocheeses. 

On Little river, a branch Okalokina, 15 
miles above the Mikasukey path, from 
Fort Gadsden — fine body of lands. 
W. side of Chatahoochee, 15 miles above 

the fork — good land. 
On the W. side of Chattahoochee, two 
miles above the line. 
4 miles above the Cheskitalowas. 
2 miles above the Wekivas. 
12 miles above Fort Gaines. 

2 miles above the line. 

3 miles above Fort Gaines. 
Scattered among other towns — dishonest. 
On the road from Okalokina to Micasukey . 
On the eastern waters of St. Mark's river. 

On the Flint river, in the fork of Makulley 
creek. 

E. side of Flint river, not far from Che- 
haws. 

E. of Flint river, near the Tallewheanas. 



43 


Creeks 


20,000 


44 


Cherokees 


11,000 


45 


Choctaws 


25,000 


46 


Chicasaws 


3,625 


Brought down, 


59,625 
5,497 



Total Southern Indians East 
of the Mississippi 



32 



32 



33 



65.122 



146 

152 to 
182 

182 to 
200 
200 



Western part of Georgia, and 

eastern part of Alabama. 
N. W. corner of Georgia, N. E. 

corner of Alibama, and S. E. 

corner of Tennessee. 
Western part of Mississippi, and 

E. part of Alibama. 
In the north part uf Mississippi. 



*Note. — The Palaches, Eamuses, and Ka- 
loosas, were the antient possessors of Flori- 
da, all extinct. 



TABLE No. I. CONTINUED. 



365 



Ph 


Si'oifcr q/" Dacorla, 


CO 

IS 




Ph 
Ph 




torn 


or Mississippi and 
St. Peter' 1 s riv- 


ofso 


o 


<H 

O 


Places of residence and remarks. 




ers.* 


6 




Ref 





1 Leaf Tribe 

2 Red Wing's band 

3 Little Raven's band 

4 Pineshow's band 

6 Band of the Six 

7 Others 

8 Leaf bands 

9 Other villages 

10 Great village of 
Yonktons, branch 
of the Sioux 

Sioux of the Missouri 

11 Tetons of the 
burnt woods 

12 Teton Okandan- 
da or Chayenne 
Indians 

13 Tetons Minake- 



14 Tetons Saone 

15 Yonktons of the 
Plains, or Big 
Devils 

Sistasoone 

Kristineux, cal-' 
led for the sake 
v ofbrevity,Crees 
Assiniboins 
Algonquins 
Mandans 

( Rapid Indians, 

( App. 349 
Blood Indians 
Sursees 
Coutouns 
Paunch Indians 
Gros Ventres of the 

Prairie 
Total in this section 



600 

100 
500 
150 
300 
250 
1,000 
1,200 

1,000 



1,500 

2,250 

1,500 
2,500 

750 
15,000 



2,500 
2,000 



33,150 



251 



On the Mississippi, above Prairie 
du Chien. 
On Lake Pepin. 
15 miles below St. Peter's. 
15 miles up the St. Peter's. 
30 miles up the St. Peter's. 
At Little Rapids and St. Peter's. 

White Rock. 



On both sides of the Mississippi, 
above St. Anthony's Falls. 

This band of the Sioux rove on 
both sides of the Missouri, White 
and Teton rivers. 

On both sides of the Missouri, 
above and below Chayenne 
river. 



On both sides of the Missouri, be- 
low the Warrenconne river. 

Rove on the heads of the Sioux , 
Jaques and Red rivers. 

On the headwaters of St. Peter's 
river. 

r These tribes, says Mr. Harmon, 
(who resided among them six yrs, 
from 1800 to 1806,) dwell in a 
plain or prairie country, between 
the Mississippi, Missouri, Red 
and Se-se-satch-wine rivers, ex- 
tending W. to the Rocky Moun- 
tains, spreading from lat. 44° to 
51° N. The climate is similar to 
that of Lower Canada. General- 
ly, throughout this tract of coun- 
try, the soil is good; it has very lit- 
tle timber. Some of the prairies 
are 100 miles in length, on which 
not even a shrub is to be seen. 



*The Sioux inhabiting the Mississippi and St. Peter's are less than 5,000 
souls.— Major O' Fallon. 



366 



TABLE No. I.— CONTINUED, 



Name of the tribes. 



Place of Residence and Remarks. 



16 


Shawaneese 


1,383 




235 


17 


Delawares 


1,800 




236 


18 
19 
20 
21 

ii 

22 


Peorias 

Piankashaws 

Kanzas 

Do. oftheAr- V 
kansaw ) 
Little Osages 


97 
207 
1,850* 

4,200t 

1,000 




203 
203 
204 




Grand Pawnees 


o,uuu 




-CO 4 


24 


Pawnee Repub- > 
licans $ 


1,500 




238 


25 


Pawnee Loups 


2,750 




do. 


26 


Ottoes, Missou- > 
ries & Ioways ) 


1,800 




251, 
204, 


27 


O'Mahas 


3,000 




Do. 


28 


Pancas 


1,250 




Do. 


29 


Arrapahays 


10,000 




253 


30 


Kaninavisch 
Do. 


2,000 
5,000 




Do. 


32 


Staitans, or Kite ) 
Indians \ 

Wettaphato, or ) 
Kiawa Indians ) 


500 
1,000 




Do. 
Do. 


32 
32 
32 


Castahana 

Cataka 

Dotami 


1,500 

375 
200 






33 


Chayennes, or > 
Chiens ) 
Do Do. 


3,260 
200 




256 
254 


34 


Kaskayas,orBad ) 
Hearts ] 


3,000 




253 




51,972 







{ Cape Girardean, and Merrimae 

I River, near St. Louis. 

I On Current river, E. of the bend 

) of White river, 
On Current river. 
On St. Francis river. 
On Kanzas river. 

{ On Osage river. 
( On Neozho, or Grand river. 
On Grand or Neozho river, oi 
the Arkansaw. 
On the Wolf Fork of Platte river. 

Four miles above the Grand 

Pawnees. 
Three miles above the Pawnee 

Republicans. 
On Platte river, 40 miles from 

its mouth. 
On Elkhorn river, 80 m. W. N. 
W. of Council Bluffs. 
At the mouth of Quickoane river, 
f Their Territory extends from 
) the head waters of the Kanzas 
/ r. N. to the Rio del Norte. 
West of the Pawnees, on the 
head waters of the Yellow 
Stone river. 
$ On the heads of Yellow Stone 
I river. 

{ Between the heads of Platte riv- 
( er and Rocky Mountains. 

Rove above the last mentioned. 

Supposed to be remnants of the 
Great Padouca nation, now 
under that name, extinct, 
who occupied the country 
between the upper parts of 
the Platte and Kanzas river. 

On Chayenne river, above Great 
Bend. 

Head of the above river. 

( In the neighbourhood of the 
< above tribes bordering on the 
( Ptocky Mountains. 



* This is Major O'Fallon's estimate, 
f Mr. Sibley's estimate is 1,600 souls. 



TABLE No. I. CONTINUED. 



367 



Names of the tribes 



Place of Residence and Remarks. 



x» 
> 
Q 



35 



36 



37 



38 



43 



46 



Ricaras, or Arri- 
caras 

Mandans 
Minetaries 

Roving Bands. 



Wate-panatoes, 
and Ryawas 
Padoucas 

Pastanownas 

Ayutans, or Ca- 

marsches 
Bine Mud and 

Long Haired 

Indians 

"Cherokees 



47 Quapaws 



Total between' 
Missouri and 
Arkansaw riv- 
ers, & between 
the Mississip- 
pi and Rocky 
Mountains 



3,500 
1,250 
3,250 

20,000 

900 
1,000 
1,500 

8,000 
3,000 
6,000 
700 



49,100 
51,972 

101,072 



252 
Do. 
Do 



Do 

349 



247 



255 
236 



On the Missouri, half way be- 
tween Great Bend and Man- 
dan. 

On the Missouri near Mandan 
Fort. 

Half way between Mandan and 
Yellow Stone river on Little 
Missouri. 
"On the Missouri, near and on 
theE. side of the Rocky Moun- 
tains, including bands of the 
Black feet, Assiniboins, Crows 
&c. within the present boun- 
daries of Missouri Territory . 
On the Padoucas Fork. 

On the Padoucas river. 
Between the Padoucas Fork and 

the Platte. 
S. W. of the Missouri river, 

near the Rocky Mountains. 

Between the heads of the Mis- 
souri and of the Columbia. 

On N. side of Arkansaw river* 
400 miles from its mouth. 

On the S. side of the Arkansaw 
opposite the Post and Little 
Rock. 



368 



TABLE No. I. CONTINUED. 



Names of the tribes 



Whole 
No. of 
souls. 



Places of Residence. 



ijchinnook Indians 

2 Clatsop 

3 Chiheeleesh 

Callimix 

Cathlamat 

Waakieums 
Helhvits (part of ) 
the tribe) $ 



Cowlitsick (in 3 
villages) 



Cathlakamaps 



Cathlapootle 

Cathlanamena- 
mens. 



Mathlanobs (er- 
roneously call- 
ed Multnomahs 



Cathlapooyas 
Cathlathlas 

Shoshones 



Cathlakahikits 
Cathlathlas 



Chippanchick- 
chicks 



Cathlaskos 
Ithkyemamits 



1,700 

1,300 
1,400 

1,200 

600 
400 
1,200 



2,400 

700 

1,100 
400 

5 00 

1,800 
500 

20,000 



900 
900 



600 

900 
600 



12 m. from the mouth of Colum- 
bia river, N. side, 
do. do. do. S. do. 
40 do. N. of Columbia river. 
( 40 do. S. of do. along the coast 
I of the Pacific Ocean. 
{ 30 do. from the mouth of Colum- 
( bia river. 
Opposite the Cathlamats. 
( 39 m. from the mouth of Colum- 
bia river, S. side. 
On Columbia river 62 m. from 
its mouth; they dwell in 3 
villages on a N. crsek of it, 
called the Cowlitsick, 200 
yards wide, rapid, boatable 
190 miles. 
80 m. from the mouth of Colum- 
bia river, at the mouth of the 
W allaumut, (called incor- 
rectly, Multnomah) S. branch 
of Columbia river. 
Opposite the Cathlakamaps, on 

Columbia river. 
On the island in the mouth of 
the Wallaumut, once very 
powerful under the famous 
chief Toteleham. 
'At the upper end of the island 
above named, in the mouth of 
the Wallaumut. The main 
channel of the Wallaumut is 
i_ here 500 yards wide, 
j 50 m. from the mouth of the 
I Wallaumut W. side. 
60 m. from the mouth of the 

Wallaumut, on the E. side. 
All above No. 14 on the Wal- 
laumut are of this name. 
They inhabit the banks of this 
fine crooked river, boatable 
above five hundred miles. 
At the rapids of Columbia river, 
the former on the N. the lat- 
ter on the S. side, 160 miles 
from its mouth. 
N. side of Columbia river in 
the long narrows, a little be- 
low the falls, 220 miles from 
its mouth. 
On Columbia river opposite the 
above. 

On Columbia river N. side near 
the above. 



TABLE No. I. CONTINUED. 



369 



Names of the tribes, 



Whole Iff 
No. of o 
souls. £ 

Ip5 



Places of Residence. 



Hellwits (part of 

the tribe,) 
Wollawalla 



23 



Shoshonees 



24 



25 



26 



27 



28 



29 



30 



31 



32 



1,200 



60,000 



Ootlashoot 



Chopunnish 



Pelloatpallah, 
band of Cho- 
punnish 



Kimmooenim, do. 



Yeletpoo, do. 



Willewah 



do. 



Soyennom, do. 



Chopunnish 



SokuTk 



400 



2,000 



1,600 



800 



250 



500 



400 



2 l 300 



2,400 



At the falls of Columbia river. 

They occupy all the country 
between the southern branch- 
es of Lewis's river, extending 
from the Umatullum, to the 
E. side of the Stony Moun- 
tains, on the southern parts 
of Wallaumut river, from 
about 40-° to 47° N. Lat. A 
branch of this tribe of 4 or 
5,000 reside, in the spring and 
summer, on the W. fork of 
Lewis river, a branch of the 
Columbia, and in winter and 
fall, on the Missouri. 
Reside in spring and summer 
in the Rocky Mountains on 
Clarke's river, winter and fall 
on the Missouri and its waters. 
Residing on the Kooskooskee 
river, below the forks, and 
on Cotter's creek, and who 
sometimes pass over to the 
_ Missouri. 

"Reside on the Kooskooskee riv- 
er above the forks, and on the 
small streams which fall into 
that river, W. of the Rocky 
Mountains and Chopunnish 
river, and sometimes pass 
L over to the Missouri. 
Reside on Lewis river, above 
the entrance of the Kooskoos- 
kee, as high up as the forks. 
Preside under the S. W. moun- 
tains, on a small river called 
Weancum, which falls into 
Lewis river above the en- 
trance of the Kooskooskee. 
Reside on the Willewah river 
which falls into Lewis river 
on the S. W. side, below the 
forks. 

f On the N. side of the E. fork of 
Lewis's river from its june- 
| tion to the Rocky Mountains 
^ and on Smattar Creek. 
( On Lewis' river, below the en- 
l trance of the Kooskooskee, on 
) both sides of that river, to it* 
\ junction with the Columbia. 
( On the Columbia river above 
) the entrance of Lewis's river, 
) as high up as the entrance of 
f Columbia river. 



TABLE No. I. CONTINUED. 



Names of the tribes. 





ft 


P. 






ft 


fso 


as 
o 


o 


o 












6 


0) 






p2 





Places of Residence and Remarks 



34 



35 



36 



37 



38 



39 



40 



41 



42 



43 



44 



45 



Chimnahpum 



Wollaolla 



Pisquitpahs 



Wahowpum 



Eneshure 



Eskeloot 



Chilluckittequaw 



Smockshop 



Shahala (Nation) 

Tribes Yehah 

— , Clahclellah 

Wahclellah 



-Neerchokioon 



Wappatoo (Nation) 
Nechacoke 

Shoto 



1,860 



1,600 



2,600 



700 



1,200 



1,000 



1,400 



800 



2,800 



1,000 



100 



460 



Nemalquinner 200 



"On the N. W. side of Col. river, 
both above and below the en- 
trance of Lewis's r. and on the 
Taptul r. which falls into the 
Col. river, 15 miles above 
Lewis's river. 
On both sides of Col. r. as low as 
the Muscleshell rapid, and in 
winter pass over to the Tap- 
tul river. 
''On the Muscleshell rapid, and 
on the N. side of the Colum- 
bia, to the commencement of 
the high country; this nation 
winter on the waters of the 
Taptul river. 
r On the N. branch of the Colum- 
bia, in different bands from the 
Pishquitpahs ; as low as the 
river Lapage; the different 
bands of this nation winter on 
the waters of Taptul and Cat- 
aract rivers. 
( At the upper part of the Great 
< narrows of the Columbia, on 
( both sides. Are stationary. 
C At the upper part of the Great 
1 narrows of the Columbia, on 
1 the N. side, is the great mart 
( for all the country, 
f Next below the narrows, and ex- 
j tending down on the N. side ol 
1 the Columbia, to the river 

Labiche. 
( On the Columbia, on both sides 
1 of the entrance of the Labiche 
j to the neighborhood of the 
f great rapids of that river. 
At the grand rapids of the Co-* 
lumbia, extending down in 
different villages as low as the 
Wallaumut river. 
Above the rapids. 
Below the rapids. 
Below all the rapids. 

100 lodges on the S. side, a few 
miles below, above the Wal- 
laumut river. 

On the S. side of the Columbia,, 
near Quicksand river, and op- 
posite the Diamond Island. 

On the W. side of the Columbia, 
back of a pond, and nearly op- 
posite the entrance of the 
Wallaumut river. 

On the N. E. side of tbe Wal- 
laumut river, 3 miles above 
its mouth. 



TABLE No. 



I. CONTINUED. 



Names of the tribe. 



Places of Residence and Remarks. 



'~46jCathianaquiahs 

47:Clockstar 

48|Clanimatas 

49jCathlacumups 

50 Clannarminnamuns 



51 



52 



Skilloot 



Killamucks 


1,000 


Lucktons 




20 


Kahuncles 




400 


Lukawis 




800 


Rapid Indians, or 






Paw-is-tuc-I-e- 




500 


ne-muck 






Sicaunies 


1,000 



400 

1,200 

200 
450 
280 

2,500 



Carriers 



Facullies 
Atenas 



Na-te-o-te-tains f 


2,000 


Flatheads ) 


1,000 


Youicone 


700 


Neekeetoos 


700 


Ulseahs 


150 


Youitts 


150 


Sheastukles 


900 


Killawats 


500 


Cookkoo-oose 


1,500 


Shallalah 


1,200 


Luckkarso 


1,200 


Hannakallal 


600 


Killaxthocles 


100 


Chiltz 


700 


Clamoctomichs 


260 


Potoashs 


200 


Pailsh 


200 


Quiniilts 


1,000 


Quieetsos 


250 


Chillates 


150 


Calasthocle 


200 


Quinnechart 


2.000 



100 



On the S. W. side of Wappatoo Isl. 
(On a small river, which dis- 
charges itself on the S. E. side 
of the Wappatoo Island. 
On the S.W. side of Wappatoo Isl. 
On the main shore S . W . of Wap- 
patoo Island. 
On the S. W. side of Wappatoo Isl. 
r On the Col. on each side in dif- 
ferent v illages, from the lower 
part of the Col. valley, as low 
as Sturgeon isl. and on both 
sides of the Coweliskee river. 
From the Clatsops of the coast 
along the S. E. coast for ma- 
ny miles. 

Places of abode not known. 



3 „ 9 ^ A small brave tribe, on the large 
Prairies, on the Missouri. 

334 to ( On the R. Mountains near the 

346 } Rapid Indians, &W.ofthem. 

( A general name given to the na- 
( tive tribes of New-Caledonia. 
"In one village on Stuart's Lake, 
on the W. side of the Rocky 
Mountains lat. 54° 30' N. Lon. 
334 1 125° W. opposite the heads of 
the Missouri. They have oth- 
er villages. The Atenas In- 
dians are in this neighborhood. 
337 to fin New Caledonia, W. of Rocky 

347 < Mountains, on the northern 
346 ( border of the U. States. 



These tribes dwell along the 
coast S. of Columbia river, 
and speak the Killamucks 
language. 



Indians dwelling along the coast 
in succession, in the order they 
are mentioned, N. of Colum- 
bia river. 



362 



TABLE No. I.— continued. 







D9 


o <t> 












o 


Names of the 
tribes. 


of so 


s-l 

• .3 8 

0) <M O 


Places of Residence and Remarks 


<*5 




6 

















r2i 
22 
22 



Munsees, Dela- 
wares, Soooonees 



Wyandots 
do. 
do. 



do. 
Shawnees 
do. 
do. 

24 Senecas 

24 



31 



32 



33 



ZA 



do. 
Delawares 

Mohawks 

Ottowas 
do. 
do. 

do. 

Total in Ohio 
Wyandots 

Pottawattamies 
Chippawas 

Ottawas 
tChippawas 

Chippawas and ) 
Ottawas ) 

Menominees 

:jW r innebagoes 



364 
44 
J 37 

97 
559 

72 
169 

348 

203 
80 

57 

107 
64 

56 

150 



2,40' 



37 

166 

5,669 

*2,873 



335 



Total inMich. andN.W.Ter, 



1,600 

3,900 
5,800 



28,380 



91—94 
do. 
do. 

do. 

92 
do 
do. 

9: 

do 
90 

93 
do. 
do. 

do. 

16 

19 

23 

26—46 
50 

47— 58 

48— 59 



30 years ago, there were of these 
tribes, in this State, about 1300 
souls. Of the number now re- 
maining, of their condition, and 
of the places of their abode, no 
information has been received. 
C Upper Sandusky, on Sandusky r. 
I 44 S. of Sandusky Bay. 

Zanes, Mad r. on the head wa- 
ters of the Great Miami of Ohio. 

Fort Finley, waters of the Au- 
glaise, on Hull's road. 

< Solomon's town, on the Great 
\ Miami of Ohio. 
Wapaghkonetta, 27 m. N. of Pequa. 

< Hog Creek, 10 m. N. of Wa- 
\ paghkonetta 

Lewiston, 35 m. N. E. of Piqua. 
Seneca town, Sandusky r. bet. 
Upper and Lower Sandusky. 
Lewiston, 35 m. N. E. Piqua. 
Upper Sandusky, Sandusky r. 
( Honey Creek, near Upper San- 
/ dusky, Sandusky r. 
( Auglaize r. 45 m. N. Wapagh- 
( konetta 

12 m. W. Fort Defiance. 

Rock de Beauef, near the rapids of 

Miami of Lake Erie. 
Not Stationary, about Miami 
Bay, on S. shore L. Erie. 



5 On Huron r. 30 m. from Detroit, 
I Mich. T. 
On Huron r. Mich. T. 
On Saganau Bay, river and vicinity. 
( Along the E. shore of Lake Mich- 
( igan, on the rv's. in 11 villages. 
I From Mackinaw, W, along the 
< shore of L. Superior to the 
' Mississippi 19 settlements. 
In villages scattered from the S. 
side of L. Superior along the 
W. side of Green Bay, and 
Michigan Lake, to Chicago. 
In a number of villages, on Win- 
ebago Lake, Fox river, Green 
Bay and Menominee river. 
In the River country, on Winne- 
bago L. and S. W. of it to the 
Mississippi. 



* A part of this number are a mixture of Ottawas; ChippawasandWinebagoes. 

tC'ol. Dickson, long a residen^amongthe'Chippawas, states their number resid- 
ing about the Great Lake, at 10,000. Others make the whole number of the 
tribe, 30,000. 

IMajor OTallon states the number of Winnebagoes at about 4.000. 



TABLE No. I.— CONTINUED. 











ft 




Lef.toM: 


Names of the 
tribes 


io. ofsov 


Lef.toRi 


Lef.toA] 


Places of Residence and Remarks, 


az 






EC 







< 
Q 



35 



36 



Delawares, Mun- 
sees, Moheakun- 
nuks and Nanti- 



Pottawattamies 



Chippawas 
Menominees 



Peorias, Kaskas- 
kias andCahokias 



Kickapoos 



Miamies, Weas & 
Eel river Indians 



Sauks of the Mis- 
sissippi 

Foxes 



I o ways 



Kickapoos 



1,700 



3,400 

500 
270 



36 



Total in Indiana and Illinois, 17,006 



29 



29 



4,00 

1,400 

4,500 
2,000 

1,000 



1,800 29 



108 



119 to 
140 



119 & 
109 



120 to 
140 

120 to 
140 



204 



On White river Indiana, in 5 vil- 
lages, in a compass of 36 miles. 
This was their state in 1816. 
Since, their lands have all been 
sold, and these Indians are 
scattered, none can tell where. 
Scattered in villages in the vi- 
cinity of Chicago, in the north- 
ern part of Indiana, on the S. 
shore of Michigan Lake, and 
S. near the centre of Indiana. 
Scattered in several villages a- 
mong the Pottawattamies. 
On Illinois river, 
f Once inhabited a large part of 
Illinois and Indiana. In the war 
kindled against these tribes by 
the Sauks andFoxes,in revenge 
for the death of their chief, Pon- 
tiac, these 3 tribes were near- 
ly exterminated. Few of them 
now remain. About one hun- 
dred of the Peorias are settled 
on Current river, W. of the. 
Mississippi. Of the Kaskaskias 
36 only remain in Illinois. 
r About the centreof Illinois. They 
) have sold" all their lands and 
) are about to remove over the 
. Mississippi. 

' At Mississippi, about the centre 
I of Indiana from N. to S. The 
| Weas, and Eel riv. Indians, are 
. different bands of the Miamie* 
' On both sides of the Mississippi 
\ from Illinois r. to the Ouiscon- 
| sin. Their hunting grounds. 
. N. of Mandan. 
j Mingled with the Sauks in the 
i same Territory, 
'"These Indians are mingled with 
the tribes last mentioned. 
Their principal villages are on 
the Ioway and La Moines riv- 
ers, the greater part W r . of the 
Mississippi. 
About this number of the tribe 
are on the territories they 
have lately sold, or settling 
} themselves on ther new lands 
|^ East of tee Great Osages. 



364 



TABLE No. I. CONTINUED. 



Names of 
the tribe. 



Place of Residence and Remark?. 



'go 

•<>a 



Nbttaways 
Pamunkies & 
Mattaonies, 
Catawbas 
Seminole-s k. 
other rem- 
nantsof tribes 
in Florida 



450 32 

5,000|33 
174971 



141 



In Southampton co. S. E. part 
of Virginia; W. side ofNot- 
tawoy river. 
On Catawba river in S. and N. 
Carolina. 

' The places where these Indians 

) dwell, are stated in Capt. 

| Bell's letter, quoted in Ap- 
pendix p. 303. 



Micasukeys 


1,400 


Fowl Towns 
Oka-tiokinans 
Uchees 


300 
580 
130 


Ehawho-ka-les 


150 


Ocheeses 
Tamatles 


220 
220 


Attapulgas 


220 


Telmocresses 


100 


Cheskitalowas 


580 


Wekivas 

Emussas 

Ufallahs 

Red grounds 

Eto-husse-wakkes 

Tatto-whe-hallys 

Tallehassas 

Owassissas 


250 
20 
670 
100 
100 
130 
15 
100 


Chehaws 


670 


Talle-whe-anas 


210 


Oakmulges 


220 







[The following is the account given of these Indians, by Capt. Young, ta- 
ken from his M.S. Journal. — Not reckoned in the footing.] 

30 miles N. N. E. from Fort St. Mark, on 
a pond 14 miles long, 2 or 3 wide — land 
fertile, and of abeautifiul aspect. 
12 miles E. Fort Scott— land tolerable. 
Near Fort Gaines. 
Near the Mikasukey. 

On Apalachicola, 12 miles below Ocheese 
bluff. 

At the bluff of their name, 
miles above the Ocheeses. 
On Little river, a branch Okalokina, 15 
miles above the Mikasukey path, from 
Fort Gadsden — fine body of lands. 
W. side of Chatahoochee, 15 miles above 

the fork — good land. 
On the W. side of Chattahoochee, two 
miles above the line. 
4 miles above the Cheskitalowas. 
2 miles above the Wekivas. 
12 miles above Fort Gaines. 

2 miles above the line. 

3 miles above Fort Gaines. 
Scattered among other towns — dishonest. 
On the road from Okalokina to Micasukey. 
On the eastern waters of St. Mark's river. 
J On the Flint river, in the fork of Makulley 
\ creek. 

E. side of Flint river, not far from Che- 
haws. 

of Flint river, near the Tallewheanas. 

( Western part of Georgia, and 
I eastern part of Alabama. 
' N. W. corner of Georgia, N. E. 
corner of Alibama, and S. E 
corner of Tennessee. 
Western part of Mississippi, and 
E. part of Alibama. 
In the north part v{ Mississippi. 



43 


Creeks 


44 


Cherokees 


45 


Choctaws 


,46 


Chicasaws 



Brought down, 

Total Southern Indians East 
of the Mississippi 




*Note. — The Palaches, Eamuses, and 
loosas, were the antient possessors of Flori- 
65.122! da, all extinct. 



TABLE No. I. — CONTINUED. 



365 



Sioux of the Dacorta, 
or Mississippi and 
St. Peter's riv~ 

fire * 



Places of residence and remarks. 



1 Leaf Tribe 

2 Red Wing's band 

3 Little Raven's band 

4 Pineshow's band 
6 Band of the Six 

Others 
Leaf bands 

9 Other villages 

10 Great village of ) 
Yonktons, branch > 
of the Sioux ) 

Sioux of the Missouri 

11 Tetons of the 
burnt woods 

12 Teton Okandan-" 
da or Chayenne 
Indians 

13 Tetons Minake- 
nozz 

14 Tetons Saone 

15 Yonktons of the 
Plains, or Big 
Devils 

Sistasoone 

( Kristineux, cal- 
< led for the sake 
( ofbrevity,Crees 
Assiniboins 
Algonquins 
Mandans 

{ Rapid Indians, 

\ App. 349 
Blood Indians 
Sursees 
Coutouns 
Paunch Indians 
Gros Ventres of the 

Prairie 
Total in this section 



600 

100 
500 
150 
300 
250 
1,000 
1,200 

1,000 



1,500 

2,250 

1,500 
2,500 

750 



15,000 



2,500 
2,000 



33,150 



251 



On the Mississippi, above Prairie 
du Chien. 
On Lake Pepin. 
15 miles below St. Peter's. 
15 miles up the St. Peter's. 
30 miles up the St. Peter's. 
At Little Rapids and St. Peter's. 

White Rock. 

On both sides of the Mississippi, 
above St. Anthony's Falls. 

This band of the Sioux rove on 
both sides of the Missouri, White 
and Teton rivers. 

On both sides of the Missouri, 
above and below Chayenne 
river. 

On both sides of the Missouri, be- 
low the Warrenconne river. 

Rove on the heads of the Sioux , 
Jaques and Red rivers. 

On the head waters of St. Peter's 
river. 

r These tribes, says Mr. Harmon, 
(who resided among them six yrs, 
from 1800 to 1806,) dwell in a 
plain or prairie country, between 
the Mississippi, Missouri, Red 
and Se-se-satch-wine rivers, ex- 
tending W. to the Rocky Moun- 
tains, spreading from lat. 44° to 
51° N. The climate is similar to 
that of Lower Canada. General- 
ly, throughout this tract of coun- 
try, the soil is good; it has very lit- 
tle timber. Some of the prairies 
are 100 miles in length, on which 
not even a shrub is to be seen. 



*The Sioux inhabiting the Mississippi 
souls. — Major O' Fallon. 



and St. Peter's are less than 5,000 



366 



TABLE No. I.— co\TiMEi>, 



Name of the tribes. 



Place of Residence and Remarks 



33 



34 



Shawaneese 

Delawares 

Peorias 
Piankashaws 
Kanzas 
Great Osages, 

Do. of the Ar- 

kansaw 
Little Osages 

Grand Pawnees 

Pawnee Repub- 
licans 

Pawnee Loups 

Ottoes, Missou- ) 
ries k Ioways ) 

O'Mahas 

Pancas 

Arrapahays 



Kaninavisch 



Do. 

Staitans, or Kite 

Indians 
Wettaphato, or 

Kiawa Indians 



Castahana 

Cataka 

Dotami 

Chayennes, or ) 
Chiens £ 
Do Do. 

Kaskayas,orBad 
Hearts 



1,383 

1,800 

97 
207 
1,850* 

4,200t 

1,000 
6,000 

1,500 

2,750 

1,800 

3,000 
1,250 

10,000 

2,000 
5,000 
500 
1,000 



1,500 

375 
200 



3,260 
200 

3.000 



51,972 



235 
236 

203 

203 

204 
237 

238 

do 

251 
204, 

Do. 

Do. 

253 
Do. 



Do. 
Do. 



254 



253 



{ Cape Girardean, and Mernmac 

I River, near St. Louis. 

I On Current river, E. of the bend 

) of White river, 
On Current river. 
On St. Francis river. 
On Kanzas river. 

On Osage river. 
On Neozho, or Grand river. 
On Grand or Neozho river, oi 
the Arkansaw. 
On the Wolf Fork of Platte river. 

{ Four miles above the Grand 
> Pawnees. 

\ Three miles above the Pawnee 
( Republicans. 
On Platte river, 40 miles from 

its mouth. 
On Elkhorn river, 80 m. W. K. 
W. of Council Bluffs. 
At the mouth of Quickoane river. 
Their Territory extends from 
the head waters of the Kanzas 
r. N. to the Rio del Norte. 
West of the Pawnees, on the 
head waters of the Yellow 
Stone river. 
$ On the heads of Yellow Stone 
( river. 

{ Between the heads of Platte riv- 
( er and Rocky Mountains. 

Rove above the last mentioned. 

Supposed to be remnants of the 
Great Padouca nation, row 
under that name, extinct, 
who occupied the country 
between the upper parts o: 
the Platte and Kanzas river. 

On Chayenne river, above Great 
Bend. 

Head of the above river. 

In the neighbourhood of the 
above tribes bordering on the 
R.ockv Mountains. 



* This is Major OTallon's estimate, 
f Mr. Sibley's estimate is 1,500 souls. 



TABLE No. I. CONTINUED. 



367 



Names of the tribes 



Place of Residence and Remarks. 



LA 
Q 

55 ^ 



35 



36 



37 



47 



Ricaras, or Arri- 
caras 

Mandans 
Minetaries 



Roving Bands 



Wate-panatoes, 
and Ryawas 
Padoucas 

Pastanownas 

Ayutans, or Ca- 

marsches 
Blue Mud and 

Long Haired 

Indians 



46 Cherokees 



Quapaws 

Total between' 
Missouri and 
Arkansaw riv- 
ers, & between 
the Mississip- 
pi and Rocky 
Mountains 



3,500 
1,250 
3,250 

20,000 

900 
1,000 
1,500 

8,000 
3,000 
6,000 
700 



49,100 
51,972 

101,072 



252 
Do. 
Do 



Do. 

349 



247 



255 
236 



On the Missouri, half way be- 
tween Great Bend and Man- 
dan. 

On the Missouri near Mandan 
Fort. 

Half way between Mandan and 
Yellow Stone river on Little 
Missouri. 
'"On the Missouri, near and on 
the E. side of the Rocky Moun- 
tains, including bands of the 
Black feet, Assiniboins, Crows 
&c. within the present boun- 
daries of Missouri Territory. 
On the Padoucas Fork. 

On the Padoucas river. 
Between the Padoucas Fork and 

the Platte. 
S. W. of the Missouri river, 

near the Rocky Mountains. 

Between the heads of the Mis- 
souri and of the Columbia. 

On N. side of Arkansaw river, 
400 miles from its mouth. 

On the S. side of the Arkansaw 
opposite the Post and Little 
Rock, 



368 



TABLE No. I. CONTINUED. 



Names of the tribes. 



Whole 
No. of 
souls. 



Places of Residence. 



18 



19 



Chinnook Indians 

Clatsop 
Chiheeleesh 

Callimix 

Cathlamat 

Waakicums 
Hellwits (part of ) 
the tribe) $ 



Cowlitsick (in 3 
villages) 



Cathlakamaps 



Cathlapootle 

Cathlanamena- 
mens. 

Mathlanobs (er- 
roneously call- 
ed Multnomahs 

Cathlapooyas 
Cathlathlas 



Shoshones 



Cathlakahikits 
Cathlathlas 



Chippanchick- 
chicks 



Cathlaskos 



20 Ithkyemamits 



1,700 

1,300 
1,400 

1,200 



600 
400 
1,200 



2,400 

700 

1,100 
400 

5 00 

1,800 
500 

20,000 



900 
900 



600 

900 
600 



12 m. from the mouth of Colum- 
bia river, N. side. 
2 do. do. do. S. do. 
40 do. N. of Columbia river. 
40 do. S. of do. along the coast 

of the Pacific Ocean. 
30 do. from the mouth of Colum- 
bia river. 
Opposite the Cathlamats. 
( 39 m. from the mouth of Colum- 
bia river, S. side. 
On Columbia river 62 m. from 
its mouth; they dwell in 3 
villages on a N. creek of it, 
called the Cowlitsick, 200 
yards wide, rapid, boatable 
190 miles. 
^80 m. from the mouth of Colum- 
bia river, at the mouth of the 
W allaumut, (called incor- 
rectly, Multnomah) S. branch 
of Columbia river. 
( Opposite the Cathlakamaps, on 
( Columbia river. 
? On the island in the mouth of 
) the Wallaumut, once very 
) powerful under the famous 
V chief Toteleham. 
At the upper end of the island 
above named, in the mouth of 
the Wallaumut. The main 
channel of the Wallaumut is 
here 500 yards wide. 
50 m. from the mouth of the 

W T allaumut W. side. 
60 m. from the mouth of the 

Wallaumut, on the E. side. 
r All above No. 14 on the Wal- 
laumut are of this name. 
They inhabit the banks of this 
fine crooked river, boatable 
above five hundred miles. 
At the rapids of Columbia river, 
the former on the N. the lat- 
^ ter on the S. side, 160 miles 
' from its mouth, 
f N. side of Columbia river in 
J the long narrows, a little be- 
\ low the falls, 220 miles from 

its mouth. 
X On Columbia river opposite the 
( above. 

i On Columbia river N. side near 
I the above. 



TABLE No. I. CONTINUED. 



369 



Names of the tribes, 




Places of Residence. 



23 



24 



25 



26 



27 



28 



29 



30 



31 



32 



Hellwits (part of 

the tribe,) 
Wollawalla 



1,200 



Shoshonees 



60,000 



Ootlashoot 



Chopunnish 



itpallah, ) 
of Cho- V 
tish ) 



Pelloatpallah, 
band ( 
punnish 



Kimmooenim, do. 
Yeletpoo, do. 

Willewah do. 
Soyennom, do. 
Chopunnish 
Sokulk 



400 



2,000 



1,600 



800 



250 



500 



400 



2'300 



2,400 



At the falls of Columbia river. 

'"They occupy all the country 
between the southern branch- 
es of Lewis's river, extending 
from the Umatullum, to the 
E. side of the Stony Moun- 
tains, on the southern parts 
of Wallaumut river, from 
about 40° to 47° N. Lat. A 
branch of this tribe of 4 or 
5,000 reside, in the spring and 
summer, on the W. fork of 
Lewis river, a branch of the 
Columbia, and in winter and 
fall, on the Missouri. 
Reside in spring and summer 
in the Rocky Mountains on 
Clarke's river, winter and fall 
on the Missouri and its waters. 
Residing on the Kooskooskee 
river, below the forks, and 
on Cotter's creek, and who 
sometimes pass over to the 
_ Missouri. 

Reside on the Kooskooskee riv- 
er above the forks, and on the 
small streams which fall into 
that river, W. of the Rocky 
Mountains and Chopunnish 
river, and sometimes pass 
over to the Missouri. 

! Reside on Lewis river, above 
the entrance of the Kooskoos- 
kee, as high up as the forks. 
Tieside under the S. W. moun- 
tains, on a small river called 
Weancum, which falls into 
Lewis river above the en- 
trance of the Kooskooskee. 
'Reside on the Willewah river 
which falls into Lewis river 
on the S. W. side, below the 
forks. 

On the N. side of the E. fork of 
Lewis's river from its june- 
*) tion to the Rocky Mountains 
^ and on Smattar Creek. 
{ On Lewis' river, below the en- 
) trance of the Kooskooskee, on 
) both sides of that river, to its 
(. junction with the Columbia. 
£ On the Columbia river above 
l the entrance of Lewis's river, 
S as high up as the entrance of 
' Columbia river. 



3J0 



TABLE No. I.— -coiNti.nl ld« 









toRep.| 


toApp. 




o 


Names of the tribes. 


O 
<— 

o 


Places of Residence and Remarks. 


V 








Ref. 






o 


c 
~- 





Chininahpum 



Wollaolla 



Pisquitpahs 



Wahowpum 



Eneshure 



Eskeloot 



Chilluckittequaw 



Smockshop 



43 



44 



45 



Shahala (Nation) 

Tribes Yehah 

-Clahclellah 
-Wahclellah 



-Neerchokioon 



Wappatoo (Nation) 
Nechacoke 

Shoto 

Nemalquinner 



1,860 



1,600 



2,600 



TOO 



1,200 



1,000 



1,400 



800 



•2,800 



1,000 



100 



460 



200 



On the N. W. side of Col. river, 
both above and below the en- 
trance of Lewis's r. and on the 
Taptul r. which falls into the 
Col. river, 15 miles above 
Lewis's river. 
On both sides of Col. r. as low as 
the Muscleshell rapid, and in 
winter pass over to the Tap- 
tul river. 
r On the Muscleshell rapid, and 
on the N. side of the Colum- 
bia, to the commencement of 
the high country; this nation 
winter on the waters of the 
Taptul river. 
"On the N. branch of the Colum- 
bia, in dhTerent bands from the 
Pishquitpahs ; as low as the 
river Lapage; the different 
bands of this nation winter on 
the waters of Taptul and Cat- 
aract rivers. 
At the upper part of the Great 
narrows of the Columbia, on 
both sides. Are stationary, 
f At the upper part of the Great 
' narrows of the Columbia, on 
) the N. side, is the great mart 
[ for all the country, 
f Next below the narrows, and ex- 
j tending down on the N. side oi 
| the Columbia, to the river 

Labiche. 
' On the Columbia, on both sides 
) of the entrance of the Labiche 
i to the neighborhood of the 
great rapids of that river. 
At the grand rapids of the Co^ 
lumbia, extending down in 
different villages as low as the 
Wallaumut river. 
Above the rapids. 
Below the rapids. 
Below all the rapids. 

100 lodges on the S. side, a few 
miles below, above the "Wal- 
laumut river. 

On the S. side of the Columbia,, 
near Quicksand river, and op- 
posite the Diamond Island. 

On the W. side of the Columbia, 
back of a pond, and nearly op- 
posite the entrance of the 
Wallaumut river. 

On the N. E. side of tbe Wal- 
laumut river, 3 miles above 
its mouth. 



TABLE No. I. CONTINUED. 



S r ti 



Names of the tribe. 



Places of K.esidence and Remarks 



'"46jCathianaquiahs 

47Clockstar 

48|Clanimatas 

49 , C athlacum up s 

50 Clannarminnamuns 



51 Skilloot 



52 



Killamucks 


1,000 


Lucktons J 


20 


Kahuncles v 


400 


Lukawis j 


800 


Rapid Indians, or ) 




Paw-is-tuc-I-e- > 


500 


ne-muck ) 




Sicaunies 


1,000 



Carriers 



Facullies 
Atenas 



400 

1,200 

200 
450 
280 

2,500 



100 



Na-te-o-te-tains r 


2,000 


Flatheads ) 


1,000 


Youicone 


700 


Neekeetoos 


700 


Ulseahs 


150 


Youitts 


150 


Sheastukles 


900 


Killawats 


500 


Cookkoo-oose 


1,500 


Shallalah 


1,200 


Luckkarso 


1,200 


Hannakallal 


600 


Killaxthocles 


100 


Chiltz 


700 


Clamoctomichs 


260 


Potoashs 


200 


Pailsh 


200 


Quiniilt3 


1,000 


Quieetsos 


250 


Chillates 


150 


Calasthocle 


200 


Quinnechart J 


2.000 



On the S. W. side of Wappatoo Isl. 
On a small river, which dis- 
charges itself on the S. E. side 
of the Wappatoo Island. 
On the S.W. side of Wappatoo Isl. 
On the main shore S.W. of Wap- 
patoo Island. 
On the S. W. side of Wappatoo Isl. 
"On the Col. on each side in dif- 
ferent villages, from the lower 
part of the Col. valley, as low 
as Sturgeon isl. and on both 
sides of the Coweliskee river. 
From the Clatsops of the coast 
along the S. E. coast for ma- 
ny miles. 

Places of abode not known. 



» A small brave tribe, on the large 
Prairies, on the Missouri. 

334 to ( On the R. Mountains near the 

346 ) RapidIndians,&W.ofthem. 
~ ( A general name given to the na- 

) tive tribes of New-Caledonia. 
r In one village on Stuart's Lake, 
on the W. side of the Rocky 
Mountains lat. 54° 30' N. Lon. 
334 i 125° W. opposite the heads of 
the Missouri. They have oth- 
er villages. The Atenas In- 
dians are in this neighborhood . 
337 to Tin New Caledonia, W. of Rocky 

347 I Mountains, on the northern 
346 ( border of the U. States. 



These tribes dwell along the 
coast S. of Columbia river, 
and speak the Killamucks 
language. 



Indians dwelling along the coast 
in succession, in the order they 
are mentioned, N. of Colum- 
bia river. 



372 



TABLE No. I.— CONTINUED. 



p*. 

03 

o ' Names of the tribes. 

II 



Whole 
No. of 
souls. 



Places of Residence. 



Clarkamees 

Skaddals 
Squannaroos 
Shallattoos 
Shanwappones 

Cutsahnim 

L ah anna 
Coopspellar 

Wneelpo 

Hihighenimmo 
Lartielo 

Skeetsomish 



Micksucksealton ) 
tribe of the > 
Tushshepah S 

Hohilpos, a ) 
tribe of do, \ 



Tushshepahs £z 
Ootlashoots 



1 



I Total No. W. of) 
Rocky M'ts. $ 



1,800 

200 
120 
100 
400 

1,200 

2,000 
1,600 

2,500 

1,300 
600 

2,000 

300 
300 

5,600 



171,200 



On a large river of the same 
name, which heads in Mount 
Jefferson, and discharges itself 
into the Wallaumut, 40 miles 
up that river on its N. W. side ; 
this nation has several villages 
[_ on both sides of the river. 
$ On Cataract river, 25 miles N. 
( of the Big narrows. 
{ On Cataract river, below the 
< Skaddals. 
On do. do. above the 

Skaddals. 
On the heads of Cataract and 

Taptul rivers. 
On both sides of the Columbia, 
above the Sokulks, and on 
the northern branches of the 
Taptul river, and also on the 
Wahnaachee river. 
On both sides of the Columbia, 
above the entrance of Clark's 
river. 

On a river which falls into the 
Columbia, N. of Clark's riv- 
er. 

On both sides of Clarke's river, 
from the entrance of Lastaw, 
to the great falls of Clarke's 
river. 

From the entrance of the Las- 
taw into Clarke's river, on 
both sides of the Lastaw, as 
high as the forks. 

At the falls of the Lastaw river, 
below the great Wayton Lake 
on both sides of the river. 
^On a small river of the same 
name, which falls into the 
Lastaw, below the falls, around 
the Wayton Lake, and on two 
islands in it. 

On Clarke's river, above the 
great falls, in the Rocky Moun- 
tains. 

On Clarke's river, above the 
Micksucksealtons,inthe Rocky 
Mountains. 

On a N. fork of Clarke's river 
in spring and summer, and in 
the fall and winter on the 
Missouri. The Ootlashoots is 
a band of this nation. 



Note. — For an account of all the Indians W. of the Rocky Mountains, see 
Report, p. 37 to 44, and Appendix from p. 328 to 344. 



TABLE No. I. CONTINUED. 



373 







Names of the tribes. 


o 

an 
<+« 
O 

6 

'Z 


iYlobilian, Tunica 
Do. Biloxi 


30 
20 


Do. Do. 


50 


Alabama 


1G0 


Paseagoula 
Do. Do. 


150 
80 
ou 


Do. Do. 


100 


Do. Choctaw 


1,200 


Do. Do. 


140 


Qua paw 

Chickasaw 


,<£oU 

100 


Do. 


70 


Cherokee 


120 


Delaware 


30 


Chatteau 


240 


Muscoga, Coshatta 


350 


Do. do. 


50 


Do. do. 


240 


Caddo Caddo 


450 


Do. Do. 


100 


Do. Natchitochy 


20 


Do. Adayes 
Do. Tetassee 
Do. Nadaco 
Do. Nabidacho 
Cadodache, Nacojr- ) 
dochet $ 


30 
40 
180 

60 


Do. Aise 


20 


Do. Texas 


230 


Do. Hini 


200 


Beedi, Beedi 


120 


Do. Keechi 


260 


Attacapas, Coco 

Towacanno ) 
Towcash, Tahuacana > 
or Tahuaya ) 


150 
1,200 


Panis towcash \ 


800 
400 



Places of Residence. 



Red River, 90 miles above the mouth. 

Do. Do. 
< Biloxi Bayou, 15 miles above its 
( junction with the river Nechez. 
( Alabama B. 10 miles above its 
( junction with the Nechez. 
Red River, 166miles above the mouth. 

Do. Do. 
Red River, 320 miles above the mouth. 
Biloxi Bayou 15 miles above its 
junction with the Nechez. 
Waters of Sabine and Nechez rivers. 
Red River near Nanatsoho or Pe- 
can Point. 
Waters of Washita. 
Do. 

Nacogdoches waters of Augilina or 

branch after Nechez. 
Red River, left side, 612 miles above 

the mouth. 

Do. two miles below the 

Cherokee village. 
Sabine river, 50 miles above the 

mouth. 

Red River, above Lake Bodeau 
and 510 miles above the mouth. 
Nechez, 40 miles above the mouth. 
{ Trinity river, 40 or 50 miles above 
} the mouth — two villages. 
Waters of Lake Ceodo of Red River. 
{ Red River, right bank near Nanat- 
( soho. 

i Adayes Bayou which enters the 
( Spanish Lake. 
Bayou Pierre of Red River. 
Sabine waters left side of the river. 

Do. Do. 
River Nechez. 
Augilina, 100 miles above its junc- 
tion with the Nechez. 
Do. intermixed with the Na» 



Nechez, at the junction of the Bay- 
on St. Pedro. 
Augilina river. 

( Trinity river, right side, 65 milesr 
I above the mouth. 
I Do. left side 125 miles above 
I the mouth. 
Trinity river. 

( Brassos river, 180 miles above the 
I mouth. 

( Brassos river, 24 miles above the 
i mouth. 

) Red River, 1,200 miles above the 
I mouth. 



374 



TABLE Ko. I.-— continued. 



Names of the tribes. 




Places of Residence. 



Tonkawa, Tonkawa 

C oronkawa 

Arrenamuses 

Carees 



Apaches, Lapanne 

i Comauch 
Comauch < J elan 

( Yamperack 



700«Erratic on the Bay of St. Bernardo. 

Erratic on the St. Jacinto river be- 
tween the Trinity and Brassos. 
120 St. Antonio river near the mouth, 
ofinn 5 ® n ^ e coas t between the Nuaces 
and the Rio del Norte. 
50Q j , Erratic between the Rio del Norte 
and the sources of the Nuaces. 
Erratic from the sources of the 
Brassos and Colorado to the sour- 
ces of Red River, Arkansaw and 
Misouri. 



RECAPITULATION. 



37o 



2,247 
5,184 
2,407 
28,380 
17,006 
65,122 
33,150 
101,070 
171,200 
45,370 

Remarks. 

The average proportion of Warriors to the whole number of souls, is about 
1 to 5. In some tribes it is more, in others less. In the tribes dwelling - among 
white people, the proportion is about 1 to 3. The number of men and women 
in the Cherokee nation is nearly equal. In the Menominee and Winnebago 
tribes, the women are a third more than the men. The number of children is 
much greater in proportion to the whole number of souls, in the two tribes 
last named, than in tribes mingled with white people. 

In Indian countries where hsh constitute an article of food, the number in 
each family is about six; in other tribes, where this article is wanting the av- 
erage number in a family is about five. 

In eight years the Winnebagoes increased, according to the account given 
by respectable Traders among them, from 3,500 to 5,800. 



Estimate of the proportion between men and women, (from respectable authority.) 





Men. 


Women. 




Cherokee?, 




qual. 




Winnebagoes, 


900 


1,300 




Menominees, 


- 600 


900 




Proportion of Warriors to the who. 


'e number. 






Warriors. 


Whole JVo. 


Proportion 


Indians S. of Red River. 


13,229 


46,370 


about 'Si 


Winnebagoes, 


900 


5,800 


eh 


Menominees, 


- - 600 


3,900 


ci 


Indians in Ohio, - 


753 


2,257 


3 


Missouri, 


7,560 


30,000 


4 


On the W. side of the Reeky Mountains, 




- 6 



Fishery. — About 40 miles from the mouth of the Columbia river is a famous 
smelt and sturgeon fishery. Also abundance of Wapatoe, a species of potatoe, 
an excellent substitute for the real potatoe. The smelts are taken from the 
middle of March to the middle of April, and at no other time. They are fat 
and of good flavor. The Indians dry and run a stick through a number of them 
and use them in the place of candles. When lighted at the top, they burn to 
the bottom, giving a clear and bright light. 

Capt. Winship^s Establishment. — Within a few miles of the spot above men- 
tioned, Capt. Winship of Boston, in the spring of 1810, attempted to make, a 
permanent establishment. A difference arose between him and the Indians, 
and after erecting a building, he was obliged to decamp. This building wa? 
afterward carried away by a flood. 



Indians in New-England, - 
New-York, - 

Ohio, .... . 

Michigan and N. W. Territories, 
Illinois and Indiana, - 
hi Southern States E. of the Mississippi, 
West of Mississippi and N. of Missouri, 
Between Missouri and Red River, 
West of the Rocky Mountains, 
Between Red River and Rio del Norte, 



37<3 



TABLE No.II. 



§.3 

O o 



O S 
Si 

CO 

>> <y 

^3 



>> bp 
2 ° 

o o 

^ 0 

CO O 

5"gg 



CO 0) 

* t/5 

Cd £ 

o M 

rl CO 

ft 2 

§ J 

■*-> 

5 t3 



*3 



III 

5 S ■»> 
p2 3 cu 

-tj r=i cn 

_ > M 

P « 



'I & 

11 



jl 



'•S « 



-II 

■2 s . 



e-»< 



S • 

o 





-*1 




CO 




GO 


ed 


GO O 


o 




<*-. 
o 





s » 

S3 Q 

il 



O g £n 

cd £ r0 
_ ^ C- 



o « o5 
cd cd 

S.*8 u 



o © 

§ CO 



GO © 
CO © 
CO © 
CO k£J 



■2 £ 



"g cd © 
| J 3 

o a 
2 0 



O k 

• rj <u s; 



•5 & i 



'V 

f 8 
~5 



T3 

M >? ^ 

all 

o c 3 
° <£ 

0 ^ © 

O co 



o 



Hi 



83 

lO go 



5 S 

~ ."tn 



© © © 

888 



© © © 
888 



© © 

8 *o 



fl S3 
J § 

O ^C! o 

° •£ •& 

0< 0^ i-< 



§3 ? 

cd ** 



© © © 
© © © 
© © © 

CO C O CO 



qj w y 
<D 

0 



377 



C <n 



CO CO 
CO GO 

O O O CD GO 
LO © © CO GO 

GO GO 



GO CD 
O GO O CO 

© co © co 

© GO O co 
LO GO © CO 
CO iO CO 



© CO CO GO 

© CO CO GO 

© CO CO GO 

© CO CO CO 



n. 

s g.2 



© © © © 
© © © © 

CO ^ © LO 



3 CO • 

p cj ^ 



PmCJ 
Eh © 



co © 

CD © 
CO © 



© 

© I 

© 

© 

LO I 



CO CO GO 

- CO GO 

CO GO 

CD CO 




eS 

> 03 

r ^ 

CO 



a« 

co ,JD 



3 



3 

»-» co co O 

LO © © 05 
^ 0< 5-i n 



co 



GO CD 

GO ■§ 

CO CO 

CO I CO 



5 >^£^ 
5 § | S 1 

m S jj * j 
O ». s» cu ♦ 

o ^ 



till 



I I I 



2 3 S S 

S3 S3 S3 S3 

S3 S3 03 03 
ci 03 

>■ t> 

> > O O 

& * 5 5 

^ 5 6 

GO GO © © 



S 'r3 S3 
5M S3 



CO CO 
• CO CO 



CO 
CO 



GO CT> 
1 CO I CO 

I <H I I— j 



S3 co m co 

CO Si t£ H 

. S3 03 cS 

' 03 0) — ' CO 

. Pm 



S3 co S3 ra 

CO Si CO Jh 

fl 03 S3 o3 

S3 co2 



S3 S3 S3 S3 
CO 0) CO CJ 

S3 S3 S3 S3 



§'3 

O S3 



© © © © 
I © © © © 

© © 53 o 

GO O^ © 



§§83 

"O © © © 
fH I-H CO © 



ft 
S CO 



CO 



Q 3 



Is : ■ 



co 52 £j 43 



O O 



48 



378 



PQ 



Total amount 
of capitals. 


50,000 
6,666 663 
33,333 33i 
100,000 


Ncs -in «3 Hb Mrs e*a -4n 
CO GO CO CO CO CO CO GO 
CO CO CO CO CO CO CC GO 

COGO CO COCOCO COCO 
) CO GO CO COCOCO coco 

r 

coco co coocco" COGO 
i-H i—i co t- GO 


1,772,500 


Total am't 
of annui- 
ties. 


3,000 
400 
2,000 
6,000 

1 300 


1,000 
200 

1,000 

1,000 
500 
4,000 

1,000 
2,000 


106,350 | 


Total am't of 
permanent 
capitals 


cJtn Hn «W e*j «W -to «n win Hn 
CO GO CO CO CO GO CO CO CO 
COCO" ' CO ' CO CO GO CO coco 

O CO CO CO CO CO GO CO CO GO 
© CO GO CO CO CO GO CO CO GO 
OCOGO , , «5 , CO COCOCO <©SO 

O CO CO CO co coccco" coco" 

U5GO ri th CO GO 


Ha 
CO 
CO 

CO 

r- 

CO 


Total amount 
of limited 
capitals 


100,000 
5,000 

3,333 33* 


1,094,1 66,66 8 J 


Periods during which 
they are payable 


16 Nov. annually 
do. do. 
do. do. 
24 Oct. do. 

16 Nov. do. 

29 Sept. do. 
26 April, qr. yearly 

24 Aug. annually 

on, or before the 1st 
Aug. annually 
30th Sept. annually 
3 October, do. 

3 August annually 
29 Sept. do. 

Dolls.. 


Termination of 
limited an- 
nuities. 


Oct. 24, 1826 

j 


Terms of an- 
nuities. 


permanent 
do. 
do. 
20 years 

during life 

permanent 
during life 

permanent 

permanent 
do. 
do. 

permanent 
do. 


Am't of 
annu- 
ities. 


3,000 
400 
2,000 
6,000 

300 


11,700 


1,000 
200 
1,200 


1,000 


1,000 
500 
4,000, 


5,500 


OOIO 
OOO 

o o © 

i-^ sT GO 


1 . 

1 


Names of Indians, or 
Indian Tribes. 


Choctaws 
Do. - 
Do. - 
Do. - 

Do. (2 medal chiefs $150 
each) 

Senecas - - - 
Young King (a chief) 

Quapas - 

Delawares 

Do. - - 
Do. 

Shawanees 
Do. - 

Carried forward. 



379 





cji« -to ato 
CD GO CO 
CO GO CO 


-■■to Ho cqo No 
CO GO CO CO 
CO GO CO CO 


-in sp no e*a 
GO CO CO CO 
CO CO CO CO 


NO 
CO 
CO 


Total am( 
of capita 


1,772,500 
16,666 
13,333 
16,666 
25,000 


CO CO CO CO 
CO GO CO CO 
CO GO. CD CO 
CO GO" CD CO~ 


8,333 
4,166 
4,166 
1,666 


16,666 


Total a'mt 
of annui- 
ties. 


106,350 
1,000 
800 
1 000 
1^00 


1,000 
800 
1,000 
1,000 


o o o o 

U5 rn 


1,000 1 



a . 



, 

GO CO GO O 

CO CO GO O 

GO CO GO ©, 

CO CO GO 1 to 

t- rH r-> Gi 



CO GO 
CO CO 
CO GO 
CO GO 



CO CO CO CO 
GO CO CO CO 
GO rH r— i CO 



S3 Pr< 
5 9. «d 



O r3 

Eh 



73 >v 
O V 



53 • . . . 
S3 O © o 
S3 73 73 73 



|° £ "ft d 

<J 25 co 



I" 



<1 25 co 



£2 d o © 
g 73 73 73 



IS . 

S 73 CD 
<J CO 

GO rH O O 

G-j GO CO 



bo 

<2 3 



S3 

^ O) 5) 
J l I 
co 



CO 



©H 

© 

CO 



o.S 
5 S3 



S3 
<u 

S3 . 

3 d 

g 73 



S3 

en © 
H S3 



S3 S3 S3 S3 

© <U 4) © 

Sj S3 S3 S3 

co co co co 

sags 



S3 -P 



o © o o 
' © © © © 

© CO © to 



© I [ c © © 

j i t-h th' r-T 



I© © © © 
© © © - 
© CO © 



© © © © 

© LO to © 
iO ©* rn 



© © 

2 8 



o 

S3 
O co 



s 



S j? d d d 
O 



© 

ft; © d d 



o o o 
QQfl 



380 



o 

PQ 
< 



S.-g 



O on 
S3 !ti 

- 2 3 

Ch 0 S3 

3 a 



2 £ " 

3 |£ 

+-> On © 
O 



O © 

o o 0 



£ 3 ©' 
© ^ 

II 



S3 

ill 



3 



CO CO 
CO CO 
CO CO 



co r! to? 



co o go co o 

CO O GO GO O 
CO © GO CO O 
CO ©"c© S0~O 



GO CO CO O SO 
GO CO O O GO 
GO ~ CO O CO 
CO ^ r-T u0 C3 



8 3 

GO 
CO 



00000 
00000 

O CO o ^ 0. 



00000 

% s3 2 co cc_ 



CO O CO CO o 
CO O CO CO o 
CO O GO GO O 

CO o co go" o" 

UO 




I I I I I 



© 

O 

b 



<^ CO © 



GO GO 



3 O O O O 

S3 r3 ^3 ^ 

S3 

fcjD S2-i+j . 

!=r • © © 0 



— 

© 

DO 



S3 S3 S3 fl A 

o © © £> © 

S3 S3 S3 fl S3 

eS oi ej- g 

s s s s s 

© 3 © a) © 

P-i Ph Ph Oh Ph 



S3 S3 S3 S3 S3 

CO 53 a> © © 

S3 S3 S3 2 S3 

cj a nj I s9 

s g s i| 

3 © © © © 

fL, Pi P-( Pi Ph 



O IO ' r: 
O <5D Ui m 



OOOOO 

?,sl22g 



1 c 



bo 

< 

-£3 



i'c 
Si 



1 1 1 1 1 — 

8 



O ed 
© ^ 

I 










1 1 I 1 1 
1 1 1 1 I 


iamies) 


, Illinois 
ied forwi 


Miamies 
Do. - 
Do. - 
Do. - 
Do. - 

1 


Weas, (M 
Do. 
Do. 
Do. 
Do. 


Kickapoos 
Am'ntcan 



381 



o o 



S'3 



32 

o d 

9 © 



o © 
o o 

GO O 



8 



O 0) m 



Is 

be rt aJ 

fl 03 r— t 

© ,£2 



'3 ST 

r 



73 

1 

3 
<1 





ally 


13 


13 


| 


annu 


annu 


d 
d 
d 

CO 






MO 


■t-j 

Oh 


<3 


Ju 


Jzq 


<D 

co 


GO 




t- 

T— 1 


o> 



III 



d 
<5 



S | 

Q) CO 

* a 



O 03 

d "3 

1 



8 "ill 



iO o 
o 

CO 



©ii 



? IS 

— -d t> Ar 
a d fl £ 2 

£13 



d 

© i 

co 

u 

o 

03 r. 
© fc -1 

© tn 

9* 

CO 



5J 

III 

I'll 

o ' >j> P-r 



• © 

cd xl 
"© "*"' 



© 



d ^ 
d 



O oT 
1 1 



© ."t3 

s § 

CO ep , 
aj en 

ill 
* * a 

«i ? ^ 
. c 

CO X ^ 



382 




383 



• fcJD ^ 

s-s 

>> 5 « g 

g ^ ff5 ,2 

« 3 a « 
a * a 

8"-g | .2 
a> cc o a 

f 

H Eh 



■5 » 



lO 


-o 


ct> 


o 


CO 




O 




to 


CO 


CO 


CO 


t> 




O 


o 


o 


O 


CO 


CD 


o 


o 


o 














CO 




co~ 


o 




ccT 






o 


GO 


CD 


CO 






CO 


o 


CC^ 


© 


CO 






T— 1 




©f 


ccT 



« 2 



2 8 

la 5 s . 

« 3 -22 3 

rt « o eu • 



G 

.2 

re' 
JZ5 



re re Sh 

sis 4 

g to to re 

? d) (1) OJ 



CO 
- £h- 

£ O 

O 



!> 

tO o 
to O CO 
CD - CO t-< 

• 2 O 

<! « ^ .13 -c 

i0 § ^ "S 



a a> 

£1 



fcJO 
CO 



384 



o 

PQ 
- 




f 6 

to 



Si 

B CO 



re a? 



- 1 



S « « 

.2 

c 

o 

g* !» CJ 

3" .2 .c 



42 O 
|^ 

C3 CO 

© '3" 

ca 'a 
Q 



o 
c 

G 



o o 

CO "O 



en 



S3 . 

„ bJO O 
tn S3 ^3 

§25 



T3 bC 
3 P 

& < 

3 T-1 



G _G 

O O 
C GO 



— o 
fa 



OfJ O 

go 
S3 



aa 3 
5 ^ 



385 



-G S -G £2 

© C/2 .5 CO 
r- -G 

t. "o "a ^ 
• 2 C a) 

<d a> cy 



12 {>> 



„ cy 
- > o 



5 -a S 



o 

G C 

Q.2 

o cy 

i-s ° 

S3 " 

-G 13 ^ 

• , CD > 

w cy - H 

o 



G 

.2 

* CU 



Si* 



as -G 



6 o ■« 

r< 05 CD 
-5 - fl 

a 

S3 



"o 



"81 



-2 

5! O D 

cy o ^ 



to CO 



ss.g 
£ s 



o 







to 


m 


xn 




cy 


<§ 


cy 


a> 




0) 


CD 


0) 


cy 






M 


p« 




X 


o 


o 


o 


o 




m 


S-i 


u 


s 


<y 




O) 


<v 


_o 


-a 




-G 


-G 


CO 


O 


O 


a 


O 




CO 

o ^2 
»-3 m 



o 

o 

S • a £ 



«5 t- as G>< 



HO 
~ CO 

a *-« 

jji ,-G 
s ^ 



49 



386 



0) S 



^ .2 "2 g 
jw 3*35 § 

§ I'm 1 

o <u* o 

H a & 

^ a • 

S ^ 
<U '3 -O 

u .22 43 '3 

>» a — 

3. -5 cs o 



I 

o 

is 

<u u. a 
« c 5 

C *° 

re S-r CJ 

bc-o -a 
c c 7* 

PQ 



o a) • • 



2 ^ £ w 5 
§•§ 2 J 43 

0 - « S T 

*~ o j» 
S3 3 ^ o 3 

43 © § 

SJ £ S g 

^72 * S I 
jg CO « S3 *S 



6 i 



.2 

co 

CO 
<V 

o 

2 « 

-£ 
a u 

o © 
c © 



5 iS .8 O 



o 

w 

< 



■$% 
■9 .3 

CO 

CD 
IP 



3 - 

Ed 
a 



>» .-3i 



1§ 

© GO 
•3 ^ 



O. 

© qT 

s ^ 

CO * 

•SSS 



© .2 cm' 

co 3 O 
^ g CO 

« .© o 



0) 



2 

is 



o 

„ CO 



^ *j *> t» 3. CO 

co g« 5- 
fa Cfa s 



o 

c ^ 

S3 03 

C3 

u . 

Eh "S 

o 



387 




8 8 




3 



! 1 

CO 

3 s S 

o £ 

<D <U « O 

*3 ft S +j 

£ ft ^ 



o 

<s o 



o 

ft 



s 1 

-CO H 

§^ 

% CO) s- ?h 

o o 



CO 

CO CO 
1-1 T-t 

e* • - co 
pq ^ ^ 

# 33 OD 



ary's, 
Oct. 1! 




ary's, 
h Sept 






5:1 














to 


do 




.CO 



CO 
CO 

%™ 



38S 




3* 



w cs 



Of <"0 



bt) ' 

o 



^3 . 



. 22 § 



° 8 

* 2 



'u S o 
c S a> 

.2 -J £ c 

CJrQ fee 
° ^ ° 
C 

© 

5 '35 
fe» ^ o 1/3 



(u ■"12 



" r3 

W3 — * 
C 

53 t_ 

w o 



o c 

CO ai 



a 
o 



CO 



o 

►J 

< 



o 


o 


as 


o 


CO 


o 


CO 


o 




o 






©~ 




HO 


co" 


CD 


cn> 


CO 


CO. 


GO 






©~ 


l> 






co 










389 




ft*. ^ 



rG « 

£ a 

pG 



a co 1 a) 
■S g cs v 



cy 



pfl pt3 m 



5 1) <D O 



.2 Eh 2 Ol 

G 



§1 



-sss 

.G -G , 

„ o ~G3 

Eh *5 ^3 



I Id 

cy 
43 



" <=> .2? Eh 

" G3 o « 

"S E^^ 
* Ph* 

cy 

> - 



03 



cy 
.tS E- 



co w 



G Eh 



«o co cy 



'2 -iS ,C 



G a <— 

pG •~ l Ph f J3 g 

« bn I. ^ ss>~- 

G S .w 

O 2 Q) 

pG g pG 



•5 -S ^- O 



cy ^i-i 
Eh 

co « 

C ^ 

G -*-> 



O ^ C5 

'CpSpG 

cy w 

a- £ '43 



G 



S CO 

I- 

Oh 



ppawa 

kapoos of Ver- 
ilion 


kapoos 


awas&Chippaw; 


3 .2 a 


Kic 


O 








oaganau, ^ 
24th Sept. 1819 < 

Fort Harrison, < 
30th Aug. 1819 J 


Edwardsville, 1 
July 30th, 1819 < 


Saut of St. Marie, ] 
June 16, 1820. < 



390 



So 

co 

bp g 
£ 3 



~ » --a ^ 
re « 



S 2 



a> S3 

c C5 

I* 

X2 O 



„ C 

cp 

E-< -o 



a w 



CP 



re 

— . co « n 



_ a 

re cp 

a 



CP 



•- 1 ^ 

_ c 

S CO 

a « 



PQ 



S s s £ 3 • 
^ fa 



co 

a 



3 .il 

re ^ i=0 
D- o re a 

g- ™ S a 
C > re ^ 

Jfa 

re 2 4) « 
cp 

0 £ . 

CO X CO 

*5 re oj fci 

co o s a *■"' 

. 0 qu, re cp 

£d .2 <*- -C 
co j;j O O 



-C re 



3 



re £ 
22 « 

re 



6 

1^6 ^ 



co 3 
3 o ^ 



3 0 

re ©•* 
£2 



go 



3 

'-5 CO 
a 



391 



o 

W 
CO 

H 



£ 3 3 
^£ J 

■a 'S 

S3 cs 53 

rt TO- 
SS 53 0) 
e3 O 5TJ 

•wo a u 
O <u «■ 

CO 55 .£> 
3 CD w 

-o tLJ 



g.S to 



g « £ 

So § 

""S3 

2 m 

S *f O 

03 £ 

5 



S3 ft 



m ft. 



- -55 ^ 
<0 pi, 0> 

O t«- o 

■ rt <u >r- 

."53 J2 53 

a 

-i S o 



GO U5 GO 

52 (o m o o o 

CO CO CO o o © 

GO CO CO © iO LO 
00 -v-h GO © iO 
rH GO 



GO © 
GO r-< 
GO 



© © 

© U5 

t ~ cc 

^ 22 

LO GO 



88 



© © © © 

_ © © © '-O 
© © © GO CO © O 

*" © <>r go gT 



© "O 

UO G-> 
<^.G0 
^© 
t- co 



GO © CO OS © ©♦ rj* 

g4 G>» R» <^ GO GO GO 
CO CO CO 00 CO CO CO 



o o o o o 

<r3 "73 ^3 ^3 cd 



o 

13 



53 
£3 

53 

6 6 d 6 
QQQfifi<2 

3 



« ft 

•t5 CO 
S " 

CO CD 

.2 3 

.tn 53 

li 
11 

• 53 a) 



.a 5 

S O -3 53 



w 
2! 

15 ft"5 «j — 

-2 .a 2? 3 



ft C5 ^ 

0 « So. 



GO 



° - 0) o 



GO 



£ <£ o - h 
cS CD ^ S 

J* - ^ftl 

^ or .a t "1 

o5 ~ © jo 
3 s *T 00 - c © 
-Q . ^ ^ J) 

0 d 2 ©.a 2 

^ftSa^l 

2 2 r° <*- ftO 

1 ° ^tf 

^'^ it §4 

ft| 

rt Til £ 

O g co 13 § 5 



CD O 



<1 



5 - o o 

d ^ J d Pi 
S3 -5 § ft M)^ 



53 

1 co £ 



525 §Si3 a 

ftr-i (Xi i 



392 



d ^ 

<u &< ™ 

^ -s 

<D > c« 
a O c 

log 

£ 03^ 

<" 



525 



5s ^ 



S3 5-1 




A 1 1 &4 . 



IT 

i_ 03 



o 

CO ^ 

-'1 ■ 



I ® 



■> r 



• IB ™ S3 

£ > o s c 

o z; 



* ^ 03 J- 



O O 

S 2 
S Sod 



£ „- 

Ci 03 
co •-- 1 




393 



3 S 1 1| 
s « ° * 1 



-H ^ 3 

o o g 
o o ^ 



2:2 



0> o 

to-*- 1 

O ,£3 



l-a 



I S g-sl I 4 

g £ co O W o 



^3 

a 



o 

< o S 



b» O __ 

5 a * 



a Q 

,© i""> 



I § f <§ I § 2 

£ g S gW^ op 

J.s fcsJSi 

C a CO 43 U co 



h3 S 



C3 2 "o 'C 
^ ^ hS S ^ 



a o 42 

so S 

£ ©CO 



r4 




CO 



2 u 
o o 
co co 



% a u 



•gco 



£ a 



a „ . 

o © >• 



o © 

O r-T 



©^ 
O CO 




50 



394 



& 5 E -a B 



3 © g-s 

t»5 fa © ?S 

111.2 

"lis 



^3 c 
P 'g 



Ed © • 

<D '-3 .£ 

a> cJ * 

=1 S3 

§2° 
fa 

cn ^ <u 
« ^ -5 



u cs e 
-73 rs > 



ho aj k .g S3 

i -gf Jnig 

,g fa « " £ 3 ;D - 

'53 S o 



CP F <p i^j 



3 o 



S3^ff til 

Q) P 



§ £ 

lafl 
<« ? > m 

Eh 



CO 



o £ 

£ <L> CO 



t a 



5 



0 ce 



S o 
" ft 

Ph 
S3 3 

s 03 

1*1 
£1 




_ o 

S3 § 

I s 



S3 ~ 
2 ^ 



•is 



.s ,2-3 

fa 13 2 



S3 . 

it 

S S3 
cS « 



— (Do 

s c " 



o 00 



MAY 191950 



395 



<4 



x 2 a a £ 

8? 3 J 3 -2 

© -*3 ° S^f 

I Of § ^5 
a) cj 




35 'te * 

ST ^ 



o 
o 



8 



' o 



S3 m 

-a § s 

a> cd a> 

+-> a H 



^2 



3S 



5M0 
Pi 




1 Q 



396 



3 3 



~ 3 ~ ~ ~ ?~> § ^ a * 

Z'9-l ■= - > i 1 = 

go - 1 1 s * a I 'i'S-a 
1 3 js ; ^ s -3 ■g u'5 s s 

STMSf-a^-S s S.I.S I 

i eS -»-> 3 © c 3 g " 3 !3 <u £ ^ '"S 



• « • J— oi 



X 3 

So 

| 3 



5 o 

25 -s 



T3 -2 



n 



I 3 s 



c * 

It 



5' £~ £ 

o a i o 

'— i "5 3 >-i K. 

° ' t^X* 

6 ,2 3 3 

ri . = ^ - i 

-2 s ? « § 



ll| 

-3 5 = 
» i» -2 
13 =f' * 
*3 5 o 

0 2 « 

I. S ri 
=5 ± ^ 
3 ^ -> 

^3 * 
^-3 3 

3 

^5 — w 
-3 .=£"2 

2 S.S 

Oh x - 

3 O 2 

?S* ® .2 

c S a 

o >-> ^ 

£ 2 - 
1-1 

E91 
3 "so 

III 

§ ft 



1 i g 



» > s 
_J-3 ± 



g J2 3 
0 o g< 

* I 3 

3 3 3 . 
3 . 0) 

* 2-2 a 

2:2-? S 



3 a- ° 
co ST §3 fl 

t- r3 



MM 1 



g'S, 

si 
££ 

II 

B 53 

|1 



is 



be £ 



•8 a 



51 § 



5 

f 'a 
2 ^ 



SI 



'a 

a "S 



~ 53 
2?! ~- ^, 



397 


By the Pot-ta-wat-ta- 
me nation. 


0- chip-pe-wa, 
Sau-kie,* 
rfus-quah-kie,* 
svick-ah-poo, 
Poo-tah-wat-tah-me, 
Ot-taw-wa, 
iNot-to-wis-sie, 
Mo-no-me-ne, 
Win-e-ba-i-go, 

1- ho-wa. 


By the Kick-ka-poo 
nations. 


0- chip-pe-wa, 
Sau-kie,* 
Vfus-quah-kie,* 
tiick-ah-poo, 
Poo-tah-wat-tah-me, 
Ot-taw-wa, 
Shah,* 

:VJo-no-me-we, 
Win-e-ba-i-go, 

1- ho-wa, 


By the Fox nation. 


Chip-pe-wa, 

Sau-kie,* 

Mus-quah-kie,* 

Kick-ah-poo, 

Poo-tah-wat-tah-me, 

Ot-taw-wa, 

Shah* 

Mo-no-me-ne, 
Win-e-ba-i-go, 
I-ho-wa. f 


By the Sauk nation. 


0- chip-pe-wa, 
Sau-kie,* 
Mus-quah-kie,* 
Kick-ah-poo, 
Poo-tah-wat-tah-me, 
Ot-taw-wa, 
Shah,* 

Mo-no-me-ne, 
Win-e-ba-i-go, 

1- ho-wa. 


By the Chip-pe-wa na- 
tion. 


0- chip-pe-wa, 
Sau-kie, 
Ot-tah-gah-mie, 
Kick-ah-poo, 
Poo-tah-wat-tah-me, 
Ot-tah-wa, 

Op-po-on, ; 
Mo-no-me-ne, 
Win-e-be-go, i 

1- ho-wa, 


53 „ 




Names of Indian r: 
as generally kno' 
mong Americans 
Europeans. 


Chip-pe-wa, 

Sauk, 

Fox, 

Kick-a-poo, 
Pot-ta-wat-ta-mi< 
Ot-ta-wa, 
Sioux, 

Me-no-me-nie, 

Win-e-ba-go, 

lo-wa. 




a . 
£•2 



J § 

PQ 



S3 

a 

U 



O i 0) • n 



2 3 . r-H * 

S o' S ffl S td 5 



Q) O 

•a ^ 
a 4> t 

v I I CO 

#„ O <U 

? S3 A 
43 fc2 > 43 



feJO 



.2 
'3 

« i 

c* >r i 43 
43 A g ss 

43 « X X! 

S o «? ^ 



a 
■ 

-43 



05 



CD 



p r or | 43 5 j 1 ? 



S 43 



"3 V-g 

1 sr-g a 



M 9 



of oT p 



O 02 



A^ i 5 i ? ci A 



rr > 398 

Moors Indian School. 

This School commenced at the close of the year 1754, at 
Lebanon, in Connecticut. In its infancy, Mr. Joshua Moor, a re- 
spectable farmer in Mansfield, (Con.) made the first donation to it, 
of a school house and two acres of land ; for this donation his 
name was given to the institution. 

In 1763, the funds of the school had increased, so as to give 
support to twelve Indian youths, of the Mohawk, Delaware, 
Mohegan and Naraganset tribes. 

In 1767, Rev. Nathaniel Whitaker, of Norwich (Con.) visited 
Scotland, in behalf of this school ; and under the sanction of the 
Society in Scotland for propagating Christian Knowledge, he col- 
lected for its funds, =£2,256.15.6 Sterling. Beside this, <£7,363 
sterling had been collected in England, and paid to Dr. Wheelock, 
previous to his death, and by him expended in the erection of 
buiidings for the school, and for other purposes relating to its in- 
terests. 

The monies collected in Scotland, were deposited in the Treas- 
ury of the above named Society, in trust, where the principal has 
ever since remained, under their own direction, with a pledge " to 
take the most effectual methods to secure the application of the 
income of this fund, to the great and godlike design of spreading 
the gospel among the benighted heathen in North America." 

In 1770, the School was removed from Lebanon to Hanover ; 
and, though a separate institution, was destined to grow up under 
its wing. In 1787, the Society, for the purpose of a more conven- 
ient management of the affairs of the School, appointed a cor- 
responding Board in Boston, to act as their Agents. Through this 
Board the income of the Moor's School Fund has been, with sev- 
eral interruptions, transmitted to the President of the School, and 
expended by him in the support of Indian youth, who have suc- 
cessively been brought from their respective Tribes, and educa- 
ted here. The number educated has been considerable, and 
many of them have made a good use of their privileges. — For 
several years, the operations of this School have been suspended. 



S9Q 



A letter from John Ross, Esq. Post-Master, a Cherokee Chief, to 
David Brown, a Cherokee youth at Cornwall School. 

Rossville, Cherokee Nation, July 13th, 1822* 

Mr. D. Brown, 

Dear Sir, — Yours of the 10th of June last, came to hand a few 
days since. It gives me pleasure to hear that you enjoy good 
health, as well as those of your Cherokee friends there ; but I 
feel sorry to hear that Mr. Jno. Ridge has not recovered from the 
disease with which he has been so long afflicted — but as it cannot 
be efficacious for man to say unto him, " Take up thy bed and 
walk ;" therefore his situation can only be confided to Him, who 
hath the healing power. 

The pamphlet, containing the letter of Mr. Lewis to a member 
of Congress, on Indian civilization, which the Rev. Mr. West- 
brook had the goodness to send me, has been received, — for which 
you will please to return him my sincere thanks. To reflect se- 
riously on the condition of the Indian Tribes inhabiting the conti- 
nent of America, and to review the miserable fate which has be- 
fallen and swept into wretchedness and oblivion the numerous 
Tribes that once inhabited the country bordering on the Atlantic, 
is enough to make the remnant of those Tribes, who are now en- 
compassed by the white population, shudder. Yet I cannot be- 
lieve, that the Indians are doomed to perish in wretchedness, 
from generation to generation, as they are approached by the 
white population, until they shall be annihilated from the face of 
the earth. Surely there are motives and feelings daily engender- 
ing, in the minds and hearts of the citizens of the U. States, which 
have never been heretofore pursued, or even felt, by them towards 
the Aborigines of this vast continent. The small experiment 
made by the exertions of benevolent societies, through their faith- 
ful missionaries, has awakened the American people to a sense of 
what might be done to better the condition of the Indian race. 
Under such circumstances, when the Indians are themselves seen 
to manifest a thirst to reach after the blessings and happiness de- 
rivable from civilized life, I cannot believe that the United States 
Government will still continue to pursue the luke-warm system of 
policy, in her relations with the Indians, as has hitherto been adop- 
ted, to effect the purpose of removing nation after nation of them 
from the lands of their fathers into the remote wilderness, where 



40b 



their encroachments on the hunting grounds of other Tribes has 
been attended with the unhappy consequences of quarrels, wars, and 
bloodshed. — Has not this been the result of the removal of part 
of our own nation to the Arkansaw ? Yes 1 the uplifted tomahawk 
is now wielding, and the scalping knife is unsheathed, between the 
Arkansaws, Cherokees and the Osages, for the horrid destruction of 
each other. Let the American people look to the prominent causes 
which have led to these unhappy consequences, and they will not 
fail to see it in the system of policy pursued by their government 
towards those wretched and oppressed people, in removing them 
from the lands of their inheritance, where the bones of their an- 
cestors have mouldered into dust for ages. I repeat, when all 
these circumstances are combined, and taken into serious consid- 
eration, I hope and trust that the General Government will aban- 
don that policy, and adopt a system of amelioration, under which 
those remnants of Tribes may flourish, and become happy. As 
respects our own nation here, I could willingly say, that in case the 
United States deem it inexpedient to apply a part of her treasure 
towards promoting our civilization, &c. and would but let us re- 
main in the peaceable and quiet possession of our country, that 
our own exertions, together with those of our benevolent mission- 
aries and friends, would, in time, testify to the world, that Indians 
are endowed with mental capacity fully adequate to receive the 
highest branches of temporal and spiritual improvements, under 
the influences of civilized life. The subject embraces too exten- 
sive afield for reflection, to be discussed in a hasty letter; you will 
excuse me for wandering therein, as far as I have done. 

I have no news of moment to communicate. — I was at your fa- 
ther's house when your brother's funeral sermon was preached by 
Rev. Mr. Potter. — Tender my best respects to our Cherokee 
friends at Cornwall. Yours affectionately, Jno. Ross. 

The above is a genuine, unaltered letter from the subscriber of 
it, written in a superior style of penmanship. The sentiments it 
contains are deserving the most serious consideration. 

THE END. 

No. of pages in R,eport - 96 

Do. do. Appendix - 400 496 Total. 




ERRATA. 

In the absence of the Author, the following errors escaped cor* 
rection. 

Page 9 of the Report, line 17 for other read others. 

236 Appendix, 16 dele, " Their number is no 

where stated." And in the following line, dele — / know not how 
many, nor what is their state and character. 

Page 316 Appendix, line 6, — After the words, for both, add, 
The means of supporting it would be ample. Beside, large funds 
&c. 

Page 375 Appendix, at bottom of line 10, add, Total, 471,136. 
376 line 1 — After 1820, put a comma in place 

of the period, and a small f, instead of a capital, in the following 
word from. In the 2d line, after the word Congress, put a period, 
and let the next word, these, begin with a capital. 
Page 397 Appendix, line 1 — for bodies read borders. 

2 — for by each other, read to each 

other, 





■4* <lN 



,* 4 <3o 




v 





Y * 0 /- ^ 



4 <L.N 








V 




V a. ^ * 0 A ^ 











^0 



V ^ Y * 0 ^ *% V ^ ^ * o , 



5 I 




